Lup STD Spec 2009

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD
SINGAPORE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR
LIFT UPGRADING WORKS
(2009 EDITION)
LUP09/IND.DOC(1)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
Published by Housing & Development Board, Republic of Singapore. No part of this document may be reproduced or
copied in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of the publisher.
LUP09/IND.DOC(2)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS
INDEX
PAGE
SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS GS 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2 PILING TS 2-1
SECTION 3 RESERVED TS 3-1
SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE TS 4-1
SECTION 6 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION TS 6-1
SECTION 8 FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SYSTEM TS 8-1
SECTION 11 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE TS 11-1
SECTION 12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK TS 12-1
SECTION 13 ROOFING TS 13-1
SECTION 14 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF TS 14-1
SECTION 15 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY TS 15-1
SECTION 16 IRONMONGERY TS 16-1
SECTION 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK TS 17-1
SECTION 18 METALWORK TS 18-1
SECTION 19 FLOOR FINISHES TS 19-1
SECTION 20 WALL FINISHES TS 20-1
SECTION 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING TS 23-1
SECTION 25 CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT TS 25-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
HDB, being a ISO 14001 certified organisation, is committed to be the leader in environment management. The details of
HDB's environmental policy can be found in the Corporate Philosophy at HDB Website http://www.hdb.gov.sg
LUP09/IND.DOC(3)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
-2-
INDEX
PAGE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
SECTION 26 TREE & SHRUB PLANTING AND TURFING TS 26-1
SECTION 30 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING) TS 30-1
SECTION 31 LIFT INSTALLATION/REFURBISHMENT TS 31-1
SECTION 32 GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS TS 32-1
SECTION 33 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE TS 33-1

EXTERNAL WALLS
SECTION 34 RECTIFICATION OF ALIGNMENT OF BUILDING ELEMENTS AND TS 34-1

STRUCTURAL REPAIRS
SECTION 35 SITE LANDSCAPING WORKS TS 35-1
SECTION 36 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER AND TS 36-1

OTHER MECHANICAL SERVICES INSTALLATION
SECTION 37 SANITARY INSTALLATION TS 37-1
SECTION 38 WATER INSTALLATION TS 38-1
SECTION 39 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION TS 39-1
SECTION 40 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION TS 40-1
SECTION 41 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION) TS 41-1
SECTION 43 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION TS 43-1/11
SECTION 44 DRY/WET RISING MAIN AND DOWN COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) TS 44-1
INSTALLATION
SECTION 45 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION TS 45-1
SECTION 46 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND TS 46-1

EXISTING ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS AND
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 47 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS TS 47-1
SECTION 48 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING TS 48-1
LUP09/IND.DOC(4)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
-3-
INDEX
PAGE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
SECTION 49 LIGHTNING PROTECTION TS 49-1
SECTION 50 MATV INSTALLATIONS TS 50-1
SECTION 51 SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING TS 51-1
SECTION 52 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION IN TS 52-1

GENERAL FOR EXCAVATION AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
SECTION 53 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR ROADS AND DRAINS TS 53-1
SECTION 54 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR SEWERS TS 54-1
SECTION 55 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTHWORKS TS 55-1
SECTION 56 APPENDICES TS 56-1
LUP09/IND.DOC(5)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
LUP09/IND.DOC(6)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENT
Page
1.1 General
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations GS 1
1.1.2 Payment of Employer's Bills, Expenses, etc GS 2
1.1.3 Insurance Policies GS 3
1.1.4 Stamp Duties GS 5
1.1.5 Novation, Assignment and Direct Submission of Warranties and Agreements GS 5
1.1.6 Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion GS 5
1.1.7 Indemnity Against Claims by Occupants GS 6
1.1.8 Provisional Sum GS 6
1.1.9 Prime Cost Sums GS 6
1.1.10 Overclaim Leading to Overpayment GS 6
1.1.11 Recovery of Legal Costs for Court Proceedings GS 6
1.1.12 Goods and Services Tax GS 7
1.1.13 Carriage by Sea GS 7
1.1.14 Bribery GS 7
1.1.15 Site Occupation GS 8
1.1.16 Works and/or Materials Warranty GS 8
1.1.17 Assessment of Extension of Time due to Exceptionally Inclement Weather GS 8
1.1.18 Research Work, Publicity Materials and Community Relations Activities GS 9
1.1.19 Contract Documents And Reference Materials On Site GS 9
1.1.20 Shortfall In Floor Area GS 9
1.1.21 Trade Subcontractors GS 10
1.1.22 Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS GS 10
1.1.23 Restriction On Use Of Project Information GS 11
1.1.24 Stand-By Plumber And Electrician For Restoring
Essential Services During Defects Liability Period GS 11
1.1.25 Audit Of M & E Systems GS 11
1.1.26 Protection Of Personal Data GS 12
1.1.27 Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic GS 13
1.1.28 Survey Of Neighbouring Works GS 13
1.1.29 Provision Of Respiratory Mask GS 13
1.2 Work Parameters
1.2.1 Maximum Allowable Working Period GS 14
1.2.2 Maximum Number of Workers for Works Within Flat GS 14
1.2.3 Working Hours GS 14
1.2.4 Maximum Allowable Noise Level GS 14
1.2.5 Site Conditions and Information GS 15
1.2.6 Joint Site Inspection GS 15
1.2.7 Use of Common Areas and Surrounding Estate GS 16
1.2.8 TOL Fee for Land outside Contract Boundary GS 16
1.2.9 Detailed Work Programme GS 17
1.2.10 Preservation of Trees GS 17
1.2.11 Earth Control Measures GS 19
1.3 Site Management

1.3.1 Site Management GS 21
1.3.2 Project Team GS 21
1.3.3 Employment Of Contractor's Site Personnel GS 22
1.3.4 Project Manager - Qualification/Experience/Responsibilities GS 23
1.3.5 Public Relations Officer - Qualification/Experience/Responsibilities GS 24
LUP09/IND.DOC(7)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
-2-
CONTENT
Page
1.3.6 Resrved GS 25
1.3.7 Standby Plumber and Standby Electrician - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities GS 25
1.3.8 Workplace Safety And Health Officer And Safety Supervisor GS 25
1.3.9 Environmental Control Officer GS 25
1.3.10 Assistant Environmental Control Officer GS 25
1.3.11 Reserved GS 26
1.3.12 Replacement Of Site Personnel GS 26
1.3.13 Compliance With Requirements And Submission Of Information Of Site Personnel GS 26
1.3.14 Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel GS 26
1.3.15 Application For Release Of Site Personnel GS 27
1.3.16 Superintending Officer's Decision GS 27
1.3.17 Employment of Workmen/Workmanship, Uniforms and Identification Badges GS 27
1.3.19 Monthly Progress Reports GS 28
1.3.20 Housekeeping Works GS 28
1.3.21 Pest Control and Surveillance GS 29
1.3.22 Warning/Notices of Works and Disruption GS 30
1.3.23 Temporary Notice Board With Aluminium Casing GS 31
1.3.24 Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts GS 31
1.3.25 Provision Oft Transport GS 31
1.3.26 Telephone Techniques Course for Public Relations Officer GS 31
1.3.27 Environmental Public Health Measures GS 32
1.3.28 Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements GS 33
1.3.29 Lift Upgrading Works Within Phase Of Works GS 33
1.4 Services, Utilities & Temporary Facilities

1.4.1 Cables/Services Detection GS 35
1.4.2 Diversion of Services GS 35
1.4.3 Disruption to Services, Utilities and Facilities GS 36
1.4.4 Existing Services Valves, Manholes, Etc GS 36
1.4.5 Site Layout Plan GS 37
1.4.6 Site Offices GS 37
1.4.8 Workers' Rest Area GS 39
1.4.9 Erection of Temporary Structures GS 40
1.4.10 Certificate of Supervision for Temporary Structures GS 40
1.4.11 Lightning Protection to Temporary Structures and Metal Structures GS 40
1.4.12 Water GS 40
1.4.13 Electricity GS 40
1.4.14 Cost of Water and Electricity GS 41
1.4.15 Computer Software and Hardware GS 42
1.4.16 Provision of Safety Helmets and Safety Boots GS 48
LUP09/IND.DOC(8)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
-3-
CONTENT
Page
1.4.17 Equipment for Defect Checking GS 48

1.4.18 Metal Detector GS 48
1.4.20 Temporary Sanitary Facilities for Staff and Workmen GS 48
1.4.21 Temporary Drainage System GS 49
1.4.22 Temporary Store Room for Lift Parts GS 49
1.4.23 Construction Access And Hoarding GS 49
1.4.24 Access Roads and Protective Crossings GS 53
1.4.25 Signboards GS 53
1.4.26 Gas Works GS 53
1.4.27 Information Centre and Infoline GS 54
1.4.28 Stationery for Employer's Officers GS 54
1.4.29 Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation GS 56
1.4.30 Compliance With The Technical Guidelines For Fire Safety GS 56
In Temporary Buildings In Construction Worksites
1.4.31 Use Of Existing Carpark/Motorcycle Lots Within The GS 56
Contract Boundary By The Contractor
1.4.32 Liaison With Town Council On Use Of Common Property GS 56
For Site Office And/Or Store
1.5 Work Methods

1.5.1 Work Methods for all Trades GS 58
1.5.2 Measurement Plan and Survey Method GS 58
1.5.3 Workshop Drawings and Samples GS 59
1.5.4 Part Removal or Demolition of Existing Structure GS 59
1.5.5 Demolition of Existing RC/Masonry Wall GS 59
1.5.6 Screen Wall GS 60
1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works GS 60
1.5.8 Protection of existing Structures Services and Properties GS 62
1.5.9 Care of the Works and Materials GS 62
1.5.10 Damage to Public/Private Property GS 63
1.5.11 Lifts and Transportation of Workers/Materials GS 63
1.5.12 Use of Mobile Work Platforms for External Facade Works GS 63
1.5.13 Bell System for Passenger/Material Hoist GS 63
1.5.14 Handheld Hacking Tools GS 63
1.5.15 Cutting of Steel Member GS 63
1.5.16 Pollution or Disturbance GS 64
1.5.17 Inspection of the Works GS 64
1.5.18 Equipment/Material Storage GS 65
1.5.19 Removal and Dumping of Debris, Surplus Materials, Etc GS 65
1.5.20 Cleaning of Public and HDB Maintained Roads and Drains GS 65
1.5.21 Cleaning Up on Substantial Completion GS 66
1.5.22 Rectification of Defects after Certification of Completion GS 66
1.5.23 Mechanical Mixer GS 66
1.5.24 Pasting of Translucent PVC Film at Affected Bedroom Windows GS 66
LUP09/IND.DOC(9)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
-4-
CONTENT
Page
1.6 Materials
1.6.1 Metric Components GS 67
1.6.2 Materials and Workmanship GS 67
1.6.3 Approval of Samples And Trade Names GS 67
1.6.4 Aggregates For Non-Concreting GS 69
1.6.5 PSB Quality Certificate GS 69
1.6.6 Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site GS 69
1.6.7 Approval for the use of Ready-Mixed Concrete GS 69
1.6.8 Colour of Works/Materials GS 69
1.6.9 Delivery and Preparation of Materials GS 69
1.6.10 Storage Facility for Cement GS 70
1.6.11 Supply Of Concreting Materials GS 70
1.6.12 Credit Terms and Conditions For Employer’s Materials GS 71
1.6.13 Ordering Materials GS 71
Appendix A10A GS 72
1.7 Labour
1.7.1 Labour Laws GS 80
1.7.2 Keeping Records Of Workmen GS 80
1.7.3 Employment Of Illegal Immigrants GS 80
1.7.4 Employment Of Skilled Tiler GS 80
1.8 Construction Equipment

1.8.1 Maintenance of Construction Equipment GS 81
1.8.2 Contractor's Construction Equipment GS 81
1.8.3 Movement of Construction Equipment GS 81
1.8.4 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone GS 81
1.8.5 Construction Equipment GS 82
1.8.6 Approved Construction Equipment GS 85
1.9 Safety
1.9.1 Site Safety Measures GS 86
1.9.2 Reporting of Accidents GS 99
1.10 Nuisance and Irregularities

1.10.1 Nuisance And Irregularities GS 100
1.11 Quantum of Security Deposit

1.11.1 Security Deposit GS 101
Appendix W1 GS 102
Attachment A GS 109
LUP09/IND.DOC(10)
lkk(1812008)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 1
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPGRADING WORKS
SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations
In the Specifications, the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to
them except where the context otherwise requires :
"SO Rep"or shall mean the Superintending Officer's Representative.

SO's Rep"
"as approved" shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
"as directed" shall mean as directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
"or other shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative and as
approved" further defined in subclause 1.6.3 "Approval of Samples and Trade Names" of the
General Specifications.
"as required" or shall mean as required or as shown or as indicated in the Drawings and/or
"as shown" or Specifications.
"as indicated"
The following abbreviations are used in the Specifications :
AISI - American Iron & Steel Institute

ANSI - American National Standard Institute
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Material
BCD - Building Control Division
BS - British Standard
BCA - Building and Construction Authority
cm - centimetre
cm2 or cm2 - square centimetre
cm3 or cm3 - cubic centimetre
CP - Code of Practice
CPF - Central Provident Fund Board
DIN - Deutche Industrie – Normen
EIA - Electronic Industry Association
EMA - Energy Market Authority
FSSD - Fire Safety & Shelter Department
g - gram
Grid/PowerGrid - Power Grid Ltd
HDB - Housing & Development Board
IDA = Info-Communications Development Authority of Singapore
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
IECEE - IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment
JIS - Japanese Industrial Standard
kg - kilogram
KN or kN - kilonewton
LTA - Land Transport Authority
m - metre
ml - millilitre
mm - millimetre
m2 or m2 - square metre
LUPG09/S1.DOC(1)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 2
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations and Interpretations (Cont'd)
mm2 or mm2 - square millimetre

m3 or m3 - cubic metre
mm3 or mm3 - cubic millimetre
MEWR - Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources
MSSL - Market Support Services Licensee
MOM - Ministry of Manpower
MRT - Mass Rapid Transit
MRTC - Mass Rapid Transit Corporation
N - newton
NEA - National Environment Agency
NParks - National Parks Board
No. or no. - number
PE - Professional Engineer
SPSL - SP Services Ltd
PSB TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd
PUB - Public Utilities Board
RC or rc - Reinforced Concrete
SAC - Singapore Accreditation Council
SCV - StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd
SINGLAS - Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
SS - Singapore Standard
TC - Town Council
TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association
SingTel - Singapore Telecommunications Ltd
v/v - measured by volume
w/w - measured by weight
°C - degree Celcius
% - percent or percentage
± - plus or minus
≤ - lesser than or equal
≥ - greater than or equal
< - lesser than
> - greater than
Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
The clause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
All clauses in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at the Contractor unless expressly
specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform and/or comply with such instructions,
directions, requirements and obligations specified in the Specifications and required under the Contract.
All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes of
practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any amendments,
and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto.
1.1.2 Payment of Employer's Bills Expenses, etc
The Contractor shall duly and punctually pay to the Employer the billed and any other expenses incurred
by the Employer in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc.
The Contractor shall also pay to the Employer interest at the rate of seven percent per annum or such
other rate as may be determined from time to time by the Employer in respect of any arrears of payment
or other outstanding sums due and payable to the Employer, from the due dates until payment in full is
received by the Employer.
The Employer reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming due
to the Contractor before payment of the balance, if any, to the Contractor. In this respect, all Employer's
bills and other expenses due from the Contractor shall have priority over debts due to third parties.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(2)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 3
1.1.3 Insurance Policies
The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28 of
the Conditions shall include the following requirements :
(A) Insurance for Workmen's Compensation
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form attached and shown as Appendix W1.
(ii) The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-
contractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".
(iii) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract. The
policy shall firstly cover the whole of original Time for Completion plus 6 months and plus a
further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
(B) Insurance for Personal Injury and Property Damage
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his
sub-contractors.
(ii) The limits of liability shall be as specified under the Appendix To Public Sector Standard
Conditions Of Contract For Construction Works.
(iii) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the
(iv) The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30
days.
(v) The Policy shall expressly include coverage of the following risks :
(a) Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by the insured's
sub-contractor or by such sub-contractors' employees.
(b) Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by or connected

with or arising from the ownership, possession or use by or on behalf of the insured
of any equipment or machinery not expressly specified in the Schedule of such
equipment or machinery.
(c) Liability assumed by the insured by agreement, unless such liability would have
attached to the insured notwithstanding such agreement.
(d) Liability in respect of loss or damage to property belonging to or in the charge or

control of the insured or of any servant or agent of the insured.
(e) Liability in respect of injury to or illness of any person or loss or damage to any
property or land or building caused by vibration or removal or weakening of support.
(f) Liability in respect of injury, illness, loss or damage caused by or connected with or
arising from any commodity, article or thing supplied, repaired, altered or treated by
or to the order of the insured, happening at any of the insured's premises.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(3)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 4
1.1.3 Insurance Policies (Cont'd)
(B) Insurance for Personal Injury and Property Damage (Cont'd)
(vi) The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :
(a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to
personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal
(including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works
themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of the
Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the
Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)."
(b) "Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be
considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be
considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy had
been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all rights
of subrogation action which they may have or acquired against of any accident in
respect of which any claims is made hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in
this clause shall be deemed to increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in
respect of any one accident or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule."
(c) "This Policy is extended to cover the employees and/or representatives of the
Housing & Development Board, consultants, other professional parties and Resident
Technical Officers whilst on the contract site as third parties".
(d) “Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy
shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the
Contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of
partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things
reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the
Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy”
(e) "All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".
(C) Insurance for Works
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor.
(ii) The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance.
(iii) The sum insured shall be the same as the Contract Sum.
(iv) The period of insurance shall commence form the date the site is handed over to the
(v) The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read 30
days.
(vi) The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :
(a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in the
Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name of
Contractor to insert)."
(b) “Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the Policy
shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor on the
Contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event of
partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things
reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the
Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy”
(c) "All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".
LUPG09/S1.DOC(4)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 5
1.1.4 Stamp Duties
The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this Contract
properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The costs and expenses arising out this
obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to
have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
1.1.5 Novation, Assignment and Direct Submission of

Warranties and Agreements
In the event the management and maintenance of the Employer's properties or the Works or any part
thereof shall be taken over by a duly constituted Town Council, the Employer shall have the right to
arrange for, and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept the whole or part
of the Contract to be novated and/or assigned to the aforesaid Town Council upon the same terms and
conditions.
The Employer shall also have the right to require and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall
agree and accept, that any Deeds of Warranty and/or Maintenance Agreements and/or Bonds and/or
Deposits required under the Contract shall be executed and submitted direct to and for the benefit of the
aforesaid Town Council.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum all costs, expenses, stamp duties and
losses arising from compliance with these provisions.
1.1.6 Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion
In the event completion of the Works specified in the Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions
of Contract For Construction Works is further divided into separate phases or sub-phases, the rate of
liquidated damages in respect of each phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be re-computed according
to the following rates and pro-rated against the original amount specified in the aforesaid Appendix :
Works within the Block Outside Units : $400.00 per block per day
Works within the Precinct Outside Blocks : $70.00 per precinct per day
LUPG09/S1.DOC(5)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 6
1.1.7 Indemnity Against Claims By Occupants
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims, demands proceedings damages costs
charges and expenses submitted by any Occupant arising out of or in consequence of any delay in
completion of the Works.
1.1.8 Provisional Sum
Where Provisional Sum Items are included in the Contract, they shall be inclusive of all costs necessary in
carrying out or supplying the work, materials or goods. These Provisional Sum Items shall be inclusive of
the Contractor's profit and overheads but shall be net of trade and cash discounts.
1.1.9 Prime Cost Sums
Where Prime Cost Sums (P.C. Sums) are provided for any work, materials or goods, these sums shall be
inclusive of carriage but exclusive of Contractor's profit and attendance. These P.C. Sums shall also be
net of trade and cash discounts.
The Contractor shall allow and separately price for profit and attendance in respect of such P.C. Sums in
the Form of Tender.
P.C. Sums shall be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof shall be added the sums due to
the Contractor for the said work, materials or goods. The sum allowed by the Contractor in the Contract
for attendance in respect of any P.C. Sum shall be fixed regardless of whether the actual sum expended is
greater or less than the P.C. Sum. In respect of profit, the amount to be paid shall be the percentage
quoted by the Contractor against the actual sum expended in relation to the P.C. Sum.
Should the work, materials or goods for which a P.C. Sum is provided in the Contract be not required, or if
the Employer chooses to carry out or supply the aforesaid work, materials or goods by his own workmen
or by other contractors, which the Employer is contractually entitled so to choose, then such P.C. Sum
together with the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract shall be deducted in full
from the Contract Sum.
Should the Contractor himself be engaged or instructed to carry out or supply any work, materials or
goods under a P.C. Sum, the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract in respect of
the P.C. Sum shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. In such event, the amount to be paid to the
Contractor for the work, materials or goods shall be inclusive of the Contractor's overheads and profit for
the work, materials and goods.
1.1.10 Overclaim Leading to Overpayment
If at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract, the Contractor is found to have over-claimed and was paid for more than the value of
the Permanent Works carried out and/or approved unfixed materials at the Site, the SO Rep shall be
empowered to deduct from the Contractor's subsequent payments the sum overpaid together with the
Employer's charge and interest calculated at seven percent per annum.
1.1.11 Recovery of Legal Costs for Court Proceedings
All legal costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to solicitors' fees as between solicitor and
client) incurred by the Employer for the purpose of or incidental to the enforcement by the Employer of any
rights and remedies under the Contract or any other contracts between the Employer and the Contractor
or in respect of any garnishee proceedings which may be brought or commenced against the Employer by
the Contractor's creditors may be deducted by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or other bonds.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(6)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 7
1.1.12 Goods and Services Tax
The Contractor shall not include in the rates and prices quoted in the Contract Sum, the Goods and
Services Tax (hereinafter referred to as "GST") chargeable from 1 April 1994 for the supply of goods,
services or works required in the Contract. All rates and prices quoted shall be exclusive of GST.
The Employer shall reimburse the Contractor any GST charged on the goods, services or works supplied.
The Contractor shall declare his GST status in his Tender. The Contractor shall clearly indicate whether
he is, or whether he will be a taxable person under the GST Act. The Contractor shall, if available, furnish
the GST registration number to the Employer.
The Contractor will be deemed to be a taxable person if no declaration to the contrary is made in the Form
of Tender. The Contractor who declares himself to be a non-taxable person under the GST Act but who
becomes a taxable person after he has been awarded the Contract shall forthwith inform the Employer of
his change in GST status. The Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement by the Employer of any GST
charged on the goods, services or works he supplies after his change in GST status.
1.1.13 Carriage by Sea
The Contractor shall ensure that the carriage by sea of all goods, materials and equipment imported for
the purposes of this Contract shall be on vessels owned and operated by shipping lines which are
approved lines at the time the contract of carriage is entered into. Other ships may be used only if no
approved line:
(a) can deliver the goods, material and equipment in time to meet the delivery dates specified in the
Contract; or
(b) can provide the same measure of service at the same cost.
The Bills of Lading for the goods, material or equipment used by an approved line(s) shall be sufficient
evidence of their carriage by an approved line(s) in compliance with this Clause.
Where the carrier is not an approved line, the Contractor shall satisfy the SO Rep that the conditions
herein stated have been satisfied. The SO Rep may require and the Contractor shall forthwith furnish to
the SO Rep letters from each and every approved line at the time the contract of carriage with the carrier
is entered into stating that in respect of the shipment in issue they are either unable to quote or to provide
the service required.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause, the Employer shall not be responsible for any act or
default of the carrier or for any loss or damage sustained by the Contractor on account of having to
comply with this Clause.
The list of current approved lines can be obtained from the Procurment Office, Development And
Procurement Department, HDB, Basement 1, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6, Toa Payoh, Singapore 310480.
1.1.14 Bribery
During the currency of this Contract, the Contractor and his authorized agents or representatives shall not
offer or attempt to offer any bribes, commission or gift to the Employer's employees. Should it be
discovered that bribes, commission or gift have been given to any of the Employer's employees, the
employment of the Contractor under this Contract may be terminated. The decision of the Superintending
Officer with regard to the interpretation and implementation of this Clause shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(7)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 8
1.1.15 Site Occupation
The Site will be occupied by occupants throughout the duration of the Works. The Employer and/or the
Town Council has also engaged and/or will engage other Contractor or other Contractors who will also use
the Site at the same time as the Contractor is carrying out the Works. The Contractor shall not make any
claim against the Employer and/or the Town Council in respect of acts or omissions of such occupants
other than claims falling within Clause 14 of the Conditions. The Contractor shall not delay or obstruct or
interfere unnecessarily or improperly with the occupants' right of peaceful and quiet enjoyment of the
premises and site or to delay or obstruct or interfere with such other Contractors in carrying out of their
works.
1.1.16 Works And/Or Materials Warranty
(a) In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the works
or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject to such other
requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed by the Contractor
with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve such employment if the
Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of Warranty prescribed under the
Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the Contractor shall appoint an
alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The employment of any Specialist who
refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised by the Employer, and no Specialist
may commence any work or supply any materials before his written undertaking is given.
(b) The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way affect or
diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any work or
materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the provisions of
this Clause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement to withhold the
payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure
to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.
1.1.17 Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To

Exceptionally Inclement Weather
The assessment of exceptionally inclement weather shall not take place until the expiry of the Time for
Completion or previously extended Time for Completion. Such assessment shall be made on the
following basis :
(a) There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in
paragraph (f) below on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying out of
the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days").
(b) A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph
exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall figure
shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall records received
by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological Service.
(c) The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to
record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological
Service's records between 1998 and 2007 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days") :
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun

7 3 6 7 6 5
Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
6 6 6 6 7 8
(d) For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may be
there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than (positive) or
equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(8)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 9
1.1.17 Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To

Exceptionally Inclement Weather (Cont'd)
(e) The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d)
above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number then
such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather.
(f) The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the
ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the ground
floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period" and the works
carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works".
For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-
structure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as specified in
paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less than or equal to 5
or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall be referred to as
"equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month.
(g) If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of
equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be pro-rated
in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of sub-
structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. Similarly, if
the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month, then the number
of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are completed shall be pro-
rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of sub-
structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month. The
assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-structure
construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure construction period of each building
block, including multi-storey carpark/garage.
1.1.18 Research Work, Publicity Materials and Community Relations Activities
The Contractor shall render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised persons
undertaking research work or procuring publicity material or organising any community relations activities
on any aspects of the work including the holding of block parties.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance, attendance, facilities, utilities, etc for filming, video
recording or other media activities undertaken on the Employer's behalf. The Contractor shall also allow
his staff and workers to be featured in such films, recordings or other media activities. All costs and
expense incurred by the Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum.
1.1.19 Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site
The Contractor shall keep at the Site a complete set of the signed Contract documents described in the
Agreement; and a complete set of the further or revised Drawings and instructions referred to in the
Conditions, and the relevant Codes of Practice or Standards. The documents shall be made available for
inspection and use by the Superintending Officer, SO Rep and any other person authorised by the
Superintending Officer in writing.
1.1.20 Shortfall In Floor Area
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense ensure that the Space Adding Items constructed comply
in all respects with all Drawings and Specifications. In the event of any departure from such Drawings and
Specifications resulting in a shortfall in the floor area of any of the Space Adding Items constructed as
compared to the same floor area as measured in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, the
Contractor shall indemnify, reimburse and hold the Employer harmless in respect of any demands, claims,
damages, loss and/or expense (including any legal fees and expense that the Employer may incur) arising
therefrom. The Contractor shall remain so liable notwithstanding the issuance by the Superintending
Officer of any Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Completion Certificate and/or any Final Account
Certificate under the Contract.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(9)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 10
1.1.21 Trade Subcontractors
The Contractor, with the exception of his own direct employed workers, shall engage only BCA registered
contractors or SLOTS (Singapore List of Trade Subcontractors) registered trade subcontractors or
corporations/firms listed in the HDB Materials List for executing the Works for the following trades :
(1) Timber formwork;

(2) Metal formwork;
(3) Steel reinforcement work;
(4) Structural steel fitting;
(5) Concreting;
(6) Bricklaying;
(7) Joinery;
(8) Painting;
(9) Plastering;
(10) Roofing;
(11) Tiling;
(12) Electrical engineering;
(13) Air-conditioning, refrigeration & ventilation works;
(14) Plumbing & sanitary and gas piping;
(15) Fire protection;
(16) Waterproofing;
(17) Piling;
(18) Concrete repairs;
(19) Metal work;
(20) Cable installation & road reinstatement;
(21) Drain laying/Pavement & kerb construction;
(22) Curtain Wall/Cladding;
(23) Metal scaffolding (Erectors);
At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the subcontractors for the respective trades,
the Contractor shall submit the name of his subcontractors for the Works to the SO Rep. Where the
Contractor changes his subcontractor, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep.
For the purposes of this clause, the relevant BCA register, SLOTS register and HDB Materials List shall
be those applicable at the commencement of work for the respective trades.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay in the progress of the Works owing to his
failure to ensure the required on-time registration of his subcontractors and no extension to the Time for
Completion shall be granted on account of such delays.
1.1.22 Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS
All payments under the Contract by the Employer to the Contractor shall be effected through the Inter-
Bank GIRO System and/or other Electronic Payment Systems.
The Contractor shall submit all the necessary forms, such as Inter-Bank GIRO (IBG) form, etc, duly
completed and signed, to the Finance Department, HDB, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6, Toa Payoh, Singapore
310480; within fourteen days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to effect payments through such
Systems.
In the event the payment arrangement through such Systems terminates for whatever reasons, the
Contractor shall re-submit all the necessary forms to the Finance Department within 14 days from the date
of the termination.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(10)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 11
1.1.23 Restriction on Use of Project Information
The Contractor shall ensure that he or his subcontractors/suppliers do not quote or make references to
the project design, products, technologies or methods of construction used in the Works for trade
promotion, advertisement, publicity, etc or any other purposes without the written approval of the SO Rep.
This requirement shall not be applicable to proprietary products, technologies or methods of construction
introduced by the contractor or his subcontractor/suppliers.
The Contractor shall further undertake that all information and documentation disclosed or made available
to him pertaining to particulars of residents or their flats, shall not be used for any purpose other than for
effective execution of the Works. In this regard, the Contractor shall, within 21 days after the acceptance
of the Contractor's Tender by the Employer, submit, without any proviso, a Letter of Undertaking as shown
in Attachment A.
1.1.24 STAND-BY PLUMBER AND ELECTRICIAN FOR RESTORING

ESSENTIAL SERVICES DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
(a) The Contractor shall also provide a stand-by plumber and a stand-by electrician for 24 hour stand-
by duties for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays, throughout the Defects Liability
Period. The plumber and electrician need not be stationed on the Site but would be called upon to
rectify Defect causing disruption to essential supply such as water and electricity
(b) The Contractor or his representatives shall be contactable 24 hours a day, for every day, including
Sundays and Public Holidays throughout the Defects Liability Period by means of telephone,
handphone, radio pager, facsimile or any other suitable modes of communications
(c) The stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician shall attend to such Defect within 30 minutes
from the time a request for their services is made. They shall carry out the rectification
expeditiously and in a workmanlike manner to restore the essential services quickly to minimise
any inconveniences to the residents. In the event the stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician
fail to attend or fail to attend within the time frame stipulated, the SO Rep shall exercise his right to
impose charges under clause 1.6 'Nuisance and Irregularities".
(d) Within fourteen days from the Date of Substantial Completion of the 1st building block, the
Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the name and contact numbers of the stand-
by plumber and stand-by electrician.
1.1.25 Audit Of M & E Systems
The Contractor shall test the M&E systems and rectify all Defect before submiting all M&E
systems test reports endorsed by the Consultant to HDB Building Quality Department. HDB
Building Quality Department reserves the right to audit any of the M & E systems installed by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the necessary manpower, equipment and means
of access for the audit by HDB. The Contractor shall rectify all Defect detected during the audit
and report to the Consultant for verification
LUPG09/S1.DOC(11)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 12
1.1.26 PROTECTION OF PERSONAL DATA
1.1.26.1 Security
The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that Personal Data held in connection
with this Contract is protected against loss, and against unauthorised access, use, modification,
disclosure or other misuse in accordance with the procedures set out in these Clause and subclauses,
and that only authorised personnel have access to the data.
The Contractor shall not vary the security procedures set out in this Contract without the prior written
approval of the HDB.
1.1.26.2 Use
The Contractor shall use any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract only for the
purposes of fulfilling its obligations under this Contract.
1.1.26.3 Disclosure
The Contractor shall not disclose any Personal Data obtained in connection with this Contract without
the written approval of the HDB. The Contractor shall immediately notify the HDB where it becomes
aware that a disclosure of Personal Data may be required by law.
1.1.26.4 Transfer Of Personal Data Outside Singapore
The Contractor shall not transfer Personal Data held in connection with this Contract outside
Singapore, or allow parties outside Singapore to have access to it, without the prior written approval of
the HDB.
1.1.26.5 Employee Awareness Of Data Protection Requirements And Undertakings
The Contractor shall ensure that any employee of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, requiring
access to any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract gives an undertaking in writing to
not access, use disclose or retain Personal Data except in performing their duties of employment and
is informed that failure to comply with this undertaking may be a criminal offence and may also lead
the Contractor to take disciplinary action against the employee.
1.1.26.6 Advising The HDB Of Any Breach Of The Data Protection Clauses
The Contractor shall in respect of any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract immediately
notify the HDB where the Contractor becomes aware of any breach of the obligations contained herein
by itself or any sub- contractor, or by their respective employees.
1.1.26.7 Reasonable Requests, Directions And Guidelines
The Contractor shall in respect of any Personal Data held in connection with this Contract co-operate
with any reasonable requests, directions or guidelines of the HDB, or HDB’s nominee/agent, arising in
connection with the handling of Personal Data.
1.1.26.8 Ensuring Clauses Have Effect After The Contract Has Ended
All the above Clauses shall continue to have effect after the termination or expiry of the Contract.
1.1.26.9 Sub-Contracting
Whether or not the Contract contains clauses that prevent sub-contracting or assignment without the
consent of the HDB, the written approval of the HDB must still be obtained pursuant to the clauses
herein, before any Personal Data can be disclosed to any sub-contractor or assignee. The Contractor
shall ensure that all clauses relating to protection of Personal Data are included in any Contract
between the Contractor and sub-contractor or assignee.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(12)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 13
1.1.27 Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic
The contractor shall be required to implement necessary precautionary measures as advised by the
Ministry of Health or other relevant Authorities during a disease pandemic. Based on the
recommendations from the government's advisory, the contractor shall follow up expeditiously to plan for
such contingency and stock up necessary supplies or equipment (eg thermometers) so as to be able to
implement the required measures in a short notice.
1.1.28 Survey of Neighbouring Works
The Contractor shall bear the cost and be responsible for the engagement of a Registered Surveyor to
carry out a detailed survey of adjacent existing roads, drains and structures and to submit the report to the
SO rep.
a) within two weeks after contract commencement; and

b) three months before commencing the Works in relation with the neighbouring Properites.
1.1.29 Provision of Respiratory Masks
Building contractors are required to provide suitable respirators for their outdoor workers, as well as the
supervising consultants' site staff and HDB officers at the sites, when the haze level at the site reaches a
very healthy level with a 24-hr Pollutant Standards Index (PSI) value measured by NEA exceeding 200 or
upon appropriate public advisories by NEA
The air-purifying respirators must have an efficiency to filter 95% of 0.3 micron diameter fine particle
size, commonly referred to as N95.
The contractor shall start to purchase and stock up the N95 respiratory masks when the haze condition is
getting into the unhealthy range with the PSI Index value exceeding 100
LUPG09/S1.DOC(13)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 14
1.2 WORK PARAMETERS
1.2.1 Maximum Allowable Working Period
All Works inside each Unit must be entirely completed in not more than the total number of working days
(Maximum Allowable Working Days) stated in the Appendix to the Public Sector Standard Conditions of
Contract For Construction Works. The Maximum Allowable Working Days for all Works Inside Units for all
Units located in the same Block or Phase must fall within the Overall Time For Completion stated in the
aforesaid Appendix. For the purpose of this Clause, the Maximum Allowable Working Days shall not
include the part of work in the erection of any components (including balconies, room extensions etc.) or
fittings where workers do not need to gain access into the interior of the Units. The computation of the
number of working days in which the Contractor has access into the interior of Units shall be based on the
minimum unit of one day irrespective of the amount of time the Contractor spent inside the Unit during the
particular day. If the works inside each Unit remains incomplete within the Maximum Allowable Working
Days and/or within the Overall Time for Completion, the amount(s) stated in the Appendix to the Public
Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works as liquidated damages for Works Inside
Units exceeding the Maximum Allowable Working Days or exceeding the Overall Time for Completion or
both shall become payable by the contractor.
1.2.2 Maximum Number of Workers for Works within Flat
Not more than five (5) workers shall be allowed to carry out works within each unit at anytime. The
Contractor shall employ the same workers for each trade to execute and complete the works within each
unit. The workers shall not be replaced unless prior approval from the SO Rep has been obtained.
1.2.3 Working Hours
Notwithstanding Clause 11.1 of the Public Sector Standard Conditions of Contract For Construction Works
and the Particular Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall carry out Works within the flats between
9.00 am and 5.00 pm daily from Mondays to Saturdays. For Works within the block outside the flat and
works within the precinct, the Contractor shall carry out the works between 8.00 am to 6.00 pm daily from
Mondays through Saturdays.
None of the Works shall be carried out during the hours outside the time period aforesaid or on Sundays
or on public holidays without the permission in writing of the SO Rep.
1.2.4 Maximum Allowable Noise Level
Judicious management and control over the activities within the construction site shall be exercised by the
Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. The noise level generated shall comply with the following
maximum allowable noise standards and the latest noise control regulations imposed by the relevant
authorities :
Duration Per Day Point of Measurement

[Hours] [dB(A)]
8 80
4 85
2 90
1 95
½ 100
The method of measurement shall be as follows :
Source of Noise Point of Measurement

Outside the flat The nearest flat or not exceeding 10m from source.
Within the flat The nearest room or not exceeding 5m from source.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(14)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 15
1.2.4 Maximum Allowable Noise Level (Cont'd)
Failure to comply with the above noise level requirements shall be deemed a breach of Clause 1.10
"Nuisance & Irregularities". An administrative charge will be imposed for each occasion of non-
compliance. The Contractor shall, whenever necessary, modify his work methods immediately to ensure
compliance with the noise level specified.
The Contractor shall provide two numbers of one-man-operated sound level meters for the SO Rep to
measure and monitor the noise level throughout the duration of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit proposals for the purchase and use of the sound measurement instrument
within 14 days after acceptance of his Tender for the approval of the SO Rep.
1.2.5 Site Conditions and Information
The flats, shops, etc on Site shall remain occupied by the Occupants during the execution of all Works.
The information on the existing buildings and services on Site furnished in this Contract is offered as
available information and may not reflect the most accurate data; its accuracy is not guaranteed and the
Contractor must verify actual site conditions to his satisfaction by whatever non-destructive methods he
deems appropriate, subject to the Employer's approval.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site before tendering and satisfied himself as to the
local conditions, accessibility, the full extent and character of the Works, the supply of and conditions
affecting labour and the probable adverse effect of weather on the general execution of the Contract. The
Contractor shall also be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the Occupants' fittings and fixtures
(including furniture, electrical appliances, finishes, etc.) within flats, shops, etc. that will be affected by the
Works and the probable extent of damage, removal and protection, of such fittings and fixtures that may
be required. The occupants' fittings and fixtures that are likely to be affected may include but are not
limited to the following items :
(a) window grilles

(b) furniture
(c) cookers, ovens
(d) sinks, basins etc.
(e) cabinets, wardrobes, etc
(f) electrical appliances and wirings
(g) water/gas pipes
(h) floor/wall tiles
(i) air-conditioners (window units, compressors, etc)
No claims shall be allowed on grounds of ignorance of the conditions under which the Works will be
executed.
1.2.6 Joint Site Inspection
Prior to the commencement of the Works on site, the Contractor shall arrange a joint site inspection with
the SO Rep to determine the existing conditions of the site. For Works within the flats, the joint site
inspection shall involve the occupants of the flats. All existing defects, type and conditions of structures,
fittings and fixtures on site including those within occupants' flats shall be properly recorded by way of
notes, sketches and photographs. The records of items in common areas within the block and precinct
shall be endorsed jointly by the Contractor and the SO Rep. The records of items within the flats shall be
jointly endorsed by the Contractor, SO Rep and the occupants of each individual flat. The original copy of
the records shall be retained by the SO Rep with a copy kept by the Contractor.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(15)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 16
1.2.6 Joint Site Inspection (Cont'd)
The records shall include but not be limited to the following :
(i) Existing defects to be repaired and rectified by the Contractor;

(ii) Existing defects the rectification of which is not included in the contract;
(iii) Elements to be altered and the extent of alteration;
(iv) Elements to be demolished and the extent of demolition;
(v) Elements to be replaced;
(vi) Elements to be added;
(vii) Existing condition and/or defects of occupants' fittings and fixtures;
(viii) Occupants' fittings and fixtures to be removed and the extent of such removal;
(ix) Occupants' fittings and fixtures that are likely to be damaged, the probable extent of
such damage and reasons why such damage is inevitable.
(x) Any other items as directed by the SO Rep.
1.2.7 Use of Common Areas and Surrounding Estate
The Contractor shall confine his work site within the designated contract boundary unless prior written
permission has been obtained from the SO Rep. No trespassing on the surrounding carpark/property is
permitted. The Contractor shall ensure that his workers take their meals and rest within the approved
workers' rest area and that they do not make use of the common areas (eg. void decks, common
corridors, etc), empty units or other structures and open spaces whether within or outside the contract
boundary as living quarters, rest area or for any other use at any time during the Time for Completion and
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
No workman, except on official duty approved by the SO Rep, is allowed to stay within the site boundary
after working hours.
Building materials are not allowed to be placed or stored outside the contract boundary unless approved
by SO Rep.
Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, an adequate area within the contract boundary shall be set
aside by the Contractor for the residents to hold functions like religious ceremonies, funeral wakes, etc.
The size of the area to be provided, its location and any subsequent changes to them shall be subject to
the approval of the SO Rep.
1.2.8 TOL Fee for Land outside Contract Boundary
Where the Contractor requires land outside the contract boundary for the setting up of workers' quarters
and storage of materials for the Works, the Contractor shall check on the availability of such land and
apply to the relevant Authority or Lands Management Section of HDB for the use of such land. In the
event the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section allows the Contractor the use of such
land, the Contractor shall at his own costs and expenses comply with all the terms and conditions, pay all
TOL (Temporary Occupation Licence) fees, bear all costs and expenses for the use and maintenance of
and access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Management Section. The
Contractor shall reinstate the land to its original condition before handing over the land back to the Lands
Management Section.
The Contractor shall use such land allocated solely for the purpose of executing this Contract.
Any payment for unused materials or goods stored at such land shall be subject to the provisions in
Option Module B "Unused Materials or Goods not Delivered to Site" of the Conditions.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(16)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 17
1.2.9 Detailed Work Programme
Within one (1) month after the acceptance of his Tender, the Contractor shall submit a detailed
programme of all works in the Contract to the SO Rep for approval. The programme shall include
sequence of operations of all works inside each unit of flat, within each block and within the precinct and
provide details of probable services disruption. Activities along the critical path shall be highlighted in the
programme.
Two and a half (2½) months prior to the commencement of work within each unit of flat, the Contractor
shall submit a detailed programme stating the types of work and all tasks to be carried out on each
working day for the SO Rep's approval.
In the event the SO Rep considers that the programme is unrealistic, incorrect or incomplete the SO Rep
shall instruct the Contractor to correct, complete and re-submit the programme in a manner the SO Rep
deems fit.
The Contractor shall endeavour to plan carefully and diligently to ensure that any programme determined
and submitted by him is within his ability to comply and perform.
The Contractor is not allowed to commence any work before obtaining the written approval of the work
programme from the SO Rep.
1.2.10 Preservation Of Trees
Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as "preserved
trees" for the purpose of this clause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to avoid damage
or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements :
(A) Treatment of Preserved Trees In Area Of Fill
(a) Tolerable Depth of Fill
The area around preserved trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth.
(b) Construction of Well Around Trees
Well not exceeding 1m in depth shall be constructed around preserved trees. The minimum
diameter of well shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk
0.5m above ground level. Details of well shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(B) Treatment Of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut
(a) Tolerable Depth of Cut
The area around preserved trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300mm.
(b) Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree
An area around preserved trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root
system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved
trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of retention of raised planter
are as shown in the Drawings.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(17)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 18
1.2.10 Preservation Of Trees (Cont'd)
(C) Protection Of Existing Trees From Physical Damage

By Equipment Etc During Construction
(a) All preserved trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by
suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of preserved trees shall be placed before
commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair for
the duration of the contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be
determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2m from the
trunk of preserved trees.
Individual preserved trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny sacks
and 50mm x 100mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced at no
more than 50mm apart to a height of 1.5m above ground.
(b) Any damage to preserved tree root system shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor
under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed and/or damaged
during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of the exposed and/or
damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved sealing compound and
topsoil spread over the exposed root area.
(c) Any damage to preserved tree branches shall be treated in accordance with the Drawings.
(i) Branch Trimming Of Damaged Branches
(1) A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300mm from the main trunk of
preserved trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The
depth of the cut shall not be more than ½ of the diameter of the branch.
(2) A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The

distance between these two cuttings shall be 75mm to 150mm.
(3) Make a shallow cut at C.
(4) Final cut is to be sharp and clear.
(5) 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.
(ii) Wound Treatment
(1) Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife.
(2) Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends.
(3) Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(d) If any preserved trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep shall
impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And
Irregularities".
(D) Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees
(a) The Contractor shall ensure that :
(1) Compaction of soil around preserved trees shall be avoided.
(2) No materials shall be stored within the root system.
(3) There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the preserved trees.
(4) There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the preserved trees.
(5) There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc. within
the spread of the preserved trees crown.
(6) Soil around preserved trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply of
air and water get to the roots.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(18)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 19
1.2.10 Preservation Of Trees (Cont'd)
(D) Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees (Cont'd)
(a) (Cont'd)
(7) The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of drought.
(b) The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the preserved trees eg.
branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.
(c) If the growth of the preserved trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the cost of
making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities"
shall be imposed against the Contractor.
1.2.11 EARTH CONTROL MEASURES
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public drains by
implementing effective Earth Control Measures (ECM) for the construction site to meet the requirements
under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294. (Information on ECM requirements can be found in
the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage and the website www.pub.gov.sg/ECM). The Contractor
shall note that the ECM are for the containment and treatment of silty discharges due to the impact of
rainwater. ECM are not meant for the treatment of wastewater due to construction activities (such as
slurry from tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works) which shall be treated to comply with the
requirements under Environmental Pollution Control Act (Chapter 94A).
The Contractor shall submit in his Tender, the schematic ECM plans of the Site for the whole of the Time
for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract,
taking into account the different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the
Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) who will be endorsing the ECM plan after the tender is
awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor aware of the ECM requirements to
implement an effective ECM. Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the
Contractor shall be deemed to have included all costs and expenses for complying with all the ECM
requirements in the Contract Sum
Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to plan and design the
ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP's design. The ECM plan and design shall be
submitted 1 week after the award of the contract. During the course of the construction works, the
Contractor together with his QECP shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of
the construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his QECP. The planning
and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated and in accordance to the Code of
Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the Time for Completion including any
time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, to ensure that it is effective at all
times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by
the Contractor for verification.
The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advice of his QECP.
The Contractor shall submit the ECM proposal duly endorsed by his QECP to PUB for records. The
proposed ECM shall consist of the following four parts:
(i) Project Particulars
The following information shall be provided under the Project Particulars:

(a) Project description
(b) Name and address of site occupier;
(c) Site area and contract period;
(d) Location map and site plan.
(ii) Erosion Control Plan (described in 1.2.11.1)
(iii) Sediment Control Plan (described in 1.2.11.2)
(iv) Site ECM Management System (described in 1.2.11.3)
LUPG09/S1.DOC(19)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 20
1.2.11.1 Erosion Control Measures
During construction, the Contractor shall minimize the formation of bare surfaces under the ECM's Erosion
Control Plan. The Plan shall depict graphically the activities, including sequence of work, type and
duration for each phase of construction activities to include the following measures to:
(a) sequence and schedule of the earthworks I demolition works in stages and progressively with the
subsequent construction activities and building works.
(b) minimise site disturbance by keeping site clearance works to a minimum by retaining as much of the
existing vegetation as possible.
(c) pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled waste or other suitable
materials.
(d) protect the bare slopes with close-turfing, concrete grouting, or erosion control blanket.
(e) protect the earth stockpiles with erosion control blanket.
(f) restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as soon as possible.
(g) cover up the active work surfaces with canvas sheet during rain or at the end of the workday.
1.2.11.2 Sediment Control Plan
The Contractor shall put in place the ECM's Sediment Control Plan, which aims to capture the sediments
washed down from the construction sites. Some of these sediment control measures and facilities, which
must be in place before the works start, shall include but not limited to the following:
(a) concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the construction
sites.
(b) silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the perimeter cut-off drains
(between the construction site and the cut-off drain).
(c) sedimentation basins or any other sediment filtering or settling system of adequate size and sufficient
numbers along the perimeter cut-off drain and before the discharge points into public drain.
(d) a storage basin / tank may be required to temporarily store the large amount of rainwater falling on to
the whole site before treatment.
(e) a treatment system to treat silty discharge shall be provided before the discharge points into public
drain.
(f) turbidity curtains shall be installed along all the exposed slopes / riverbanks for works in or adjacent
to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in a reclamation work. The silty discharge trapped
within the turbidity curtain shall be allowed to be settled / treated and removed.
1.2.11.3 Site ECM Management System
The Contractor, shall at the advice of his QECP, put in place a site monitoring and reporting system
including but not limited to the following:
(a) Daily ECM inspection report by the QECP appointed site personnel
(b) Regular site inspection by the QECP
(c) Continuous monitoring and recording system shall be installed at the discharge point (after ECM)
before public drain
1.2.11.4 Submission Of Design Basis And Calculations
The QECP shall submit full basis of design back up with design calculations to show clearly how the
perimeter cut-off drains, silt fence, sedimentation basins, storage basin / tank and treatment system are
designed and sized as well as how such design will effectively filter off silt and allow only clean water to
discharge into public drains. The QECP shall also submit the design specifications on the treatment
system which can effectively treat the silty discharge from the construction site. The intensity of a one-in-
two year storm should be adopted for the proposed design.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(20)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 21
1.3 SITE MANAGEMENT
1.3.1 Site Management
Prior to the commencement of works on site, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval
the following details on site planning :
(a) Site organisation structure

(b) Names and roles of Contractor's staff
(c) Names and roles of sub-contractors
(d) Names of manufacturers and suppliers
(e) Manpower schedule for each trade
(f) Materials purchase and delivery schedule for each trade
(g) Site layout plan as specified in the Specifications
(h) Schedule of heavy equipment
(i) Master Schedule of Construction for each Block and each unit of flat therein
as specified in the Clause for Programme of Work
The site organisation chart shall include the appointment of project manager, engineer(s), foremen,
supervisors, clerical staff, public relations personnel, standby tradesmen, security guards, housekeepers,
the reporting system, procedure and method to monitor work progress, handle complaints/claims, and
provide coordination with HDB's officers, Town Councils' officers and residents.
The Contractor shall also furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may
require in regard to the above items.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not able to
ensure minimum disruption to occupants' daily and household routines, a smooth progress of and good
workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered to require the Contractor to make at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses all necessary modifications to the plans as may be necessary or
appropriate.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and further
information provided under this clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations
under the Contract.
1.3.2 Project Team
The Contractor shall form a project team to ensure the smooth completion of the project. The team shall
be led by a project manager, engineers, supervisors, public relations officers and foremen to manage the
Works.
The project team shall ensure :
(i) great care in detailed preparation and planning of the Works;

(ii) careful monitoring of all activities on site;
(iii) coordination of all works/services;
(iv) constant supervision;
(v) thorough quality control;
(vi) immediate reporting and respond to SO Rep's call within 10 minutes;
(vii) great attention given to the residents' requests, complaints or claims;
(viii) site cleanliness
The project team shall attend progress meetings chaired by the SO Rep to ensure full control of supply of
materials, good performance of workers, correct sequence of operation, smooth progress of works and to
solve problems, complaints and/or claims. No claim from the residents shall be left unanswered for more
than three (3) days. All complaints from the residents shall be acted within the same working day.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(21)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 22
1.3.3 Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel
Unless otherwise stated in other clauses and subclauses, the Contractor shall employ all the site
personnel and station them full-time on the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract all as specified below :
Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed Fully Agreed &

Based On Contract Sum Value Accepted Rate
by the Contractor
& the Employer
Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding for the Cost &
Type of
S/N Not $10 Million $25 Million $50 Million $75 Million Exceeding Expense
Personnel
Exceeding But Not But Not But Not But Not $100 Deemed to be
$10 Million Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Million Allowed by the
$25 Million $50 Million $75 Million $100 Million Contractor for the
Employment of
Each Personnel
$8,600 per
Project
1 One One One One One One Project Manager
Manager
per month
$3,600 per
Public
Public Relations
2 Relations One Two Two Two Two Two
Officer
Officer
per month
$150 per
Standby
3 One One One Two Two Two Standby Plumber
Plumber
per day
$150 per
Standby Standby
4 One One One Two Two Two
Electrician electrician per
day
$5,000 per
Workplace
Workplace
Safety and
5 One One One One One One Safety and
Health
Health Officer
Officer
per month
$4,000 per
Safety Safety
6 One per Precinct
Supervisor Supervisor per
Month
Supervisor (for
$4,000 per
structural &
7 One per Precinct Supervisor per
architectural
Month
works)
$4,000 per
Environmental Environmental
8 One One One One One One
Control Officer Control Officer
per Month
$2,000 per
Assistant Assistant
9 Environmental Nil Nil One One One One Environmental
Control Officer Control Officer
per Month
$2,000 per
Horticultural Horticultural
10 One One One One One One
Supervisor* Supervisor
per Month
* Note: The period and duration of employment of the Horticultural Supervisor shall be in accordance with
subclause 26.1.5 "Horticultural Supervisor"
LUPG09/S1.DOC(22)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 23
1.3.3 Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel (Cont'd)
1.3.4 Project Manager

- Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities
The Contractor's Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and possess the skill, knowledge and
ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The Project Manager shall be the Contractor's
Representative as required under the Contract.
The Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic qualifications and experiences:
(i) For Contract Sum $50 million and above, the candidate shall have a Degree in Architecture, Civil /
Structural / Electrical / Mechnical Engineering, Building Science or Quantity Surveying with 5 years of
relevant post-graduate working experience in the building construction industry or 3 years of relevant
post-graduate project management experience in high rise buildings. The degree shall be recognized
either by the respective Professional Bodies, professional institutions or Building and Construction
Authority.
(ii) For Contract Sum less than $50 million, the candidate shall have:
A degree in Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering, Building Science or

Quantity Surveying with 5 years of relevant post-graduate working experience in the building
construction industry or 3 years of relevant post-graduate project management experience in high
rise buildings. The degree shall be recognized by the respective Professional Bodies professional
institutions or Building and Construction Authority; or
A diploma in Civil / Structural / Mechanical / Electrical Engineering, Building Science, Building

Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 10 years of relevant working experience in
the building construction industry. The working experience should preferable be working on past
HDB projects and shall be recognised by HDB as relevant working experience.
Attending and providing administrative assistance and logistic support in the construction working
committee meetings, as and when directed by the SO Rep. The construction working committee
meetings are scheduled at any time during the working days from 9am to 11pm. All cost and
expense incurred by the Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(23)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 24
1.3.5 Public Relations Officer - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities
The Public Relations Officer shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability to manage
public relations with the residents effectively. The Public Relations Officer’s duties and responsibilities
shall include dealing with requests and resolving complaints of the residents, arrange for works to be
carried out within flats and to ensure a high standard of public relations with the residents.
The public relations officer shall have a minimum qualification of GCE "A" Level Certificate with at least
two years of public relations work experience. The Public Relations Officer shall be capable of
communicating effectively in English and one other official language.
Attending and providing administrative assistance and logistic support in the construction working
committee meetings, as and when directed by the SO Rep. The construction working committee meetings
are scheduled at any time during the working days from 9am to 11pm. All cost and expense incurred by
the Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the tender sum.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(24)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 25
1.3.6 Reserved
1.3.7 Standby Plumber and Standby Electrician - Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities
The Contractor shall provide 24-hour standby plumbing and standby electrical services, including
Saturdays, Sundays and Public Holidays.
The standby plumber and standby electrician shall be competent and possess the necessary skill
knowledge and ability to resolve all plumbing and electrical faults or problems on site respectively. The
standby plumber and standby electrician shall be responsible for the rectification of any failure of
water/sanitary installations and electrical installations respectively including clearing of pipe or minor sewer
chokages and restoration of any disrupted services or utilities.
The Contractor shall provide each standby plumber and standby electrician with a pager. The Contractor
shall ensure that the pagers are switched on at all times. The standby plumber and standby electrician
shall respond to all calls from the SO Rep, residents, Contractor’s staff and security guards within five (5)
minutes and carry out any necessary repairs within thirty (30) minutes from receipt of the call.
The standby plumber and standby electrician shall be stationed on the site from 8.00 am to 10.00 pm on
all working days.
1.3.8 Workplace Safety and Health Officer and Safety Co-ordinator
The employment of a Workplace Safety and Health Officer on a full-time basis is required notwithstanding
the requirements of The Workplace Safety and Health (WSH Officers) Regulations or other provisions in
the Contract. The qualifications of the Workplace Safety and Health Officer, his duties and responsibilities
shall be in accordance with the requirements of Workplace Safety and Health (WSH Officers) Regulations.
In addition, the Workplace Safety and Health Officers’ duties shall include those of the Safety Co-
ordinator. The Workplace Safety and Health Officer shall also be responsible for the Safety Management
System on the site.
The Contractor's Safety Co-ordinator shall possess recognised and approved certification in construction
safety to take charge of all matters relating to safety. The Safety Co-ordinator shall spend their time fully
performing the following:
(i) To supervise safety and promote safety conduct;

(ii) To inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work;
(iii) To correct any unsafe practice; and
(iv) To ensure that the provisions of the Workplace Safety And Health Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation made thereunder are complied with.
1.3.9 Environmental Control Officer
(i) The Contractor's Environmental Control Officer (ECO) shall be registered as an ECO with the
Director-General of Public Health, NEA..
(ii) The ECO shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt corrective actions to ensure that the
occupied buildings, workers' rest areas, toilets, site offices and other facilities and general
surroundings of the Site are kept clean, tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the ECO shall
also ensure that the Site is kept mosquito-free at all times.
(iii) The ECO shall put on a suitable uniform issued by the Contractor. The uniform shall be subject to
1.3.10 Assistant Environmental Control Officer
The Assistant Environmental Control Officer shall be competent to assist the Environmental Control
Officer to take charge of all matters related to conservancy works and housekeeping works. The Assistant
Environmental Control Officer shall have at least two years of similar work experience in HDB upgrading
projects and be able to converse in English and one of the languages communicated by the
Housekeepers.
The Assistant Environmental Control Officer shall put on a suitable uniform issued by the Contractor.
The uniform shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep
LUPG09/S1.DOC(25)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 26
1.3.11 Reserved
1.3.12 Replacement Of Site Personnel
The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses if any of the site personnel is found not carrying his duties to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
1.3.13 Compliance With Requirements And Submission

Of Information Of Site Personnel
(a) The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within 21 days from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance, the name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational
qualifications and experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor. The
employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
(b) In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified below, keep proper records
and submit the stipulated information to the SO Rep as and when required by him :
(i) Except for the security guards and safety officer/supervisors, all the site personnel
employed shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The Contractor shall keep records
indicating the number of days the site personnel are employed for each month and the
monthly contributions to CPF. Such information may be proof of employment of the site
personnel.
(ii) A letter from every site personnel employed by the Contractor to testify that he is employed
full-time for this Site only.
(iii) Further to (ii) above, if any site personnel is found to be working in more than one running
project, the particular site personnel will be barred from working in all the Employer's
projects for a period of two years from the date of the breach. It shall be the Contractor's
duty to bring to the attention of the site personnel the contents of this clause.
1.3.14 Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel
(a) The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses to be
incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
(b) In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the Contract
or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the Contract, without
prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the
Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site personnel and such
indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. These rate or
rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer
as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the employment of each of the respective
site personnel. For the purpose of this clause, each site personnel shall be employed by the
Contractor for at least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being
employed for that particular month under the Contract, except where expressly specified otherwise.
(c) In the event that the first and/or the last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of
the site personnel shall be employed for the full number of days in the said first and last calendar
month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under
the Contract.
(d) Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and
expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in full.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(26)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 27
1.3.15 Application For Release Of Site Personnel
The SO Rep may consider a request by the Contractor in writing to release any of his site personnel from
the obligations of this clause if the Works has been certified more than 95% complete. It shall be up to the
absolute discretion of the SO Rep to decide whether the Contractor's site personnel can be released and
the number of site personnel to be released as provided for under this clause. A written approval from the
SO Rep shall be obtained in this respect.
1.3.16 Superintending Officer's Decision
All differences and/or disputes arising under this clause including all subclauses under it (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall
be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.3.17 Employment of Workmen/Workmanship, Uniforms and Identification Badges
The Contractor shall employ in and about the execution of the Works only such persons as are careful,
skilled and experienced in their various trades. The Works shall be carried out to the best of
workmanship.
The main Contractor and his subcontractor shall provide their workers with adequate numbers of working
uniforms bearing the main Contractor's name and the name of the upgrading precinct. The Contractor
shall ensure that all his workmen, including his subcontractors' workmen, on site put on the approved
uniforms in a proper and tidy manner at all times. Uniforms that have worn out shall be replaced by the
Contractor.
The main contractor shall issue identification badges to each of his workers and subcontractor's workers.
The identification badge shall contain the worker's photograph, name, identification card number or
passport number and name of his employer and the Contractor, a serial number and the Contractor's
company stamp and the SO Rep's stamp. The Contractor shall maintain a register of all identification
badges issued to workmen on site and keep it updated at all times. The SO Rep may inspect the register
at any time. The Contractor shall ensure that all his workmen, including his subcontractors' workmen, on
site wear the identification badges at all times.
Within 14 days after the acceptance of the Contractor's Tender, the Contractor shall submit the design of
the identification badge and uniform for the SO Rep's approval.
The SO Rep may object to the employment of, or require the removal from site any workmen who, in the
opinion of the SO Rep, misconducts himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of
his duties and such persons should not be again employed without permission of the SO Rep.
1.3.18 Reserved
LUPG09/S1.DOC(27)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 28
1.3.19 Monthly Progress Reports
The Contractor shall maintain up-to-date records of all progress of the Works on Site throughout the time
for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the contract. The
records shall be captured on forms approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall produce and submit to the SO Rep, monthly reports of work progress on Site. A
schedule of submission dates will be forwarded to the Contractor upon the commencement of the
contract. The Contractor shall adhere to these submission dates strictly.
The details and format of the monthly progress reports shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
Each monthly progress report shall include the following items :
(a) overall progress chart indicating the actual work done versus target set in the master programme;
(b) a chart showing monthly and cumulative projected and actual progress claims for the whole
contract period. The chart shall also capture actual monthly and cumulative certified progress
payment amount;
(c) a schedule indicating dates and approval status of various submissions (eg. method statements,
shop drawings, etc);
(d) a resource level report listing the Contractor's site personnel, particulars of suppliers and details of
subcontractors on site for the month. The lists shall indicate the quantum manpower and/or labour
employed by the Contractor and each of his subcontractors;
(e) one recent dated "3R" size photographs of the works done in the block, flat or precinct;
(f) summary of all claims incurred in the month;
(g) updated Hoarding Layout, approved by the SO Rep; and
(h) any other item as direct by the SO Rep from time to time.
The Contractor shall produce and submit a computerized graphical/photographical presentations of the site
monthly progress for every precinct, capturing the progress of upgrading work at every block and the
general site Works within the precinct.
The monthly graphical/photographical presentations shall be stored in CD-ROM and submitted to the SO
Rep for record purposes
1.3.20 Housekeeping Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the housekeeping works of all common areas affected by LUP
works within the Contract Boundary for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time periods
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise specified. For the purpose of
this clause, common areas are defined in the following table.
Common Areas 1st storey void deck;

Within The Block Lift lobbies / landing areas;
Lift cars;
Common corridors;
Staircases;
Staircase landings;
Play areas;
Letter boxes areas;
1st storey access passageways, in front of shops, dwelling flats, or
communal premises;
Apron slabs; and
Any other areas within the block, as decided by the SO Rep.
Common Areas In Vehicular driveways;
The Precinct Parking lots;
Sheltered or un-sheltered passageways / footpaths;
Turfed and landscaped areas; and
Any other areas within the precinct, as decided by the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(28)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 29
1.3.20 Housekeeping Works (Cont’d)
In carrying out the housekeeping works, the Contractor shall employ General Works Housekeepers.
The Contractor shall decide and employ at his own costs the required number of full-time General
Works Housekeepers for the housekeeping of common areas within the block and in the precinct
affected by construction works to a satisfactory standard accepted by the SO Rep.
The duties of the General Works Housekeepers shall include the following :
S/N Specific Duty Of General Works Housekeeper Frequency

1 Dry-sweep and wet-mop, if necessary, common areas As Required
affected by the block works in all blocks.
2 Clear debris, rubbish, sand sediments, stagnant water, ONCE Daily

etc in all drains affected by LUP works (apron drains, CE
drains, temporary drains, etc).
3 Water-jet washing of all drains areas affected by LUP ONCE Weekly

works within the precinct.
4 Maintain good housekeeping standards within hoarded AT ALL TIMES

areas, workers’ Rest Area, material storage areas,
including clearance of rubbish, debris, stacking up of
materials, etc.
5 Clear debris, rubbish, etc in areas within and surrounding ONCE Daily
works platforms / gondolas.
6 Cut grass in all common areas within the precinct areas ONCE or TWICE
affected by LUP works, including hoarded areas. Monthly, As Required By
the SO Rep
7 Water-jet wash all driveways, parking lots, and sheltered At Lease ONCE Weekly,
or un-sheltered footpaths within the precinct areas As Required By the SO
affected by LUP works. Rep
8 Wash and clean all hoarding, sign boards, etc ONCE Fortnightly
9 Wash and clean temporary toilets located in common ONCE or TWICE Daily,
areas As Required By the SO
Rep
The General Works Housekeepers shall not be doubled up as workers engaged in the clearing and
disposal of construction debris from within the precinct. The workers who are engaged in the
construction works generating the debris shall be responsible to clear and dispose off all debris from
within the works areas or other areas affected by the construction works progressively at a rate
satisfactory to the SO Rep.
The Contractor's responsibility for housekeeping works within each block, including surrounding apron
slab areas and drains, shall be discharged upon Substantial Completion of all the Works within the block
and the handing over of the same block to the Town Council (TC). For avoidance of doubt, the Contractor
shall remain responsible for the housekeeping of all common areas affected by LUP works within the
Precinct until the Substantial Completion and handing over of the precinct works to the TC.
1.3.21 Pest Control and Surveillance
The Contractor shall engage a Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the Work
Head for Pest Control and NEA under the Control of Vector and Pesticide Act to provide comprehensive
pest control and surveillance work on the Site. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the
Pest Control Operator and proof of BCA/NEA registration to the SO Rep for approval prior to carrying out
the Works. The SO Rep may disapprove the Pest Control Operator selected by the Contractor and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim arising from such decision.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(29)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 30
1.3.21 Pest Control and Surveillance (Cont’d)
Pest control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of NEA as
well as the following :
(1) The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme inclusive
of “Source Reduction Regime/Strategy” , “Water Bearing Receptacle Removal Team” at the Site to
the respective NEA regional office and the SO Rep prior to commencement of the work. The
frequency of fogging shall be in accordance to the requirements of the NEA. Contractors at site to
carry out regular application of insecticide/anti-mosquito oil, checking and removing stagnant water
to eliminate breeding ground. SO is to check at least once a week to ensure these measures are
carried out by contractor/ECO/pest control operator. Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, if
mosquito nuisance found on site or any outbreak situation that need to kill the adult mosquito/other
vectors , ECO/pest control operator to notify NEA and inform NEA the date of fogging. Contractor
is to engage licenced Pest Control Officer (PCO) to ensure that proper work procedure, including
the use of right dosage and number of foggers should be observed for the effectiveness of the
fogging operation. The chemical used for fogging shall be approved by the NEA. The Contractor
shall be deemed to have allowed in his Contract Sum, all costs and expenses to carry out the
fogging as directed by SO Rep.
(2) The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of pest control and
surveillance work that has been carried out. The Contractors are to keep proper record of fogging
that are carried.The site register shall be made available and ready for inspection by the SO Rep
when required.
(3) The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by NEA to the
respective NEA regional office.
The work required under this Clause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site from
becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site checks
at least once a week to detect and remove breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or harbouring of
vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action shall be taken against the Contractor by NEA. The SO
Rep may also exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" by imposing a charge on
the Contractor.
1.3.22 Warning/Notices of Works and Disruption
The Contractor shall inform all residents, SO Rep and relevant parties 7 working days in advance every
inevitable inconvenience and disruption of services to the public and the residents that is due to occur in
the course of the upgrading Works, such as piling work, sewer diversion, closing of carparks lot, shutting
down of power supply ; etc.
The Contractor shall issue advance notice to all the residents on the proposed schedule of works to be
carried out within the flats two months before the commencement of the proposed work.
Fourteen days before commencement of work within each flat, the Contractor shall visit the flat and issue
notice to the resident to inform him of the work affecting his flat with precise starting date and the duration.
One of the adult family members is requested to be present in the flat during this period. The Contractor
shall brief the residents on the details of work, the work procedure and advise the residents on the
removal of affected furniture, fittings and fixture and the safekeeping of their belongings. The Contractor
shall remind the residents again 3 days before entering the flat.
In addition to the advance notices, the Contractor shall also issue to all the residents, circulars as and
when deemed necessary by the SO Rep as well as monthly newsletters to update residents on the work
progress.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(30)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 31
1.3.22 Warning/Notices of Works and Disruption (Cont’d)
All advance notices, circulars and newsletters shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to their distribution.
All notices related to work outside the flat and within the block or precinct shall be displayed at the
designated notice board unless otherwise required by the SO Rep.
a) All notices shall include LUP site e-mail address and information centre toll-free line to facilitate
residents’ feedbacks, queries and requests.
b) Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, all notices especially for notification of activities which may
cause inconvenience to residents, such as disruption of utilities, disruption of lift service, noisy and
dusty works, etc displayed on the notice board or sent to residents, shall be in 4 languages.
c) The start and end date of upgrading work activity shall be clearly indicated in the notices
d) All notices must be removed upon expiry.
e) All notices should be updated monthly.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Contract Sum, all costs and expenses for the
printing and distribution of the advance notices, circulars and newsletters to the residents:
1.3.23 Temporary Notice Board with Aluminium Casing
For every building block undergoing lift upgrading or interim upgrading works in the Contract, the
contractor shall provide and fix one natural anodized aluminium notice board measuring 900mm by
1200mm with an openable door panel at the first storey of each existing lift lobbies. The location of the
notice board shall be decided by the SO Rep.
The inside of the notice board shall be fitted with a soft board covered by a fine felt. A sample shall be
submitted to SO Rep for approval prior to installation. This notice board shall be installed within a week
after the contract commencement and to be removed on the instruction of the SO Rep upon contract
completion. The Contractor shall make good any damaged wall surface after removal of the notice boards.
1.3.24 Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts
All holes and openings, including PVC sleeves through beams, walls, floor slabs or any other part of the
building required for lift electrical, sanitary or water installation or gas piping, electrical wiring, conduit and
trunking shall be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper patching up with non-shrink cementitious mortar
gauged with waterproofing additive of all holes/openings for pipes/conduits done or caused to be done by
the lift, electrical, CATV or any other contractor in the course of such Contractor's work, and shall make
good such work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.3.25 PROVISION OF TRANSPORT
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide suitable transport throughout the Time for
Completion and time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the SO Rep.
and other Employer's officers for the expeditious discharge of their official duties. Prompt transport
arrangement shall be provided to transport and ferry the SO Rep. and other Employer's officers to and
from all precincts as defined in the Contract. The vehicle shall be driven by the Contractor's own or
appointed personnel.
1.3.26 Telephone Techniques Course for Public Relations Officer
The Contractor shall send the Public Relations Officer (PRO), to attend a "Telephone Techniques Course"
conducted by Singapore Telecommunications Limited, Singapore Institute of Management, or other
approved institutions. Provided always that the PRO who have previously attended the aforesaid course
need not attend the same again. Certified true copies of the Certificate of Attendance for the aforesaid
course shall be submitted to the SO Rep within three (3) months from the commencement date of the
Time For Completion.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(31)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 32
1.3.26 Telephone Techniques Course for Public Relations Officer
In the event of the Contractor failing to send the PRO to attend the "Telephone Techniques Course" as
required by this Clause, without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the contract, the Contractor shall
be indebted to the Employer at the rate of $1,000.00 per non-provided Certificate of Attendance for each
PRO and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to
the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor. Such rate or rates
shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and the Employer as the costs
and expenses allowed by the Contractor for sending each PRO to attend the aforesaid course.
All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the SO Rep whose decision shall be final and binding on and conclusive against
the Contractor.
1.3.27 Environmental Public Health Measures
(a) General Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act (hereafter referred to as “the
Act” for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it) and its Subsidiary
Legislations including the Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control
Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as “the Order” for the purposes of this clause including
all sub-clauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
(b) Environmental Control Officer (ECO)
The Contractor shall employ Environmental Control Officer (hereinafter referred to as “ECO” for the
purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) on a full-time basis to comply with the
Environmental Public Health Act – Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental
Control Officers) Order 1999.
The ECO shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt enforcement or corrective actions to
ensure that all common areas within the Contract Boundary, within hoarded areas, workers' rest
areas, temporary toilets, and other facilities and general surroundings of the Site are kept clean,
tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the ECO shall also ensure that the Site is kept mosquito-
free at all times.
The duties of the ECO shall also include the following :
a. To propose and submit Housekeeping Schedule for the approval of the SO Rep at the
commencement date of the Time for Completion.
b. To supervise all Housekeepers, Pest Control Operator, to ensure proper execution of

housekeeping works in accordance with the stipulated requirements and provisions in the
Contract, and the following tasks.
i. Proper management of housekeeping works, including disposal of work debris,

surplus excavated earths, etc.
ii. Housekeeping management of common areas, within hoarded works areas, etc.
iii. Control of disease-bearing vectors and rodents, including prevention of mosquitoes

breeding.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(32)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 33
1.3.27 (b) Environmental Control Officer (ECO) (Cont’d)
(b) (Cont’d)
iv. Drainage and silt control.
v. Control and minimization of noise and dust pollution.
vi. Maintenance of trees and landscaped areas.
vii. Proper cleaning and maintenance of all hoardings, especially those fronting 1st storey
communal premises, commercial facilities, and dwelling flats, if any.
c. To carry out and submit daily day-end housekeeping checks.
d. To prepare and submit weekly and monthly Housekeeping Reports, in a format approved
by the SO Rep.
e. To ensure that ECM are installed before commencement of construction and earthworks,
installed in accordance to the endorsed and approved submission. To liaise closely with
the QECP to ensure that the ECM designed and installed are being continuously reviewed
by the QECP for every stage of the construction and earthworks.
1.3.28 Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements
Where the supply of materials, goods or products included in the scope of this contract is to be obtained
by the Contractor from HDB, the Contractor shall allocate Man-Year Entitlements to the other suppliers or
contractors engaged by HDB to make such supply. This requirement shall be applicable, but not limited,
to the supply of precast components and cut and bend steel reinforcement bars which are supplied by
HDB.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising
from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
1.3.29 LIFT UPGRADING WORKS WITHIN PHASE OF WORKS
Works to each building block shall constitute a single phase. Each phase encompasses all works related
to New Lift Shaft(s) construction (NLU) or Existing Lift Upgrading (ELU) or both inclusive and Existing
Lift(s) Shut down (ELS) in a building block. As a general guide for construction planning, the following
standard construction duration may be adopted:
(a) New Lift Shaft (NLU) - 12 months;
(b) Existing Lift Upgrading (ELU) - 5 to 9 months;
(c) Existing Lift Shutdown (ELS) - 2 months
a) Works for New Lift Shafts (NLU) to commence early
Works for new lift shafts for any building block designed with 1 or more new lift shaft (NLU) shall be
deemed to commence on the same Date of Commencement stipulated in the Letter of Acceptance
notwithstanding the number of new shafts to be added per block. All lifts installed in a building block must
satisfactorily pass the final commissioning test and shall be issued with a Certificate of Fitness. All new
lifts shafts (NLU) construction (including new lift lobbies to new lift shaft) of each building block shall take
precedence over all other remaining works within the same phase of work (i.e. existing lift(s) upgrading
(ELU) and existing lift(s) shutdown (ELS) and works to lift lobbies of existing lift(s)) in the same building
block notwithstanding the number of existing lifts to be upgraded and shutdown.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(33)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 34
1.3.29 LIFT UPGRADING WORKS WITHIN PHASE OF WORKS (Cont’d)
Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the remaining works (i.e. existing lift upgrading (ELU) and
existing lift shutdown (ELS) and works to lift lobbies of existing lift(s)) in the same building block shall
commence 14 days after the completion and handing over of new lifts and new lift lobbies within each
Phase. All works within the same phase shall be completed within the Time for Completion stated in the
Letter of Award.
An illustrated example of a typical block phasing:

Phase Scope of works Duration
(months/weeks)
Phase 1 New Lift A (NLU) 12 months
- Block 123
New Lift B (NLU) ditto
Existing Lift C 5 to 9 months*

Upgrade (ELU)
Existing Lift D 2 months+

Shutdown (ELS)
* Time of Completion encompass 2 months of ELS in
the same building block
+ ELS Shutdown sequence varies with building block configuration. Refer
to Clause 64.4 Lift Machine Room Modification
Failure to complete New Lift Shaft works
If the contractor fails to complete any one (1) new lift shaft works in a building block and are not issued
with the Certificate of fitness certificate for the lift operation, all other works (i.e. existing lift(s) upgrading
(ELU) and existing lift(s) shutdown (ELS)) in the same phase shall not be allowed to commence works. No
extension of time shall be granted on such grounds for all other remaining works in the block and this shall
also apply to any precinct reinstatement works. All other remaining works within the phase of work shall be
deferred until a written notice from the SO Rep has been given in accordance with this Clause. The
Contractor shall be held accountable for all costs and expenses and shall bear all Liquidated Damages
imposed under the Contract in such circumstances.
Handing over of Completed Works at New / Upgraded Lift Lobbies and Precinct works
The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works at the New and Upgraded Lift lobbies and
Precinct works to ensure that all Defects are rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet
the requirements of the Contract and the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample
Lift Lobby or Sample Panels before the handing over for inspection by the SO Rep and the Employer’s
inspection team. The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing at least 7 days in advance to request for
a handing over inspection. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request, the SO Rep shall arrange for a joint
inspection date with the Employer’s inspection team.
Commencement of Defects Liability Period of each phase of works
The Contractor shall plan all activities to complete all works and hand over to the Employer in the manner
as stipulated and within the stipulated Time for Completion stated in the Letter of Award.
The defects liability period of each phase of works would only commence upon the completion of all works
within the said phase as certified by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum, for all costs and expenses for
complying with the requirements stipulated in this Clause including and not limited to costs and expenses
arising from the early handover of new lifts and new lift lobbies.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(34)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 35
1.4 SERVICES, UTILITIES & TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.4.1 Cables/Services Detection
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained its
nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions, constraints and
underground services.
The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting equipment/devices to locate all existing
cables/services, including the digging of trial holes, prior to the commencement of excavation or any other
work such as driving of piles, piling of earth electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns
which are liable to damage existing buried services. The Contractor shall engage both EMA and IDA
licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out all cables/services detection work. The proposed
line of excavation or area of other work shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by
making sufficient passes in a grid formation to cover the entire area of work.
The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall be liable for all cost and charges incurred if he damages any services.
The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if he
has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the relevant Government
Department or Statutory Board. In the case of underground supply cables/services belonging to other
service provider, the Contractor may seek assistance from the relevant service provider.
The Contractor shall engage SP PowerGrid Ltd's registered Licensed Excavator Operator only for the
purpose of carrying out all excavation works. In the event of failure by the Contractor to employ SP
PowerGrid Ltd's Registered Excavator Operator, no excavation works shall be allowed in the upgrading
site.
1.4.2 Diversion of Services
All permanent and temporary diversion or relocation of all existing services including services mains
affected or required by the works, whether within precinct or within blocks or within flats, on, above or
under ground shall be carried out by the Contractor. The diversions, disconnections and reinstatement of
services shall be carried out by licensed electrical worker, gas workers and plumbers and shall comply
with the current requirements, by-laws and regulations of the relevant authorities. The diversion or
relocation of services shall include but is not limited to the following :
(a) services and pipes on roof top

(b) CATV/MATV
(c) lightning protection system
(d) water, electricity, gas risers and mains
(e) house sewers
(f) telecommunication and multimedia installations like telephone wires, risers and cables;
cable television and cable modem
(g) Aviation Obstruction Lights
(h) Dry risers (including the earthing points)
(i) Fire hose reels
(j) Water pump sets & electrical control wiring conduit/trunking
(k) Gas supply pipes and gas meters
(l) Water pipe, sub-meter, water rising main and roof-top water distribution mains.
The Contractor shall propose the details and routing of the diversion works for the SO Rep approval.
The diversion works shall be planned and completed before the scheduled commencement of the affected
or associated works.
The costs and expenses for such diversion and/or relocation works shall be deemed included in the
Contractor's Contract Sum.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(35)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 36
1.4.2 Diversion of Services (Cont’d)
Provided always that where the existing underground services belonging to the various services
providers/authorities have to be permanently diverted or relocated because it is, in the opinion of the SO
Rep, affected by the permanent works, the diversions shall not be undertaken by the Contractor unless
otherwise specified. For avoidance of doubt, underground services belonging to the relevant services
providers/authorities shall be defined as follows :
(a) For water supply, the water mains and tap-off branches up to the bulk meter for direct and indirect
supply. Where there is no bulk meter, up to the individual meter points for direct supply.
(b) For gas supply, the gas mains and tap-off branches up to the gas provider’s service isolation
valves.
(c) For electricity supply, the incoming service cables up to and terminating at the main switchboards
or indoor distribution boxes in the switch rooms or the incoming service termination point where
there is no switch room.
(d) For telecommunication installations, the underground cables up to and including the Openable
Joint (usually but not necessarily located on the first storey of each block).
(e) For multimedia installations like cable television and cable modem, up to and including the Node
Box in the block or, where the block does not have a Node Box, up to and including the first
amplifier (Panel Box) serving the block.
For further avoidance of doubt, temporary or permanent diversion of services belonging to the various
services providers/authorities to construct temporary structures, install construction equipment, etc shall
be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum. For the aforesaid diversions works, the Contractor
shall liaise with and make payment to the various services providers/authorities directly and keep the SO
Rep informed.
1.4.3 Disruption to Services, Utilities and Facilities
The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are carried out with minimal disruption to existing services or
utilities. For this purpose, the Contractor shall locate all underground existing services on site prior to the
commencement of any piling or excavation works. The Contractor shall not disrupt any existing services or
utilities without the prior written approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall as far as possible arrange
for alternative services or supply of utilities whether permanent or temporary before any existing services
or utilities are terminated or disrupted. All diversion of house services required to minimise disruption shall
be undertaken by the Contractor, the cost of which is deemed to have been included in the Contractor's
Contract Sum. All diversions, disconnections and reinstatement of services shall be carried out by
licensed electrical worker, gas workers and plumbers and shall comply with the current requirements, by-
laws and regulations of the relevant Authorities.
Where temporary protection works are carried out within/outside the flats, the Contractor shall ensure that
each flat remains, at all times in a clean, hygienic and habitable condition fit for continuous habitation and
the carrying out of occupants' normal daily routines such as cooking and sleeping. The contractor shall
also ensure that all services, utilities and amenities such as access, lighting, security, CATV, remain in
normal working condition at all times. The flat shall be put back in normal working order at the end of each
working day.
1.4.4 Existing Services Valves, Manholes, Etc
All existing services valves, manholes, etc shall not be shifted, tampered, covered over with hardcore or
debris or concreted over, etc in the course of execution of the Works. The contractor shall arrange a joint
inspection with the relevant services authorities at the start of the Time for Completion to identify all the
existing services valves, manholes, etc in the precinct. If deemed necessary by the relevant services
authorities, the contractor shall arrange for protection works to be carried out on site by the relevant
services authorities to protect the existing services valves, manholes, etc from possible damage or being
buried in the course of upgrading works by the building contractor and to make the existing services
valves, manholes, etc easier to locate in the event of an emergency. Such works would include raising of
walls around the existing services valves, manholes, etc, raising the position of the existing services
valves, manholes, etc to facilitate the works or in the event that a chamber may be buried over for access,
tagging of the fixtures by inserting electronic sensors in the ground. On Substantial Completion of the
upgrading works, another joint inspection would be conducted with the relevant services authorities to
confirm that the existing services valves, manholes, etc are in order.
The contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses to be
incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause, including the cost of the
protection works carried out by the relevant services authorities.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(36)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 37
1.4.5 Site Layout Plan
Within 14 days from Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a site layout plan to the SO Rep
indicating proposed locations of all temporary structures (for example site offices, stores, hoistways,
Construction Equipment, labour lines, information centre, study room, rest area, temporary carpark and
driveway, and temporary access for construction activities) for approval before their erection.
Notwithstanding such approval, the Contractor shall relocate any such structures at his own costs and
expenses when required to do so by the SO Rep.
All such materials and structures shall be kept away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and
services lines unless otherwise approved in writing by the SO Rep and the relevant Authorities.
Should any hoistway or structure be erected without the SO Rep's approval, the Contractor shall pull down
and re-erect the hoistway or structure in an approved position within seven days from the date of
instruction by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe
condition for the duration of the Works.
All such structures and hoistways shall be removed on Substantial Completion of the Works.
The Contractor is not allowed to set up worker's quarters, precast yard or canteen within the contract
boundary.
1.4.6 Site Offices
Within one (1) month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall erect
and complete on site, temporary site offices complying with all regulations/requirements of the relevant
Authorities. One main site office/information centre with a meeting room and one precinct site office for
each of the remaining precincts shall be provided. The temporary site offices shall house the SO Rep's
rooms, Clerk-of-Works' room(s), Meeting room(s), Information Centre complete with Display Area and any
other usage required by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to survey a suitable
location for the site offices. No site offices shall be sited at the void deck unless prior approval from the
SO Rep is obtained. The Contractor shall consult the SO Rep on his proposal for the design configuration
and layout of the site offices, taking full consideration of site constraints and conditions and submit an
application through SO Rep. to the Town Council to obtain permission before putting up the Site office
and/or store. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before erection of the site offices.
The application shall include the following :
(a) Contractor's covering letter.
(b) Site plan with the proposed location of Site office and/or store.
(c) Layout plan with the Site location of the Site office and/or store.
(d) Letter of undertaking with the following conditions :
(i) To put up and maintain the Site office signboard.

(ii) To open a PUB account for the use of water and electricity at the Site office, if it is required by
the Town Council.
(iii) To maintain the cleanliness and orderliness of the Site office and/or store and its surrounding
areas during the Time for Completion and approved extensions.
(iv) To reinstate any damage caused during the Time for Completion and approved extensions.
(v) To remove the Site office and/or store and reinstate the Site to its original condition within
three weeks upon Substantial Completion of the project.
and any other conditions that the Town Council may impose.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(37)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 38
1.4.6 Site Offices
If the location is not approved by the Town Council, the contractor shall amend and resubmit the
application through the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that those areas occupied by and
surrounding the Site office and/or store are maintained for the duration of the Works. Upon Substantial
Completion of the works, remove the Site office and/or store and reinstate the Site to its original condition
within three weeks after Substantial Completion of the works.
After the SO Rep has inspected the Site and assessed that the area where the Site office and/or store
were erected has been reinstated to original condition, the Contractor shall arrange for the Town Council
to take over. All cost, expenses and sums incurred by the contractor howsoever arising or consequence
upon shall be deemed to be included in the Tender price.
The main site office shall comprise of prefabricated steel-framed structure with internal columns spaced
generally at 1.8m apart at the first storey. Concrete floor slab shall form the ground floor of the pre-
fabricated workers' quarters. The upper storey shall be of prefabricated floor boards/steel decking on steel
joists. External walls and internal partition walls shall be of modular steel panels with insulation. The roof
shall be of corrugated steel deck roof with insulation. Proper apron and apron drain shall be constructed
for the proper discharge of rain water to drain outlets.
Instead of prefabricated steel structure office, 20 foot metal container may be used as site offices.
The site offices shall be constructed and furnished in accordance with the minimum requirements
stipulated below. All facilities, furniture and fittings, etc specified herein shall be subjected to the approval
of the SO Rep and made available at all times for usage by the SO Rep and the Employer's officers.
No. of Items
Main Site
Rooms, Facilities, Furniture Office/Information Precinct Site
S/N
And Fittings Centre with Office (30m2)
Meeting Room (One per
(100m2) precinct)
(One per contract)
1 Tables and chairs:
(i) 1.5m x 0.8m office table complete with at least 3 6 3

drawers
(ii) 1.5m x 0.8m working table complete with storage 1 1

space for drawings
(iii) Chair with hand rests 6 3
(iv) Chair without hand rests 19 3
(v) High Chair without hand rests (for working table) 1 1
(vi) 1.2m X 0.8m table

6 -
2
1.7m x 0.8m x 0.4m Steel Cabinet complete with 2 1
shelves and double-leave doors
3. 2.4m x 1.2m Soft Board complete with accessories 1 1
1.2m x 0.9m white Board complete with accessories 1 1

4.
Air-Conditioner of minimum 10,000 BTU output 5 1

5.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(38)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 39
1.4.6 Site Offices (Cont’d)
No. of Items
Main Site
Rooms, Facilities, Furniture Office/Information Precinct Site
S/N
And Fittings Centre with Office (30m2)
Meeting Room (One per
(100m2) precinct)
(One per contract)
6. Telephone Installation :
(i) Separate telephone line with call waiting service 2 2
(ii) Telephone set approved by IDA 3 1
(iii) Alpha-numeric pager 2 2
iv) Toll-free telephone line with call waiting service 1 -
All site office doors shall be provided with lock-sets and all keys to the lock-sets shall be given to the SO
Rep.
In addition to the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings, the Contractor shall also install and pay
all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the maintenance of photostating machines
and facsimile machine (using A4 size paper with transmission report) at every site offices throughout the
Time for Completion including any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The Contractor shall also provide a digital camera, binocular with seven (7) times magnification
and first aid box complete with all necessary medication for every site offices. The cameras must be
capable of providing clear photographs with dating features.
The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance and housekeeping of site offices and ensure that all the
facilities, equipment, furniture and fittings therein are in a clean, habitable and good working condition to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Upon Substantial Completion of the works or when directed by the SO
Rep, the contractor shall remove the site offices and make good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such
making good shall include but not be limited to the reinstatement of damaged turf including topping up
with good quality top soil. All concrete areas shall be repaired and thoroughly washed.
All costs expenses charges and fees for the site offices, furniture, fixtures and fittings, facilities and
equipment specified herein and including but not limited to replenishment for consumables such as
batteries, photostating and facsimile papers, etc and payment for all utilities bills shall be deemed
included in the Contract Sum.
Should the Contractor fail to provide any of the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings after the
commencement of the Contract, the SO Rep may forthwith purchase and provide the same on the
Contractor's behalf and all cost and expenses for such purchase and provision plus charges shall be
recovered by the Employer from any monies due to or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due
by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.4.7 Reserved
1.4.8 Workers' Rest Area
The Contractor shall construct a sheltered rest area of not more than 100m2 in total for his workers to rest
and take their meals during all working hours within the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Preparation, cooking or selling of food is strictly
disallowed in the rest area. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings indicating the construction,
materials to be used, finishes, fittings, furniture and location of the rest area for the SO Rep's approval
three weeks prior to its construction. The fittings and furnishings to be provided shall include an adequate
number of wash basins and waste receptacles. The Contractor shall ensure that the workers' rest area is
maintained and kept in a clean, hygienic and presentable condition at all times.
Other than the rest area, the Contractor shall ensure that his workers do not rest, loiter or use any other
places within the precinct or in surrounding blocks and common area.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(39)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 40
1.4.9 Erection of Temporary Structures
In addition to the submission of the site layout plan, the Contractor shall further submit detailed structural
plans and design calculations, certified by his Professional Engineer, for temporary structures of two
storeys or higher. His Professional Engineer may make use of the drawings in the Standard Detail
Manual as a guide to the design and submission of the temporary structures.
The Contractor shall erect all temporary structures in strict compliance with his Professional Engineer's
plans and calculations.
1.4.10 Certificate of Supervision for Temporary Structures
All works which require the submission of structural plans and design calculations by the Contractor's
Professional Engineer shall be supervised by his Professional Engineer.
The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall submit a Certificate of Supervision prior to usage or not later
than two weeks after Substantial Completion of the works stating that he has carried out such supervision
work and is fully satisfied that the works have been constructed in accordance with the structural plans
and design calculations.
1.4.11 Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures
The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary structures such as site office, study room, rest area, and
any other temporary structures with continuous metal such as steel framework, scaffolding, tower cranes,
batching plants and mobile machineries such as crawler cranes and concrete pumps are adequately and
effectively protected from lightning strike at all times. the lightning protection system shall be in
accordance with and complying with Singapore Standard CP33 and/or any latest requirements by the
BCA.
Notwithstanding the provisions of CP33, reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as
lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural
component and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing the design of the lightning protection system duly
endorsed by the Contractor's Electrical PE stating that the design complies with Singapore Standard
CP33. The Contractor's Electrical PE shall shall provide a Certificate of Supervision together with the
earthing reports after the lightning protection installation is completed. The Contractor's PE shall also
conduct routine inspections once every 6 months to ensure that the Contractor has provided adequate
and effective lightning protection system to the Site.
1.4.12 Water
Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for the works except where specified in Section 2 -Structural
Concrete. Where water is to be drawn from Employer's properties, the Contractor shall obtain the prior
consent of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay for all charges and the temporary plumbing required.
1.4.13 Electricity
Electricity supply from Power Supply Ltd mains shall be used for the works. The Contractor shall apply to
the Power Supply Ltd for a separate metered supply for each of the blocks where works are to be carried
out and must pay for all charges and temporary wiring and equipment required. Extensions of wirings from
one block to any adjacent block(s) is not allowed. The Contractor shall not use the switch room as a store
for materials and equipment.
The Contractor shall employ a licensed electrical worker of appropriate grade to carry out the work. A
licensed electrical worker shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical works under the
Electrical Workers and Contractors Licensing Act 1974. The electrical worker shall be responsible for
supervising the Works and shall be empowered to receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep.
Any such instructions given to the electrical worker shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(40)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 41
1.4.13 Electricity (Cont'd)
The electrical installation shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations of the EMA, Government
Authorities, Statutory Authorities, SPSL and PowerGrid current at the time of tender and to the complete
satisfaction of the SO Rep. In particular, it shall comply with the following:
(1) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A)
including any subsequent updates and amendments of the Regulations,
(2) Singapore Standard CP 5;
(3) Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid.
(4) All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice
There shall be one white application card for each of the blocks where electricity supply is required. All
particulars of the metered electrical services shall be clearly written on each application card. All
application cards shall be forwarded to the HDB's Plan Approval (M&E/Testing) Unit for endorsement.
After endorsement, the Contractor shall collect and submit the application card(s) to Power Supply Ltd.
The Contractor shall arrange with the Power Supply Ltd for inspection and testing of the installation and
for the installation of kilowatt-hour meter(s).
The Contractor may, in lieu of electricity supply from Power Supply Ltd mains, use generators to supply
electricity for the construction work. The Contractor shall obtain the SO Rep's approval on the type of
generator to be used and their locations on site. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to
minimise the noise level of the generators to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The contractor shall provide, install and maintain the socket-outlet assembly (SOA) for all temporary
electrical installations. The SOA shall be manufactured in accordance with CP88:2001:Part 1 (Code of
Practice For Temporary Electrical installations in Construction & Building Sites). It shall be designed for
wall mounting or fitted with castors so that it can move around in the worksite. Every electrical equipment
used must be plugged directly into the industrial SOA.
1.4.14 Cost Of Water And Electricity
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of suitable and adequate supply of water and electricity for
the Site including for the purposes of conducting tests on the Works. Where directed by the SO Rep, the
Contractor shall provide and allow other contractors on the Site employed by the Employer, free and
unrestricted use of the water and electricity for carrying out testing and commissioning of such other
contractors' works. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses for the water and electricity
consumed at the Site including the cost of water and electricity consumed for carrying out testing and
commissioning by such other contractors employed by the Employer on the Site. Where applicable, the
SO Rep may at his sole discretion, direct the Contractor to transfer the SPSL account for the water and
electricity supply to the Employer or such Town Council(s) or such other party. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for
compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(41)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 42
1.4.15 COMPUTER SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE
1.4.15.1 Computerised Project Management Software
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide
and implement a Computerised Project Management Software (hereinafter called the "CPMS" for the
purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) during the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The SO Rep and the Employer's
officers shall be allowed to have full and free access and usage of the CPMS at all times.
The Contractor shall use the CPMS, which shall be installed on the Site to prepare the programme for the
Works based on the Critical Path Method. The programme for the Works shall include the duration, early
start/finish dates, late start/finish dates and floats for all activities involved in the Works. It shall also
include constraints and parameters such as fixed start/finish and target start/finish dates for the activities
and milestones for the different phases or stages of the Works.
The programme for the Works shall comprise of summary and detailed reports in textual and graphical
forms. It shall be updated monthly or as and when required by the SO Rep to indicate, inter-alia, the
critical path, actual start and finish dates of completed activities, actual start dates and percentage
completion of the activities in progress and target start and finish dates of the delayed activities, their
slippages and floats.
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep the actual programme for the Works within three weeks after
the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.4.15.2 Computer Hardware
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide
the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract.
Personal Computer
The Contractor shall provide FOUR(4) Personal Computers (hereinafter referred to as "PC" ). One PC
shall be located in the Information Centre, and the remaining three PC shall be for the exclusive use of the
SO Rep, SO Rep(TP) and other HDB staff respectively.
A peer-to-peer network for 3 PC(one PC in the Information Centre and two PC for the exclusive use of SO
Rep and other HDB staff) must be set up by the Contractor at the Upgrading site. The PC at the
Information Centre shall be set up to act as a server (hereinafter referred to as “Server”) and the other two
PC will act as clients (hereinafter referred to as “Clients”) on the network.
The HDB MUP Information Centre System (hereinafter referred to as “MICS”) will be installed into the
Server by the SO Rep. The Contractor must implement share-level security such that the Clients can
access the MICS in the Server but the Server cannot access any of the files in the Clients. The
specifications for setting up peer-to-peer network for the 3 PC at the Upgrading sites are as stated in this
clause including all subclauses under it.
Each PC shall comply with the following minimum specifications:
(i) An Intel Core 2 Duo processor running at a speed of 1.86 GHz or higher;
(ii) 2 GB of Memory RAM, or more;
(iii) One 3½-inch form factor Serial ATA hard disk of total capacity of 80 GB, or more; [The hard disk
must have 2 partitions eg. C and D drive];
(iv) min 256 MB Integrated Intel Graphic Media Accelerator 3100 or equivalent, able to display at least
32-bit true colour at min resolution of 1024x768 pixels;
(v) One 17-inch LCD monitor;
(vi) Integrated sound card audio feature with integrated/external speakers;
LUPG09/S1.DOC(42)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 43
1.4.15.2 Computer Hardware (Cont'd)
Personal Computer (Cont'd)
vii) System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version;
(viii One bi-directional 25-pin parallel port, one 16550 UART compatible asynchronous serial ports, one
mouse port, one keyboard port and at least four universal serial bus(USB) port;
(ix) Bus architecture should consist of 64-bit process-cache memory data bus and at least three
PCI/PCI-Express expansion slots;
(x) One power supply of at least 250 Watts at 220/230 Volts 50Hz;
(xi) One enhanced AT type keyboard with 104 typematic repeating keys;
(xii) One optical USB mouse or compatible;
(xiii) One internal IDE DVD/CD-RW Combo drive; (48X Write / 32X Rewrite / 40X for CD Read and 16X
for DVD Read or higher. Must be able to read CD-ROM, Multi Read, CD Text, Audio CD, CD-I, CD-
RW, CD-R, CD-DA, Video CD, CD EXTRA, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD/Multi-session, DVD, DVD+R,
DVD+R Multi-session, DVD+RW and DVD-RW Multi-Border and also able to write CD-R and CD-
RW, Track at once, Disc at once, Fixed Packet, Variable Packet and Multi-session.
(xiv) Integrated 10/100 network interface or higher
(xv) Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination. All
keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep.
(xvi) Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of broadband
connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
(xvii) Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
The PC must be fully compatible with Windows XP Professional with provision for upgrade to Windows
Vista or later, and shall be Microsoft certified.
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide and maintain Broadband Connection Services
(with minimum connection speed of 512 kbps) via a major Broadband Service Provider (such as Starhub
Maxonline, Pacific Internet Ltd, SingNet, or equivalent to be approved by the SO Rep) for each of the
three PC during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract. The broadband cable or telephone line shall be used solely for the PC
Laser Printer
The Contractor shall provide ONE LaserJet printer complying with the following specifications:
(i) At least 16 MB of RAM and upgradeable to at least 160 MB;
(ii) Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute;
(iii) Automatic Duplex Printing Unit
(iv) Print at 600 x 600 dpi resolution or more;
(v) Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector) and
10/100Base-TX Ethernet;
(vi) Support PCL 5e, PCL 6 and Postscript Level 3 emulation
(vii) Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it.
(viii) Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(43)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 44
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The Contractor shall provide FOUR Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) complying with the following
specifications:
(i) Conform to industry standards as follows :

IEEE 446, NEMA PE1, ANSI C62.41, IEEE587B, IEC 801-146;
(ii) Conform to the safety standards as follows :

UL 1778, CSA C22.2 and VDE;
(iii) 10 minutes or more runtime at full load;
(iv) Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through
management software;
(v) Shall provide at least 3 output ports;
(vi) Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.
Colour Scanner
The Contractor shall provide ONE colour scanner complying with the following specifications:
(i) Flatbed, one-pass colour and monochrome
(ii) At least 600dpi x 600dpi resolution
(iii) Able to scan A4 size documents
(iv) Support Universal Serial Bus(USB) port
(v) Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the preview
screen
(vi) Able to support all image formats including but not limited to,
• TIFF
• BMP
• JPEG
• FPX
• GIF
• WMF
• PDF
(vii) Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Network Interface Card
The Contractor shall provide :-
(i) THREE(3) 3COM Fast EtherLink 10/100 Mbps PCI TX NM or equivalent Fast Ethernet
network interface cards or integrated to be installed on each of the three PC designated for
the use of the Information Centre, SO Rep and other HDB staff complying with the
following specifications:
(a) Shall be fully compatible with IEEE 802.3;
(b) Shall support 10/100 Mbps via RJ-45 Port using Category-5 UTP;
(c) Shall support autosensing of Ethernet speed;
(d) Shall have LEDs indicators that indicate it is in 10 mbps operational mode,
100Mbps operational mode and light that blinks when there is network activity;
(e) Shall be Plug-and-Play for Windows 98SE or later;
LUPG09/S1.DOC(44)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 45
Network Interface Card (Cont'd)
(i) (f) Shall provide all drivers;
(g) Shall work with all the 10/100BaseT switches and hubs in the market;
(h) Shall provide Category-5 UTP cables for each adapter for connecting to the hub.
(ii) ONE(1) 3COM Office Connect Dual Speed Hub 5 (10/100BASE-TX Hub) 3C16755 or
equivalent 5-port RJ-45 Fast Ethernet Hub complying with following specifications:
a) Shall be fully compatible with IEEE 802.3;
b) Shall have at least Five(5) 10/100 autosensing RJ-45 ports;
c) Shall have the following LED indicators:-

- Power LED;
- Port status LED including link, activity and partition;
- Collision LED that detect collision in the network;
d) Shall provide all other accessories, hardware, software, cables, boards, etc
required so that the hub can operate in the network;
e) Shall provide full documentation.
Computer Cabling
The Contractor shall provide CAT 5 UTP Cables complying with the following specifications:-
a) All items, unless otherwise stated, shall include the use of materials, labour, equipment, tools
and vehicles, replacement and making good, fixing in position, all cutting and waste, return of
packings, labour dismantling, making good all affected works and disposal of fittings including
checking, tracing and clearing of faults(if any).
b) All computer cables shall be laid in existing cable trays or trunkings from the computer
distribution rooms to all computer points.
c) Where cable trays are not available, the contractor shall supply and install new cable
trays(measure separately). The location of the new cable tray must be approved by the
Superintending Officer’s Representative before work can commence.
d) All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints, and both ends shall be terminated
with Cat 5 RJ45 Plug & Socket.
e) All cables shall run on cable trays and laid in bunches of six, tied together with releasable
cable ties every 600 mm. Care should be taken to ensure that the cables are not twisted and
entangled within the bunch.
f) All Cat 5 UTP cables will be run above the ceiling. However, all these cables must be
enclosed in metal or PVC trunking.
g) Each cable shall be identified by a unique numbering system (which will be specified in the
cable layout plans) with the numbers clearly labelled in the Distribution Cabinet and at both
ends of the cable.
h) All additional openings for installation of floor and desktop opening are readily available.
Should any additional floor and desktop openings be required, they shall be constructed by the
contractor.
i) All openings used for computer cable must be fire-stopped after the installation.
j) 3 faceplates are needed which includes fixing and installation.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(45)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 46
Computer Cabling (Cont'd)
k) Cat 5 RJ45 cables( multi strands) is to be used for all patch cables.
l) Electro-galvanised perforated steel cable tray with epoxy coating including all hangers,
supports and fitting is to be used to support the computer cables when running from the
ceiling.
1.4.15.3 Computer Software
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall
provide the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed software
packages (full packs with Original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC provided
under this clause including all subclauses under it:
(i) Microsoft Windows XP Professional with provision for upgrade to Windows Vista or later;
(ii) Microsoft Project 2003 Standard Edition, or later (only for the PC designated for the exclusive
use of the SO Rep);
(iii) Microsoft Office 2003 Professional Edition; or later
(iv) Norton Internet Security Software 2008 with firewall and anti-virus package, or later;
The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the VirusScan softwares to cover the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC
must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on.
1.4.15.4 Computer Software Licensing
All the Computer Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be licensed
copies obtained from Authorised distributors or dealers. The Contractor shall at his own cost and
expense provide any software upgrade, to the latest version or release upon request by SO Rep during
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that only authorised software are used with the Hardware and obtain written
approval from the SO Rep before installing any software other than the ones specified in this clause
including all subclauses under it, into the Computer Hardware System.
1.4.15.5 Approval and Testing of Computer Hardware and Software
The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Computer Hardware and Software as
specified in this clause including all subclauses under it to the SO Rep for approval BEFORE the
purchase of the Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such
necessary arrangement for the hardware and software to be tested at HDBCorp's office and the
subsequent delivery to the worksite upon request by the SO Rep.
1.4.15.6 Installation/Upgrade/Removal of HDB Applications
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the
installation/upgrade/removal of HDB software at the relevant Consultant's office and the subsequent
delivery to the worksite upon request by the SO Rep.
1.4.15.7 Computer Furniture and Accessories
The Contractor shall provide the necessary furniture and accessories at the site office to accommodate
and facilitate the usage of the Computer Hardware and Software. The PC designated for the exclusive
use of HDB staff other than the SO Rep shall be located in a fully enclosed room within the site office.
The room shall be of minimum size 5 m² as specified. The room shall be provided with a lock and be
partitioned in half-height glass panels.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(46)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 47
1.4.15.8 Computer System Maintenance
The Contractor shall ensure that the Computer Hardware and Software are in good working condition
and pay for all maintenance, license fees, subscription fees and etc for the Hardware and Software
during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within one calendar month from the
commencement date of the Time for Completion or fails to rectify any Hardware or Software faults,
within one day, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire or to rectify the faults and
all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payments due to or becoming due to the
Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
1.4.15.9 Security
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the
Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and
Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary
arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from
payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
In addition, the Contractor is required to provide on site a 2-hour fireproof safe with dial lock of external
dimensions 440mm(H) x 330 mm(W) x 480mm(D) or equivalent for safe keeping of backup MICS data
on site for fire safety and security on site.
1.4.15.10 Unauthorised Usage
The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software are not used for any other purpose except
for those approved by the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(47)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 48
1.4.16 Provision Of Safety Helmets And Safety Boots
The Contractor shall provide sufficient safety helmets and safety boots for use by the Employer’s
officers and visitors visiting the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time periods where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The ownership of the safety helmets and safety
boots shall be reverted to the Contractor upon the satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works.
The requirements are as follows :
(a) Safety Helmets
(i) white colour with HDB logo in front of helmet.

(Colour code for HDB logo : Pantone 485)
(ii) complete with canvas chin straps and sweat resisting lining.
(iii) comply with SS98.
(b) Safety Boots
(i) at least 24cm in height

(ii) black/brown colour with steel toe cap
(iii) long-wearing
(iv) of great flexibility and resilience
(v) slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat
(vi) nail proof
(vii) of excellent insulation
(viii) comfortable and light
(ix) comply with SS105
The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the SO Rep
considers to be not in good working condition.
1.4.17 Equipment for Defect Checking
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment for the SO Rep and Resident Technical
Officer to carry out defect checking. Number of such tools and equipment shall be determined by the SO
Rep and shall include but not limited to the following :
(a) marker pens

(b) measuring tapes
(c) vernier calipers
(d) spirit levels
(e) plumbs
(f) set squares
(g) steel rod with a steel ball welded at one end (tapping rods)
(h) any other equipment required by SO's Rep
1.4.18 Metal Detector
The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of detecting metal
reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector must have either a light or
buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.
1.4.19 Reserved
1.4.20 Temporary Sanitary Facilities For Staff and Workmen
Within 21 days after the acceptance of the Contractor’s Tender by the Employer, the Contractor shall
provide temporary sanitary facilities with adequate lighting and of suitable structures on the Site to be
approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor may use the Employer’s Standard Drawings as a guide in
designing the temporary sanitary facilities. The temporary facilities shall contain water closets and shower
compartments in the proportion of 1 closet and 1 shower to every 25 workmen, for the duration of the
Works. In addition, the Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities with water closets and shower
compartments for the use of the Employer’s officers. Prior written approval by the SO Rep shall be
obtained before erection of these facilities.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(48)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 49
1.4.20 Temporary Sanitary Facilities For Staff and Workmen (Cont'd)
The water closets shall be of a type, make and pattern approved by ENV. The doors to the cubicles of the
temporary facilities shall be of an approved material.
All waste discharge from the water closets and all waste water from the temporary sanitary facilities and
from the Site shall be discharged into a public sewer. The Contractor shall arrange with ENV to carry out
work from temporary sanitary facilities to the public sewer and pay all charges and maintenance in
connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to and shall indemnify the
Employer against all liabilities in respect of such sewer connections.
Where a public sewer is not available or where it is not possible to connect to a public sewer, the
Contractor shall at its own cost and expense provide and install temporary septic tanks of a type, pattern
and capacity approved by ENV, to serve the water closets, showers, and baths. Drawings of such septic
tanks may be obtained from ENV.
1.4.21 Temporary Drainage System
The Contractor shall construct temporary drainage, including concrete-lined temporary drains where
directed by the SO Rep before commencement of piling, excavation or as and when directed by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall maintain the system until completion of the construction. In discharging surface
run-off into existing water courses, the Contractor shall take measures to prevent silting of such water
courses. The SO Rep reserves the right to make alterations to the system when necessary. The
Contractor shall allow for the cost of construction and maintenance of such drainage system in his Tender.
On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove all temporary drains and make good to the
original site condition or in accordance with the drawings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also keep all affected drains and walkways free from obstruction and clear the drains
from chokage at all times. The Contractor shall also ensure that all stagnant water is drained off
immediately.
1.4.22 Temporary Store Room for Lift Parts
The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage space with a floor area of 50 square metres unless
otherwise approved by the SO Rep and another temporary store room properly secured and complete with
door and latch and with a floor area of 15 square metres at the ground floor of each building block where
lifts are to be installed or upgraded. The temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be used
solely by the lift contractor for keeping lift parts during the lift installation or upgrading period which shall
commence from the date of handing over of the lift hoistway and lift motor room to the lift contractor.
If the abovementioned temporary storage space/temporary store room need to be removed to allow the
Contractor and/or other contractors to proceed with their work, the Contractor shall first provide an
alternative storage space/store room and arrange with the lift contractor to vacate the original temporary
storage space/temporary store room and transfer such lift parts to the alternative storage space/store
room. The location and type of temporary storage space/temporary store room shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
1.4.23 Construction Access And Hoarding
1.4.23.1 Construction Vehicular Access
The Contractor may use existing roadways within the precinct for all construction vehicles associated with
the upgrading works, subject to the maximum axial weight limited by the relevant Authorities. Additional
temporary vehicular ingress / egress point from adjacent main road located outside the Contract Boundary
may be constructed but subject to the approval of the relevant Authorities and the SO Rep. The Contractor
is required to manage and control the movements of the construction vehicles on the roadways to minimise
inconvenience and ensure maximum safety to the residents and general public.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(49)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 50
1.4.23.1 Construction Vehicular Access (Cont’d)
The Contractor shall ensure that the ingress / egress points are properly constructed and are sited suitably
far from traffic junctions to avoid causing traffic congestion. The proposed locations must be prior
approved by the relevant Authorities and the SO Rep before the Contractor is allowed to commence
construction of the additional temporary ingress / egress points.
The Contractor shall erect adequate warning signs and lights at and before all ingress / egress points to
avoid causing any safety hazard to the traffic movements.
Soil droppings on any part of the main roadways and carparks, either within or outside the Contract
Boundary, affected by the construction works shall be removed immediately and the areas kept clean at all
times.
1.4.23.2 Temporary site access to each building block at each Precinct
Prior to the commencement of works, the Contractor shall seek SO Rep’s / relevant Authority’s approval on
all proposed temporary site access to every block within each precinct for mobility of construction
equipments and safe transportation of pre-cast components and other building materials. The Contractor
shall ensure that ingress and egress to and from site are sited away from traffic junctions to avoid causing
traffic congestion. The Contractor shall erect adequate warning signs or lights and station human traffic
controller, if necessary, to enhance traffic safety.
Notwithstanding the approval, the Contractor shall re-locate and reinstate all obstructing structures or
facilities, in the way of the proposed temporary site access, at his own cost and expenses when required to
do so arising from the construction of this temporary access.
All temporary site access and affected structures or facilities shall be reinstated to its original condition,
with equivalent specification and standard, to the satisfaction of the Town Council and SO Rep.
1.4.23.3 Provision of temporary hoarding, walkway, protective shelters, barricades
Through the entire Time for Completion, the Contractor shall be responsible for the erection and
maintenance of temporary walkways, hoardings/ protective overhead shelters/ barricades, artificial
lighting, approved signage and directional signs at all affected work areas, such as within the site
access, proposed lift shafts and existing lift lobbies boundary etc., as requested or instructed by the
SO Rep. Protective overhead shelters shall be provided at locations where there are risks of fallen
debris from heights or as decided by the SO Rep.
The temporary walkways, hoarding/protective shelters/barricades shall be designed in accordance with

relevant statutory requirements, endorsed and supervised by a Professional Engineer(PE) employed
by the Contractor. The floor of all temporary walkways and protective overhead shelters shall be
constructed levelled with concrete, premix, or timber plywood with an unobstructed width of no less
than 2 metres. The proposed layout and design of the temporary hoarding/protective shelter/barricades
shall be submitted for SO Rep's approval at least two weeks before the erection.
The Contractor shall ensure that all the temporary site access are properly cordoned off to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep and the public is kept away from the construction activity areas and material storage areas
within the precincts / blocks throughout the Time of Completion. All barricades at typical lift lobbies shall be
suitably cordon off with adequate safety warning signboards and lightings.
Where existing walkways are affected, alternative temporary walkways must be proposed, provided before
the Contractor is allowed to obstruct or close the existing walkways and maintained. The Contractor shall
also ensure that public access to the premises on site is not unnecessarily obstructed at all times and shall
obtain the SO Rep's approval if any public access is to be re-sited.
Where ground floor units are occupied, the Contractor shall submit details of the proposed hoarding to the
SO Rep for approval prior to erection. The Contractor shall incorporate measures to ensure that the
lighting and ventilation of the flats are not unduly affected.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(50)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 51
1.4.23.3 Provision of temporary hoarding, walkway, protective shelters, barricades (Cont’d)
The types, locations, and layouts of proposed hoarding, walkways, shelters, and directional signs shall be
clearly shown in a Hoarding Layout, which, including all subsequent changes, shall be approved by the SO
Rep before commencing the installation. The approved Hoarding Layout shall accurately reflect the actual
installations of hoarding, signage, etc provided on site at all times.
Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, the hoarding shall be of one or a combination of the following
types, depending on the location and duration of the construction activity being hoarded. The hoarding
and protective overhead shelters shall be designed by a Professional Engineer and satisfy the safety
requirements stipulated in the Factory Acts.
Type of Hoarding Location Duration

Full height 1.8m metal hoarding All long term works areas More than 2 weeks
Half-height 0.9m metal hoarding In front of communal / Till completion of the

with mesh / netting above commercial / dwelling units at works within hoarded
1st storey areas
Full height 1.8m high portable All work areas of temporary Maximum duration of 2
chain-link fencing nature weeks
Where ground floor areas are occupied, as dwelling units, communal premises, or commercial facilities,
the Contractor shall submit details of the proposed hoarding to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor
shall incorporate measures to ensure that the lighting and ventilation of the areas are not unduly
affected.
All hoarding shall be installed securely and safely, without having protruding sharp corners or edges. Any
damage to the hoarding, shelters, signs, etc shall be repaired immediately.
All hoardings must be painted with at least three (3) coats of approved enamel paint of approved colour
and graphics on one side, as decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary
walkways and hoardings / protective shelters in good condition at all times and repaint them if in the
opinion of the SO Rep, the surface is dirty / faded.
All directional signs shall be reflective on PVC / metal plate and be of suitable size approved by the SO
Rep so that they are easily visible at distant and at night.
The Contractor shall install artificial lighting at the void decks, access corridors, protective shelters, and
walkways whenever natural lighting is partially blocked by the hoardings or protective shelters. The
Contractor shall also install sufficient artificial lighting to ensure that all passageways are lit at night,
including facilities under construction, temporary works and scaffolding in the hoarded areas. The
Contractor shall submit the choice and indicate the locations of the artificial lighting in the Hoarding
Layout for the approval of the SO Rep.
When any hoarding, protective shelter, or walkway needs to be temporarily dismantled, removed or
shifted for the purpose of the movement of equipment, materials, erection or hoisting of components, the
Contractor shall provide adequate warning signs and station at least one safety site personnel at each
affected location to ensure public safety. The Contractor shall reinstate the hoarding, protective shelter
or walkway to its original approved position immediately after completion of the work and not later than
the end of the working day.
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall at his own cost provide additional hoardings
/ protective shelters or temporary walkways or adjust the layout of the existing hoarding to minimise
inconveniences caused to general public, which must be carried out promptly and to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(51)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 52
1.4.23.4 Design Of Hoarding
A Professional Engineer (PE) employed by the Contractor shall design the hoarding and protective
overhead shelter in accordance with the relevant statutory requirement. The design of the hoarding and
protective overhead shelter shall be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep at least two weeks before
the erection. Should the Contractor fail to comply with these requirements, the SO Rep is empowered to
engage a PE to design the hoarding and all cost and expense so incurred including charges by the
Employer shall be recoverable from the Contractor.
The PE shall satisfy himself that the hoarding erected is able to resist the imposed loadings designed for.
The temporary metal hoarding/protective shelters/barricades shall meet the following minimum
requirements :
(a) 0.42mm thick zincalume steel galvanised steel of 2m height with 200mm clearance above ground.
All exposed metal sheet surface of new metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns
colourbond silicone modified polyester coating.
(b) Hoarding next to public walkways, access corridors, void decks, etc. shall be 2m high complete
with an overhead shelter of at least 1.5m in length and incline at an angle of 45 degrees.
(c) Barricades shall be at least 2.6m high with an access door provided and locked up after working
hours.
(d) A `toe board' shall be fixed at the working side of the hoarding to prevent materials and debris from
spilling over to the public area.
(e) Metal posts under Grade 43 of BS 5950 (size to Professional Engineer's design).
(f) 300mm x 300mm x 300mm Grade 20 concrete foundation or other designed by PE.
(g) Approved publicity graphic signs with ‘Lift Upgrading Project’ logos on one side of the hoarding.
The SO Rep shall decide the numbers and locations of publicity graphic signs to be provided on the
hoarding.
(h) Reflective directional signs on PVC/metal plate displayed along the route of human traffic
movement.
(i) Approved gates/doors with self-closing and locking devices at all "openings" of hoardings. Safety
signs on PVC / metal plate to indicate the wearing of safety helmets, safety boots, etc, while inside
the hoarded areas shall be displayed on the access gates / doors.
(j) Danger - Keep Out" reflective signs on PVC / metal plate displayed at conspicuous locations as
and when required. Such signs shall be in red on white background.
(k) Size of 400mm x 600mm viewing panels made of transparent perspex or other equivalent material
installed at about 12m or other interval approved by the SO Rep on hoardings along void deck /
walkway.
(l) Undamaged recycled metal hoarding are allowed, subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All
exposed surface of recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of approved paint
of approved colour scheme before the erection.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(52)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 53
1.4.24 Access Roads and Protective Crossings
The Contractor shall repair and maintain all access roads serving the Site and provide temporary
protective crossings over existing drains, channels, footways, etc throughout the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all damage and/or clearing away on Substantial
Completion to the requirements of the relevant Authorities and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.4.25 Signboards
(a) Signboards in Other Languages
Where erection of signboards with more than one language is required, all translations must be
carried out by competent translators approved by the SO Rep. All completed signboards shall be
approved by the SO Rep before they are erected. The Contractor shall bear all costs and
expenses arising.
(b) No Parking/No Dumping Signboards
Upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide and fabricate an adequate number of
"No Parking/No Dumping" signboards of a manner shown in the drawings to prevent unauthorised
vehicles/persons from parking/dumping debris on the site. The positions where the signboards are
to be installed shall be decided by the SO Rep.
(c) Temporary Roads Signage
Works carried out on/or near gazetted roads must comply with LTA Temporary Road Signage
recommendations.
(d) Directional Signboards
Upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide and fabricate an adequate number of
directional signboards indicating traffic diversions, directions to information centre, various blocks
and any other directions as required by the SO Rep. The numbers and locations of the signboards
to be installed shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any prior approvals,
the SO Rep reserves the right to increase the number or change the locations of directional
signboards as and when he considers it necessary.
All signboards shall be made of metal or PVC with luminous surfaces for increased visibility at
night.
1.4.26 Gas Works
Notwithstanding other provisions in the Contract, the Contractor shall engage only City Gas Ltd to carry
out all works relating to the existing gas installations unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall not carry out any gas diversion works on its own or in any way tamper with the existing
gas installations such as shifting support brackets of existing gas pipes, without the prior approval of the
SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(53)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 54
1.4.27 Information Centre and Infoline
Within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall set up an Information
Centre complete with a Toll Free Telephone Information Hotline, email address )e.g. lupcXX@....)
(hereinafter referred as "Infoline").
During working hours from 8.00 am to 6.00 pm, Monday through Saturdays, the Information Centre and
Infoline shall be manned by the Public Relations Officer and/or personnel approved by the SO Rep.
All telephone conversation email correspondences on the Infoline shall be recorded. The Infoline shall be
connected to a voice-activated tape recording system which shall operate 24 hours a day, including
Sundays and Public Holidays. The recording system shall include the equipment and functional
capabilities stipulated below:
(a) A compact voice-activated cassette recorder with the following functions or features :
(i) capture date and time of each and every telephone call; display or indicate date
and time of each and every telephone call during playback
(ii) built-in microphone and speaker
(iii) end-of-tape alarm warning feature
(b) A secured cabinet complete with lock and key to house the cassette recorder. Location of the
cabinet shall be determined by the SO Rep. All keys and recorded cassette tapes shall be kept by
the SO Rep.
An audio cassette player, cassette tapes and any other accessories necessary for the proper running of
the recording system and playback of recorded conversations shall be provided by the Contractor.
The Infoline and the recording system shall be maintained in good working order at all times. All
breakdowns shall be repaired within 24 hours unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep.
All costs, expenses, charges and fees for the Information Centre and Infoline specified herein and
including but not limited to replenishment for consumables such as cassette tapes and payment for all
utilities bills shall be deemed included in the Contractor's Contract Sum.
Should the Contractor fail to provide or repair the aforementioned Infoline complete with the specified
functions and features within the stipulated time period, the SO Rep may forthwith purchase and provide
the same on the Contractor's behalf. All costs and expenses so incurred plus charges shall be recovered
by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to
the Employer.
1.4.28 Stationery for Employer's Officers
The Contractor shall provide stationery and other devices for site use by the Employer's officers upon
commencement of the Works. The list of stationery to be provided is as follows :
Item
Description Quantity (Maximum)
No.
1. Ball Point Pen (Black/Blue/Red) 2 no. each per Resident Technical Officer.
2. Correction Fluid 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
3. Eraser (Pencil) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
4. Exercise Book :
a) 60 pages a) 5 each
b) 120 pages b) 5 each.
5. Glue Tube 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
6. Hard Cover Book :

a) A4 size a) 5 each.
b) A5 size b) 5 each.
7. Manila File 25 no.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(54)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 55
1.4.28 Stationery for Employer's Officers (Cont'd)
Item
Description Quantity (Maximum)
No.
8. Paper Clip :
a) Medium Size a) 2 boxes.
b) Large Size b) 2 boxes.
9. Pen Knife 2 no.
10. Pencil (2B) 2 no. per Resident Technical Officer.
11. Perforator 2 no.
12. Pocket Notebook 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer.
13. Ruler (300 mm) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
14. Scissor 2 no.
15. Stamp Pad (Violet) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer.
16. Staple Machine (B3) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer.
17. Staples (B3) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer.
18. Calculator (without scientific functions) 1 no.
19. Colour Pencils 1 set
20. Highlighter of Assorted Colours 1 set
21. Scale Ruler 1 no.
22. Writing Pad (A4) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
23. Hard Cover Ring File 40 no. plus 3 no. per building block
24. Ear Plugs 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
25. Measuring Tape 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
26 Rubber Stamp Max. 5 nos per contract
27. Retractable tapping rod 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
28. 3.5 inch diskettes (1.44MB) 2 boxes of 10 formatted diskettes per

contract
29. Measuring Tape of minimum 5 metre length 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
30. Laser Pointer 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
31 CD Re-write able discs 1 box of 10 CDRW discs
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the commencement
date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide the same on the
Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus charges shall be
recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered as a
debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(55)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 56
1.4.29 Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation
The Contractor shall employed a Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) of at least an "Electrical Technical"
Grade to design and install all temporary electrical installations necessary for the works. The temporary
electrical installations shall comply with the requirements of the CP88:2001:Part 1 (Code of Practice For
Temporary Electrical installations in Construction & Building Sites). Throughout the Time for Completion
and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, the Contractor’s LEW
shall ensure good safety standards and practices and including the following :
(a) The Contractor shall use M/s Power Grid Ltd's power supply to provide temporary electricity supply
during the construction stage unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
(b) The electrical switch board which holds the RCCB shall be housed in a switch box located at least
1.5 m from the floor level;
(c) All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition;
(d) All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and stairs;
(e) All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets and placed at a suitable
height, away from any source which cause mechanical damage;
(f) All plugs, socket-outlets and cable couplers are to be of the standard industrial type and of
minimum classification of IP 44.
Subject to the prior approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor may, in lieu of electricity supply from Power
Supply Ltd mains, use generators to supply electricity for the construction work. All electrical generator
sets shall be licensed with valid EMA license when they are in use. The Contractor shall take all
necessary measures to minimise the noise level of the generators to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.4.30 COMPLIANCE WITH THE TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR FIRE SAFETY IN TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
IN CONSTRUCTION WORKSITES
The Contractor shall comply with the Technical Guidelines for Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in
Construction Worksites, including any amendment thereto, issued by the FSSD, Singapore Civil Defence
Force. In this connection, the Contractor’s PE shall endorse on the plans for all temporary buildings to
certify compliance with the said FSSD Guidelines.
1.4.31 USE OF EXISTING CARPARK/ MOTORCYCLE LOTS WITHIN

THE CONTRACT BOUNDARY BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor is required to obtain the SO Rep’s approval before he can occupy any of the existing
parking lots within the contract boundary for the purpose of executing the work. In obtaining the SO Rep’s
approval, the Contractor shall submit detailed work schedule and plans indicating the extent of carparks
affected by the works and the period of occupation for the SO Rep’s consideration.
1.4.32 LIAISON WITH TOWN COUNCIL ON USE OF COMMON

PROPERTY FOR SITE OFFICE AND/ OR STORE
The Contractor shall consult the SO Rep on the location of the Site office and submit an application
through SO Rep. to the Town Council to obtain permission before putting up the Site office and/or store.
The application shall include the following :
(a) Contractor's covering letter.
(b) Site plan with the proposed location of Site office and/or store.
(c) Layout plan with the Site location of the Site office and/or store.
(d) Letter of undertaking with the following conditions :

(i) To put up and maintain the Site office signboard.
(ii) To open a PUB account for the use of water and electricity at the Site office, if it is required by the
Town Council.
(iii) To maintain the cleanliness and orderliness of the Site office and/or store and its surrounding areas
during the Time for Completion and approved extensions.
(iv) To reinstate any damage caused during the Time for Completion and approved extensions.
(v) To remove the Site office and/or store and reinstate the Site to its original condition within three
weeks upon Substantial Completion of the project.
and any other conditions that the Town Council may impose. If the location is not approved by the Town
LUPG09/S1.DOC(56)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 57
Council, the contractor shall amend and resubmit

1.4.32 LIAISON WITH TOWN COUNCIL ON USE OF COMMON
PROPERTY FOR SITE OFFICE AND/ OR STORE (CONT’D)
If the application through the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that those areas occupied by and
surrounding the Site office and/ or store are maintained for the duration of the Works. Upon Substantial
Completion of the works, remove the Site office and/or store and reinstate the Site to its original condition
within three weeks after Substantial Completion of the works.
After the SO Rep has inspected the Site and assessed that the area where the Site office and/ or store
were erected has been reinstated to original condition, the Contractor shall arrange for the Town Council
to take over. All cost, expenses and sums incurred by the contractor howsoever arising or consequence
upon shall be deemed to be included in the Tender price.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(57)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 58
1.5 WORK METHODS
1.5.1 Work Methods for All Trades
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the work methods to ensure minimum
inconvenience and disruption to occupants' daily household routine and good workmanship for all the
trades engaged in the Works at least three (3) weeks prior to the commencement of work for each trade.
A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level reference lines shall be
included in the work methods.
The work methods shall include but is not limited to the following work items :
(a) replacement of sanitary pipes

(b) waterproofing and retiling of bath/w.c.
(c) rescreeding of common area
(d) erection of additional space
(e) removal of existing wall
(f) any other works required by the SO's Rep
Where required by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for the demonstration of the work methods
before approval may be granted for its implementation. The Contractor shall also ensure that sub-
contractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with the work methods approved by the SO Rep.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not
ensure minimum inconvenience and disruption to occupants' household routine and good workmanship in
the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own costs and expenses such
modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider necessary or appropriate.
The Contractor shall use and employ only workers who are skilled and capable of executing the Works in
accordance with the works methods approved by the SO Rep.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's work methods, revised work methods or any details and
information provided under this clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations
under the Contract.
1.5.2 Measurement Plan and Survey Method
At least fourteen days before the commencement of Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the measurement plan and survey methods.
The areas of Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods
shall, inter alia, include the following :
(a) Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block

(b) Verticality and alignment of columns
(c) Evenness and verticality of walls
(d) Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs
(e) Consistency of storey heights
Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements made in respect
of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of the Works.
The Contractor shall engage a registered surveyor to carry out measurement of every building block prior
to the commencement of the finishing work. Upon completion of the finishing work, the Contractor shall
carry out another measurement of the building block. All measurement data shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the SO Rep for his approval.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's measurement plan and data, survey methods and further
details and information provided under this Clause shall not in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or
obligations under the Contract.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(58)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 59
1.5.3 Workshop Drawings and Samples
When required, the Contractor shall provide or erect samples of works on Site for the approval of the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall not commence any work prior to the approval of the sample. The SO Rep may
instruct the Contractor to carry out different methods of fixing, to modify design and to provide alternative
panels of finishes for his approval. All subsequent work shall be constructed conforming to the standard
of the approved samples. All costs and expenses incurred for the erection of samples shall be deemed to
be included in the Contract by the Contractor.
1.5.4 Part Removal or Demolition of Existing Structure
Where existing structures or part thereof are to be removed or demolished, the Contractor shall confirm
with the SO Rep on the extent of the existing structure to be removed or demolished at least 7 days prior
to the commencement of the removal or demolition work. The Contractor shall highlight any existing
services or utilities that may be affected by the removal or demolition work and submit proposals to the SO
Rep for approval of any diversion or minimisation of disruption in the supply of such services or utilities
before commencing work.
The Contractor shall ensure that all adjoining existing structures which are not to be removed or
demolished would not be damaged during the removal or demolition works. If such adjoining structures
are damaged during the removal or demolition works, the Contractor shall immediately report the matter to
the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the adjoining structures and shall at
his own cost repair, rectify and make good such damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.5.5 Demolition of Existing RC/Masonry Wall
Where the works involve demolition of the existing wall adjacent to the new space-adding item and/or any
other external wall within unit or block as shown in the drawing, the demolition work shall only be carried
out after installation of screen wall.
If any existing fitting or fixture such as sink, cabinet, cupboard, air-conditioned unit, electrical socket,
washing machine, water pipe, drain pipe etc. is attached to the wall to be demolished, the Contractor shall
temporarily relocate such fitting or fixture to a position inside the flat approved by the SO Rep, in order that
the residents may continue to use these facilities. Upon completion of the affecting works, the Contractor
shall reinstate or re-install the fittings or fixtures at a location approved by the SO Rep.
Where the existing wall is a block wall, the Contractor may demolish the wall with a hammer or other
equipment that will generate noise and dust within the standard specified.
Where the existing wall is an RC wall, the Contractor shall use such equipment as a coring machine,
diamond saw cutter, diamond chain saw or any other equipment that will generate noise and dust within
the standard specified and will not adversely affect the adjacent structures.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection to existing fitting, fixture and floor adjacent to the
wall to be demolished to avoid damage by the equipment used and/or the debris generated. All debris
shall be removed and the site cleaned at the end of each day. The Contractor is not allowed to carry
debris through a flat for any purpose.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary safety measures to prevent the occupants being endangered
by exposed steel bars, cut concrete edges etc.
The Contractor shall submit his proposed method and equipment to the SO Rep for approval one month
prior to commencement of demolition work. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to conduct
demonstration of the proposed wall demolition method before granting approval for the same.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(59)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 60
1.5.6 Screen Wall
The Contractor shall supply and install a screen wall adjacent to all space-adding items (additional
balcony, utility room, extension of existing space, etc.) before removal of any existing wall to ensure
minimum noise and dust. Where the work does not involve space-adding items but requires the removal
of external walls of Units, the Contractor shall also, unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, supply and
install screen walls adjacent to the existing external walls of Units before the removal/demolition and
reconstruction of such external walls including parapet walls. The screen walls shall be installed
irrespective of the type of existing external walls to be removed/demolished (i.e. brickwalls, concrete walls,
metal walls, etc.)
The screen wall shall be installed in such a manner that the Occupants continue to have access to their
toilets, bathrooms and refuse chute hoppers without any hazard to their safety and security.
The screen wall shall be demountable and consist of panels of width not exceeding one metre and
thickness not less than 50mm which can take up any position with built-in jacking mechanism to lock the
panels between floor and ceiling to avoid damage to adjacent finishes and fittings. The built-in jacking
mechanism shall be housed in a cast metal die-block with high tension springs to absorb uneven gradient
to the underside of ceilings and to floor levels. It shall be operated only from the side facing the internal of
the flat with tools which are specially designed for the system. The use of ordinary bolts and nuts to form
the system is not permitted.
The screen wall shall incorporate 2 windows (each 700mm x 700mm with 6mm thick opaque
polycarbonate/high impact acrylic louvre panels on the inside surface). Where access to essential
facilities and/or utilities must be provided for residents through the screen wall, the Contractor shall install
a door (700mm width x 2000mm height, lockable from inside a flat) to replace one of the aforesaid
windows. The screen wall shall have acoustical quality of not less than 8 dB (A) noise reduction
measured from the noise source (outside the screen wall) to one metre away from the other side of the
screen and can be erected or dismantled within one hour.
Grooves shall be provided at the side of individual panels for inserting PVC or rubberised bulb-seal to
reduce the penetration of noise and dust. The surface of the panels shall be of a smooth covering veneer
for easy cleaning.
If any existing fitting or fixture such as cooker, sink, cabinet, cupboard, etc, should be in the way of the
screen wall erection, the Contractor shall modify the demountable system with in-situ panels to suit the
site conditions.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the SO Rep for his approval of the design and detailing of
the screen wall at least one month prior to its erection.
The Contractor shall dismantle and remove the screen wall upon completion of the works within each flat.
A screen wall may be re-used if its wall surface, window and door are in good condition. The Contractor
shall arrange for the SO Rep's inspection and approval prior to the erection of any used screen wall.
1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works
(a) Joint Visit to Flat
One week prior to the commencement of work within any particular flat, the Contractor shall visit
the flat jointly with the SO Rep and advise its occupants of the fixtures and fittings (including
furniture, electrical appliances, finishes, etc) that are likely to be affected by the Works, possible
disruption of services and other imminent inconveniences. The fixtures and fitting shall include but
is not limited to the items indicated in Clause 1.2.5 "Site Conditions and Information".
Where damage to fixtures and fittings is inevitable, the Contractor shall identify the items so
affected, the expected extent of damage and provide reasonable explanations to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(60)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 61
1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works (Cont'd)
(b) Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for the reinstatement, reinstallation,
repair, rectification, making good, replacement as required of all fixtures, fittings and attachments
damaged or removed or otherwise affected either directly or indirectly by or in connection with the
Works. Such reinstatement, reinstallation, repairs rectification, making good or replacement shall
be done to a reasonable standard and to match as closely and in every respect with the existing
fixtures, fittings, attachments and surroundings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Where Occupants' existing fixtures and fittings affected by the Works were not originally done or
installed according to or in any way do not comply with the latest HDB requirements on similar
renovation works and/or latest requirements, regulations, etc of all relevant authorities, the
Contractor shall reinstate the affected fixtures and fittings to comply with the aforesaid
requirements, regulations, etc. Such reinstatement works shall be deemed included in Contractor's
Contract Sum and shall include but is not limited to the following :
(i) re-lay water supply pipes originally buried under floor or wall tiles;
(ii) replace existing mild steel supports for air-conditioners with stainless steel supports
complete with proper condensation drainage trays and/or pipes.
(c) Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Replacement of Waste

Stack and/or Sanitary Branch Pipes in the Kitchen
For fixtures and fittings affected by the replacement of waste stack and/or sanitary branch pipes in
the kitchen, the Contractor shall assist the residents to remove the affected fittings and fixtures
carefully and place them in a location inside the Unit or flat identified by the residents. Except for
the provisions herein, the Contractor is not required to reinstate back the fittings and fixtures after
the completion of the works. The fittings and fixtures affected by the replacement of the waste
stack and/or sanitary branch pipe in the kitchen that the Contractor shall reinstate to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep as follows :
(i) the wall and floor tiles or other affected wall and floor finishes;
(ii) if the existing tiles or other finishes on the dapoh slab are damaged by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall relay the entire top surface of the dapoh slab with the same finishes to
match closely with the existing tiles or other finishes;
(iii) for HDB's rental flats, all fixtures and fittings affected by the works shall be reinstated by the
Contractor.
(d) Water Supply Pipes/PVC Cable Trunking/Ceiling

Skim Coat In Existing Bathroom/Toilet
The Contractor shall provide and lay new water supply pipes in the existing bathroom and/or toilet.
The new water supply pipes shall be connected to the nearest existing water supply pipe joint
outside the bathroom and/or toilet. Where the existing water supply pipe is made of galvanised
iron, it shall be replaced with new UPVC water supply pipes. If the existing water pipe is made of
stainless steel, copper or UPVC, the Contractor shall provide and lay new water pipe, made of the
same material as the existing pipes.
The Contractor shall provide and install new PVC cable trunking to enclose all electrical wiring,
including existing wiring, within the bathroom/toilet.
The Contractor shall skim coat and repaint the entire ceiling of the existing bathroom and/or toilet.
Prior to the skim coat, the contractor shall remove thoroughly all existing paint work including
grinding smooth existing rough finishing and clean the surface. The Contractor shall ensure that
the completed ceiling is smooth and even to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(61)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 62
1.5.7 Occupants' Fixtures and Fittings Affected by the Works (Cont'd)
(e) Records of Fixtures and Fittings
For each flat, the Contractor shall record by way of notes, plans and photographs all fittings and
fixtures identified as likely to be affected by the Works and categorise them into two main
categories :Items affected by replacement of Waste Stack and/or sanitary branch pipes in the
kitchen and/or any other work identified by the SO Rep; and Items affected by all other Works.
(f) General
The Contractor is deemed to have included in his Contract Sum all costs for complying fully with
the requirements of this clause. In the event of a dispute with regard to the requirements and
interpretation of this clause, the decision of the SO Rep shall be final binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor.
1.5.8 Protection of Existing Structures Services and Properties
The Contractor shall provide all necessary barricadings, hoardings shorings and other measures to protect
existing structures services and occupants' properties on site against all risk of damage or loss. Such
protective measures shall be provided where the risk of damage or loss can be reasonably expected or
where directed by the SO Rep. The costs of providing the protective measures shall be deemed included
in the Contractor's Contract Sum.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or loss to existing structures services and occupants'
properties from whatsoever cause arising directly or indirectly out of in relation to or in connection with the
Works.
Where external walls, doors, windows and any other external elements of each flat, switchrooms,
pumprooms etc are affected by the Works, the Contractor shall provide adequate security measures to
safeguard properties, equipment etc. within the said flats or rooms. The Contractor shall also provide all
necessary measures to protect from damage all fittings and fixtures within flats or equipment within the
switchrooms, pumprooms etc. The Contractor shall ensure that such protection and security measures do
not damage the existing structures or elements to which the measures are fixed or attached. Upon
completion of the works within the flats, pumprooms/switchrooms etc., the Contractor shall remove all the
protection and security measures and reinstate or make good the affected existing structures or elements
to their original condition. The Contractor shall submit all details of the protection and security measures to
the SO Rep for written approval before erection of such measures. The approval of the SO Rep shall not
in any way affect the Contractor's liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
In the event of damage or loss to existing structures services or occupants' properties, the Contractor shall
within seven (7) working days from the date of written notification by the Employer at the Contractor's own
cost repair, rectify and make good or replace to the satisfaction of the Employer all or such damage or
loss.
If the Contractor fails to repair, rectify and make good or replace all the damage or loss as aforesaid, the
Employer may exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" and impose charges
against the Contractor for such damage or loss as aforesaid until the same are repaired, rectified and
made good or replaced all to the satisfaction of the Employer.
Without prejudice to the aforesaid, the Employer shall have the right to engage other person(s) or
contractor(s) to repair rectify and make good or replaced all such damage or loss if the same are not
repaired, rectified and make good or replaced after seven (7) working days from the date of written
notification by the Employer, and the cost of repair, rectification and making good or replacement of the
same shall be recovered from the Contractor. In addition, the Employer may exercise its rights under
Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. The aforesaid cost
recovery and imposition of charges shall be deducted from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor or recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.5.9 Care of the Works and Materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of the Works and the safe custody of all materials
delivered to the Site by his specialists, suppliers or sub-contractors, against all risks arising from weather,
negligence, damage or loss until the Works are certified complete by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
also allow for all necessary watching and security lighting.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(62)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 63
1.5.10 Damage to Public/Private Property
In the event damage is caused by the Contractor to public/private services or property such as carparks,
cables, pipes, fittings and fixtures, etc whether by accident or otherwise leading to black-outs or other
nuisance or inconvenience to the public or is likely to bring the Employer into disrepute, all costs and
expenses incurred for necessary reinstatement or repairs shall be recoverable by the Employer from the
Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the
Contractor to the Employer.
1.5.11 Lifts and Transportation of Workers/Materials
The Contractor shall not use any of the existing lifts for transportation of workers and materials. Provision
of other forms of transport for materials and workers shall be made at the Contractor's own cost. No
materials or Workers are allowed to be transported through the internal of the flats or Units except for
materials and workers meant solely for the purpose of executing Works inside the flats/units falling under
the Maximum Allowable Working Days.
1.5.12 Use of Mobile Workplatforms for External Facade Works
The Contractor shall erect mobile workplatforms for the purpose of executing works to the external facade
(ie. front, rear and side elevations) of all building blocks including the erection of and works to the space-
adding items, where applicable. All mobile workplatforms shall comply with Clause 1.9.1(s) "Mobile
Workplatform". The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract sum, all costs and
expenses for the provision of the aforesaid mobile workplatforms.
Where the mobile workplatforms are not suitable for use due to site constraints or other reasons
acceptable to the SO Rep, the Contractor may, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, use other
alternative system to carry out the works to the external facade of building blocks.
1.5.13 Bell System For Passenger/Material Hoist
The Contractor shall provide a bell system for all passenger/material hoists. The bell shall be loud enough
for the hoist operator to hear whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell
activation button at every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that
level.
1.5.14 Hand held hacking tools
All hacking tools shall be approved by the SO Rep. prior to use on the site. Only electricity driven hacking
tools shall be used.
The gross weight of any hacking tool shall not exceed 7kg. The hacking tools shall also comply with the
following criteria:
(a) (weight) x (impact energy per stroke) = 50 kgj

(b) (impact energy per stroke) x (full load impact rate) = 23,500j/min
The Contractor is required to plan his work so that not more than one hacking tool is used at the same
location at any one time.
1.5.15 Cutting Of Steel Member
The Contractor shall not use oxygen and acetylene gas cutting method to cut new and/or existing
structural steel member such as steel piles, steel sections, steel bars, etc., within the site boundary. The
Contractor may use 'Air Plasma Cutting System' or other approved method and/or equipment to cut the
structural steel members on site. The proposed method of cutting of structural steel member on site shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to the commencement of the cutting
operations.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(63)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 64
1.5.16 Pollution or Disturbance
The Contractor shall comply with the relevant provisions of the Clean Air (Amendment) Act 1975 and any
other relevant law, order, instrument, rule, regulation or bye-law. All works shall be carried out without
unreasonable pollution or disturbance. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent or
abate noise dirt dust spillage or the discharge of smoke fumes or obnoxious gases from plant and
equipment on site. When notified by the SO Rep that a particular method of working or plant or equipment
is creating or discharging excessive noise, dirt, dust spillage, smoke, fumes or obnoxious gases, the
Contractor shall stop the use of that method of working or plant or equipment and adopt an alternative
method of working or replace the plant or equipment or introduce other preventive/abatement measures.
No claims from the Contractor shall be entertained on account of the foregoing.
1.5.17 Inspection of the Works
1.5.17.1 Inspections of the Works prior to Certification of Substantial Completion
(a) The Works can be considered as substantially completed only upon:
(i) Compliance with the relevant requirement of the authorities, including obtaining a Temporary
Occupation Permit where applicable; and
(ii) The SO Rep and/or the Employer’s Inspection Team consider the Works to have met the
requirements of the Contract.
(b) The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all defects are
rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract and the
workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels before
requesting for an inspection by the SO Rep and/or the Employer’s Inspection Team for Certification
of Substantial Completion.
(c) The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for an inspection. Upon receipt of the
Contractor’s request, the SO Rep shall arrange for an inspection date with the Employer’s
Inspection Team.
(d) The Works shall be certified substantially complete if the SO Rep and the Employer’s Inspection
Team consider the Works to have met the requirements of the Contract including the approved
workmanship standards and there is no major defects detected during the inspection. Otherwise,
the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding defects for rectification. The Contractor
shall proceed to rectify the defects with due diligence and expedition and without delay. In addition,
the Contractor shall also rectify all other defects that surfaced after the inspection. Upon completion
of the defects rectification, the Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in writing that all outstanding
defects found in the previous inspection, as well as all apparent defects surfaced after the
inspections have been rectified and to request for another inspection.
(e) For works within each flat, notwithstanding the handing over of the works within each flat to the flat
owner, the SO Rep and Employer’s Inspection Team reserves the right to inspect such works prior
to the Certification of Substantial Completion for the entire block or phase in which the flat is
located.
(f) If the works is not certified substantially completed after two inspections, the SO Rep may exercise
the Employer’s rights under Clause 1.6 Nuisance and Irregularities.
(g) The Contractor shall on Certification of Substantial Completion continue to maintain the Works in a
clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation, including carrying out conservancy works, until the
Works is handed over to the Town Council.
(h) The Contractor shall note that the Time for Completion or any extensions thereof is deemed to
include the time required for the aforementioned inspections.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(64)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 65
1.5.17.2 Inspections of the Works prior to Handing Over
For works within the block and works within the precinct (siteworks), the handing over inspection shall be
carried out jointly by the SO Rep, the Contractor, The Employer’s Inspection Team and representatives of
the Town Council. The SO Rep shall arrange for the handing over inspection with the Town Council after
the Certification of Substantial Completion for the Works. The contractor shall rectify any defect
highlighted by the Town Council with due diligence and expedition and without delay.
1.5.18 Equipment/Material Storage
At the end of each working day and as and when required by the SO Rep, all tools, equipment and surplus
materials must be properly kept in storage container at locations to be approved by the SO Rep. No tools,
equipment or surplus materials shall be stored in the open unless otherwise approved by the SO Reps.
1.5.19 Removal and Dumping of Debris, Surplus Materials, Etc
The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily removal of all rubbish, debris, rubbles, excess earth,
surplus materials, unwanted tools and equipment, etc from site including that generated by other
contractors engaged by the Employer. All the rubbish, debris, etc shall be temporarily stored in neat
containers/bins in accordance with ENV requirements and placed at a central location approved by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that all the containers/bins are covered at the end of each working day.
All materials and components removed from existing buildings shall not be re-used unless otherwise
specified.
The Contractor shall dispose of all rubbish, debris, etc at approved dumping grounds. If the Contractor
dumps rubbish, debris, etc on land owned by the Employer or the Government without written permission,
he shall remove all such debris, rubble or excess earth from such land at his own costs and expenses.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his Contract Sum all costs and expenses for the
removal and disposal of the rubbish, debris, etc including all charges levied for the use of the approved
dumping grounds.
1.5.20 Cleaning of Public and HDB Maintained Roads and Drains
The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his sub-contractors
or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as "the Contractor's vehicles") shall not dirty
any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure that all such vehicles are properly cleaned before they move onto these roads.
The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt as to whether any road is a public or HDB
maintained road and the decision of the SO Rep in this respect shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor.
In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's vehicles use the road for
site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean his vehicles before they move
onto the public or HDB maintained road. If the vehicles of other contractors also use such public or HDB
maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide similar washing and cleaning facilities for
these vehicles before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also
provide the same facilities for similar purposes in the event a road abutting the Site becomes a public or
HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the Contractor's or other contractors' vehicles.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(65)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 66
1.5.21 Cleaning Up on Substantial Completion
The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works remove all rubbish, Construction Equipment
and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains and all parts of the
buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit for habitation. The Site and periphery
shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's work.
1.5.22 Rectification of Defects After Certification of Completion
The Contractor shall within fourteen (14) working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep
and at his own costs repair, rectify and make good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all defects,
imperfections, shrinkages and other faults arising from or out of the use of materials or workmanship not
in accordance with the Contract or from neglect or failure by the Contractor to comply with any obligation
on his part under the Contract which may become manifest. The Contractor shall make prior
arrangements with the occupants or the Town Council to carry out such rectification work.
If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the Employer may exercise its right under
Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge on the Contractor.
Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions, the Employer shall have the right to engage other person(s)
or contractor(s) to repair rectify and make good all such defects, imperfections, shrinkages and other
faults if the same are not repaired, rectified and made good after fourteen (14) working days from the date
of written notification by the SO Rep, and the costs and expenses incurred shall be recovered from the
Contractor.
1.5.23 Mechanical Mixer
Mixing of constituent materials shall be by means of mechanical mixer unless otherwise approved by the
SO Rep, for the undermentioned works :
(a) Floor Tiles
Protective waterproofing cement/sand screed and final layer of cement screed for floor tiles.
(b) Wall Tiles
Mortar bedding for wall tiles.
(c) Plaster
All internal and external plastering works.
1.5.24 Pasting of Adhesive Translucent PVC Film at affected Bedroom Window
Before upgrading works commence outside the bedroom windows using the mast climbing platform, the
Contractor shall paste a layer of adhesive translucent PVC film at the bedroom windows panes next to the
mast climbing platform. The effect of the film shall be such that the residents inside the bedrooms will not
be able to see the workers working outside the windows and vice versa. the Contractor shall install one
sample on site to be approved by SO Rep before proceeding with full installation. the Contractor shall
remove the film from the windows after the dismantling of the mast climbing platform. There shall be no
cost adjustment to the Contract if some of the units do not wish to install the film.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(66)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 67
1.6 MATERIALS
1.6.1 Metric Components
All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric
components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO
Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
1.6.2 Materials and Workmanship
The Contractor shall furnish the SO Rep as and when directed, with approved documents to prove that
materials are as specified. The documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following,
such that the authenticity of the materials can be easily ascertained :
(i) shipping documents
(ii) serial numbers
(iii) warranty certificates
In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the
originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly
discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the contract.
Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model numbers
are offered by the contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the finished products
are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by the manufacturer's
warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or any other intermediary,
the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration shall be fully supported by the
manufacturer such that the manufacturer's warranty is maintained.
All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive of
the prevailing amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice.
Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the
supplier.
Such approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract. The
Contractor shall ensure that the materials are free from any defects, damages or any other flaws.
1.6.3 Approval Of Samples And Trade Names
Where trade names or catalogue numbers are specified in the Specifications and/or shown in the
Drawings, they are intended only to serve as a guide to the respective type and quality of material
required. Other material proposed by the Contractor may be used subject to the prior approval of the SO
Rep. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed material to the SO Rep for
approval.
When a sample is approved by the SO Rep and subsequently work is carried out in accordance with this
approved sample, any cost difference resulting from the higher price of the approved sample as compared
with the price of the material as required and/or as shown shall not be payable to the Contractor, unless
the change of material is ordered by the SO Rep.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(67)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 68
1.6.3 Approval Of Samples And Trade Names (Cont'd)
With the exception of lighting luminares, where the procedure for cost recovery are provided for differently,
in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as required and/or as
shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract variation in accordance
with the following table :
Recovery (or Non-Recovery) by the Employer from the Contractor in the event that the price
of the approved material is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown
Material as required Alternative material proposed by
S/N Cost Adjustment
and/or as shown Contractor and approved by SO Rep
1.
On the HDB Materials List On the HDB Materials List No cost recovery
2. )
)
On the HDB Materials List Not On the HDB Materials List
) Cost Recovery
3. ) by the
Not On the HDB Materials List On the HDB Materials List
) Employer from
) the Contractor
Not On the HDB Materials List Not On the HDB Materials List
4. )
)
For lighting luminaires, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material
as required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract
variation regardless of whether or not the approved sample and/or the material as required and/or as
shown are shown in the HDB Materials List. The HDB Materials List is shown in the website http://
www.hdb.gov.sg under the Business Info tab.
For the purposes of this clause only, the applicable HDB Materials List shall be the prevailing HDB
Materials List applicable at the time the Contractor submit the material for approval by the SO Rep.
Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the price of
the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type of material is
specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where more than one type
of material is specified).
The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply with
the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in the
sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor has failed
to point out to the SO Rep.
Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB Materials List or where it is
specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of the SO Rep, such requirements shall not in
any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that the materials used or selected by them:
(a) are free from defects, damages or faults;
(b) are of merchantable quality and fit for their intended purpose; and
(c) comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(68)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 69
1.6.4 AGGREGATES FOR NON-CONCRETING WORKS
Where the contractor intends to buy imported aggregates that fail the S2 or S3 Tests under the BCA
testing regime and use these aggregates for non-concreting works must seek prior written permission
from the SO Rep.
The contractor is required to inform BCA (Strategic Materials Department, Attn: Officer-in-Charge, e-mail
to tan_wee_kwang@bca.gov.sg and ken_lee@bca.gov.sg) of such purchases by providing the following
details and cc a copy of the e-mail to the relevant officer of the Employer within 7 days of approval from
the SO Rep to use the aggregates for the said project:
i. Project Name ;
ii. Project Location ;
iii. Contact details of relevant officer of the Employer overseeing the project ;
iv. Name of Importer of the Aggregates ;
v. Quantity of Aggregates (Tonnes) Delivered ;
vi. Date of Delivery ;
vii. Intended Non-concreting Use of Aggregates ;
viii. The Contractor shall declare that he has obtained the SO Rep's permission for the intended non-
concreting use ;
ix. Location and Quantity of Aggregates Used ;
x. Remarks
1.6.5 PSB Quality Certificate
Where two or more alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor under Clause 1.6.3 "Approval of
Samples and Trade Names", the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to the use of a
material that is approved under any of PSB quality certification schemes.
1.6.6 Precautions against Materials being taken out of Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of cement and all other materials delivered to the
Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being taken out
of the Site. The SO Rep will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the Contractor,
his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is deemed to have
provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement or any other material
is taken out of the construction site without specific written approval from the SO Rep, this shall be
deemed to be an irregularity and inter-alia, the right of the Contractor to compensation for price
fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.
1.6.7 Approval for the use of Ready-Mixed Concrete
The Contractor shall obtain the ready mixed concrete from any of the pre-approved suppliers. Provide the
name and address of the ready mixed concrete suppliers to the SO Rep. The use of ready-mixed
concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep. All Delivery Orders for the
ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Resident Technical Officer and
submitted to the SO Rep.
Failure to inform the SO Rep or non-compliance with the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep for the
use of ready-mixed concrete shall, inter-alia, result in the Contractor forfeiting his right to claim
compensation for price fluctuations for all materials.
1.6.8 Colour Of Works/Materials
The finishing colour of all works/materials shall be selected and approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall seek approval from the SO Rep for the colours of all works/materials prior to the
commencement of such works or purchase of such materials.
1.6.9 Delivery and Preparation of Materials
All materials, cement and sand delivered to within the block shall be properly packed, sealed and clearly
labelled. Delivery of materials in loose, unlabelled packing to within the block is not allowed.
Cement and sand shall be mixed by mechanical mixer. Mixing by manual method is not allowed.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(69)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 70
1.6.10 Storage Facility for Cement
Where storage of cement is required, the Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities at the Site to
accommodate cement up to two weeks’ requirement for the Works.
The store to accommodate the cement shall be constructed so that each consignment of cement can be
separately stacked. Each consignment of cement shall also be used in the same sequence as they are
delivered, that is, on a `first-in-first-out' basis.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cement stored in his site is kept dry and properly protected against
loss or damage at all times.
1.6.11 SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS
1.6.11.1 Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Employer
Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the Contractor shall have the option to purchase
the following concreting materials from the Employer:
(a) Ordinary Portland Cement

(b) 20mm Granite Aggregate
(c) Concreting Sand
For the purpose of this clause, these materials to be supplied by the Employer shall hereinafter be
referred to as the “Protected Materials” and their respective quantities indicated by the Contractor shall
hereinafter be referred as the “Protected Quantity” for the purpose of this clause only.
1.6.11.2 Quantity To Be Supplied
The Contractor shall indicate the respective quantities of the above materials to be purchased from the
Employer in Annex C of the Form of Tender, subject to the Maximum Protected Quantity specified therein.
The Maximum Protected Quantity indicated in Annex C of the Form of Tender does not include the
quantity of concreting materials required for precast concrete components that are supplied by the
Employer.
The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the "Conditions
For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A10A. The Contractor shall
be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in compliance with the
requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum.
The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to nominate
the Employer’s supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If the
Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct the
Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall bear any
additional cost and expense so incurred.
1.6.11.3 Quantity To be Protected
The quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in the Maximum
Protected Quantity (MPQ) or Protected Quantity (PQ) whichever applicable (hereinafter referred to as the
"Protected Quantity". The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic Price.
In a situation where the Contractor is required to obtain the supply of precast concrete components from
the Employer, the quantity of concreting materials required for these precast concrete components is not
included in the Protected Quantity
The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those in the HDB's
Monthly Price Lists which are posted on the cxSurbana.com website.
The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price for the Protected Materials and
Protected Quantity, at the date Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender (hereinafter
referred to as the "Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender closes on the 14th
day of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price
prevailing on the last day of the preceding month.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(70)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 71
1.6.11 SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS (CONT’D)
1.6.11.3 Quantity To be Protected (Cont’d)
In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the Time for
Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, a shortfall
recovery shall be effected using the following formula:
Amount of Shortfall Recovery = PB x (QP - QA)
where:PB = Basic Price;

QP = Protected Quantity
(MPQ or PQ where applicable);
QA = Actual quantity purchased under this clause;
In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the SO Rep has
directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources, such purchases shall not be
covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the purpose of ascertaining for shortfall
quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's own source shall be included in QA when
determining whether the Contractor has obtained in full the Protected Quantity.
For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence of the delivery
of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO Rep.
1.6.11.4 Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Contractor’s Sources
The Contractor shall be allowed to use his own supply only after the Protected Quantity or Approved
Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, has been used up. The Contractor shall be required to seek
the SO Rep’s approval in writing prior to using his own supply.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the quality of the concreting materials obtained from his own supply
shall fully comply with the Specifications.
1.6.12 Credit Terms and Conditions for Employer's Materials
Contractors who purchase materials directly supplied by the Employer may be allowed a 2-month credit
facility from the date of delivery. The Employer reserves the right to deliver the materials to the
Contractor's site or other designated locations even if he fails to re-confirm his earlier purchase order to
the Employer. The cost of the materials so delivered will be deducted by the Employer from the
Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the
The Employer reserves its sole and unfettered discretion to withdraw such credit facility without any prior
notice to the Contractor under any circumstance as it deems fit, including but not limited to when a
garnishee order is served on the Employer in respect of any contracts the Contractor has with the
Employer or when a petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is presented by or made against the
Contractor. Under no circumstances shall the Employer be liable to the Contractor's claim for any cost,
expense, profit and loss arising out of or in consequence of the withdrawal of such credit facility.
When such credit facility is withdrawn, the Contractor has to pay the Employer in cash for all materials he
has ordered for the Works before the Employer will deliver the materials to site or allow the Contractor to
collect the materials.
When the garnishee order is discharged or withdrawn or made absolute or when the petition in bankruptcy
or winding up order is withdrawn, the Contractor may apply to the Employer in writing, with documentary
proof, to have the credit facility reinstated. The Employer reserves the right to reinstate credit facility to
the Contractor and the Employer is under no obligation to provide any explanation if it decides not to
reinstate the credit facility. The decision by the Superintending Officer in this case shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
1.6.13 Ordering Materials
The Contractor shall place orders for all materials required for the Works within a month from the date of
the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay owing to his failure
to order materials on time and no extension of time shall be granted on account of such delays.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(71)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 72
APPENDIX A10A

480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH
HDB HUB
SINGAPORE 310480
CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER
1 DEFINITION
1.1 In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and expressions
shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires :
(a) "Employer" : means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of

Singapore.
(b) "Materials" : means Ordinary Portland Cement, Concreting Sand and 20mm
Aggregate to be supplied by the Employer.
(c) "Surbana" : means Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd., the company
engaged by the Employer for managing the supply &
distribution of Materials to the Contractor.
(d) "SO Rep" : means the Superintending Officer's Representative. In addition,

for the purposes of managing the supply and distribution of
Materials to the Contractor only, shall also means the General
Manager of Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd.
(e) "Destination of Delivery" : means the Contract Site and/or any other places
or "Site" within Singapore as approved by the SO Rep to which the
Materials shall be delivered.
(f) “Employer’s Supplier” : shall mean the Employer’s supplier of the Materials who shall be
responsible for delivering the Materials to the Site.
1.2 Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
2 SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT
The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as
requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be
provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.
3 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS REQUIREMENT
The Contractor shall complete Form A as attached hereafter and submit by fax to Surbana as indicated at
the top of the Form. The Form must be submitted ONE WEEK before the commencement of the Contract
for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to the receipt of
the duly completed Form.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(72)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 73
APPENDIX A10A
Page 2
4 MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED
4.1 The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required in separate order forms.
4.2 All monthly order forms shall reach Surbana within the time indicated in the order forms.
4.3 The monthly order forms may be obtained from Surbana at the following address:
Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd.
Tampines Avenue 10
Singapore 520000
Tel : 67861618
Fax : 67865996
4.4 Late and/or additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport and
priority will be given to daily schedule. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption
to the works as a result of late and/or additional orders. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working
days for the processing of any late and/or additional order.
4.5 The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires based
on the projected progress of work. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted by the Contractor in the
monthly orders, the SO Rep reserves the right to deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are
the quantities reflective of the Contractor's work progress. In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the
Contractor of the allocated quantities.
4.6 The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the Employer’s
Supplier’s weighbridges.
4.7 The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly orders
greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing to Surbana.
4.8 Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at
least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional
order duly signed by SO Rep before sending to Surbana (Please refer to 4.4)
4.9 The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.
5 DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
5.1 Notwithstanding the submission by the Contractor of the aforementioned Schedule of Materials
Requirement and the monthly orders of Materials or the revisions thereof, the Contractor shall place daily
orders of Materials directly with Surbana.
5.2 The Contractor shall give at least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for the daily delivery or
cancellation of supply. The notice shall reach Surbana before 4.00pm on weekdays and 12 noon on
Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(73)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 74
APPENDIX A10A
Page 3
5.3 The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any
delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own
arrangement with the Employer’s Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours.
5.4 All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry
loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load
before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as “Stipulated
Contract Quantity”). As long as the remaining quantity before exceeding the stipulated quantities are not
more than 20 tonnes, the Contractor is deemed to have met the full requirements of the Stipulated
Contract Quantity and there shall not be any cost recovery.
5.5 The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 2). If the
Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the
Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay.
5.5.1 The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform Surbana immediately and
rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery Orders. The SO
Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default happens more than
three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3) defaults. The SO Rep
reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7) days if the Contractor was
found to have failed to inform Surbana that they have affixed the wrong Company stamp. The Employer
shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such suspensions.
Table 2
Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used
Information to be produced on
Destination of Delivery
Contractor's Rubber Stamp
1. Contractor's Company Name

Contract Site 2. Contract Site
3. Contract No.

2. Contract Site
Ready-Mixed Company 3. Contract No.
4. RMC Company
5. RMC Site

2. Contract Site
Batching Plant Site
3. Contract No.
4. Batching Plant Site
5.5.2 When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise) with
the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by the
Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been received
and accepted by the Contractor.
5.6 The Contractor shall immediately inform and request Surbana for instructions should there be any load of
Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order without the
consent of Surbana . The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action against the Contractor for
any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders.
5.7 The Contractor may submit a report to Surbana for appropriate action if the load of Material is unloaded at
a wrong place within the Site. This notwithstanding, the Contractor shall still acknowledge receipt of the
Material.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(74)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 75
APPENDIX A10A
Page 4
6 QUALITY OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED
The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.
7 WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed
companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.
8 SKETCH MAP AND ACCESS ROAD
8.1 The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in the space provided in Form A, showing the location of the
Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be delivered.
8.2 The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas
as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employer’s Supplier. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employer’s Supplier.
8.3 The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the
Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor shall
take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform Surbana accordingly before delivery of
Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption of the work as a
result of this aforesaid suspension.
8.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the Ministry Of The
Environment to the Employer’s Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the
Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties and
liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer’ Supplier(s)
before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.
9 ABSENCE OF SITE REPRESENTATIVE OR IN ACCESSIBLE ACCESS
If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the
absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform Surbana of any
termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place, the
load of Material will be returned to Surbana . For such cases, the SO Rep reserves the right to recover
from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a charge on the
Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
10 SIPHONING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be
taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(75)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 76
APPENDIX A10A
Page 5
11 LOSS OF DELIVERY ORDERS
If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery
Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.
12 METHOD OF PAYMENT
The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates
specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor by
the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor.
13 MISCONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN
The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at
the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employer’s Supplier’s drivers in the delivery and unloading of
Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all the
cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints is
proven to be unfounded.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(76)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 77
APPENDIX A10A
Page 6
FORM A-1
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD FOR OFFICIAL USE
BCC Code Tpt Zone Site
(Manager:
Surbana Construction Resources Pte. Ltd.
Fax :67865996) Contract No. Arch Ref
Checked By Certified By
1) PARTICULARS OF CONTRACT
Nature of Contract (Building/CE/Others)*
Contract No. Expiry of the Time For Completion

Site Contractor's Office Address
Site Office Tel. No: Office Tel. No:

Site Office Fax. No: Consultant Project Manager
Site Rep's Name Resident Technical Officer
(*) Delete where not applicable
2) CAPACITY OF SITE STOCKYARD FOR

20mm Aggregate (Tonne) Concreting Sand (Tonne)
Cement (Tonne)
3) TIME FOR DELIVERY

Weekdays Saturdays
From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m. From 8.00 a.m. to 6.00 p.m.
4) SAMPLE OF RUBBER STAMP

(Separate forms must be used if there are multiple locations for each of these destination)
Contract Site Ready-Mixed Company
Batching Plant Site
LUPG09/S1.DOC(77)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 78
APPENDIX A10A
Page 7
FORM A-2
5) SKETCH MAP
[Separate forms MUST be used for different "Destination of Delivery" and/or
multiple locations of each "Destination of Delivery"]
The sketch below shows the location of our work and stockpile area where the material should be delivered.
Site Contract No. P/ /
Contractor's Stamp Date
LUPG09/S1.DOC(78)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 79
APPENDIX A10A
Page 8
FORM A-3
SCHEDULE OF MATERIAL'S REQUIREMENT
SITE : ___________________________________________
CONTRACT NO. : __________________________________
CONCRETING SAND 20MM AGGREGATE

S/N MTH/YR CEMENT (T)
(T) (T)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TOTAL
Note : Please fill in the month/yr and the quantities of each month's requirements for the whole contract.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(79)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 80
1.7 LABOUR
1.7.1 Labour Laws
The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays in
accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for inspection by
the SO Rep.
1.7.2 Keeping Records of Workmen
The Contractor shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of non-citizen workmen. Work
Permits from MOM shall be obtained for these workmen. The Contractor shall be held solely liable for and
shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all actions against the Employer for employing foreign workmen
without permits.
The Contractor shall maintain and update daily records of all workmen engaged on Site. These records
shall include the following information :
(a) Name of Workmen (and alias if any)

(b) Identity Card No./Passport No.
(c) Address
(d) Work Permit No., if any
(e) Expiry date of work permit
(f) Dates
(g) Tasks assigned
(h) Location of work
(i) Remarks
This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Severe action will
be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned information of any
worker found at the Site.
1.7.3 Employment of Illegal Immigrants
For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrants" shall refer to any person who enters the Republic of
Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or re-
enactment thereof.
The Contractor shall ascertain the legitimacy of all Foreign Workers employed by him and/or any sub-
contractor prior to employment and throughout the duration of the Works. Clarification as to the legitimacy
of Foreign Workers may be made with the Immigration Authority, the Ministry of Labour and/or the Police.
The Contractor shall ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed by him and/or any sub-contractor in
the execution of the Works. The Employer shall not be responsible for any such act or acts by the
Contractor and/or any of his sub-contractors and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for all
consequences arising thereof.
1.7.4 Employment Of Skilled Tilers
The contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good tiling workmanship. They shall
possess Skill Evaluation Certificate on tiling works from local institutions. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence work.
These workers are also required to wear identification pass upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall
be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the contract, by their colour, size or pattern
LUPG09/S1.DOC(80)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 81
1.8 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.8.1 Maintenance of Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall during the progress of the Works put the Construction Equipment to proper use and
carry out regular maintenance to avoid any breakdown. No extension of time shall be granted for any
breakdown or misuse of the Construction Equipment.
1.8.2 Contractor's Construction Equipment
All mechanical Construction Equipment used in the execution of the Works shall be of such type, size and
of such method of working as the SO Rep shall approve.
The SO Rep's approval to the use of mechanical Construction Equipment shall not be unreasonably
withheld, but if in the SO Rep's opinion, circumstances arise which make it desirable that the use of
Construction Equipment should be suspended either temporarily or permanently, the Contractor shall
change the method of performing the Works affected at his own cost and he shall be deemed to have no
cause for claim against the Employer on account of having to carry out the Works by another method nor
shall he be deemed to have cause for claim if any other instruction issued by the SO Rep results in the
mechanical Construction Equipment having either to stand idle for a period of any duration whatsoever or
to be removed.
This Clause shall apply also to Construction Equipment which, in the opinion of the SO Rep, are not as
quiet in operating as the circumstances seem to the SO Rep to warrant.
Use every possible means to prevent noise and annoyance to the residents of the neighbourhood in which
the Works and the Contractor's worksites are situated and all machinery shall be of such design and so
arranged to be reasonably free of noise in working.
In the event of air compressors or pneumatic tools being used on the Works, the Contractor shall, if and
when required, arrange for such compressors or tools to be fitted with silencers of approved design or
adopt other means approved by the SO Rep for the purpose of reducing noise as far as possible.
The Contractors shall not be allowed to make any extra claim for work or expense incurred in complying
with the requirements of this Clause.
1.8.3 Movement of Construction Equipment
All heavy machinery and other Construction Equipment, such as mobile platforms, cranes, excavator,
grader, etc required for the Works shall not be removed from Site without the SO Rep's notice. If progress
of work is held up due to the absence of certain particular machinery, the Employer shall be at liberty to
bring in the required machinery from other sources and the cost thus incurred plus Employer's charges
shall be recovered from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor
to the Employer.
1.8.4 Works Within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
The Contractor shall comply with the Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice for Railway
Protection and the Mass Rapid Transit (Rail Protection, Restricted Activities) Regulations for construction
of the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone and railway safety zone. The
Contractor shall submit proposals on the effective measures for the protection of Mass Rapid Transit
below, at grade and above ground structre together with the detail of activities of mobile cranes, tower
cranes and other mechanical equipment adjacent to the Mass Rapid Transit line structures to the SO Rep
for approval at least one month prior to the use of such Construction Equipment. No jib or lifting appliance
or any other moving or stationary part of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall encroach within
6.0m on plan from the edge of the nearest Mass Rapid Transit above-ground or at-grade structure unless
the Construction Equipment is restricted beneath the structure. The foundation of the mechanical
Construction Equipment shall be certified structurally sound and adequate by the Contractor's
Professional Engineer prior to its installation.
The contractor shall engage a PE to prepare necessary engineering works method statement and
submission, carry out full time standing supervision and other duties of the Qualified Person as stipulated
in the Code of Practice for Railway Protection and Rapid Transit Systems Act (Chapter 263A) for any
engineering works within the railway protection zone.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(81)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 82
1.8.4 Works Within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone (Cont'd)
Contractor shall engage a PE to certify that the access and the foundation of all mechanical Equipment to
be structurally sound, prepare necessary engineering works method statement and submission as
stipulated in Code of Practice for Railway Protection and Guide to Carry Out Restricted Activities within
Railway Protection and Safety Zone.
Contractor shall engage a PE to carry out full time standing supervision for crane or other mechanical
equipments operation within the railway protection and safety zone as stipulated in Guide to Carry Out
Restricted Activities within Railway Protection and Safety Zone by LTA.
Auto cut-off system shall be installed for tower cranes to prevent the top of the boom to swing closer than
6.0m from the edge of the viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes must always be pointed away from the
Mass Rapid Transit line structure. The temporary structure shall be stable and level for the Construction
Equipment to move on. Regular checks shall be carried out to ensure that all mechanised Construction
Equipment are in good working condition at all times. Only experienced, trained and competent operators
shall be employed for mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment. Temporary height
restriction gantry with signboard shall be installed 6.0m away from the edge of both sides of the viaduct
structure for any access passing underneath the Mass Rapid Transit line structures.
1.8.5 Construction Equipment
1.8.5.1 Technical Specifications
(A) Concrete Pump
The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have an
output of at least 40m3 per hour of compacted concrete.
(B) Crane
The crane shall be either crawler, truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the
crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years.
The lifting capacity of the crawler, truck mounted or rough terrain shall be at least 20 metric tonnes.
The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes.
The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall be
defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to roof of all building blocks.
(C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist
The design of a passenger cum material hoist shall be in accordance with BS 4465 or other
approved equivalent standards. The payload shall be at least one tonne and the travel speed of
the cage shall be at least 25m per minute. For passenger cum material hoist serving buildings of
more than 16 storeys, each hoist shall have a minimum of 2 winches. The Contractor shall ensure
that the foundations, the masts and tie-backs for the passenger cum material hoist shall be
designed by a PE. The design calculations and detailings shall also be certified by the PE. The
Contractor shall also ensure that his PE submit a Certificate of Supervision to the SO Rep not later
than two weeks after the completion of installation of each hoist.
The age of the hoist used on the Site shall not exceed 10 years.
The hoist shall be provided and commissioned for use before concreting the sixth storey for
building blocks of six storeys and above.
The Contractor shall provide an overloading device to detect and stop the current if the hoist is
overloaded.
The Contractor shall provide a siren warning device to warn users that the hoist is ascending or
descending.
The Contractor shall provide a “one-way” locking device to the swing gate at every landing of the
hoist in accordance with the details shown in the Drawing or sketch attached.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(82)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 83
1.8.5.1 Technical Specifications (Cont’d)
(C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist (Cont’d)
The Contractor shall provide a bell system for all hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist
operator to hear whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation
button at every storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that
level.
Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the
following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist
shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the conditions
of parts/components by the Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall
be rectified immediately; and
(iii) Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised

Examiner.
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by the
SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(i) Require an authorised hoist operator to check the hoist daily before operation;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three months;
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the connecting devices between
parts/components and condition of parts/components once in every three months. Any
Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and
(iv) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once
in every three months.
(v) The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in a good working
conditions by the Authorised Examiner every month.
(D) Rough Terrain Forklift
The rough terrain forklift shall have a lifting capacity of at least 2 tonnes and a lifting height of at
least 3.6m.
(E) Formwork System
Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all
formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance. Trial
setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after approval of
submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of rigid steel props or
steel frames of adequate strength.
1.8.5.2 Maintenance
All Construction Equipment provide to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and the
Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations vis-a-vis the said Construction Equipment.
(A) Mobile Crane
Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane
shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the condition of
parts/ components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall be
rectified immediately; and
(iii) Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised
Examiner.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(83)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 84
1.8.5 Construction Equipment (Cont'd)
1.8.5.2 Maintenance (Cont'd)
(A) Mobile Crane (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
(i) Require a crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The operator shall
have a Certificate of Competence;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months; and
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once
every six months.
(B) Tower Crane
Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane
shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the condition of
parts/ components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall be
rectified immediately;
(iii) Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Authorised
Examiner; and
(iv) Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised
Examiner.
The contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
(i) Require a crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The operator shall
have a Certificate of Competence;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months;
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the installation and functioning of the safety
devices once in every six months; and
(iv) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane once
in every six months.
For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the new
height, the Contractor shall engage the Authorised Examiner to conduct test and thorough visual
examination on the crane.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(84)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 85
1.8.5 Construction Equipment (Cont'd)
1.8.5.2 Maintenance (Cont’d)
(C) Passenger Cum Material Hoist
Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the
following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist
shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/ components and the conditions
of parts/ components by the Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall
be rectified immediately; and
(iii) Certificate of test/ thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised
Examiner.
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
(i) Require an authorised hoist operator to check the hoist daily before operation;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three months;
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the connecting devices between parts/
components and condition of parts/ components once in every three months. Any Defect
found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and
(iv) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist once
in every three months.
(D) Authorised Examiner
For the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses, the Authorised Examiner is any person
who is approved by the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health of the Ministry Of Manpower
by a Certificate in writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations and tests on lifting
equipment in accordance with Section 19 to 22 of the Workplace Safety And Health (General
Provision) Regulation 2006.
1.8.6 Approved Construction Equipment
All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved
Suppliers registered with the HDB. Such Construction Equipment are :
(a) mobile crane;

(b) tower crane;
(c) gondola;
(d) mast climbing platform; and
(e) metal scaffold.
The HDB Materials List can be inspected during office hours at the Procurement Office, Basement 1, HDB
Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh.
For Construction Equipment from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be registered
with the HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at the Site.
Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the SO Rep
may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there shall be no
adjustment to the Contract Sum.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(85)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 86
1.9 SAFETY
1.9.1 Site Safety Measures
The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Workplace Safety And Health Act (hereafter
referred to as the “the Act” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and its
Subsidiary Legislations including the provisions of the Workplace Safety and Health (Construction)
Regulations (hereafter referred to as the “the Regulations” for the purposes of this clause including all
subclauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto.
The subsidiary legislation are:-
a) The Workplace Safety and Health (General Provisions) Regulations
b) The Workplace Safety and Health (Registration of Factories) Regulations
c) The Workplace Safety and Health (First-Aid) Regulations
d) The Workplace Safety and Health (Exemption) Order
e) The Workplace Safety and Health (Composition of Offences) Regulations
f) The Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations
g) The Workplace Safety and Health (Risk Management) Regulations
Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate Of
registration, under the act subsidiary legislation, The Workplace Safety And Health (Registration Of
Factories) Regulations
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any work, act or
operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall not permit any person to do
anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice.
The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions shall be
properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor
shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when safety provisions
are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions to be used unless he has satisfied
himself that the provisions are safe. The Contractor shall submit a safety and health management system
to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the
commencement of the Works.
The Contractor shall submit the following to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
The submissions of safety and health management system shall comply with and kept in the site office
and made available for reference at all times.
The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, exit/entry points of buildings and passenger
cum material hoist area.
The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as required,
certified by his Professional Engineer (hereinafter referred to as "PE" for the purpose of this Clause), for
approval at least one week before the commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The
approval of the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor and his PE of the need to ensure the adequacy
and sufficiency of the safety provisions.
The Contractor shall engage external independent auditors to conduct a 6 monthly audit on the worksite
Safety and Health Management System to comply with the Act and its Subsidiary Legislations.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the safety
provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the HDB.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(86)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 87
1.9.1.1 Regulations and Requirements Compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the following requirements are
strictly complied with at all times :
(a) Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all metal access scaffold for all multi-storey
carpark/garage or buildings other than residential of 4 storeys and above or 12.0m in height and
above. This requirement may be waived, subject to approval by the SO Rep, where industrialised
and semi-industrialised methods of construction together with peripheral safety nets are employed.
Under such case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall allow
free use of the scaffold by all sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other tradesmen employed
by the Employer or the Contractor.
The metal access scaffold shall be of the type approved by the MOM. It shall comply with the
requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any
amendment or re-enactment thereto. The metal access scaffold shall be prezinc galvanised or
other approved by the SO Rep.
The metal access scaffold shall be erected, or substantially extended to, or dismantled, by
approved scaffold contractor, in accordance with the latest Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations. The
metal access scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to the CP14 and
the latest Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor
(herein referred to as “PE”) and they shall be removed only with the permission of the SO Rep. The
PE’s drawings and calculations shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the erection
and dismantling. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC
structure. The submission shall be submitted before the commencement of the works.
The metal access scaffold, for access and finishing work, shall be erected ahead of the structural
work (including the construction of water tank rooms), from the second storey and shall be
supported by cantilevered platforms erected in accordance with the drawings of the PE. The
cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1m from the edge of the building or any other distance
approved by the SO Rep. Where the structure does not allow the metal access scaffold to be
erected from the second storey or where the building is less than 12m in height, the Contractor
may erect the metal access scaffold from the first storey subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The material used for the metal working platform shall be prezinc galvanised steel and comply with
SS 280. The working platform shall be adequately secured to the metal access scaffold frame at
the required levels. The connections between metal working platform and metal access scaffold
frame, and between the working platforms shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. For
any portion of the working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use
timber working platform subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The working platform shall be
complete with at least 90mm high coloured toeboards and metal guardrails of at least 1.1m above
the platform. The vertical distance between any 2 adjacent guardrails shall not exceed 600mm.
Any working platform or workplace and the guardrail immediately above it shall not exceed 600mm.
The working platform shall be at least 500mm in width and distance between the edge of the
platform shall not exceed 300mm from building edge
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire
external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence closely.
A 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there shall be no
opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired
immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Maximum mesh size : 15mm square
(ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D
(iii) Minimum 12 ply
(iv) Knot Type : Single or English knot
The overlying screening net shall be installed on the entire external face of the access scaffold and
its installation shall follow the erection of the metal access scaffold closely. The SO Rep shall have
the preogative to decide on the colour of the net al at the Contrctors cost and expense.
The metal access scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tie-backs.
All tie-backs shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification
LUPG09/S1.DOC(87)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 88
1.9.1.1 Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont’d)
(b) Personal Protective Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all workmen
employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective equipment
comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure that all
equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The Contractor shall
record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen in the prescribed forms obtainable from the
HDB, and such record shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times.
The colour code of safety helmets provided by the Contractor shall comply with the requirements
of the Regulations. Three mirrors of sizes 600mm x 1500mm are to be installed for workers to
check their personal protective equipment during Tool Box Meeting. The location of these mirrors
are to be approved by the SO Rep.
(c) Safety (Anti-fall) Net
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a safety net system to catch person(s) falling whilst
working in any location from where he would be liable to fall.
The safety net system shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor
may propose an alternative system, to be certified by his PE, to the SO Rep for approval. He shall
submit his proposal at least one week prior to its installation.
The safety net shall comply with SS292 or other approved standards. The net shall be of sufficient
size and strength to catch any person for whose protection it is to be used and the net shall be
located as to cover the area of the possible fall.
The Contractor shall conduct a sample test on the safety net system, comprising the net and its
supporting structures, before it is installed. Subsequent tests shall be carried out when directed by
the SO Rep.
For all building blocks four storeys and above, a peripheral safety net system shall be provided.
Initially the net shall be installed at the second storey. As construction progresses, it shall be
repositioned to follow the topmost working level but shall be kept at not more than 6m below it. It
shall be removed only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Where access scaffolding is used, or any alternative safety measure approved by the SO Rep is
used, a peripheral safety net system is not required.
(d) Working Platforms
The Contractor shall construct temporary working platforms, complete with toe boards and middle
and top rails, to the design and drawings of his PE. The working platforms shall be at least 635mm
wide and shall be used for :
(i) erecting and dismantling of formwork of columns, walls and peripheral beams;
(ii) transferring of formwork or other materials from one working level to another; and
(iii) external finishing works.
(e) Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids
The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his PE, for the erection
of lift shafts. The lift shaft platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys.
The lift shaft platforms shall be left in place until approval is given by the SO Rep to remove them.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(88)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 89
(f) Overhead Shelters
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of entry/exit to
existing and new buildings of two or more storeys in height. The overhead shelters shall be
constructed immediately below the second storey. The overhead shelter shall project at least 3m
from the building edge and shall be at least 1.5m wide. The overhead shelters shall be made of
curved metal roofing with diameter of at least 1.5m or pitched metal roofing with a slope greater
than one in two, with timber hoarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid base. All
passageways shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of mud, water and debris.
The overhead shelter shall be designed in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements by
a PE. The PE's drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for the approval of the SO
Rep at least one month prior to its construction.
The access to, along and egress from the entry/ exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and
accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances causing slipping and tripping.
Overhead shelters shall also be provided for person(s) exposed to falling objects.
(g) Peripheral Overhead Shelters
The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of more than 15m in height.
It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The overhead
shelter shall be at least 2m wide and erected at a height not more than 5m from the base of the
building, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner edge. The
overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75-kg point load.
(h) Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations
The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open sides of buildings and
excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with 90mm
high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point load of 50
kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised removal.
(i) Mechanical Suspended Scaffold
Mechanical suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair and redecoration
and minor work. Where mechanical suspended scaffold system is to be used, the Contractor shall
first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the WSHA from MOM and a written approval from
the SO Rep prior to its installation and usage. The mechanical suspended scaffold system shall
comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code Of Practice for Suspended Scaffold
CP20 and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. Where the use of access scaffolding is not
stipulated, suspended scaffold may be used for finishing work. Life lines shall be provided for the
mechanical suspended scaffold users to anchor their safety belts.
(j) Authorised Operators For Machinery And Vehicles
The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for his site machinery. The operator for the
machinery shall possess a Skill Evaluation Certificate (SEC) from the BCA Academy or other
approved training centre. For those machinery whereby BCA Academy or other approved training
centre does not conduct courses or practical tests for machinery operator, the Contractor shall only
authorise an experienced and trained operator who has at least a minimum of 2 years experience
in operating the machinery.
In the case of vehicles, which are operated within the contract boundary, the authorised operator
shall possess a minimum valid Class 3 driving licence from Land Transport Authority or an
equivalent from their originating countries. The equivalent of a minimum Class 3 driving licence
shall first be verified by respective embassy in Singapore and thereafter submitted to the SO Rep
for approval.
The Contractor shall record the particulars of the operators for the machinery and vehicles in the
prescribed form obtainable from the HDB. The Contractor shall submit the record to SO Rep for
approval one week before the commencement of the Works. The record shall be updated and kept
on the Site and made available for inspection at all times.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(89)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 90
(k) Safety Guards
The Contractor shall provide metal safety guards to all moving machine parts that are likely to
injure a workman.
(l) Safety Training
(i) Safety Orientation Course
The Contractor shall employ workmen who possess valid Safety Orientation Course
Certificates. The Contractor shall be required to ensure that his workmen attend a
prescribed safety refresher course at an interval of time to be decided by the SO Rep.
(ii) Safety Training Course
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall at its own cost and expense send his
employees/staff as stipulated hereunder to accredited training providers for appropriate
safety training as shown hereunder:
• Safety Training Courses Conducted by Accredited Training Providers
Course Applicable to
Specialist Diploma in Workplace Safety and
Safety Personnel for registration as
Health/Workplace Safety & Health Officer
Workplace Safety & Health Officer(WSHO)
(WSHO)Training Course
Construction Safety Course for Project Chairman of Safety Committees,
Managers Project Managers, Engineers
Chairman of Safety Committees, Managers,
Safety Management Course
Engineers and Supervisory Staff
Training Course for Safety Committee
Safety Committee Members
Members
Advanced Certificate in Workplace Safety and
Workplace Safety and Health Coordinator
Health
Building Construction Safety Supervisor Building Construction Foremen and
Course Supervisors
SIC (Manhole) for Supervisors Supervisors
Lifting Supervisors Safety Course Supervisors and Foremen
Industrial First Aid Course Workers, Safety Personnel and Supervisors
Industrial First Aid Refresher Course Trained First Aiders
Crawler Crane Operator Course :
- New Entrant Programme
Crane Operators
- Refresher Programme
- Familiarisation Programme
Erection of Metal Scaffold Erectors
Slingers/Riggers Course Workers, Foremen and Supervisors
Tower Crane Operator Course :
- New Entrant Programme Crane Operators
- Familiarisation Programme
Supervision of Metal Scaffold Erection Supervisors
Climbing Work Platform Operation Supervisors, Workers and Operators
Explosive Powered Tools Operation Workers and Operations
The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this
clause including top management at the work Site.
Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff. Further training
shall be required where :
(i) Employees/staff are transferred or where employees/staff take on new

responsibilities or where a change in the work activity or work environment could
arise; and
(ii) There is a change in the work equipment or systems of work in use.
Training shall be repeated periodically to ensure continued competence.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(90)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 91
1.9.1.1 (m) Tower Cranes And Other Tall Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall
construction equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of
Defence. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall construction equipment shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force limiting device,
speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes.
The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings of the tower cranes to the MOM and the SO
Rep for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The slewing radii of the tower cranes
shall not overlap, unless the tower cranes are equipped with slewing limit switches and their jibs
are at different levels. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action before
the jib slews into the overlap zone.
The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without the
written approval of the SO Rep. The free standing mast of a tower crane must be certified by the
Contractor's PE prior to its use on the Site.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation support
and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his PE, together with technical information to
the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their construction. The Contractor's PE shall
certify that the free standing height of the mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tie-
back is installed. The mast and boom of tower cranes shall be similarly certified by the
Contractor's PE when they are first installed on site. Free standing tower cranes must also be
certified by Contractor's PE prior to its use. No tower crane shall be installed and supported on the
constructed RC structure of a building.
The crane operator must carry out daily inspection of the crane prior to its use.
Notwithstanding the validity of its test certificates, the tower cranes must have an overhaul check
by an "Authorised Examiner" prior to its installation on site. Test certificates, overhaul certificates,
3-monthly maintenance certificates, all inspection records by the crane operator and the
"Authorised Examiner" must be properly documented, kept on Site and produced for examination
as and when directed by the SO Rep.
The Safety Factor for tower crane shall have a minimum of 1.5, which includes the built-in Factor of
Safety for the tower crane. The lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader
beam, and the lifting device.
The crane's flying jib must be maintained at a safe working head room/ clearance of at least 10m
higher than all surrounding works and proposed new works. The said works includes the existing
building, the roof of watertank room, the roof lift motor room, all treatment works to be upgraded
above the roof.
(n) Crane Access/Crane Outrigger Base For The Use Of Mobile Crane
Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to existing
buildings or public roads or Mass Rapid Transit lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling
machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved by
the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over an adequately compacted hardcore base.
The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the mobile cranes and piling
machines and for their lifting/pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load
so as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials. The design bearing capacity
of the compacted access shall not exceed 30kN/m2 unless otherwise verified.
The Contractor shall engage at his own costs and expenses a PE to design the access/outrigger
base according to the worst loading condition. The worst loading condition imposed on the
access/outrigger base shall be provided by crane manufacturer, verified and certified by the crane
supplier’s PE. The drawings and calculation for the access/outrigger designed and endorsed by
the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of the access. The
access shall be constructed according to the approved drawings and maintained in good condition
at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract. The access shall be inspected by the Contractor's PE prior to its use.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(91)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 92
1.9.1.1 (o) Mobile Crane
The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval prior
to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the crane
access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of the crane
access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the SO Rep. The boom
of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary
without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must be effectively barricaded.
The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions,
excavated areas and other obstructions.
Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Contractor shall station a Lifting Supervisor
on the Site to oversee and guide the crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The
cranes shall be tested by an "Authorised Examiner" before its use on the Site irrespective of any
valid test certificate. Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection
records by crane operator, Authorised Examiners and the Contractor's site engineer shall be
properly documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep.
The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have a minimum of 1.5, which includes the built-in Factor
of Safety for the mobile crane. The lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the
spreader beam, and the lifting device.
The crane's boom must be maintained at a safe working clearance of at least 1.5m from all
surrounding works. The said works includes: the existing building, the mast of mobile platform, the
work platform itself, scaffolding, and any other work which may affect the safe operation of the
crane.
(p) Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger and Signalman
The Contractor shall comply with the latest Factories (Operation of Cranes) Regulations and the
latest WSHA. He shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting
operations of any crane for the Site. However, where more than one crane are used on the Site,
the number of lifting supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by
the SO Rep. No lifting activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the lifting supervisor.
The lifting supervisor shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience in construction work and lifting
operations. He must be a site foreman or site engineer and possesses a certificate on Safety
Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall spend his time fully on all lifting activities and
ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified.
For lifting operation within site which is next to existing buildings, public roads or mass rapid transit
lines, the crane operator shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in the operation of cranes.
For other sites, the operator shall have a minimum of 2 years of experience in crane operation in
the construction site.
The Contractor shall appoint qualified rigger and signalman who had completed an approved
training course for lifting operation.
The crane operator, lifting supervisor, riggers and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly
according to the abovementioned Regulations and Act and other duties as the SO Rep deems
necessary from time to time.
The Contractor shall submit a list of crane operators, lifting supervisors, riggers and signalman with
the names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of experience to the
SO Rep for approval one week before the use of the crane. The list shall be updated and kept on
the Site at all times. The SO Rep reserves the right to examine the list as and when required.
(q) Hoisting of Materials
The Contractor shall install material hoist or other equipment approved by the SO Rep for the
hoisting of materials and the removal of debris. The hoist and its foundation shall be constructed in
accordance with the design and drawings of the Contractor's PE. The hoist shall be grounded at
the end of each working day.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(92)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 93
1.9.1 Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)
1.9.1.1 Regulations and Requirements Compliance (Cont'd)
(r) Mobile Workplatform
When the mobile workplatform is to be used, the contractor shall obtain approval from SO Rep and
MOM. The mobile workplatform shall be tested and thoroughly examined by an "Authorised
Examiner" after installation. A trained person shall be designated to operate the mobile
workplatform at all times.
The mobile workplatform shall comply with the following :
(1) The mast of the mobile platform shall be supported on concrete base of required thickness.
(2) The mast shall be properly secured on to the concrete base.
(3) The lateral tieback shall be designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications.
(4) The lateral force of the tieback shall be transferred to the building by independent
connections.
(5) Minimum 1.1m high handrail shall be barricaded all round the peripheral of the work
platform.
(6) Handrail shall be provided for all staircases leading to the work platform.
(7) Foldable bridge/s shall be provided for access from the work platform to the SAI.
The contractor shall submit detailed drawings calculations for work platforms, its related structural
supports and anchorage system endorsed by his PE to the SO Rep for approval at least one month
prior to its installation.
All parts and components of the workplatform must be original from the manufacturer. Fine netting
must be installed at least 1.0m above the workplatform to prevent debris, chips or materials from
falling out. Efficient devices must be installed to ensure that the platform will stop if it comes into
contact with any obstruction. The ground floor below the workplatform must be barricaded to
prevent unauthorised entry.
(s) Reserved
LUPG09/S1.DOC(93)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 94
(t) Warning Signs And Lights
The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900mm x 600mm at strategic points around the
periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words
"DANGER - KEEP OUT" in the four official languages painted in red on a white background in
gloss finishing paint. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night to serve as a
warning.
If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of the
Code of Practice for Temporary Traffic Control issued by LTA.
(u) Demolition of existing structures
The method of demolition shall not produce excessive noise, dust, vibration and other nuisance
which will cause inconvenience to the residents and the public. The Contractor shall propose his
method of demolition to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of work.
When the demolition work is carried out at the edge of building, the Contractor shall install timber
shelter and fine screening net at the level where the demolition work is carried out. The ground
floor below the work area above shall be barricaded to prevent accidental encroachment by
occupants, workers and the public. All openings resulting from demolition shall be barricaded. Fine
screening net shall be provided to prevent entry and exit of dust and fine debris.
The demolition of all existing structures at high levels shall be carried out only in the presence of
the Site Safety Supervisor.
(v) Temporary Chute For The Removal Of Construction Debris
The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chute to dispose construction debris
from the upper storeys for all building blocks of 4 storeys (including multi-storey carpark) and
above. It shall be erected to follow the construction work. A large bin at the lower end of each of
the chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. The chute can be a proprietary system or
fabricated on Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations duly endorsed
by his PE to the SO Rep at least one week prior to their installation. The temporary chute shall be
removed only with the permission of the SO Rep.
(w) Housekeeping
The Contractor shall maintain and ensure a safe working environment by keeping the Site neat and
tidy, and free from all hazards and debris. Materials shall be stacked up safely. All workstations
and accesses thereto shall be kept free from hazards and debris.
Such housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times as not to cause any
inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to
minimize the risk of dust. Containers for debris and rubbish are to be provided at the designated
places.
(x) Electronic Distance Meter
Unless otherwise directed, use Electronic Distance Meter in the measurement of distances over
public roads and in built-up areas accessible to the public where the use of measuring tapes may
pose a danger to motorists and members of the public.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(94)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 95
(y) Safety Reflective Apparel
All workmen engaged in any type of work on public roads shall wear approved type of reflective
apparel during all hours of the day and night when so engaged.
The approved types of apparel shall be :
(i) short-sleeved vests covering the top half of the body with or without perforations for wear
comfort; and
(ii) a one-piece shoulder and waist strap (also called the wrap).
The apparel shall cover at least 25% of the trunk of the body and it shall be fastened together by
press-buttons, tying, burdok fastener or by any other approved means.
The material to be used shall be fabric with poly vinyl chloride coating and shall be retro-reflective.
It shall be reinforced at the edges and shall offer resistance against tearing. It shall be free of
ragged edges, surface blemishes, loose stitches or seams.
The apparel shall be coated or covered with retro-reflective material in two colours, namely bright
orange and white or bright orange and yellow. The two colours shall alternate with each other to
provide contrast.
The material shall either have (i) self-cleaning surface so that there will not be a heavy
accumulation of dirt on the reflective surface; or (ii) a surface that permits ready removal of
accumulated dirt and contaminants by wiping with soft rags and mild detergent solution.
The reflective intensity of the material when tested in accordance with the US Federal
Specifications shall have the following minimum value in candelas per lux per square metre :
Divergence angle 0.2° 0.5° 1.5°
Incidence angle
-4° 20.0 12.0 1.7
40° 4.7 3.0 1.0
The brightness of the reflective vests, totally wet by rain shall not be less than 90% of the above
values.
(z) Ventilation
Provide adequate ventilation and efficient safety and protective equipment to keep all excavations,
trenches, tunnels and heading structures, sewers and manholes free from all gases whether
generated in the strata, arising from the use of explosives for blasting, sewage gases or otherwise
and take precautions to ascertain that conditions are safe before allowing workmen to proceed.
No person shall enter any confined space (whether above or below ground) unless a responsible
person has tested the space using an oxygen testing instrument and has certified to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep and NEA that the space is suitable to enter.
(i) Safety Requirement for Men Working in Sewers, Pumping Mains,

Manholes, Chambers, Sumps and Other Confined Spaces
For work in sewers, pumping mains, manholes, chambers, sumps and other confined
spaces, ensure that the following safety procedures are adhered to.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(95)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 96
(z) Ventilation (Cont'd)
(ii) Safety and Protective Equipment
Provide the following equipment for the safety and protection of the workmen. Make
available this equipment at the works site before the commencement of any work. Ensure
that all workmen are familiar with the use of all safety and protective equipment required.
Safety Apparatus - Multi-gas monitor, lifting harness, torch light, first aid kit,
life lines, aluminium ladder, air blower, breathing apparatus,
oxygen meter.
Protective Equipment - Safety belt, safety helmet and gloves, knee length rubber
boots,
overall, illuminous vest.
Other Equipment - Portable air blower, traffic warning lights & signs,
and Tools barricades, pedestrian warning signs, manhole gratings,
non-sparking tools, flame proof lights.
(iii) Preparatory Work
Identify the position of the nearest telephone so that in the event of an emergency, help can
be summoned immediately.
Do not allow smoking or naked light or fire in the vicinity of any manhole or chamber.
Place proper barricades and traffic warning signs around the working manhole. For safety
of the public, place proper gratings over manholes that are opened.
Where a sewer is at a downstream of a pump main discharge chamber, obtain prior

clearance with the Pumping Station Unit. During the course of the work in this sewer,
maintain close co-ordination with the Pumping Station Unit to ensure non-operation of the
pumping station.
(iv) Before Entering Manholes and Chambers
Remove the cover of the working manhole and those immediately upstream and
downstream to provide ventilation and to serve as emergency exits. Provide manhole
gratings for public safety.
Use air blowers of adequate capacity (min. flow rate of 1200 m3 per hour) for ventilation.
Place the blower as far as possible from the working manhole and vehicles exhausts and
operate for a sufficient time to ensure that all gases are driven out.
Test for the presence of gases by lowering the multi-gas monitor into the manhole. Do not
enter the manhole if the multi-gas monitor indicates dangerous conditions. Inspecting team
shall carry Multi-gas monitor in the sewer.
Test oxygen deficiency. (The oxygen level must be maintained above 19% but not
exceeding 23%).
No workmen shall enter the manhole or sewer if they detect smell or if they feel giddy or
suspicious even if safe conditions are indicated in the tests above.
If a manhole is safe to enter, wear safety belt, helmet and protective footwear before
entering. Allow no person to enter a manhole or sewer alone. Detail at least two men as
top men. The top men shall carry breathing apparatus.
The supervisor shall keep count of his men before entering the sewer.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(96)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 97
(z) Ventilation (Cont'd)
(iv) Before Entering Manholes and Chambers (Cont'd)
Use ladders for access into or out of any manhole which exceeds 1m deep. Allow only one
man on a ladder at one time.
If aluminium alloy ladder is used, provide the ladder with non-slip rungs to prevent slipping.
Wooden ladder shall not be used.
(v) While Men are in Manholes or Sewers
Allow no man to work in a sewer alone. Use lifelines when working in sewers.
The top man shall keep in touch with the men below by calling or signalling at frequent
intervals.
If dangerous conditions are encountered or if danger is suspected then the men below shall
return to the surface immediately through the nearest manhole.
During the whole of the time that the men are below ground, maintain proper and adequate
ventilation.
No smoking or naked light in manholes or sewers shall be allowed.
Wear safety belts and helmets at all times while working inside manholes and sewers.
Test the air inside a manhole or sewer continuously with the use of "personal gas monitor"
by those working below. The gas monitor shall be capable of measuring the concentration
of Carbon Monoxide, Oxygen, Hydrogen sulphide and combustible gases.
Where the sewers are large enough to enter, keep guard bars or safety chains in position
across the sewer downstream of the place of work.
Where natural light is not adequate, use only artificial light of the explosive proof type.
(vi) After Working in Sewers or Manholes
The supervisory staff in charge shall check carefully that all men have left the sewer or
manhole. Replace properly all manholes or sumps cover.
(vii) In An Emergency
Inform the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB , SO Rep and the HDB in the
event of an emergency.
(aa) Prefabricated Mesh Barricade
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a vertical prefabricated mesh barricade (hereafter
referred to as “mesh barricade” for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) for
all peripheral open sides of construction level of building (excluding multi-storey carpark/garage)
where a person is liable to fall from height. Metal access scaffold and working platforms shall be
maintained for multi-storey carpark/garage where a person is liable to fall from height. Mesh
barricade shall be of sound construction and produced in the factory and installed at the
construction level from the inside of the building. Mesh barricade and its support shall be prezinc
galvanised or other approved equivalent by the SO Rep, easily installed and dismantled, and
reusable throughout the construction (super-structure) stage. External works of the building, such
as painting, touching up works, repair and redecoration, and other minor works, shall be carried out
using mechanical suspended scaffold or other vertical access equipment.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(97)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 98
1.9.1.1 (aa) Prefabricated Mesh Barricade
Where the use of mesh barricade is not feasible, as interpreted by SO Rep, during the construction
(super-structure) stage, the contractor can counter-propose localised alternative system other than
the use of metal access scaffold.
Mesh barricade/ counter-proposals for localised alternative system, its vertical support and any
components therein shall be in modular sizes and designed according to the Workplace Safety and
Health (Construction) Regulations and WSHA by a PE employed by the Contractor. The PE’s
drawings and calculation shall then be submitted to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from
the Letter of Acceptance, before installation and use. Trial setting out of mesh barricade shall be
carried out on Site two weeks after approval of submission.
The mesh barricade shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of
water tank rooms) from the second storey and held by a supporting system designed by the said
PE. The height of the mesh barricade shall be at least 1.1m above the construction level. The
Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the substrate at which the mesh barricade is affixed to, can
resist the designed imposed loads. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly
overload the RC structure.
Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to
cover the entire internal face of the mesh barricade. The installation of the net shall follow the
erection of the fence closely. Where necessary, a 90mm high toeboards shall be provided at the
base of the net from the inside of mesh barricade. After installation, there shall be no opening
between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The
net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Maximum mesh size (square) : 15mm square

(ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D
(iii) Knot Type : Single or English knot
(iv) Minimum 12 ply
The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure. All
vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure
established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the immediate
supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components shall only be
erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other equivalent, if not better,
means of preventing a fall.
The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical
supports for other purposes.
(bb) Others
The Contractor shall put up appropriate and adequate guards, fence or barrier around excavations,
lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. Daily checking on all
temporary electrical wiring and passenger cum material hoist shall be conducted by qualified
persons employed by the Contractor.
Safety Infringement
The above provisions shall be made to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
include in his Contract Sum all the costs and expenses for complying with the safety requirements.
In the event of any accident or mishap occurring on Site, whether or not caused by the inadequacy
of safety provision or non-compliance with safety regulations, the Contractor shall immediately
notify the SO Rep and the HDB and any other relevant Authority.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(98)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 99
(bb) Others (Cont'd)
Safety Infringement (Cont'd)
Depending on the nature and extent of the accident or mishap, the SO Rep , HDB or any other
Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of work to allow investigations and/or remedial
measures to be effected. In the event of such stoppage, or any stoppages of work due to safety
violations, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of time
for completion.
The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures together with the
Contractor's safety supervisor or foreman. The Contractor shall rectify immediately all
contraventions against the latest Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation,
Factories (BOWEC) Regulations or safety measures specified.. All Works or partial works may be
stopped until further notice from the SO Rep if the total number of contraventions or non-
compliance is four or more or when the SO Rep considers the working environment unsafe for
Works to continue. If the contravention or non-compliance is not rectified at a subsequent
inspection, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to
impose charges against the Contractor.
The SO Rep shall at its absolute discretion exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following types of accidents
occurring in the course of or arising out of or in the consequence of the Works:
(i) For each instance of fatal accident, if the accident is established in part or in whole by the
SO Rep or any local Authority, to be the result of the defaults, acts, omissions or negligence
of the Contractor. This charge shall not be refunded to the Contractor;
(ii) For each instance of accident, if the SO Rep, HDB or MOM is of the opinion that the
accident is the result of the failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient
safety measures stipulated in the Contract or the latest Workplace Safety & Health Act and
its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting)
Regulations.
(iii) Dangerous occurrence as classified in the Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and
Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II if the SO Rep, HDB or the Competent
Authority is of the opinion that the dangerous occurrence is the result of failure of the
Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or
the latest Workplace Safety and Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace
Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations.
1.9.2 Reporting Of Accidents
In the case of an accident or a dangerous occurrence, as classified under Subsidiary Legislation,

Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II, the Contractor shall notify the
MOM, SO Rep and HDB within one hour of such accident or dangerous occurrence.
Upon receipt of information of an accident or dangerous occurrence, the SO Rep or HDB may at its
discretion make a preliminary investigation of the circumstances and record its finding upon such
investigation.
Notwithstanding the aforementioned requirements, the Contractor shall in addition, give written notice of
such accident or dangerous occurrence in the form set out in the INCIDENT NOTICE - HDB and submit it
to the SO Rep and HDB within 10 working days of the accident or dangerous occurrence. The form is
obtainable at the HDB.
Upon submitting the INCIDENT NOTICE to the SO Rep and HDB, the Contractor shall arrange for the
injured workman, witnesses and an interpreter, if necessary, to report to the SO Rep and HDB to furnish
evidence relating to the accident or dangerous occurrence.
If the Contractor fails to give any required notice or fails to furnish evidence of the accident or dangerous
occurrence as required in this Clause, the SO Rep or HDB may at his absolute discretion exercise his
rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(99)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 100
1.10 NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES
1.10.1 Nuisance and Irregularities
If the Contractor is found to have committed any of the following irregularities :
(i) Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior materials; or
materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings;
(ii) Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or
committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are likely
to bring the Employer into disrepute;
(iii) Non-compliance with any part of the Specifications or Drawings, or non-fulfilment of any contractual
obligation.
the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts and
agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the Employer
but not exceeding $100,000.00, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000.00, a charge
not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the Employer for the
inconvenience caused, investigation and administration expenses incurred by the Employer and for
damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the Contractor may be barred
from tendering for a specified period.
In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep or HDB is empowered either :
(a) to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep or HDB
at the Contractor's own cost and expense,
or
(b) in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep or HDB may allow
such work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified requirements
and the non-compliance.
For nuisance committed on Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance
committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep or the HDB.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(100)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 101
1.11 QUANTUM OF SECURITY DEPOSIT
The security deposit for the Contract shall be 7.5 percent of the Contract Sum.
Notwithstanding this, the security deposit shall be increased by 2.5% of the Contract Sum if the tender
sum for the recommended tender is more than 10% lower than the average (“Average Tender Sum") of
the lowest 3 tender sums.
For the purpose of deriving the “Average Tender Sum”, the “tender sums” to be used in the computation
shall refer to valid tender proposals submitted at the close of tender excluding tender/s withdrawn and
invalid tender submissions as defined under the Invitation to Tender.
For tenders that require the submission of tender offers for 2 or more options prescribed by HDB, only the
lowest 3 tender sums for the option recommended for award will be used for the computation of the
“Average Tender Sum” to ascertain whether the additional 2.5% security deposit is required.
The security deposit required in the Contract shall be indicated in the Letter of Acceptance to be issued to
the Contractor.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs, expenses and losses arising
from the compliance with these provisions.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(101)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 102
APPENDIX W1
Page 1
INSTRUCTION ON WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
1. The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix W1(R) (please do not re-type).
2. The Policy shall include the following requirements :
(a) The Insured shall be " (Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and
the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I ".
(b) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor and
shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(102)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 103
APPENDIX W1
Page 2
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
LUPG09/S1.DOC(103)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 104
APPENDIX W1
Page 3
Policy No. :
WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
WHEREAS the Insured carrying on the Business described in the SCHEDULE and no other for the purpose of this
insurance by an application which shall be the basis of this contract and is deemed to be incorporated herein has
applied to the Insurer for the insurance hereinafter contained and has paid or agreed to pay the Premium stated in the
SCHEDULE as consideration for such insurance.
NOW THIS POLICY WITNESSETH that if any workman in the Insured's employment shall sustain personal injury by
accident or disease caused during the Period of Insurance and arising out of and in the course of his employment by
the Insured in the Business, the Insurer will subject to the terms exceptions conditions and warranties, and any
memorandum if applicable, contained herein or endorsed hereon (all of which are hereinafter collectively referred to
as the Terms of this Policy) indemnify the Insured against all sums for which the Insured shall be liable to pay
compensation either under the Legislation or at Common Law, and will in addition pay all costs and expenses incurred
by the Insured with the written consent of the Insurer.
In the event of the death of the Insured the Insurer will indemnify the Insured's legal personal representatives in
accordance with the Terms of this Policy in respect of liability incurred by the Insured provided that such personal
representatives shall as though they were the Insured observe comply fulfil and be subject to the Terms of this Policy
in so far as they can apply.
PROVIDED ALWAYS that in the event of any change in the Legislation or the substitution by other Legislation
therefor this policy shall remain in force and the Insurer reserves the right to charge additional premium therefor.
JURISDICTION
1. This Policy shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of Singapore.
2. The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance
delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.
AVOIDANCE OF CERTAIN TERMS AND RIGHT OF RECOVERY
Nothing in this Policy or any endorsement hereon shall affect :
(a) the right of any person entitled to indemnity under this Policy; or
(b) the right of any other person to recover compensation,
under or by virtue of the Legislation.
BUT the Insured shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to
pay but for the Legislation.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(104)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 105
APPENDIX W1
Page 4
Policy No. :
EXCEPTIONS
The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of :
(a) the Insured's liability to employees of independent contractors engaged by the Insured;
(b) any employee of the Insured who is not a "workman" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such
employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clause 11 and 12 of the Conditions;
(c) any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion act
of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war;
(d) any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from :
(i) ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste
from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of any
explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component
(ii) pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds
(e) any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the
employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of
alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation;
(f) any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental
injury.
CONDITIONS
1. This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to which
a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such specific
meaning wherever it may appear.
2. In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil the
Terms of this Policy.
3. The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of the
Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract.
4. Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the
Insurer.
5. The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's
workman and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements.
6. (a) In the event of any accident which may give rise to a claim under this Policy, the Insured shall give
notice of the accident in accordance with the time limits set out by the Legislation to the Insurer with
full particulars.
(b) In the case of any disease which may give rise to a claim under this Policy the Insured shall give
notice of the discovery of the disease to the Insurer within 30 days of his discovery.
(c) Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer immediately
on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall have knowledge of
any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such accident or disease.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(105)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 106
APPENDIX W1
Page 5
Policy No. :
7. No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written
consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's
name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any claim
for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any proceedings and in
the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance as the Insurer may
require.
8. The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at his last
known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the actual
premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum premium
payment of #$ by the Insured.
This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the Insurer
and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured
shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by the
Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy.
The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.
9. This Policy shall cover all * 's insurance obligations with regard
to Workmen's Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing & Development Board and *
.
10. (i) In the event of any workman employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as referred
to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such workman, bringing or making a claim under any Workmen's
Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against the Principal
Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work on any Contract
covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal Housing & Development
Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development Board against such claim
and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always that the Insurer shall be
entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected with claims covered by this.
Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to recover damages in any other way
under the said Legislation.
(ii) The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to workmen in the
employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and
occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any
Workmen's Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.
11. In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the Insurer
will not in the event of any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the
Insured in the Business raise the defence that such employee is not a workman within the meaning of the
Legislation.
12. In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described in
the Schedule who are not a workman within the meaning of the Legislation it is hereby agreed that the Policy is
extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the Insured's liability at common law for any accident or
disease arising out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business.
13. All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration
Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an Arbitrator or Arbitrators
as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action against the Insurer.
*Name of Contractor to be inserted

#
To be filled in by Insurer
LUPG09/S1.DOC(106)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 107
APPENDIX W1
Page 6
Policy No. :
14. At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under
this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the
conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage loss or
liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission of the
Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such conduct
nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or any claimant
or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct.
INTERPRETATION
1. ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Workmen's Compensation Act (Cap 354),
amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder.
2. Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation.
WARRANTY
The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall
repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the
Legislation.
PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE
1. Notwithstanding anything herein contained to the contrary, and subject only and without prejudice to Clause
2 hereinafter set out, it is hereby declared and agreed that it is a condition precedent to liability under this
Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note that any premium due must be paid and actually
received in full by the Insurer, the registered broker or registered agent through whom this Policy was
effected :
(a) when the period of insurance is 60 days or more, within SIXTY (60) days from the :
i. INCEPTION date of the coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note; or
ii. EFFECTIVE date of the coverage stated on each Endorsement, if any, issued under the
Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note when the effective date of coverage stated on the
Endorsement is on or after the issuance date of the Endorsement; or
iii. ISSUANCE date of each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or
Cover Note where the effective date of coverage under the Endorsement is before the
issuance date;
OR
(b) Where the total premium under any single Policy exceeds #$ and the Insurer has allowed
payment of that premium by instalments within SIXTY (60) days from the :
i. INCEPTION date of the cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note for the first
instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become
payable; or
ii. EFFECTIVE date of coverage of any Endorsement issued under such Policy, for the first
instalment and thereafter from the agreed dates on which the subsequent instalments become
payable;
OR
(c) when the period of insurance is LESS than SIXTY (60) days, within the period of insurance specified
in the Policy, Endorsement, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(107)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 108
APPENDIX W1
Page 7
Policy No. :
2. In the event any of the abovementioned premium is not paid in full to the Insurer, registered broker or
registered agent as described above in the manner and within the time stipulated above (the "premium
warranty period"), the cover under this Policy, Renewal Certificate, Endorsement or Cover Note shall be
deemed to have terminated from the expiry of the premium warranty period and the Insurer shall be
discharged from all liability therefrom but without prejudice to any liability incurred before that date and
the Insurer will be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium subject to a minimum of #$ .
#
To be filled in by Insurer
LUPG09/S1.DOC(108)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 109
ATTACHMENT A
UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE ("UNDERTAKING")
TO : THE HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

SINGAPORE
In consideration of your agreeing to disclose/make available to us such information and documentation

("Information") as may be applicable to the
( Description of Contract )
expressed to be entered into between
yourselves and us ("Agreement"), we
( Name of Company )
of hereby agree and
( Address )
undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such Information shall be treated by us as confidential at all times and
further agree and undertake as follows :
1. We will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any other person, firm or corporation
save where expressly provided otherwise in this Undertaking and shall ensure that there is no unauthorised
publication or disclosure of the information.
2. We will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the Agreement
("Personnel") and Personnel shall refer to our employees, subcontractors and their employees;
3. We will ensure that the Personnel are aware of and will comply with the confidentiality and non-disclosure
obligations contained herein during their periods of service with you and at any time thereafter. We will fully
indemnify you and keep you indemnified at all times against any costs, expenses, losses or damages that you
may sustain or incur as a result of any breach of confidence or the terms of this undertaking.
4. We will not use the Information for any purpose other than for effectively carrying out our obligations under
the Agreement.
LUPG09/S1.DOC(109)
lkk(181209)
DPD
Lup Spec
GS Page 110
ATTACHMENT A
5. All documents given to us by you relating to the Agreement and any other copies made or reproduced from
such documents or part thereof will be returned to you or otherwise disposed of in any manner as may be
directed by you.
6. The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect not withstanding the expiry or termination of the
Agreement, as the case may be.
SIGNED for and on behalf of

(name of company)
Name :
Title :
Date :
Witness by :
SECTION 2/...
LUPG09/S1.DOC(110)
lkk(181209)
DPD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
LUP09/indTC.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-1/30
SECTION 2
2.0 PILING
2.1.1 Scope of Piling Works
The Contract requires the supply of all materials, labour, Construction Equipment, tools and everything
necessary for the construction and complete installation of any one or combination of the following piling
systems under the supervision of the SO Rep :
(a) H-Section Steel Piling

(b) Micro Pile System
(c) Jack-In Piling System
(d) Reinforced Concrete Piles
Where the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender provides for itemised breakdown for piling to
certain items of work, the rates indicated shall be used for estimating the sum for the said piling items.
Where the Tender Cost Breakdown does not provide for itemised breakdown for piling to an item of work
even though the item of work involves piling, such piling work is deemed to be included in the sum for the
said item of work.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may propose the use of other types of piles, patented or
otherwise. For this purpose, the Contractor may obtain a copy of the soil investigation report from the SO
Rep. However, the Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy of the information given. The
Contractor's proposal shall comply with the Specifications and subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
For all piling works whether specified herein or proposed by Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, the
Contractor shall maintain records and perform tests as the SO Rep may deem necessary for ensuring
compliance with various provisions of the Specification. All piling works shall also comply with the
requirements of Clauses 2.1.4 to 2.1.32 specified herein.
2.1.2 Reserved
2.1.3 Adjustment To Contract Sum And Pay Length Of Piles
Upon completion, the value of piling works executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the SO
Rep. The Lump Sum for the whole of the piling works as entered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender
shall then be adjusted based on the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The adjustment
(addition or omission) shall be the net difference between the Lump Sum and the value of piling works
executed by the Contractor. The addition or omission amount shall be added to or deducted from the
Contract Sum as the case may be.
(a) For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre) for the respective pile size is shown in
the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total actual pay
length and the Basic Rate per metre.
The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to
the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile size shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre) for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
LUP09/S2.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-2/30
2.1.3 (a) For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre) for the respective pile size is shown in
the Form Of Tender (Cont’d)
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of Tender.
(b) For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre tonne) for the respective pile size is
shown in the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total metre-
tonne and the Basic Rate per metre tonne.
The metre-tonne of each pile shall be the product of the actual pay length of the pile and the
nominal working load of the pile. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the
specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the
accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile type shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre tonne) for Respective Pile Type in the Form of
Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and the
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of
Tender.
LUP09/S2.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-3/30
2.1.4 Machinery Required
The type of piling machine adopted shall be able to install piles taking into account the headroom
constraint and the proximity of the piles to the existing building.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient piling machines and accessory equipment at any one time
throughout the Time for Completion.
The use of diesel piling hammers is strictly disallowed in the contract.
2.1.5 Damages to Existing Carpark Concrete Aprons Drains,

Turfing and Embankment Etc
The Contractor shall break up and reinstate existing carpark concrete apron, apron drain, turfing,
landscaping and embankment etc to facilitate the installation of piles. Areas to be broken shall be kept to
absolute minimum. All reinstatement works are to be carried out to the satisfaction of SO Rep.
2.1.6 Noise, Vibration & Disturbance
All piling operations and excavation works shall be carried out without unreasonable noise, vibration and
disturbance.
The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the piling operations and excavation
works and shall be responsible during the progress of the piling operation and excavation works for any
damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to Occupants of
these properties.
2.1.7 Safety Of Existing Buildings/Structures
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the existing buildings/structures and shall include in
his contract sum the provision and construction of necessary and adequate shoring and supports within
existing buildings/structures, to underpin and strengthen the existing building foundations against any
adverse effect arising out of the execution of the piling operation and excavation works.
LUP09/S2.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-4/30
2.1.8 Soil Investigation and Other Factors Affecting the Works
Geotechnical information concerning the site shall be provided by the HDB to the Contractor. However,
HDB accepts no responsibility for the accuracy and/or comprehensiveness of any such information
provided. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings, and carry out all
independent investigations, satisfy himself as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and
nature of the site and nature of the works and obtain all necessary information as to other circumstances
which may affect his design or Tender price. If the tenderer wishes to carry out his own ground testing, he
shall submit his proposal to the SO Rep for approval prior to such tests and all expenses incurred as a
result of the tests shall be borne by the tenderer. All such proposals must be submitted not later than 2
weeks before the Tender closing date for the project. The Tender closing date will not be extended for any
ground testing requested by the tenderer.
No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any misunderstanding
or misinterpretation of any such matter or for the Contractor's failure to obtain all necessary information
nor shall the Contractor be released from any duties, responsibilities or obligations imposed on or
undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the ground that he did not or could not
foresee any matter which might affect the works.
2.1.9 Site Survey, Vibration and Crack Monitoring
Where piling works are to be carried out close to the existing buildings or structures, the Contractor shall
carry out a joint inspection with the SO Rep and representatives of the appropriate Town Council and/or
HDB Branch Office including taking photographs and notes to record the conditions of the existing
buildings or structures prior to the commencement of the piling works. The records shall be jointly
endorsed by the Contractor, SO Rep and the representative of the Town Council and/or HDB Branch
Office. In addition the Contractor shall be required to carry out vibration and crack monitoring at his own
cost and expense when piling works are to be carried out close to the existing buildings or structures or
when public complaints have been received.
The numbers and locations as well as the duration of the vibration and crack monitoring shall be decided
by the SO Rep.
The vibration monitoring shall measure the peak particle velocity (mm/s) and frequency (Hz) of the
vibration. Acceleration and displacement values shall also be derived from the transducer operating
range chart if requested by SO Rep.
Tell-tale crack metres shall be installed as and when necessary, to monitor movement across cracks in
vertical and horizontal directions. Inclinometers and extensometers shall be used where necessary. The
monitoring shall be read daily unless otherwise instructed by SO Rep.
Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted weekly and the final report shall be submitted
within 2 weeks after the completion of the monitoring works.
2.1.10 Surveying Works on Settlement Benchmarks
The Contractor shall be required to set up adequate settlement benchmarks as deemed necessary by SO
Rep to monitor the settlement of the existing or adjoining properties/structures, if any, throughout the
piling operation and excavation.
The monitoring programme of the surveying works on settlement benchmarks shall be submitted to the
SO Rep for approval.
When any of the following criteria is reached irrespective of whether damage has occurred, the Contractor
shall notify the SO Rep immediately :
(i) 5mm settlement or movement between consecutive readings.

(ii) 15mm total settlement of any part of a building/structure.
LUP09/S2.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-5/30
2.1.11 Standard and Certificates
All materials used in the installation of piles shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. Materials and
articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards (S.S.) published by PSB where these
exist, otherwise British Standards (B.S.) or other approved Standards will apply. Where the standard
given in this document has been amended or superseded, the current Standard shall apply. Where British
Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore Standards (S.S.) where existing shall
prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of Practice (C.P.) shall be referred to
during the construction where these exist otherwise British Codes of Practice or other approved codes
shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
In all cases where materials or articles are specified to comply with respective Standards the Contractor
shall, if required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate Certificate of
Compliance with the Standard.
2.1.12 Testing of Materials
The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out tests on materials to be used in the works.
The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise specified.
The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested and the
results of such testing shall be accepted as final. If a sample does not conform to the required standard,
the whole consignment will be rejected and shall be removed from site at the Contractor's own expense.
The costs of the tests together with all administrative expenses incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
All the tests must be carried out at SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories or test centres.
2.1.13 Reserved
2.1.14 Tolerance from True Position
The centre of each pile at the cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the drawings
by more than 75mm in any direction. In the event the deviation be more than the allowable tolerance as
stated above for the respective piling system, the affected pile(s) is liable to be rejected and compensating
pile(s) shall be installed at the Contractor's own cost and expense when directed by the SO's Rep.
All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams, etc designed as a counter measure to the pile
eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall also be borne by the Contractor.
2.1.15 Removal of obstruction
The Contractor shall at his own cost, allow for excavation in any material to remove obstructions which
prevent driving or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, timbering, backfilling, restoration
of ground surrounding the piles and any other works necessary to complete the operation to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
No claims will be entertained for standing time for rigs in consequence of obstructions of any kind.
2.1.16 Penetration and Size of Piles
The Contractor shall be required to install any size of the piles as shown in the specifications or drawings
and each pile in the position indicated on the drawings to the required depth.
The onus of obtaining the required resistance to withstand the required test load within the limit of
settlement shall rest with the Contractor but the piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the
depth for them to develop the required test load. Should Contractor find that a longer penetration is
required due to poor ground conditions being encountered as work proceeds, this will be permitted only if
it is proved to be justified by examination and tests of the soils in the boreholes. The Contractor must also
state sound and acceptable basis for determining the penetration required.
If ground conditions indicate that the sizes of any subsequent piles as proposed and shown on the
drawings are inadequate then the Contractor shall produce sufficient evidence to prove that a larger size
would be more suitable. Conversely, where a pile is to be constructed in very good ground, the Contractor
must produce sufficient evidence to show that the reduced length of pile will be capable of carrying the
specified load. However, the Contractor must first obtain the approval of the SO Rep if longer or shorter
penetration is required.
LUP09/S2.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-6/30
2.1.17 Damaged and Rejected Piles
Damaged piles and piles installed out of position or twisted shall be rejected and/or removed and
replacement pile or piles shall be substituted by the Contractor at his own expense even if piles of bigger
capacity are required.
Piles shall be installed truly vertical and any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 (horizontal) to 75 (vertical)
is liable to be rejected and shall be similarly removed and replaced when ordered by the SO Rep at
Contractor's own expense.
In addition, the Contractor shall also bear the extra cost as a result of rejection and replacement or
installation of additional pile or piles due to an increase in size of pile caps, strengthening of the ground
beam etc.
Piles which have risen or are disturbed as a result of installing adjacent piles shall be reinstated to the
original depth and resistance. Otherwise, it shall be replaced by compensating piles at the Contractor's
expense.
2.1.18 Pile Verticality Measurement
The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools approved by the SO Rep to measure the verticality of
piles.
2.1.19 Standard Load Test
Standard Load Test shall be conducted on working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal
working loads. One (1) Standard Load Tests is to be carried out per Three (3) piling blocks or 1% of total
piles per precinct, whichever is greater unless otherwise specified. A piling block shall include only the
multi-storey carpark (MSCP) and residential building. In cases where the Electrical Substation (ESS) is
located within the MSCP, any Standard Load Test carried out at the said ESS shall be deemed to be part
of the two tests to be carried out at the MSCP.
The SO Rep shall decide when testing shall commence and the Contractor shall proceed with testing only
after the SO Rep's instructions have been given to him to test the pile. As soon as a test pile has been
selected the Contractor shall prepare for the test without delay. All selected test piles must be tested
within two weeks from the date of selection or earlier.
Standard Load Tests shall be carried out on any such working piles as may be ordered by the SO Rep.
The Standard Load test shall be carried out in one cycle only.
2.1.20 Ultimate Load Test
Ultimate Load Test shall be conducted by loading the piles to three (3) times nominal working loads. The
ultimate load test shall be conducted before the installation of the working piles to determine the ultimate
capacity of a pile installed separately from the working pile.
For each of the Ultimate Load Tests, the pile is tested to 3 times nominal working load. Total settlement of
the ultimate load test shall not exceed (i) 25mm at 2 times nominal working load; and (ii) 10% of the pile
diameter for bored pile or 40mm for all other piling systems at 3 times nominal working load. The Ultimate
Load Test will be deemed to fail if, at any stage, settlement continues without further load increment. In
the event of failure of ultimate load test, subsequent tests (including the installation of test piles) shall be
carried out at the contractor's expense. If the subsequent test fail again, the ultimate load test results may
be used to assess the suitability of the pile layout proposed, or further tests (including the installation of
the test piles) may be ordered by the SO's Rep if deemed necessary. Cost for the further tests (including
the installation of the test piles) or related works shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.1.21 Provision of Testing Equipment
Adequate facilities and sufficient equipment shall be provided by the Contractor for at least 2 Load Tests
to proceed at any one time.
LUP09/S2.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-7/30
2.1.22 Loading of Test Piles
(i) The test load may be applied to the pile by jacking against kentledge or anchor pile. The clear
distance between a test pile and any anchor pile shall not be less than 3 metres. Where piles are
in groups, the use of other working piles as anchor piles may be allowed subject to the approval of
the SO Rep. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be solely responsible for making
good as the SO Rep considers necessary any damage to such anchor piles which are used as
permanent piles.
(ii) Pile top levels of test piles shall be recorded immediately after selection and in any case before the
erection of kentledge platform. This shall be done by reading levels on two diagonally opposite
corners of the pile top.
(iii) All test equipment such as lever, dial gauge, oil pumps and hydraulic jack, shall be submitted to the
Superintending Officer’s Representative to show the date of last checking for accuracy. Equipment
calibrated within 3 months, by approved laboratory, of the date of test shall be used.
(iv) In the preparation of all test piles the Contractor shall ensure the rigidity of the supports at all
corners of the platform. If piles are required to support the platform they shall be installed at
Contractor's expense.
(v) If any test is discontinued or fails to reach the specified load due to (a) faulty jack or gauge, (b)
unstable support of kentledge, (c) damage to or of the pile cap (d) the datums not being set out
properly or any other cause, then the test shall be abandoned and the results disregarded. A
further test shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense.
(vi) The settlement shall be measured to an accuracy of not more than half millimeter from a datum
which must be on an immovable structure or be on a pile and it shall not be affected by any
movement of the ground due to the test loading, driving of piles or any other causes.
(vii) The load test shall be carried out in one cycle only. The test load shall be imposed by equal
increments of 0.25 x nominal working load of test pile at approved intervals until the full test load is
reached. The maximum settlement under full test load shall remain for a period of not less than
three (3) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The results shall be plotted to produce a load-
settlement curve.
(viii) The test load shall be imposed by equal increments of load equivalent to 25% of the working load
of the pile with each load increment being maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full load of
the test pile is reached. This test load at the nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours
before the operation to load the pile to its full test load (2 or 3 times the nominal working load) is
continued. The above procedure shall be considered as one operation. Contractor shall not
release the loading at any stage of the test before reaching the full test load. The test pile shall be
deemed to have failed if the Contractor failed to comply with the requirements. The maximum
settlement under full test load should remain for a period of not less than 3 days or as directed by
the Superintending Officer’s Representative. The results shall be plotted to produce a load
settlement curve.
2.1.23 Failure of Standard Load Test
A Standard Load Test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25mm at 2 times nominal
working load for driven steel piles, large diameter bored piles, jack-in piles, micropiles and precast
reinforced concrete piles.
For pile subjected to negative skin friction, the standard load test can be performed in the normal manner,
but with its acceptance subject to satisfaction of an additional criterion that pile settlement at the test load
of 1.0 time column load plus 2.0 times negative friction should not exceed 10mm.
If a working pile so tested as herein specified, fails to sustain the full standard test load over a period to be
decided by the SO Rep, but in any case not less than 3 days, then TWO further tests on other piles in any
block at the same area selected by the SO Rep may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the
Contractor's expense. Where a pile fails under test, compensating piles as directed by the SO Rep shall
be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the whole of the work shall be
carried out at the Contractor's expense.
LUP09/S2.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-8/30
2.1.24 Soundness of Work
The Contractor shall be aware that load tests on piles are conducted for the purpose of studying the
behaviour of piles and in particular settlement under load. As not every pile can be tested, the Contractor
shall ensure that all piles are installed such that the total settlement or differential settlement shall be
limited to a maximum angle of 1:500 so that the building to be supported will not be damaged due to
settlement. For bored piles in buildings of ten(10) storeys or taller, the Contractor shall monitor and submit
the settlement records at various selected columns to the SO Rep.
The acceptance of a few piles which pass the load tests does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for the soundness of the whole of the pile foundation. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for ensuring that all the piles are installed to such a depth that the required resistance is
obtained.
2.1.25 Ultimate Load Test and Standard Load Test Report
Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to
the SO Rep within one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain detailed
information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the
test results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.
If the pile tested failed to sustain the required load or if the pile top settlement exceeds the permitted
settlement specified, the report shall also contain an analysis of the pile behaviour concerning the pile
settlement. Recommended measurement on improving the pile performance shall also be included
2.1.26 Checking and Cutting of Piles
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum excavation, cutting back the pile, true and level, to the
cut-off level, backfilling and any other necessary works for the completion of the operation.
Immediately after piling is completed in a block, the Contractor shall check and record the exact actual
position of every pile as compared with the positions indicated on the drawings. Excavation and cutting of
piles to the required cut-off levels (+25mm) shall follow immediately. Test loading of working piles shall
commence immediately after as a selection is made by the SO Rep and may be carried out before the
completion of piling in the block.
All the above works shall not take more than three (3) weeks as from the date the last pile is driven in the
block regardless of inclement weather or testing time.
The Contractor shall ensure that adequate number of Registered Surveyors are available at the sites for
such work.
If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay
other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereof shall be deducted from the
monies due to the Contractor without prejudice to the Employer's right to claim any sum over and above
monies thus applied.
2.1.27 Multiple Failure of Working Piles
A block containing up to 500 piles will be deemed to have failed if 3 tests therein fail.
In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the
contract document as will ensure the safety of the buildings which are to be carried by the piles. The
whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense, and the cost for amending pile caps
and ground beams arising out of this, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.1.28 Rate of Progress
The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress
and the time required for piling and follow up works to the SO Rep as soon as that site is handed to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule otherwise he shall be liable for
Liquidated Damages.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at
every site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S2.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-9/30
2.1.29 Pile Penetration and Eccentricity Plans
Completed pile penetration and eccentricity plans (3 copies) shall be checked and certified by the
Contractor's Licensed Surveyor and endorsed by a Professional Engineer directly employed by the
Contractor before submitting to the Employer. All plans must bear the original certification/endorsement
by the Licensed Surveyor and Professional Engineer. The duly endorsed eccentricity plans and
penetration plans for each block must be submitted to the SO's Rep not more than one month from the
date the last pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time.
The SO Rep may require a copy of the as-built piling plan to be submitted in soft copy in DWG format or
other approved format.
2.1.30 Contract Sum/Basic Rate
The sum and/or rates in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender shall be the full and inclusive
price to cover the supply of Construction Equipment, materials and labour for the execution thereof in any
ground, completely and as specified and shall thus include the following :
(a) All preliminary works on site including the setting up of site office test cube shed, water supply,
washing bay, etc.
(b) The provision and mobilisation of piling rig to install any size of Piles including hammer or auger
and all necessary accessories, equipment, tools and appliances brought to the site, erection,
movement of piling rig from pile to pile and from building block to other building block within the
piling site, dismantling and removal on completion of the work on site.
(c) The installation of piles to any level below ground level and to a resistance as specified, including
the supply, use and removal of drilling mud or steel casings to support the borehole prior to
concreting or cement grouting.
(d) The setting out of all pile positions in accordance with the drawings.
(e) To excavate in any material and cut back piles to cut-off level as specified and subsequent
backfilling.
(f) To check the final position and cut-off level of all piles.
(g) The removal of all spoil, cement slurry and water from site or pile pits as directed by the SO Rep.
(h) The cleaning of the site on completion.
(i) The payment of all insurance, water and other charges.
(j) The observance of all other directions, instructions and clauses contained in all documents forming
this Tender and the carrying out of the complete work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and in
accordance with the Specification.
2.1.31 Method Statement for Piling Works
The contractor shall submit method statement pertaining to piling works with regards to ULT, SLT and
installation of working piles. The method statement has to be approved by the SO Rep prior to
commencement of works. If the site conditions warrants that the method of construction be revised or
altered, the contractor shall make the alterations accordingly.
2.1.32 Professional Engineer
The contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) who will specify the method, procedures,
precautions, etc in carrying out the proposed piling and its related excavation works.
The PE shall study the nature of the proposed piling works, ground conditions, existing and proposed
buildings and structures within the site, existing neighbouring buildings, structures, properties and gather
any other relevant information in order to make the following necessary submissions to the BCA/HDB:
(a) The PE shall submit to BCA/HDB a vibration monitoring layout plan. The allowable vibration level
must be explicitly stated in the submission.
LUP09/S2.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-10/30
2.1.32 Professional Engineer (Cont’d)
(b) The PE shall submit to BCA/HDB his design drawing on retaining works and the allowable ground
movements for excavation that is related to piling works.
(c) The contractor and PE shall carry out a pre-construction survey on all the neighbouring properties.
A Registered Surveyor has to be engaged in the process if necessary. The Contractor and PE
shall extend a copy of the survey report to the owners of all the neighbouring properties.
The contractor and his PE shall be fully responsible on the adequacy of the above designs and
submissions. The PE shall be aware of his responsibility as spelt out by Building and Construction
Authority's circulars and announcements in making the above submissions. All of the above requirements
are to be complied with before commencement of works
2.2 H-SECTION STEEL PILING
2.2.1 Hydraulic Hammer Pile Driving Machines
The Contractor shall use only hydraulic hammer pile driving machines which are fully enclosed with noise
dampening enclosures and the usage of such machine shall comply with all relevant regulations as well
as provisions in this Specifications in regard to pollution control. Generator sets for electricity supply and
welding purposes shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.
2.2.2 Steel Pile Sections
The steel pile sections shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the
equivalent British Standard BS 4360 for mild steel. Before driving commences, all sections shall be clean
and free from any contamination or materials which will impair their strength.
2.2.3 Nominal Working Load
The nominal working loads of various sizes of H-section steel piles shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
2.2.4 Length of Steel Pile Sections
The length of new steel pile sections delivered to the piling site shall be 12 metres long. If the Contractor
intends to use steel pile sections of other lengths, the approval of the SO Rep must first be obtained prior
to their delivery to the stockyard or the piling site.
2.2.5 Quality of Welded Joints and Welders
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain a high standard of quality of welded joints.
The quality of the welded joint between pile sections depends not only on the quality of the weld material
but also on the skill of the welder. The welder shall possess at least a National Trade Certificate 3 (NTC-
3) for Arc Welding issued by a recognised and approved institute. Notwithstanding this, the welder shall
be subjected to re-qualifying by approved welding inspectors as and when required by the SO Rep.
A high standard of workmanship of welders shall be maintained to ensure a high standard of quality of the
welded joints.
All pile sections at each piling site must be neatly stacked in the `H' position to facilitate cutting of the 45
degree chamfer.
Before commencement of piling, each welder shall execute a sample joint for inspection. If the quality of
the welded joint is unsatisfactory, the welder will be disallowed to carry out welding until he has proved by
way of a subsequent demonstration that he can perform a welded joint satisfactorily.
During piling, all welded joints of pile sections shall be checked. A welder who produces unsatisfactory
welds shall be replaced and shall be disallowed from carrying out welding at any other piling site. The
Contractor shall fabricate and supply adequate number of weld gauge for use by Consultant’s site
supervision staff.
LUP09/S2.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-11/30
2.2.6 Record of Steel Pile Driving
Records of driving for every steel pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the
SO Rep on site. The records shall include the following information :
(a) set
(b) temporary compression
(c) full length and serial numbers of steel sections
(d) reduced level at top of pile
(e) reduced cut-off level
(f) pay length
(g) time of completion
(h) inclination of the pile
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before driving commences.
The method of measuring the set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The
above record must show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
Immediately after a pile reaches its final set, the reduced level of the top of the pile section shall be
certified so that the exact pay length of the pile may be recorded.
2.2.7 Marking of Steel Sections
Serial number and length shall be marked in paint on every steel section on arrival at Site. Length of
sections shall be measured to the nearest 10mm. Full record shall be submitted to the SO Rep daily for
checking.
2.2.8 Steel Pile Sections
The detail of the mild steel H-Section piles and their respective nominal working loads are as shown on
the drawings.
Alternative mild steel H-Section shall not be used unless they are approved by the SO Rep. The nominal
working load of such sections shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
2.2.9 Dynamic Test Pile For Steel H-Pile
The Contractor shall engage an independent testing specialist who provides at all times, operate and
maintain a set of portable equipment for the dynamic testing of pile foundations. The total number of tests
to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building block, whichever is
greater. The equipment shall be the latest model of its kind, Model GCPC Pile Driving Analyzer or its
equivalent. The equipment shall also be equipped with the latest revision of the CAPWAP programme to
perform data analysis of the field data. The CAPWAP programme should include features for interactive
or automated mode for calculation and matching of the forces, velocity waves, calculation of CASE
capacity, calculation of pile-toe resistance vs toe movement for end-bearing piles, wave equation analysis
using pile top measurements, static load-settlement analysis based on the CAPWAP results and capable
of giving both numerical and graphic output and other utilities for the processing of the field data.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software owned by the third party testing specialist
are in good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit specifications
and details of the Hardware and Software for the SO Rep approval before carrying out the dynamic test
pile.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within 2 weeks after notification by the
SO Rep on the need to carry out the test, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to engage
other testing specialists to carry out the dynamic pile test and CAPWAP Analysis and all costs and
expenses thus incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor.
The portable dynamic testing equipment should be in a compact unit suitable for rugged use at the piling
site. The unit shall contain automatic signal conditioner, printer and a high resolution screen for display.
The printer should be capable of producing report quality graphs as well as printout of data in the field.
The Contractor shall ensure that qualified personnel viz. an engineer and a technician are available at all
times for the operation of equipment and for conducting the test.
LUP09/S2.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-12/30
2.2.10 Failure of Dynamic Pile Test
A Dynamic Pile Test shall be deemed to have failed if the maximum resistance of pile (RMX) at any time
during blow, using a Case Damping Coefficient (J) as approved by the SO Rep, is less than 2 times the
nominal working load of a working pile under test.
If the force/velocity-time graph taken during the test does not indicate any abnormality, the SO Rep may
allow the Contractor to re-tap the pile and another Dynamic Pile Test may be carried out all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
If a working pile so tested fails and is rejected by the SO Rep, then TWO further Dynamic Pile Tests on
other piles in any building block at the site may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's
cost and expense. In addition, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep shall be driven all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
When the integrity of the pile from a Dynamic Pile Test is doubtful to the SO Rep, the Contractor is required
to show proof that the integrity of the pile is acceptable to the SO Rep. Otherwise, compensating pile(s), as
directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
2.3 RESERVED
2.4 MICRO PILE SYSTEM
2.4.1 Hydraulic Drilling Rig and Accessories
The Contractor shall use only electrically powered hydraulic drilling rigs to minimise noise generated
during drilling operation. The slurry circulation tanks shall be used to remove all spoil cement slurry and
water from the pile pits. Generator sets for the supply of electricity shall have adequate housing and
exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.
2.4.2 Installation of Micro Piles
The installation of micro piles shall include inter-alia the following requirements :
(a) The quality of materials such as 40 HT Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice
material, etc must be approved by the SO Rep. Equipment tools, and other accessories must be
in good working condition.
(b) All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained
throughout the installation work.
(c) Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore
Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid"
grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and
reduce shrinkage.
The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or approved by the SO Rep.
The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 30.
(d) The installation date of every micro pile and the test results for any one piling site shall be captured
and recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by Contractor's Professional
Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the SO Rep within two weeks
after the completion of the work at each piling site.
(e) Any other conditions that may be imposed by the SO Rep to ensure the safety and soundness of
each micro pile.
LUP09/S2.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-13/30
2.4.3 Nominal Working Load of Micro Pile
For micro piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 150mm to 300mm in increment of 25mm.
The nominal working loads of the various sizes of micro piles shall be as shown in the Drawings
2.4.4 Boring of Micro Piles
For soft and collapsible soils, the borehole shall be temporarily cased or stabilised with bentonite slurry.
Upon reaching rock or firm soil strata drilling may be continued without casing. Drilling in rock shall be
executed with a down-the-hole hammer. Boring in soil can be done by wet or dry rotary drilling depending
on the soil type and site environment.
Upon completion of the drilling, the borehole shall be cleaned by flushing out any loose chipping/soil
particles from the inside of the casing.
2.4.5 Main Steel Component of Micro Piles
Axial steel component of the micro pile shall be in accordance with the drawings. The main steel bars
shall be joined by splicing. Splicing shall be of mechanical splicing.
Top anchorage of the micropile shall consist of extension of the axial steel component of the pile through
a steel bearing plate. The circumference of the steel bars through the steel plate shall be securely
welded.
The contractor shall propose his method of reinforcement splicing or coupling to SO Rep for approval.
Upon approval of the method, the contractor shall proceed to fabricate samples of splicing or coupling and
send them to an approved laboratory for testing on its tensile strength. The splicing or coupling shall be
strong enough such that its tensile strength is higher than the reinforcement. Three samples shall be
tested and the results of the tests are to be accepted before installation of working piles. The costs of
fabrication of the test samples and testing are to be borne by the contractor.
2.4.6 Grout Mix
The proportion of grout and the minimum strength of work cubes shall comply with the following
requirement :
Resistance to Crushing (Cube Strength)

Range of Water/Cement Ratio
7 days 28 days
2
0.40 to 0.45 24 N/mm 33 N/mm2
The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall
be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from
segregation, slumping and bleeding.
LUP09/S2.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-14/30
2.4.7 Grouting
Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting
pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous
operation until "good grout" appears at the top of borehole.
2.4.8 Grout Test
3
Where micro piles are included in the Works, 4 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix of every 3 m
or a portion thereof for testing purpose for each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are
required due to failure in complying with the specified strength. The 2 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days
and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days. at the HDB Prefabricated Technology Centre. An
administrative charge in accordance with clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" shall be imposed on
every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age. In addition, the SO Rep
reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles when ordered by
the SO Rep all at the contractor’s cost and expense.
2.4.9 Fabrication of Steel Bar
Spiral reinforcement (R6) is fixed around the bars to prevent bursting of grout under load. Lantern
centralisers are fixed to the bars at 3m interval to ensure sufficient grout cover to the steel bars.
Steel spacers are placed at 3m interval to ensure the bars are vertically placed.
2.4.10 Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Micro Pile
Where micro piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist
testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The
total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building
block, whichever is greater.
The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time,
if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed.
The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialist’s testing firm to carrying out the test. The
pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud
or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound
concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small
impact hammer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a
technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report
indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two
sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to
the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following:
(a) Contract name and number
(b) Block number
(c) Pile reference number
(d) Pile diameter
(e) Date of pile installation and date of testing
(f) Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile
(g) Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the
defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.
LUP09/S2.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-15/30
2.5 JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM
2.5.1 System of Piling
The jack-in piling system consists essentially of H-section steel piles, hollow steel pipe piles or Reinforced
Concrete piles forced into the ground using a non-impact jacking system. The pile sections used shall
comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standards.
The Contractor shall ensure that when concrete piles are used, they would not be damaged during
handling and transportation.
2.5.2 Nominal Working Load
The nominal working load shall be as specified in the Drawings.
2.5.3 Resistance and Penetration of Piles
The resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 2.5 times the nominal working load of the pile. The
Contractor shall install all working piles to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained. The
minimum depth of pile shall not be less than 7.0 metres below the cut-off level of the pile or as may be
agreed by the SO Rep.
2.5.4 Installation
During pile installation, the hydraulic pressure of jack corresponding to depth of pile penetration shall be
recorded at every 0.5 meter depth intervals.
Except for pile jointing, each pile shall be jacked in continuously until the required penetration or required
resistance as shown on the pressure gauge of the jack is achieved.
A maximum jacking pressure of 2.5 times the nominal working load shall be maintained for at least 2
minutes. The final set recorded shall not exceed 10mm. In areas of special ground conditions, the SO
Rep may require the jacking force to be increased to 3 times the nominal working load of piles.
2.5.5 Quality of Welded Joints and Welders
Where welding of pile sections are required the quality of welded joints and welders is as provided in
Clause 2.2.5 "Quality of Welded Joints and Welders" of this Specification.
2.6 REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES
2.6.1 Scope of Work
Where applicable, the scope of work shall include the manufacturing, delivery, storage, driving,
completion and maintenance of precast concrete piling work for foundations of buildings or other
structures. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labour, Construction Equipment, tools and
everything necessary for the execution of the Works in so far as these are specified in or can be
reasonably inferred from the Contract.
LUP09/S2.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-16/30
2.6.2 Piling System and Nominal Working Load
The piling system manufactured shall include piles with nominal working load as shown in the drawings.
The nominal working loads shall be such that the manufactured pile and the ground in which the pile is
driven is :
(a) capable of sustaining a load of not less than 3 times the working load before ultimate failure and as
may be determined by calculation;
(b) capable of sustaining a load of 2 times the working load without exceeding the limits of settlement
as specified in Clause 2.6.39 "Load-Settlement Curve"; and
(c) the maximum permissible stress in the pile under working load condition shall not exceed
0.25 times the characteristics cube strength of the concrete.
2.6.3 Size of Piles
The piles required for the Contract shall generally be of the following sizes :
Type Cross Sectional Size
Ap 150mm x 150mm
Bp 175mm x 175mm
Cp 200mm x 200mm
Dp 230mm x 230mm
Ep 260mm x 260mm
Fp 300mm x 300mm
The Employer reserves the right to use any particular size of pile in various compositions. The Contractor
is deemed to have allowed for this in the Contract Sum.
2.6.4 Pile Manufacturing
Piles shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with approved piling plan and shall be cast in the
casting yard of the Contractor. The casting yard for all concrete piles should be so arranged that they can
be shifted from their beds and transported to sites with a minimum of handling.
PVC tube, external diameter 25mm x 2.5mm thick with the length as shown in the drawing shall be
provided and cast together with the reinforcement bars. The method and material used for securing the
pvc tube, reinforcement bars and links in position during casting shall be proposed by the contractor and
submitted to the Engineer for approval. It is the sole responsibility of contractor to ensure the PVC tube is
firmly secured and straight before and after casting.
Mild steel hollow inset (25mm external diameter x 2.5mm thick x 90mm length), backer rod stopper
(50mm external diameter x length 100mm) and measuring rod shall be provided by the Contractor.
Samples of these material shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of
piling work.
The piles should be cast in a continuous operation. The piles shall not be cast in tiers on top of each
other. The casting beds shall be sited on firm and well-prepared ground in order to prevent bending of
piles during the after casting.
LUP09/S2.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-17/30
2.6.4 Pile Manufacturing (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall adhere to the following minimum periods and cube strengths for the pile
manufacturing :
Operation Minimum Period Minimum Cube Strength
Lifting from Casting Bed 24 hours 12 N/mm2
Curing by water spraying 7 days -
The Contractor shall appoint a competent foreman to supervise the production of reinforced concrete piles
throughout the term of contract.
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep a monthly chart of pile production.
2.6.5 Pile Transporting
Care should be taken at all stages of transporting, lifting and handling to ensure that the piles are not
damaged or cracked. All cracked piles shall be rejected on site. If piles are put down temporarily after
being lifted, they should be placed on trestles or blocks located at the lifting points.
2.6.6 Pile Stacking and Storing
Piles shall be stored on firm ground not liable to unequal settlement under the weight of the stack of piles.
The piles shall be placed on firm supports which are truly level and spaced so as to avoid undue bending
in the piles. The supports should be vertically above one another.
Spaces shall be left round the piles to enable them to be lifted without difficulty.
The order of stacking shall be such that the older piles can be withdrawn for driving without disturbing
newer piles. Separate stacks should be provided for different lengths of piles.
Piles shall be watered if necessary, to met weather conditions or to provide further curing during storage.
In hot weather the piles shall be shaded from direct sunshine.
The first pile section without hole on the end plate, shall be painted in red near to the end plate on all four
sides, the method to be approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.7 Tolerances in Pile Dimensions
The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile shall be within the tolerances of +5mm. Any face of a pile shall
not deviate by more than 6mm from a straight edge 3m long laid on the face, and the centroid of any
cross-section of the pile shall not deviate by more than 12mm from the straight line connecting the
centroids of the end faces of the pile.
Piles which have exceeded the above tolerances will be rejected and the Contractor shall remove them
from site upon the SO Rep's instruction.
2.6.8 Pay Length of Driven Piles
The pay length of driven piles is the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level of the
driven piles. The penetration and pay length of every pile shall be recorded by the SO Rep and the
Contractor. The concrete pile shall be marked with red paint at every 1m to enable easy determination of
pile penetration, the method of marking to be approved by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S2.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-18/30
2.6.9 Materials for Concrete
2.6.9.1 Cement
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, the cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards :
Type Relevant Standard

Ordinary Portland Cement SS 26
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement SS 26
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
The Contractor shall, at the request of the SO Rep, produce a certificate showing the date and place of
manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, samples of cement shall be provided
for testing. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cements of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in
the same mix.
Concrete of different brands of cement shall not be mixed during casting.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not
be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
2.6.9.2 Sulphate Resisting Cement
If directed by the SO Rep in writing, sulphate resisting cement for precast concrete piles will be used
instead of ordinary portland cement. Sulphate resisting cement is to be in accordance with BS 4027.
2.6.9.3 Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand complying with
SS 31.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS
31.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 20mm for reinforced concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS 31 shall not be used.
Aggregates delivered to site shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent
intermingling of different materials and contamination.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with SS 31. Aggregates failing to comply with SS 31 shall be rejected.
The Contractor shall be required to inform the SO Rep in writing of any change in the source of supply of
these aggregates.
2.6.9.4 Water
Potable water supplied by the Power Supply Limited shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout,
for washing out formwork and for curing of concrete.
LUP09/S2.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-19/30
2.6.9 Materials for Concrete (Cont'd)
2.6.9.5 Steel Reinforcement
Steel used for reinforced concrete shall have tensile strength and other properties equal to or better than
the requirements of the relevant Standards. Plain mild steel and high yield deformed reinforcement bars
shall comply with SS2 or BS 4449.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any
other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep with every facility to cut samples of steel bars for testing at
HDB's testing centres or a testing authority approved by the Employer. The steel reinforcement bars
should comply with the following tensile properties :
Specified Characteristic Minimum Elongation

2
Strength (N/mm ) (%)
Plain Mild Steel 250 22
Deformed High Yield Steel 460 12
The tensile strength of any bar shall be at least 15% greater than the actual yield stress measured in the
tensile test.
Test samples of standard 600mm lengths shall be selected from each batch of steel bars at a frequency
not less than that specified below except that, if a batch comprises bars from more than one cast, at least
one test sample shall be selected to represent each cast.
Nominal Size Quantity

< 10mm 1 sample from each 25 tonnes or part thereof
> 10mm <16mm 1 sample from each 35 tonnes or part thereof
> 16mm 1 sample from each 45 tonnes or part thereof
One sample shall consist of two (2) 600mm long bars. Should any sample fail the test, two (2) additional
test samples shall be taken from the sample batch and subjected to same tests. Should either of them
fail, that batch of steel reinforcement bars shall be rejected. Should both of them pass the tests, that
batch of steel reinforcement bars will be accepted.
2.6.9.6 Admixtures
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, the Contractor shall be required to furnish
information concerning the admixture, admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated
in BS 5075 for approval by the SO Rep prior to the use of admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with BS 5075 or relevant Singapore Standard. Requests for permission to
use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when
accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep with every facility for inspection and sampling of the
admixture(s) at least once every three-month of active concreting period. The sample(s) shall be kept for
reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep for Admixture uniformity tests in accordance with
BS 5075 or the relevant Singapore Standard.
LUP09/S2.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-20/30
2.6.10 Fabrication of Reinforcement
All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings.
Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even
bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and
rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep.
Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wire. The projecting ends of the steel wire shall be
directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover.
Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified
concrete cover.
Concrete or mortar spacer blocks shall not be bigger than 50mm x 50mm x the specified concrete cover,
shall be provided with typing wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and durability
characteristics than the surrounding concrete.
Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics
have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep.
Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep
before any concrete can be placed thereon.
Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from works being
concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected
from accidental deformation and damage.
2.6.11 Form Releasing Agent
The Contractor shall use, for each casting of concrete, form releasing agent acceptable to the SO Rep
and shall bear the cost.
2.6.12 Concrete Mixes
2.6.12.1 Designed Mix
For designed mixes the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO
Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade 40
3
Minimum cement content (kg/m ) 420
3
Maximum cement content (kg/m ) 550
Maximum fine aggregate
50
total aggregate (%)
Maximum water/cement ratio 0.45
2
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 15 N/mm . If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval, mix adjustment is allowed only when sufficient results are available, however,
such mix shall remain compliance with the specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified in the drawings.
LUP09/S2.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-21/30
2.6.12 Concrete Mixes (Cont'd)
2.6.12.2 Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified
by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as
well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered
suitable if both.
(a) The designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS78 or BS1881 : Part 105 if
a flow test is specified.
(b) The average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic
2
strength by the current margin minus 3.5 N/mm , or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that
it is likely to be exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if approved by the SO Rep when the concrete is supplied by prequalified
ready-mix concrete suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.12.3 Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep the Contractor is not allowed to change the mix
without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg/m3 and above, or % fine aggregate by 5% and
above, or any changes in the type or dosage of admixture, or consistency is considered a change in mix
design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design used in relation to the specified
requirements.
An administrative charge shall be imposed if the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to
the approved mix.
2.6.13 Batching
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by volume and due allowance shall be made for the amount of
water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this amount from the volume of water to be
added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and within +5% of the quantity of admixture added. Before commencement
of work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be
calibrated with known weights and volume measures.
2.6.14 Mixing Concrete
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is
uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(i) Pan mixer - minimum 30 seconds
(ii) Truck mixer or drum mixer - minimum ½ minutes for 1m3 of concrete plus ¼ minute for
3
each additional 1m .
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
LUP09/S2.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-22/30
2.6.14 Mixing Concrete (Cont'd)
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more
than 30 minutes should be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be
free from hardened concrete and worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
2.6.15 Ready-Mixed Concrete
The Contractor shall seek the written approval of the SO's Rep for the use of ready-mixed concrete. Such
approval to use ready-mixed concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the Employer
and all Delivery Orders for the ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the
Resident Technical Officer and submitted to the SO Rep.
Where ready-mix concrete is used, it shall comply with SS 289 and the mix design and admixture used
shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. The cement content shall comply with
Clause 2.6.12 "Concrete Mixes".
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement was added to the mix.
2.6.16 Workability and Consistency
The workability shall be such as to produce a concrete which can be well compacted, be worked into the
corners of the shuttering and around the reinforcements, give the specified surface finish and attain the
specified strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable.
On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on site at the discharge point of the mixer by
means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed
value by more than +25mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be
rejected.
As an alternative, flow test to BS1881: Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be
considered subject to approval by the SO Rep.
No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.
2.6.17 Placing of Concrete
All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before
it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are
used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall
be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.
In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(i) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which maybe displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.
(ii) Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concrete.
(iii) When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe must be thoroughly wetted inside
but no free water shall remain in the pipe.
(iv) Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by
covering with damp sacking or other approved materials during pumping.
LUP09/S2.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-23/30
2.6.17 Placing of Concrete (Cont'd)
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved implements and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and subject to his
approval.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for
night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
2.6.18 Compaction of Concrete
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using
approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition
shall be used on site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two
standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns.
The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel
reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind.
Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
2.6.19 Curing and Protection of Concrete
After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. Exposed
surfaces of concrete are to be kept moist and covered for a minimum of 3 days after placing, with a
material such as polytene sheet or a curing compound or an absorbent material kept constantly damp by
frequent watering. The method of curing and the covering material used shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good at the
Contractor's expense.
2.6.20 Quality of Concrete Works
Where reinforced concrete piles are included in the Works, the compressive strength of concrete shall be
determined by crushing tests of 100 mm cubes. The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be
tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance with SS78. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or
flow test, compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete tests as and when required by the
SO Rep.
On each concreting day, for both precast and cast-in-situ concrete, for every 40 cubic metres or part
thereof, of each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, at least one sample shall be taken from a batch
chosen by the SO Rep. A sample is a quantity of concrete, consisting of a number of standard scoopfuls,
taken from a batch of concrete whose properties are to be determined. Two cubes are cast per sample
per age of testing unless specified otherwise. The sample shall be taken at the point of discharge from
the mixer or agitating truck of a wet batching plant, or, in the case of a dry batching plant, at the point of
discharge from the mixer truck.
At least 6 cubes shall be cast from each sample. Two cubes shall be tested at an early age of 1 day,
another two cubes at 7 days and the remaining two cubes shall be tested at 28 days. All cubes other than
the 1 day age shall be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre.
LUP09/S2.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-24/30
2.6.20 Quality of Concrete Works (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all test cubes for the
specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative
humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a
person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes shall be collected by the SO Rep from site for
testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre at a regular interval .The SO Rep shall
remove crushed cubes from the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre.
In addition to the minimum number of samples stated above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion,
instruct the Contractor to take extra sample from whichever batch as he may choose.
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency or
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification (RFID)
reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cube from a minimum distance of at least 40
mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag IDs
using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same casting
day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes are still fresh.
The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The Contractor shall
protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of RFID tag, the
Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due
to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the
Employer
LUP09/S2.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-25/30
2.6.21 Compliance of Strength Requirement
The 1 day strength and 7 day strength are obtained for quality control purpose. A minimum use strength
2
of 12 N/mm for 1 day is required to meet the design strength for lifting of piles.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age
of 7 and 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if both the following are satisfied :
(a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples is greater than or equal to
the specified characteristic strength plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N/mm2. Thus, the
minimum average strength shall be :
Grade 40
Minimum Average 7 days 32.0
2
Strength (N/mm ) 28 days 43.0
(b) The sample strength is at least the level specified below :
Grade 40
Minimum Individual
7 days 27.0
Sample Strength
28 days 37.0
(N/mm2)
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be
sought to lower the strength level specified in (a) above.
If the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the above conditions, administrative
charges shall be imposed against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken must be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested
at their respective age. Administrative charges shall be imposed against the Contractor for test cubes that
are lost.
In addition on the payment of administrative charges, the affected concrete work may be stopped for a
period to be decided by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion period shall be allowed for
such stoppage of the Work.
2.6.22 Failure of Cube Strength
In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with
BS 5328.
For 1 day non-compliance, lifting of affected piles from casting beds can not be carried out until at least 3
days have lapsed from the time of last placing of concrete on the affected piles.
For 7 days non-compliance, no delivering of affected piles out from casting yard and driving can be
carried out on these piles until the 28 days strength becomes available.
For 28 days non-compliance, core samples shall be taken and tested on the affected piles to estimate the
quality of the sub-standard concrete. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881 (Part
120) and assessed in accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the
establishment of non-compliance. Notwithstanding the outcome of such tests, the Contractor shall bear
all the cost incurred by such tests.
Should the core tests fail, additional or compensating piles shall be driven for the affected piles groups at
the Contractor's own cost. All sub-standard piles not driven into the ground will then be rejected.
LUP09/S2.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-26/30
2.6.23 Apparatus
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use on the casting yard at all times :
(a) Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS78 or flow test apparatus complying with
BS1881:Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location.
(b) Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS78 for casting 100 mm concrete
test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that
no stripping of cube is required prior to 24 hours setting and hardening period.
(c) Three measuring cylinders of 250 ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for
determination of silt content (field settling method).
(d) An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate.
(e) One concrete rebound hammer.
(f) One electronic calculator with statistical functions.
2.6.24 Pile Hammer & Construction Equipment
Impact hammer, either single-acting, double-acting, or hydraulic hammer shall be used in driving piles.
No diesel hammers are to be used. The hammer shall be capable of producing sufficient kinetic energy to
drive the piles to the required set without causing damage. The type of hammer and the height of drop of
the hammer must be first approved by the SO Rep. If hydraulic hammer is used, the Contractor must
ensure that the hydraulic hammer provided is suitable for the piling of all sizes of reinforced concrete piles
without causing damage.
2.6.25 Set
The allowable set for the final 10 blows of piles, which is dependant on factors such as pile size, pile
penetration, hammer size and subsoil condition, etc shall be proposed by the contractor based on `Hiley
Formula' or wave equation and must be approved by the SO Rep before being adopted as criterion in a
site.
The Contractor shall make available all facilities and equipments eg. Theodolite, as and when required by
the SO Rep for the checking of `set' for the final 10 blows of piles.
Piles shall be driven to a ultimate resistance of at least 3 time the given nominal working load of the pile
section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall solely rest with the Contractor.
2.6.26 Making Good Defects
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling work in accordance with the
Specification and the pile layout drawings. Any damage or Defect to the super-structure resulting from
defective execution of work shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.
2.6.27 Delivery and Driving of Piles
Piles shall be delivered to site not earlier than 14 days after casting and the cube strength shall be at least
2
40 N/mm . Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to the line both laterally
and longitudinally as indicated in the drawings.
Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain
their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been
wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the
SO Rep.
LUP09/S2.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-27/30
2.6.27 Delivery and Driving of Piles (Cont'd)
Dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been
obtained from the SO Rep. When dolly is used, the allowance set for the final 10 blows of a pile shall be
reduced to account for the higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the
reduction shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent.
2.6.28 Pile Length Measurement
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools to measure the length of the driven piles as and when
required by the Superintending Officer's Representative. This measurement shall be done in the
presence of SO Rep.
The measurement of the driven pile shall be carried out immediately after driving to set and subsequently
covered with stopper to prevent any possible chokage of PVC tube. In situation where a dolly is used for
final driving of piles, the measurement shall be done before the use of dolly.
It is the sole responsibility of contractor to ensure the measured length of piles tally with the recorded
length of piles. In the event of discrepancies between the measured and recorded lengths of piles, the
Contractor shall be given a week's time to verify and confirm the true length of the driven piles to the
satisfaction of the Superintending Officer’s Representative, otherwise, the piles shall be rejected and
replaced with compensating piles in accordance with Clause 2.6.38 "Compensation Piles".
Notwithstanding the above, the Superintending Officer's Representative decision shall be final, binding on
and conclusive against the Contractor.
All additional cost of amendment in pile-cap, beams etc resulting from the above rejected piles shall be
borne by the Contractor.
2.6.29 Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO
Rep on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items :
(a) set
(b) temporary compression
(c) penetration from ground level
(d) length of pile and size of section
(e) ground level
(f) cut-off level to the top of pile
(g) time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record must show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
2.6.30 Marking of Serial Numbers of Pile Section
Serial number, length and date of casting shall be marked on one of the end plate and any one face of the
pile for every pile section. Method and presentation of marking shall be approved by the SO Rep.
2.6.31 Damaged or Rejected Piles
All piles which are cracked, broken or damaged during handling or transportation shall be rejected. All
rejected piles shall be marked in all the four faces. Method of presentation of marking shall be approved
by the SO Rep.
All piles structurally damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb
resulting in no set after driving for considerable length, where it should set based on available soil data
and site condition, shall also be rejected.
LUP09/S2.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-28/30
2.6.31 Damaged or Rejected Piles (Cont'd)
In situation where a dolly is used, the pile shall be rejected if it does not achieve the allowable set and the
full length of the dolly has been utilised to drive the pile.
In the above cases of rejection, the decision of the SO Rep shall be final, binding on and conclusive
against the contractor.
2.6.32 Licensed Surveyors and Survey Instrument
Before commencement of piling works to each proposed block of building, the contractor shall employ a
licensed Surveyor to confirm the average ground level for the purpose of determination of pay lengths and
to set out the position of each pile.
The licensed Surveyor shall endorse on the pile eccentricity drawings and be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels. The eccentricities of piles shall be taken at the cut-
off level. The method of measurement shall be subject to the SO Rep's approval. The Contractor is to
make available all facilities and equipments for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.
To improve productivity and quality of surveying works, the Contractor shall provide at least 1 (one)
Electronic Total Stations as and when required. The Electronic Total Stations complete with accessories
must be made available at two weeks' notice. The Electronic Total Stations shall be able to measure
distance up to 2500 metres and angles to 1" (sec) with Liquid Crystal Display. The model of the
equipment shall be to the Contractor's proposal subject to Superintending Officer's Representative
approval. The Contractor shall provide at his own expense the necessary assistance and personnel, etc
in connection with the use of the above equipment in the checking of the surveying works by the
Superintending Officer's Representative.
2.6.33 As-Built Drawings
After the completion of the piling work, the Contractor shall submit three copies of às-built' (eccentricity)
drawing to the SO Rep.
The às-built' (eccentricity) drawing shall be prepared and signed by the licensed surveyor.
All costs incurred for the preparation of these drawings shall be deemed to have been included in the
Contract Sum.
2.6.34 Tolerance from True Position
The centre of each pile at cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown on the drawings by
more than 75mm.
All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams etc as designed by the Employer as a counter
measure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall be borne by the piling
Contractor. Piles shall be truly vertical. Any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 in 75, the rectification
method with or without compensating pile(s) shall be decided by the SO Rep.
2.6.35 Pile Verticality Measurement
The Contractor shall provide the necessary tools to measure the verticality of piles.
2.6.36 Raking Pile
For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The maximum
permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination is 1 in 40.
LUP09/S2.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-29/30
2.6.37 Compensation Piles
All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the
Contractor's expense. The position and number of compensating pile/s shall be decided by the SO Rep.
The Employer will only pay the cost for the original number of pile/s in the pile group as shown in the
drawings. In the computation for payment, the size of the original pile and pay length of the compensation
pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the rejected pile, the
computation shall be based on the size of the original pile and where applicable, the shortest pay length
of the compensating piles (which compensate this particular rejected piles, as decided by the SO Rep). If
there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no indication which compensating
piles are for any one particular rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep). The computation for payment
shall be based on the sizes of the original piles and the two or more shortest pay length, where
applicable, of the compensation piles.
2.6.38 Cutting-Off of Piles
The Contractor shall excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout drawings
or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up
immediately. Precast concrete pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal
reinforcement bars. The cut-off level of the pile shall not deviate from it true level as shown on the
drawings by more than +50mm. The longitudinal steel shall be left projecting 600mm above the dressed
head level and cast into the pilecap.
After the cutting of each pile to its required cut-off level, the Contractor must use the stopper (as shown in
the drawing or approved by the SO Rep) to properly cover up the PVC tube opening.
In cutting of piles, the Contractor shall ensure that a licensed surveyor is maintained at the site for such
work. If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and
pay other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereon including administrative
charge, if any, shall be deducted from the monies due to the Contractor.
2.6.39 Load-Settlement Curve
The settlement obtained at various load increments in the course of ultimate load test shall be plotted to
produce a load-settlement curve.
This curve shall be known as the `proximate ultimate load test curve' being proximate to a given number
of working piles. The total settlement of the ultimate load test sustained at full load and over a period of
not less than 3 days shall not exceed 40mm at 3 times the normal working load, otherwise the test is
deemed to have failed and a replacement test shall be carried out at the Contractor's own expense, until
finally, an ultimate load test passed.
In the event that ultimate load test and working load test are both carried out, any test pile under twice the
working load exceeds the limits of settlement as defined on the `proximate ultimate load test curve' but not
exceeding a settlement of 25mm may be considered to have passed the test. The test pile shall be
deemed to have failed if it exceeds the limits of settlement and also a settlement of 25mm.
In the absence of ultimate load test as decided by the SO Rep, any test pile under working load test at
twice the working load sustained over a period of 3 days exceeds a settlement of 25mm shall be deemed
to have failed.
2.6.40 Failure of Working Piles
If a working test pile fails to sustain the full working test load over a period of not less than 3 days as
decided by the SO Rep, then 2 further tests on other piles at the same site selected by the SO Rep shall
be carried out at the Contractor's own expense. Where a pile fails under test, additional adjacent piles, as
directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, and
the whole of the work shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense. That part of the whole Contract
shall be deemed to have failed if 2 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing up to 150 piles, or 3 or
more piles fail out of a piling area containing 151 to 750 piles, or 4 or more piles fail out of a piling area
containing more than 750 piles.
In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the
Contract documents, as will, in the opinion of the SO Rep, ensure the safety of the structures which are to
be carried by the rejected piles. The whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense.
LUP09/S2.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 2-30/30
2.6.41 Rate of Progress
The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress
and the time required for pile driving and follow up works to the SO Rep for his approval as soon as that
site is handed to the Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at
every piling site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
2.7 PRECAST RC PILES
2.7.1 Piling System and Layouts
Where precast RC piles are included in the Works, submit the system of piling and furnish the following
drawings and information :
(a) Pile layout plans.
(b) System and type of piling offered, with detailed drawings, design calculation and complete
description. The proposed system should comply with BS 8004, "Code of Practice for
Foundations".
(c) Cross-section dimensions of piles.
(d) Maximum length to which piles can be driven below ground level.
(e) Nominal working load which can be carried by the pile assuming complete resistance to further
penetration has been obtained.
(f) Detail of steel reinforcement of piles.
(g) 28-day strength of concrete in piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor.
(h) Detail of pile shoe and joint splicing.
Pile layout drawings proposed shall ensure complete safety and stability of structures. Column loading
plans which show all the sizes and loadings on each column, issued by the Employer shall be used in
preparing pile layouts.
Each pile layout drawing shall contain the cut-off level of every pile.
Failure to comply with the above may render the tender to be rejected.
2
The pile shall be designed to a working stress of 7.5N per mm in axial compression.
Minimum 28-day strength of concrete in the piles which shall be guaranteed by the Contractor shall be
2
fixed at 40N per mm .
2.7.2 Materials for Precast RC Piles
Where precast RC piles are included in the Works, all materials used for precast RC piles shall, where
appropriate, comply with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under them.
SECTION 3/...
LUP09/S2.DOC(30)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 3-1/1
SECTION 3
RESERVED
SECTION 4/…
LUP09/S3.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-1/22
SECTION 4
4.0 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
4.1 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
All concrete used for site casting shall be obtained from approved Ready-Mixed Concrete suppliers.
Ready-mixed concrete used shall comply with SS 289. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.8
“Concrete Mixes” including all sub-clauses under it.
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.
4.2 CEMENT
4.2.1 General Requirements
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards:
Type Relevant Standard

Ordinary Portland Cement SS 26
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement SS 26
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place of
manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the presence of
SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB
Prefabrication Technology Centre. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the relevant
standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in the
same mix.
Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed in
writing of any change in the source of supply.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall not
be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
4.2.2 Supply From The Contractor’s Source
(a) Certificate of compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications
and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance inform and seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing of his source of supply together
with the following documents:
(i) Test Reports showing that the Contractor’s supply is tested according to and in compliance
with SS26.
LUP09/S4.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-2/22
4.2.2 (a) Certificate of compliance (Cont’d)
(ii) If the Contractor’s supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification on
the mill.
(iii) If the Contractor’s supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas
manufacturer.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date
of the test reports to the SO Rep.
Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to seek
the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
(b) Test Requirements
The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from
his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre:
The Cement shall be tested in accordance with the Approved Standard for Physical and Chemical
Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The number of tests to be conducted during
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract shall be as follows:
Supply Source Number of Test

Local mill with ISO 9000 Minimum one test six-monthly
Local mill without ISO 9000/Imported cement Minimum one test quarterly
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources i.e. a local mill and imported cement will
have both sources subjected to the test requirements.
All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to
the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne
by the Contractor.
4.3 AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS 31. Where crushed
granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed 30%.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with SS
31.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced
concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS31 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials inferior to
granite shall not be used.
Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling of
different materials and contamination. Aggregates used for concrete batching plant on site shall be
covered with a light roof cover. The light roof structure shall be in good condition and requires minimum
maintenance. The material for the cover can be either canvas or other light roofing sheets, as long as it
serves to cover/protect the aggregates from the weather, especially sunshine. Fine aggregates shall be
tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate moisture compensation during concrete production. The
testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy method or other approved equivalent method approved
by the SO Rep
LUP09/S4.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-3/22
4.3.1 General Requirements (Cont’d)
Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to facilitate moisture compensation during
concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on the Speedy method or other approved
equivalent method approved by the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS 31, SS 73, ASTM C295 and ASTM C289. The
samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. Aggregates failing to
comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected.
4.3.2 Supply From The Contractor’s Source
(A) Certificate of compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications
and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance inform and seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing of his source of supply together
with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his supply on the
following properties:
(a) 20mm Aggregate

i) shape;
ii) surface texture;
iii) flakiness index;
iv) 10% fines value;
v) aggregate impact value;
vi) aggregate resistance to abrasion;
vii) relative density;
viii) water absorption values;
ix) potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method);
x) petrographic examination;
xi) grading (sieve analysis);
xii) clay, silt and dust content;
xiii) shell content;
xiv) aggregate crushing value;
xv) acid soluble sulphate content;
xvi) sulphate content;
xvii) organic impurities;
xviii) chloride ion content; and
xix) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
(b) Concreting Sand
i) Sieve analysis and fineness modulus;

ii) Clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3.00%);
iii) Organic impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3);
iv) Chloride content (not more than 0.01%);
v) Bulk density;
vi) Relative density, apparent relative density and water absorption;
vii) Potential reactivity;
viii) Magnesium sulphate soundness;
ix) Elemental Analysis (in percentage):
x) Silica as SiO2
xi( Aluminium Oxide as AI2O3
xii) Iron Oxide as Fe2O3
xiii) Titanium Oxide as TiO2
xiv) Calcium Oxide as CaO
xv) Magnesium Oxide as MgO
xvi) Chromium Oxide as Cr2O3
xvii) Sodium Oxide as Na2O
xviii) Potassium Oxide as K2O
LUP09/S4.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-4/22
4.3.2 (A) (b) Concreting Sand
xix) Sulphate as SO4

xx) Loss on Ignition at 900° C
xxi) any other element(s) which may exist in the concreting sand; and
xxii) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission date
of the test reports to the SO Rep.
Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek the
SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
(B) Test Requirements
The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken from
his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre:
The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications
and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS,
BS, ASTM (especially SS31, SS73, BS812 and BS882) classification for concreting purposes. The
number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows:
(a) 20mm Aggregate
Properties Frequency of Test

Grading (Sieve analysis) Minimum one test quarterly
Flakiness index
10% fines value
Aggregate impact value
Aggregate resistance to abrasion
Aggregate crushing value
Relative density
Water absorption values
Clay, silt and dust content Minimum one test six-monthly
Shell content
Acid soluble sulphate content
Sulphate content
Organic impurities
Chloride Ion Content
Potential alkali-silica reactivity
(chemical method)
Petrographic examination Minimum one test
The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar test
under ASTM Standard C227 if the need arises.
LUP09/S4.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-5/22
4.3.2 (B) Test Requirements (Cont’d)
(b) Concreting Sand
Properties Number of Test

Sieve Analysis and Finess Modulus
Clay, silt and dust content by decantation method
(not more than 3%)
impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3)
Chloride content (not more than 0.01%)
Minimum one test monthly
Bulk Density
Relative density, apparent relative density and

water absorption
Elemental analysis (in percentage):

(i) Silica as SiO2
(ii) Aluminium Oxide as Al2O3
Full list of properties as specified in the subclause

Minimum one test six-monthly
“Certificate of compliance”.
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the
test requirements.
All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples to
the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be borne
by the Contractor.
4.4 WATER
Potable water supplied by the Power Supply Limited shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout.
For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be
used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.
4.5 ADMIXTURES
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture,
admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS320 for approval by the SO Rep
prior to the use of admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with SS 320 or relevant British Standards. Requests for permission to use
other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered when accompanied by
full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s).
The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture
uniformity tests in accordance with SS320 or the relevant British Standards.
4.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
4.6.1 Description
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel and
high yield reinforcement bars complying with SS 2 or BS 4449 and welded steel fabric complying with
SS 32.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any
other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP65. The Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.
LUP09/S4.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-6/22
4.6.2 Testing
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting,
bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to be
taken from reinforcement already fixed in position.
Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. For each
sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing. Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate Specifications
shall be removed and replaced.
4.6.3 Galvanised Steel
Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized to SS 117. The
Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanised steel reinforcement only from those in the
approved lists.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm in diameter, the
minimum average coating mass shall be 500g/m2 and the minimum coating mass on any individual
sample shall be 450 g/m2. The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanised reinforcement bar be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall not
be used as a galvanised reinforcement. Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment.
Store all galvanised reinforcement bars in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white
rust on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough
treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with
minimum 85% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised
reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating weight
shall be determined by stripping tests in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for verification.
4.7 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
All steel reinforcement to be used in this Contract shall be pre-cut and pre-bent before delivery to Site. No
cutting and/or bending of steel reinforcement will be allowed to be done on site.
All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings.
Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even
bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening and
rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep.
Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be
directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover.
Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified
concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent
according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. Parts of the
chairs that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection. All spacers
and chairs for slab reinforcement shall be placed not more than 600mm apart in a regular grid.
Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or mortar
spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength and
durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources
approved by the SO Rep.
Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation characteristics
have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and approved by the SO Rep.
Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the work shall be approved by the SO Rep before
any concrete can be placed thereon.
LUP09/S4.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-7/22
4.7 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT (CONT’D)
Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from work being
concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected
from accidental deformation and damage.
All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars
(except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment
blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep.
The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage
reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage reinforcement.
4.8 CONCRETE MIXES
4.8.1 Designed Mix
For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the SO
Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Cement Content (kg/m3) 275 300 325 350 375 425
Maximum Cement Content (kg/m3) 550 550 550 550 550 550
Maximum Fine Aggregate (%)
50 50 50 50 50 50
Total Aggregate
Maximum Water/Cement Ratio 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40
For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14 and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 20 and 40 kg/m3 respectively.
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N/mm2. If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available;
however, such mix shall remain compliant with the Specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified in the Drawings.
4.8.2 Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified
by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability as
well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be considered
suitable if :
(a) the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with SS 78 or BS 1881 : Part 105 if
a flow test is specified; and
(b) the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic
strength by at least 10 N per mm2 or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be
exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers
LUP09/S4.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-8/22
4.8.3 Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the contractor shall not be allowed to change the mix
without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg/m3 and above, or the percentage % fine aggregate
by 5% and above, or any changes in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is considered a
change in mix design. These do not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design used in relation to
the specified requirements.
If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall exercise
its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
4.9 BATCHING
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and due
allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting this
amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall be
measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
In the case of small quantities in the concrete mix, the minimum volume of the mix for each batch shall be
at least 3m3
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and with +5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of
work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be calibrated
with known weights and volume measures.
4.10 MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete is
uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(i) Pan mixer - minimum 30 seconds
(ii) Truck mixer or drum mixer - minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete plus
3
¼ minute for each additional 1 m .
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for more
than 30 minutes should be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall be free
from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
4.11 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY
The workability shall be such that the concrete can be well compacted, worked into the corners of the
shuttering and around the reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified
strength. The mix design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable.
LUP09/S4.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-9/22
4.11 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY (CONT'D)
On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on site at the discharge point of the mixer by
means of the slump test in accordance with SS 78. If the measured slump deviates from the agreed value
by more than 25 mm or one third of the required value whichever is greater, the concrete shall be rejected.
As an alternative, flow test to BS 1881 : Part 105 or other means of assessing workability may be
considered subject to approval by the SO Rep.
No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.
4.12 PLACING OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible before
it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where retarders are
used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method of transit shall be
such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.
In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(a) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.
(b) Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concreted.
(c) When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted inside
but no free water shall remain in the pipe.
(d) Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat by
covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and
shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In walls,
columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not exceeding 1m
deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not normally exceed 30
minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the SO
Rep.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval for
night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the concreting.
LUP09/S4.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-10/22
4.13 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using
approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition
shall be used on site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of two
standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns.
The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel
reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of any kind.
Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
4.14 CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed
surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep.
The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturer's
instructions. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the
application is completed, the contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound
again. However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the approval of the
SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface occurs immediately
after the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the contract.
Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the
excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved
means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading,
moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair the
strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances shall
be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a period of
3 days or as otherwise instructed thereafter.
Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses.
4.15 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall
be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes, the joints
shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregate removed therefrom. Immediately
before placing new concrete, the joint shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich cement grout.
4.16 QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS
4.16.1 General
(a) Testing of Structural Concrete
Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the
following non-structural Works:
(i) Foot paths and paved areas;

(ii) Ramps and steps;
(iii) Hardcourts;
(iv) Inspection chambers and drain lines;
(v) Floor screed;
The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 100 mm cubes. The
quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in accordance
with SS 78. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test, compressive strength test,
core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S4.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-11/22
4.16.1 General (Cont’d)
(b) Sampling
On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be taken
according to the following rates:
(i) Samples Taken At Site
Where samples are taken at the Site, samples shall be taken for every 40m3 of concrete or
part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least one sample shall be taken from each batch
chosen by the SO Rep.
(ii) Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plants
Where samples are taken at ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40 m3 of concrete or part
thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample cannot be used to
represent the Works for more than one Contract or project.
The sampling of concrete cubes in the precast plants shall be carried out by the precasters
under the Approved Precast Concrete Supplier List by HDB in the HDB Materials List.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor is still liable for ensuring that the precast
components quality satisfies the Drawings and Specifications requirements. In the event
that the precast components quality fails to meet the requirements in the Drawings and
Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for the defective precast components. All
defective precast components which failed the strength requirement shall be removed or
otherwise rectified accordingly to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses. No extension of time for completion shall be allowed for the
rectification of such works.
A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of a number of standard scoopfuls, taken

from a batch of concrete whose properties are to be determined. Two cubes shall be cast per
sample per age of testing unless specified otherwise. The sample shall be taken at the point
of discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast
to achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required
before demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.
At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The
remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall
be tested at the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre. or other approved accredited testing
laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized
monitoring system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information
pertaining to the proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test
results shall be uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees
charged by the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre for testing of cubes including those
sampled from ready-mixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor.
For precast concrete, additional cubes shall be taken from the same sample to determine
whether adequate strength is achieved in order to meet design strength for demoulding,
handling and delivery. These additional cubes shall be cured by the same methods as those
used for the precast units. Testing facilities approved by the SO Rep shall be provided at the
precast plant for testing of these additional cubes.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes
for the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at
a relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in
custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB
Prefabrication Technology Centre shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site
at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform Contractor of the designated collection site and
the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to hand over the cubes to the HDB’s
appointed contractor for the collection of cubes.
In addition to the minimum number of samples stated above, the SO Rep may, at his absolute
discretion, instruct the Contractor to take extra sample from whichever batch as he may
choose.
LUP09/S4.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-12/22
4.16.1 General (Cont’d)
c) Cube Identification
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification
(RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cube from a minimum distance of
at least 40 mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based
controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag
IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same
casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cubes
are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The
Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding.
For damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on
the Employer's purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the
d) Cover measurement
The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to
reinforcement and in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements for all
major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse statistically
all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover shall comply
with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be assessed in
accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the specified grade,
taking into account the variability with in-situ strength.
4.16.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement
The 28 days strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early
strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes.
For precast concrete, the 3 days strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early
strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified by
the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength shall
be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any precast
components should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the age of
28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied :
(a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first
four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength plus
half a fixed current margin of 6 N/mm2. Thus, the minimum average strength shall be :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum
Average
28
Strength 23.0 28.0 33.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 53.0
days
At 28 days
(N/mm2)
LUP09/S4.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-13/22
4.16.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement (Cont’d)
(b) The sample strength is at least the level specified below :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum
Individual
Sample 28
17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 37.0 42.0 47.0
Strength days
At 28 days
(N/mm2)
(c) The characteristic strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade.
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may
be sought to lower the strength level specified in the preceding sub-clause (a) above.
For samples taken on site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the
requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 “Nuisance and
Irregularities” to impose charges against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are tested
at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep shall
exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete work may be stopped and not be continued
until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed for such
stoppage of the concrete work.
4.17 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE
In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance with
BS 5328.
For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by
carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the
SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination of
several methods as follows :
Compressive Strength of Individual Sample Test on Structure

Grade
(N per mm2) after 28 days
20 14.5 to below 17.0 )

25 18.5 to below 22.0 )
30 23.0 to below 27.0 ) Non-destructive
35 27.0 to below 32.0 ) method and/or core
40 31.5 to below 37.0 ) test
45 35.5 to below 42.0 )
50 40.0 to below 47.0 )
20 below 14.5 )
25 below 18.5 )
30 below 23.0 ) Non-destructive
35 below 27.0 ) method and core test
40 below 31.5 ) and/or load test
45 below 35.5 )
50 below 40.0 )
LUP09/S4.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-14/22
4.17 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE (CONT’D)
The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in
accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of non-
compliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results.
4.18 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet either of the requirements in Clause
4.16 "Quality of Concrete Works" and the assessment specified in Clause 4.17 "Testing of Hardened
Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They may range from :
(a) qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause
1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against
carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be
structurally sound by a Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor at its own costs and
expenses; or
If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in Clause 4.16.2(b), or in
the event of failure of a load test.
(b) the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised
and certified by a Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor at its own costs and expenses;
or
(c) the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all
poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All defective concrete work such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and plumb,
honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to the
instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
4.19 FORMWORK
4.19.1 (a) Material
The Contractor shall solely use metalforms for the construction of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete
structures. Notwithstanding Singapore Standards CP23, other type of formwork material shall not
be used, unless expressly specified otherwise or as approved by the SO Rep. In the case where
metalforms are not suitable for any part of a structure, the Contractor may propose to use other
formwork material which shall provide similar high quality off-form finish as compared with
metalforms, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The use of such alternative material shall
be subject to the approval of the SO Rep and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected
under such case.
Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23. It shall be
true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate metal formwork system that produces concrete lines and
surfaces complying with Grade II requirements of SS CP23. For cases of non-compliance with the
foregoing requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out
rectification Works at the Contractor's own cost and expense. The form face in contact with
concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other Defect.
Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish.
Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become
flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of
concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The
application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be
no accumulation of the oil on the formwork.
Where the use of plywood is approved by the SO Rep, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood,
complying with SS 1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12 mm thick.
Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give a
good surface finish.
LUP09/S4.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-15/22
4.19.1 (b) Use of Contractor’s Metalforms
The Contractor shall use his own metalforms or metalforms from suppliers that have been
approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed metal formwork
system for the approval of the SO Rep and comply with the following requirements:
i. Technical Requirements
The proposed metal formwork system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP23 and shall
be in every respect rigidly constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown in the
Drawings.
ii. Technical Information
The Contractor shall submit, within two weeks from the commencement Date of the Time for
Completion, the following technical information of his proposed metalforms namely; the grade
of steel, steel strength such as tensile strength, yield stress and elongation (including a recent
reduced section tensile test certificate), the steel plate thickness, the manufacturing process
(including a recent photo of the manufacturing machine) and the name and address of the
metalform manufacturer and/or supplier, for the approval of the SO Rep.
iii Samples
For Contractor self-owned metalforms, the Contractor shall submit within two weeks from
the commencement Date of the Time for Completion, samples of basic types of the
metalforms for the reduced section tensile test to the SO Rep for approval. Five samples
shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing for each contract. Reduced section tensile test
shall be carried out in accordance with JIS Z2241. The samples shall comply with the
minimum tensile strength of 400 N per mm2, minimum yield stress of 245 N per mm2 and
minimum elongation of 30%. The minimum steel thickness shall be 2.65 mm. As and when
required, the Contractor shall provide a metalform thickness gauge for verification of the
steel plate thickness by the SO Rep. For Contractor self-owned metalforms and metalforms
from suppliers approved by the SO Rep, the SO Rep reserves the right to sample
metalforms for dimensional test. Under such case and where the dimensional test is
required by the SO Rep, the number of metalform samples shall be decided by the SO Rep
and such samples shall be delivered to the HDB Metalform Warehouse for checking. The
SO Rep reserves the right to reject all defective metalforms.
iv. Method of Manufacture
All metalforms shall be manufactured so that the surface plate and side ribs are formed from
the same sheet of metal to a 90 degree bend without any cutting and/or welding. The folding
of the 90 degree cold-formed bend shall be completed in one single continuous operation
using a continuous series of steel rollers of a roll-forming machine. Only the two end ribs
and all the internal ribs shall be welded.
v. Maintenance Of Old Metalforms
All old metalforms shall be cleaned free of rust, grit, grout stains etc. The method of
cleaning shall be by SHOT BLAST only. Such old metalforms shall be repaired to their
original shape and condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to its use. The
Contractor shall engage the services of the Cleaning and Repair (C&R) contractors
approved by the SO Rep. In addition, the Contractor shall provide documentary proof in the
form of a C&R Certificate indicating the C&R contractor, the quantities of cleaned and
repaired metalforms to show that such cleaning and repair Works have been carried out.
vi. Marking and Identification
The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep on the type of identification mark for
their metalforms. In addition, the metalforms shall be engraved with the manufacturer's logo
and the date of manufacture, and the identification mark shall be different from those of the
Employer's metalforms.
LUP09/S4.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-16/22
4.19.1 (b) Use of Contractor’s Metalforms (Cont'd)
vii. Irregularities Committed
If the Contractor uses sub-standard metalforms which do not comply fully with those
reference samples approved by the SO Rep as specified in subclause 4.19.1(c)(iii)
"Samples", the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
viii. Metalforms Usage
The Contractor shall use form releasing agent approved by the SO Rep for each casting of
concrete.
The Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible for any consequential loss or damage
due to or arising from the usage of his metalforms.
4.19.2 Design
Formwork shall be designed to Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall cater for the appropriate method of
placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces, ties and struts shall be provided so
that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting from whatever method of placing and
compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position, slope and profile.
Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be
more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Where the floor to ceiling height exceeds 9.14 m, or where the formwork deck is supported by shores
constructed in two or more tiers, or where the dead, live and impact loads on the formwork exceed 732.3
kg per m², the Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer at its own cost and expense to design the
formwork structure. The Contractor shall submit the details of the design of the formwork and the
supports for approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and
adequacy of the formwork and supports shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his
Professional Engineer.
4.19.3 Construction
Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at all
stages of placing and compacting.
The arrangement of formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the cast
concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs the arrangement shall be
such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without
disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits.
Where steel props are used for multi-storey carpark/garage blocks, such steel props shall be prezinc
galvanised or galvanised by other methods. Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such
galvanised steel props.
Supports of an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate
strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required
strength to carry the support of the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of the
upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which support the formwork of
an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after the upper floor is cast.
Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties that
are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer at least 50mm x 50mm in size and of
sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or penetration
into the timber. All holes left in the concrete shall be filled with mortar and finished to the approval of the
SO Rep. Form ties used to connect opposite faces of formwork to restrain the concrete pressures shall be
metallic ties. For concrete members exposed to the external, cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to
separate and restrain the internal and external formwork faces. Concrete separators shall not be
permitted.
The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which is
likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow for
deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S4.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-17/22
4.19.3 Construction (Cont’d)
Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at
least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at construction
joints.
Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming
openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent
the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO Rep.
4.20 STRIKING OF FORMWORK
The minimum periods before striking of the formwork for ordinary portland cement concrete shall be
according to the following table :
Minimum
Period
Type of Formwork Remarks
Before
Striking
All vertical or side formwork 12 hours
The period shall commence from
the time of last pour of concrete.
Soffit formwork to slabs and beams 3 days
Props to slabs and beams 14 days After striking of formwork, props,

shall be immediately put up to
Props to cantilever slabs and cantilever beams 21 days support the structure.
Shorter striking periods for beams and slabs may be permitted provided evidence is provided to the SO
Rep that the strength development in the in-situ concrete is such that unacceptable deflections and
cracking will not occur as a result of earlier striking. Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock
or vibration and in the manner and order approved by the SO Rep.
After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising
from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and
approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution.
All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout".
4.21 OPENINGS AND RECESSES
Provide openings and recesses in the reinforced concrete structure, including PVC sleeves where
required, for the installation of sanitary pipes and fittings, service ducts or pipes, CATV,
telecommunication and electrical cables and trunkings, as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall
leave openings in the lift motor room floor to the requirement of the lift contractor or as instructed by the
SO Rep. No openings or openings greater than the sizes shown in the Drawings shall be formed without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
No coring of holes through existing structural elements shall be permitted. However, holes not exceeding
20mm in diameter may be drilled through these elements. If any steel bar obstructs the drilling through of
a hole, a new position shall be selected slightly offset to avoid the obstructing bar. Under no
circumstances shall any steel bar be allowed to be cut or removed without the written consent of the SO
Rep. For holes with diameter greater than 20mm, submit drilling proposals to the SO Rep for approval.
All openings in slabs shall be formed with sides tapering slightly downwards and trimmed on all sides with
mild steel bars as shown in the Drawings. Check and ensure accuracy in the position, alignment size and
shape of all openings and recesses. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make the necessary rectification at
his own costs and expenses.
Remove all formwork other than PVC sleeves required from openings and recesses after the concrete has
set, and ensure that the openings are not blocked up. Recesses for vertical electrical trunkings shall be
finished smooth.
LUP09/S4.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-18/22
4.21 OPENINGS AND RECESSES (CONT’D)
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in floor slabs with similar
grade of concrete or with cement mortar as specified in Clause 4.26, "Cement Mortar and Grout" both with
approved water proofing admixture added, after installation of services by the Contractor or other
contractors. Other openings without PVC sleeves shall be made good with cement mortar as specified in
Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout".
4.22 BUILDING ACCURACY
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check
the deviation of the reinforced concrete work from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All
measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Work in compliance with Singapore
Standard CP 23 Grade II shall be deemed acceptable.
4.23 PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS
4.23.1 General
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions
and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings.
All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and underside of beams at expansion joints shall be
covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm c/c or otherwise as
shown in the Drawings.
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing
materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint
waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting technical
information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials.
All waterproofing materials used at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.
4.23.2 Waterstops
Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to BS
5337 and the Manufacturers' recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the formwork
to prevent displacement during concreting.
4.23.3 Sealing Compound (Permanent Structural Joint)
For permanent structural joints, sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic types
namely polyurethane, polysulphide and silicone. They shall comply with ASTM C9320 or other approved.
4.23.4 Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant
Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length;
(b) Good adhesion;
(c) Water resistant;
(d) Non-staining
4.23.5 Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane
Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) Min. joint movement capacity of ±10% of joint width at 25°C;

(b) Resistant to dilute acids and alkali.
4.23.6 Hot-Poured Rubber/Bitumen Sealing Compound
Hot-poured rubber/bitumen sealing compound shall comply with BS 2449.
LUP09/S4.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-19/22
4.23.7 Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion);
(b) Max. water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
(c) Min. tensile strength of 50 kg/cm2; and
(d) Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.
The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less than
70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage.
4.23.8 Neoprene Bearing Pads
Neoprene bearing pads shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) Shore À' hardness of 60 ±5 at 25ºC;

(b) Min. rupture strength of 105 kg/cm2; and
(c) Min. rupture elongation of 300%.
4.23.9 Polyethylene Foam Backing Rods
Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following properties:
(a) Min. compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25°C;

(b) excellent resilient properties;
(c) Density between 35 kg/m3 and 45 kg/m3;
(d) totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents;
(e) totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action; and
(f) suitable for up to 70°C.
4.24 APPARATUS
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site :
(a) Concrete slump test apparatus complying with SS 78 or flow test apparatus complying with
BS 1881 : Part 105. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location;
(b) Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with SS 78 for casting 100 mm concrete
test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall be provided such that
no stripping of cube is required prior to 24 hours setting and hardening period;
(c) Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for
determination of silt content (field settling method);
(d) An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate;
(e) One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts the
rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress unit;
(f) One surveying level or theodolite complete with the necessary accessories;
(g) One electronic calculator with statistical functions;
(h) One 5.5m measuring tape; and
(i) One spirit level.
LUP09/S4.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-20/22
4.25 MASS AND LEAN CONCRETE
Mass and lean concrete shall compose of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates in the nominal
ratio by weight of 1:2:4. Where, however, a denser and more workable concrete can be produced by a
variation in the ratio of fine aggregate to that of coarse aggregates, this ratio may be varied within the
limits 1 to 1.5 and 1 to 3, provided that the weight of fine and coarse aggregates, each measured
separately, should nevertheless equal the sum of the volumes of fine and coarse aggregates appropriate
to the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as specified in this Section. Reinforced concrete shall
not be laid directly onto earth surfaces. A blinding coat of 40mm minimum thickness of lean concrete shall
be laid on well prepared firm ground before any reinforcement is placed in position.
4.26 CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT
4.26.1 General
For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with
water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of
cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the
SO Rep.
4.26.2 Grouting For Prestressed Concrete Ducts
As specified in Clause 7.15 "Grouting".
4.26.3 Precast Concrete Joints
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled with
appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be
waterproof.
Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted. The respective mix
design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess
strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be provided.
Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
4.26.4 Testing Method and Compliance for Load Bearing Grout and Mortar
The method of sampling and testing prescribed in BS 4551 shall be adopted. The compressive strength
shall be determined by crushing test or ASTM C109. For each casting day and for each grade of grout or
mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. A minimum of one cube shall be cast
from each sample for testing at 28 days.
The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of 3
cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified in
the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
If the average compressive strength of the 3 cubes is less than the design strength, the quality of the sub-
standard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out appropriate tests on hardened concrete in the
structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
4.27 FOUNDATIONS
All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and to
the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting, sheet-
piling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from water.
In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed and
those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved by the
SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The binding layer to be used
for pile caps and footings is lean concrete and grade 20 concrete respectively. The required cover of
concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer.
Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 51 - "SETTING OUT,
EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING".
LUP09/S4.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-21/22
4.28 PILE CAPS
Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check
and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity
drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any
discrepancy.
The Contractor shall straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps,
carry out excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.
4.29 LIFT PITS
For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one operation
without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs. Forms ties used
to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel speader ties. Concrete separators shall not
be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete mix, furnish information
concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to its use. Water reducing
admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to the
All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproofed with three coats of bitumen solution complying
with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The concrete surface
shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat to dry shall be
allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.
4.30 REFUSE CHUTES
All cast-in-situ reinforced concrete refuse chutes shall be constructed without bolt holes made through the
chute walls. If such holes are unavoidable then they shall be completely grouted with cement mortar as
specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar and Grout" or sealed and waterproofed by other approved
means to prevent leakage, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall allow for casting refuse chute frames into refuse chute walls for fixing chute hoppers.
Such frames shall be obtained from the same supplier of aluminium hoppers (refer to Section 18 -
"METALWORK").
4.31 FLOORS
After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with a
steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs
except where specified. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not displaced or
lowered during trowelling.
For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a level
or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper or
trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks.
Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.
4.32 ROOFS
4.32.1 General
Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power
trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be
cured immediately with an approved curing compound.
Roofing access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at
the positions as shown in the Drawings.
100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports, RC
stumps, walls and ventilating stacks.
The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects
during subsequent work on the roof.
LUP09/S4.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 4-22/22
4.32.2 Watertightness and Water Stagnation Test
After the completion of all structural work on the roof, the roof slab shall be tested for watertightness and
to ensure no water stagnation. Where the reinforced concrete roof is to be protected by a watertight
secondary roof, no water test or ponding test is to be conducted.
The watertightness test shall be carried out by ponding with water to a minimum depth of 25mm for 24
hours. At the end of the watertightness test, the soffit of the slab especially the area around the pipes
shall be examined for any dampness or leakage.
Immediately after discharging the water off the roof, the top surface shall be examined for any water
stagnation. Water collected beyond a depth of 5mm in any area is considered a stagnation.
After any rectification, hacking and refilling around pipes installed after the first test, the localised area
shall be retested at the Contractor's own costs and expenses for watertightness, water stagnation or both
as deemed necessary by the SO Rep.
4.33 DRIPS
Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies,
cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of building where rainwater is likely to adhere in drops.
4.34 TRANSPORTATION OF CHIPPING CONCRETE
All ready mix concrete (9mm chipping only) and cement mortar in the Contract are to be transported to the
required location using a mixer pump unit, that is actuated by air compressor or self-operating through
robust flexible hoses. The mixer pump is subject to SO Rep's approval.
4.35 RC STRUCTURE CANNOT BE USED AS LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth
electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural components and steel
reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
SECTION 5/...
LUP09/S4.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 5-1/1
SECTION 5
RESERVED
SECTION 4/…
LUP09/S5.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-1/22
SECTION 6
6.0 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION
6.1 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
6.1.1 Area of Usage
Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown on the Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
6.1.2 Surface Finishes
External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
6.1.3 Suppliers
The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list
of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com.
The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between
themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast
concrete components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The contractual
agreements submitted shall include detailed breakdown of precast component prices. The Contractor
shall not be permitted to change their suppliers without the written consent of the SO Rep.
6.2 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
6.2.1 Design
Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65. The Contractor
may propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep.
Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion
and fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the
buildings.
The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be
carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation
and erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts,
lifting hooks and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete
components including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices.
Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit
respective mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance
with appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Methods of installation adopted shall ensure that
the joints and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled
with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod.
The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy
bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted,
dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
LUP09/S6.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-2/22
6.2.2 Drawings
Submit the following Drawings for the approval of the SO Rep within one month from the date of the
Employer's Letter of Acceptance of Tender :
(A) Shop Drawings
(a) Precast Concrete Components with Shop Drawings
Where in the case shop Drawings (denoted by the words “shop drawings” in the drawing
title) for precast concrete components are incorporated in the Drawings, the Contractor
need not submit shop Drawings for approval. Not withstanding the incorporation of such
shop Drawings in the Drawings, the Contractor shall be required to check and/or ensure
the following :
(i) That the details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable
for the Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be
responsible and bear all costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and
reproductions of such precast concrete components directly and/or indirectly
resulting from and/or out of any inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the
Drawings.
(ii) That the handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and
transportation adopted shall not over-stress such precast concrete components.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense,
any additional steel reinforcement bars required for his handling techniques to
ensure that such precast components are not damaged or over-stressed during
handling;
(iii) Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and
erection inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and
erection purposes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
commencement of the production works;
(iv) That the minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for
handling, demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked prior to
the commencement of production works.
(b) Precast Concrete Components without Shop Drawings
Where in the case shop drawings for precast concrete components are not incorporated
in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings for such precast
components for approval by the SO Rep. The shop drawings shall include the following
details :
(i) The size, position and details of lifting and erection inserts and reinforcement
details;
(ii) The handling techniques for precasting, storage and transportation;
(iii) The minimum concrete strength for precast components required for handling,
demoulding, storage, transportation and erection.
(B) Mould Drawings
Mould drawings showing :
(i) Surface treatments of moulds for casting and lifting operation.
(ii) Methods of concrete consolidation and compaction such as external vibration, internal
vibration, table vibration, adjusted slump and mix method.
(iii) Methods of curing, demoulding and storage of precast components.
LUP09/S6.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-3/22
6.2.2 Drawings (Cont’d)
(C) Erection Drawings
Erection drawings showing :
(i) Erection sequences and handling requirements.
(ii) Calculation and position and sizes of backers/shims, temporary props, bracings and
their installation method clearly shown.
(iii) Calculation and details of method of positioning and supporting unconnected precast
components including temporary bracings, struts and props.
(D) Waterproofing joint Drawings
Procedure and sequence of installation of sealants on the Sites in their relation to erection
sequence and handling requirements.
6.3 MANUFACTURING
6.3.1 Reserved
6.3.2 Shop Drawings
Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved structural Drawings.
Shop Drawings shall be based upon the structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval as per clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".
6.3.3 Moulds
Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and
dimensions of the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds should be sufficiently
rigid to produce the casting tolerances and finishes specified.
Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of
mortar or cement paste, and should be designed to prevent damage to the concrete from :
(a) restraint as the concrete shrinks;

(b) the stripping operation when the precast components is lifted from the mould; or
(c) dimensional changes due to demoulding of prestressed components.
High quality rubber mat shall be used for carrying the tiles of precast components with tile finish.
LUP09/S6.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-4/22
6.3.4 Manufacturing Requirements
Where structural precast concrete are included in the works, submit proposals for marking
identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for the approval of the SO Rep
prior to the commencement of manufacturing.
Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality
concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface
finishes including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where tile finish is
specified, check and ensure uniform width and depth of the groove between the tiles which shall be
on the same plane.
The external face of space adding item shall be coated with white paint at the factory before
transporting to site. The technical requirements of the paint shall comply with Section 23.
Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, produce at least one sample of each type
of precast concrete component for approval by the SO Rep. The approved sample panel shall be
displayed at the precasting yard. The approved sample panel shall be used as the yardstick for the
minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all precast panels. The SO Rep may at his absolute
discretion require more sample panels to be produced for his approval. Check and ensure that the
approved sample panels are not damaged on display.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete
components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the
specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall
replace the precast components at his own costs and expenses.
Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses,
notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components
involved. All reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as
shown on the Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be
incorporated into the precast concrete components.
Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete
components.
In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious
material by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the
joints of two protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide
protection to it.
In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure :
(i) the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete
is hacked;
(ii) the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.
6.3.5 Manufacturing Tolerances
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep :
(a) Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on
approved Drawings :
Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc : ±10mm

Flashing relets, at edge of panel : ±6mm
Reglets for glazing gaskets : ±3mm
Groove width for glazing gaskets : ±2mm
Electrical outlets : ±13mm
LUP09/S6.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-5/22
6.3.5 Manufacturing Tolerances (Cont’d)
(b) Position tolerances for placement of reinforcement :
Reinforcing bars and meshes shall be located within 12mm of the position as shown on the
approved shop Drawings, but in casting, no reinforcement shall encroach on the specified
minimum cover.
(c) Casting tolerances – the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould
when cast shall be as follows :
3m or under : ±3mm
> 3m - 6m : +3mm
: -5mm
> 6m - 9m : +3mm
: -6mm
Each additional 3m : ±2mm per 3m
Angular deviation of plane : +2mm per 150mm depth of side mould
Thickness : +6mm
: -3mm
Openings (cast within one member) : +6mm
Out of square (difference in length : 3mm per 3m or 6mm

of two diagonal measurements) total whichever is greater
The casting tolerances noted above should be compatible with the installation requirements of
precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window
frames, louvres sunshades and other materials.
(d) After casting tolerances - the bowing and warpage shall be as follows :
Without intermediate support dimension : 1 panel

240
With intermediate support dimension : 1 panel

360
6.3.6 Inspection of Manufacturing
The SO Rep shall have the discretion to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast concrete
components at all times. If the inspection is not conducted at the plant, this shall not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility in manufacturing an acceptable product, and the SO Rep shall at
his liberty reject any precast components on the Site not complying with design requirements even
though no plant inspection has been conducted.
6.4 HANDLING
(A) The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with
their shapes and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete
components shall be lifted only at appropriate points shown on the production and erection
Drawings.
LUP09/S6.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-6/22
6.4 HANDLING (CONT’D)
(B) Check and allow for :
(a) adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses;

(b) provision of additional reinforcement if required;
(c) exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices; and
(d) Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.
Allow for developing handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete components are
successfully fabricated, delivered and installed without causing structural damage, detrimental
cracking, architectural impairment, or permanent distortion.
(C) Safety Measures For Precast Transportation
The Contractor shall obtain the approval from the relevant authorities as and when necessary
for precast transportation. The Contractor shall comply with prevailing traffic regulations and
prevent damage to public roads, overhead structures, trees, lamp posts, sign boards,
decorations, cables and road related facilities in the precast transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure there is adequate Public Liability insurance coverage before the
start of precast transportation.
The Contractor shall carry out risk assessment and analysis complying with the Workplace
Safety and Health (WSH) Act and Regulations for the work procedures related to precast
transportation, including and shall not be limited to the following key activities:
(a) Securing of Precast Components
The Safety Manual shall include the method to secure precast components on trailer.
Trade demonstrations shall be conducted and photographs shall be provided to
supervisors and loading workers for better understanding.
For precast components to be delivered in horizontal position, sling belts and stoppers
shall be provided on the trailer to prevent slipping and toppling of precast components.
For precast components to be delivered in vertical position, if galvanised wires and

chain block are used, the Safety Manual shall indicate clearly the type and size of wire,
type of chain block and the tying method. The Contractor shall provide secondary
securing method using chain or sling belt to supplement galvanised wires and chain
block if necessary.
For trailer mounted with steel frames, the Contractor shall ensure steel frames and the
connections to trailers are sound for delivery purpose. The Safety Manual shall include a
system of regular checks on the conditions of the steel frames.
(b) Loading on Trailer
The Contractor shall specify in Safety Manual to avoid over-loading of precast

components on trailer. The overall height from ground to the highest point on trailer shall
be checked to ensure compliance with the prevailing traffic regulations. In addition, for
trailer with steel frame, load balancing of precast components at two sides of trailer shall
be checked before leaving the precast factory. For non-compliance found, the driver
shall be informed and remedial actions shall be taken before leaving the precast factory.
LUP09/S6.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-7/22
6.4 (C) Safety Measures For Precast Transportation (Cont’d)
(c) Transportation
The Contractor shall specify in the Safety Manual that the driver should observe the
speed limit and prevailing regulations during the precast transportation. The driving
experience of drivers employed for precast transportation shall be specified where
necessary to exclude inexperience driver from precast transportation. Continuing road
safety education and appropriate disciplinary actions for non-compliances shall also be
included in the manual to prevent speeding during transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure the transportation fleet like prime-movers and trailers are
well-maintained. The routine maintenance shall include periodic regulatory inspection by
the authorities, daily checks by driver on brakes, signal, lighting, tyres. The timber
platform shall be in safe condition for the loading workers and the trailer shall be free
from loose debris for precast transportation.
6.5 STORAGE
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for handling of the stored
precast concrete components. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to permit
well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking, discolouration, staining
or soiling of the precast components. No precast concrete component shall be placed on the ground,
they shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.
6.6 ERECTION
6.6.1 Inspection of Precast Concrete Components
All precast concrete components shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before erection and
after installation. Any unauthorised erection or installation work may be rejected and necessary action
taken against the Contractor.
Prepare, install and check that the precast components are within the specified erection tolerances
prior to calling for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
After the inspection of erected precast components, the SO Rep shall be at liberty to reject any
precast components on the Sites not complying with design or specification requirements.
No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other precast
concrete components or in-situ structures shall be carried out without the prior approval of the
SO Rep.
6.6.2 Quality Control
Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components
should be employed.
Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to built-in items.
Only minor chipping and spalling may be repaired by patching up at the job site after installation,
provided this is done to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Check and ensure that the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast
concrete components. Any deviations from the Structural Drawings noted shall be corrected prior to
the start of erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked
as to level, line and grade.
Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location shall be checked for
compliances with the location as specified on the Structural Drawings. If slings are used, the precast
concrete components shall be marked so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
LUP09/S6.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-8/22
6.6.2 Quality Control (Cont'd)
Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components
and joint sealants installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified
erection tolerances. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall
be cleaned and repaired after installation.
Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on
the Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and
alignment of precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection.
Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the
erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and
uniform joint width should be maintained as erection progresses. Adjustments or changes in
connections, which could induce additional stresses should be reviewed and approved by the
SO Rep.
Only qualified welders shall be employed for welded connections.
6.6.3 Defects and Repair
Ensure that no defective precast concrete component shall be delivered. The decision by the SO Rep
to reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor shall replace the
rejected precast concrete components at his own costs and expenses. The rejection criteria shall be
made on engineering basis as well as visual appearances.
Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
Method of repairs shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the commencement of
repairing work. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to
determine whether the precast component will be structurally sound.
In the case where localised defective tiles are detected, such defective tiles shall be replaced in
accordance with the following suggested method : Two 1mm diameter copper wires shall be glued to
the reverse side of each tile with epoxy resin and left to set. Similarly, copper wires shall be fixed
25mm into the concrete surface with epoxy resin. Mortar or cement paste shall then be applied. The
tiles shall be tied to the concrete and set in place. In-situ pull out test shall be conducted as and when
directed by the SO Rep.
All repaired precast concrete component shall be architecturally and structurally acceptable to the
6.6.4 Erection Tolerance
For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast
components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to
accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ
members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as
follows :
(a) Distance Between Edge of Panels at Joint
For panels with dimensions

(normal to the joint) up to 6m : ±5mm
For each 3m increment in excess of 6m : ±2mm
LUP09/S6.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-9/22
6.6.4 Erection Tolerance (Cont'd)
(b) Joint Taper (Panel Edges not Parallel)
Per linear 300mm of joint : ½ mm

Minimum allowable : 2mm
Maximum for entire length : 9mm
(c) Panel Alignment
Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints : 3mm

Jog in alignment of matching edges : 3mm
(d) Location of Openings
In precast concrete components : ±6mm
(e) Verticality of Wall
Entire height of building : ±35mm

1st to 4th floor : ±25mm
Each storey height : ±10mm
(f) Parapet Alignment at Access Balcony
Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified linear building line :
Any interval less than 6m : ±1mm per metre

Any 50m length : ±25mm
Coping level :
Any interval less than 6m : ±5mm

Any 50m length : ±25mm
(g) Verticality of Column
Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls.
(h) Column Alignment at 1st Storey
In between columns up to 6m apart : ±12mm

Entire length of building : ±30mm
6.6.5 Interface Between Existing And New Structures
All new precast components shall be properly aligned with the existing building alignment as shown in
the Drawings. All joints shall be kept straight, neat, consistent and to the required centres. Finished
faces shall be levelled to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Surfaces shall be free of loose paint and
foreign matter, grease oil, mastic and wax, etc. The Contractor shall ensure water tightness.
LUP09/S6.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-10/22
6.7 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS
Provide and install precast prestressed concrete planks as shown :
(a) Design Criteria and Materials for Precast Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications
Low slump concrete shall be used for the production of precast prestressed concrete plank.
The strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 40 N/mm2, and at transfer shall not be less than
25 N/mm2. The use of calcium chloride, ions or other salts is strictly prohibited. Any deviation
in the strength of concrete involving a redesign shall be undertaken by a Professional Engineer
and submitted to the SO Rep for approval. The minimum grade of concrete for the cast-in-situ
structural topping shall be 40 N/mm2 and the minimum thickness shall be 60mm.
The prestressed concrete planks shall have a minimum thickness of 65mm. Any variation on
these requirements involving a redesign shall be undertaken by a Professional Engineer and
submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
Submit for approval of the SO Rep the joint details as well as the allowable strands slippage.
(b) Manufacturing Tolerances
(i) Length : +3mm
(ii) Cross-sectional dimensions (width or depth) : ±1mm
(iii) Flange thickness : ±1mm
(iv) Horizontal alignment (sweep) : 1.25mm or 1/1,000 of overall length,

whichever is greater.
(v) Position of anchors and inserts : +2.5cm of centre line location shown
on Drawings.
(vi) Position of strands : ±2mm
(vii) End squareness : ±3mm
(viii) Blockouts : ±10mm of centre-line location shown on the Drawings.
(ix) Camber deviation at mid-span from design : ±5mm from designed camber
(x) Difference in soffit level at mid-span between adjacent members or between a precast
prestressed concrete plank and an adjacent reinforced concrete slab after installation
shall not be more than 3mm.
(xi) Position of reinforcement designed : ±10mm primarily for connections.
(xii) Position of handling device : ±20mm
(c) The following requirements shall be complied with :
(i) Standard underside shall be smooth, dense with no surface holes.
(ii) Standard top side can have minor chips and spalls but no major imperfections,
honeycomb or Defects will be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable
for composite action with cast-in-situ structural topping.
(iii) Exposed vertical ends shall be sawn or formed with smooth finish.
LUP09/S6.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-11/22
6.7 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)
(c) The following requirements shall be complied with :
(iv) Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with Structural or Architectural
Drawings. These and any other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the
approval of the SO Rep.
(v) Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the
final appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for
the execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up
work shall be carried out to the approval of the SO Rep.
(vi) Cast-in structural inserts, bolts and plates as detailed in the Drawings.
(d) Product Delivery, Storage and Handling (Factory)
(i) Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing,
stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or
both, as shown in the Drawings or shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices
which shall have a minimum safety factor of 3.
(ii) All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable
equipment and methods and by experienced personnel.
(iii) All precast prestressed units shall be stored off ground.
(iv) All precast prestressed units shall be so placed that identification marks can be read.
(v) Precast prestressed members shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and
undamaged.
(vi) The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast
members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.
(e) Erection
Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall
comply with the following:
(i) Precast members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided
for such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have
a minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads.
(ii) Members shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop
drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by
jacking, loading or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep.
(iii) Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials
compatible to the base materials.
(iv) Precast prestressed concrete members may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is
made with the prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(v) Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed concrete members shall
be made by the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.
LUP09/S6.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-12/22
6.8 RESERVED
6.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION SCHEDULES
Submit respective supply and erection schedules detailing the type and quantity of the precast
concrete components to the SO Rep for approval as soon as the construction site is handed over to
the Contractor. Adhere strictly to the approved respective delivery and erection schedules.
6.10 MATERIALS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS
All materials used in the precast concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 4
"STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
6.11 STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS
Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" shall apply.
6.12 WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS
6.12.1 Approval of Materials
(i) The Contractor may submit his alternative proposal, endorsed by his Professional Engineer, on
joint sealants to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Employer's
Letter of Acceptance of Tender. The proposal shall include technical information, samples, test
reports, and proven performance records of the joint sealants.
Batch testing of sealant compounds delivered to site shall be carried out as directed by the SO
Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is
deemed to be unsatisfactory.
The use of membranes and admixtures for grout, mortar or concrete for improving water and
weather tightness may be approved by the SO Rep. All sealant materials used at public
accessible areas such as access balcony, stair-cases, stair-landings etc shall be protected with
non-shrink mortar or grout.
Liquid membranes, if used, shall have specified minimum thickness and width for water and
weather tightness.
LUP09/S6.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-13/22
6.12.1 Approval of Materials (Cont’d)
(ii) Performance of Waterproofing Materials
Waterproofing materials for joints as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" shall

apply.
(iii) Application of Sealant Materials
Ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as
to provide continuous water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance.
Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed
to give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these should conform to all
applicable specifications.
Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun should
have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill up the joints.
All compound smears, primers, solvents etc used in caulking and sealing work, should be
immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.
(iv) Joint Width and Sealant Depth After Installation
The joint width will depend on the dimensions of panel and its coefficient of expansion.
The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants shall be :
Maximum Movement in
Maximum Joint Width
Type of Sealant Tension or Compression
(mm)
(%)
Butyl 20 ±10
Acrylic 20 ±15 to ±25
One Part Polyurethane 20 ±20
Two Parts Polyurethane 20 ±25
One Part Polysulphide 20 ±25
Two Parts Polysulphide 20 ±25
The normal design joint widths shall be 10, 14 or 15 as reflected in the Structural Drawings.
For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over
13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants
installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.
(v) Sealant Backup Fillers
Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of
the sealant, and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joint.
Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements.
These include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall also be
compatible and non-staining to the selected sealants.
(vi) Joint Preparation
Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust
or other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the
same manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.
LUP09/S6.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-14/22
6.12.2 Method and Frequency of Testing
The joints in the superstructure shall be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Internal
floors shall be tested prior to any tiling work. Testing is to be conducted only when all pipes, trunking,
etc have been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
All joints shall be fully tested in the manner as described below :
(i) Method of Testing
(a) Roofs of Space Adding Items (SAI), Lift Motor Rooms and other Structural
Roofs
Water test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints by subjecting the whole
roof to a minimum depth of 25mm of water after waterproofing work has been
completed. The amount of water shall be replenished to maintain the required depth of
water. The duration of the test shall not be less than 24 hours. No seepage of water
from the ceiling below shall be permitted during the test or within the period of 24 hours
after the completion of the test.
(b) External Joints of SAI, Lift Shaft and other Precast Structures
A continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding to 800 litres/hour
from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m/sec and a cone scatter of
o
approximately 60 held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface under test. The
duration of the test shall not be less than 2 hours. The hose should be placed with
the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that
the jet cone will cover one vertical and two horizontal joints. The water shall not
seep into any part of the building during the test and for the subsequent 24 hours.
(c) Reserved
(d) Parapet
The joints between access balcony parapets and floors shall be flooded with 25mm
minimum depth of water for a period of one hour. The joints shall pass the test if no
dampness or seepage occurs during the test or within one hour after the completion of
test.
(e) Reserved
LUP09/S6.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-15/22
6.12.2 Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd)
(i) Method of Testing (Cont'd)
(f) Reserved
(g) Access Balcony Floor
The slab joints of balcony floor shall be tested as for the floor joints in the dwelling units
in the foregoing sub-clause (e) "Floor Joints of Precast Slabs (Dwelling Units)".
(h) Stairs and Half-Landings
Joints to stairs and half-landings shall be subjected to localised flooding or wetting with
running water for a duration of not less than one hour. No water shall seep through the
joints during or within one hour after the completion of the test.
(i) Floor Joint of Precast Roof Slab
Test shall be carried out as specified in Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness and Water
Stagnation Test".
(j) Horizontal Joints Between SAI/Lift Shaft/other Precast Structures and Existing
Building
The water test shall be done prior to any tiling work.
The joints shall be subjected to localised ponding with water to a depth of 25mm over an
area of extent 200mm on either side of the joint where possible.
The ponding of water shall be maintained for 1 hour, replenishing where necessary.
The contractor shall ensure that proper bunding with plasticine or equivalent is used to
contain the ponding water.
LUP09/S6.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-16/22
(ii) Frequency of Testing
(a) Roofs of Space Adding Items (SAI), Lift Motor Rooms and other Structural
Roofs
All joints on the roof.
(b) External Joints of SAI, Lift Shaft and other Precast Structures
For SAI, 5 tests each covering one vertical joints and two horizontal joints shall
be conducted for each block. For lift shaft and other precast structures, 1 tests
covering one vertical joints and two horizontal joints shall be conducted for
each individual stack. These tests shall be carried out at any locations as instructed
by the SO Rep.
For each test which fails, two additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as
instructed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expense.
(c) Reserved
(d) Parapet
All joints between access balcony parapets and floors shall be tested.
(e) Reserved
(f) Reserved
(g) Access Balcony Floor, Stairs and Half-Landings
All joints at new access balcony floors, stairs and half-landings shall be tested.
(h) Floor Joint of Precast Roof Slab
The whole area of all new roof slabs shall be tested.
(i) Horizontal Joints Between SAI/Lift Shaft/other Precast Structures and Existing
Building
For each new individual stack of extension to dwelling unit, 2 horizontal joints per stack
shall be tested at the discretion of the SO Rep.
For each new horizontal joint which fails the water test, two additional joints within the
same stack in addition to the ones that failed shall be selected by the SO's Rep for
testing at the Contractor's own expense.
LUP09/S6.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 6-17/22
(iii) Water Test Failure
In the event of failure of a test on any joints, the Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the
test. This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing
criteria. The costs and expenses of the extra water tests and rectification work shall be borne
by the Contractor. Furthermore, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any
waterproofing materials or joint details that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no
cost to the Employer.
Under no circumstances is the Contractor allowed to carry out his own water test without the
presence of the SO Rep. All water test (specified or not specified) shall be witnessed and
certified by the SO Rep as well as the Contractor's Representative.
6.13 RESERVED
6.14 RESERVED
SECTION 7/...
LUP09/S6.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 7-1/1
SECTION 7
RESERVED
SECTION 4/…
LUP09/S7.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 8-1/5
SECTION 8
8.0 FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SYSTEM
8.1 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
8.1.1 Fibre Reinforced Polymer (FRP) System
The fibre polymer system shall be a non-intrusive wrapping system. The system shall be used to
enhance the load bearing capacity and durability of the existing reinforced concrete columns in the void
decks.
For glass fibre wrapping system, the wrapping configuration shall consist of minimum 3 horizontal and
2 vertical layers as shown in the drawings.
For carbon fibre wrapping system, the wrapping configuration shall be 2 horizontal layers only or as
otherwise proposed by the Contractor.
The proposed wrapping configuration for the glass or carbon FRP system shall comply with Clause 8.2.
The proposed glass or carbon FRP shall conform to the following minimum requirements:
Requirement for Requirement for Carbon

S/N Property
Glass FRP FRP
Ultimate tensile strength, of

1. composite fibres in the primary 450 N/mm2 750 N/mm2
direction
2. Elongation of Composite Fibre >=1.5% >=1.0%
Tensile modulus based on

3. cross section area of primary 20,700 N/mm2 70,000 N/mm2
fibres
Shear bond strength of 2.4 N/mm2 or failure

2.4 N/mm2 or failure of
4. composite fibre on concrete of concrete
concrete substrate
(minimum Grade 30) substrate
The proposed system shall not include other form of strengthening methods, such as metal plate
bonding or mixed fibre materials.
The Contractor shall submit their proposed FRP system for the SO Rep’s approval. In the event of any
omission to the FRP system, the valuation of the variation shall be based on the FRP system which is
the most expensive.
8.1.2 Anchoring System
The proposed system shall be inclusive of an anchoring system using the same FRP material, in
additional to surface preparation as specified in Clause 8.7, for column with length not less than
900mm. The anchoring system shall satisfy the following requirements :
(a) The diameter of anchor shall not be less than 10mm and not more than 15mm. It shall consist of a
bundle of main fibre properly formed to size as shown in Drawings; fully impregnated with epoxy
before insertion to the drilled hole on the column. The drilled holes shall be clean and free of dust
using portable blower or equivalent. These anchors shall be installed during the installation of the
FRP system.
LUP09/S8.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 8-2/5
8.1 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
8.1.2 Anchoring System (Cont’d)
(b) The embedded length of the anchor from the surface of column shall be of minimum :
i. 50mm if there is no plaster on column;
ii. 75mm if there is plaster on column.
(c) The anchors shall be provided on the longer face of the column. The minimum number of anchors
on each face shall be :
i. 14 nos. for column size of length 900mm or more.
ii. 21 nos. for column size of length 1200mm or more.
The layout of the anchors shall be measured from the centre of column both vertically and horizontally.
8.2 DRAWINGS
The drawings in A3 size shall be submitted together with the submission of the test report and
calculations. The drawings shall include the following :
(a) The detail of vertical layer and horizontal layer of glass or carbon FRP on plan. For glass FRP
(GFRP), the bend of the C-shape vertical layer and the lap length of the horizontal layer shall be
indicated in the detail.
(b) The elevational view showing the lap length between horizontal layers at lower and upper level for
GFRP
(c) A table showing the length of lapping and the bend required for different group of varied column
sizes for GFRP.
(d) The name of the project, contractor and supplier shall be indicated in the title block. The title block
shall be located at the right-hand bottom corner of every drawing.
8.3 TESTING OF MATERIAL
8.3.1 Requirement
The Contractor shall be required to submit test report of the materials tested locally to the SO Rep for
approval 6 weeks after date of the Employer’s Letter of Acceptance of the Contractor’s Tender to
ensure compliance with the requirement stipulated under Clause 8.1. Three (3) composite samples
shall be tested for each property tabulated in Clause 8.1. The average result of the 3 composite
samples shall comply or exceed the requirement stipulated. In addition, the individual result shall not be
less than 10% of the required value. Each composite sample shall be prepared using one layer of fibre.
Such testing shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep before the commencement of actual work
done on site. The test reports shall be submitted within 4 weeks upon instruction given by the SO Rep.
All the tests shall be conducted at accredited laboratory or institution at the Contractor’s own expense.
Further tests may be initiated with test samples taken from work site upon SO Rep’s instruction to
ensure compliance with Clause 8.1, where applicable. Such tests shall be undertaken at Contractor’s
own cost and expense.
LUP09/S8.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 8-3/5
8.3 TESTING OF MATERIAL (CONT’D)
8.3.1 Requirement (Cont’d)
The Contractor shall also conduct in-situ tensile pullout test on the completed works, with one test each
to be carried out in each block, when directed. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of
FRP material, with age of 2 days or more, on different columns. The average tensile pullout strength of
the 5 spots shall exceed 0.4 N/mm2. In addition, the individual tensile pull out strength of each spot
shall not be less than 0.3 N/mm2. However, if the failure in each spot is due to substantial failure of the
substrate as determined by the accredited laboratory with SO Rep’s agreement, such result will be
excluded from the computation of the average value.
8.3.2 Further testing Upon Failure
Any material test that fails shall be considered not to have fulfilled the requirements under the Material
Tests. In that event, the SO Rep, without prejudice to his other rights under the Contract, order such
further test as he deems necessary, all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
bear the cost and expense for all failed tests.
8.4 WORK METHODS
The contractor shall submit 3 weeks after date of the Employer’s Letter of Acceptance a detailed work
method with relevant illustration on the preparation and installation of the system to be approved by the
SO Rep.
The Work Method shall include surface preparation, method of mixing and saturation of composite
fibre, method of application of fibre sheet to the column, anchoring system, curing and finishing works.
The Contractor shall propose wrapping method, inclusive of anchoring system, in area where the
horizontal layer is unable to wrap round the column. Such proposal shall include design calculations
and is subject to the approval of SO Rep. In the event of ambiguity or dispute, SO Rep’s decision shall
be final.
The Contractor shall carry out a work demonstration on site for the approval of the SO Rep.
8.5 AIR BUBBLES
Excessive air bubbles trapped in between the composite fibre and the column surface shall be make
good to the SO Rep’s satisfaction. Contractor shall submit method of statement on such rectification for
SO Rep’s approval.
8.6 CHECKING FOR HOLLOW PLASTER
The contractor shall check for hollow plaster on all columns to be wrapped prior to column surface
preparation with a steel tapping rod. The tapping rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter
rigidly attached to one end. It shall have a length of about 630mm and possesses adequate rigidity for
tapping the plaster.
All hollow plaster detected shall be removed and made good, upon the instruction of the SO Rep, with
pre-packed plaster listed in the HDB Materials List. Cost for such work shall be deemed to be part of
the Contractor’s tender price unless such works are carried out on structural member not to be
wrapped. Payment for such work shall be made in accordance to the Schedule of Rates as in the
Tender.
No wrapping to a column should be carried out within 24 hours after reinstatement.
LUP09/S8.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 8-4/5
8.7 COLUMN SURFACE PREPARATION
The existing paintwork on the column shall be removed and such requirement will be determined in the
work demonstration.
The corners of the columns are to be rounded with a radius not less than 20mm. The surface of column
shall be clean, dry and free of grease before application of composite fibres.
All skirting are to be removed to flush with the existing column face before any wrapping. Any material
used to level-off has to be approved by the SO Rep. No wrapping to a column should be carried out
within 24 hours after application of such material.
At all times, the Contractor shall ensure the site is not dusty and comply with Clause 8.9.
8.8 FINISHING
The column shall be plastered at least 9 mm thick with pre-packed plastering material as in the HDB
Materials List. The plaster shall be applied in two coats if the thickness is more than 9mm arising from
contractor’s FRP system or due to site application. Contractor shall deemed to have included in the
tender the cost for any form of bonding requirement in accordance to the proposed FRP system.
8.9 MINIMUM DISRUPTION AND POLLUTION TO RESIDENTS/PUBLIC
The Contractor shall submit a detailed time schedule for the Works before the commencement for the
Works shall be carried out in a manner involving minimum disruption and inconvenience to residents
on the use of the void deck. Throughout the course of the works, safety of the residents shall remain
the top priority.
The Contractor shall provide necessary precautionary measures to prevent dust pollution to
resident/public especially near eating houses, child-care or elderly-care centres, senior citizen corners
and etc.
8.10 REPAINTING
All new surface finish of the fibre wrapped column shall be painted with the approved paint. The paint
and painting works on all finish surface shall comply with all technical requirements, preparation work,
workmanship and quality control as required under Section 23 “Painting and Decorating “ of the
Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works.
8.11 REINSTATMENT & MAKING GOOD
The adjoining property or services such as pipes or electrical wiring that have been removed for
execution of work shall be reinstated and made good to the original at the Contractor’s expense upon
completion of work. All repairs are to be executed with suitable and appropriate materials and
workmanship to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall engage qualified personnel to
execute such removal and reinstatement works.
LUP09/S8.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 8-5/5
8.12 REPAIRS TO STRUCTURAL CRACKS AND SPALLED CONCRETE
All spalled concrete appearing on the columns to be wrapped shall be repaired using approved epoxy
mortar or polymer modified cement mortar or other approved material listed in the HDB Materials List.
The surfaces shall be roughened and wire-brushed to remove any loose materials, rust, scale foreign
matters.
Surfaces must be primed and allowed to dry before epoxy resin compound or polymer modified cement
mortar is applied. Where any bonding agent is required for the use of the repair material, it shall be
obtained from the same manufacturer and carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction. The whole of the works shall be carried out in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s instructions, all repaired surfaces shall have at least 3 days of
curing before wrapping with the proposed FRP system.
All cracks appearing on columns to be wrapped shall be repaired with an approved epoxy injection
method. The Contractor shall submit samples of the repair material and the method of statement for
the work for approval by the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, all repair methods shall be in accordance to the drawings.
8.13 NAME TAG FOR BLOCKS
The Contractor shall provide and install three (3) tags for each block where FRP system is carried out.
The location of the tag shall be determined by the SO Rep.
The tag shall be made of plastic sheet of 100 x 25 x 2mm thick. The colour of the sheet and the
wordings shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit the fixing method to the SO
Rep for approval.
8.14 DIVERSION/RELOCATION OF ANY PUBLIC AMENITIES/FACILITIES
The Contractor shall conduct a preliminary survey to identify any public amenities/facilities to be
diverted or relocated at the commencement of each block and submit the survey to the SO Rep. He
shall liaise with the relevant Authorities and Town Councils for such works. He shall prepare a
programme for such Works to the SO Rep for approval.
SECTION 9/...
LUP09/S8.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 9-1/1
SECTION 9
RESERVED
SECTION 4/…
LUP09/S9.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 10-1/1
SECTION 10
RESERVED
SECTION 4/…
LUP09/S10.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 11-1/3
SECTION 11
11.0 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
11.1 CEMENT
Cement shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
11.2 AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
11.3 WATER
Water shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" including all

subclauses under it.
11.5 CONCRETE MIX
Unless otherwise specified in this Section or in the Drawings, the grade of concrete in accordance with
Section 4 shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section. It shall be mixed,
placed into position, compacted, cured and protected as for structural concrete.
Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the
Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.
11.6 HARDCORE
Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to
pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand or
quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the
11.7 APRONS, PATHS AND PAVED AREAS
Unless otherwise specified, all fillings under unsuspended ground floor slabs, aprons, paths, paved areas
and other areas as indicated shall be 100mm thick hardcore in accordance with Clause 11.6 "Hardcore"
laid over well consolidated ground, and blinded with sand well worked into the voids.
Unless otherwise specified, paths and paved areas shall be cast from Grade 25 concrete as specified in
Section 4 "Structural Concrete" and reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric. The
reinforcement shall be fixed at 25mm from the top of the surface. Aprons shall be fitted with expansion
joints at 3m to 4.5m maximum centres as indicated. Joints along paths and aprons shall be saw-cutted
when the concrete has an age of at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 30mm.
Paths and paved areas shall be finished with a minimum of two passes of power trowell without sprinkling
with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete the work
before final set. The paths and paved areas shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved
curing compound or other approved methods.
LUP09/S11.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 11-2/3
11.8 PAVING SLABS FOR PATHS AND PAVED AREAS
When paving slabs are specified, they shall be 600 x 600 x 50mm thick concrete slabs of Grade 25
concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate obtained from approved manufacturer. Slabs shall be laid on a
bed of 75mm consolidated quarry waste and layer of sand at least 25mm thick and all joints shall be
grouted and pointed in 1:3 cement mortar.
Inform the SO Rep of his proposed suppliers. Samples shall be submitted for approval before bulk
ordering. Slabs shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.
11.9 CONCRETE SURROUND TO INSPECTION CHAMBERS
Leave openings as shown in Structural Drawings in the aprons where manholes are located to ensure a
regular pattern and complete the rendering after manhole frames are placed in position. All covers shall be
aligned with reference to the building line.
11.10 REINFORCED CONCRETE DRAINS
Reinforced concrete surface drains shall be constructed as indicated in the drawings.
11.11 RAMPS AND STEPS
Unless otherwise specified, reinforced concrete ramps and steps shall be Grade 25 concrete as specified
in Section 4 "Structural Concrete", reinforced with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric placed at 25mm
from the top.
The concrete shall be finished with a minimum of 2 passes power trowel to ramps or 2 passes of hard
steel trowel to the treads without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient
team of workmen to finish the works before final set. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven
days with approved curing compound or other approved methods. Surfaces shall be finished rough or
patterned to give non-slip surface.
11.12 PEDESTRIAN DRAIN CROSSINGS AND CONCRETE BOLLARDS
Drain crossings and reinforced concrete barrier posts shall be constructed to positions, dimensions and
details shown.
11.13 RESERVED
11.14 HEELSTONES
All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings.
Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of
100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into
walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.
LUP09/S11.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 11-3/3
11.15 CONCRETE COPING
Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in
plastering as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES".
Precast concrete coping shall be to details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth and
even.
11.16 CONCRETE LINTOLS
Concrete lintols shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintols shall
have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.
11.17 SCUPPER CHANNELS TO ACCESS BALCONIES AND STAIRCASE LANDINGS
Scupper channels shall be formed on floors of access balconies and staircase landings, and shall be
screeded to fall towards waste discharge stacks.
11.18 SLABS OVER CHANNELS
50mm thick precast cover slabs reinforced with No. B5 welded steel fabric shall be provided over channels
and cast at random lengths with 100mm x 25mm hand grips at both ends and housed onto rebate sides of
channels where shown.
11.19 RESERVED
11.20 RESERVED
SECTION 12/…
LUP09/S11.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 12-1/5
SECTION 12
12.0 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
12.1 MORTAR MIX FOR BLOCKWORKS AND BRICKWORKS
All solid concrete blockwork and clay brickwork shall be laid and compacted with approved mortar
prepacked mortar mix. The prepacked mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically and used according to the
manufacturer’s recommendation. Potable water supplied by the Power Supply shall be used for mixing
the mortar.
12.2 SOLID CONCRETE BRICKS OR BLOCKS
All solid concrete blocks shall be machine-pressed and pressure vibrated cement sand blocks complying
with SS 271:1983.
No blocks shall be laid in position until 2 weeks after delivery to site.
12.2.1 Laying of Solid Concrete Bricks or Blocks
The solid concrete blocks shall be bedded with mortar as specified in this Section. The work shall be
carried out in a uniform manner with no portion raised more than 300mm above the adjacent portions.
Corner shall be well bonded, plumbed and all perpends and quoins kept true and square. Joints shall be
of even thickness and shall not exceed 10mm thick. They shall be raked to a depth of 5mm to10mm while
the mortar is green to form adequate key for plastering.
The diameter bonding ties shall be as specified in Clause 12.4(a) "Wall Tie/ Bonding Bar System" and
shall be embedded into the horizontal joints.
90mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be constructed with 290mm/190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks
and laid in stretcher bond, reinforced with minimum 64mm x 0.5mm thick expanded galvanised steel
reinforcement at every third course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall not be more
than 200mm above the floor level. Laps of expanded metal reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm.
190mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be laid in English bond and constructed with 190mm x 90mm x
90mm blocks.
12.2.2 Plastering
The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES" including all
clauses and sub-clauses under it.
12.3 CLAY BRICKS
All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm x
100mm x 100mm.
Average Work Size

Designation
Length Width Depth
200mm x 100mm x 100mm 187.5mm 88.5mm 88.5mm

300mm x 100mm x 100mm 287.5mm 88.5mm 88.5mm
LUP09/S12.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 12-2/5
12.3.1 Laying of Clay Bricks
All bricks shall be well wetted before use and tops of brickwall where left off shall be well wetted before
commencement of laying.
Except for facing bricks, all faces of brickwork shall be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of
5mm to 10 mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster.
No four (4) courses of brickwork shall exceed 400mm in height.
12.3.2 Modular Common Clay Bricks
Brickwork as shown to be plastered shall be of modular common bricks. Plastering shall be as specified
in Section 20 "WALL FINISHES". All common bricks shall comply with the following requirements :
Requirement Standard
(a) Width of Brick 88.5mm average ±3.5mm
(b) Compressive Strength Min 25 N per mm2
(c) Water Absorption Ratio Not more than 15% by weight
(d) Soluble Salt Content Not more than 1% by weight
(e) Efflorescence Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface
area shall have salt deposit)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with Singapore Standard 103:1974. Test reports showing
compliance with the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before
the common bricks are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the
Site to ensure compliance.
12.3.3 Facing Clay Bricks
Unless otherwise specified, all facing clay brick shall be red facing clay bricks. All internal faces of clay
brick walls shall have joints raked off 5 to 10 mm to take plastering. External faces shall be raked off,
consolidated and pointed with prepacked mortar mix.
Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during
construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stain, dust and cement mortar
droppings.
12.4 RESERVED
12.5 REINFORCEMENT TO SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK

AND CLAY BRICKWORK WALLS AND PARTITIONS
(a) Expanded Galvanised Steel Reinforcement
90mm clay brick walls and solid block walls shall be reinforced with minimum 64 x 0.5mm thick
expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every 3rd course. The bottom-most expanded metal
reinforcement shall be 200mm above floor level.
Provide a minimum lap of 100mm at reinforcement joints. Embed reinforcement into bed joints of
wall and bonding bars. Blocks shall be built with the coursing and bonding as shown in the
Drawings and blocks correctly bedded.
(b) Bonding Bar System
All brickwalls and block walls shall be tied to the surface of reinforced concrete walls or columns by
a wall tie system. The brickwalls and block walls shall also be laterally restrained at both ends by
fastening it to reinforced concrete columns with bonding bar system.
LUP09/S12.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 12-3/5
12.5 (b) Bonding Bar System (Cont’d)
The wall tie system shall consist of 2 nos. of wall ties held in place by lipped frame. The frame
shall have a pair of stoppers to allow each wall tie a vertical flexibility of 100mm for brick coursing.
The frame and wall tie shall be 2mm and 3mm thick respectively. The fabrication details of the wall
tie system shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Where the fabrication details are different
from those as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall first obtain approval from the SO Rep
before proceeding any further.
The fabrication details of the bonding bar system shall be similar to that of the wall tie system
except that the length of the bonding bar shall be 300mm and whereas that for the wall tie shall be
70mm for brick cladding construction and 100mm long for cavity wall construction.
All wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be fastened with masonry drive pin to the reinforced
concrete column or wall. The masonry drive pin shall be made of stainless steel grade 304 and
shall have a minimum pull-out strength of 1KN from the concrete. The wall tie system shall be
spaced horizontally at 600mm centres to centres and so arranged such that individual wall ties at
each horizontally-spaced system are in a staggered manner. The detailed arrangement of the wall
tie system for a typical wall panel is shown in the Drawings.
Individual wall tie shall be embedded 50mm into the mortar joints and at every fourth course of the
bricks.
The wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be hot-dipped galvanised. The coating mass to at least
3 randomly selected points for individual wall tie/ bonding bar and at least 3 randomly selected
points for lipped frame shall comply with the following :
(i) Wall ties/bonding bars ) Minimum average coating mass shall

) be 460g per m2 or 64 microns in
(ii) Lipped frame ) accordance with BS 729;
(iii) Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 410g per m2 or the equivalent thickness
of 57 microns in accordance with BS 729.
The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system shall
not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place to
prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged by
cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least two
coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by
weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the galvanised
wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine the coating
weight. The coating weight shall be determined by a stripping test or ISO 2808 Method in
accordance with SS 117. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
verification.
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one
elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating.
12.6 POLYURETHANE SEALANT
Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and beams,
polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied at the joints
between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of sealant shall be
13mm minimum.
12.7 FOAM RUBBER STRIP INFILL
Where specified, provide and lay close-cell foam rubber strip infill to the top most joints between the
internal walls (clay brick, or solid concrete block) and the reinforced concrete beam or roof slab of top-
most end corner dwelling units as shown in the Drawings.
When the wall panel exceeds 5m in length, the foam rubber strip infill shall be interrupted by the cement
mortar of 1 in 3 mix by volume in fill for a length of 900mm.
LUP09/S12.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 12-4/5
12.8 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE
Provide damp-proof courses to all walls complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 Kg
per m2 laid to break joint on a layer of cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course
of blocks at ground floor level or at level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls.
Where applicable, provide and lay also damp-proof membrane to the underside of R.C. ground floor slab
of 1st storey flat (where rooms do not have floor tiles finishes) as shown in the Drawing. The damp-proof
membrane shall comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 Kg per m2. The substrates
shall be float finished to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip
bonded onto the substrates with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All
laps shall be 100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such
damp-proof membrane shall be applied also to base of shoplets' counter at first storey as shown in the
Drawings.
The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following :
(a) Base Material
(i) The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per m2.
(ii) The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture of
animal and vegetable fibres.
(b) Bituminous Materials and Fillers
(i) The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 +1/2 excess mass of
dpc material) in kg per m2.
(ii) The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60 to
230 (inclusive) at 25ºC when tested as described in BS 4691.
(iii) The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with a
surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing be within (0.9 +1/3
excess mass of d.p.c. material) Kg per m2 to (1.5 +1/2 of the excess mass of d.p.c. material)
kg per m2.
(iv) When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating
material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20ºC.
(v) The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 99% by
mass of filler shall pass a 425 micro metres mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and not less
than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410.
(vi) The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material
which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the roll.
12.9 OPENINGS FOR LIFT DOORS
Leave openings for new door to lift well where shown. Build up masonry work after lift door frames are
fixed by lift contractor and make good walls. Floor screed at door shall have fall away from lift well as
12.10 MORTICES, HOLES, CHASES, ETC
Cut or leave mortices, recesses, holes, chases, grooves, etc. as and when required for bolts, pipes,
bearers, outlets, skirtings, etc.
Generally make good when necessary in cement mortar to match surrounding surfaces to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S12.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 12-5/5
12.11 SCAFFOLDING
Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS" to enable masons

to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a high standard of walling and pointing.
12.12 GROOVE LINES TO MASONRY WALLS
Form a groove in the mortar between the masonry walls and the reinforced concrete structures where the
two surfaces are flush.
12.13 RESERVED
12.14 RESERVED
SECTION 13/...
LUP09/S12.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 13-1/4
SECTION 13
13.0 ROOFING
13.1 OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Section have to ensure that the
works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are
required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials
to be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and
his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
13.2 CONCRETE ROOF FINISH
The finished concrete roof shall be kept free from mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects during
subsequent work to the roof. The roof shall be inspected by the SO Rep prior to the application of
waterproofing system as shown in the drawings. Should any area of the roof be found unsatisfactory,
render it with 1:3 non-shrink cement sand screed and approved bonding agent or other approved method
at no extra costs to the Employer.
13.3 METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION SHEET
13.3.1 Profiled Steel Roofing Sheets
Where shown in the Drawings, all profiled metal roofing and fascia sheets shall be 0.53mm "Zincalume
colourbond Kliplok Hi-ten" or 0.53mm coloured "Speed Deck Hi-ten" or other approved in single lengths
for each span. The colour shall be for one side and shall be selected by the SO Rep. Where shown,
provide 300mm upturn to roofing at jack roof. The Contractor shall check whether design for roof can
comply with the Manufacturer's specification before the actual laying of the structure.
The metal roof structural plans and fastening details, supported by design calculations, shall be provided
by the Contractor's Professional Engineer. The design shall satisfy the Performance Requirements for its
intended use and that include withstanding wind load in accordance with CP3 Chapter V. The
Contractor's Professional Engineer shall submit a Certificate of Supervision not later than two weeks after
completion of the works, stating that he has carried out such supervision works and is fully satisfied that
the works have been constructed with such structural plans and fastening details.
The accessories such as ridge capping, fascia capping, valley gutter, longitudinal and transverse parapet
flashings, cap flashing and corner moulds and others shall be of 0.6mm (24 SWG) "Colourbond" or "Met
Roof" or other approved to the shape and profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix also the
gutter to the shape, material and profile as shown in the Drawings.
The metal roofing, fascia sheets, flashings, copings, openings pipe flashings, gutters and others shall be
provided and installed by an approved Specialist who can be an approved manufacturer or the
Manufacturer's duly authorised representative. If by the latter, the approved manufacturer shall provide
instruction as to the manner of assembly or installation of the roofing and shall further be responsible for
the work.
For the purpose of the Warranty specified in Clause 13.3.3 "Warranty", work shall mean all work specified
or reasonably to be inferred under this clause including all subclauses under it.
LUP09/S13.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 13-2/4
13.3.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet
Provide and lay vertically to fall one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet over
steel purlins. Allow vertical lapping of 50mm minimum. The double sided reflective roof heat insulation
sheet shall be secured to ridge and eave purlins by self-drilling fasteners complete with 38mm square
metal washers.
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for the
metal roof to linkway.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite";
or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements :
(a) PSB Product Listing
The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.
(b) Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :

Side 1 (average) : 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) : 90% minimum
(c) Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :
BS 476 Part 7 : Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
- Index of Performance : 12 maximum
- Sub-index : 6 maximum
(d) Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :

Machine Direction : 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction : 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.3.3 Lightning Protection To Metallic Roofing System,

Wall Cladding And Metallic Motifs
For metallic roofing system or roof structure or wall cladding or metallic motifs at the roof or envelope of
the building, the whole metallic body and any individually isolated metallic parts shall be bonded to the
main lightning protection system to comply with or otherwise satisfy the lightning protection requirements
specified in Singapore Standard CP 33 : 1996.
The design (where applicable), manufacture and installation of such metallic bodies or parts shall be
carried out judiciously such as to ensure the electrical continuity of the whole metallic roofing or wall
cladding or motifs by proper connections/joints and maintain its warranty. An adequate number of
accessible bonding points shall be provided.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep detailed drawings showing the metallic
roofing or structure or wall cladding or motif and the bonding to the main lightning protection system.
LUP09/S13.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 13-3/4
13.4 CLAY ROOF TILES AND HEAT INSULATION
13.4.1 Clay Roof Tiles
The clay roof tiles shall be the type as shown in the Drawings or as specified in the Supplementary
Specification. The colour of the roof tile shall be approved by the SO Rep.
(A) Performance Tests
The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall be
considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after the 6-
hour test.
The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not be
less than the following :
Average - 900 Newtons

Individual - 675 Newtons
The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as
described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall not
be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively.
(B) Laying and Fixing of Tiles
The roofing tiles and tile accessories shall be provided and laid by the Manufacturer or by his duly
authorised representative in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
Submit Drawings to the SO Rep to show the details of fixing and fastening tiles to roof. Nails and
clips shall be of hot-dip galvanised or of non-ferrous metals. Nails shall be of sufficient length to
penetrate into the battens by a minimum of 20mm, but shall not protrude beyond the depth of
battens.
All tiles shall range straight in courses and vertical edges in line from eave to ridge. Upon
completion of all necessary trades, clean down the roof.
(C) Sealing of Gaps
Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other
gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps.
(D) Tile Accessories
Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles,
flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles, pipe
and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead flashing
shall be 14.9 kg/m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the roofing tile.
13.4.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet
Provide and lay horizontally to fall, one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet
over rafters. Allow minimum 75mm for lappings. The insulation sheet shall be nailed or stapled to
wooden rafters. Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be
provided for the clay roof tiles to linkways.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite";
or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements:
(a) PSB Product Listing
The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.
LUP09/S13.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 13-4/4
13.4.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet (Cont’d)
(b) Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :

Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum
(c) Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :

BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
• Index of Performance - 12 maximum
• Sub-index - 6 maximum
(d) Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :

Machine Direction - 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.5 SOUND INSULATION MATERIAL
Where sound insulation material is shown in the Drawings, the insulation material shall be one layer of
50mm thick, 60-80 kg per m3 density rockwool or other approved.
SECTION 14/…
LUP09/S13.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-1/14
SECTION 14
14.0 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF
14.1 OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials
to be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and
his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
14.2 EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM
14.2.1 #Existing Roofing System with Existing Warranty (#where applicable)
The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the existing roofing system. All damages to the
existing roofing system shall be repaired by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall also carry out new roofing works to any space-adding item or other additional
structure shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall ensure that the aforesaid repair works and new
roofing works are properly executed and that the integrity of the whole roofing system is maintained.
The Contractor shall engage the Employer's original Roofing Contractor(s) who is/are providing the
existing warranty for the existing roofing system to carry out any patching up of openings or
repair/rectification of any damages to the existing roofing system and execution of any new roofing work to
space-adding item or other additional structure which overlap, abutt, adjoin or affect in any manner, the
existing roofing system in order to maintain the validity of the existing warranty on the existing roofing
system. Within 21 days after acceptance of the Contractor's Tender by the Employer, the Contractor shall
submit Letter(s) of Undertaking from the original Roofing Contractors (Appendix 2) stating clearly and
unequivocally, and without any proviso, that :
(a) the original Roofing Contractor(s) is/are engaged by the Contractor as specialist sub-contractor to
carry out new and/or repair/reinstatement works to the existing roofing system as specified in the
Contract; and
(b) the original Roofing Contractor(s) confirm the continued validity of the original roofing warranty
given by him/them for the existing roofing system on the relevant Blocks of flats in the Contract.
Failure by the Contractor to provide the required letter(s) of undertaking would render him liable to uphold
the terms of the warranty given by the original Roofing Contractor(s). The Employer shall be entitled to
enforce the provisions of the said warranty against the Contractor and the Contractor shall forthwith
comply with the provisions of the said warranty.
14.2.2 #Existing Roofing System without Existing Warranty (#where applicable)
The Contractor shall inspect the condition of the existing roofing system jointly with the SO Rep and the
representatives from the relevant Town Councils. All Defects noted shall be recorded by way of notes,
sketches and photographs verified by all parties concerned before the commencement of work.
The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the existing roofing system.
LUP09/S14.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-2/14
14.2.2 #Existing Roofing System without Existing Warranty (#where applicable)

(Cont'd)
The Contractor is required to re-roof those area of the existing roof-system damaged by him to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep and Town Council's representatives. The Contractor shall also carry out new
roofing works to any space-adding item or other additional structure as shown in the Drawings.
If the Contractor executes the re-roofing works himself, he shall have to be registered with BCA under the
specific contracting head for Roofing Installation or Waterproofing Installation. Otherwise the Contractor
shall engage a sub-contractor who is registered with BCA under the specific contracting head for Roof
Installation or Waterproofing Installation to execute the Re-roofing Works.
The Contractor shall submit a copy of the BCA registration card to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of the Re-roofing Works. The submission of a copy of the BCA registration card shall be
a condition precedent to progress payment for the Re-roofing Works.
If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of this Clause, the SO Rep reserves the right, to
instruct the immediate removal of the unregistered sub-contractor from the Site or if the Contractor
executes the Works himself, to instruct the Contractor to employ, a registered sub-contractor to continue
execution of the Re-roofing Works. The Contractor shall upon receiving notice in writing of such order to
remove the unregistered sub-contractor replace them with another sub-contractor who is appropriately
registered with BCA. In any case any expense or cost incurred by the Contractor arising out of or in
connection with the instruction of the SO Rep under this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor and he
shall have no claim whatsoever against the Employer. Further the Contractor is not entitled to any
extension of time arising out of or connection with the instruction of the SO Rep pursuant to this Clause.
The above-mentioned rights and liabilities of the Contractor shall apply without any prejudice to any other
rights and powers of the Employer under the Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" or under any other
provisions of the Contract.
14.3 NEW ROOFING SYSTEM
Where shown in the Drawings or specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall include in his Contract
Sum for all new special roof treatment work comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a) Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Ferrocement Secondary Roof Slabs;
(b) Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Panel Roofing.
These special roof treatment work shall be carried out by an approved roofing specialist. Submit the name
of the roofing specialist whom he intends to engage to the SO Rep for approval not earlier than five (5)
months and not later than two (2) months prior to the commencement of the special roof treatment work.
14.4 COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING TREATMENT

AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS
(A) Preparation of Surface
Prior to application of the waterproofing membranes system, the entire surfaces shall be in a
thoroughly clean and dry condition.
(B) Waterproofing Membranes System
The Contractor shall use “Shell Flintkote Ultra” water proofing system or waterproofing membranes
system as listed in the HDB Materials List. The application of the waterproofing system shall fully
comply with the Manufacturer's instructions.
LUP09/S14.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-3/14

AND FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOF SLABS (CONT'D)
(C) Roof Details
Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall be
carried out at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown in the
Drawings. For any upturns, waterproofing membrane is to be carried up a minimum distance of not
less than 300mm.
(D) Bituminous Stains
In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by the bituminous stains,
the Contractor shall remove the stain, make good and re-paint the affected surfaces to the
(E) Tests
After the application of the last coat of bitumen emulsion and prior to the application of the
reflective finish, the uniformity of the application of the waterproofing membrane shall be examined
both visually and by test. The membrane shall be considered visually satisfactory if no protrusion
of the fibre glass can be seen. The test involves the removal of 3 small samples from 3 randomly
selected locations. The average thickness and unit area weight shall be measured. Each thickness
and unit area weight shall exceed the minimum values specified by the Manufacturer. The dry film
thickness inclusive of the fibreglass membrane shall not be less than 1.00mm and the unit weight
inclusive of the fibreglass membrane based on 100mm x 100mm (100 cm2) shall not be less than
10g . The test shall be carried out by an approved laboratory accredited under the Singapore
Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS).
LUP09/S14.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-4/14

(E) Tests (Cont'd)
If the membrane fail to meet one or both of the requirements, additional coat(s) of waterproofing
membrane shall be applied. The rectified membrane shall be re-examined and re-tested until it
passes all the requirements stipulated above.
In addition, the Contractor shall make good the small areas where samples have been removed for
the test(s) at his own costs and expenses.
(F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs
(i) Materials - General Standards
(a) Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacturer

and shall comply with SS26.
(b) Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS31.
(c) Water
Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be
potable water supplied by PUB.
(d) Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS32.
(e) Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with SS320 or BS5075.
(f) Solid Block Supporting Stool
Concrete block shall comply with SS271.
(ii) Design Specifications
(a) Slab Dimension
The precast concrete slab shall be 600 ±3mm long x 600 ±3mm wide x 30 ±2mm
thick. Each slab shall be square with the difference in diagonal lengths of each panel
shall not be more than 3mm.
Half size panel (300 ±3mm long x 600 ±3mm wide) shall be used where necessary
so as to minimise the cutting of panels.
Service slit of 5mm wide and 50mm long shall be provided along two opposite sides
in accordance with the Drawings.
LUP09/S14.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-5/14

(F) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd)
(ii) Design Specifications (Cont'd)
(b) Mix Design
The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which satisfies the
following requirements :
1) minimum cement/sand ratio by weight of 1:2;

2) maximum water/cement ratio by weight of 0.45;
3) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg/m3;
4) 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N/mm2.
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix design
to the SO Rep for approval and carry out trial mix if deemed necessary.
.
(c) Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum) at
75mm spacing sandwiched between two layers of square wire mesh 1.5mm
(minimum) at 25mm spacing. The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating
weight of 65 gm/m2 minimum. The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of
300 N/mm2.
(d) Finishes
The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled
finish.
(e) Other Properties
(i) Initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881). The hardened panel shall
have ISAT values less than that stipulated below :
Time (min) 10 30 60
ISAT Value (ml/m2/s) 0.20 0.15 0.1
(ii) Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm.
(iii) Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall
have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.
(f) Solid Block Supporting Stool
The shape and size of the solid block for supporting the slabs shall be in accordance
with the Drawings.
(iii) Manufacturing Process
The slab shall be cast flat using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by
vibrators and the top surface steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately
supported with approved spacers.
Each slab shall bear the name of the Manufacturer preferably by imprinting onto the mould
without reducing the concrete cover for the reinforcement.
LUP09/S14.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-6/14

(iii) Manufacturing Process (Cont'd)
After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and visibility
to every piece, and shall be marked in accordance with the schedule of color-coding. During
the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on their edge during transportation.
All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the
curing method, duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be
equivalent to 3 days of moist curing.
Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to full production,
and the Contractor shall make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so
(iv) Installation of Secondary Roofing System
On areas indicated for secondary roofing, the ferrocement panels shall be laid on top of the
225mm thick solid blocks after the waterproofing system has been applied. The solid blocks
shall be centrally positioned on 200 x 200 x 3mm bitumen base pads with mineral finish.
The ferrocement panels shall be placed butt-jointed with each other with the off-form
surface facing up. Service slits of adjacent panels shall be aligned in the transverse
direction of the building.
All gaps at the edges of the secondary roof shall be sealed with 13mm x 13mm x 18 BWG
square shape galvanised wire mesh bent to shape. The bent-end (100mm) shall be
sandwiched between the slab and support leaving a gap of 10mm above the roof surface.
Where vent pipes protrude through the ferrocement slabs, the half standard size slabs may
be used and, if necessary, openings shall be provided by carefully sawing the slabs so as
not to cause any cracking.
Ensure that the ferrocement slabs are not indiscriminately stacked on the main reinforced
concrete roof slab prior to installation of the ferrocement slabs. The position for the stacking
of the secondary roofing slab shall be approved by the SO Rep. Stacking shall be allowed
only at column positions and shall be limited to one pallet per column. The number of
pieces per pallet shall be not more than the number of pieces supported by the column
shown in the Drawings. Any Defect in the main roof structure shall be made good as
directed by the SO Rep at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. All slabs shall be
indelibly marked and imprinted with the Manufacturer's name before delivery to site.
(v) CATV/Lightning Conductor Crossing
Provide 150mm x 150mm (minimum) concrete curb crossing between water tank or lift
motor room and reinforced concrete fascia for cable routing as shown in the Drawings.
(vi) Quality of Concrete Work
(a) Inspection and Testing
Provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting work.
On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for casting of 3 cubes for
compressive strength test (size 100mm cube).
LUP09/S14.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-7/14

(vi) Quality of Concrete Work (Cont'd)
(a) Inspection and Testing (Cont'd)
Samples of welded steel fabric shall be taken at the factory for the following tests:
1) strength testing and bar size measurement (SS32);

2) galvanized coating weight (The method of testing shall be in accordance
with BS 443).
Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory subject to
batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the following
aspects :
1) Dimension measurement of panel

2) Cover measurement after cutting the panel
3) Density of the panel
4) Initial surface absorption test (BS1881)
5) Carbonation test after cutting the panel
(b) Sampling Rate
Reinforcement shall be sampled at least once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall
be taken per sampling as one sample.
Ferrocement slab shall be sampled once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per
sampling as one sample.
(c) Passing Criteria
Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the
specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality
requirements.
If the specimen fails any of the quality requirement, tests shall be conducted on the
remaining two specimens.
If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the
material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement.
If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by 15%
or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified
requirements.
(G) Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in the roof slabs
with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade to match with those of the
surrounding concrete, after the installation of services by the Contractor and/or other contractors.
The Contractor shall also provide polyurethane base liquid applied waterproofing membrane
around the service pipes at a radius of 300 mm from the centre of the outlet. The application of
waterproofing membrane shall be carried up the pipes at a minimum height of 100 mm from the
floor surface.
The surface to receive the membrane shall be free from dust, laitance and ground smooth if
necessary. The application of the membrane shall comply strictly to the recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturer and/or SO Rep.
LUP09/S14.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-8/14

(G) Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area (Cont'd)
After allowing for adequate curing, lay cement mortar to form a haunch around the pipes sufficiently
to cover the waterproofing membrane. Adequate measures shall be provided to protect the
membrane from being damaged during the screeding operation.
The mortar mix shall be of prepacked mortar.
The waterproofing membrane shall comply with the technical performance requirements as
specified in subclause 19.3.2 "Specification of the Waterproofing Membrane".
(H) Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty
as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall
submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as
the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of
the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his
Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of
Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of
Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon
request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep
considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the
event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty
within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums
due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of
S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the
Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
14.5 COMPLETE SYSTEM OF WATERPROOFING

TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING
(A) Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all
subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer,
subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
(B) The panel roofing shall be executed in the following sequence :
(a) Waterproofing Screed
(b) Waterproofing Membrane
(c) Insulation Materials
(d) In-situ Waterproof Cement Panels
LUP09/S14.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-9/14

TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(C) Waterproofing Cement/Sand Screed
All roof surfaces to be rendered with the prepacked screeds shall be brushed clean and well wet
before prepacked screed is applied. All prepacked screed shall be kept damp and adequately
cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking. The prepacked screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1";
or “Fextile”; or “Smartguard”; or other approved waterproofing compound and laid to fall of 25mm to
every 3000mm towards the rainwater outlets, scupper drains or other outlets (where reinforced
concrete roof slab is laid to fall, the screeding shall be in even thickness). Mixing of waterproofing
compound shall be done strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed recommendations or
instructions. Screeding thickness shall be a minimum of 20mm thick at the lowest point and laid in
a workmanlike manner with even fall and finished smooth with wood trowelling. The prepacked
screed shall be of a brand currently approved by the SO Rep, be fresh when delivered and used in
the order of delivery.
(D) Waterproofing Membranes
(a) Preparation of Surface
Before applying the waterproofing membranes system, the entire screeded surfaces shall be
in a thoroughly clean, free from dust, etc and visibly dry condition.
(b) Waterproofing Membrane system
The contractor shall use “Shell Flintkote Ultra” water proofing system or waterproofing
membranes system as listed in the HDB Materials List. The application of the waterproofing
system shall fully comply with the Manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Roof Details
Detailing at eaves shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The waterproofing treatment shall
be carried up at abutments to walls, pipes, parapets, skirtings, concrete curbs, etc as shown
in the Drawings. For any upturns, waterproofing membrane is to be carried up a minimum
distance of not less than 300mm.
(d) Bituminous Stains
In the event the external painted walls of the building blocks are affected by bituminous
stains, the Contractor shall remove the stain, make good and re-paint the affected surfaces
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(E) Insulation Materials
The insulation materials shall be 50mm thick insulation boards. The board shall be multicellular
board of extruded polystyrene containing a flame retardant additive. It shall have natural skins on
both surfaces and shall have the following properties :
Density : 35 kg/m3
Thermal conductivity : 0.029 - 0.032 W/mk
Compressive Strength at 10% deflection : 300 kpa
Water absorption : less than 1% by volume
Capillarity : none
Maximum operating temperature : 74ºC
The board dimensions shall be 50mm thick ±2.0mm, 600mm wide ±3.0mm and 1250mm long
±6.0mm. The boards shall be laid loose on top of the waterproofing membrane in a staggered
pattern. All joints between the boards shall be tightly fitted. The boards that are less than half (1/2)
the width of length shall not be placed at the edge but to be placed at least one row away from the
edge.
The whole work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's/Supplier's
instructions.
LUP09/S14.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-10/14

TREATMENT AND PANEL ROOFING (CONT'D)
(F) In-situ Waterproof Cement/Sand Panels
The work shall be executed in the following sequence :
(a) Lay an overall 38mm thick in-situ prepacked waterproof screed panel over final layer of
waterproofing membrane in alternate bays of size 900mm x 900mm each. The prepacked
screed shall be mixed with "Sika No. 1" or "Fextile 1"; or "Smartguard"; or other approved
waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be mixed to the Manufacturer's
recommendations and printed instructions and subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Prepacked screed panels shall be laid in parallel strips of 900mm x 900mm. Panel surfaces
should be smoothened with steel trowel without adding dry cement and truly levelled to falls
indicated as a finished floor surface. Joints between panels shall be "V" shaped 10mm wide
at top and tapering to 6mm at bottom. Wood strips shall be used and the completed depth
of the joints shall be 16mm leaving the panel 22mm thick below the joint.
(b) Immediately after setting the panels shall be covered with hessian bags which shall be kept
wet for not less than 3 days to cure thoroughly. Any defective panels shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his own costs and expenses.
(c) After removal of hessian bags and cement panels are cured, the joints shall be filled and
grouted with bitumen compound. The bitumen applied shall be a hot-poured rubber-
bitumen sealant to BS 2499 Type A1 or Type A2. The finished level shall be clean and the
top-most joint shall be levelled with the panel surface to prevent water stagnation.
(d) Extreme care shall be taken at the building expansion joint and to construct roofing strictly
to the details in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.
(G) Warranty
stipulated in Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty
as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall
submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as
the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of
the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his
Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of
Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of
Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon
request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep
considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the
event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty
within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums
due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of
LUP09/S14.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-11/14
14.6 RE-ROOFING WORKS
Where re-roofing works is required, this clause including sub-clauses shall be applicable.
14.6.1 Scope of Work
Apply water-proofing treatment and lay the light-weight precast concrete slabs secondary roofing work as
specified in the Standard Specifications. No old roofing slabs and hollow blocks shall be re-used. At every
stage of the work, the Contractor shall inform the Superintending Officer's Representative giving him at
least one working day's notice for inspection before proceeding to the next stage. The various stages are
:
(a) Before commencement of work, to assess existing damages to services, etc;
(b) Clearing the roof of the existing precast slabs and scrape water-proofing membrane, dismantle and
re-install Lightning Protection System on roof structure;
(c) Rescreeding works where necessary and reconstruct roof expansion joints where necessary;
(d) The application of water-proofing system;
(e) The laying of precast slabs; and
(f) Removal of the existing water proofing system & application of water proofing system to existing
RC roofs of water tanks/service rooms.
14.6.2 Reconstruction of Supports
All existing vertical supports to roof service line which are not of proper construction, missing or damaged,
are required to be reconstructed.
Collars are to be constructed at the base of all supports with prepacked screed in 150mm wide x 150mm
high and splayed at 45 degrees.
Splayed collars shall be similarly constructed to all existing pipe protrusions at roof top where collars are
absent, improperly constructed or damaged.
14.6.3 Damage to Telemonitoring System
In apartment blocks where the Employer has installed Telemonitoring Systems (TMS) running with 13mm
diameter conduit pipes laid along the main roof top and the roof of the lift motor room and where re-roofing
works are being carried out, the Contractor is to exercise extreme care in the execution of their works to
avoid damaging the conduit line. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims,
demands, proceedings or damages, losses, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever which may arise as
a result of their failure to exercise care in works affecting the TMS. Notwithstanding the above, the
Employer shall not be restricted in any way whatsoever to invoke its rights as contained in Clauses of the
Conditions of Contract and Clause 1.5.10 "Damage to Public/Private Property" and Clause 1.10 "Nuisance
and Irregularities".
14.6.4 Protection of Existing Services
The Contractor shall be responsible to take all necessary precautionary measures to prevent damages to
the existing electrical installation, lightning protection system, central television antenna system, water
distribution system including their supports and other services that are existing on the roof. Should these
be already damaged before the Contractor commences work, he should inform the Superintending
Officer's Representative and the Branch Office's representative and arrange for a joint inspection to have
the nature of the damages recorded. Should the damages be the result of the Contractor's work, the
Employer will arrange to have these made good and the cost plus charges to be imposed on the
Contractor shall be recovered from the Contractor.
LUP09/S14.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-12/14
14.6.5 Water Test to Existing Concrete Roof Surface of Blocks
Before the removal of existing waterproofing membrane, the Contractor is to ascertain and satisfy himself
that the existing roof slab has an even surface with a proper fall, by conducting water tests where
necessary. Should there be areas of unevenness which may give rise to stagnation of water, the
Contractor shall re-render these areas as directed by the SO Rep so as to achieve an even surface with
proper fall over the entire roof. This re-rendering works carried out shall be paid by way of variation to the
Contract.
Re-rendering, shall be executed as specified below :
(i) remove existing cement rendering (if any) and form keys;
(ii) form keys to receive new rendering where existing roof has no rendering;
(iii) clean surfaces and apply one coat of approved bonding agent before new rendering is applied;
(iv) re-render the RC main roof with prepacked screed gauged with approved waterproofing additive
and trowelled to smooth finish to fall as directed by S O Rep.
The Contractor shall be held responsible should there be stagnation of water during the warranty period.
The Superintending Officer's Representative reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out water
test to any individual blocks as and when required.
Water Test shall be conducted after the removal of precast secondary roof slabs and hollow blocks but
before the removal of existing waterproofing membrane.
14.6.6 Provision of Nylon or Polyethylene or Rubber Mat/ Pad as Base for

Loading and Unloading of Roofing Materials
The Contractor shall provide nylon or polyethylene or rubber mat/pad of minimum size 1.5 times of the
base area of the bucket or hopper as base for loading and unloading of roofing materials at roof top to
minimise the impact noise.
14.6.7 Repair to Existing Leaking or Damaged Roof Expansion Joints
The Contractor shall allow in his Contract Sum for the repair to the existing roof expansion joints where it
is leaking or damaged. The necessity and extent of making good shall be determined by the
Superintending Officer's Representative whose decision thereon shall be final.
Damaged or leaking roof expansion joints shall be reconstructed where necessary by removing the
aluminium cover, stripping off the old damaged expansion joints filling, and refill with two-part
"Polyurethane" sealant ("Thioflex 600'" "Febseal" or other approved products) all in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Before refilling with the Polyurethane or other approved sealant, the joint interface must be clean, dry and
free from oil, dust and other contaminants. Insert closed-cell polyethylene backing foam or backing rod to
the joint and then fill the joint with Polyurethane sealant to a minimum of 20mm depth, and re-install the
aluminium cover in position, and make the joint water-tight. Apply Polyurethane primer prior to filling with
the sealant.
Damaged or leaking old designed expansion joint shall be reconstructed with upstand, joint filled with
approved sealant and cover with aluminium cover all as shown in the detail drawing.
LUP09/S14.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-13/14
14.6.8 Reinstatement of Lightning Protection System (LPS) at Roof Surface

- For Affected Sections of Work Only
Before commencing the application of shellkote treatment to the roof, the existing aluminium strip
conductors, clips, air-terminals and accessories running on the roof surfaces shall be temporarily
dismantled and secured to the roof and reinstated into original position on completion of the shellkote
treatment.
The dismantling and reinstatement works of the LPS shall be carried out by licensed Electricians and any
missing/damaged or additional clips, screws, air-terminals and accessories shall be replaced or added by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officer's Representative.
Aluminium LPS
Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals
not exceeding 0.6m. The aluminium base strips shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a single set
screw/nail complete with nylon anchor, and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two
screws.
The dismantled aluminium conductor and final points shall be continuously connected to the connecting
conductor and down leads.
Base strips are allowed to remain untouched on roof when dismantling the aluminium conductor. However,
should the base strips spacing be more than 0.6m, the Contractor shall provide additional base strips and
clips.
If the existing aluminium LPS is without base strips, and the aluminium conductor is only secured by
aluminium clips and nailed to the concrete roof, then the roofing contractor is required to dismantle the
aluminium conductors, incorporate the base strips and cover clip as specified herewith for water
tank/service room roof and main roof. Down leads are to be excluded.
Air terminals shall be re-installed to their original positions.
Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection
to the connecting conductor. Bases shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points shall
be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws, for the air
terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel and complete with nylon plug. ELP Systems
that run on copper tape or wires are to be similarly done as before described, except that the method of
reinstatement shall be as per existing. All material used shall be as that approved by the Superintending
Officer's Representative.
14.6.9 Testing of Lightning Protection System For Conductivity
Upon completion, the Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure electrical continuity of all
conductors, and that all bonds and joints of the LPS on the roof and their mechanical conditions have
fulfilled the requirements in the Specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish a testing report to the Superintending Officer's Representative.
If the Superintending Officer's Representative is not satisfied with the testing report, he shall direct the
Contractor to apply to him, at least seven (7) working days in advance, for the inspection and testing of the
lightning protection system.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled
labour, services, as well as proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the test. The test as stated
herein shall be confined to the electrical continuity and mechanical conditions of all conductors, bonds and
joints on the roof.
Inspection or approval of tests by the Superintending Officer's Representative of any equipment, works or
installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete equipment, and
complete work and installation in accordance with this Specification.
LUP09/S14.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 14-14/14
14.6.10 Re-testing of Lightning Protection System and Administrative Charges
Administrative charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" mentioned herein
shall be imposed where omissions, defects or faults detected in the first testing are not properly and
promptly rectified by the Contractor resulting in failure in subsequent re-test.
The administrative charges shall be deducted from any money that may become due to the Contractor.
The Contractor may be suspended from tendering further for the Employer's projects if there are still
outstanding defects or faults after the 2nd retest and where necessary, another Contractor may be
engaged to make good the defects or faults and all costs/expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.
14.6.11 Replacement of Balloon Grating to All Vents and Soil Pipes at Roof Top
The Contractor shall salvage all balloon gratings which are in good conditions and reinstate them on
completion of the roofing works. All missing and damaged balloon gratings to roof top vents and soil pipes
shall replaced by new gratings dip in bituminous paint before installation. All gratings shall be secured to
pipes by perforated PVC coated metal fixing strap.
14.6.12 Preparation of Roof Surface Before Laying of Secondary Roof Slabs
Prior to the laying of lightweight precast concrete slabs, the Contractor shall ensure that all damaged
waterproofing membrane and membrane fibre are made good. The entire surface of the roof shall be in a
thoroughly clean condition.
14.6.13 Removal of Unwanted Features on the Roof
When notified by the Superintending Officer's Representative that a particular feature on the roof is
unnecessary, the Contractor shall hack away the said feature and make good the roof surface and
waterproofing roof treatment.
14.6.14 Stripping Off Existing Roof Treatment to Blocks
Strip off all roof treatment including insulating materials to existing roofs where applicable, and remove
debris off site. Make good all visible cracks on the concrete roofs by cutting back about 10mm each side
about 15mm deep to form "V" grooves and patch up with "THORITE", or similar approved patching
compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Brush a coat of bonding agent before repair.
Clean and prepare surface to receive roof treatment as before described.
All cracks in roof beams, slabs and columns at the topmost floors are to be patched up with epoxy mortar
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before roofing work commences.
14.6.15 Repair to Water Seepage
The surface to be repaired shall be free from dirt paint and other impurities. It must be thoroughly and
uniformly moisturised by spraying the area with water prior to any repair works. The surface must be kept
damp with no surface moisture. The waterproofing compound shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. The Contractor shall submit samples of the repair materials for the
approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative. Materials used should be supplied by the same
manufacturer and complete compatibility must be assured.
14.6.16 Precast Concrete Ferrocement Slabs to Roof Areas of Corridors, Staircases and Lift Lobbies
The roof areas of corridors, staircases and lift lobbies shall be provided with precast concrete ferrocement
slabs.
SECTION 15/...
LUP09/S14.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-1/22
SECTION 15
15.0 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
15.1 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not
exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large loose
or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defects.
Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation around all
faces and minimum warping.
Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed from
the site immediately and replaced with new members/components.
Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defects within 12 months after the
Substantial Completion of the project shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified
all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
15.1.1 Structural Use Of Timber
The use of timber for structural purposes shall comply with SS CP7. Timber used shall be Kempas or
Keruing or Chengal or Balau, or other approved species of similar strength grade. Timber shall be treated
with copper/chrome/arsenic preservatives according to SS 72. As far as possible, holes in timber shall be
formed before preservative treatment. Holes and sawn surfaces of treated timber shall be brushed with
two coats of creosote or other approved preservatives. Bolts, nuts, screws, nails, plates and steel section
used for connecting timber shall be galvanised. Steel sections and plates shall be Grade 43A steel to BS
4360. Bolts and nuts used shall be black bolts to BS 4190.
As soon as is practicable, and prior to the commencement of assembly, all structural timber delivered to
the Site shall be subject to random sampling for testing by PSB or a PSB accredited laboratory in
accordance with SS CP7. One test shall be done per contract. In the event that the test fails, the
Contractor shall remove the batch of timber from the Site. Another test shall be done on another batch. If
the second test fails, all timber shall be removed. A fresh batch shall then be obtained from another
supplier and tested accordingly.
The sample shall be tested for moisture content and checked for dimensional requirements. The bending,
compression and shear stresses shall also be determined. Preservative penetration and salt content shall
be determined in accordance with SS 72.
All carpentry work shall be sawn unless otherwise specified. All exposed timber shall be sanded to a
smooth finish. Painting where specified shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint
manufacturer.
15.1.2 Joinery
Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark
Red or Meranti Yellow, or other approved.
Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others shall
be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow, or other approved.
All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish.
Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber
members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 2.5mm shall be permitted
for each wrot face.
Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the
Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken
on site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the work.
LUP09/S15.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-2/22
15.2 PREPARATION OF JOINERY WORK
Place order for all joinery and carpentry items required for the work within one month from the date of the
Employer's Letter of Acceptance of the Tender. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay owing
to his failure to place order in good time. Preparation of joinery work shall commence at the beginning of
the contract and shall proceed until all joinery is ready. These shall then be stacked on site and protected
from weather.
15.3 FRAMING TOGETHER
All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged up
tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before fixing in
position.
Any members that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defects shall be replaced with new ones before
wedging up.
15.4 JOINERY WORK
All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a
proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery
work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery.
Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.
15.5 PRIME FRAMES
All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all doors
and windows frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with one coat of
"Solignum", "Presotim", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be
allowed to be thoroughly dried before fixing of the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.
15.6 FIXING OF TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOW

FRAMES INTO CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the masonry openings. All crevices between frames and
walls, beams or other masonry shall be filled up with prepacked mortar. Heads of window and door
frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with minimum 2 Nos. 75mm masonry drive pin
"Ramset Nails No. 2330" or other approved to the numbers as shown in the Drawings. The feet of door
frames shall be fixed according to details.
All nails shall be completely embedded in the frames and stopped with an approved sealer.
LUP09/S15.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-3/22
15.7 FIXING OF DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO MASONRY
Timber door and window frames shall be secured to masonry walls with 6 Nos. and 4 Nos. fishtailed
holdfasts as shown in the Drawings.
The M.S. holdfasts shall be 25mm x 3mm thick x 230mm girth, one end turned up and drilled and screwed
to frame and the other end tailed and built into the joints of walling.
15.8 FIXING OF TIMBER CILL TO WALL/CONCRETE CILL
Where shown, provide and fix minimum 2 Nos. of 10mm diameter x 75mm long mild steel dowel bar to
each timber cill. One end of bar shall project 25mm into the groove of timber cill and the other end shall
be embedded 50mm into the groove of the wall or concrete cills. The grooves shall then be grouted with
prepacked mortar. For timber cill longer than 600mm in length, the dowel bar shall be fixed at maximum
600mm centres.
15.9 TIMBER DOORS
Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in the
Drawings. Sizes are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance door,
bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified, plywood
panels shall be of Grade 2 and of Moisture Resistant Quality.
(a) Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults, and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b) Moisture Content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less
than 10 per cent and not more than 15 per cent. However, any difference in moisture content of
the timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.
(c) Marine-plywood
New door been exposed behind the kitchen or utility room shall be finished with marine-
plywood.
(d) Aluminium Sheet For Weather Protection
All new doors shall be cladded with 0.2mm thick aluminium sheet to exterior face to services/store
rooms, lift motor room, refuse rooms, switch rooms or doors of rooms exposed to weathering
locations. The aluminium sheet shall be bent to return along the thickness of the door.
(e) Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
LUP09/S15.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-4/22
15.10 Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber

Doors To Entrances Of Flats
15.10.1 Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses shall ensure that the
works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of complying with the
required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or
materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the
Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the
Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
15.10.2 General
Where specified and shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated
solid timber doors to entrances of flats as shown in the Drawings, Provide and install such half-hour fire-
rated solid timber doors, mild steel door frames and ironmongery as a complete system complying with SS
332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval and
certified under PSB product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.
The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixings shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The thickness of door panel shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of door frame
profile. The decorative beading pattern on the door surface shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The surface finish of the fanlight panel shall be similar to the entrance door. Other details of the mild steel
transom and fanlight panel shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only.
15.10.3 Shop Drawings and Sample
Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval
of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep
before the full implementation.
15.10.4 Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid

Timber Doors To Entrances Of Flats
Where specified, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with
the following schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. All ironmongery shall comply with SS332:2007
and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide
to the respective quality and profile of the ironmongery required.
(A) Schedule
(I) Single Leaf
The ironmongery items shall be :
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip
and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws.
(ii) 1 no. "YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB;or

“BLIY”-N27-FIR-US5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset
with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb
turn on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides.
The finish shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be
installed in a manner to clear the metal gate lockset.
(iii) 1 no. 90mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
UPG06/S15.DOC(4)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-5/22
15.10.4 Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire Rated Solid Timber

Entrance Doors To Flats (Cont’d)
(A) (I) Single Leaf (Cont’d)
(iv) 1 no. 240mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
(v) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer :

(a) "YTL" 1827AB; or
(b) “BLIY" 1827AB; or
(c) "Accord" E3855AB; or
(d) other approved.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer
shall not be obstructed by entrance grille gate.
(vi) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A.
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall
be of bronze colour.
(II) Double Leaf

( Applicable if shown in the Drawing)
The ironmongery items shall be :
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip
and ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "Posse" H61L-AB or "Union" 9401 AB/GL or "Lucky" CS-410-MAUS5; or

other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin double
cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside) solid
brass grip handle and solid brass lever handle. The finishes of the
deadlock, grip handle and lever handle shall be antique brass. The lever
handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal gate
lockset.
(iii) 2 no. Rebated parts.
(iv) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.
(v) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide brass lever action flush bolt in satin finish.
(vi) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer :

(d) other approved.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer
shall not be obstructed by entrance grille gate.
(vii) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A.
Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall
be of bronze colour.
(B) Keys for Locksets
The lockset shall be provided with 3 sets of keys. These keys shall be handed over to the
Employer upon the Substantial Completion of Works.
(C) Grade of Stainless Steel
Unless otherwise specified, the Grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
UPG06/S15.DOC(5)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-6/22
15.10.5 Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated
timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-
rated in all aspects approved by FSSB.
15.10.6 Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.10.7 Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber
Doors".
15.11 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS

TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM,
AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
15.11.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switchrooms, PUB switchrooms, storerooms, pump rooms,
MDF Rooms, equipment closets and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings, provide
and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber door frame
and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber door frames
and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007 and shall have
PSB test certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
15.11.3 Shop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop drawings,
and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep.
Further, a complete sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before full
implementation.
UPG06/S15.DOC(6)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-7/22
15.11.4 Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a
guide to the respective quality and profile of the ironmongery. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332:2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated.
For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm
stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof.
(A) Double Leaf
(i) 4 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 2 nos. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless
steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv) 1 no. "Abloy" 3041 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2" PL padlock under
master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.
(v) 1 no. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(vi) 1 no. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(vii) 2 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver
colour.
(viii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(B) Single Leaf
(i) 4 pairs 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2" PL padlock under
master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless
steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
(v) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver
colour.
(C) Doors To Staircase Accesses To Main Roofs
For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, in addition to the above-mentioned ironmongery
requirements specified, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm stainless steel barrel
shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof.
(D) Grade of Stainless Steel
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and Ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
UPG06/S15.DOC(7)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-8/22
15.11.6 Surfaces
Doors".
15.12 HALF-HOUR FIRE RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS
15.12.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts
complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD approval
and certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class1B.
PSB test certificates and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete
sample shall be installed on site for the approval of the SO Rep before the full implementation.
15.12.4 Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. All ironmongery shall comply with SS332:2007 and shall be at
least half-hour rated and approved by the FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve
as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(A) Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under GIHBG-PH and
master key series GIHBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master
key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key
series MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK
48 or other approved.
The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn
on the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish.
(iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm or "Goal" GC or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle;
or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external
UPG06/S15.DOC(8)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-9/22
15.12.4 Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(B) Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
(i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. Cylinder mortice night latch "Union" 2332 CH/300/2x13 under GIHBG-PH and
master key series GIHBG; or "Abloy" 2295 MS/CR under HDB MK and master
key series MK 911047; or "Yale" 3203/214.62 under MKAA and master key
series MK 48; or "Accord" 2332/1405 under HDB MK and master key series MK
48 or other approved.
The mortice night latch shall be with key cylinder on the outside and thumb turn
on the inside. The cylinder and thumb turn shall be in chrome plated finish.
(iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm or "Goal" GC or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle;
or other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv) 1 no. Brass rebated parts.
(v) 1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
(vi) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
(C) Grade of Stainless Steel
(D) Keys for Mortice Night Latch
A set of three keys shall be provided for each flat served by the service duct and shall be handed
over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the works.
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire rated timber surface
finished composite doors including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour
fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
15.12.6 Surfaces
Doors".
UPG06/S15.DOC(9)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-10/22
15.13 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE

DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM
15.13.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts
complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007, shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be certified under PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B .
PSB test certificates and FSSB approval letter for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete
15.13.4 Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of FSSB. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a
guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332:2007 and shall be at least half-hour rated and approved by FSSB.
(a) Single Leaf
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder
and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt
with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome
cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The
lockset shall be capable of being operated by a PBTS master key.
(iii) 2 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle or "Goal" GC stainless
steel cup handle or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
(iv) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
UPG06/S15.DOC(10)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-11/22
15.13.4 Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(b) Double Leaf
(i) 4 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single cylinder
and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt
with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome
cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The
lockset shall be capable of being operated by a PBTS master key.
(iii) 2 nos. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle or "Goal" GC stainless
steel cup handle or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(v) 1 no. "Nikon" 225m x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(vi) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
(vii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(c) Grade of Stainless Steel
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire rated timber surface
finished composite doors including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour
fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
15.13.6 Surfaces
Doors".
15.13.8 Handover Of MDF Room And Telecom Equipment Room
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecom Equipment Room for the
changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.
UPG06/S15.DOC(11)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-12/22
15.14 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE
The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses has to ensure
that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the
event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all necessary
upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such
approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the
Contract.
(B) General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with door
frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying
with SS 332 : 2007, shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be be listed in PSB
Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.
(C) Shop Drawings And Sample
Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of the
SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full
implementation.
(D) Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSB. All ironmongery shall comply with
SS332:2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule
shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
Schedule Of Ironmongery
(a) 4 no. Stainless steel door hinges for each door leaf.
(b) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim
line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.
(c) 1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The
diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.
(d) 1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm
minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.
(E) Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSB.
(F) Surfaces
(G) Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9
"Timber Doors"
UPG06/S15.DOC(12)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-13/22
15.15 RESERVED
15.16 RESERVED
15.17 NON FIRE-RATED DECORATIVE TIMBER FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH
DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES TO SERVICE DUCTS
Where specified, the non fire-rated solid timber entrance doors to flats, solid timber veneered doors for
bedroom , solid timber veneered doors for utility room, timber flush doors to service ducts and timber
flush doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme
Class 1A or PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1B.
15.18 RESERVED
15.19 TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC
(*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract)
Where required under the Contract, all doors to bath/wc of residential units shall be semi-solid timber
doors with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with
mild steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall provide “wood grain” laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom
door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed.
The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates
shall be “Wilsonart”, “Nevamar”, “Pionite” or other approved.
15.19.2 Installation
The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as
recommended by the supplier.
All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.19.3 Shop Drawings and Samples
Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete
sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.19.4 Surfaces
The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks,
manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9
“Timber Doors”.
15.19.6 Ironmongery For Semi-Solid Timber Door with Laminate Finish
The ironmongery items for each door leaf of laminated semi-solid timber doors shall be:
(a) 3 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws;
(b) 1 no. “Posse” C130AB or “Lucky” 1630 or “Forte” BP101 or “BLIY” AB-610 or other
approved privacy knobset with emergency release on the outside and push button on
the inside in antique brass finish.
UPG06/S15.DOC(13)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-14/22
15.19.7 Rubber Stopper
Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every
bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the wall
tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.
15.20 TREATMENT OF ROOF TIMBER
All roof timber shall be treated with "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied
with brush in two coats. Timber may also be treated with approved pressurised process.
15.21 FIXING OF TIMBER WALL PLATE
Wall plates shall be fixed with 13mm diameter bolts cast 100mm into R.C. beams spaced at maximum 1.5
metres centre.
15.22 CEILING
Where shown in the Drawings, ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x
12mm thick non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with
38mm galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along
the centre of board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centre. Joints between
boards shall be covered with 38 x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open joint at
intermediate joint.
15.23 FALSE CEILING AT 1ST STOREY LIFT LOBBY ENTRANCE
(A) Calcium Silicate Boards Ceiling
Where indicated in the Drawings, new false ceiling boards at first storey lift lobby entrance shall be
12mm thick approved calcium silicate boards or other approved. The false ceiling boards shall be
fixed to timber joists as shown in the Drawings. The ceiling boards shall be fixed by no. 8 corrosion
resistant countersunk screws at approximately 288mm centres. The length of screw shall be equal
to thickness of ceiling board plus 30mm minimum penetration into timber joist. Screws shall be
driven not less than 12mm from the edge of the Boards. The timber joints shall be fixed, supported
and lined out all as shown in the Drawings. The ceiling boards edges shall be birdsmouthed. The
edges shall form `V' joints between boards when the boards are fixed. The joints shall be wet and
filled with gypsum joint compound and taped with paper tape recommended by the supplier. When
the joint compound is fully dried, it shall be finished with another two coats of joint compound
recommended by the Supplier. The joints shall be sanded down when it is fully dried to obtain a
seamless finish.
All screw holes, screw heads and uneven joints shall be filled with gypsum joint compound.
Provide access panel all as shown in the Drawings and shall trim holes whenever required for
electrical fittings, pipings, trunkings and others. The ceiling boards shall be sealed with an
approved wall sealer before applying two coats of approved acrylic emulsion paints.
All exposed timber surfaces shall be wrot by planing and sand-papering to an approved smooth
finish.
UPG06/S15.DOC(14)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-15/22
15.23 (B) Metal False Ceiling
(a) Material
Where indicated on the Drawings, new false ceiling at first storey lift lobby entrance shall be
600mm x 600mm x 0.7mm aluminium ceiling panels suspended and supported in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ceiling panels shall
be perforated with 2.5mm diameter holes at 5.5mm centres, giving a 16% open area.
The false ceiling shall be in polyester powder coated or polyester stove enamelled and to
the colour approved by the SO Rep. Ceiling panels shall complete with suspension system
and fixing accessories, all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
Provide all access panels and trim holes required for electrical fittings, pipings, trunking and
others, etc.
All metal accessories to be used for the installation of ceiling panel shall be in galvanised
steel.
(b) Workshop Drawings
The details shown in Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit
complete set of workshop drawings showing reflected ceiling plan, sections, suspension
systems, dimensions and details of access panels, electrical fittings and pipings/trunkings
for the approval of the SO Rep.
(c) Sample
Samples of ceiling shall be submitted for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
UPG06/S15.DOC(15)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-16/22
15.24 ALUMINIUM FRAMES FOR GLASS LOUVRED VENTS
Where shown, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium frames for glass louvred vents to size and
dimension indicated in the Drawings.
15.25 REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING ENTRANCE DOOR (NON FIRE-RATED DOOR

AND FIRE-RATED DOOR)
Where applicable, contractor shall replace the existing entrance door with non fire-rated or fire-rated door
as shown in the Drawings and include the following :
(i) Remove existing flat's entrance doors along the corridor and fire escape route as instructed on site
except door frames and metal gates as shown in door schedule and dispose off site.
(ii) Remove existing services/store room doors and door frames along the fire escape route as
instructed on site and as shown in doors schedule and dispose off site.
(iii) Supply and install an equivalent rating of half-hour fire-rated timber entrance door leaf to fit into
rebate of existing timber door frame profile of flats.
(iv) Supply and install half-hour fire-rated solid timber doors (laminated timber core) with timber surface
finish or half-hour fire-rated timber composite doors (moisture resistance Particle Board in
accordance to BS 5669:Part 1) with timber surface finished and ironmongery according to Clause
15.11 (complete with timber door frames) as shown in door schedule for services rooms.
(v) Seal-up fan light adjacent to main entrance doors to comply with FSSB escape lobby requirement
to minimum 1 hour fire-rating. Panel and existing frame to be painted to match existing
surrounding.
(vi) Seal up store room entrances under staircases with brickwork and plaster over to match existing
surrounding.
(vii) Provide alternative opening to the sealed up store room away from escape passage way.
(viii) Provide and fix new aluminium house number plates to each of the new entrance doors to flat's
units, refer to Section 30 "MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)".
(ix) The existing accessories or any signages to services rooms shall be retained and fixed onto new
doors.
(x) The number of doors given in the Tender is approximate; the Employer reserves the right to add or
omit any number of doors or any other items specified in the contract to be installed.
(xi) Please see Sub Clause 15.25.1 on Procedure.
(xii) Timber Doors
(a) Unless otherwise specified, all fire-rated timber doors shall be constructed in accordance
with the details as shown in the Drawings and clauses under this Section for entrance doors
of all room types.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, all non fire-rated doors shall be similar to the fire-rated door
excluding the door closer and FSSB label.
(xiii) Making Good Existing Door Frames/Doors
Any damages, unnecessary recess or screw holes, lockset rebate, etc. left behind on the door
frames/doors when removing the old doors or old locksets are to be patched back and make good
including painting or coating to match the existing finishings.
UPG06/S15.DOC(16)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-17/22
15.25.1 Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber

Entrance Doors To Flats
The Contractor executing the works as required in this clause including sub-clauses shall ensure
that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement").
In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-
clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO
Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.
(B) General
The Contractor shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated solid timber doors complete with
ironmongery to entrances of flats according to clause 15.10 including all sub-clauses under it. The
provision and installation of the half-hour fire-rated solid timber doors and ironmongery as a
complete system shall be carried out by approved fire door Specialist.
An equivalent rating of half hour fire-rated decorative solid timber doors leaf including ironmongery
shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and shall be approved by the FSSB.
The thickness of fire-rated door panel shall fit into the existing timber or mild steel rebate of door
frame profile. Other details of the door leaf panel shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.
The Contractor is not required to remove existing door frames unless otherwise indicated.
In cases, where contractor/manufacturer does not have fire door that meet the requirements of
HDB door frame designs, he has the option (in order of preference) of :
(a) Supply and install timber strip around existing door frame of entrance door. The resultant
width of the door seat rebate shall suit their fire door and shall not be more than 27mm
deep. The modified door frame shall meet PSB's requirement and shall be made good and
finished with enamel paints.
(b) Adding Fire Seal to the new door leaf for entrance door. Shop drawings of the new door
leaf incorporated with Fire Seal and shown together with the existing door frame profile shall
be submitted to PSB for assessment. If required, allow for PSB testing for the modified fire
door with complete system including ironmongery and door frame similar to existing door
frame profile.
(c) Deepening the door seat rebate of existing door frame of entrance door. The resultant
width of the door seat retate shall suit their fire door and shall not be more than 25mm deep.
The modified door frame shall meet PSB's requirement and shall be made good and
finished with enamel paints.
All works to be under the supervision and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred by him for
compliance with the requirements stipulated.
(C) Shop Drawings and Sample
Prior to installation, contractor is to provide workshop drawings that conform strictly to HDB
standards of door or equivalent to the satisfaction of the SO's Rep. The Contractor to submit PSB
test certificates and approval from the FSSD for the approval of the SO's Rep. Further, a complete
UPG06/S15.DOC(17)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-18/22

Entrance Doors To Flats (Cont'd)
(D) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Solid Core Or

Composite Doors To Switch Room, Store Room And Pump Room
(a) Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the works as required in this Clause including
sub clauses have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as
"Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as
specified in this clause including sub clauses are upgraded in order to meet the
Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary
upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the
Superintending Officer's Representative, but such approval shall not in any way affect the
Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
(b) General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, store rooms and pump room are
shown, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished solid core or
composite doors complete with timber door frames and ironmongery according to clause
15.11 including all sub-clauses under it. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system and shall have
PSB test certificate and PSB labels and approved by the FSSB.
(c) Shop Drawings
Prior to installation, Contractor is to provide workshop drawings that conform strictly to HDB
standards of door or equivalent to the satisfaction of the SO's Rep. The Contractor to
submit PSB Test Certificates and approval from the FSSB for the approval of the SO Rep.
(E) Other Incidental Works
(a) Painting Of Solid Timber Door To Flat Entrance, Timber Surface Finished Composite/Solid
Timber Doors To Switch Room, Store Rooms and Pump Rooms
Surfaces of all existing wood work shall be prepared and painted according to Section 23
“PAINTING AND DECORATING”. The finishing coat colour shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
(b) Repainting Of Existing Main Entrance Door Frame
Repaint with one coat of enamel paint to existing main entrance door frames to all units and
colour to be selected by SO Rep.
(c) Making Good At Services/Store Room
The Contractor shall reinstate the works disturbed to match the existing surrounding
(whether it is tiles, painting mural etc.) while carrying out works to these areas.
(d) Sealing Up Of The Extra Opening At The Eating Houses/Shops etc.
Where specified, sealing up of the extra door opening within 3m of the staircase and/or lift
lobby at the ground floor staircase entrance with brickworks and plaster. Painting to match
the existing wall. Reinstate the Works disturbed to match the existing surrounding.
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and informing the SO of all such openings
and await approval from the SO before proceeding to seal up such openings.
UPG06/S15.DOC(18)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-19/22

(E) Other Incidental Works (Cont'd)
(e) Sealing Up of Existing Store Room Entrances
Seal up existing storeroom entrances to 1m from top of opening with 100mm thick
brickwork. For top 1m of opening, seal up with 1 hour fire-rated demountable calcium
silicate panel in accordance with Drawings No : HB-m-97-4906.
(f) Sealing Up Of The Ventilation Openings

At The Services/Store Room
Sealing up of the ventilation openings within 3m of the staircase and/or lift lobby. Existing
timber aluminium louvred vent are to be removed and sealed up with brickwalls and plaster;
and existing P.C vent are to be sealed up with cement mortar or other equivalent.
Open up another similar size opening at a position as directed on site and install with new
fixed extruded louvres blades of 2.3mm thick (min.) complete with Aluminium Mullion/frame.
Painting to match the existing wall. Reinstate and make good the works disturbed to match
the existing surrounding.
(g) Core Samples For Testing
The Contractor should allow in the tender taking core samples from the existing door frames
for PSB testing (or other approved accredited laboratories as directed by the SO Rep).
These include all the necessary equipment, labour, transportation, etc. Make good and
replace all sections removed to match existing finishes including door frame.
Any sample taken shall be in accordance with the Code of Practice and delivered on the
same day of coring.
(h) Procedure For Fire Doors Installation In Batch Contract

(To be read together with the flow chart attached)
The procedure below serves only as a guide for contractor/manufacturer on how to obtain
PSB labels for the new fire-rated door and Test Report of the complete system (that is the
door leaf or leaves and door frame).
Ideally, selected door manufacturers should use approved fire rated door designs that have
door frames that are similar to the existing HDB door frames design. The latter door frame
density is to be verified for compliance to the required timber density. This is an important
preliminary check. The Contractor may on their own, or preferably engage PSB, conduct
density test of the existing door frame by taking timber sample of the frame. They shall
submit shop drawings of their fire-rated door leaf shown together with the existing door
frame profile for PSB's assessment and FSSB’s approval.
Where door manufacturers do not have a fire door which meets the requirements of HDB
door frame designs, they could modify the existing door frames to suit their fire door. They
could modify the dimension of the door frame by deepening the door seat rebate or adding
timber strip to increase the width of the door seat rebate. Alternatively, they may install a
fire seal on the door leaf. All these are to be done on shop drawings to be submitted to PSB
for assessment and then forwarded to FSSB for approval. The manufacturer is to check
that the density of the timber used for the door frame shall not be less than that of the
prototype tested. The adding of timber strips, deepening of door seat or adding of fire seals
are for modification made to door frame rebate for dimensional compliance with the
prototype tested.
Upon FSSD approval, PSB will issue Third Party Batch Inspection labels (see below) for
inspected batches. These labels are to be fixed next to the manufacturers label. The
latter's label should only state the manufacturers name and door ref. number. Contractors
can then proceed with installations works, modifying the existing door frames if they adopt
the option of adding timber strips.
UPG06/S15.DOC(19)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-20/22

(E) (i) Procedure For Fire Doors Installation In Batch Contract (Cont’d)
(To be read together with the flow chart attached)
Upon completion of work, PSB will carry out site inspection. This will involve dimension
verification and timber density measurement of door frames sampled at the project site. The
sample size will follow the standard sampling criteria. That is, eight (8) samples for every
batch of one hundred and fifty (150) units, thirteen samples (13) for every batch of two
hundred and eighty (280) units, or twenty samples (20) for every batch of five hundred (500)
units.
If works are done accordingly, PSB will issue Test Report certifying that the complete door
system (ie. the door leaf and door frames) is in accordance with their half-hour fire-rated
requirement for a fire door.
36mm x 20mm Label
* Third Party
Batch Inspected
PSB
HDB xxxxxx
UPG06/S15.DOC(20)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-21/22
FLOW CHART FOR THE PROPOSED INSPECTION

OF FIRE-RATED DOORS
Step 1 HDB nominate fire door manufacturer.
Manufacturer to approach PSB for assessment on modification of existing door frames to

Step 2
FSSB approved prototype design.
Step 3 Manufacturer obtains FSSD approval on the assessment report.
Step 4 Manufacturer liaises with PSB for door leaf components inspection.
PSB conduct batch inspection and stamp on components, upon their compliance with the
Step 5
requirements.
Step 6 Manufacturer complete assembly of components and liaise with PSB for door panel labelling.
PSB conduct batch inspection and label the door panels upon their compliance with the
Step 7
requirements.
Note : The Label & the Forms will be released

later with the test report on door frames
inspection.
Manufacturer modifies existing door frames to FSSB approved design and installs door
Step 8
panels.
Step 9 Manufacturer liaise with PSB for verification of door frames after completed door set had been
installed.
PSB conduct a batch inspection on door frames to check on modification done according to
FSSD approved design. Samples of timber are to be cut from the door frames for density
Step 10
measurements in the laboratory. The number of pieces of timber to be cut will be according to
the batch inspection sampling plan.
PSB issue test report of the door frame's inspection upon their compliance with requirements.
Step 11
The Label & Forms for door panels will also be attached to this report.
Manufacturer submits PSB test report for door frames, together with Label & Forms for the
Step 12
door panels to HDB.
UPG06/S15.DOC(21)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 15-22/22
15.26 RESERVED
15.27 RESERVED
15.28 DOORS EXPOSED TO WEATHERING
The Contractor shall install the doors exposed to weathering in accordance with sub-clauses 15.9(d) and
15.9(e).
SECTION 16/...
UPG06/S15.DOC(22)
lkk(181205)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-1/6
SECTION 16
16.0 IRONMONGERY
16.1 GENERAL
Where shown in the drawings, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in
accordance with the requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it,
subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide
to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
16.2 FIXING
All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunk to form a sound
connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered in, the
whole fixture shall be taken down and refixed in accordance with the specifications at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses.
16.3 GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL
16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, ETC
Unless Specified otherwise the following is the Schedule of Ironmongery for flats and services rooms :
(A) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber

Doors To Entrances Of Flats
Refer to Clause 15.10 " Half-Hour Fire-Rated Solid Timber Doors To Entrances Of Flats" including
all subclauses under it.
(B) Solid Timber Entrance Doors to Flats

(For Non Fire-Rated Doors)
Single Leaf Doors
The ironmongery items for single leaf non fire-rated decorative solid timber entrance doors to flats
shall be :
(i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or “BLIY”-

N27-FIR-US5 ; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin
single cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and inside. No thumb turn on the
inside for door next to the window to prevent hand reaching through the window
to thumb turn. If the hand cannot reach the lock from the outside through the
window, the thumb turn can be installed.) solid brass lever handles on plates on
both sides. The finishes for the deadlock, grip handle and lever handle shall be
antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear
the metal gate lockset.
(iii) 1 no. 90mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
(iv) 1 no. 240mm x 27mm wide brass barrel bolt.
LUP09/S16.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-2/6
16.4 (B) Decorative Solid Timber Entrance Doors to Flats

(For Non Fire-Rated Doors) (Cont'd)
Single Leaf Doors (Cont'd)
(v) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer :

(d) other approved.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall not be
obstructed by entrance grille gate.
(vii) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder :

(a) "YTL" DH-027; or
(b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d) “Forte” H6DH75ES
(e) other approved.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably
be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder
shall be in antique brass finish.
Double Leaf Doors
The ironmongery items for double leaf non fire-rated decorative solid timber entrance doors to flats
shall be :
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. “Posse” H61L AB or “Lucky” CS-410-MA-US5; or other approved mortice lever
handle lockset with 5-pin single cylinder deadlock (key on the outside and thumb
turn on the inside) solid brass lever handle. The finishes for the deadlock, lever
handle shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a
manner to clear the metal gate lockset.
(iii) 2 no. Rebated parts.
(iv) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide brass level action flush bolt in satin finish.
(v) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide brass level action flush bolt in satin finish.
(vi) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer :

(f) other approved.
The position shall be as shown in the Drawings but ensure that door viewer shall
not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate.
(vii) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder :

(a) "YTL" DH-027; or
(b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d) “Forte” H6DH75ES
(e) or other approved.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably
be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder
shall be in antique brass finish.
LUP09/S16.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-3/6
16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, ETC (CONT'D)
(C) Reserved
(D) Reserved
(E) Reserved
(F) Reserved
(G) Reserved
(H) Reserved
(J) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surfaced Finished Composite Doors

To Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room,
Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area, MDF Room, Telecoms Equipment
Room And Staircase Access To Main Roof
Refer to Clause 15.11 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To Switch
Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area And
Staircase Access To Main Roof" including all subclauses under it.
(K) Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To Electrical Switch Room And Pump Room,
Where indicated, for doors (non-fire rated) to electrical switch rooms, pump rooms, store rooms
and bulky refuse areas, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule :
(a) Double Leaf
For double leaf :
(i) 4 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness
1.8mm ±0.2mm for each door leaf.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2
PL padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master
key; or other approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or
other approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(v) 1 no. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(vi) 1 no. "Nikon 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(b) Single Leaf
For single leaf :
1.8mm ±0.2mm.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" PL230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL
padlock under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key;
or other approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
LUP09/S16.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-4/6
16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, ETC (CONT'D)
(L) Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated)
For doors (non-fire rated) to MDF rooms and Telecoms equipment rooms, provide and fix :
(a) Double Leaf
For double leaf :
(ii) 2 nos. 240mm x 27mm width grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot bolt.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single
cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/
214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-
US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being
operated by PBTS master key.
(iv) 2 nos. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
(b) Single Leaf
1.8mm ± 0.2mm.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781K single
cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/
214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-
US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being
operated by PBTS master key.
(iii) 2 nos. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment
Room for the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.
(M) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished

Composite Doors To Service Ducts
Refer to Clause 15.12 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To
Service Ducts".
(N) Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Service Duct For Flats
Where indicated, for non-fire rated doors to service duct for flats, provide and fix all ironmongery in
accordance with the following :
(a) Single Leaf
For single leaf :
1.8mm ±0.2mm.
(ii) 1 no. "Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or

other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup
handle on both sides.
LUP09/S16.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-5/6
16.4 (N) Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Service Duct For Flats (Cont’d)
(b) Double Leaf
(ii) 1 no. "Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or

other approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup
handle on both sides.
(iii) 1 no. Brass rebated parts.
(iv) 1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(v) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(O) Reserved
(P) Access Trap Door To Roof
For each door leaf of access trap doors to roofs :
(i) 1 no. Stout hasp and staple
(ii) 1 no. Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.
(Q) Reserved
(R) Reserved
(S) Reserved
(T) Reserved
(U) Reserved
(V) Louvred Door To Staircase Access To Main Roof
For each door leaf of louvred doors to staircase accesses to main roofs :
(i) 3 nos. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel (Grade 304) butt hinges, thickness
1.7mm ±0.2mm
(ii) 1 no. Passage Knob Latchset :

(a) “Accord” 182; or
(b) "Goal" US 1E; or
(c) "Lucky" Model 1082; or
(d) "Tesa" 2505CM; or
(e) "Posse" 182-SS; or other approved.
(W) Escape Door At Consumer Switch Room

(Where the Length of Switchroom Exceeds 6.5m)
Where escape door at the consumer switchroom is shown in the Drawings, provide and fix the
ironmongery as follows :
For each door leaf :
(i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel grade 304 butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. "Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of
aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots and
cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.
LUP09/S16.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 16-6/6
16.4 (X) Ironmongery For Doors To Lift Machine Room
Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule:
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ± 0.2mm.
(ii) 1no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or YTL-N28-FIR-AT-US32D or “BLIY” N-27-FIR US32D

or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on
rose or on back plate on both sides. It shall comply with CP2:2000. The door shall be
openable from the outside only by the use of a key and shall not require a key to
open it from within the machine room.
(iii) 1no. "Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or
"Accord" 93 or "YTL" 800 or "Union" or other approved slim line door closer with
cushioned back checking action.
16.5 KEYS FOR LOCKSETS
Unless otherwise specified, 3 sets of keys shall be provided for all locksets provided and installed. These
keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
16.6 LOCKSETS TO PUMP ROOM, STORE ROOM (FIRST STOREY),

ELECTRICAL SWITCH ROOM, LIFT MOTOR ROOM, STAIRCASE
AND ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
The locksets to pump rooms, electrical switch rooms, lift motor rooms and staircase accesses to main
roofs shall be provided under the master key and key-aliked system.
16.7 MASTER KEY
Padlocks and locks provided to the doors of all rooms which the PUB and/or PowerGrid and/or SPSL
need access into shall be under one of the following master key series :
(a) "Abloy" - MK911047; or
(b) "Union" - G1HBG; or
(c) "Yale" - MK48; or other approved
SECTION 17/...
LUP09/S16.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-1/7
SECTION 17
17.0 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Grade 43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and BS EN 10210 (Part 1) shall be used for
all structural members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of
all rolled shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs,
welds and electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform to the
requirements of the latest BS 5950 or other relevant British and/or Singapore Standards. Unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used.
All materials used shall be new, of best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep. Defective,
substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.
17.2 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelworks. Provide the SO
Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that each
of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder
Procedures covered in BS 4871 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test
within the preceding 12-month period.
If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for any
welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion of the SO Rep,
the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Re-certification of
the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed the required test.
The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the
Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected.
Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be
permanently removed from the work.
17.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit shop drawings duly prepared by a Professional Engineer and approved by the SO Rep. Such
approval, however, shall not release the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing accurate details and
satisfactory work in accordance with the drawings.
The shop drawings shall provide all shop and erection details including cuts, connections, holes and welds
in structural steel. The drawings shall show the size, length and type of each member and weld, details
for accessories, temporary bracing, miscellaneous structural steelworks, details of fabrication, construction
and method of assembly.
Once approved, the structural steelwork shall be fabricated strictly in accordance with the shop drawings.
17.4 FABRICATION
Check all dimensions in the drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the SO
Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the drawings with sound
workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends
finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint.
LUP09/S17.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-2/7
17.4 FABRICATION (CONT'D)
Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and
shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required.
Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in
accordance with the drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation shall
be removed.
Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even
and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with
the flanges.
Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing
and close contact between assembled members.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds
shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles to
the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of burrs or
rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than 1.5mm and
shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned bolt holes
shall be rejected.
17.5 STEELWORK DELIVERED TO SITE
Members delivered to site shall be straight, free from warping, twisting, distortion and accidental damages.
Defective and substandard members shall be rejected and removed from site.
All parts of steelwork shall be distinctly marked according to the marking as shown in the drawings.
Care shall be taken at all times in unloading, handling, stacking and storing of steelwork to avoid bending,
twisting or otherwise distorting the steel members.
17.6 ERECTION PROCEDURE
The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep.
The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety of
structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during erection.
17.7 FIELD INSTALLATION
Field installation shall be in accordance with the drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to
possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After
assembly, the various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and
adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the drawings. Fastening of splices of
compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into close
contact.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are
assembled and re-primed where exposed.
Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner
as to distort or damage the metal.
LUP09/S17.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-3/7
17.7 FIELD INSTALLATION (CONT'D)
Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure of
concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will be strictly prohibited under any
circumstance.
17.8 ERECTION
Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything
necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the
work and the workers.
Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and sufficiently
bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision for all
erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation.
Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable
and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability.
No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or a
major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and
Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the drawings as soon
as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the existing
steelwork in any way.
Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection
purposes. The HDB's Safety Unit shall be consulted on the safety features of the platform.
Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon
removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and smoothened
by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of moisture to the
inside of the members.
Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with
approved priming paint.
Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed
and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.
17.9 STANCHION BASES
Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or
footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing
contact on support in accordance with the drawings.
Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed
and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before
concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or
tampered with.
Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or shims
to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned and the
anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using approved
type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed.
Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush with
edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.
LUP09/S17.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-4/7
17.10 BOLTING
All structural bolts as shown in the drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform with
the following British Standards :
Type of Bolt Abbreviations Standards

Black Bolt Black BS 4190
High Strength Bolt HS BS 3692
High Strength Friction Grip Bolt HSFG BS 4604
Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used.
All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, dust,
grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members.
All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when tightened
up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If after
tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded.
Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to
compensate for lack of parallelism.
Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards.
Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any
interposed compressible material.
17.11 WELDING
Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS 5135 and by qualified welders to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or specified.
Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS 639 and shall be kept in a dry store in unbroken
packets.
Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS 5135 and
shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would prevent
proper welding or produce objectional fumes while welding is being done.
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the drawings
and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size equal
to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around the
member.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat thickness
of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the drawings and all weld terminating at the ends or
sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice
the size of the weld.
Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall
be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness of
the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding.
Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound
thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding layers
shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are placed.
Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent surface.
Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing parts
of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage stresses
and needless distortion.
LUP09/S17.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-5/7
17.12 PAINTING
All steel area to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, wire-brushed, free from dust, rust and
scale and shall be primed with a coat of approved lead-and-chromate-free primer or zinc chromate of
approved quality before erection.
All galvanised steel area to be painted shall first be given one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer, then
primed with one coat of lead-and-chromate-free primer of approved quality before erection.
Where surface treatment is specified in the Drawings, blast clean the surface to BS4232, application of
one coat of zinc-rich epoxy primer to the Manufacturer's specification within 4 hours of blast cleaning and
two coats of Zinc Phosphate Priming Paint, one coat in Workshop and one coat on site, to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep. Submit details of surface treatment to the SO Rep at least two weeks before blast
cleaning.
Steel members to be encased in concrete, connecting surfaces using HSFG Bolts and areas to be welded
shall be free from scale, dust, grease and shall not be painted.
If the steelworks are to be painted, after completion of erection, the steelwork shall be painted with at least
one undercoat of enamel paint and one finishing coat of enamel paint and to the colours approved by the
SO Rep.
17.13 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS
Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip
galvanised to SS 117. The Contractor shall obtain galvanising treatment service for structural steel
members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers Listed in HDB Materials List .
The coating weight of zinc shall confirm with Table 1 of SS 117. For steel over 5mm thick, the minimum
average coating mass shall be 500g per m2 and the minimum coating mass shall be 450g per m2. For
steel between 1mm and 5mm thick, the coating shall be pro-rated from Table 1.
The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel
member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be
rejected.
Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and
components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas
of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good
by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of 85% zinc dust,
expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised steel
member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating
weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with SS 117. Certificates of such tests shall
be submitted to the SO Rep.
All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory
under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
17.14 INSPECTION & TESTING
All structural steelworks and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop and
field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of the
welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject steel
materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the specifications. The acceptance of the SO
Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defects are discovered.
The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything necessary
for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses and deflection,
if required.
LUP09/S17.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-6/7
17.14 INSPECTION & TESTING (CONT’D)
Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified
work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor
workmanship and defective work.
The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British standards :
Type of Test Standard
Magnetic particle flaw detection test BS 6072
Penetrant flaw detection test BS 6443
Ultrasonic examinations BS 3923
Radiographic examinations BS 2600, BS2910
All required tests of structural steelworks and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory
under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
17.15 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
Where the Contractor is required to design for the structural steel Works, the contractor shall engage a
Professional Engineer (PE) to design and supervise such Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that his PE engaged consider and comply with the plan submission and
minimum design requirements.
17.15.1 Plan Submission
The contractor shall ensure his PE comply with the following :
(a) submit a complete design calculations and structural plans of his PE to HDB, Technical
Management (C&S) Unit for clearance.
(b) apply the permit to carry out Works prior to commencement of the affected Works.
(c) Upon completion of the building work, submit a set of as-built tracing and digital in pdf or other
approved format.
17.15.2 Technical Requirements
Should any external claddings/features inclusive of those at and above roof level be supported by the
main building structures, the submission shall be accompanied with a letter from the relevant Qualified
Person (QP) of the main building structures that certify adequacy of the the building structures to support
external claddings/features designed by the contractor's PE.
In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all steel works shall
meet the following minimum requirements :
(a) the gauge thickness of purlins shall not be less than 3mm.
(b) the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 4mm for steel structures at lower than 4 -storey.
(c) the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 6mm or greater for steel structures at 4-strorey and
higher.
LUP09/S17.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 17-7/7
17.15.2 Technical Requirements (Cont’d)
(d) Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated or of
stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice.
(e) Use open steel section, wherever possible, to facilitate direct connection of cladding, roofing sheet
and other architectural panels onto this steel section.
(f) Should the steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it for connection of
cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels. Necessary steel connecting plates or cleat
angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for securing the cladding, roofing
sheet and other metal panels.
SECTION 18/...
LUP09/S17.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-1/21
SECTION 18
18.0 METALWORK
18.1 GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL
Unless as specified otherwise, the grade of stainless steel shall be Grade 304.
18.2 BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM
Unless specified otherwise all aluminium shall be bronze anodised and the anodic coating shall be
minimum 15 microns.
18.3 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING
18.3.1 General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
18.3.2 Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings
to ensure compliance with SS212: 2007.
18.3.3 Material
(a) Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS 212:2007.
(b) Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the
fabrication of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088.
All screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel steel hinges), bolts and other accessories
which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel
screws shall be precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the Drawing.
LUP09/S18.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-2/21
18.3.3 Material (Cont'd)
(c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers
Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides and
stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and exposed parts shall be in black colour or
bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
(d) Joints & Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of PVC
gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212 : 2007 .
Gaskets shall be neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).
(e) Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them from
jumping track and shall be in black colour or bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of safety
lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material (2
no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function. The
dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall comply with SS 212:
2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in SS 212 : 2007.
(f) Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).
(g) Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or 316,
aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung
windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. Friction hinges shall be of
stainless steel type 304 minimum. All crescent locks and handles shall be finished in black or other
approved matching colour.
(i) Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock
The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements :
(a) Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm;
(b) Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.
(ii) Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles
The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 thereof shall
comply with the following requirements :
(a) Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35N was removed.
Requirement : pull-in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2mm.
(b) Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position.
Requirement : The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 NM.
LUP09/S18.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-3/21
18.3.3 Material (Cont'd)
(g) Hardware (Con’d)
(iii) Requirements of improved stainless steel friction stays (with four screws)
The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements :
Test Requirements
Resistant to 300N for 5 second Passed
obstructed stay
track Destruction Test Arm beng at 40 kg (392N) minimum
Strength of 200N for 5 second Passed

maximum Stay track permanent deformed at 65 kg
opening stop Destruction Test
(638N) minimum
1000N for 1 min Passed
Resistance to Destruction Test Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N) minimum
accidental
loading Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N)
minimum
Endurance of 50,000 cycles Passed (no adjustment throughout the test)
Fastener 100,000 cycles Passed (no adjustment throughout the test)
18.3.4 Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.
(b) Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.3.5 Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage
All bronze anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The materials to be
used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.3.6 Storage And Protection
Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the
Employer.
LUP09/S18.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-4/21
18.3.7 Installation
(a) Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections
The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and top
hung shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
(b) Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
Window frames shall be fabricated to tolerances as shown below :
1 Length +/- 1.5 mm

2 Straightness +/- 1.5 mm
3 Accuracy of angles +/- 2o
4 Accuracy of sides +/- 1 mm
5 Squareness (Diagonals D1-D2) +/- 4 mm
For all windows/vents, stainless steel impact anchors used shall be oustenitic grade A1 and comply
with BS 6105, with a polyamide (or equivalent material) sleeve to prevent contact between
stainless steel and aluminium material. Details of embedment depths, spacings and edge
distances of bolts, designed by Contractor’s Professional Engineer and clearly shown in the
construction drawings shall be approved by the SO Rep
(c) Non-Shrink Grout
The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to installation of window
frame. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of
window frame.
The gap surround between the outer window frame and existing concrete structure shall be
completely filled with approved non-shrink grout in one operation during installation of window
frame. Immediately after the completion of the window installation, a neatly formed groove of 10
mm deep by 10 mm wide shall be provided adjacent to the window frame to allow for subsequent
application of approved waterproof sealant.
(d) Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved waterproof sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed
windows as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to
a neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the
manufacturer's guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers listed in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion. The application of waterproof sealant shall be carried out
after the non-shrink grout infill has significantly hardened and not within 24 hours of the window
installation
LUP09/S18.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-5/21
18.3.8 Glazing
(a) Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window, top hung and casement window shall be fixed to the
aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glass shall
bear the label of its manufacturer and shall be relatively distortion-free.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm ±0.2mm green tinted float glass with a
shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm
±0.2 mm clear float glass.
Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm ±0.2mm.
All glazing panel shall meet dimensional tolerances as shown below :
1 Height +/- 2 mm
2 Width +/- 2 mm
3 Straightness of edge +/- 1 mm
(b) Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
(c) Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.
(d) Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the SO Rep and at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
(e) Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored
to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the edges.
(f) Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.
18.4 RESERVED
18.5 RESERVED
18.6 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS
Where specified, provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium swing doors complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
18.6.1 Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.6.2 Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following :
(a) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987
(b) Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be 9
LUP09/S18.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-6/21
18.6.3 Fastenings And Fixings
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or mild
steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS268-1983. All
screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.
18.6.4 Hardware
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they shall
be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable without
removing the outer frame from the structure.
18.6.5 Joint Sealing Materials
Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials that
will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.
18.6.6 Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved PVC or pile strip.
18.6.7 Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952 shall
be 6mm ±0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6mm ±0.3mm
thick clear float glass.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing materials.
18.6.8 Workshop Drawings
Provide two (2) complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
18.6.9 Construction And Installation
The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall provide
instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.
18.6.10 Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage
All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and
significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The material to be
used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.7 RESERVED
18.8 RESERVED
LUP09/S18.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-7/21
18.9 SAFETY FEATURE TO PREVENT FALLING WINDOW LEAF

FOR ALUMINIUM CASEMENT AND TOP HUNG WINDOW
The Contractor shall incorporate the safety features (patent application no. 9905170-8) to all the new
aluminium casement and top hung windows to be in the Works. The safety features shall ensure that the
window leaf will not be detached from the outer frame or friction stay accidentally even if all the fasteners
at the friction stay fail. The safety feature shall include:
I (a) Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip
onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that
allowed them to detached from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of windows leaves.
(b) Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the
friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay hold onto the rails in the event of failure of the
fasteners.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows
incorporating the details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
fabricate samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety
features to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented design.
Copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the vendor shall be submitted to
the SO Rep together with the shop drawings. The Contractor is deemed to include the cost of the safety
features and the royalty to be paid under the licensing agreement in the Contract Sum.
18.10 RESERVED
18.11 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME

AND ALUMINIUM INSPECTION COVER
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and
aluminium inspection cover to the refuse chute on the roof top in accordance with the details inclusive with
the relevant components.
The aluminium cover shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill
with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and
1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The rockwool insulation material shall be of density 150 kg per m3 (±10% tolerance) and thickness of
38mm rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m2. The noise reduction coefficient
shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more
than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O.
When required, complete sample of inspection cover shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO
Rep. All inspection cover and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's
instructions and recommendations.
LUP09/S18.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-8/21
18.12 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM LOUVRED VENTS
Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary
components to pump room and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium louvred blades
shall be of 2.3mm thick minimum and shall be of aluminium alloys to BS 1470 or ASTM B209. The
aluminium vent including the aluminium louvred blades shall be anodised to a bronze finish and the anodic
coating shall be 25 microns.
18.13 LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS
18.13.1 THREE-WAY NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM

LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS
Supply and fix three-way natural anodised aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the Drawings.
These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance
shall be ±10%. The anodic coating shall be not less than 25 microns for the extruded aluminium section
and not less than 15 microns for the aluminium sheets.
Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be
provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two
letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for “For Returned Mail Only”. The location of the
“For Returned Mail Only” letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the
location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted
on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block
number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase "For
Returned Mail Only" shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and
on the upturn as shown in the Drawings.
Submit complete set of workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep.
The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the
numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three
keys shall be provided for each individual letter box.
The two master doors shall be provided with different key-aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep.
Three master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be
handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for
Singapore Post shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on
Substantial Completion of the Works.
18.13.2 THREE-WAY POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM

LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS
18.13.2.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, supply and fix three-way powder coated aluminium letter boxes to locations as
shown in the Drawings. These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted at the following websites: kmo.eptc.com.sg or hdbuilders.com and/or
HDB Materials List.
The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance shall
be ± 10%.
Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall be
provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to the two
letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for “For Returned Mail Only”. The location of the
“For Returned Mail Only” letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S18.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-9/21
18.13.2.1 General (Cont'd)
The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the
location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and painted
on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The actual block
number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The phrase “For
Returned Mail Only” shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box aluminium door and on
the upturn as shown in the Drawings.
The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with the
numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. The
envelopes for the keys shall be obtained from the Employer. Three keys shall be provided for each
individual letter box.
The two master doors shall be provided with different key aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep. Three
master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over
to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for Singapore Post shall
be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post on Substantial
Completion of the Works.
18.13.2.2 Workshop Drawings
Submit complete set of workshop drawings and colour range for the approval of the SO Rep.
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating
The aluminium shall be finished with polyester powder coating. The polyester powder coating shall be
super-durable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other
approved. The powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and
subclause. Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98
"Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by approved
applicator. The powder and powder coating applicator shall be certified under PSB Product Listing
Scheme Class 1A.
(A) General Requirements
(i) Surfaces
Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections
in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance of ten (10) feet
(120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90 degrees to the surface.
(ii) Thickness
The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall be
60µm – 100µm.
(iii) Minor Scratches And Blemishes
Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer's
recommended product or system. Such repair shall match the original finish when tested as
outlined in the subclause "Dry Adhesion" specified hereunder. After application, allow the
repair coating to dry for at least 72 hours at 65-80 degrees F before conducting the film
adhesion test. The size and number of touch-up repairs shall be kept to a minimum.
(B) Test Specimens
Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production
coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument
measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the
test laboratory.
LUP09/S18.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-10/21
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating (Cont'd)
(C) Metal Preparation And Pre-Treatment
A multi-stage cleaning and pre-treatment system shall be required to remove organic and inorganic
surface soils, remove residual oxides, and to apply a chemical conversion coating to which organic
coatings will firmly adhere.
The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminium extrusions and panelling
shall conform with ASTM D 1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7.
The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 30 mg. per sq. ft. on
the exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B 449, Section 6, Class 1. Processing shall conform
with that specified in ASTM B 449, Section 5.
(D) Colour Uniformity
Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved
source and the applicator.
(E) Specular Gloss
Gloss values shall be within ±5 units of the manufacturer's specification.
The Standard gloss range reference values are :
Gloss Colours Specular Gloss Value

High 80 - Over
Medium 20 - 79
Low 19 or less
(F) Dry Film Hardness
No rupture of film per ASTM D 3363.
(G) Film Adhesion
(i) Dry Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the test specimen.
(ii) Wet Adhesion
anywhere on the wet test specimen.
(iii) Boiling Water Adhesion
anywhere on the wet test specimen.
(H) Impact Resistance
No removal of film to substrate.
(I) Abrasion Resistance
Using the failing sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating
shall be 40 minimum.
LUP09/S18.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-11/21
18.13.2.3 Polyester Powder Coating (Cont'd)
(J) Chemical Resistance
(i) Muriatic Acid Resistance (15 Minute Spot Test)
No blistering and no visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.
(ii) Mortar Resistance (24 Hour Pat Test)
Mortar shall dislodge easily from the painted surface, and any residue shall be removable
with a damp cloth. Any lime residue should be easily removed with the 10% muriatic acid
solution described in the Clause "Muriatic Acid Resistance" of AAMA 2604-98. There
shall be no loss of film adhesion or visual change in appearance when examined by the
unaided eye.
(iii) Nitric Acid Resistance
Not more than 5 Delta E Units(Hunter) of colour change, calculated in accordance with
ASTM D 2244, when comparing measurements on the acid-exposed painted surface and
the unexposed surface.
(iv) Detergent Resistance
No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change
in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.
K) Corrosion Resistance
(i) Humidity Resistance (For 3,000 Hours At 100 Degrees F And

100% RH With Cabinet Operated In Accordance With
ASTM D 2247 or ASTM D 4585)
Formation of blisters not to exceed "Few" blisters Size No. 8, as shown in Figure 4, ASTM
D 714.
(ii) Salt Spray Resistance(3,000 Hours According To ASTM B 117

Using 5% salt solution)
Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges, and a minimum blister rating of 8 within the
test specimen field.
(L) Weathering
The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk
resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep
shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected.
(i) Test Site And Duration
Test sites for on-fence testing are acceptable as follows : Florida exposure South of
latitude 27 degrees North at a 45 degree angle facing South for five years.
(ii) Colour Retention
Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with

ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test
Site and Duration".
(iii) Chalk Resistance
Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659
after test site exposure.
LUP09/S18.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-12/21
18.13.2.3 (L) Weathering (Cont'd)
(iv) Gloss Retention
Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test.
(v) Resistance To Erosion
Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total
film.
(M) QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation)
(i) Gloss Retention
70 - 100%
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
(N) QUV B313 (336 Hours - 8 Hours UV At 60 Degrees C,

4 Hours Condensation At 50 Degrees C)
(i) Gloss Retention
80 - 100 %
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
18.13.2.4 Appearance
The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal. It
shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other
unacceptable flaws.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
18.13.2.5 Colour
The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek
approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.
18.13.2.6 Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage
All powder coated aluminium letter boxes shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and
significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete
letter boxes installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and
plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.13.2.7 Storage And Protection
Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of letterboxes at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.
LUP09/S18.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-13/21
18.14 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME

AND ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO MAIN ROOF
Where shown, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium trap door
to main roof in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium trap door shall
complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as
indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy
lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m3 (±10% tolerance) and its thickness
shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m2. The
noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture
resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire
hazard indices at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, m.s. guides and approved padlock,
hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means
of fixing all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions
and recommendations.
18.15 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND

ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO ROOF OF BOOSTER PUMP ROOM
Where specified, the aluminium trap door shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C"
channel frame and infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded
aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25
microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m3 (±10% tolerance) and its thickness
shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand working load of 500 kg per m2. The
noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture
resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire
hazard indices at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, m.s. guides and approved padlock,
hasps and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means
of fixing all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/ Supplier's instructions
and recommendations.
18.16 RESERVED
18.17 RESERVED
18.18 RESERVED
18.19 STAINLESS STEEL RAILING TO PARAPETS
All stainless steel railing to parapets of private and access balconies and staircase landings shall be
constructed as shown in the Drawings. Stainless steel railing shall be hollow section of dimensions and
thickness as shown in the Drawings. The tolerance for the dimensions and thickness shall be ±0.5%
and ±10% respectively. All stainless steel railing shall be fixed securely into the structure as detailed in
the Drawings. The dimensions and thickness of flat support shall be as shown in the Drawings.
All joints shall be fully welded to neat and smooth finish. The railing shall be well protected against
contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other undesirable materials during
construction. The completed railing shall be clean and free from rust and stain.
18.20 RESERVED
18.21 RESERVED
LUP09/S18.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-14/21
18.22 STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG
18.22.1 General
Where existing hooks have to be removed in the course of upgrading works, the contractor must reinstate
the hooks at the former location or locate another suitable position as indicated in the drawings or SO Rep
will confirm the location. Provide and install new stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of
access balconies, private balconies and living rooms of apartment blocks as shown below or any other
locations as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall
be of grade 304 stainless steel.
Description Eye-Anchors Location to be installed

(1) Flats along access balcony 1 pair/unit Access balcony parapet/coping
(2) Flats with private balcony 1 pair/unit Private balcony parapet/coping
(3) Flats not along access balcony and 1 pair/unit Living room window wall
without private balcony (eg. corridor
end, stairs, etc)
(4) Executive Maisonette/Apartment 1 pair/unit Private balcony parapet/coping
18.22.2 Quality of Materials
The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other
approved.
18.22.3 Dimensional Requirements
Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements :
Thickness of stainless steel = 5mm diameter ±0.5mm

Internal diameter of eye = 15mm ±1mm
Length of screw = 30mm ±2mm
Length of screw shank = 32mm ±2mm
Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the
Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations.
LUP09/S18.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-15/21
18.22.4 Samples and Verification of Positions for Fixing
Samples of eyes and anchors shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the carrying out of
the work. Before drilling is carried out, verify with the SO Rep and obtain his approval on the locations
and positions for the installation of eye-anchors.
Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are not
damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other defects. The Contractor shall make good,
repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified in an approved method.
Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for
making good the defective work.
After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall
strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations.
All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together
with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions. Ensure
that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The completed
fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials.
The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following or other approved :
(a) Araldite Injection System IS 650 or CI xh 160AB

(b) SBD EPIK;
(c) Concretin IHL;
(d) Conbextra EPLV;
(e) Chemi-EPIS;
(f) Sho-bond BICS;
(g) Febset Grout No. 6 or Non-Flow;
(h) or other approved.
18.23 RESERVED
18.24 METAL GRILLE GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES
Where specified, provide and fix metal grille gates to entrance doors of flats.
The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The
gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit entrance door frames and be obtained from approved
manufacturers. The colour of the gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The gates shall be fabricated by
welding or non-welding method. All joints shall be neat and finished smooth.
The gates shall have leaf opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The
particular type of the entrance grille gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as
Lockset required shall be "Union" 2295; or other approved with bronze anodised aluminium flush handle
on both sides.
18.25 *WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES

(*Where specified in the Contract)
Provide and fix wrought iron steel gates to all entrance doors of flats.
The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings. The
gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit the entrance door frames and be obtained from approved
manufacturers. All welding and joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf
opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of wrought iron
steel gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. All rivets
shall be finished with matching colour to the gate.
Provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the Site
for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
LUP09/S18.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-16/21
18.25 *WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES (CONT’D)

(*Where specified in the Contract)
Preparation
All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron.
Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt.
Painting
The Contractor shall seek the SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate.
The Contractor shall submit a range of colours for the SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of the
gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be:
(i) One coat of CED primer;

(ii) One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with special effects and antique appearance;
(iii) One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.
18.26 RESERVED
18.27 RESERVED
18.28 CAT LADDER TO MAIN ROOF
Where specified, provide and fix to every access door to roof, aluminium retractable cat ladders and
aluminium handrails, aluminium cage enclosures and the hand holds above roof slabs as detailed in the
Drawings. Hollow blocks to which aluminium rungs are anchored shall be filled solid with cement mortar.
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix barricade to the front of lift motor room entrance which is
close to the roof edge.
18.29 PROFILED STEEL ROOFING SHEETS
Where shown, the profiled steel roofing sheets shall be as specified in Section 13 "ROOFING".
18.30 MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME
18.30.1 Material Requirements
Where specified, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a
tolerance of ±1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured
by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number and
dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild steel
bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as shown in
the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel holdfast with
CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be welded to the
partition reinforcement bar.
LUP09/S18.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-17/21
18.30.1 Material Requirements (Cont’d)
Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/
plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below :
Test Results
Adhesion Test
5B
ASTM D 3359-02
Scratch Resistance Test
The coating shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g
SS5:Part F2:03
Pencil Hardness Test
2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film
ASTM 3363-00
Dry Film Thickness (measured by Elcometer 300
Coating Thickness Gauge) 20 microns ±5 microns
SS5:Part B1:03 Method No. 6
Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray Tested for a period of 1,000 hours:

SS5:Part G1:03 - less than 0.1% rusting
- blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface
Resistance to Humidity under Condensation Tested for a period of 1,000 hours:

Condition (Continuous condensation) - less than 0.03% rusting
SS5:Part G6:03 - blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface
18.30.2 Installation Requirements
The Contractor shall install the door frames to good verticality within the tolerance of 3mm. Measurement
of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the installation of
the door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be rejected.
The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under
one operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for verticality and proper bracing. It is
preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.
18.31 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS TO STAIRCASE
Where specified, provide and installed galvanised steel railings as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised
steel hollow section handrails, balusters, hollow section supports and flat bottom rails shall be to the
dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into
structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a
smooth finish. Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one
finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.32 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL GRATINGS
All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with SS
117 or BS 729 Part 1. Every batches of galvanised gratings delivered to Site shall be accompanied by a
certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm/company at which they are galvanised. The term
"gratings" used in this clause shall be deemed to include the frames and their miscellaneous components.
Submit details of the galvanising treatment to the SO Rep for approval.
Thoroughly remove all welding slags from the gratings prior to galvanising them. Any welding slags found
remaining on galvanised gratings shall be rejected. Such rejected galvanised gratings shall be removed
from the Site immediately.
The galvanised gratings shall be tested for the zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a PSB
accredited laboratory using the magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices.
Send all selected gratings for testing within one week of their delivery to the Site before their installation.
2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three number of gratings
shall be selected for testing. The zinc mass coating to be tested shall be carried out at regular points on
the surfaces of the steel angles and flats. The total no. of points tested for each grating shall be not less
than 32. The results of the test at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average
zinc coating weight of that grating.
LUP09/S18.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-18/21
18.32 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL GRATINGS (CONT’D)
The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass :
Thickness Of Steel Average Coating Mass Minimum Permissible Value

( g per m2 ) ( g per m2 )
5mm thick and over 610 580
Under 5mm, but not less than 2mm 410 390
Under 2mm 350 330
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows :
(a) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a
charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the average
coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified.
(b) The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to achieve
the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep shall
exercise his right under clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be
accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
18.33 METAL GRILLE TO COURTYARD, STAIRCASE AND END ACCESS BALCONY
Where specified, provide and fix metal grille to courtyard (1st storey dwelling unit), to match with the front
metal grille gate and for staircase and end access balcony to the size and profile all as shown in the
Drawings.
18.34 RESERVED
18.35 RESERVED
18.36 DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARDS AND STOREY INDICATOR PLATES
Where specified, provide and fix directional signboards and storey indicator plates to sizes and at
locations as shown in the Drawings. The directional signboards and storey indicator plates shall be made
of 2mm thick aluminium alloy sheets or plates conforming to BS EN 485, 515, 573 or ASTM B209 and
finished with 15 microns thick anodic coating. The fixing of these items shall be carried out with stainless
steel screws with nylon plugs. Unless otherwise specified, the letterings and numberings shall be
engraved and painted in black.
18.37 RESERVED
18.38 CONTRACT SIGNBOARD
Where specified, provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard
shall not be smaller than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the
Drawings shall serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of
the proposed contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract
signboard at the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within
one month from the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of
the SO Rep.
18.39 RESERVED
18.40 BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM OR POWDER

COATED ALUMINIUM HOUSE NUMBER FOR FLAT
Provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated aluminium house number to each and every
unit of flats. The house number shall be fixed on to steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided
adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching the mild
steel metal gate. The fixing of house number plate to the mild steel gate shall be by heavy duty high bond
double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed method. The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15
microns minimum. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S18.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-19/21
18.41 SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE ROOMS
Provide and fix sign plates to all services rooms as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the
sign plates shall be fixed on the doors. The thickness of sign plates shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The "Danger" sign plates shall be fixed onto door leaf and shall not block the ventilation louvres. The
letterings shall be engraved in red.
The "No Smoking" sign plates shall be provided for all electrical switchrooms and lift machine rooms.
18.42 SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE DUCTS
Provide and fix sign plates to service ducts as shown in the Drawings. The sign plates shall be fixed at
position as shown in the Drawings.
18.43 LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE FOR TYPICAL UPPER STOREY
Where specified, provide and fix lift notice signages to the walls of every lift landing from the second
storey to the top most storey. The position of the signages shall be as shown in the Drawings. The
signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder
coated aluminium sheet cut outs with sign face of acrylic sheet as shown. The acrylic sheet shall be
reverse silkscreen graphics. The floor number indication shall be 3-dimensional injection moulded
letterings. The wordings on the aluminium sheet shall be silkscreen printed and the colour shall be
approved by the SO Rep. Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block
layout plan, the design for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The
logo and telephone number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive
sticker. The signages shall have an additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic
panels as shown in the Drawings.
The entire sign hall be mounted onto the wall as shown in the Drawings. Provide shop drawings and a
sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
18.44 LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE

BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY
Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position
shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder
coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown in
the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It shall
be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be concealed.
The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen graphics and
letterings.
Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design for
the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone number
of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood frame with
softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The notice board
shall be provided with light tube for illumination. The signages shall have additional housing using
extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be
mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings.
The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the
lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
installation of the plate.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards.
Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with subclause
18.13.2.3. "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
LUP09/S18.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-20/21
18.45 PRECINCT DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARD
Where specified, the Contractor shall provide and fix precinct directional signboard to the details as
shown in the Drawings. The locations and number of precinct directional signboards shall be as shown in
the Drawings. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an
openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the extruded
aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame
to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets as
shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out
compartment with A2 size panel map sign face using acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. The
bottom of the signage shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and
acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminares for
illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings. The
precinct layout shall be made known later in the course of the Works.
Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with
subclause18.13.2.3 "Polyester Powder Coating". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved by
the SO Rep.
18.46 RESERVED
18.47 RESERVED
18.48 RESERVED
18.49 RESERVED
18.50 COLLAPSIBLE GATE TO TRAP DOOR
Where specified, collapsible gate to trap door shall be provided and fixed as shown in the Drawings. The
gate shall slide along the 50 x 50 x 6 mm thick mild steel angle guide. Painting to the gate shall be as
specified in Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING".
18.51 RESERVED
18.52 MILD STEEL/ALUMINIUM GRILLES, RAILINGS,

HOLLOW SECTION, ETC
Where mild steel or aluminium grilles, railing, hollow sections, etc. are required, the Contractor shall,
unless otherwise specified or shown in the drawings, design, fabricate, supply and install such
components complete with surface treatment specified in this Specification including submission of
workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep before commencement of work.
18.53 REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING WINDOWS WITH NEW BRONZE

ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND GRILLES
The Contractor shall exercise extreme care in hacking and replacing the existing windows so as not to
cause any inconvenience to the Occupants. While removing and replacing the windows, precaution must
be taken by the Contractor to ensure the safety and security of the Occupants, their properties and
possession, and to prevent ingress of water into the apartments. All existing works/ structures disturbed
in the course of the works must be rectified to match the existing. The Contractor shall consult the SO
Rep on the method of removing and fixing the windows. Upon removal of the existing window and window
frames, all the gaps between the new frames and the surrounding wall or structure are to be in-filled with
non-shrink mortar.
The Contractor shall provide workshop drawings for all window details together with the window's grilles.
LUP09/S18.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 18-21/21
18.54 OPTION FOR CASEMENT AND/OR SLIDING WINDOWS WITH GRILLES
Where two or more types of windows and grilles (eg. casement window, top-hung window and adjustable
or fixed lourved windows together with the grilles) are specified or shown in the Drawings for the same
window opening, the Contractor shall provide all types of window specified for the selection and approval
by the SO Rep without cost adjustment to the Contract. The type of window to be installed shall be
decided by the SO Rep and shall comply with Building Control Unit requirements.
Where the types of windows and the grilles are shown in the Drawings and in the event of any omission to
the windows, the valuation of the variation shall be based on the type of window which is the most
expensive.
18.55 ALUMINIUM GRILLES TO WINDOWS
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium grilles complete with many lock combinations,
aluminium plate 3mm thick locking eyes, relevant components and accessories.
The Contractor shall provide locksets to the aluminium grilles with different combinations instead of “one-
type” for the project.
Such extruded aluminium sections shall include sliding, casement, fixed and folding grilles as shown in the
Drawings or unless specified otherwise. The sections shall be spaced not greater than 100mm from the
external face of the grilles on both directions. Thickness of sections shall not be less than 1.2mm (main
frame) and 0.9mm (grilles) with security fixing of jointings to prevent force entry or other approved by SO
Rep.
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.
(b) Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9
(c) The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
Complete samples of grilles shall be installed at the site for approval by the SO Rep.
18.56 RESERVED
18.57 NOTICE BOARD WITH ALUMINIUM CASING AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY
Where specified, provide and fix aluminium notice board to details as shown in the Drawings. The
aluminium shall be bronze anodised and the anodic coating shall not be less than 15 microns. Submit
samples of the fabric to the SO Rep for approval and selection of colour before full implementation.
18.58 ROOF RAILINGS
Contractor shall provide railings, plate, fixing bolts, etc. to the roof as shown in the Drawings. Provide gap
of 25mm for thermal movement along the railing, as a guide approximately 5m to 6m. Railings shall be
connected to the lightning conductors in accordance to clause 49.12. The waterproofing membranes or
coatings that are affected by the fixing shall be re-dressed and make good condition to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
SECTION 19/...
LUP09/S18.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 19-1/16
SECTION 19
19.0 FLOOR FINISHES
19.1 NON STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SCREED
19.1.1 Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
19.1.2 Aggregate
Aggregate shall comply with SS 31:1984. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.
19.1.3 Preparation of Surfaces
All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding
work.
19.1.4 Locations
The Contractor shall, where shown in the Drawings, rescreed all existing play areas, access corridors,
steps/staircases, footpaths etc. Concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size
aggregate. It shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of
Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed
by the SO Rep.
19.1.5 Thickness
The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or as
19.1.6 Finishing and Curing
Concrete screeds shall be finished with a minimum of two passes power trowel and a final pass of hard
steel trowelling. Where constraint of space does not allow for power trowel, the concrete screeds shall be
compacted by mechanical vibrator subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The finishings shall be done
without any sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water to the surface of the screed. Ensure that the
crew of the finishing team is sufficient to complete the job before final set of the concrete screed.
The concrete screed shall be moist cured immediately for seven days or with approved curing compound
or other approved methods.
For areas that are not accessible for power trowelling, the screed shall be finished with hand steel
trowelling.
LUP09/S19.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 19-2/16
19.1.7 Reference Panel and Sample Panel
A "Reference Panel" shall be designated by the SO Rep reflecting the current standard of the industry
which is expected of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make himself available to view the designated
reference sample and establish a common understanding of the required standard.
At the commencement of screeding work, at least one "Sample Panel" shall be laid to the standard of the
Reference Panel. The Sample Panel shall be approved by the SO Rep and all remaining screeding shall
be carried out to the minimum standard of the approved Sample Panel. Sub-standard work shall be
rejected and replaced to the established standard.
19.2 CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING
19.2.1 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed
Factory pre-packed dry-mixed screed shall be used for all floor screeding or floor tiling with cement and
sand mortar. Approved pre-packed waterproof screed (dry mix of cement and sand with powder
waterproofing additive) shall be used for areas where waterproof screed is specified. For mortar
screeding to other floor areas, which do not require waterproofing, approved pre-packed floor screed shall
be used.
The pre-packed floor screed and waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount of
water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproofing screed shall comply with the following performance
requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
Prepacked Waterproofing Screed

S/No Type of Evaluation Testing Method Requirement
2
≥ 25 N per mm
1 Average compressive strength ASTM C 109 : 2001
≤ 40 N per mm2
2 Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm2 HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5) ≤ 5mm at 28 days
3 Shrinkage Coutinho Ring No crack
4 Flow ASTM C 109 : 2001 80% -120%
5 Water absorption ASTM C 413 : 2001 < 5%
6 Flexural strength ASTM C 348 : 1997 > 2 N per mm2
7 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 > 90%
Stiffening time
BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 a) ≤ 360 mins
8 a) 1.0 N/ mm2
(Method A) b) ≤ 420 mins
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
Shrinkage value
9 Volume change ASTM C 827 : 2001 of not more than
1%
Prepacked Floor Screed

2
≥ 25 N per mm
1 Average compressive strength ASTM C 109 : 2001
≤ 40 N per mm2
2 Shrinkage Coutinho Ring No crack
3 Flow ASTM C 109 : 2001 80% -120%
4 Water absorption ASTM C 413 : 2001 < 5%
5 Flexural strength ASTM C 348 : 1997 > 2 N per mm2
6 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 > 90%
Stiffening time
BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 a) ≤ 360 mins
7 a) 1.0 N/ mm2
(Method A) b) ≤ 420 mins
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
Shrinkage value of
8 Volume change ASTM C 827 : 2001
not more than 1%
UG03/S19.DOC(2)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-3/16
19.2.2 Preparation of Surfaces
Before screeding, prepare the surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed, where
exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking.
19.2.3 Locations (Pre-packed Screed/Rendering)
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified hereunder in
the "Schedule Of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
Except for rendering to treads and risers of stairs, the rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets
or scupper drains, and finished to a surface directed by the SO Rep. Pre-packed screed to treads of
stairs shall be laid level and finished to a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The
minimum thickness of the screed shall be 15mm or as shown in the Drawings.
Where waterproof membrane is applied around the pipes and water outlets, pre-packed waterproof screed
shall be laid to cover the waterproof membrane, as shown in the Drawings.
19.2.4 Reserved
19.2.5 Rendering To Lift Pit
Approved pre-packed mortar shall be used to render the lift pit. Unless otherwise shown, the rendering
shall be of an average thickness of 18mm.
19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the Schedule
below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :
Prepacked Grade 25 Self Remarks

Prepacked
Accommodation Location Waterproof Concrete Levelling
Screed
Screed Screed Screed
Flat Private Balcony *
Lift Lobby * Concrete screed
shall be used
Utility * where no floor
tiling is specified
Pump Room,
Switch Room & *
MDF Room
All Residential
Public Staircase
Block Common *
Landing
Areas
Concrete screed
Access Balcony & shall be used
*
Void Deck where no floor
tiling is specified
No rendering Is
Risers & Treads Of required for
*
Public Staircase precast staircase
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering
Provided always that where the SO Rep is of the opinion that the conditions of the existing areas to be laid
with self-levelling screed are such that the self-levelling screed may not be suitable and reasonably fit for
the purpose for which it is required, the SO Rep may direct the Contractor to remove the existing floor
finish of the said areas and lay it with Grade 25 concrete screed. The Contractor is deemed to have
included in the Contract Sum all costs and expenses that may be incurred for the compliance with this
requirement.
19.3 RESERVED
UG03/S19.DOC(3)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-4/16
19.4 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS)
Where existing floor tiles or screeding are to be removed and retiled, the Contractor shall chisel off the
existing floor tiles and/or screed completely and clean the exposed surfaces thoroughly before laying the
new tiles.
19.4.1 General
(a) Location and Extent
Provide and lay structure/texture, glazed and unglazed ceramic floor tiles to common areas, non-
residential units and to any locations specified in the subclause “Schedule of Ceramic Floor Tiles”
hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
Where specified, provide and fix 400mm x 80mm x 8mm thick or other approved matching glazed
skirting tiles to access balcony, columns and walls at the void deck. The skirting tile shall be round-
edged at one of the length. The Contractor shall submit a full range of colour glazed skirting tiles
for the approval of the SO Rep.
(b) Inconsistent Sizes
In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within
the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles shall
be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Tiles of
one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.
19.4.2 Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles
The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The list of ceramic floor tiles is posted
at Internet (www.eptc.sg) and/or listed in the HDB Materials List.
The SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles
for such locations as specified and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding
any approval by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations
as specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
19.4.3 Testing Requirements
(a) Test Samples And Methods
All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 unless otherwise stated.
(b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement
Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
19.4.4 Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with Table A unless otherwise stated :
Table A : Requirements Compliance
Type of tile SS 483 : 2000
(a) Structure/Texture Tile Annex G
(b) Glazed Tile Annex J
(c) Unglazed Tile Annex H
UG03/S19.DOC(4)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-5/16
19.4.4 Technical Specifications (Cont’d)
(a) Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length Nominal Width Nominal Thickness
Structure/Texture Tile 300mm 300mm 9mm
Glazed Tile 200mm 200mm 8mm
Unglazed Tile 200mm 200mm 8mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance to the following :
Structure/
Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile
Texture Tile
Length
The deviation, in %, of the
Not more than Not more than Not more
average length of each tile from
±0.6% ±0.75% than ±0.75%
the average length of 10 test
specimens.
Width
average width of each tile from
±0.6% ±0.75% than ±0.75%
the average width of 10 test
specimens.
Thickness
average thickness of each tile
±5% ±5% than ±5%
from the average thickness of
10 test specimens.
(b) Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c) Physical Properties
Structure/Texture Tile Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile
Water Absorption
Max of 0.5% Max of 6 % Max of 1%
Percent by mass
UG03/S19.DOC(5)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-6/16
(d) Chemical Properties
(i) Staining Test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
Allow 3 or 4 drops of each of the test solutions (Methylene blue

solution, 10g/L and Potassium permanganate solution, 10g/L),
to fall on a fresh part of the test specimen. Place an
approximately 30mm diameter convex watch glass on the
applied drop in order to spread it to an approximately circular
area. Allow to remain for 24 hours and then rinse the surface
with running water and wipe with a damp cloth. If a stain
remains, thoroughly clean with a solution of the standard
cleaning agent.
Performance Criteria
The stain on the test specimen shall be able to be cleaned by
cleaning solution.
(ii) Slip Resistance For : The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with
Other Areas That SS 485:2001.
Are Not Outdoor
Areas And Performance Criteria
Pedestrian Ramps The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a
Floor Finish pendulum friction test method with a classification of X.
(iii) Reverse Staining : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
Test (for Glazed Tile
only) (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to
ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.
(b) Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.
(c) With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, “pond”

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed
surface for signs of dark patches up to a total “ponding”
duration of 30 minutes.
(d) Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.
(e) Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.
(iv) Slip resistance : (a) For Outdoor Areas

requirements for
outdoor areas and The slip resistance requirement for outdoor floor finishes
pedestrian ramp shall be Classification X. The slip resistance test shall be
floor finishes conducted under wet condition using a pendulum friction
test method in accordance with SS 485:2001.
(b) For Pedestrian Ramp
The slip resistance requirement for pedestrian ramp floor

finishes shall be Classification W. The slip resistance test
shall be conducted under wet condition using a pendulum
friction test method in accordance with SS 485:2001.
UG03/S19.DOC(6)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-7/16
19.4.5 Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles
Where specified, provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as tabulated in the Schedule below
including any other areas not listed in this Schedule but as shown in the Drawings.
Structured / Unglazed Glazed

Accommodation Location
Textured tiles tiles tiles
Wash Area *
Upper Floor Lift Lobby *
Common
Ground Floor Lift Lobby *
Areas
Access Balcony *
Void Deck *
*Denotes the specified tile
19.4.6 Laying of Floor Tiles
The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and access balcony including the scupper drains shall be tiled. The
structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. Movement joints
shall be provided at appropriate locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be
provided at not more than 6m centres. UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour
shall match the floor tiles and approved by the SO Rep.
Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of void
deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is indicated. The
workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant details required by
the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles
and/or wall tiles.
UG03/S19.DOC(7)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-8/16
19.5 RESERVED
19.6 LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
19.6.1 Workshop Drawings
Provide complete set of workshop Drawings showing the laying pattern of ceramic floor tiles and wall tiles
at locations where tiling work is indicated. The workshop Drawings shall include plans, elevations,
detailed section and other relevant details required by the SO Rep. These Drawings shall be submitted to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of ceramic floors tiles, ceramic wall tiles and pattern colour
glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be laid with the joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles.
19.6.2 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed
Approved pre-packed screed and waterproof screed shall be used for all floor screeding required or floor
tiling, as shown in the schedule for rendering/screeding in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering".
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right
amount of water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the performance
specified in Clause 19.2.1 “Pre-Packed Mortar Screed”.
The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the following
performance when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
19.6.3 Workmanship
Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO
Rep.
The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there is
a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards the water outlet. Each tile shall be fully
bonded to the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping.
The Contractor shall use tile spacers for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep before the commencement of the
tiling Works.
UG03/S19.DOC(8)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-9/16
19.6.4 Storage and Protection
All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original
packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination.
The contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material to cover the whole
finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster splashing or dropping and all
other subsequent trades.
The protective material must be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry
conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily on site.
The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of the
protective material, the contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling is
completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly cleaned
before laying of the protective material.
The contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly in
place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall be removed until such time
that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover.
19.6.5 Inspection
Prior to the commencement of tiling works, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify
that all such works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence.
19.6.6 Mortar Bed
(i) Floor Tiling At Areas Without Waterproofing
Prepare the concrete surface to be clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay
prepacked mortar mix to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the
water outlet where specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be allowed to cure for at least 3
days before laying the tiles.
19.6.7 Bedding Mortar For Fixing of Floor Tiles within Flats
The floor tiles shall be fixed to the mortar bed with bedding mortar one part fine sand with two parts
cement. Prior to laying the floor tiles, the bedding mortar shall be applied thinly to the mortar bed. The
spreading of bedding mortar to the mortar bed shall not exceed one square metre in each application. In
laying the tiles, the bedding mortar shall be spread uniformly over the back of each tiles to a thickness of
about 2mm taking care to fill deep keys, frogs and all remaining depressions.
Sand for the bedding mortar shall be cleaned and free of foreign materials and comply with the following
grading requirement :
Percentage by mass passing the BS sieve

BS 410 sieve mesh size
% (mm)
2.36mm 100
1.18mm 90 – 100
0.6mm 80 – 100
0.3mm 30- 100
0.15mm 0 – 60
0.075mm Not greater than 5
UG03/S19.DOC(9)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-10/16
19.6.8 Tile Adhesive (Normal Set) For Floor Tile in Common Areas of Housing Blocks
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2. in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile, taking
care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position within
the specified ‘open time’ and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully contact
over the whole area.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The normal
set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements :
S/N Characteristics Test Method Performance Criteria

1 Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength EN 1348 : 1999 7 days ≥ 0.3 N/mm2
28 days ≥ 1.0 N/mm2
2 Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength EN 1348 : 1999 28 days ≥ 1.0 N/mm2
(After Water Immersion)
3 Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength EN 1348 : 1999 At 28 days ≥ 1.0 N/mm2
(After Heat Aging) Circulating oven: 70 °C ±2 °C
for 14 days
4 Open Time EN 1346 : 1999 ≥=> 0.5 N/mm2 after not less
(using tile as specified in than 30 mins
EN 1346) After 28 days storage under
standard conditions
5 Deformity EN 12002 : 2002 2.5mm (minimum)
19.6.9 Grouting To Tile Joints
Approved tile grouts shall be used to fill the joints between floor and wall tiles. They shall be used in all
floor and wall tiling works at flats and common areas except water tanks.
The grouts shall have good working characteristics, low shrinkage and good adhesion to the sides of the
joints. They shall be suited for the width of the joints and intended use of the tiling application.
The contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of the work. The contractor shall submit samples of the grouts to the SO Rep for selection
of colours to match the tiling works.
19.6.9.1 Material
The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall be easy
to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site.
A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the Site and tested at an accredited laboratory
according to the following requirements :
a) Tile grout for joint width up to 4mm

1 Shrinkage EN 12808-4 ≤ 2 mm/m
≤ 2g (after 30 min)
2 Water absorption EN 12808-5 ≤ 5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength 15 N per mm² minimum

3 EN 12808-3
(After dry storage) 35 N per mm² maximum
≤ 2000 mm3
4 Abrasion resistance EN 12808-2
Flexural strength
5 EN 12808-3 ≥ 3.5N per mm²
(After dry storage)
UG03/S19.DOC(10)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-11/16
19.6.9.1 Material
b) Tile grout for joint width above 4mm

1 Shrinkage EN 12808-4 ≤ 2 mm/m
≤ 2g (after 30 min)
2 Water absorption EN 12808-5 ≤ 5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength 15 N per mm² minimum

3 EN 12808-3
(After dry storage) 35 N per mm² maximum
4 Abrasion resistance EN 12808-2 ≤ 1000 mm3
Flexural strength
5 EN 12808-3 ≥ 3.5N per mm²
(After dry storage)
The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent tones for
the whole tiling Works.
19.6.9.2 Application
The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial area.
Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions as they
may be difficult to be removed from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured surfaces and some unglazed tiles.
i. The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing;
ii. Ensure all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints;
iii. Mechanically mix the grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions;
iv. Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over the area
until the joints are completely filled;
v. Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel and a
damp, not wet, cloth;
vi. Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape;
vii. After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.
All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth of the
cushion.
UG03/S19.DOC(11)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-12/16
19.6.11 Other Materials
Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of ceramic floor
tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the approval of the SO
Rep.
19.6.12 Cleaning Up
Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles.
The tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned before the handing over. The contractor shall use tile-cleaning
agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be effective blend of penetrants which could
instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surfaces and remove the mortar completely. The
tile cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be prepared and
used according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
19.6.13 Damage and Replacement
In the event of any damage to the new and existing ceramic tiles and accessories, the Contractor shall
immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the
Contractor’s costs.
Where the new tile is laid next to the existing tile in the kitchen/ utility room/ service balcony/ front balcony
etc, the Contractor shall limit the replacement up to the first course adjacent to it.
19.7 TESTING TOOLS FOR TILING WORK
The Contractor shall provide a retractable tapping rod to each Resident Technical Officer and the SO Rep
for detecting hollowness in tiling works during and on completion of the tiling works. The retractable
tapping rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter rigidly attached to one end. When fully
extended, the tapping rod shall have a length of about 630mm and possesses adequate rigidity for tapping
the tiles. When the rod sections collapse, the tapping rod shall be about 130mm long. A pocket clip shall
be provided on the rod.
19.8 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Floor Tiles In Common Areas
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on floor tiles in common areas according to the
Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly
selected pieces of tiles at any location within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of
the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm2. In
addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm2.
19.9 SELF-LEVELLING SCREED
required (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to
be used as specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his
Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
UG03/S19.DOC(12)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-13/16
19.9.2 Materials
The Contractor shall install either one of the following self-levelling screed systems listed under the HDB
Materials List subject to the approval of the SO Rep:
System A : 6mm polymer-modified cementitious screed and silane-siloxane resin penetrating sealer.
System B : 3mm acrylic polymer-modified cementitious screed and water-borne polyurethane or acrylic
polymer cementitious topcoat.
(a) Screed Material
Both self-levelling screed systems shall comply with the performance requirements specified in
subclause 19.9.3 “Test Properties And Test Methods”. The material packaging shall be printed with
details approved by the SO Rep, including Batch No. Manufacturer Date, Expiry Date, Polymer
Content, Pot Life, and Mix Proportions.
(b) Penetrating Sealer/Topcoat
For System A, penetrating sealer shall be of water-based, colour-less, non-film forming silane-
siloxane silicon resin or other active compounds. The penetrating sealer shall be fully compatible
with the self-levelling screed material, be able to penetrate deeply into the screed surface, and to
repel contaminants and thus protecting the finished surface against staining from olive oil, coffee with
milk, used engine oil, black rubber hose or other staining agents. The penetrating sealer shall not be
diluted on site by solvent or any other liquid.
For System B, the completely cured topcoat is to provide protection for the finished surface against
staining from olive oil, coffee with milk, used engine oil, black rubber hose or other staining agents.
The topcoat shall not be diluted on site.
19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods
All tests must be performed by a testing laboratory accredited by SINGLAS in accordance with the test
methods and in compliance with the Performance Requirement as specified in Table 1 or in the HDB
Materials List. The testing sampling and frequency shall be conducted in accordance with the Schedule of
Material Tests provided in the Contract.
(a) Work-In-Process Stage
The SO Rep shall obtain random samples for either System A or B during application for compliance
test. The Contractor shall submit the selected samples to a laboratory accredited by SINGLAS for the
following tests:
(1) Abrasion resistance (after Thermal Aging)

(2) Shrinkage (after QUV Weathering)
(3) Slip resistance (after Thermal Aging)
(4) Resistance to stains
(5) Silane-Siloxane or other approved active compounds content for penetrating sealer.
(6) Fourier Transformed Infrared Spectrophotometric Anaylsis (FTIR) for topcoat.
The slip resistance and resistance to stains shall be carried out after treatment with penetrating
sealer or topcoat.
For System B, the test results of FTIR shall match the chemical thumbprint of the topcoat established
during the application for listing under the HDB Materials List
UG03/S19.DOC(13)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-14/16
19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods (Cont’d)
(b) Post-Work Stage
The Contractor shall carry out in-situ testing for slip resistance and tensile adhesion bond strength for
System A or B at the location to be decided by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall carry out in-situ surface penetration depth on the sealed finished screed for
System A at the location to be decided by the SO Rep.
Table 1 – Performance Requirements of Self-Levelling Screed System A & B
S/N PROPERTY /TEST TEST METHOD ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

Flow Time ≤ 150 sec
1 Flowability ASTM C 939 :2002 (Cementitious Screed
Materials)
Water Absorption
(After 7 Days Air Curing Absorption
followed by 14 Days ≤ 10 % (max)
2 ASTM C 413 :2001
Circulating Thermal Aging @ (After 30 minutes water
70 ± 2 0C) immersion)
Abrasion Resistance
( After 7 days air curing
Concrete Abrasion Tester
3 followed by 14 days
BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Wear Depth < 0.6 mm
circulating thermal
Use BS EN 13892-4:2002
aging @ 70 + 2 °C )
Concrete Abrasion Tester;

4 Abrasion Resistance BS8204 Pt 2:2003 Wear Depth < 0.5 mm
Use BS EN 13892-4:2002
BS8204 Pt 3:1993
5 Tensile Adhesion Bond Bond Strength
(Annex B.2)
Strength > 1.0 N/mm2
Use BS 13892-8:2002
Shrinkage / Visual cracks
(After 100 cycles of
Alternating
a)Shrinkage / Expansion
UVA Heating to 60 °C for 4
6 ± 0.05 % (max)
hours ASTM C531:2000
and followed by 10 mins of
b)No visible crack.
intermittent spraying of
water)
Slip Resistance
( After 7 days air curing
TRL Pendulum Slip
followed
7 Resistance Tester
by 14 days circulating SRV (wet) > 40
BS8204 Pt 2:2003
thermal
Use BS 7976-2:2002
aging @ 70 + 20C )
TRL Pendulum Slip

8 Resistance Tester
Slip Resistance SRV (wet) > 40
BS8204 Pt 2:2003
Use BS 7976-2:2002
ISO 10545-14
(Staining agents include
olive oil, coffee with milk,
9 Class 4 or Class 5
Resistance to Stains used engine oil, and black
Cleanability
rubber
hose )
UG03/S19.DOC(14)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-15/16
19.9.3 Test Properties And Test Methods (Cont’d)
The Silane-Siloxane or other approved active compounds content shall be 10% by weight (minimum).
The average surface penetration depth for System A shall be 1.0mm(minimum).
The finished floor screed shall have a grey tone falling within the range of Munsell N-Colour Series N-5.0
and N-6.5 or other similar colour chart as approved by the SO Rep.
In the event of any non-compliance of the performance requirements, the Contractor shall have to make
good or replace the non-compliance screed at his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep.
19.9.4 Applications
Method of application shall be as per supplier’s specifications approved by the SO Rep and shall include the
checking and rectification of existing unstable screed, placement of expansion joints, and installation of
protective edge trims.
The Contractor shall provide temporary access platforms of sufficient width for residents use at all times
during the works in common areas or staircases. The access platforms shall be firmly secured without
hindering the works operations.
(a) Preparation Works and Surface Cleaning
All existing areas to be re-screeded shall be checked for defects such as de-lamination, loose
materials and structural cracks. Existing screeds that are loosened, hollowed, or bulged and de-
laminated of an area more than 0.5 m2 shall be repaired using epoxy injection method or other
equivalent approved by the SO Rep. Areas having structural cracks are to be repaired as per Clause
34.6 “Method of Structural Repairs”.
Expansion joints of approved material shall be installed at locations susceptible to cracking.
Install approved UV stablised, high impact (min. 100 J/m Izod Impact Strength, ASTM D256-88) rigid
UPVC edge trims to protect the floor screed edges at void decks before laying of screed material.
The installation method and design profile of the edge trims shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Existing main entrance gate, if obstructing the laying of self-levelling screed, shall be modified and/or
adjusted to facilitate the re-screeding works. If adjustment or modification is not possible, a new gate
equivalent to existing one is to be provided. All costs and expenses associated with the adjustment,
modification, supply and installation of the gate shall be deemed to have been included in the
contract.
Scupper drains, to replace existing ones and be formed with pre-pack cement mortar at the corridor,
landing and void deck areas, shall be constructed before priming and re-screeding commence.
Where tile band/pattern is to be provided, the affected existing screed shall be roughened or
removed to provide the necessary bond. The edges of tile band/pattern shall be finished to level with
new screed to the required fall.
The surface after preparation shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, dirt, oil grease, curing compounds,
or previous coatings prior to the application of primer coat, self-levelling screed, or penetrating
sealer/acrylic polymer cementitious topcoat.
(b) Laying of Self-Levelling Screed
A minimum 6 mm thick polymer modified cementitious for system A or 3mm acrylic polymer-modified
cementitious screed for system B is to be laid over existing screed with a sufficiently cured primer
coat. The screed should be laid to follow the gradient of existing screed or the gradient otherwise
specified in the Drawings or by the SO Rep. The primer should suit the existing floor conditions, be
compatible with the screed material and is capable of achieving the minimum tensile bond strength
specified in subclause 19.9.3 ‘Test Properties And Test Methods’. The manufacturer’s instructions
about the use and method of application shall be strictly followed.
Place, spread and finish screed with the appropriate laying tools and continuity to prevent the
formation of trowel marks, bubbles, or cold joints. The finished screed must gain sufficient strength
for it to be opened to foot traffic within two hours after laying.
UG03/S19.DOC(15)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 19-16/16
19.9.4 Applications (Cont’d)
(c) Application of Sealer/Topcoat
For System A, the new screed surface to be impregnated with penetrating sealer shall be sufficiently
cured, clean and free of loose deleterious matters before application commences.
Distribute penetrating sealer evenly by continuous spray or roller technique to give saturation flooding
with a “mirror wet look” for a minimum 5 seconds. 2 saturated coats of sealer shall be applied “wet
on wet” ie. second application needs to take place as soon as the first coat sealer has fully absorbed.
For System B, the new screed surface to be coated with topcoat shall be sufficiently cured, clean and
free of loose deleterious matters before application commences. The Contractor shall apply the
topcoat in accordance to the manufacturer’s methods statement.
19.9.5 Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in
Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in
Appendix (Appendix A1). In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of
Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole
discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be
submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in
accordance with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix (Appendix A1.) (TC) and
Clause (Clause 59.2.) 'Provision of Warranty' to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be
submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when
the SO Rep considers the works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the
event that the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the
time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the
Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed
of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of
the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
SECTION 20/...
UG03/S19.DOC(16)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 20-1/10
SECTION 20
20.0 WALL FINISHES
Where existing wall tiles or plastering are to be removed and retiled, the Contractor shall chisel off the
existing wall tiles and/or plaster completely and clean the exposed surfaces thoroughly before laying the
new tiles.
20.1 APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS
20.1.1 Mortar Mix For Plastering Works
The Contractor shall use premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar listed in HDB Materials List for all
plastering works on brick walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. Plastering of RC surfaces shall be
restricted to internal surfaces only.
The premixed mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes mortar for
instant application. The pre-packed mortar shall be in bag form and shall be mixed mechanically according
to the manufacturer's recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a work method statement to the SO
Rep for approval.
The premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar shall be formulated with at least 0.80% of pure polymer
by mass. The premixed mortar system or pre-packed mortar shall comply with the following performance
requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing:
Pre-packed Mortar
Tensile adhesion strength test according Average strength
to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 > 0.75 N per mm2
Tensile Adhesion
1 days under shaded ambient condition.
Strength
Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be Individual strength
tested. > 0.60 N per mm2
Average strength
Shear adhesion test according to HDB
> 1.00 N/mm2
Shear Adhesion method on a sample cured for 14 days
2
Strength under shaded ambient condition. Six
Individual strength
spots on the sample slab shall be tested.
> 0.70 N/mm2
3 Average Shrinkage ASTM C 531 – 2000 < 0.10%
Compressive
4 12 - 20 N/mm2
Strength – 28 days
Consistence BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

5 > 65%
Retentivity
6 Water Retentivity > 95%
> 240 mins
Setting Initial set
7 BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 ≤ 360 mins
Time
Final set < 500 mins
8 Polymer Content Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA 0.8% min. by mass
Product The chemical blueprint
Fourier Transformed Infrared
9 Identification shall match the record of
Spectrophotometric Analysis
Analysis the approved product
LUP09/S20.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-2/10
20.1.1 Mortar Mix For Plastering Works (Cont’d)
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the pre-packed mortar for testing to determine
the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an accredited
laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.64%, i.e. 80% of the specified
content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into
consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the
tolerance for test accuracy. Pre-packed mortar with pure polymer content less than 0.64% shall be
removed from the HDB Materials List. The Contractor shall remove all unused pre-packed mortar with
deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is
required to use only those pre-packed mortar listed in the HDB Materials List and subject to the approval
of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the pre-
packed mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.1.2 Skimming Materials
The Contractor shall use pre-packed external skim coat listed in the HDB Materials List for skimming
works on external RC surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use pre-packed internal skim
coat listed in the HDB Materials List. The pre-packed skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with
the amount of water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed internal skimmed coat shall be formulated with at least 1.0% of pure polymer by mass and
shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the
specified laboratory testing :
Pre-packed Internal Skim Coat

Tensile Adhesion
Strength Test
Compressive Strength
3 BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 7 - 12 N/mm2
– 28 days
4 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 > 95%
> 240 mins
Setting i) Initial set
5 BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 ≤ 360 mins
Time
ii) Final set < 500 mins
The chemical
Product Identification Fourier Transformed Infrared blueprint shall match
7
Analysis Spectrophotometric Analysis the record of the
approved product
LUP09/S20.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-3/10
20.1.2 Skimming Materials (Cont’d)
The pre-packed external skim coat shall be formulated with at least 2.0% of pure polymer by mass and
shall comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the
specified laboratory testing :
Pre-packed External Skim Coat

Tensile Adhesion
Strength Test
Tensile adhesion strength tests after
accelerated weathering for 100 cycles* of
Tensile adhesion Loss of strength <
alternate heating and cooling. Twelve
strength tests after 15%
spots on the sample slab shall be tested.
accelerated weathering (compared to 14-day
2
for 100 cycles* of strength under normal
* Each cycle consist of 4 hours of
alternate heating and condition)
heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60°C and
cooling.
then 10 minutes of intermittent water
spray to produce a thermal shock.
Compressive Strength
4 7 - 12 N/mm2
– 28 days BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998
5 Water Retentivity > 95%
> 240 mins
Setting i) Initial set
6 BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998 ≤ 360 mins
Time
ii) Final set < 500 mins
The chemical
Product Identification Fourier Transformed Infrared blueprint shall match
8
Analysis Spectrophotometric Analysis the record of the
approved product
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the pre-packed internal and external skim
coat for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be
conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.80%
for pre-packed internal skim coat and 1.60% for external skim coat, i.e. 80% of the specified content for
production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration
that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance for
test accuracy. Pre-packed internal skim coat with pure polymer content less than 0.80% or external skim
coat with pure polymer content less than 1.60% shall be removed from the HDB Materials List. The
Contractor shall remove all unused pre-packed internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in
pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required to use
only those pre-packed internal or external skim coat listed in the HDB Materials List and subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that used the
pre-packed internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.2 CONTROL OF PLASTER THICKNESS ON RC SURFACE
The overall thickness of plastering on RC surface shall not exceed 18 mm. If the structural Works are
constructed with good alignment and surface condition, application of a thinner coat of plaster or
skimming is acceptable. The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.
LUP09/S20.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-4/10
20.3 PLASTERING TO RC AND OTHER SURFACES
The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust,
residue from oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow the
Resident Technical Officer to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked mortar
mix can be applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC surface
shall be of a thickness between 5 to 8 mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during application.
For better bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allow to cure for at least
12 hours before the application of the second coat.
All plastering works to new or existing brickwalls, solid blockwalls and RC surfaces shall be limited to
within the first storey building height or on internal surfaces not more than 1 storey high. For plastering of
support base plates of external attachments, the plaster shall be reinforced and the Contractor shall
submit connection details of the reinforcing mesh to SO Rep for approval.
20.4 ADHESION STRENGTH OF PLASTER ON RC SURFACE
The Contractor shall conduct site pull-out tests on plasters applied on concrete surface according to
Schedule of Materials Tests. The first test at each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of
plastering Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots to be conducted within 21 to 28 days after plastering.
The test spots shall be cut to a size of 75 mm x 75 mm for the pull-out test. The average tensile pull-out
strength shall achieve a minimum value of 0.35 N per mm2. However, no individual strength shall fall
below 0.25 N per mm2.
20.5 SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF

REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS
The surface of all new reinforced concrete members forming part of the external façade shall be
constructed to good alignment and verticality such that no plastering is required to provide a good
aesthetic appearance. Where there are minor surface unevenness or blemishes, the new RC surface
shall be skim-coated with approved skimming materials. The skimming can be applied in two coats up to
a total thickness not exceeding 6mm. This requirement shall be applicable to new external RC members
of all storeys, including the ground floor void deck structures.
20.5.1 Workmanship Of RC Works
The Contractor shall construct new peripheral reinforced concrete members to good alignment and
verticality. The concrete surface shall be plane and true to shape. The verticality of the peripheral RC
members shall comply with the following tolerance, in accordance to Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23.
Allowable Variation From The Plumb

Type Of RC Members/Surfaces For Any Continuous
Within Each Floor
Height Of 10 Storeys
Exposed continuous column corners or other
10mm 20mm
conspicuous lines
Corner or surface of columns and walls etc
with continuity broken by beams or nibs or 10mm 40mm
other protrusions
To achieve the required structural workmanship, the Contractor shall be required to :
(a) Regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition;
(b) ensure proper and adequate bracing and strutting;
(c) conduct thorough checking of plumb and alignment before casting.
LUP09/S20.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-5/10
20.5.2 Measurement Of RC Works
At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the measurement plan and survey methods.
The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey methods
shall, inter alia, include the following :
(a) Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block

(b) Verticality and alignment of columns
(c) Verticality of walls
(d) Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and alignment
of all new external columns, walls and corners of the building blocks. This measurement shall be carried
out for every storey, including the first storey.
The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser
beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least ±5 seconds; and a precision multi-
directional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy
of at least ±3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances.
Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month
after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work, the
Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block.
20.5.3 Rectification Of Misalignment And Surface Defects
The Contractor shall carry out structural rectification to the new external RC members with poor alignment
and plumb, poor construction joint, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. The structural rectification of such Defect shall commence
not later than two months after casting.
The Contractor shall rectify minor bulging or depression on the RC surface, which does not affect the
reinforcement cover, with the following method :
(a) trim and roughen the surface,

(b) clean the surface with pressure jetting,
(c) apply approve bonding agent to the surface
(d) patch the areas with approved polymer modified mortar.
For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal for
the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.5.4 Application Of External Skimming
Skimming shall not commence until the surface has been properly prepared and cleaned with water jet.
The Contractor shall allow for the inspection of the surface preparation prior to the skimming application.
Upon completion of the skimming Works, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the
building blocks. All measurement data shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
20.5.5 Testing Of External Skimming
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on the external skimming at each building block
according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of
skimming with age between 21 to 28 days. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 spots shall
exceed 0.4 N per mm2. In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each spot shall not be less
than 0.30 N per mm2.
The first test at each building block shall be conducted in the initial stage of skimming Works. The
remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
LUP09/S20.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-6/10
20.6 ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING AND SKIM COAT (WITHIN FLATS)
All arrises, internal angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed. All external angles shall be formed with
proprietary pvc plaster angle beads to the SO Rep approval.
Square pvc angle beads shall have a face flange minimum 20mm wide that subtends a 90 degrees angle
and shall have a short reveal of 2 mm on the front edge for the finishing skim coat. The face flange shall
be perforated and its surface tooth formed to hold and receive the plaster and skim coat. The entire length
of the pvc angle beads shall be clean and straight, any damaged or used beads shall not be recycled.
Samples of the pvc angle beads shall be submitted to the SO Rep. for approval prior to ordering and
commencement of skim coat or plastering work on site.
20.7 MAKING GOOD
All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to form
dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all cracks,
blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.
20.8 PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER
No partially or wholly set plaster shall be allowed to be used or remixed.
20.9 DRIPS AND GROOVE
Drips and grooves shall be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free from loose sandy mortar.
20.10 LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES
20.10.1 Wall Tiling Method
The Contractor shall carry out wall tiling according to the following procedures:
(a) Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding of
rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet.
(b) Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat
and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of
water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished
thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water pipes.
(c) Allow the rendering to set for at least 12 hours.
(d) Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as
possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position within flats and other areas. The
keys, frogs or depressions at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing.
(e) Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole
area.
(f) Adjust the position of any tile within 5 minutes of fixing.
The grouting to the tile joints shall commence within 7 days after fixing the wall tiles. Dust or
foreign materials shall be removed from the joints. The grout shall be wet mixed mechanically
before application. It shall be spread with a grout spreader (rubber squeegee or grout trowel),
working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Excess grout shall be
removed with the aid of a spreader and a damp (not) wet cloth. After the grout has stiffened
slightly, tool the grout with a piece of wood or other suitable tool to a consistent depth and shape.
After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean, dry
cloth.
LUP09/S20.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-7/10
20.10.2 Prepacked Mortar For Mortar Bed
The Contractor shall use approved pre-packed mortar mix for rendering to concrete surface and block
walls to receive the wall tiles. Potable water supplied by PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar. The
pre-packed mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements, as stated in clause
20.1.1 when subjected to the specified laboratory testing.
20.10.3 Bedding Mortar For Fixing The Wall Tiles Within Flats
The bedding mortar for fixing the tiles shall consist of one part OPC cement to one part fine sand. Sand
for the bedding mortar shall be cleaned and free of foreign materials and comply with the following grading
requirement :
Percentage by mass passing the BS sieve

BS 410 sieve mesh size
% (mm)
2.36mm 100
1.18mm 90 - 100
0.6mm 80 - 100
0.3mm 30 - 100
0.15mm 0 - 60
0.075mm Not greater than 5
The Contractor may use proprietary tile adhesive or add polymer additive into the bedding mortar to
improve the adhesion of the wall tiles. The use of tile adhesive or polymer additive shall be subjected to
20.10.4 Tile Adhesive (Normal Set) For Wall Tile in Common Areas of Housing Blocks
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of application
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of rendered wall and then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2 in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile to fill
deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position and be tapped
firmly to ensure its full contact with the adhesive. The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements :
Performance
S/N Characteristics Test Method
Criteria
7 days > 0.3 N/mm2
1
Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength EN 1348 : 1999 28 days > 1.0
N/mm2
Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength 28 days > 1.0
2 EN 1348 : 1999
(After Water Immersion) N/mm2
At 28 days > 1.0
N/mm2
Tensile Adhesion Bond Strength
3 EN 1348 : 1999 Circulating oven: 70
(After Heat Aging)
°C ± 2 °C for 14
days
> 0.5 N/mm2 after
EN 1346 : 1999 not less than 30
(using tile as mins
4 Open Time
specified in EN After 28 days
1346) storage under
standard conditions
5 Deformity EN 12002 : 2002 2.5mm (minimum)
LUP09/S20.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-8/10
20.10.5 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles at
any location within each block. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after the laying of the
tiles.
20.11 RESERVED
20.12 RESERVED
20.13 CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS)
20.13.1 General
Provide and lay first quality, first choice wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause “Schedule Of
Ceramic Wall Tiles “ hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
20.13.2 Testing Requirements
(a) Test Samples And Methods
All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated.
(b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement
Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
20.13.3 Technical Specifications
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance
with SS 483 : 2000 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :-
(a) Dimensions
Nominal Length : 200mm

Nominal Width : 200mm
Thickness : 8mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows :
(i) Length : Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
± 0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width : Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
± 0.75% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than ± 5% from
the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
LUP09/S20.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-9/10
(b) Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed
corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c) Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%
(d) Chemical Properties
(i) Reverse Staining : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
Test
(a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to
ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.
(b) Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.
(c) With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, “pond”

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height of
25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or glazed
surface for signs of dark patches up to a total “ponding”
duration of 30 minutes.
(d) Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.
(e) Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.
20.13.4 Colours, Patterns And Textures
Provide a full range of colours, patterns and textures of wall tiles for the SO Rep to select from. The SO
Rep shall have the absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be
made for difference in colour pattern and texture within each category of tiles.
20.13.5 Accessories
Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.13.6 Reserved
20.13.7 Tile Spacers
Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the tiling works.
LUP09/S20.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 20-10/10
20.14 POLISHED HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES
Provide and lay 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size) polished homogeneous wall tiles to locations as
specified below :
Accommodation Location
Walls of ground floor lift lobbies.
All Housing Blocks Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls
defining the ground floor lift lobby.
Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a
selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the Contract
Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture
20.15 WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles shall be
laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.16 TESTING TOOLS FOR TILING WORK
The Contractor shall provide retractable tapping rods to the SO Rep and the Employer’s officers for
detecting hollowness in tiling Works during and on completion of the tiling Works. The retractable tapping
rod shall have a solid steel ball of 15mm diameter rigidly attached to one end. When fully extended, the
tapping rod shall have a length of about 630 mm and possesses adequate rigidity for tapping the tiles.
When the rod sections collapse, the tapping rod shall be about 130 mm long. A pocket clip shall be
provided on the rod.
20.17 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Wall Tiles In Common Areas
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles in common areas according to the
Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly
selected pieces of tiles at any location within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of
the joint before the pull-out test. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
20.18 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength On Wall Tiles (Within Flats)
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles within flats according to the Schedule Of
Material Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of
tiles at any location within each block. The test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after the laying of
the tiles.
SECTION 21/...
LUP09/S20.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 21-1/2
SECTION 21
RESERVED
SECTION 22/...
LUP09/S21.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 22-1/1
SECTION 22
RESERVED
SECTION 23/...
LUP09/S22.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-1/11
SECTION 23
23.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING
23.1 GENERAL
23.1.1 Paint
The paints used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be of those under the
PSB PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All paint shall be delivered to the Site in their original
containers with the PSB Certificate Mark and the containers shall not have been opened before.
Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below
and their latest amendments :
Standard Type of Paint

SS7:1998 "Gloss Enamel Finishing"
SS34:1998 "Undercoat for Gloss Enamel"
SS37:1998 "Aluminium Paint"
SS38:1998 "Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)"
SS150:1998 "Emulsion Paint"
SS345:1990 "Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes"
SS494:2001 "Lead and Chromate-free Primer"
Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint
to the SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme.
All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:1990 and shall be certified
under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. All enamel paint shall be synthetic enamel paint
unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
23.1.2 Mixing of Paint
During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on
site for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO
Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the
same with paints that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet
the prescribed standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at
the Contractor's own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.1.3 Workmanship
Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same
brand and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to
correspond with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the
shades of the respective coats.
LUP09/S23.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-2/11
23.1.3 Workmanship (Cont'd)
All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry
before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the
ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to
the commencement of the painting work.
After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application
of next coat.
23.1.4 Precautionary Measures To Prevent Paint Drips
Before painting any section of walls, ceilings beams or columns, the Contractor shall lay canvass
sheets gunny sacks, PVC sheets or other floor covering on the corridor/areas as covering to prevent
paint dripping/staining on to the floors. Charges shall be imposed on the Contractor for non-
compliance.
23.1.5 Preparation Of All External Surfaces,

Wall Etc. And Final Touching Up
All external surfaces etc are to be cleaned by cold water high pressure jet or thoroughly wire brushed
and washed down and all extraneous matter scraped and cleaned off. The Contractor shall take all
necessary precaution to prevent any water from splashing into tenants' flat. Clean and wipe down all
watermarks on all windows and sun-breakers etc left behind after the washing. Repair all cracks,
damaged, hollow, loosened or bulging plaster in wall surfaces as specified in Section 32 “GENERAL
REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS”. All concrete waste, dropping, nails, wires etc shall be chiselled
off.
23.1.6 Eradicate Algae Growth On External Walls
The Contractor shall eradicate algae growth on all external walls in the preparation of the surfaces for
painting.
When algae growth is found on the wall surface, the Contractor shall scrub and wash away the algae
growth from the wall, and then apply algicidal treatment to the whole of the wall surface. The wall shall
then be rinsed with water in sections, starting from the top downwards.
The algicidal solution shall be of sodium hypochlorite diluted with water in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction. The Contractor may propose to use chemicals in the preparation of this
solution, with no cost adjustment to the contract sum. The algicidal solution proposed for use in this
contract shall be submitted for the SO Rep's approval before it is used.
The diluted algicidal solution shall be applied by brush or roller, or sprayed with high density plastic
knapsack portable chemical sprayer. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent
the splashing of any algicidal solution onto members of the public during the application of the
algicidal solution and shall indemnify the Employer from any claims in this respect.
The Contractor shall also wash and apply the same treatment as detailed above to the whole of all
facing brick walls, if algae growth is found on the wall surfaces, although the facing brick walls may
not be painted under this contract.
The Contractor is to note that the application or non-application of the anti-algae solution to the
various parts of a building shall not in any way nullify nor reduce the Contractor's liability under the six
(6) years warranty requirement as required in the Specification.
LUP09/S23.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-3/11
23.2 EXTERNAL PAINTING
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including sub-
clauses have to ensure that the works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for
the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In
the event the works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including sub-clauses
are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall
do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO
Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or
obligations arising under the Contract.
23.2.2 Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint
(a) Type and Location
The water based algae resistant paint shall comply with SS345:1990 and shall be PSB Marked.
Unless otherwise specified, all colours of paint to be used shall be approved by the PSB under
the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A and to comply with BS 4800:1972 "Paint Colour for
Building Purposes".
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and
concrete surfaces of all exterior surfaces of the external walls which are subject to weathering
including walls, ceilings and other surfaces of the ground floor void decks shall be finished with
one coat of water based sealer and two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint.
The sealer coat and the two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall not be
diluted. The whole paint system shall be obtained from the same paint manufacturer.
Allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish the different coatings. Should
the finished paintwork be found to be unsatisfactory, ie. brushy work, unevenness in
applications, original stains, etc., repaint the same with additional coat or coats to the
External painting to parapet walls, refuse chutes, columns and beams shall cover up to and
including returned surfaces.
External painting to exterior surfaces of external walls shall cover up to and including returned
surfaces stopping at a convenient point to be directed by the SO Rep.
(b) External Painting to Electrical Sub-Station/Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
For electrical sub-station/utilities centre/dustbin compound, the external painting works shall be
executed with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint.
(c) Touch-up Coat
Painted surfaces which have to be overcoated by touch-up work should not be confined to the
affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be
repainted to match the colour tone of the finished coat.
(d) Painting of Sample Units
At the appropriate time prepare the exterior of one or more typical flat unit for each type of flats
to receive the paint and inform the SO Rep to select his colour scheme. Paint the sample
units, changing colours as directed, until the SO Rep is satisfied with the workmanship and/or
colour scheme.
LUP09/S23.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-4/11
23.2.2 Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (Cont'd)
(e) Warranty
stipulated in Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as
produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such
Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO
Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event that the Deed of Warranty for part of the
works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and
his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the specimen of Deed of
Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' to such
Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by
the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the
works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the
Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the
time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due
to the Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of
23.2.3 Acrylic Emulsion Paints
Unless otherwise specified, all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces, except those
subjected directly to weathering as mentioned earlier, shall be painted with one coat of water based
sealer and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The sealer coat and the two
coats of acrylic emulsion paint shall not be diluted. The whole paint system shall be obtained from the
same manufacturer.
External surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint shall include all surfaces except those
within the enclosing walls of the dwelling units, switch rooms, motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank
compartment and other enclosed spaces. Wall and ceilings of the private balcony of dwelling units
and common access corridors shall be considered as external surfaces to be painted with acrylic
emulsion paint.
Technical specification for the water-based sealer:
Properties/ Test Method Requirement

Performance
1 Colour - White or light grey
2 Non-volatile matter SS 5 :Part B2 Min 35% by weight of paint
3 Through-dry time ISO 9117 Max 4 hours

75±10µm wet film thickness
4 Opacity (contract SS 5:Part E2 Min 70%

ratio)
5 Lead content SS 5:Part C6 Max 0.01%by weight of
dried paint film
6 Coating adhesion ASTM D3359 Method A (X-cut) Coating shall achieve a

One coat of sealer of 75±10µm wet rating of at least 4A
film thickness and two coats of SS
345 paint at 75±10µm wet film
thickness per coat on grade 40
concrete
7 Alkaline resistance SS 5: Part G2 Coating shall show no

0.1 M NaOH solution for 1 hour blistering, wrinkling or
lifting when examined
immediately, and after 30
minutes recovery
LUP09/S23.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-5/11
23.2.3 Acrylic Emulsion Paints (Cont’d)
Properties/ Test Method Requirement

Performance
8 Water permeability, SS 500 Appendix B Coating shall display no
14 days 75±10µm wet film thickness yellowing, blistering,
sweating or disintegration
of paint
9 Water immersion ISO 2812-2 Coating shall show no

resistance, 500 hours One coat of sealer of 75±10µm wet blistering, wrinkling or
film thickness and two coats of SS lifting
345 paint at 75±10µm wet film
thickness per coat on cement panel.
Remaining surface coated with epoxy
paint.
23.3 PAINTING OF INTERNAL SURFACES
(a) Internal Surfaces of Dwelling Units
Where specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces
of internal walls and ceilings of dwelling units shall be painted with two coats of approved
emulsion paint of white colour. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water
by volume. The second coat shall not be diluted. The method of painting for these coats, with
the exception of the two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and the kitchen (if applicable), shall
be by means of an appropriate portable airless spraying equipment as approved by the SO
Rep. No compressed air shall be used to assist the spraying. The two coats for the ceilings of
the toilets may be painted by using rollers.
(b) Other Internal Surfaces
Where specified, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls and ceilings
of shops, shoplets, eating houses, living quarters, switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms,
water tank compartments, stores, MDF rooms, electrical substations and areas other than
dwelling units shall be painted with three coats of approved emulsion paint. The first coat may
be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second and third coats shall not
be diluted.
(c) The emulsion paint shall be of those qualities approved by PSB and the SO Rep.
LUP09/S23.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-6/11
23.4 PAINTING OF WOODWORK
23.4.1 Preparation
All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered
smooth and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of door frames and
window frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be
"Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved.
23.4.2 Painting
(a) New Surfaces
Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one
priming coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
(b) Existing Painted Surfaces
All existing painted surfaces, shall be thoroughly scrapped, rubbed down as directed to remove
all loose scales etc. Surfaces with thick paint coats shall be removed by paint remover, heater,
mechanical grinder or other approved means. Prime all bare spot surfaces with aluminium
wood primer before new painting. Prepare and apply one undercoat and one finishing coat of
enamel paint.
23.4.3 Wood Varnish Veneered Timber

Doors To Bedroom And Utility room
Unless otherwise specified, all veneered timber doors shall be finished with wood varnish all as
specified.
23.4.3.1 Surface Preparation
All pin holes and recesses on the door surfaces shall be filled and stopped with putty. The door
surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means and cleaned prior to the application
of wood varnish.
LUP09/S23.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-7/11
23.4.3 Wood Varnish Veneered Timber Doors

To Bedroom And Utility Room (Cont'd)
23.4.3.2 Wood Varnish
The veneered door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a factory environment with a minimum of
three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved finish. The varnish shall be
approved by the SO Rep. The varnish shall comply with the requirements as specified hereunder :
Application
Test Test Method Substrate Method/Film Requirements
Thickness
Varnish Only
a) Condition in SS 5 Part B4: 1987 NA NA No coagulation, precipitation,

container or separation of components,
free from foreign particles;
b) Keeping qualities SS 5 Part B6: 1987 NA NA No coagulation, precipitation,

or separation of components,
free from foreign particles;
c) Fineness of grind SS 5 Part B13: 1987 NA NA Maximum 30 microns;
d) Dry film thickness SS 5 Part B1:1985 Burnished tinplate 3 coats by brush Minimum 50 microns;
(Method 5)
e) Surface drying SS 5 Part D2: 1985 Burnished tinplate Metered bar/wft 50 2 hrs maximum;
time microns
f) Through dry time ISO 9117: 1990 Burnished tinplate Metered bar/wft 50 6 hrs maximum;
microns
g) Gloss (at 60 deg.) SS 5 Part E1: 1985 Glass plate Metered bar/wft 50 25 – 50 gloss units;
microns
h) Flash point SS Part B15: 1987 NA NA 23 ℃ minimum
i) Washability SS 5 Part F5: 1992 Burnished Glass Metered bar/wft 80 3000 cycles with no wear-off;
microns
j) Scratch SS 5 Part F2: 1988 Burnished tinplate Metered bar/dft 25 Minimum 1000 g;
Resistance microns
k) Accelerated SS 5 Part G4: 1992 Burnished tinplate Metered bar/dft 25 Maximum gloss loss 30 %;
weathering (500 microns
hrs dry cycle)
l) Mildew resistance SS 150 Appendix C NA NA No growth;
LUP09/S23.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-8/11
23.4.3 Wood Varnish Veneered Timber Doors

To Bedroom And Utility Room (Cont'd)
23.4.3.3 Protection Of Timber Doors
The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to
the site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or
knocking during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless
instructed by the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed.
The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the
door surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The
materials used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry
conditions. The design of the protection shall allow it to remain intact during and after the installation
of the lock set and hinges at site.
23.4.3.4 Storage Of Doors
The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per block for the proper storage of
the main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath/wc doors.. The storage areas shall be kept in a
dry condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over
inspection, unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just
prior to their installations.
23.4.3.5 Existing Entrance Door Not Replaced
Existing entrance doors not replaced shall be painted with enamel paint or other approved by the SO
Rep. No cost variation if the existing doors are not painted as requested by the Flat Owners.
23.4.4 Painting To Exposed Roof Timber Structural Members
All exposed roof sawn timber structural members shall be painted with one coat of "Solignum'"
"Presotim", or "Creosote" wood preservative or other approved.
23.5 PAINTING OF FERROUS METAL WORK
23.5.1 Preparation Of Surface
Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.
23.5.2 Painting
Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free
primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door
frame shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer.
Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry
work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer.
Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.
LUP09/S23.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-9/11
23.6 PAINTING OF PIPES
Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony
waste discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except stainless steel
pipes and pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match
with the general background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so
specified but shown in the Drawing.
Type of Pipe/Trunking Paint Coat Required

UPVC pipes and fittings Two coats enamel paint unless specified otherwise.
However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service
ducts need not be painted.
UPVC trunking for electrical wiring, Two coats acrylic emulsion paint to match the general
water and gas pipes outside background colour tone. However, those within trunking,
residential units. stacks/ceiling and service ducts need not be painted.
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings. First coat – one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer;
Second coat – one coat of lead and chromate-free primer;
Third coat – one coat of undercoat for enamel paint;
Fourth coat – one finishing coat of enamel paint.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings Two coats of lead and chromate-free primer followed by
including supports. two coats of enamel paint.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings for Two coats of approved ceramic insulation coating.
water distribution mains including
supports on roof level.
Two coats of white enamel paint or other colour to match
Copper gas pipes including fittings.
the background as instructed by the SO Rep.
Stainless steel, copper and brass No painting required unless specified otherwise.
pipes.
23.7 * PAINTING TO EXTERNAL REINFORCED CONCRETE

SLOPING ROOF OF CENTRAL REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER
[*Applicable if specified in the Contract]
The external reinforced concrete sloping roof of the central refuse chute chamber shall be painted
with water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting"
including all subclauses under it.
23.8 DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT
The Contractor shall ensure that all spent paint and waste water from the washing of paint
brushes/instruments are properly disposed off. The disposal of spent paint and waste water/waste
solvent shall be in accordance with MEWR guidelines. The Contractor shall provide the necessary
220-litre drums and engage a licensed industrial toxic waste collector to collect the drums for proper
disposal. The Contractor shall put up a consignment note to the Pollution Control Department.
LUP09/S23.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-10/11
23.8 DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT (CONT'D)
23.8.1 Solvent Based Enamel Paint
All spent paint and waste solvent (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums.
There shall be no discharge of spent paint and/or waste solvent/waste water (generated from
washing) into the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they
can be transported safely for proper disposal by the licensed industrial toxic waste collector. The
drums shall be properly labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage. The drums shall
be covered to prevent fire hazard and smell nuisance.
23.8.2 Water Based Emulsion Paint
All spent paint and waste water (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There
shall be no discharge of the spent paint and/or waste water (generated from washing) into the
sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported
safely for proper disposal by the licensed toxic industrial waste collector. The drums shall be properly
labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage.
23.9 SCAFFOLDING
Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the buildings for the application of paint. Scaffolding
shall not be removed until painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until test results of paint
samples taken out for testing are known.
23.10 CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION
All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and drains shall
be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to the Employer. All
debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.
23.11 PAINTING TO TIMBER DOOR FRAMES & STEEL GATES
The exposed surfaces of the timber door frame and metal gate shall be painted with one undercoat
and one finishing coat of enamel paint regardless of the exposed width. However, exposed surfaces
of metal gates that are made of aluminium, stainless steel and wrought iron need not be painted
unless specified otherwise.
23.12 PAINTING SEALER COAT TO EXTERNAL FACES OF REFUSE

CHUTE WALLS, RC ROOF FASCIA AND WATER TANK ROOM
Before application of emulsion paint, the walls shall be treated with water-proofing sealer of approved
quality in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
23..13 AREA PLANTED WITH CREEPERS
All walls and fencing which are planted with creepers shall be excluded from painting. However,
repairs shall be carried out as specified.
23..14 PAINTING TO ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
Unless otherwise specified, painting to aluminium windows shall be excluded from this contract. All
existing aluminium windows shall be brush cleaned.
23.15 NON-FERROUS METAL STAINED DURING PAINTING
Non-ferrous metal stained or smeared during painting shall be removed with approved paint remover.
Area tarnished by the process shall be polished with wool buffer.
LUP09/S23.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 23-11/11
23.16 WASHING OF PAINT TINS AND TOOLS
Washing of paint tins and tools shall be carried out in sewered areas such as wash areas and dustbin
compounds.
23.17 TELEMONITORING SYSTEM TRIANGLE (TST) INDICATORS
All existing TST indicators located near the topmost floor motor-rooms are not to be disturbed by the
Contractor. If the TST indicators have been defaced, it must be immediately rectified to match the
existing. The Contractor shall exercise care in the execution of the works to prevent any damage to
the Telemonitoring System.
23.18 SHANGHAI PLASTER FINISHES
All surfaces of building finished with shanghai plaster shall be properly washed, clean to remove dust,
stains, dirt etc. Cracks on existing surfaces shall be properly patched up to match existing. The
shanghai plastered surfaces shall be painted with one coat of approved silicone sealer or other
approved to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.19 PAINTING HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS
Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and
one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat
of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
23.20 PROVISION OF PAINT CONTAINERS FOR

PAINT TEST SAMPLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide adequate number of approved 500cc container with air-tight cover for the
paint samples to be taken for tests. The container shall be cylindrical in shape with a diameter of
approximately 9cm and height of 10cm. The capacity of "500cc" shall be sprayed or written on the top
cover. The paint containers shall be delivered to the site office on commencement of the contract and
shall be place under the safe custody of the Resident Technical Officer. The cost of the supply and
delivery of the paint containers shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
23.21 PAINT TESTING
The SO Rep may cause samples to be taken from each consignment of materials or from the works
(where the materials have been incorporated in the works) in the presence of the contractor or his
representative, for testing. All testing fees incurred shall be paid by the contractor direct to the testing
centre. To facilitate the payment for paint tests carried out by PSB, PSB will send the invoices for the
testing fees incurred to the contractor. The contractor shall settle the payment of the testing fees
promptly as directed by PSB.
Should the Employer be informed by PSB that the contractor has failed to settle the payment within
the time stipulated by PSB, the Employer may upon request by PSB, make-direct payment to PSB
and recover the costs from the contractor either by deducting from any monies payable to the
contractor or through invoice to the contractor. However, if there are more than 3 occasions where
the contractor fails to pay PSB in time, the contractor may be restricted from tendering for all the
Employer's future projects for a period to be decided by the SO Rep.
SECTION 24/...
LUP09/S23.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 24-1/1
SECTION 24
RESERVED
SECTION 25/…
LUP09/S24.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-1/7
SECTION 25
CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND,
FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT
25.1 GENERAL
Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and
children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with line
markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings.Details and
finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
25.2 SETTING OUT
Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval
from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by
the SO Rep.
25.3 LEVELS
Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not
necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that
rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where
necessary.
25.4 GROUND BASE
After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before laying
hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft, obtain the
decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.
25.5 CONCRETE STRUCTURE
25.5.1 Construct concrete structure of Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete"
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
25.5.2 Base of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated
hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness of
100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings.
Provide expansion joints to positions and details as shown.
25.5.3 Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts
Where hardcourts and multi-purpose courts are included in the Works, these shall be constructed strictly
in accordance with the Drawings. The slab shall be a minimum of 150mm thick reinforced with wire mesh
D8 placed 35mm from the top surface. The Grade 30 concrete shall be cast as specified in Section 4
"Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
LUP09/S25.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-2/7
25.5.3 Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts (Cont'd)
Contraction joints shall be introduced into the slab at a spacing of 9500mm or as shown in the Drawings. It
shall be formed by a saw-cut after the concrete has aged for at least one day. The depth of the saw-cut
shall be at least 40mm. For multi-purpose courts, a 25mm expansion joint shall be formed strictly in
accordance with the Drawings at the half-court line.
The slab shall be finished with 3 passes of power trowel done without sprinkling of cement dust, cement
grout or water onto the surface. The trowelling shall be completed before the concrete set. Ensure a
sufficient team of workmen to complete the job. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven days
with approved curing compound or other approved methods.
The basketball court stand shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Concrete footing shall
be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. 50 mm thick
nylon cushion padding shall wrap round the standpost to the height as shown in the Drawings. The
backboard shall be 18 mm clear acrylic sheet and shall be fixed to the angle support with 6 mm diameter
stainless steel counter sunk screws and at intervals as shown in the Drawings.
All galvanised steel pipes, angles and supports shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with one coat of undercoat and
one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
All court lines shall be painted with polyurethane paint in bright red, orange, blue or white as indicated.
Samples of polyurethane paint showing the colour range as specified shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that the steel structure are adequately and effectively protected from lightning
strike. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
25.6 CONCRETE PIPES
Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.
25.7 PRECAST SLABS
Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300 mm x 300 mm x 100 mm thick of Grade 30
concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and
cast in steel moulds.
Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10 mm
graded granite chippings.
25.8 SUB-SOIL PIPES
All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962:1989 or SS 272
“UPVC pipes with perforations” as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed
sand as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with UPVC pipe joint fittings. The
maximum length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and
above, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain is
less than 400mm, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the
SO Rep before proceeding.
All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet.
Upon completion of laying all sub-soil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-built
drawings to the SO Rep.
LUP09/S25.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-3/7
25.9 PLAY EQUIPMENT
Fabricate all playground equipment as shown and complying with SS 457: 2007. Install these equipment
in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall produce program for shop drawings, approvals and installation time frame.
Contractor and Consultants to strictly follow specialist’s instructions and installation methods and ensure
shop drawings include details of fixings and footings. Modification by main contractor and/or specialist to
shop drawings shall be re-submitted to Consultants for verification. The installation shall be in accordance
with the approved shop drawings and shall be supervised by the Consultants. The finished product shall
be inspected by the Contractor, Specialist, sub-contractor and the Consultants.
Upon handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance
Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A3, to the SO Rep.
25.10 CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER

FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the
purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the event
the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it are
upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but
such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising
under the Contract.
25.10.2 Concrete Base
The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements with the
necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.
25.10.3 Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring
The wet-pour rubber flooring for the children’s playground consists of a two-layer system, comprising of a
base mat of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (hereinafter referred to as “SBR” for the purposes of this clause
including all subclauses under it) rubber granular and a top surface of Ethylene Propylene Dienemonomer
(hereinafter referred to as “EPDM” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it). The
completed rubber flooring shall be free from Defect, such as blistering, fissure, peeling, delamination,
disintegration, unevenness and discolouration.
The performance of the rubber flooring surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a) Polyurethane Binder
The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate
(hereinafter referred to as “MDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it)
based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to as
“TDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall be
“Flexilon 1102”; “Stobielast S133/S134”; “Tennek TPB 4811 (2c)”; “Incorez 902/023”; “Poly 811-
2C”; or other approved, polyurethane binder.
(b) EPDM Top Layer
The EPDM shall be peroxide cured only. The typical physical properties of the peroxide cured
EPDM shall be as follows:
Hardness (IRHD) : 65 ±5;

Tensile (Mn/m²) : > 4.2
Elongation at break (%) : > 650
Specific Gravity : 1.58 ± 0.03
LUP09/S25.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-4/7
25.10.3 Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring (Cont'd)
(b) EPDM Top Layer (Cont’d)
EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 –4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be UV
stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer.
A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The
colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The
EPDM shall be “BRG”; ”MRI; or other approved.
(c) Base Layer
The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm)
mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick.
(d) Thickness
The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.
25.10.4 Method Of Installation
The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless.
porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring.
(a) Surface Preparation
All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works.
The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the
commencement of the rubber flooring.
(b) SBR Base Rubber
SBR base rubber granules shall be thoroughly mixed by mechanical mixer with the polyurethane
binder and laid onto the concrete slab. A minimum ratio of 100:12 by weight, between the rubber
granules and binder shall be mixed on the Site. The SBR rubber layer shall be minimum 65mm
thick . The screed shall be trowelled to form a uniform and seamless layer. A roller is required to
roll the surface to maintain an equal density surface throughout.
(c) Curing For Base Rubber
The surface shall be cured in ambient temperature for a minimum of 12 hours before proceeding to
the next layer.
(d) EPDM
A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of
100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be
cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application.
(e) Curing For EPDM
The surface can be walked on only after 18 hours. However, the playground shall only be opened
for public usage after 5 days when full curing is achieved. Proper barricade shall be provided
during the process of curing.
(f) Edges
The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-free
transition.
LUP09/S25.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-5/7
25.10.5 Performance Requirements
Where cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber flooring for children's playground in included in the Works, test
certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing
shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a) Resistance To Abrasive Wear
The cast-in-situ surfaces shall exhibit the performance specified hereunder:
(i) Wear index shall be less than 1.0;
(ii) Wear ratio (p) shall be not less than 1.0 and not more than 3.0
(b) Slip Resistance
The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test , under either wet or dry conditions
shall not be less 40.
(c) Resistance To Indentation
The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm.
After removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested shall
exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.
(d) Ease Of Ignition
The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified as
having a “LOW radius of effects of ignition”.
(e) Critical Fall Height
Critical fall height of impact absorbing surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
Before handing over the playground including playground equipment, contractor is required to conduct
impact attenuation test at site to comply with SS 495:2001 and shall submit Performance Compliance
Certificate, together with test report attached in the format as shown in Appendix A3, to the SO Rep.
25.10.6 Warranty
Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty' and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1.
In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to
such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event
that the Deed of Warranty for part of the works or for the whole works is to be submitted to such Town
Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance with the
specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 'Provision of Warranty'
to such Town Councils. The duly executed warranty shall be submitted immediately upon request by the
SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers the works have
been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event that the Contractor and his
Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall
be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution
of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000.00 per Deed of Warranty. However, such sums
withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed Deed of
Warranty.
LUP09/S25.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-6/7
25.11 BONDING OF SPRING ROCKERS (PLAYGROUND)
All spring rockers in playground shall be electrically bonded to weldmesh in accordance to SS CP

33:1996. The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done.
25.12 OUTDOOR FITNESS EQUIPMENT
Fabricate all outdoor fitness equipment as shown and complying with SS 534 : 2007. Install this
equipment in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall produce program for shop drawings, approvals and installation time frame.
Contractor and Consultants to strictly follow specialist’s instructions and installation methods and ensure
shop drawings include details of fixings and footings. Modification by main contractor and/or specialist to
shop drawings shall be re-submitted to Consultants for verification. The installation shall be in accordance
with the approved shop drawings and shall be supervised by the Consultants. The finished product shall
be inspected by the Contractor, Specialist, sub-contractor and the Consultants.
EPDM rubber flooring shall be as specified in Clause 25.10 “Cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for
Children’s Playground”.
Upon handing over the fitness equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance
Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A5 to the SO Rep.
25.13 Equipotential Nettings
Equipotential nettings shall be provided for playground, hardcourt, fitness station with reinforced concrete
base in accordance to CP33 Clause A.5.7.3. The Contractor shall ensure electrical continuity of the
weldmesh/BRC used to form the equipotential surface and that all metallic poles and elements within the
surface are properly bonded to the weldmesh/BRC. The Contractor shall capture all the necesssary
photographs to prove that equipotential nettings are provided and equipment and metallic fixtures are
bonded. These photographs, with dates shown, shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval and record.
In addition, the Contractor's LEW or PE shall submit a certification form (HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET) to HDB
to confirm equipotential nettings have been provided for the playground/hardcourt/fitness station in
accordance to CP33 upon completion of the work.
LUP09/S25.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 25-7/7
Head, Technical Management (M&E) Unit HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET

Building Quality Department
Housing & Development Board
HDB Hub, West Wing, 17th Storey
480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh
Singapore 310480
Dear Sir
CONFIRMATION OF EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS FOR PLAYGROUND, HARDCOURT, FITNESS CORNER,

ETC. WITH REINFORCED CONCRETE BASE
Project Title:
Location Description:
Project Reference No.:
This is to confirm that equipotential nettings have been provided for the below amenities/facilities in
accordance with the CP 33 : 1996.
(A) Type of amenities/facilities Location (near to block no.) Remark
a) _________ _______ ______________
b) _________ _______ ______________
c) _________ _______ ______________
_________ _______ ______________
Yours faithfully
Name & Signature of Contractor LEW or PE LEW No or PE No.
Date: Tel No.:
Name and Stamp of Contractor Tel. No.:

SECTION 26/...
LUP09/S25.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-1/15
SECTION 26
26.0 TREE & SHRUB PLANTING AND TURFING
26.1 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
26.1.1 General
The work generally includes :
(a) Preparation of plant bed and tree hole including soil supplements.
(b) The search, selection, supply, delivery and planting of nursery plants.
(c) Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.
26.1.2 Quality Of Workmanship And Materials
(a) All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be obtained
from approved sources/or suppliers.
(b) All materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality.
(c) All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest disease, discolouration and damage. Plants shall
be well branched with vigorous shoots. The root system of each plant shall contain a good
proportion of fibrous roots.
26.1.3 Inspection
(a) All materials shall be subjected to inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
(b) Inspection and approval of plants on delivery shall be for quality, size and variety only and shall not
in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during the planting or
at the time of inspection for final acceptance.
26.1.4 Submission
(a) Samples
Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved except where specified
otherwise :
Topsoil
Materials for planting mixtures
Materials for staking, guying and wrapping
Fertilizers
(b) Request for Substitution
If substitutions for the plants listed in the plant schedule are required, submit request for
substitution approval in writing within six weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
(c) Photographs of Plant Material
Within six (6) calendar months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, submit
two (2) complete sets of photographs of all plant material subject to inspection. All photographs
shall be labelled and representative of the plant materials specified.
(d) Maintenance Reports and Schedule
During the Maintenance Period, submit monthly reports describing the work completed for the
previous month and the work to be accomplished in the following month.
LUP09/S26.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-2/15
26.1.5 Horticultural Supervisor
The Horticultural Supervisor shall be competent and possesses the skill, knowledge and ability to
coordinate and supervise all tree planting and landscaping works. The qualified Horticultural Supervisor
shall possess the minimum Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture with a minimum of 2 years relevant
experience. The appointment of Horticultural Supervisor has to be submitted to SO Rep for approval prior
to the commencement of any tree planting or landscaping works. The date of appointment shall take effect
from the date of SO Rep approval and shall be in full-time site-based employment by the building
contractor when the physical trees planting or/and landscaping work is progressing on site till completion
of this particular work.
26.1.6 Notice Of Works
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to commence any of
the following operations : setting out; excavation; backfilling; plant delivery and planting.
26.1.7 Topsoil
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable
and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic
matter.
26.1.8 Sub-Soil
The clay content of the sub-soil which is the strata found just below the top soil layer shall not be greater
than 45%.
26.1.9 Unwashed Sand
The unwashed sand shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material.
26.1.10 Soil Conditioner
Soil conditioner shall be peat, cocopeat, organic compost, or other approved fibrous organic matters
suitable for mixing with soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.
26.1.11 Setting Out
(a) The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep.
(b) Any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions on the Site shall be notified to the
SO Rep before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor fails to notify the SO Rep on any
such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting and
realignment of the setting out shall be borne by the Contractor.
(c) The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the Site
to be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works. The pegs shall be
painted to indicate sizes of holes/pits as follows :
Holes/Pit Sizes Colour Indication

0.5m x 0.5m x 0.5m Yellow
1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m Not Painted
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m Red
(d) The shape, pattern and layout of flower beds shall be demarcated and drawn by the Contractor on
the Site. The Site shall be inspected by the SO Rep before further commencement of the Works.
LUP09/S26.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-3/15
26.1.12 Hole For Planting
Holes for planting shall be decided by the SO Rep.
All holes excavated shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before backfilling soil mixture. All
excavated and unwanted materials shall be removed from the Site. The Contractor shall allow in the
Contract Sum for excavating clayish subsoil, broken concrete, rubble or other material when excavating
holes for tree planting as no claim for extras shall be entertained for excavation in difficult or hard ground.
Holes for planting shall be of the following sizes :
(a) Minimum 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m deep for planting of tree saplings.
(b) Minimum 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep for the planting of semi-mature
(instant and 30-litre bag and above) trees and fruit trees.
(c) Minimum 500mm deep for flower beds or trenches to areas as shown in the Drawings.
(d) Minimum 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep for planting of shrubs and foliage plants.
26.1.13 Soil Mixture For Backfilling
(a) Waterlogged Hole
If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, necessary action or measure shall be
taken to rectify the waterlogged condition.
(b) Soil Mixture
All planting holes shall be backfilled with 3:1 topsoil, soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of
granular fertiliser NPK (15:15:6:4) well mixed to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground
level at time of filling.
(c) Soil Mixture For Roof Garden
All planting boxes/ beds shall be backfilled with 4:3:2 topsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner
with 20g of water-holding medium per m3, well mixed to the same level of the planter boxes at the
time of filling.
(d) Soil Mixture Used For Instant Tree
All planting holes for transplanted instant trees/palms/shrubs shall be backfilled with only topsoil.
(e) Soil Mixture For Fruit Trees
Similar soil mixture shall be used. The excavated earth shall be used to constructed earth mound
averaging 50 mm high and 1750mm wide along the edge of the holes all round.
26.1.14 Purchase Of Trees
The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.
26.1.15 Plant Protection
(a) All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery during the
lifting, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site.
(b) Any evidence of unsatisfactory protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves will result in plants
being rejected. Unprotected plants shall not be transported during hot weather and all plants shall
be kept moist during transportation and storage. No plant shall be left on the Site unplanted for
more than two (2) days.
LUP09/S26.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-4/15
26.1.16 Plant Quality
(a) All trees, palms, shrubs and other plants delivered to the Site shall be of the specified size, free of
pests and diseases and undamaged. Plants shall be well branched with bushy foliage.
(b) All the general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep
and approved by him before planting out onto the Site in accordance with the Drawings or as
(c) The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged, injured,
diseased, infested or any other plants not in accordance with the Contract and to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep during the entire period including the Maintenance Period and Defects Liability Period
of the Contract.
(d) The Contractor shall immediately remove and replace all rejected plants at his own cost and
expense.
(e) The plant size shall be measured on the day of planting at the Site in accordance with the
Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing.
(f) Plants not complying to the specified sizes shall be rejected and rectified by the Contractor. All
associated costs involved including plant material cost shall be charged and deducted from any
monies due to the Contractor, if he fails to rectify.
(g) All trees, palms and shrubs shall possess the natural characteristics and growth habit typical of its
variety and species to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(h) All trees, palms and shrubs where required under the Contract shall comply with the descriptions
and requirements specified hereunder :
"Instant Trees"
Instant trees are semi-matured trees especially prepared in advance for transplanting. Instant trees
shall have the specified minimum clear and upright straight tree trunk of the specified height and
girth with at least 3 branches and a well developed secondary branch system.
"Big Saplings"
Big saplings are medium-sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and unbroken
leader with an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with an evenly spread
and balanced lateral branches and shall be of the specified girth measured at 0.5m from the
ground.
"Saplings"
Saplings are small sized nursery grown trees having single straight stem and unbroken leader with
an overall height as specified. The stem shall be fully furnished with evenly and balanced lateral.
"Edible Fruit Trees"
Edible fruit trees shall be of minimum height of 1.2m or as specified. They shall be marcotted or
grafted saplings especially as follows :
• Pouteria caimito (Abiu) - Grafted

• Persea americana (Avocado) - Grafted
• Achras zapota (Chiku) - Marcotted
• Durio zibethinus (Durian) - Grafted
• Psidium guajava (Guava) - Grafted or Marcotted
• Artocarpus heterophyllus (Jackfruit) - Grafted
• Eugenia aquea (Jambu Air) - Marcotted
• Citrus microcarpa (Lime) - Grafted
• Mangifera indica (Mango) - Grafted
• Nephelium lappaceum (Rambutan) - Grafted
• Annona muricata (Soursop) - Grafted
• Averrhoa carambola (Starfruit) - Grafted
• Artocarpus incisus (Breadfruit) - Grafted
LUP09/S26.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-5/15
26.1.16 Plant Quality (Cont'd)
(h) Cont'd
"Single-stemmed Palms"
Single stemmed palms shall have a straight trunk of the specified height measured from the root
collar. The heads of the palms shall be balanced with at least five fronds and evidenced of one new
shoot.
"Clustered Palms"
Clustered palms are palms which naturally grow as a multi-stemmed clump by sending out
suckers. Such palms shall have a minimum of three suckers each and have a specified overall
height measured from the root collar. They shall have at least three fronds on each stem and
evidence of one new growing shoot per stem.
"Shrubs"
Shrubs are woody perennials of generally multi-stemmed and bushy habit and shall have a
minimum height measured from the ground level to the top of plants as specified. Such shrubs
shall be well balanced and bushy with strong developed fibrous root systems, and shall be pruned
in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances. Branches shall break from the
base of the plant just above the root collar, and shall be well furnished with leaves right down to the
ground level unless otherwise specified by the SO Rep. All plants shall be grown in containers of
suitable dimensions for the species.
"Herbaceous Plants"
Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit. Such plants shall
have well-developed main stem or stems with good symmetry, and a healthy root system. Clump of
herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots with soil undisturbed by lifting with
evidence of growing shoots emerging above the soil level. All herbaceous plants shall be grown in
containers unless specified as being produced by an alternate method.
"Groundcover"
Groundcover plants are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose habit are to
totally cover the soil. All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal growth in all
directions. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves. All plants shall be grown in
containers.
"Climbers"
Climbers are plants whose growth habit are to climb upwards by means of twining stems, tendrils
or clinging roots. Such plants shall have at least two leader shoots up to the specified height or
length and a vigorous root system. All plants are to be grown in containers.
26.1.17 Planting Techniques
(a) Where trees/palms are planted in turf or shrub areas, plant trees and palms before the turfing or
shrub planting operations. Where shrubs are planted in turfed areas, plant the shrubs before the
turfing work.
(b) The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that the ball of soil surrounding the roots
is not broken. The plant should be firmly held by the pot, plaster bags, containers, etc.
(c) The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their pots,
containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall straighten
the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S26.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-6/15
26.1.17 Planting Techniques (Cont'd)
(d) All plants shall be planted with their collars levelled with the ground and covered with soil as
(e) All plants shall be planted to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to the same soil
depth as in the nursery and shall be well watered before removing them from the containers. The
plants shall be positioned upright and the soil firmed around the roots.
(f) For large areas, the outer rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape of the bed is
established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the planting area. The
SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants to fill the area required,
and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed accordingly.
(g) The laying out of plants shall be completed and approved before planting into the soil bed can
commence.
(h) Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a trowel
or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate the root ball of
the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make firm into the ground
by treading or hand pressure. All plants shall be watered thoroughly immediately after planting.
26.1.18 Tree Support
(a) To Tree Sapling
Tree saplings shall be supported immediately as directed after planting. The supporting stakes
shall be in 75mm diameter Bintangore pole or other approved material, minimum 3.0m long and
driven vertically 1.2m deep into the ground without injuring the rootballs and projecting 250mm
above the crown of the sapling. Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by rubber or PVC
hose and tie wires. Tying wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised wire, threaded through 10mm
diameter rubber or plastic hose and be wound around the tree trunk in a single loop. The tree
trunk shall be secured at a point just above its branch and also at a point just 500mm above
ground level.
(b) To Semi-Mature/Mature/Instant Tree (Tripod Support)
For semi-mature/mature/instant tree, 3 tree stakes of Bintangore poles shall be evenly spaced
around the tree to form a tripod system to support the transplanted tree at about two thirds of its
height or under the main fork. The tree stakes of Bintangore poles are driven at least 0.5m into the
ground at an angle. 2 layers of gunny sack or similar material shall be wound around the tree trunk
where it meets the supporters. The meeting point of the supporters are tightened up with
galvanised wire to form a sturdy tripod support system. The support system shall be checked
monthly and be removed after 6 months when the tree becomes stable.
26.1.19 Tree Guards
Provide tree guards to trees planted as specified by the SO Rep. The pattern of the tree guard shall be
decided by the SO Rep.
26.1.20 Tree Shade
Provide shading to mangosteen, rambutan or other sensitive fruit trees as directed by the SO Rep. Nylon
netting or other approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to cover the top of the tree guard
and upper 500mm of its four (4) sides.
LUP09/S26.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-7/15
26.1.21 Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree)
Where required under the Contract, transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows :
(a) Branch Pruning
Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed by the SO Rep. Paint all cuts with fungicidal
sealant.
(b) Rootballs
All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter
ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above ground level
or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench about 0.8m
deep around the tree at appropriate distance. All protruding roots shall be cut and painted with a
fungicidal sealant.
Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed by
the SO Rep.
(c) Tree Pits
To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to the
new location. Pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to allow for
incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit dimension shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x
1.0m deep.
All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a level
250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of filling.
(d) Lifting And Transporting
The tree shall be lifted by motor crane or other lifting machinery of appropriate capacity. Every
precaution including rootball securely wrapped by moisten canvass and angle bar frame or other
approved materials shall be taken to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading and
transporting of the tree to the new location.
(e) Before unloading tree into position, the depth and diameter of the rootball shall be measured and
adjustment made to the pit. The tree shall be set in the hole, orientated, depth adjusted and
planted with minimum delay. The tree shall be planted to its former depth. Backfilling shall then be
firmly consolidated to eliminate air pockets under and around the roots. Tripod shall be provided to
keep it firmly in position if required.
26.1.22 Tree Pruning
Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the specified
height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an
experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural
Supervisor :
(a) Pruning shall be done with a cut just above and sloping away from an outward facing healthy
bud;
(b) Removal of branches shall be done by cutting flush with the adjoining stem and in such a way
that no part of the stem is damaged or torn;
(c) Ragged edges of barks shall be trimmed with a sharp knife;
(d) Any cut or wound over 25mm diameter shall be painted with an approved sealant such as
"Arbrex" or other approved after trimming; and
(e) All pruning shall be cleared and removed from the Site after pruning.
LUP09/S26.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-8/15
26.1.23 Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc
Planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. shall be maintained prior to handing over to the Employer
and shall be further maintained for another 6 months from the date the planting is handed over to the
Employer by performing and/or providing the following :
26.1.23.1 Watering
(a) Trees
20 litres of water per tree shall be watered as and when directed by the SO Rep.
(b) Landscaped Site
10 litre of water per m2 of the landscaped site shall be watered as and when directed by the SO
Rep.
(c) Method
Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun to
wet the soil thoroughly.
26.1.23.2 Soil-Loosening
(a) Ornamental Tree Saplings
For ornamental tree saplings, the weeding circle shall be loosened to a depth of 75mm using a
garden fork.
(b) Shrub/Foliage/Landscaped Site
For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked to a depth of 100mm using a
garden fork.
26.1.23.3 Weeding
(a) Ornamental Trees
For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel or
weeding hoe.
Weed out an annular band of 50mm around mature or semi-mature tree base using hand trowel
or weeding hoe or approved weedicide.
(b) Fruit Trees
For fruit tree saplings, spread 100mm of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass sword,
wood chips, cocopeat or compost over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. Spray weedicide on
the edge of mulched area (50mm band) using a knapsack sprayer equipped with a "drift-shield".
The mulched area shall be weeded monthly.
For semi-mature and mature fruit trees, a weeding annular band of 200mm around the tree base
shall be maintained by weeding operation.
(c) Shrub/Foliage (Individually Planted)
A weeding circle of 0.5m diameter around individually planted shrub/foliage shall be manually
weeded using hand trowel or weeding hoe.
(d) Landscaped Site
The Landscaped site shall be weeded using hand trowel or weeding hoe.
(e) Hedge
An annular band of 0.5m diameter around the base of hedge shall be weeded using hand trowel
or weeding hoe.
LUP09/S26.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-9/15
26.1.23 Maintenance Of Trees, Shrubs And Ground Covers, Etc (Cont'd)
26.1.23.4 Fertilising
(a) Ornamental Trees
Sapling
Fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree sapling
within the weeding circle 120mm away from stem.
Semi-Mature/Mature Trees
For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be inserted at a

rate of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline.
(b) Fruit Tree
Saplings Less Than 1 Year Old
For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be placed under
the mulch at a rate of 300g per tree, 120mm away from the stem.
Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees
For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) shall be broadcasted
at a rate of 0.5kg per tree within drip zone away from stem.
Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting)
For mature (flowering/fruiting) fruit trees, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted (on
level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO Rep within
drip zone away from stem.
(c) Shrub/Foliage
For shrub/foliage, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with
weeding circle 100mm away from stem.
(d) Landscaped Site/Hedge
For landscaped site/hedge, fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2 as
(e) Climber/Creeper
For climber/creeper, approved foliar fertilizer shall be sprayed as directed by the SO Rep.
26.1.23.5 Trimming
Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and/or providing the following:
(a) Trim and remove all extra leader.
(b) Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 3.0m from ground for trees
along footpaths, carparks and roadside.
(c) Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots.
(d) Trim and remove all overlapping branches rubbing each other.
(e) Remove and clear from the Site all trimmed vegetation.
(f) Paint all cut surfaces exceeding 25.4mm with 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant.
LUP09/S26.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-10/15
26.1.23.6 Pest Control
(a) Vegetative Stage Of Trees
For vegetative stage of trees, top and bottom of tree leaves shall be thoroughly sprayed.
Respraying shall be done if it rains within 6 hours after spraying. Approved pesticides are :
Pesticides
Dimethoate 40% EC
Deltamethrin 1.25% EC
White Summer Oil 80% EC
Abate 1% Sand Granules Benomyl 50% EC
Captan 50% UP
Thiram 80% UP
Terrazole 24% EC
Copper Fungicide (Metalic Copper) 50%
Mancozeb 80% WP
Captafol 39% EC
Omite Tenac (sticker) 30% WP
(b) Fruiting Stage Of Fruit Trees
For fruiting stage of fruit trees, brown paper or raffia bags shall be used for control of fruit fly 3 to
4 weeks after flowering for Chiku, Chempedak, Guava, Jackfruit, Jambu Ayer, Mango, Pomelo
and Starfruit.
Approved brown paper and raffia bags shall be used to bag the fruits as follows :
Fruit Size of Bag Material of Bag

Chiku; Starfruit 150 x 150mm Brown Paper
Guava; Mango 150 x 300mm Brown Paper
Jambu Ayer; Pomelo 400 x 400mm Brown Paper
Chempedak 400 x 500mm Brown Paper or Raffia
Jackfruit 500 x 800mm Brown Paper or Raffia
Remove and clear from the Site all rotten fruits on trees or on ground.
(c) Shrubs/Foliage Etc
For shrubs/foliage etc, immediately spray with approved pesticides after the infestation is
spotted. Continue such spraying until the infestation is controlled.
LUP09/S26.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-11/15
26.1.23.7 Maintenance
Planted trees shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie, making good
damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or performing other reasonable
work. The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all
planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc provided under the Contract for a further period of six
months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of
the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as "Maintenance Period" for
the purposes of this section including all clauses and subclauses under it) by providing and/or
performing the following :
Operation Frequency
Soil Loosening Monthly
Weeding Monthly
Watering Daily )
Pest Control Monthly ) and/or to be carried out
Fertilising Monthly ) as directed by the SO Rep.
Pruning Monthly )
Adjusting tree ties Monthly )
Damaged/Missing Tree Guards, Supporters, ) To be replaced/repaired as directed by

Trees, Shrubs, Ground covers, etc. ) the SO Rep
26.1.23.8 Warning Sign
(a) The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site
during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep.
(b) The Contractor shall also seal off the Site with red and white plastic tapes as an additional safety
precaution during the execution of the Works.
(c) The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with reflective
sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS" OR "DANGER
PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS". A sample of the signboard shall be submitted to the
SO Rep for approval before using on the Site.
26.1.23.9 Working Hours Of Tree Pruning
The Contractor shall carry out routine tree pruning/trimming operation within the following hours :
Monday to Friday : 7am to 3pm

Saturday : 7am to 12 noon
No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep.
26.1.23.10 Updating of Landscape Plan
The Contractor shall update a landscape plan within one month after final planting and to provide 6 sets
of updated plans to the SO Rep.
LUP09/S26.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-12/15
26.2 TURFING
26.2.1 SITE PREPARATION AND TURFING
The Contractor shall allow for turfing Works, forming slopes and platforms with even surfaces to the levels
all as shown in the Drawings. Clear away loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris. Seek
the approval of the SO Rep before commencing turfing Works.
26.2.1.1 Soil For Site Formation
The soil used for backfilling shall be original clean earth and the topmost 600mm shall be soil with a clay
content of not more than 45%.
26.2.1.2 Soil Scarification For Compacted Site
The top layer shall be scarified or loosened to 100mm deep for the whole Site and graded to fall towards
drains or as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
26.2.1.3 Site Gradient
The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as instructed by
the SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
26.2.2 SITE CONTROL TESTS AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS
Provide all necessary labour, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments etc. for carrying out all checking
and testing of site Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses to
comply with the foregoing requirements in the Contract Sum. No claim for compensation or extras shall
be paid for any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with such Works.
26.2.2.1 Number Of Soil Test
The number of soil samples shall be 1 per 500m2 subject to a minimum of 3 samples.
26.2.2.2 Percolation Test
Procedures for Percolation Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:
(a) Randomly select a spot where the test is to be conducted;
(b) Dig a hole measuring about 400mm x 400mm x 600mm deep;
(c) Fill the hole with water up to the top;
(d) Cover the hole;
(e) After 24 hours, observe whether or not all the water has drained off. The drainage performance of
the soil is acceptable if no water remains in the hole.
LUP09/S26.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-13/15
26.2.2 SITE CONTROL TESTS AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS
26.2.2.3 Jar Test
The procedures for Jar Test on dry soil sample are as hereunder specified:
(a) Fill a 250 ml measuring cylinder with water up to its two-third level;
(b) Pour in a teaspoon of washing detergent;
(c) Shake the contents well;
(d) Pour in soil sample until the water level rises to the 250ml mark;
(e) Shake the contents well;
(f) Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is level;
(g) Take measurement of the sand level;
(h) After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt
interface;
(i) After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the silt-clay
interface;
(j) Work out the percentage of clay, silt and sand.
26.2.3 Soil Mixture
26.2.3.1 General Requirement
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter, be friable
and porous in texture. The texture content shall be 40-50% sand, 20-25% clay and 20% approved organic
matter.
26.2.3.2 Type of Soil Mixture
The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of soil conditioner and 1kg per m3 of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1kg per m3 of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6:4).
26.2.4 Thickness Of Soil Mixture
The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to turf) at
time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface, followed by
the planting of the fresh turf.
26.2.5 Use Of Non-Potable Water
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses incurred in the collection,
storage, transportation and use of non-potable water, when directed by the SO Rep, for watering turf,
trees and shrubs. Non-potable water can be collected free of charge from the ENV Sewage Treatment
Works. These Sewage Treatment Works are located at :
(a) Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works

(b) Kim Chuan Sewage Treatment Works
(c) Seletar Sewage Treatment Works
(d) Kranji Sewage Treatment Works
(e) Bedok Sewage Treatment Works
(f) Jurong Sewage Treatment Works
LUP09/S26.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 26-14/15
26.2.5 Use Of Non-Potable Water (Cont’d)
The Contractor shall use water tankers or water-tight tanks mounted on trucks to collect the non-potable
water from any of the above ENV Sewage Treatment Works. The tank is preferred to have a minimum
capacity of 9000 litres. The Contractor must also ensure that unused non-potable water is returned to the
Sewage Treatment Works for proper disposal and not discharged into open drains in water catchment
areas.
The Contractor shall submit detailed particulars of their water tankers or tank mounted trucks to the SO
Rep who will then obtain an authorization letter from ENV for the registered tanker to collect non-potable
water.
The Contractor shall submit detailed justifications to the SO Rep for not using non-potable water for
watering turf, trees and shrubs, after direction has been given by the SO Rep to do so.
26.2.6 Turfing Materials
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the roots,
be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be Cow
Grass (Axonopus Compressus). The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
26.2.7 Planting Turf
Sods shall be laid within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like patterns. Sods shall be firmly sunken into
the ground with their edges in contact but without stretching or overlapping or gap. Water the turf
immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
26.2.8 Rolling
When the level of the completed turfing Works is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on
steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with a garden roller of weight not more than 150 kg or with other
approved means. The turfing shall give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out
when the turf is established after the second grass cutting.
26.2.9 Temporary Fencing
Provide and fix temporary barricade to all turfed areas comprising 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau
timber posts spaced at 2.4m centres with one end driven 450mm into the ground. Corner and end posts
shall be strutted by 2 nos. of 50mm x 50mm x 1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter nylon ropes
diagonally and horizontally across the top and bottom of the barricade.
26.2.10 Maintenance (Turfing Works)
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for Completion and any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, and for a further period of six months
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works
as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the “Maintenance Period” for the
purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) by providing and/ or performing the following:
(a) Watering with a volume of 10 litres per m2 daily for the first two weeks after planting and when
necessary or as directed by the SO Rep;
(b) Weeding where and when necessary or as directed by the SO Rep;
(c) Replacing dead turf or re-turf base areas;
(d) Fertilising before handing over, and on the 3rd and 6th month of the Maintenance Period;
(e) Cutting grass fortnightly.
UG03/S26.DOC(14)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 26-15/15
26.2.11 Safety Measures For Grass-Cutting Machines
(a) Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to his workmen, the general public and the
property of others.
(b) All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed with suitable
protective guards of steel or other approved materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects
from causing damage. Under no circumstances shall the protective guards be removed from
machines in operation.
(c) Hand held open blade rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without approved guards.
(d) The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety
requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the
grass-cutter to stop work.
(e) Before grass-cutting commences, the public shall be kept at least 10 metres radially away from the
grass-cutter and a signboard shall be erected on the Site with the wordings "DANGER KEEP OFF.
GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS".
(f) The grass-cutting blade shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine is in continuous
use, regular checks shall be made. The blade shall be kept in good condition. A worn-out blade
shall be replaced immediately.
(g) The bolts and nuts which are fastened to the cutter blade shall be checked before the machines
are operated to prevent the blade from flying off.
26.3 GEOTEXTILE
Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile
shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80-150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample
for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the site.
26.4 WATER-HOLDING MEDIUM
Water-holding medium is an absorbent co-polymer water crystal that increase the water-holding capacity
of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.
SECTION 27/…
UG03/S26.DOC(15)
(LKK)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 27-1/1
SECTION 27
RESERVED
SECTION 28/...
LUP09/S27.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 28-1/1
SECTION 28
RESERVED
SECTION 29/...
LUP09/S28.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 29-1/1
SECTION 29
RESERVED
SECTION 30/...
LUP09/S29.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 30-1/1
SECTION 30
30.0 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)
30.1 GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES
Where shown or specified, provide and fix the facilities (e.g. table tennis table, kiosks, tables, benches
etc.) at 1st storey all as shown in the Drawings. Painting to timber and metal work shall be as specified in
Section 23 "PAINTING AND DECORATING" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
SECTION 31/...
LUP09/S30.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-1/15
SECTION 31
31.0 LIFT INSTALLATION/REFURBISHMENT
31.1 GENERAL
31.1.1 Lift installation and/or refurbishment shall form part of a separate contract unless otherwise specified.
Where lift installation an/or refurbishment forms part of the Contract, only Lift Contractors who are
registered with BCA shall be employed by the Contractor to execute the lift installation and/or
refurbishment work.
31.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, all building works in connection with lift installation and/or refurbishment
shall be provided by the Contractor. Such building works shall include but not be limited to the
provision of protective hoardings and/or barricades, filling up void between landing walls and lift door
jambs, thickening of the existing landing walls or employing other approved means so that the wall
surface at lobby side is in alignment with the lift door jambs, provision of lintel or deepening of the
depth of beam above the head jambs to reduce gap, improvement to lift machine rooms, preparation
of lift well, etc.
31.1.3 The Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor on the scheduling and coordination of their
respective works in connection with lift installation and/or refurbishment to ensure that the whole
works are completed on time. Upon receipt of the SO Rep’s instruction to start work, the Contractor
shall commence the work as soon as is reasonably possible and complete the work expeditiously.
Any change to the schedule shall be approved by SO Rep.
31.1.4 The Contractor shall be required to attend site meetings in connection with lift installation/
refurbishment works from time to time when notified by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall appoint a
responsible person authorised to accept and to make decisions or otherwise act on the Contractor’s
behalf to attend such meetings.
31.1.5 Provided always that written approval shall be obtained from the SO Rep prior to the commencement
of any hacking work to the lift machine room, lift well, etc.
31.2 PROTECTION/HANDING OVER OF LIFTS AND LIFT EQUIPMENT
31.2.1 During the currency of the contract, the lifts shall not be used for transportation of goods or materials.
31.2.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the lift refurbishment/replacement work but pending handover of the
building to the Employer, the Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor for protection of the work.
Such protection work shall be provided by the Contractor.
31.2.3 The lift entrance door jambs, lift car panels, door columns and floor and any other lift and/or landing
equipment when directed by the SO Rep shall be boarded up for each lift individually with 6mm thick
veneered plywood of adequate strength and suitably braced. All other lift equipment at the landings
including the call buttons, car position indicators and siren boxes shall also be protected with timber
board or other appropriate means until such time the building is handed over. The lift car floor shall
be protected with plywood and linoleum and the front edge of the plywood on the floor along the door
sill shall be prominently marked with a 50mm wide yellow strip.
31.2.4 All lift equipment in the lift machine room, lift well and lift landings shall not be tampered with nor
removed. The Contractor shall make good any damage to the lift equipment.
LUP09/S31.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-2/15
31.2.5 Any equipment and component damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Lift Contractor to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep and the cost so incurred shall be borne by the Contractor. Before
construction of any new ramp at the lift entrance and new tiling at the lift landing wall, the Contractor
shall arrange with the Lift Contractor for a joint inspection to ascertain any existing damages to be
rectified by the Lift Contractor.
31.2.6 Before handing over the buildings and lifts to the Employer, the Contractor shall arrange for a joint
inspection with the Lift Contractor and SO Rep to ascertain any damages to the lift/lift equipment
which requires making good. Such making good shall be repaired by the Lift Contractor at the
Contractor’s cost as specified in this Clause.
31.2.7 Where the lift machine room needs to be modified, widened or reconstructed, the Contractor shall
take all necessary precautions by providing adequate shelter and protection to the lift equipment from
possible damage and accumulation of dirt, rain water and other foreign objects. Whenever there is lift
equipment in the machine room regardless of the lift being under installation, operational or otherwise,
the Contractor shall ensure that the lift machine room is partitioned with a wall or hoarding and door
with lock to prevent unauthorised access. Where hoarding is provided, it shall be adequately
strengthened with ribs. It shall cover the full height from the floor to the ceiling of the lift machine room
and shall be rigid enough to withstand a horizontal force of 50 kg. Any wall, roof, floor and louvre that
is removed in the process shall be enclosed with temporary hoarding or boarding. The contractor shall
maintain sufficient ventilation and lighting for the lift equipment and workers. Such door, partition,
hoarding and boarding shall be of sufficient rigidity and proper design and construction for
safeguarding the lift equipment and lift and contractor’s workers from weather, debris, dust, damage,
loss and injury.
31.2.8 When the building is handed over to the Employer or when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor
shall remove and dispose of all temporary materials used for the protection of the lift equipment. The
Contractor shall clean areas where the lift equipment had been protected to remove all marks and
stains to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3 LIFT MACHINE ROOM
31.3.1 The Contractor shall maintain both the 3-phase and single phase electricity supply to the lift machine
room of each lift during the currency of the Contract. This is to enable the lift equipment to be
charged and lift servicing to be carried out during the Time for Completion.
31.3.2 For access into the lift machine room the Contractor may collect the keys for machine room door and
building trap door from the Town Council office or the Resident Technical Officer on the day of
commencement of work. The keys must be returned to the Town Council office or Resident Technical
Officer immediately after the Substantial Completion of the work. All machine rooms and trap doors
must be locked when there are no workers in the machine room and on Substantial Completion of the
job.
31.3.3 All holes or chipped-off area on walls of all lift machine rooms shall be roughened, well brushed to
remove all loose materials and dirt, applied with a coat of bonding agent and patched or sealed up
with cement mortar (1:3).
31.3.4 The painting and finishes of interior of all lift machine rooms shall be as specified in Section 23.0
Painting And Decorating to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3.5 The Contractor shall repair any spalling concrete and/or water leakage in the lift machine rooms.
LUP09/S31.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-3/15
31.3.6 All existing precast ventilation louvres in the lift machine rooms shall be removed, the resultant wall
opening enlarged and new aluminium or other approved louvres installed as specified or shown in the
drawings. Unless otherwise specified and where structural elements are not affected, the openings
for the new louvres shall be 20 percent of the lift machine room floor area with cross ventilation for all
lifts contained in the lift machine room. Where required by the SO Rep, a canopy is to be provided to
prevent rainwater from splashing into the lift machine rooms through the louvres. The design of the
canopy shall be as approved by the SO Rep. The existing lift machine room doors or trap doors shall
be removed and replaced with a new robust door complete with locking facilities having the same
master keys as existing locks all to the approval of the SO Rep.
For lift machine room where normal natural ventilation is restricted because of size and location of the
lift machine room and there is need to close existing ventilation opening, a fire damper in at least
three pieces for the ventilated area shall be installed subject to SO Rep’s and FSSD approval instead
of closing the existing ventilation opening.
31.3.7 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damaging the walls, floors, and
woodwool slab on the ceiling of the lift machine rooms and any water pipes, CATV wiring, telephone
lines, lighting fixtures, isolator, consumer unit and cables found in the lift machine room, if such
services cannot be diverted out of the lift machine room. Where such services which are not part of
lift installation can be diverted, they should be diverted outside the lift machine room as specified in
Clause 31.9 to the satisfaction of SO Rep. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all
such damages, if any, to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
31.3.8 Where the existing lift machine rooms are to be modified or widened, the Contractor shall carry out all
building works required including but not be limited to the enlargement of existing openings and/or
provision of new openings in the lift machine room floor and/or wall, new reinforced concrete beams,
kerbs, plinth, hoisting hook, etc. in accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the Lift
Contractor. Where necessary, the entire lift machine room floor shall be hacked and reconstructed in
accordance with the SO Rep’s drawings. The Contractor shall also seal up any unused openings with
reinforced concrete or chequer plate of minimum 6mm thick painted with anti-rust and remove any
redundant reinforced concrete machine beam, plinth, kerb, hoisting hook, etc. Chipped-off or
damaged area of the lift machine room floor shall be made good by roughening, brushing off all loose
materials and dirt, applying a coat of bonding agent, patching up with cement mortar (1:3) and
finished smooth.
31.3.9 Where it is necessary to hack the existing lift machine room floor to create new openings, the
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to avoid damaging the underside of the lift machine
room floor. Such damages, if any, shall be made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of SO’s
Rep.
31.3.10 Details of the works described in the above Clause 31.3.8 and 31.3.9 shall be as shown in the
drawings provided or to be provided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to
ensure that such details are confirmed at least two (2) months before commencement of the works.
31.3.11 Where the height of the existing lift machine rooms are to be raised or where new lift machine rooms
are to be constructed, the Contractor shall carry out all building works including but not be limited to
the construction of new walls, roof, beams, columns, etc.; provision of machine beam, floor trenches,
floor openings, reinforced concrete kerbs and plinths, hoisting hooks, etc.; and hacking of the existing
lift machine room. Details of such works shall be as shown in the drawings or as provided by the SO
Rep. The Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep to ensure that such details are confirmed at least
two (2) months before commencement of the works. Any revision to the details of such work shall not
constitute a Variation to the Contract.
LUP09/S31.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-4/15
31.3.12 Where the existing lift machine rooms are modified/widened and/or where its height are raised or new
lift machine rooms are constructed, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) Where required, the existing machine beam shall be cut flush to the wall and the plinth
completely hacked and removed or modified to the specifications of the Lift Contractor;
(b) All exposed steel bars or beams shall be cut flush with the edges of the openings. All unsound
and/or loose concrete and the scale on rusted steel bars/beams shall be removed. Rust-proof
protective coating shall be applied to the exposed steel bars/beams prior to the application of
25mm thick non-shrink cement mortar on the edges of the openings to cover the exposed steel
bars/beams;
(c) Where required, the existing chequer plates for covering openings on the floor of the lift
machine room shall be removed; and
(d) All openings in the floor of lift machine rooms required for new lift installation shall be
temporarily covered to prevent objects from dropping into the lift well until the lift machine room
is taken over by the Lift Contractor. Such temporary covers shall be securely mounted and
shall be of adequate strength and rigidity to withstand the load of workmen standing on it.
31.3.13 Where the new or reconstructed lift machine room is raised above the main roof of a building, RC
staircase or galvanized mild steel cat ladder/stair should be provided as a means of access to the lift
machine room from the main roof level as specified by the SO Rep. The galvanized cat ladder/stair
shall have steps up to the lift machine room floor level at 200mm interval with hand-hold of approved
design from lift machine room level up to 1.6m above lift machine room floor level. The cat ladder/
stair and hand-hold shall be installed away from the door way of the lift machine room.
The lift machine room door shall be provided with means (eg. hook) to secure it in the open position
once opened. In addition to the mortise lockset (as required in drawings or elsewhere in
specifications), locking eyes (for padlock) shall also be provided if directed by the SO Rep.
31.3.14 The Contractor shall provide a safe and unobstructed passageway of 2m wide and 1.8m high leading
from the roof trap door to the lift machine room to facilitate the moving, installation and maintenance
of lifts and lift equipment/parts. Provided always that the dimensions of the passageway may be
reduced to suit site conditions subject to the approval of the SO Rep and without any cost adjustment
in order to avoid causing any damage to existing structural elements.
31.3.15 In conjunction with Clause 31.3.11 and 31.3.12, whether the lift machine room is to be improved,
modified, enlarged, re-constructed or constructed (new), the tender drawings on the lift machine room
plan shall serve only as a guide. The Contractor shall follow the drawings and any amendments to be
provided by the SO Rep and the Lift Contractor’s requirements. Any change to the tender drawings
shall not constitute a Variation to the Contract.
31.3.16 For all new or raised lift machine rooms, once the lift machine is set in position and the floor trunking
is installed by the Lift Contractor, the Contractor shall screed the entire floor with cement mortar of up
to the top of the floor trunking. A layer of approved galvanized expand mesh shall be embedded in
the cement screed. The cement screed shall be isolated from the lid of the trunking such that it is not
sealed and can be opened and closed without difficulty.
31.3.17 All existing bird-proof netting covering the ventilation opening in the lift machine room and lift well
which are rusty and/or damaged, missing or improperly installed shall be replaced by the Contractor.
Where required, new bird-proof netting shall be installed as specified by SO Rep and to his
satisfaction. The replacement or new bird-proof netting shall be installed at the outer side of the
window/ventilation opening such that it leaves no ledge for the birds to perch on. All netting used
shall be of galvanized mild steel material and of adequate rigidity.
LUP09/S31.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-5/15
31.3.18 The Contractor shall provide the following signages in etched 2mm thick anodized aluminium plate in
accordance with Clause 18.41 and to SO Rep’s approval :
(i) “DANGER, LIFT MACHINE ROOM, NO UNAUTHORISED PERSONS” (the size of the letters
shall not be less than 50 mm high)
(ii) “NO SMOKING” (sign plate with approved logo)
The notice (i) shall be fixed outside the lift machine room on the lift machine room door or wall of the
lift machine room with stainless steel screws to the SO Rep’s satisfaction. Sign plate (ii) shall be fixed
within the lift machine room on the wall.
31.3.19 Contractors shall not remove the TMS communication cable and the single phase A/C power supply
to the TMS equipment in the lift machine room without prior permission from the SO Rep. This shall
include the TMS communication cable running from the Lift Monitoring Device (LMD) inside the lift
machine room to the rosette which is usually located at the top-floor staircase, and finally to the
Singapore Telecom's distribution point.
31.3.20 The TMS equipment shall be operational as long as the lift is working during the upgrading period of
the block. If there is a need to remove the cables subject to prior approval, the Contractor shall
provide temporary cables to maintain the system's functionality within the same working day. Should
the Contractor fail to provide the temporary cables, the SO Rep shall appoint a third party to execute
the work and all costs and expenses incurred, plus 20% administrative charge, shall be recovered by
the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from any monies due or that shall become due to the
Contractor, or made payable direct from the Contractor to HDB.
The Contractor shall engage HDB's approved or appointed contractor to remove, re-install and
commission Lift monitoring Device (LMD) and/or any other services that obstruct the upgrading of the
said lift. Such work is necessary if, for example, the LMD of another lift poses an obstruction to the
upgrading of the lift which the Contractor is working on. The Contractor should contact the SO Rep
involved in the lift upgrading work for details if in doubt. The Contractor shall bear the cost of the
above-mentioned works, including any charges by HDB's approved or appointed contractor and/or
other specialist contractors.
31.3.21 The Contractor shall provide the new PVC trunking and cables at his own costs from the Telephone
service provider distribution point to the TMS rosette when the upgrading work has finished.
31.3.22 Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, for lift machine room with more than one lift and at least
one lift in the same machine room needs to remain operational during the lift upgrading works as
directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall engage the Lift Maintenance Company of the lifts to
isolate the lift control circuits of different lifts to keep the required lift(s) operational. Where required,
the lift equipment/controller, trunking, etc shall be shifted in order to raise, construct or modify the lift
machine room. The work shall only be carried out after the Lift Contractor has done all the
preparatory work, protection of the lift equipment and confirmation by the Lift Contractor.
The construction and modification of the lift machine room shall be in multiple stages. At any one
stage, at least one lift shall be kept running. Access to lift equipment and sufficient working space
shall be provided for the maintenance of the lift(s) in operation and the installation of new lift(s) or
upgrading of the existing lift(s).
The lift(s) in operation and/or lift(s) being installed or upgraded shall be protected from weather as
well as debris, dust, damage and loss of lift equipment at all times. The method of raising the lift
machine floor and roof shall cater for this requirement. All necessary safety and protective hoarding
shall also be provided to cater for the same requirement. The Contractor shall be responsible for and
bear all costs to make good all damages due to ingress of water, falling debris and/or accumulation of
dust, other foreign objects, loss of the equipment and injury to both lift and contractor’s workers
arising from contractor’s negligence. Under these circumstances, he shall also be responsible for the
poor performance of the lift equipment.
LUP09/S31.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-6/15
31.3.22 (Cont'd)
During upgrading of the lifts, the Contractor shall partition the lift machine room to separate the lift to
be replaced/upgraded from the other lift(s) in the group. The partition shall be adequately
strengthened with ribs and complete with a door and latch. It shall cover the full height from the floor
to the ceiling of the lift machine room and shall be rigid enough to withstand a horizontal force of
50 kg. A separate temporary door with lock shall be provided where required for each part of the lift
machine room so partitioned. Any wall, roof, floor and louvre that is removed in the process shall be
enclosed with temporary hoarding or boarding. The contractor shall maintain sufficient ventilation and
lighting for the lift equipment and workers. Such door, partition, hoarding and boarding shall be of
sufficient rigidity and proper design and construction for safeguarding the lift equipment and lift and
contractor’s workers from weather, debris, dust, damage, loss and injury. This process of isolation,
protection, and partitioning to the lift machine room and between different lifts shall be repeated as
necessary until all lifts in the lift machine room have been completed substantially and are in
operation.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included the cost of all the works necessary to comply with
this clause in the Tender Sum.
31.3.23 Electrical Installation In Lift Machine Room
31.3.23.1 Where electrical rewiring is not carried out, the Contractor shall replace the existing Consumer Control
Unit (CCU) with a 3+5 way split load type CCU complete with a 30mA Residual Current Device (RCD)
of the appropriate rating to match the existing installation. The arrangement of the ways in the CCU
shall be to the SO Rep's requirements. The Contractor shall also provide 2 numbers of 20A DP
Isolators, to be connected to the unprotected side of the split load CCU. The exact locations of the
isolators shall be determined with the Lift Contractor.
31.3.23.2 The replacement of the CCU and the installation of the new isolators shall be carried out prior to the
handover of the lift machine room to the Lift Contractor. Electricity supply, whether of a temporary
nature or permanent, shall then be provided through this new CCU.
31.3.23.3 All electrical supply including temporary supply provided by the Contractor shall be certified by a
relevant LEW prior to the handover to the Lift Contractor.
31.4 LIFT LANDINGS
31.4.1 Temporary Protective Hoarding
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain temporary protective hoardings to cordon off area of
work from Occupants and to prevent unauthorised entry into the lift well and the work area at all
existing and new landings before the commencement of any works (including works by the Lift
Contractor) to the lift landing openings. The temporary protective hoardings shall be made of 0.42mm
(minimum) thick zincalume galvanised steel and strengthened with at least two horizontal ribs
covering the full height from floor to ceiling at the lift lobby. If the width of the hoardings exceed 2m,
then a metal vertical rib must be installed at the centre of the hoarding. The hoarding shall have
sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a horizontal force of 50kg.
All exposed metal sheet surface of new metal hoarding shall be finished with 25 microns colour bond
silicone modified polyester coating. Undamaged recycle metal hoarding are allowed. All exposed
surface of recycled metal hoarding shall be painted with at least 3 coats of approved enamel paint of
approved colour scheme prior to commencement of the construction works or when directed by the
SO Rep.
All hoardings for the lift openings shall be full height from floor to ceiling. However, in cases where full
height hoardings will affect the ventilation (or smoke dispersal in case of a fire) of the staircase
landings or lift landings, the hoarding height shall be between 1.8m and 2m so that a gap is
maintained between the top of the hoarding and the ceiling to allow for ventilation (or smoke
dispersal).
LUP09/S31.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-7/15
31.4.1 Temporary Protective Hoarding (Cont'd)
The temporary protective hoarding shall incorporate a metal door complete with padlocking facilities.
The door shall be kept closed and locked at all times in order to prevent occupants from gaining
access into the work area. Where the door in the temporary protective hoardings has to be opened,
the Contractor shall also ensure that it is watched over by his workmen at all times to prevent
Occupants from entering the work area. The Contractor and the Lift Contractor shall each provide his
own padlock locking into each other’s padlock at every hoarding door to maintain accountability in
keeping the hoarding doors locked at all times when there is no work being carried out.
"DANGER - KEEP OUT" reflective signs on metal plates in the four official languages are to be
displayed at conspicuous locations on the exterior side of the hoardings. Such signs shall be painted
in red on white background with approved gloss finishing enamel paint.
An opening of size 100mm x 100mm with a viewing panel made of transparent Perspex or other
approved material shall be provided on the hoardings at each lift landing opening at 1.5m above the
floor level for inspection of work.
On Substantial Completion of the works, the temporary protective hoarding shall be cleared away
upon approval of the SO Rep.
31.4.2 Signage at Lift Landing
31.4.2.1 The Contractor shall provide an approved signage with messages etched on 2mm thick stainless steel
plate or any other material specified in Clauses 18.43 and 18.44 and shown in the Architectural
drawings mounted with Allen key type stainless steel screws at each landing in between every two (2)
lifts. The messages carried in the signage plate shall be as follows in the four (4) official languages :
• BLOCK NUMBER AND LIFT NUMBER
• CAUTION
IN CASE OF FIRE, DO NOT USE LIFT
DO NOT PUT YOUR HAND ON LIFT DOOR AND DOOR FRAME
• ESSENTIAL MAINTENANCE SERVICE CENTRE’S TELEPHONE NUMBER
• LIFT (NO.) SERVES (STOREY NOS)
31.4.2.2 Unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall also put up additional signage of approved message to
be provided by SO Rep such as the above at each lift landing of every lift in four (4) official languages
etched on 2mm thick stainless steel plate or any other material specified in the Architectural drawings
informing residents of the storeys served by each lift. The notice may be incorporated into the lift
signage as specified in Clause 31.4.2.1.
31.4.3 Lift Door Sill Level
Where rendering and/or tiling the lift landing wall and floor is required, the lift door sill shall be
maintained at 50mm above and slope downwards at a gradient of 1:10 to the final finished floor level.
To prevent slipping, the slope shall not begin immediately from the lift door sill, ie. the tiles nearest to
the lift door sill shall be level. For the same purpose, the tiles nearest to the sill may also be grooved
or of slip-resistant surface as directed by the SO Rep. Where the lift door sill cannot be maintained at
a level higher than the final finished floor level (to prevent water from getting into lift well) due to site
constraint, the Contractor shall raise the level of the lift landing next to the sill slightly with gentle
downward slope towards both sill and lift lobby of gradient not less than that specified in Code of
Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings, subject to approval of SO Rep. The Contractor shall also patch
up any hole, recess, etc. resulting from the removal of any old siren box, hall call plate, hall position
indicator, etc with cement mortar.
LUP09/S31.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-8/15
31.4.4 Enlarging Existing and Creating New Lift Landing Openings
31.4.4.1 Where the existing lift landing openings are to be closed up, enlarged, modified and/or relocated or
where new lift landing openings are to be created, the Contractor shall carry out all building works
required including but not be limited to the hacking of existing and construction of new lift landing
walls, retiling the lift landing walls and floors, all in accordance with the drawings and the requirements
of the SO Rep and Lift Contractor; and provision of temporary protective hoarding at the existing/new
lift landings to cordon off the work area from Occupants during the works. The Contractor shall liaise
and coordinate with the Lift Contractor to check the verticality of the existing lift well walls (ie.
truly plumbed) immediately after the lift has been dismantled and determined the exact location and
size of all lift landing openings before carrying out the aforesaid works. Should the lift well walls be
out of plumb and thereby necessitating the adjustment of the position of the lift landing openings, the
Contractor shall at his own cost and expense hack and reconstruct the lift well walls and lift landing
openings in accordance with the Lift Contractor's requirements.
For lifts sharing a common lift shaft and where any of the lift(s) inside this lift shaft remains operational
while the other lift(s) are being upgraded, the Contractor shall take all necessary care to prevent
excessive dust and debris from getting into the common lift shaft and affecting the proper operation of
the running lift(s). Where hacking works are necessary to create new lift landing openings or
enlarging or relocating existing ones, screen walls shall be erected inside the common lift shaft
directly behind the areas to be hacked prior to the hacking works. The screen wall shall cover the
entire areas to be hacked to prevent debris from getting into the common lift shaft. All debris from the
hacking works shall be packed into bags and brought down to the ground using material hoist and
disposed off immediately.
31.4.4.2 Where the landing transom is required, the Contractor shall provide a new opening/recess of
500mm(W) x 150mm(H) or as directed by the SO's Rep above or on the side of the lift door opening,
the exact location shall be decided by the SO Rep. Subject to written approval of the SO Rep, the
Contractor shall hack and remove any structural element such as reinforced concrete lintel, where
necessary, to provide sufficient lift landing opening height to accommodate the head jambs of new lift
landing doors. Where required, new lintel above the head jambs of landing doors shall be provided in
accordance with the drawings and the requirements of the Lift Contractor. The Contractor shall also
hack any opening required in lift landing walls for the mounting of hall position indicators, etc.
31.4.4.3 Where required, the Contractor shall modify any upstanding reinforced concrete beam at the new lift
landings such that the beam is flush with the floor level and there is adequate structural lift opening
height both above and below the beam and/or construct new landing bridge complete with parapet
walls or railings at the new landings for those lift well located outside the main building all in
accordance with the drawings and the requirement of the Lift Contractor.
31.4.4.4 Where new lift landings are created, the lift landing floor shall be extended into the lift well as shown in
the structural drawings and in accordance with the Lift Contractor's requirements. Such extensions
shall be in accordance with the SO Structural Engineer's design. The extension at each storey shall
be truly plumbed with the lift landing floor on all other storeys.
31.4.4.5 For the purpose of adding new lift landings at storeys among the existing landings, new landing floor,
landing wall and RC floor beam with extension shall be constructed at these storeys and the existing
landing floor, landing wall and RC floor beam with extension shall be modified at the remaining
storeys in accordance with drawings and specification of the SO Rep.
31.4.4.6 Where there is insufficient structural lift opening height for installing the lift equipment by the Lift
Contractor due to irregularities in the existing building or otherwise, the Contractor shall modify the lift
opening height with the approval of SO Rep. Any cost of such modification work shall deem to have
been allowed for by the Contractor.
At any storey, where the floor to floor height is sufficient, the Contractor shall reconstruct the RC lintel
above the lift opening to increase the structural lift opening height to 2,350mm above a 40mm high
RC curb and a further 50mm concrete ramp on the RC floor as shown in the SO's drawings.
31.4.4.7 Subject to the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall make all necessary adjustment to the
details shown in the drawings to cater for construction tolerances.
LUP09/S31.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-9/15
31.4.5 Filling Up Voids Between Lift Landing Walls and Landing Door Jambs
31.4.5.1 New lift landing doors and jambs, where required, shall be installed by the Lift Contractor engaged by
the Employer under a separate contract.
31.4.5.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the installation of the new lift door jambs, the Contractor shall fill up
voids between the lift landing walls and the new lift landing door jambs with brick wall and if required
re-tile the entire lift landing wall to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall also fill up the
void within the lift door jamb with concrete up to a height of 1.6m from the floor level. All gaps around
the hall position indicators, hall call plate, etc. shall be sealed up with cement mortar. The Contractor
shall also thicken the existing landing walls or employ other approved means so that the wall surface
at lobby side is in alignment with the lift door jambs unless otherwise specified / indicated, and provide
lintel or deepen the depth of beam above the head jambs to reduce gap unless otherwise specified /
indicated.
The time allowed for bricking up, sealing gaps, etc as required shall be as follows :
Up to 4 landings per lift = 1 week

5 to 25 landings per lift = 2 weeks
31.4.5.3 The Contractor shall carry out the aforesaid works only after receiving instruction from SO Rep to do
so. The works shall be carried out on a lift by lift basis. The Contractor shall complete the works in
accordance with a time schedule approved by the SO Rep. Wherever possible, the works shall be
carried out concurrently at different landings. The Contractor shall ensure that the Lift Contractor is
not in the lift well when the work is in progress.
31.4.5.4 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that all lift equipment, parts, etc. are not
scratched, stained or damaged in any manner and that no debris or wet concrete/cement falls into the
lift well or equipment during the course of the works. The Contractor shall bear all cost and expense
incurred in making good any damages to the lift system.
31.4.5.5 The Contractor shall arrange for the lift landing doors and landing door jambs to be cleaned with
agent(s) not damaging to the landing door, door jamb and other lift equipment upon Substantial
Completion of the works.
31.5 LIFT WELL
31.5.1 The Contractor shall plumb the lift well and give results of verticality of the lift well to the SO Rep.
Where required, the Contractor shall carry out all structural works to the lift well including but not be
limited to the chasing of off-plumb lift well wall to facilitate the installation of new lifts.
31.5.2 Where required by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall plaster to a smooth finish all lift well walls facing
the lift car door (that portion of exposed wall surfaces inside lift well that can be seen through vision
panels of lift car door) at all storeys for all lifts and paint it over with 2 coats of black emulsion paint
with primer and sealer to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Where there is existing safety netting fixed
onto the lift well wall, the Contractor shall, as decided by the SO Rep, either securely mount a facia
plate onto the existing safety netting after rust-proofing the same netting instead of plastering the wall
or remove the existing safety netting and plaster and paint the wall. The facia plate, if required, shall
be made of 1.5mm thick galvanised mild steel plate with reinforcement for rigidity and primed
adequately with anti-rust and painted black with 2 coats of black enamel paint; the existing safety
netting shall also be painted with anti-rust. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Lift Contractor for
carrying out the work.
31.5.3 Any water leakage in the lift well and lift pit shall be repaired or rectified by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall also render any uneven portion of the lift pit floor and remove any unused concrete
plinth in the lift pit.
31.5.4 Where required, the depth of the lift pit shall be lowered or deepened in accordance with the drawings
and the requirements of the Lift Contractor.
LUP09/S31.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-10/15
31.5.5 For any replacement of existing bird-proof netting and installation of new bird-proof netting in the lift
machine room and lift well, Clause 31.3.17 shall apply.
31.5.6 Where shown in the drawings and subject to the written approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
create new openings or enlarge existing openings (vents) at the top of the existing lift shaft to enable
adequate ventilation of the lift wells. Such ventilation openings shall face away from the existing
2
building and ventilate into open air. The total area of the opening/s shall not be less than 0.1m for
each lift. Where required by the SO Rep, a canopy is to be provided to prevent rainwater from
seeping into the lift well through the vents. The design of the canopy shall be as approved by the SO
Rep. The lift well may alternatively be ventilated by way of masonry ventilation duct of same fire
rating as the compartment wall provided that such ventilation ducts do not run into the lift machine
room. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
Where the existing opening cannot be relocated to ventilate into open air or ventilated through a
masonry duct to the open air, a fire damper shall be installed subject to SO Rep’s and FSSD’s
approval instead of closing the existing ventilation opening.
31.5.7 The Contractor shall check the state of the RC nib (which supports the landing door sill) at the existing
lift landings for the purpose of lift installation. Any damaged nib with crack or otherwise shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. If required by the SO Rep, RC nibs shall be removed for
the purpose of lift installation.
31.5.8 For lifts that are not contained within individually enclosed lift wells (ie in common lift shaft), lift well
partition hoarding between every two adjacent lifts shall be erected by the Main Contractor before the
commencement of work, even if dismantling/upgrading of lifts is not by the Main Contractor. The
hoarding, to be made of 12mm thick plywood and timber reinforcement, shall separate the two lift
wells completely and shall only be removed after the installation/upgrading work on the last lift is
completed. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Lift Contractor for carrying out the work.
31.5.9 For each lift where lift landing(s) is/are to be added or existing lift landing equipment is to be replaced
but not the whole lift, the Contractor shall erect a horizontal working platform in the lift well just below
the storey where the work is required, closing the entire lift well cross-section for protection of the
existing lift equipment in the lift well and collection of debris. The platform shall be of such
construction to be able to take all expected loading and be protected from weather. The lift well
shared by two (2) or more lifts shall be partitioned between the lift under upgrading and the other lift(s)
not upgraded at least above the working platform as specified in Clause 31.5.8. This platform and lift
well partitioning shall be repeated to each lift in the lift well under upgrading and removed after
substantial completion of the upgrading work.
The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all costs to make good all damages due to ingress of
water, falling debris and/or accumulation of dust, other foreign objects, loss of the equipment and
injury to both lift and Contractor’s workers arising from Contractor’s negligence. He shall also be
responsible for poor performance of the lift equipment under these circumstances.
31.5.10 The Contractor, where required shall remove and/or construct or re-construct any RC plinth or lift
buffer support in the lift pit in accordance with the requirements of the SO Rep and Lift Contractor.
31.5.11 Fire Seal Brickwall
For those lifts installed with additional lift landings by the Lift Contractor, there may be a void of
115mm thick created between the lift landing wall and the lift well at the existing landings with the
displacement of lifts into the lift well.
In such case and if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall erect a brickwall of at
least 100mm thick and 2-brick length from the floor level to the underside of the overhead RC beam;
one on each side of the existing lift landing opening at all existing lift landings as shown in the SO
Rep's drawings as fire seal at the lift entrance. These brickwall seals shall interlock with the existing
lift landing wall for stability.
LUP09/S31.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-11/15
31.5.12 When working in a duplex or triplex lift well, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent debris
and dust from going into the adjacent lift shaft. For such well, when creating, enlarging or modifying
the lift landing openings, the Contractor shall hack outwards from the well to the landings and not vice
versa so that the debris will not fall into the well using screen wall as specified in Clause 31.4.4.1.
The debris shall not be removed by throwing or hoisting into the lift pit. When modifying or re-
constructing the machine room in a duplex or triplex lift well, the Contractor shall ensure that the
debris will not fly into the lift shaft or ricochet onto the well partition. The Contractor shall provide a
netting and platform in the well to catch falling debris.
31.6 DISMANTLING OF EXISTING LIFTS
31.6.1 Dismantling by the Contractor
Where the dismantling of existing lift system is included in the scope of the Contract, the Contractor
shall comply with the requirements stipulated below.
31.6.1.1 General
The Contractor shall dismantle and, unless otherwise specified, dispose of the existing lift equipment
and complete all necessary building works to the lift machine room, lift wells and lift landings before
handing over the same to the Lift Contractor to install the new lifts.
Before commencement of the works, the Contractor shall check and confirm with the SO Rep for the
correct lifts to be dismantled and disposed. For lifts sharing the same machine rooms, the Contractor
shall check and ensure that no parts of the lift which are not due for dismantling are damaged or
removed by mistake.
31.6.1.2 Work Schedule
The Contractor shall carry out the works only after receiving instruction to do so from the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall commence the works within one week from date of the SO Rep's instruction and
complete the works for each lift within 7 continuous working days thereafter.
The works shall be scheduled such that at any one time there is at least one lift running in a block. A
detailed work schedule and method statements shall be submitted to and approved by the SO Rep
before commencement of the work.
31.6.1.3 Lift Machine Room
All existing lift parts and equipment in the lift machine room including machine, controller, governor
machine, cables and trunkings, travelling cables, wire ropes, EBOPS, ARD and LMD shall be
removed and disposed of unless otherwise specified. Machine oil shall not be spilled on floor.
31.6.1.4 Lift well
All existing guides, guide brackets, lift car and counter-weight, travelling cables, wire ropes, bolts and
nuts, safety netting, metal separators, landing doors, door headers, door sills, sill supporting brackets,
lift well trunking and wiring and all other lift fittings shall be dismantled and disposed unless otherwise
specified. All bolts and plugs encased in lift well walls shall be cut flush to the walls. All separators
embedded in lift well walls at landing floor levels shall be cut flush and/or completely removed. All
dismantled guide rails, fish plates, guide brackets, bolts and nuts shall not be disposed off until they
are inspected by the Lift Contractor for possible re-use in installation of the new lifts.
For lifts in common lift shafts, lift well hoarding shall be erected before the commencement of
dismantling work. The lift well hoarding shall separate the adjacent lifts completely and shall only be
removed after the Substantial Completion of the adjacent liftt/s sharing the same lift shaft. The
hoarding shall be made of 12mm thick plywood.
For multiplex lifts, the Contractor shall ensure that the lift well trunking and wiring are not removed
when dismantling any lift as this will remove the hall calls for the other lift/s under the same group
control system.
LUP09/S31.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-12/15
31.6.1.4 Lift well (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall remove any bird nests found in lift well. New bird-proof netting shall be provided
by the Contractor if the old one covering the ventilation opening in lift well has become rusty or has
been damaged or missing. The Contractor shall also remove any timber, steel rods, formwork and
any other rubbish or debris found in lift well.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any water or sewerage
pipes and MATV wiring found in the lift well.
All necessary scaffolding required for the proper, efficient and safe dismantling of lift well equipment
shall be provided by the Contractor.
31.6.1.5 Lift Landing and Lift Pit
The Contractor shall dismantle all lift landing doors, door jambs, landing door sill and all fixtures at the
lift landing. All old siren box, hall call plate, old position indicator and the existing car and
counterweight buffers, buffer stands, and any other part of the lift found at the lift landings and lift pits
shall also be removed. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the
existing waterproof cement plastering, any water or sewerage pipes and other wiring not related to old
lift found in lift pit. No lubricant is allowed to spill on the floor of lift pit.
31.6.1.6 Lift Component, Equipment, Parts to be Returned to Employer
The Contractor shall return to the Employer, including transportation to a designated location, the
following items and any other item instructed by the SO Rep immediately after their being dismantled:
(1) ARD (Automatic Rescue Device)

(2) EBOPS (Emergency Battery Operated Power Supply)
(3) LMD (Lift Monitoring Device)
(4) Stainless steel lift car cage
(5) Any other lift parts as required by the SO Rep.
The above components and equipment of all lifts shall be dismantled and brought down to ground
floor carefully and the Contractor shall deliver the same to locations within Singapore as instructed by
the SO Rep. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect and safeguard the
aforesaid components and equipment against damage, corrosion, theft, ingress of dust, etc. The
Contractor shall immediately inform the SO Rep if any lift component, equipment or parts is lost due to
theft; and if deemed necessary by SO Rep, the Contractor shall make a police report.
Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may decide not to salvage or accept any of the above
components and equipment or part thereof. In such event, the Contractor shall remove and dispose
the said components and equipment or part thereof.
31.6.1.7 Handover of Lift Machine Room and Lift well
Upon Substantial Completion of the dismantling work and all building works to lift machine room, lift
well and landings of each lift the Contractor shall immediately inform the SO Rep and arrange with the
Lift Contractor for handover inspection of lift machine room, lift well and landings.
Before the Contractor arranges for a handover inspection with the Lift Contractor, he shall ensure that
all debris and dismantled parts are cleared from the lift machine room, lift well and landings, water in
lift pit removed and leave the lift machine room, lift well and landings in a clean and dry condition.
A list of Defects detected during the joint inspection shall be given to the Contractor who shall
promptly rectify the Defects and arrange for another inspection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of lift machine room and lift well and provision of
safety measures until handover to the Lift Contractor.
LUP09/S31.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-13/15
31.6.2 Dismantling by the Lift Contractor
Where the dismantling of the existing lift system is NOT included in the scope of the Contract and may
be undertaken by the Lift Contractor engaged by the Employer under a separate contract, the
Contractor shall carry out all building and structural works to the lift machine room, lift well and
landings specified in this Section. In such event, all movable lift components, equipment and parts
including lift landing door jambs, guide rails and guide brackets shall be dismantled by the Lift
Contractor. Structural components such as machine beams shall be removed by the Contractor, if
required.
All disputes and/or differences arising under this Clause relating to interpretation of the respective
scope of works to be carried out by the Contractor and the Lift Contractor shall be determined by SO
Rep.
31.6.3 Where lift dismantling is by the Lift Contractor, the Contractor shall provide Air Plasma Cutting
equipment for the Lift Contractor to use if such equipment is required for the work.
31.7 HOISTING OF NEW LIFT EQUIPMENT AND/OR PARTS
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for profit and attendance in
respect of the works involved in the installation of new lifts and/or upgrading of existing lifts executed
by the Lift Contractor. The facilities to be provided by the Contractor shall include but not be limited to
the provision of cranes, operators and supervision for hoisting lift car, counterweight, door and jamb,
machine and controller and other lift equipment and/or parts; the provision of all necessary
reinforcement to existing roof or other existing structures to receive and support the landing and
moving of the lift equipment/parts into the lift machine room and lift well; and where necessary, hack
existing lift machine room walls and/or floors to enable entry and/or hoisting up of the lift
equipment/parts including making good. The Contractor shall carry out the lifting and hoisting service
as required by the SO Rep and Lift Contractor including horizontal movement where there is no
access on the ground.
31.8 CLEANING OF LIFT CARS AND DOOR SILLS
Throughout the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall clean and mop the lift car floor and door sills
of lift in operation once a day until the handover of the block to HDB/Town Council. In addition, for
every lift in a block which has commenced any upgrading activity, the Contractor shall also clear the
lift landing door sill at every lift opening and the lift car door sill of any sand and other objects fallen
into the groves of the sills twice a day, on all working days until the building is handed over to
HDB/Town Council. The recommended timing for the sill cleaning is at noon time (12pm to 1pm) and
the end of the day (5pm to 6pm).
31.9 DIVERSION OF BUILDING SERVICES
Where the building services such as those listed below are in the way of the new or modified lift
machine room and lift openings, they shall be diverted to location as required for the construction of
the new/enlarged/raised lift machine room and lift openings as directed and specified by the SO Rep
before the modification and construction work of lift machine room and lift well begins.
(a) Water pipe/down pipe, water pump sets

(b) Fire safety systems
(c) MATV conduit pipe, antenna and equipment
(d) Electrical wiring conduit/trunking, main switches, lightning conductors and air terminal
(e) Gas pipe
(f) Telephone and Rediffusion wiring and equipment
The diversion work shall be planned and completed before the scheduled commencement of the
building modification work on the lift machine room and lift landing openings. Any delay in the
completion of the modification work due to the diversion of the building services shall not entitle the
Contractor to any extension of the Time for Completion. The Contractor shall allow for all costs
related to the diversion in the Contract Sum.
LUP09/S31.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-14/15
31.10 TEMPORARY SUPPLY TO EXISTING AND NEW LIFTS
The Contractor shall ensure that the existing lift/s still required to be in operation are provided with
electricity supply at all times. Where necessary, the Contractor shall install temporary cables and
arrange for temporary supply for these lifts to ensure that they remain in operation. The Contractor
shall also arrange for the electricity supply, whether temporary or permanent, to be made available for
those new lifts, including the lifts in new lift shafts, that are completed and ready to be commissioned.
Where the electricity supply to new lifts are to be taken from a new switchroom, the Contractor shall
arrange for the new lift submains to be completed and energised before the scheduled commissioning
of the new lifts. In the event that the new switchroom is not completed and energised at the time the
new lifts are completed, the Contractor shall arrange for temporary supply to be provided to these new
lifts until such time that the permanent supply is available.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Lift Contractor to arrange for an agreed schedule to disconnect the
existing or temporary supply and reconnect the permanent supply to the lifts to ensure minimum
disruption to the lift service.
All temporary electrical supply provided by the Contractor shall be certified by a relevant LEW.
31.11 TIME FOR COMPLETION OF BUILDER'S WORK FOR

LIFT REFURBISHMENT/UPGRADING
Time for completing builder's work as specified in this Section 31 and in the Supplementary
Specification is given in the Supplementary Specification on lift by lift basis.
Unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide for a 2-week run-in period
after the commissioning of each lift. This run-in period shall be factored into the time for completion of
works within the block.
This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or sub-phases of
the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the respective
specified time period or if the SO shall certify in writing that in his opinion the Contractor despite
previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with any of such items of works with due
expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself complete such item or items of works or may
employ any other Contractors to complete such item(s) of works. All costs and expenses for such
item(s) of works including the Employer's charges shall be recovered by the Employer from monies
due or becoming due to the Contractor or may be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the
Contractor without prejudice to any loss or expenses in connection with or in consequence of the
Employer carrying out such item(s) of works. In the event of the Employer completing any such
item(s) of works, the Contractor should not be entitled to any extension of time or any loss or expense
in connection with or in consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s) of works.
The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the
Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the completion of the respective sections,
phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included.
31.12 LIFT SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (LSS)
31.12.1 Where the installation of Lift Surveillance System (LSS) is required, the Contractor shall comply with
the requirement stipulated below.
31.12.2 Lift Surveillance System (LSS) basically consists of two cameras in each lift, a CCTV monitor with a
camera at each lift lobby (optional item) and a recording device (located in lift machine room) to
record all the activities. LSS shall form part of a separate contract unless otherwise specified.
31.12.3 The Contractor shall coordinate with the LSS contractor on the installation and commissioning of the
LSS as and when there is a request to install the system to the lift(s).
31.12.4 The Contractor shall coordinate work at the lift lobby, inside the lift, inside the lift machine room and
other areas required for the complete installation of LSS.
LUP09/S31.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 31-15/15
31.12.5 The Contractor shall liaise with the LSS contractor on the scheduling and coordination of their
respective works in connection with LSS installation to ensure that the whole works are completed on
time. Upon receipt of the SO Rep’s instruction to start work, the Contractor shall commence the work
as soon as is reasonably possible and complete the work expeditiously. Any change to the schedule
shall be approved by SO Rep.
31.12.6 The Contractor shall be required to attend site meetings in connection with LSS installation works
from time to time when notified by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall appoint a responsible person
authorised to accept and to make decisions or otherwise act on the Contractor’s behalf to attend such
meetings.
31.13 COVERING OF LIFT PIT PENDING CONSTRUCTION OF LIFT WELL
For new lift well located outside the block, pending the construction of lift well, the lift pit shall be
covered by canvas sheet or using other approved means to prevent rain water from accumulating in
the pit. When canvas sheet is used, it shall be adequately supported with slight gradient. If there is
water in the pit, anti-mosquito measures shall be put in place.
SECTION 32/…
LUP09/S31.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 32-1/3
SECTION 32
32.0 GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS
32.1 REPAIRS TO DAMAGED/SUNKEN INSITU UNSUSPENDED APRONS

AND PAVEMENT (MINOR WORKS)
Damaged/sunken insitu concrete areas of aprons and pavement (not exceeding 10m square in each
damaged portion), shall be repaired under minor works where directed on site by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall visit the site and make careful assessments on the extent of repairs of damaged
areas of aprons/pavement classified under this clause. No extra claims upon misunderstanding of the
extent of repair work shall be entertained.
Repair Works - (a) Break-up badly damaged isolated portions of the existing concrete
aprons/pavement as directed.
(b) Top up existing level of hardcore bed with broken bricks to make up the desired
level before blinding the hardcore with 25mm thick quarry waste/sand.
Compaction with mechanical rammers where required.
(c) Reconstruct affected areas with 100mm thick cast-in-situ concrete (grade 25)
reinforced with BRC No. A6 fabric reinforcement placed 75mm from the bottom.
Top surface of apron to be finished with two passes of power float is to be
carried out only after all bleeding has stopped and evaporated.
(d) Curing for seven days.
32.2 BITUMEN EXPANSION JOINTS IN APRONS
Pluck out all grass, shrubs, all foreign matters and dried bitumen from existing expansion joint. Ram in
gap with polystyrene and fill with sand. Top joint with bitumen infill or other approved equivalent to a depth
of 30mm minimum.
32.3 POT HOLES
All pot holes shall be filled up with cement mortar (1:3) and finished smooth to match the surrounding.
Before filling, all loose and foreign materials shall be removed. Brush a coat of bonding agent before
reinstatement work.
32.4 CHIP OFF AT STAIRS, WALLS, COLUMNS ETC.
All chip off areas of stairs, columns, wall etc. shall be repaired with cement and sand 1:3 added with 2
litres of Rapidard or equivalent accelerator approved to every bag of cement used. Before reinstatement,
chip-off areas shall be roughened and wire brushed off all loose materials, dirt and foreign matters. Brush
a coat of bonding agent.
32.5 SURFACE WATER CHANNELS
The Contractor shall determine the extent of damaged sections of channels at the site prior to the
submission of his Tender. Repairs and reconstruction of the surface water channel shall be as and when
directed by the SO Rep on site.
LUP09/S32.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 32-2/3
32.5.1 Badly Damaged Sections
Badly damaged and sunken sections of existing surface water channels shall be removed as and when
directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative on site.
Reconstruct the affected sections as follows :
(a) Erect proper formwork.
(b) Construct base of 100mm thick and 75mm sides in concrete (grade 25) reinforced with one layer of
BRC No. A5 wire mesh with 150mm lapping over existing reinforcement.
(c) Form inverts of channels to match existing.
(d) Render all exposed surfaces with (1:3) cement mortar.
32.5.2 Worn Out or Cracked Inverts
All damaged and sunken existing invert of channels shall be hacked off to receive new base of 100mm
thick in concrete grade finished smooth to match the surrounding walls of channels.
32.5.3 Cover Slabs Leading to Staircases or Lift Landings or Shop Fronts
Replace all missing or broken 50m thick precast reinforced concrete slabs over surface water channels to
match existing. Covers shall be of 1:1:2 cement, sand and 10mm granite chipping mix reinforced with 1
layer fabric no. A6 BRC weldmesh.
32.6 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINTS (COMMUNAL AREAS/CORRIDORS)
Leaking existing floor expansion joints of floor slabs at communal areas/corridors shall be reconstructed
by :
(a) Cutting rebates on both edges of slabs by mechanical saw.
(b) Stripping off old damaged expansion metal strips/damaged bituminous filling.
(c) Where the metal expansion strip is missing or corroded, the Contractor shall supply and install new
aluminium expansion strip gauge 20, 250mm girth bent to required shape with both wings plugged
and railed staggered at 200mm centres. Turn up ends of aluminium strips min. 150mm high.
Before laying aluminium strip fill joint with polyethylene backer rod. Fill up gap with bituminous
compound flush with surrounding surfaces.
Generally, old and brittle bituminous compound filling shall be stripped off and removed and refilled with
hot bituminous compound or other approved equivalent to expansion joints where directed at sites by the
SO Rep.
32.7 REPAIRS TO EXTERNAL STEPS
Repair and make good to all damaged existing external steps and to repaint all concrete balustrade walls
with 2 coats of solvent based paints (all steps within contract boundary). Re-constructed steps should not
be greater than 150mm with new handrail as shown in Drawings.
Existing rusty handrails shall be treated with rust primer and apply fresh coats of enamel paints to all
existing mild steel handrails.
LUP09/S32.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 32-3/3
32.8 HOLLOW BLOCK WALLS (EXTERNAL AND COMMUNAL AREAS)
All serious cracks at all external hollow block walls shall be repaired as follows :
(a) Hack out to form 'V' shaped grooves (min) 50mm deep x 25mm wide.
(b) Insert 20mm x 3mm x 460mm long galvanised flat bar fish tailed both ends at fourth courses.
(c) Fill up existing gaps with non-shrink or compo mortar mix with bonding agent onto cracks to match
existing adjacent walls.
32.9 WALLS (EXTERNAL AND COMMUNAL AREAS)
32.9.1 Repair To Loosened, Hollow And Bulging External Plaster
(a) Mark the area of defective plaster to a rectangular shape.
(b) Cut the boundary of the defective plaster with a diamond cutter.
(c) Hack and remove the panel or strip of plaster with approved tool.
(d) Hack and form keys on smooth concrete surfaces as determined by the SO Rep.
(e) Clean the hacked areas with a stiff brush and water.
(f) Prior to re-plastering, apply bonding agent on the surface in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
specifications.
(g) Re-plaster to the affected area with polymer modified mortar to the affected areas in
accordance with Manufacturer’s specifications.
(h) Paint to match existing
32.9.2 Repair To External Wall Cracks
Cut out cracks in external walls and fill in with prepacked mortar to include build-in bonding bars where
required and touch up disturbed work.
32.9.3 Pointing Of Gaps
Point all gaps around external window frames and sills including external door frames in prepacked non-
shrink mortar mixed with bonding agent.
SECTION 33/...
LUP09/S32.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 33-1/5
SECTION 33
33.0 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE EXTERNAL WALLS
33.1 GENERAL
The remedial work is to stop the rainwater through the external walls including the repairs to the adjacent
reinforced concrete beams and columns of the walls concerned. The Contractor is to provide all
necessary facilities and mechanical suspended cradle etc. in order to execute these works.
The remedial work to be applied to the wall of a certain unit specified in the Schedules shall include the
work on the wall panel together with that for the beams at that floor level and at the ceiling level of the
panel unless otherwise stated.
33.2 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AREA
Wherever the site interrupts public area or footpath, the Contractor shall provide adequate and safe
covered walkways with proper barricades and handrails. In addition, all access routes/points immediately
below wall areas to be remedied shall be closed and adequately barricaded and where possible,
alternative safe routes shall be provided. The costs for these requirements is deemed to have been
included by the Contractor in his Contract Sum.
33.3 BUILDING BLOCK NUMBER PLATES
Where the remedial work is to be carried out to brickwall panels with existing building block number plates,
these shall first be carefully removed and stored and upon completion of the remedial work, they are to be
properly reinstated, using `HILTI' Hud 6 with 5 diameter stainless steel (grade 316) wood screw or other
approved material spaced at not more than 575mm c/c.
All plates damaged during removal shall be replaced with new plates of same size and type.
33.4 REPAIR TO REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM CRACKS
Wherever there are visible cracks on the reinforced concrete beams, contractor shall hack out the existing
plaster 40mm width on either side of the crack to expose the reinforced concrete beam. The cracks in the
reinforced concrete beam will then be carefully chiselled or by mechanical angle grinder to a depth of
15mm and of width 10mm on either side of the crack in Ù' section. After hacking, all loose dirt will be
brushed clean and the surface wetted and excess water allowed to drain off before applying the patching
cement mortar.
The first operation is to patch the cracks in the beams with 1:1 cement, fine sand mix gauged with 'ARCYL
60' or other approved acrylic polymer modifiers mixed strictly in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to the face of the reinforced concrete beam. The mortar will then be allowed to set for at least
3 days before the affected parts of the beam is replastered.
The plastering mix over the beam shall be 1:3:0.25 (OPC:Sand:Sandy Clay; with approved plasticiser).
33.5 REPLASTER TOP AND BOTTOM FACES OF

REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS
Hack out carefully the plaster on the underside of the beam for the whole length above the brick wall panel
to be treated. Re-render to make sure that the plaster finish will give a definite fall towards the outer face
of the beam to form a drip.
Similarly, hack away the existing plaster on the upper edge of the beam, which is at the bottom of the
facing brick wall panel to be treated for the whole length of the panel. Hack further to remove about
10mm deep off the top of the reinforced concrete beam. Re-render making sure that the upper surface
will finish with a definite slope outwards with the higher edge below the lowest bed joint of the brickwork.
LUP09/S33.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 33-2/5
33.6 REPAIR TO FACING BRICK WALL PANELS

(NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION)
(1) Stains and foreign materials on the surfaces to be repaired are to be removed by high pressure
waterjet.
(2) All edges of each panel of the wall joint shall be raked out carefully with mechanical angle grinder
to a depth of 30mm and filled with approved polyurethane sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. (Note: If the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then
the bottom edge shall be treated differently. Instead, a 55º non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed
as shown in the Drawing.) Where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is
greater than 25 to 30mm on account of the existing brick joint being of poor or inadequate mortar
filling, the Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing piece before
proceeding with the application of the sealant. Also, if the joint, after raking out, is found to be
jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before applying
the sealant.
(3) Cracks in the fair-face bricks shall be patched with brick-colour cement mixed with approved
bonding agent.
(4) Point all brick joints with cement-sand (1:1) mortar gauged with approved bonding agent to
BS 5270.
(5) Apply 2 coats of approved clear acrylic sealers `Thoroclear 777' and 2 subsequent coats of
approved clear water repellents `Thoroglaze' or other approved materials.
(6) Conduct water test to all surfaces treated. Any sign of seepage shall be repaired.
33.7 REPAIR TO THE FACING BRICK WALL PANELS IF

PLASTERING IS SPECIFIED (NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION)
Rake out every mortar joint of the brick wall with a pneumatic hand chisel to an even depth of 10 to 15mm.
Brush away all loose mortar and sand particles immediately before applying plastering. Wet the brick
surface and allow excess water to drain off. Apply two different coatings with at least 10 hours interval
between coats : the first coat is applied with cement-sand (1:3) mix plaster whereas the second coat is
applied with approved cement-based waterproofing material to BS 4887:1973. The first coat shall be
applied with a wooden trowel applying pressure to force the mortar into the grooves already formed in the
brick joints described above.
The mortar coat shall be of a mean thickness of about 8mm from the brick surface. This coating shall be
finished rough to form a key for the subsequent coat. The subsequent coat shall be applied to bring the
surface as close to a true vertical plane as is practical. The mean thickness of this coating shall be 4mm.
If the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then a 55° non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed
at the base of the facing brickwall before applying the two different coatings.
On completion of the repair work, allow the coatings to cure and set before carrying out the water test as
specified in Clause 33.11 "Water Test".
Paint the repaired surface as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting". The colour of the paint shall be
approved by the Board's SO Rep.
33.8 PATCH AND JOINTS BETWEEN PRECAST SILLS
For point blocks where the windows in the affected wall exceed about 1200mm in width the precast
concrete sill should be in separate lengths end-jointed at about 1200mm intervals. The Contractor shall
hack out carefully the top part of the mortar joint 6mm deep, brush clean and apply approved silicone
weather sealant for use on masonry work as detailed in the Drawings and to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep. Concrete surface shall be dry when applying sealant. Sealant shall be continuous and sealing up
with the window frame.
LUP09/S33.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 33-3/5
33.9 REPAIR TO HOLLOW-BLOCK OR SOLID-BLOCK WALL PANELS

(NON-CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION)
(1) Grind the whole hollow-block wall exterior surface with mechanical angle grinder. Clean the whole
hollow wall exterior surface by brushing with either a stiff brush or wire brush, at the same time
washing down with water.
(2) All edges of each panel of the wall joint shall be raked out carefully with mechanical angle grinder
to a depth of 30mm and filled with approved polyurethane sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. (Note - if the wall recesses in from the reinforced concrete beam, then
the bottom edge shall be treated differently. Instead, a 55º non-shrink grout fillet shall be formed
as shown in the Drawing.) Where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is
greater than 25 to 30mm on account of the existing blockwork joint being of poor or inadequate
mortar filling, the Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing piece before
proceeding with the application of the sealant. Also, if the joint after raking out is found to be
jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before applying
the sealant.
(3) Point all joints and cracks with cement-sand (1:1) mortar gauged with approved bonding agent to
BS 5270.
(4) Provide new drips to be formed by cement and sand (1:3) mortar at top and bottom edges of the
reinforced concrete beam as shown.
(5) Apply a coating of approved cement-based water-proofing material to BS 4887:1973 averaging

4mm thick over the whole exterior surface of the hollow block wall; mixed in the proportion in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
(6) When the plastered surface has been properly set, conduct water test to all surfaces treated. Any
sign of seepage shall be repaired.
(7) When the water test is successful, apply the decoration as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting".
The colour of the paint shall be approved by the SO Rep.
33.10 PAINTING
On completion of the repair work, allow for as long a time as is feasible for the mortar to mature, weather
and dry before applying decoration. Apply three (3) coats of approved water based algae resistant
emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to ten (10) percent by volume with clean water.
Subsequent coats shall not be diluted. Paint shall be in a colour matching the surrounding works. The
paint is to be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
33.11 WATER TEST
After the completion of the remedial works, the Contractor shall carry out water test for signs of water
seepage as instructed by the SO Rep, as follows: A continuous jet of water is to be sprayed on the upper
joint between the reinforced concrete beam and the repair blockwall corresponding to 600 1/hr (max.) from
a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m/sec and a cone scatter of approximately 60° held at a
distance of 1.0 - 1.2 m from the surface under test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 4 hours.
The hose should be placed with the nozzle as shown in the attached Figure 1 (refer Clause 12.14). The
water shall not seep into any part of the building during the test or within the period of 12 hours after the
completion of the test.
However, the Contractor shall note that these operation will not in any way release the Contractor from his
responsibility for maintenance during the Defects Liability Period.
LUP09/S33.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 33-4/5
33.12 ON COMPLETION
All parts disturbed or damaged during the execution of the works shall be repaired or replaced or
reinstated to the satisfaction of SO Rep. All floors soiled by contractor's work shall be thoroughly washed,
drip marks or paintwork removed and the works generally touched up. All debris and contractor's tools,
materials and equipment shall be removed on completion of the works and the whole site shall be left
clean and tidy.
33.13 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE END CAVITY

BRICK WALL (INCLUSIVE OF SOLID BLOCK AND HOLLOW BLOCK WALL)
(1) General
The remedial work is to stop the rainwater seepage through the end cavity brickwall. The
Contractor is to provide all necessary facilities, safety measures prior to commencement of work.
The Contractor shall barricade the ground level of the end wall and display sufficient number of
`DANGER - KEEP OUT' warning signs each 800mm x 500mm in 4 official languages at strategic
points to keep the public from places where work is in progress. At least 2 such sign boards shall
be fixed to scaffolding for each block of flats where work is in progress.
The remedial work is to be applied to the end cavity wall (outer layer) shown in the Drawings.
(2) Removal of Lowest Two Courses of Existing Brickwall
Hack out carefully the lowest two courses of brickwork of every panel of the wall to be treated
(including end cavity brickwall which has been plastered) by hammer or chisel in stages. Each
stage involves not more than 1500mm span of the wall. Provide and install temporary support
according to the Drawings at not more than 1500mm c/c between the upper edge of the existing
reinforced concrete beam and the underside of the third course of existing brickwall to ensure the
wall panel is safe during the course of remedial work. All the broken brick shall be removed
immediately from the wall panel and scaffolding. The Contractor shall ensure the third course of
brickwall is in good condition, free from crack, breakage and without sign of sagging during the
process of hacking out. Remove carefully all cement mortar below the third course of brickwork
and expose the brick surface underneath.
Alternative design of temporary support may be considered provided approval is obtained from the
SO Rep. The design of the alternative temporary support shall be submitted to SO Rep with
detailed calculation prior to the commencement of work.
(3) Clearing to Cavity
Remove all existing cement mortar dropping in the cavity by hammer hacking and chiselling. All the
existing mortar dropping embedded above the second course of brickwall shall be removed
thoroughly. The existing damp proof course shall be removed together with all the cement mortar
dropping. The Contractor shall ensure the existing internal hollow block wall, the adjacent
reinforced concrete beam, reinforced concrete column and existing brickwall are protected from
damage during the hacking and removal of cement mortar dropping.
After all cement mortar dropping has been removed from the cavity, the Contractor shall make
arrangement for the Resident Technical Officer to inspect the cavity to ensure the cavity is free
from any foreign object. The Contractor shall obtain the endorsement from the Resident Technical
Officer on a report book to certify the cavity of every wall panel to be treated are thoroughly clear
as indicated in the Drawings. The report book shall be presented to the SO Rep upon the
completion of every block. The Board will keep the report book upon the completion of the work.
(4) Laying of Damp Proof Course
Supply and lay damp proof course to the cavity as shown in the Drawings. The damp proof course
shall be extended to 200mm above the floor level and bonded to the hollow block wall with
rubberised bitumen adhesive to manufacturer's recommendations. The other end of damp proof
course shall be bonded to the top edge of the existing reinforced concrete beam.
The damp proof course shall be AH1 Moistop 737 or other approved and shall be laid in continuous
stretch to the whole width of the wall with only two overlapped sections.
LUP09/S33.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 33-5/5
33.13 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE END CAVITY

BRICK WALL (INCLUSIVE OF SOLID BLOCK AND HOLLOW BLOCK WALL)
(CONT'D)
(5) Reinstate the Lowest Two Courses of Brickwall
Provide and lay the lowest two courses of brickwork to the existing after the cleaning of the cement
mortar dropping and the installation of DPC to the cavity. The Contractor shall lay the brickwork in
two operations. The brickwork shall be divided into two vertical sections. The Contractor shall
remove the temporary support of the half of the existing wall then lay the lowest two courses of
brickwork for this half of the wall. The other half of the brickwork shall only be laid after the first half
of the brickwork has been set.
All bricks used shall be of same size and similar colour to the existing bricks of the wall panel. The
Contractor shall submit a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to the reinstatement of the
brickwork. Weepholes at 600mm c/c shall be provided at the lowest course as shown in the
Drawings.
The mortar mix shall be 1 part of masonry cement and 3 parts of sand by volume. The mortar shall
be carefully mixed upon properly constructed timber platforms and prepared in small quantities as
required. Care shall be taken to make the mixture mortar of the right consistency. No mortar
which has commenced to set may be used or mixed with any other mortar.
(6) Repair to the Existing External Brickwork Panels
The topmost mortar joint of every brick panel immediately under the beam shall be carefully raked
out by a pneumatic hand chisel to an even depth of 25mm to 30mm. Brush out all loose sand and
mortar and fill the groove with approved polyurethane sealant with backer rod to manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions, leaving no voids or gaps in between, to form a continuous seal.
All surfaces of the groove shall be dry when applying sealant. If the joint, after raking out, is found
to be jagged and uneven, then it shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before
applying the sealant.
Also, where after the initial hacking detailed above, the depth encountered is greater than 25mm to
30mm on account of the existing brick joint being of poor or inadequate mortar filling, the
Contractor shall first fill the groove solid with an effective backing before proceeding with the
application of sealant. Cracks (except hairline cracks) in the fairface bricks shall be patched with
brick-colour cement mixed with approved bonding agent.
(7) Plastering and Painting
Plastering shall then be carried out to the lowest two courses of the treated brickwall which had
been plastered prior to the remedial work and painted to match existing finish colour. The
weepholes shall be exposed after plastering.
Unless otherwise stated, all plaster surfaces affected by the remedial work shall be made good and
to be even, smooth and aligned to match with the existing surface. All plaster surfaces shall be
painted with 3 coats of emulsion paint as specified in Clause 33.10 "Painting" with colours
33.14 RESERVED
SECTION 34/...
LUP09/S33.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 34-1/4
SECTION 34
34.0 RECTIFICATION OF ALIGNMENT OF BUILDING ELEMENTS

AND STRUCTURAL REPAIRS
34.1 GENERAL
Where rectification of the alignment of building elements or structural repairs on the existing buildings is
required, the provisions of this section shall apply.
34.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The work included in this Section are :
(a) Supply of materials, Construction Equipment and labour for repair, reconstruction and
reinstatement of all defective RC beams, slabs, columns & other parts of the building;
(b) Making appointments/arrangements with all the affected tenants/lessees for the inspection and
execution of the works;
(c) Repair to defective structural members and correction of alignment and levels;
(d) Removal of plaster and/or defective concrete and replacement with approved repair material;
(e) Removal of corroded reinforcement and replacement/addition of new reinforcing bars as directed
by SO Rep;
(f) Grouting; and
(g) Re-rendering and re-plastering to the structural members.
and any other associated work not included above but otherwise specified in the Contract, and as shown
in the Drawings or indicated in the Work Schedule. The works shall be carried out under the supervision,
instructions and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.3 APPROVAL OF REPAIR MATERIALS
All repair materials used in this contract shall be those specified in the HDB Materials List. However, the
Contractor may propose other repair materials for the approval of the SO Rep subject to the materials
undergoing standard test methods specified by the Employer and achieving the specific performance
standards and/or any other additional performance standards as required by the Employer from time to
time.
34.4 REPAIR MATERIALS DELIVERED TO SITE
All repair materials delivered to site shall be properly packed sealed and clearly labelled. Delivery of
repair materials in loose, unlabelled packing and weighing on site shall not be allowed.
LUP09/S34.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 34-2/4
34.5 CORRECTION OF ALIGNMENT
Prior to the start of the work, the Contractor shall take measurements of all building elements as stipulated
in the General Specification. The Contractor shall submit all measurements, together with all deviations
from true alignment, to the SO Rep. The acceptable tolerance is specified in Clause 4.22. Where the
element is out of tolerance, and is determined to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall remove all existing
paintwork and plaster to correct the alignment or level.
Hacking of the existing concrete shall be allowed only with the written permission of the SO Rep. Where
hacking is allowed, the Contractor shall ensure that the concrete cover to the reinforcement bars is not
reduced below the minimum cover specified in the Structural Drawings.
34.5.1 Method of Rectification for Deviation less than 25mm
Where the deviation is less than 25mm after removing any excess concrete, the method of rectification as
stipulated in the Section 20 "WALL FINISHES" shall be adopted.
34.5.2 Method of Rectification for Deviation between 25mm and 50mm
Where the deviation is between 25mm and 50mm after removing all excess concrete, the Contractor shall
provide a layer of 50mm x 50mm x 3mm diameter weld mesh and plaster to acceptable alignment. The
weldmesh shall be anchored to the concrete surface with approved chemical anchors.
The number, size and type of chemical anchors shall be to the approval of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall ensure that the weld mesh is adequately protected with a 25mm cover.
34.5.3 Method of Rectification for Deviation greater than 50mm
Where the deviation is greater than 50mm after removing all excess concrete, the Contractor shall use the
conventional concreting method to correct the alignment. The edges of all areas to be repaired shall be
recessed 5mm to 10mm to avoid feather edging. Where reinforcement bars are exposed, all rust shall be
removed by wire brushing or other approved means. A layer of D6 weld mesh shall be provided and
anchored to the concrete surface with approved chemical anchors. The number, size and type of
chemical anchors shall be to the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate
cover is provided for the weldmesh.
Concrete of similar grade as that of the existing structural member shall be used. The maximum size of
the aggregate shall be 10mm.
Concreting works shall be in accordance with the section on Structural Concrete.
34.5.4 Alternative Method of Rectification for Deviation greater than 50mm
If the grouting method is used for deviations greater than 50mm, the Contractor shall remove unwanted
concrete as directed by the SO Rep. The edges of all areas to be repaired shall be recessed 5mm to
10mm to avoid feather-edging. Where reinforcement bars are exposed all rust shall be removed by wire
brushing or other approved means.
D6 weld mesh shall be cut and bent to shape and firmly anchored to the surface of the building element
with approved chemical anchors. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate cover is provided to the weld
mesh.
Formwork shall be erected and the void inside shall be filled with clean dry 10mm size aggregate
complying with SS31. The edges of the formwork shall then be sealed to ensure it is airtight. In-let pipes
shall then be provided at a spacing of not more than 600mm c/c. After bracing the formwork to withstand
the grouting pressure, approved cementitious based non-shrink grout shall be pumped in through the in-
let pipes, working from the bottom upwards. At the last in-let pipe, the pressure of the grout shall be
maintained at 140 N/mm2 for at least 5 minutes after which, the in-let pipes shall be sealed and the
formwork allowed to stand for 48 hours. After the striking of the formwork, the repaired or rectified area
shall be cured for at least 3 days as stipulated in the Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE".
LUP09/S34.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 34-3/4
34.6 METHOD OF STRUCTURAL REPAIRS
34.6.1 General
In preparing for repair, all defective and unsound concrete must be removed until sound concrete is
reached. The Contractor shall use only hammer and chisel or light pneumatic tools (max. weight 2 kg) to
remove the concrete to avoid the shattering effect on the buildings. The surface of the concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned and any surfaces coated with soot or other deposits should be wire brushed. All
rusted steel bars shall be chipped to remove scale. Steel bars with equivalent strength shall be added or
replaced if the SO Rep finds necessary.
The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect the finishes, fixtures and fittings inside the flats.
34.6.2 Repairs to Structural Members
All defects found on the structural members shall be repaired in compliance with technical requirements
and details shown in Upgrading Standard Details Manual (USDM).
34.6.3 Repair to Spalling Concrete
Allow a Provisional Sum Item as shown in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form Of Tender for the
repair of spalling concrete to the internal of the units.
For repair of spalling concrete in the common area outside the units, the Contractor is required to carry
out such works as and when directed by the SO Rep. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the
Contract Sum, all costs and expenses for the patch repair and pressure grouting methods for repairing
spalling concrete.
34.6.4 Repair to Water Seepage
The concrete surface to be repaired shall be free from dirt, paint and other impurities. It shall be kept
thoroughly and uniformly moist by spraying the area with water prior to any repair works. The surface must
be kept damp with no surface water. The approved waterproofing compound shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Where there is water seepage through porous concrete, the seepage shall be repaired by injecting an
approved water-reactive polyurethane grout. At least two injection ports shall be provided and the
distance between adjacent injection ports shall not be more than 200mm centre-to-centre.
Upon completion of the repair, the Contractor shall carry out a 4 hour watertest as stipulated in the Section
19 "FLOOR FINISHES". The Contractor shall rectify all leakages to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.7 APPLICATION OF PAINT WITH ANTI-CARBONATION PROPERTY TO EXISTING SLAB SOFFITS

AND BEAMS OF THE GROUND FLOOR VOID DECKS
All atmospherically exposed concrete surfaces of slab soffits and beams of the ground floor void decks
shall be applied with paint with anti-carbonation property unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO
Rep. The paint and painting works on all finish surface shall comply with all technical requirements,
preparation work, workmanship and quality control as required under Section 23 “Painting and Decorating“
of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works.
The Contractor shall obtain the paint with anti-carbonation property from approved suppliers in the HDB
Materials List.
Any repair works shall be carried out prior to the application of the paint with anti-carbonation property. The
method statement shall be submitted to SO Rep for approval. The method statement shall include the
relevant illustration on the preparation, application and quality control check of the system for every stage
of the entire work process.
LUP09/S34.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 34-4/4
34.8 REINSTATE & MAKE GOOD
The work shall be carried out without damage to the adjoining parts of the structure or adjoining property
and if such damage occurs during the repair works, the Contractor shall reinstate and make good the
same at his own expense. All repairs and making good are to be executed with materials and
workmanship to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
34.9 ON COMPLETION
All parts disturbed or damaged during the execution of the works shall be repaired, repainted or replaced
to match existing. All floor shall be thoroughly washed, marks of paint work removed and the works
generally touched up. All rubbish and Contractor's tools, materials and equipment shall be removed on
completion of the works and the whole site concerning the repairs shall be left clean and tidy to the
SECTION 35/…
LUP09/S34.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 35-1/5
SECTION 35
35.0 SITE LANDSCAPING WORKS
35.1.1 Setting out Levels
For all landscaping and paved areas, Contractor shall set out works and notify the SO Rep three days in
advance before commencing work. The Contractor shall allow for making adjustment when instructed.
35.1.2 Setting out Works
Contractor shall be responsible for setting out landscaping works. He shall make due allowance in his
Tender for engaging qualified Surveyor, subject to agreement and approval of the SO Rep to set out the
entire works as indicated in the Drawing and from the existing boundary stones, reference points or any
other control points which shall be checked for correctness by qualified Surveyor.
35.1.3 Existing Services
(a) The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep promptly of any cables, pipes, water mains, manholes,
poles valves, etc. met with during the progress of the works, and shall immediately provide
adequate support and protection for the same to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(b) The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage thereto during the progress of the work
and shall meet all cost of repair and reinstatement. In the event where cables, pipes etc. have to
be lowered, relocate or removed, the Contractor shall co-operate with the relevant Authority
concerned and all cost and delay due to this is deemed to have been allowed for by the Contractor
in his Contract Sum.
(c) The Contractor shall liaise closely with the SO Rep and the relevant Authority regarding the
location of the existing services prior to the commencement of the works.
The Contractor shall prior to the construction of foundations, excavate trial pits or trenches across line of
proposed works and satisfy himself as to the presence of cables and other underground services and take
necessary action against damaging the same.
35.1.4 Diversion of Existing Drains and Subsoil Drains
The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all the costs for the diversion of the existing drains. Before
the existing drains are cut off, the Contractor shall submit his proposal for the diversion and maintenance
of the existing drains during the whole period of construction to the SO Rep for approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the free flow of the drains at all times. At no
times shall the Contractor obstruct or reduce the free flow area of the existing drain without the prior
If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the Contractor has not carried out or i.e. unable to carry out all such
maintenance of temporary drain diversion to SO Rep satisfaction, the SO Rep reserves the right to
employ separate Contractor to carry all such works to ensure the proper maintenance of all such
temporary works and deduct the cost of all such works plus administrative charge from any money due to
or become due to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall remove all such temporary works as soon as those are no longer required and
reinstate the site to its original condition to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S35.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 35-2/5
35.1.5 Backfill and Reinstatement
The SO Rep will determine whether the material proposed by the Contractor is suitable for use as
selected fill. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep selected material of the required quality is unobtainable from
the excavation under the contract boundary, the Contractor shall obtain the material as borrow with no
extra payment.
The existing carriageway, centre island, hard shoulder, side-table, kerbs and drains, etc. shall be
reinstated to their original condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good
any depression of the carriageway arising as a result of settlement of backfill material and other Defects
due to unsatisfactory reinstatement immediately and as directed by the SO Rep.
35.1.6 Site Control Tests and Testing Instruments
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary labour, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments and
materials for carrying out all tests at the site including the provision of all necessary transport for the
transportation of materials, samples, etc. The Contractor must make allowance for all the above in his
Contract Sum as no monetary claim for compensation or extras shall be paid for any work carried out by
the Contractor in connection with the above work unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the
specification.
35.1.7 Discrepancies
The whole of the works especially figured dimensions, etc. must be checked at site to ensure correctness
before construction and any serious discrepancy should be immediately reported to the SO Rep prior to
commencement of the works.
35.2 FOUNDATION FOR LINKWAYS AND OTHER LIGHT PRECINCT STRUCTURES
Where linkways and other light precinct structures are designed to rest on footings or raft or similar
foundations, the ground shall be properly compacted by rolling successively with compaction equipment.
The compacted ground shall have a minimum soaked CBR of 5% and shall be compacted to a minimum
of 95% of maximum dry density obtainable using the modified A.A.S.H.O. Compaction test (Heavy
Hammer) or Test No. 13 BS 1377: 1975.
35.3 EARTHWORKS
Constructing the earthmound where shown in the Drawings and final trimming work is included in this
contract.
If Contractor find shortage or surplus earth, the Contractor shall supply or remove the earth at his own
expense. If the Contractor finds undesirable materials from the excavation works, he shall remove all
undesirable materials (such as organic, debris etc) away from the site and backfill with good sandy soil.
35.4 PLANTING TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS, ETC
The Contractor shall take full responsibility to maintain the trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc. after they
are planted. However, in the event that the trees or shrubs are dead after planting, Contractor shall
immediately replace them and the cost of replacement shall be wholly borne by the Contractor. The
replaced trees shall be of similar quality as the ones replaced.
35.5 SUMP
Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to size and in position as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S35.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 35-3/5
35.6 PRESERVATION OF EXISTING TREES

DURING CONSTRUCTION & DEVELOPMENT
Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as "preserved
trees" for the purpose of this clause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to avoid damage
or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements :
(A) Treatment of Preserved Trees in Area of Fill
(a) Tolerable Depth of Fill
The area around preserved trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth.
(b) Construction of Wall Around Trees
Well not exceeding 1m in depth shall be constructed around preserved trees. The minimum
diameter of well shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved trees measured at the trunk
0.5m above ground level. Details of well shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(c) Existing Trees in Area of Cut and Fill
The change of level for existing level in areas of cut and fill should not be more than
300mm.
The lowering of ground level around a tree must be done by hand under the supervision of a
Horticultural Officer. Machine must not be used. If roots are removed in the process of
lowering of ground level, light branch trimming is carried out to balance any reduction in the
root system.
(B) Treatment of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut
(a) Tolerable Depth of Cut
The area around preserved trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300mm.
(b) Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree
An area around preserved trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root
system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of preserved
trees measured at the trunk 0.5m above ground level. Details of retention of raised planter
are as shown the Drawings.
(C) Protection of Existing Trees From Physical Damage

by Equipment etc During Construction
(a) All preserved trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by
suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of preserved trees shall be placed before
commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair for
the duration of the contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be
determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2m from the
trunk of preserved trees.
Individual preserved trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny sacks
and 50mm x 100mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced at no
more than 50mm apart to a height of 1.5m above ground.
(b) Any damage to preserved tree root system shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor
under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed an/or damaged
during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of the exposed and/or
damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved sealing compound and
topsoil spread over the exposed root area.
LUP09/S35.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 35-4/5
35.6 PRESERVATION OF EXISTING TREES

DURING CONSTRUCTION & DEVELOPMENT (CONT'D)
(C) Protection of Existing Trees From Physical Damage

by Equipment etc During Construction (Cont'd)
(c) Any damage to preserved tree branches shall be treated in accordance with the Drawings.
(i) Branch Trimming of Damaged Branches
(1) A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300mm from the main trunk of
preserved trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The
depth of the cut shall not be more than ½ of the diameter of the branch.
(2) A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The

distance between these two cuttings shall be 75mm to 150mm.
(3) Make a shallow cut at C.
(4) Final cut is to be sharp and clear.
(5) 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.
(ii) Wound Treatment
(1) Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife.
(2) Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends.
(3) Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(d) If any preserved trees are severely injured by mechanically equipment, etc., the SO Rep
shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And
Irregularities".
(D) Health & Condition of Preserved Trees
(a) The Contractor shall ensure that :
(1) Compaction of soil around preserved trees shall be avoided.
(2) No materials shall be stored within the root system.
(3) There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the preserved trees.
(4) There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the preserved trees.
(5) There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc. within
the spread of the preserved trees crown.
(6) Soil around preserved trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply of
air and water get to the roots.
(7) The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of drought.
(b) The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the preserved trees eg.
branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.
(c) If the growth of the preserved trees is stifled, the Contractor shall interalia bear the cost of
making good and charges in accordance with Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities"
shall be imposed against the Contractor.
LUP09/S35.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 35-5/5
35.7 GRASS PAVIOR BLOCK FOR FIRE ENGINE ACCESS
Where specified in the Drawing, the fire engine access shall be laid with grass pavior block on sandy soil
planting base and foundation (to CE's requirement).
SECTION 36/…
LUP09/S35.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 36-1/4
SECTION 36
36.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER

AND OTHER MECHANICAL SERVICES INSTALLATION
36.1 WORK BY REGISTERED PLUMBER AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
All sanitary, water and gas installation Works shall be carried out by a Registered Plumber (LP) registered
under Singapore Plumbing Society (SPS) , Licensed Water Service Plumber (LWSP) and Licensed Gas
Service Worker (LGSW) respectively and shall comply with all current Code-of-Practices, Bye-Laws,
Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.
36.2 CERTIFICATE FROM WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB
Apply in writing to Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for final inspection of the sanitary
installation and obtain the final approval before the date of completion of the Contract.
On Completion of the whole of the installation work, obtain a Certificate from Water Reclamation
(Network) Department, PUB, certifying that the work has been carried out complying fully with their
Regulations and Requirements before the Final Payment can be released.
Failure by the Contractor to apply for such inspection on time, shall render him liable for damages or loss
suffered by the Employer due to the delay in approving the sanitary installation by PUB, arising out of or in
connection with the Contractor's failure to apply for such inspection on time. Notwithstanding the above,
the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor.
36.3 INSPECT DRAWINGS AND MAKE ALLOWANCE
The Contractor shall carefully examine all drawings, especially the civil and structural drawings and
ascertain for himself all probable obstructions such as pile caps, foundations, beams footings, etc. which
may necessitate diversions of drains lines, inspection chambers positions and other fittings, from the lines
and positions shown on Drawings. Allow in the Contract Sum for all costs arising from necessary
additional lengths of drain pipes, bends, etc. which are required to cater for such adjustments in alignment
and running of drains, lines, inspection chambers, other fittings, etc. No claims for extras shall be
entertained by the Board for non-compliance or misinterpretation of this Clause by the Contractor. Civil,
Structural and Architectural drawings may be inspected at the Employer's Drawing Office during normal
working hours.
36.4 DIAMETER OF PIPES
Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes are meant to be
their nominal sizes.
LUP09/S36.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 36-2/4
36.5 CONTRACTOR TO GIVE NOTICES AND SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL
Submit all necessary application forms, drawings and give all notices required in connection with the
works.
Submit sanitary drawings and Water Service drawings and gas installation drawings with application form
to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department PUB, Water Department PUB and City Gas respectively
for approval not later than 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. or information.
36.6 EXCAVATE TRENCHES AND REMOVE EXCESS EARTH
Excavate all trenches and pits for new drain-lines and inspection chambers as shown. The soil condition
shall be inspected by the SO Rep. After drain-lines have been tested and approved by the SO, backfill the
soil, properly consolidated to original levels and cart away surplus earth promptly and in any case not later
than 7 days from the date of SO Rep's instruction to do so. Where ground is soft, hardcore, bakau piling
etc. shall be provided to drain-lines, inspection chambers/waste sumps and such works shall be treated as
variations unless otherwise stated.
36.7 WORK THROUGH CONCRETE STRUCTURE
Every care shall be taken in drilling, coring holes through concrete structure so as not to disrupt the
concrete and steel. Seek approval from the SO Rep before carrying out such work.
Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, concrete structure has been affected or unnecessarily disrupted,
reinstate at own expense the affected parts of structure to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.8 DRILLING OR CORING ON FINISHED AREAS
Where drilling or coring of holes are to be carried out on areas where tiles, or other types of finishing had
been completed, take all precaution and care to ensure that damage is minimised. In the event of any
damage, make good the damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at own expenses.
36.9 PROVISION OF HOLES IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE OR WALLS
Where holes are provided, enlarge the holes to the diameter and position as required without damaging
the surrounding area. All damage shall be made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at own expenses.
36.10 PATCHING UP
Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with grade 30 concrete mixed with water reducing
admixture in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and of workmanship at least equal to that
of the surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete
and pipe. Brush on one coat neat, thick cement grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through
such patching shall be made good by the Contractor.
All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.11 TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION
Test the whole sanitary and water installation as follows :
36.11.1 Water Test
As soon as PUB's water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance with
the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defects, within 10
days from the date PUB's water supply is available :
(a) Water supply pipe.
(b) Direct supply pipe.
(c) Joints between floor slab and floor trap in bathrooms and kitchens and joints between
branching-off for WCs and floor slab.
(d) Water pumping plant.
LUP09/S36.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 36-3/4
36.11.2 PROCEDURE OF WATER TEST
36.11.2.1 Water Supply Pipe
Test all water supply pipes for leaks.
36.11.2.2 Direct Supply Pipe
Where required, apply to PUB and pay all fees for installing meters to the lower floors with direct water
supply for the purpose of testing for leaks in the pipe.
36.11.2.3 Floor Traps
The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with polythene
sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 20mm depth of water above the
gratings. The amount of water shall be maintained for about 2 hours, replenished when necessary,
during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks. Towards the end of this
test, the water shall be allowed to drain off. During this process there shall be no signs of chokage and
leakage in the system. The water test shall be carried out 3 days after laying of floor finishes.
36.11.2.4 Water Pumping Plant
Arrange with the SO Rep for test of the whole pumping plant including transfer pump and booster pump
for signs of leak and proper performance of the pumps. Rectify all the Defects found during the
inspection immediately so that a re-inspection can be carried out. Arrange for the test to be carried out
not later than four (4) weeks before the buildings are handed over to the Employer. Provide electricity
for operating the pumps, provide temporary piping, connections, fittings and accessories necessary for
the test to be carried out.
36.11.3 HYDROSTATIC TEST OF UNDERGROUND MAINS
Where necessary, arrange for hydrostatic test of all underground ductile iron pipes after PUB bulk
meter according to CP 48.
After laying, jointing and anchoring of the main and before any backfilling or concreting, change the
piping system slowly and carefully with potable water so that all air is expelled. Test the mains under
pressure.
Before testing the main, fit all open ends of the main with blank flange and secure them with struts or
otherwise to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. Apply a test pressure of 125m head
or the maximum working pressure plus 50% whichever is the greater, by means of manually operated
test pump or by power-driven test pump.
Maintain the test pressure by the pump for 1 hour and check the main for any leakage. General
leakage shall not exceed 2 litres per cm per pipe diameter per km of pipe per 100m head per 24 hours.
Notwithstanding the above, rectify all visual leaks detected.
36.11.4 STERILISATION OF UNDERGROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION MAINS
Where applicable, sterilisation of underground distribution water mains shall be carried out in
accordance with CP48 "Code of Practice for Water Services" and to the requirements of PUB.
The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and chemical testing by SAC accredited laboratory.
Two days after taking such samples, flush the underground distribution mains and further water
samples shall be taken for testing as described in the foregoing. Provide the water examination and
analysis report to the SO Rep and the result of water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for
human consumption. The underground distribution mains shall only be commissioned after two
consecutive tests are satisfactory otherwise the sterilisation procedure shall be repeated until such
requirements are met.
All costs and expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.
LUP09/S36.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 36-4/4
36.12 WATER FITTINGS
All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service
installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.
36.12.2 Marking Of Information
All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following:
(a) Manufacturer's identification mark, either on the body or plate;

(b) Marking of appropriate national standards e.g. BS EN 545;
(c) Nominal size and direction of flow;
(d) Colour codes for hot and cold water supply.
36.12.3 Non-Metallic Material
All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-metallic
seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457.
36.12.4 Metallic Material
All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of
AS/NZS 4020.
36.12.5 Copper Alloy Water Fittings
All copper alloy water fittings shall be of gunmetal, or bronze or DZR brass materials only. Gunmetal or
bronze water fittings shall comply with BS EN 1982:1999. Water fittings of the Dezincification Resistant
(DZR) type shall comply with the tests on "Composition" and "Resistance to dezincification" of BS EN
12163 or BS EN 12165 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR".
36.12.6 Water Fittings With Elastomeric Seals
All water fittings with elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipeline shall comply with SS 270.
36.13 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.
36.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
During the progress of work, the Contractor shall record and update all mechanical services (including
sanitary, water services, gas pipe and fire protection) installations or alterations based on actual site
installations on the Drawings. Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit
three sets of A1 sized as-built prints stamped “As-Built” and endorsed by LP/LGSW (where applicable) to
the SO Rep.
SECTION 37/...
LUP09/S36.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 37-1/22
SECTION 37
37.0 SANITARY INSTALLATION
37.1 SCHEDULE OF UPVC PIPES FOR FITTINGS FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION
Unless specified otherwise, all UPVC pipes and fittings provided for sanitary installations shall be in
accordance with the following schedules :
Types Of Pipe/Fitting
Sanitary Installation ( SS : Singapore Standard )
(Including Waste/Rain Water Remarks
Down-Pipe System) SS 141
SS 213 SS 272
Class D
Underground Sanitary Drainage

*
System-Main/Branch Drain Lines
Above Ground Sanitary Plumbing

System (Soil/Waste to I/C) :
(a) All except Void Decks * Anti-Mosquitoes
Devices, Socket
Sleeves and Pipe
Skirtings to be used.
(b) Void decks SS 213/SS 141

- Discharge stacks * Adaptor to be used.
- Discharge pipes & fittings *
Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe

System (RWDP) :
(a) 200 diameter pipes for RWDP *
Roof Outlet to be used.
system (White)
(b) Underground pipes/fittings Rectangular Section
for 200 diameter pipes (RWDP) Fittings to be used.
(c) Above ground pipes/fittings *

connected to 200 diameter
RWDP system
(d) 50, 80, 100 & 150 diameter
waste discharge (balcony, lift
lobby, etc) pipes/fittings :
i. Above ground except void *

decks and MSCPs
ii. Void decks and MSCPs SS 213/SS141 Adaptor
- Down pipes * to be used.
- Discharge pipes/fittings *
- Underground pipes/fittings *
*Denotes the specified pipes/fittings.
LUP09/S37.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 37-2/22
37.2 MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES
Unless otherwise stated, all pipes for main and branch lines shall be UPVC conforming to SS 272 and free
from breakage, distortions or cracks and of sizes specified in Clause 37.6 "Drain Sizes".
All drain-lines shall be laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm
thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in
the Drawings unless otherwise stated.
All drain-lines under roads and carparks shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes complying with BS
EN 598 and laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick grade
30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the Drawings
unless otherwise stated. Jointing of pipes of different materials in branch drain- lines or in the continuous
length of main drain-lines in between two inspection chambers shall not be allowed unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings. The section of main drain lines under roads and carparks shall be constructed
under the supervision of the SO Rep and the Contractor shall arrange for the inspection by and approval
of the SO Rep before covering up.
All drain lines in basement carparks shall be of ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and approved
by the SO Rep. Where individual connections of discharge stacks to the inspection chamber are
impracticable, a common pipe of adequate size to serve the main discharge stack and a common pipe to
serve the secondary discharge stack may be provided to suit the connection to the inspection chamber
subject to approval of the relevant authorities.
All drain-lines for eating establishments such as eating houses, restaurants, food stalls, etc shall be
constructed with cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598 . The floor traps for the eating
establishments shall be of stoneware type or cast iron.
The trenches for main and branch drain-lines shall be backfilled with quarry dust and finished as shown in
the Drawings.
37.3 GRADIENT FOR DRAIN-LINES
Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, the gradient
of drain-lines shall be as follows :
(a) Branch Drain-Lines
Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines Maximum Gradient

Allowable Gradient
Upstream at
in other cases
UPVC Ductile Iron Back Drop Tumbling Bay
110 110mm - 1 in 20 to 1 in 60
160 150mm 1 in 70 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
(b) Main Drain-Lines
Diameter of Main Drain-Lines Maximum Gradient

Allowable Gradient
upstream of
UPVC Ductile Iron in other cases
Back Drop/Tumbling Bay
160 150mm 1 in 70 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
250 250mm 1 in 90 1 in 49 to 1 in 150
37.4 JOINTS FOR DRAIN-LINE PIPES
Only flexible jointed pipes shall be used for drain line pipes.
37.5 JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS
All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of
pipes.
UG03/S37.DOC(2)
(YCS)(15122002)
(CAD)
Lup Spec
TS 37-3/22
37.6 DRAIN SIZES
All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be as shown in Drawings. Main drain-lines
shall be UPVC pipes to SS 272 unless specified otherwise.
37.7 WATER TEST FOR DRAIN-LINES
Hydrostatic test shall be carried out for all drain lines, according to the latest requirements by the Water
Reclamation (Network) Dept, PUB, before they are surrounded and covered. The Contractor shall inform
the SO’s rep of the test so that the relevant QP can witness and endorse the results of the test.
All sanitary drain lines and sewers of 600 mm and below in diameter shall be tested by filling with water.
The pressure shall be measured from the highest point of the pipeline under test and shall be 1.5 metre
head of water. Pipelines should not be accepted until they have withstood the required pressure for 30
minutes without a loss in excess of 0.005 litres/metre run for each 100 mm in diameter.
The fact that the pipes have been tested shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to locate
any leak and make good the section, including re-excavation, timbering and backfilling and making good.
37.8 BEDDING AND HAUNCHING TO BRANCH AND MAIN DRAIN-LINE
The pipes which have been tested and found satisfactory shall be bedded and haunched with grade 30
concrete to details as shown in Drawings. Provide break joints at pipe joints not greater than 6m intervals
and at the first pipe joint next to inspection chamber, all to the requirements of the Water Reclamation
(Network) Department, PUB.
Carry out all work in accordance with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department,
PUB.
37.9 BREAKING UP ROADS AND CARPARKS FOR LAYING OF DRAIN-LINES
Allow in the Contract Sum for breaking up roads and carparks for laying of drain-lines etc. and
reinstatement of damages all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
37.10 INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES
Where inspection chambers and drain lines are included in the Works, the Contractor shall include in the
Contract Sum for either one or both of the following systems as shown in the Drawings:
`
(a) suspended from building and/ or;
(b) supported on piling
37.10.2 Suspended From The Buildings
Where the inspection chambers and main drain lines are required to be suspended from the building, they
shall be constructed according to the details as shown in the Drawings.
Lup Spec
TS 37-4/22
37.10.3 Supported on Piling
Where piles are required to support the inspection chambers and drain lines as indicated in the Drawings,
the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required. All costs and expenses incurred on the
piling Works are deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil Investigation
Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil Investigation Report
does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction
thereof of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the information in the Soil Investigation
Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Contractor shall at
his own cost, ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations.
Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment to
the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided at the Site
and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, if for whatever causes the piles cannot be driven into
the ground, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be effected. For the purpose of computing
the value of such omission, the penetration length of each pile shall be deemed to be 8.0m.
37.10.4 Inspection Chamber
Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection
chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30 and approved
by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Heavy duty cast iron frames and covers
(Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as shown in the Drawings.
Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made or
cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of the inspection chambers in granolithic concrete
1:1:1 mix and trowel to a smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the
drainage system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from the surface level to the invert level, unless
otherwise specified. Construct all walls and slabs of the inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced
concrete as shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB. Plaster the internal walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and trowel
to a smooth finish.
Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal diameter
of the main channels.
Grade C light duty covers shall be completed with stainless steel handles as shown in the Drawings and
37.11 CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS

(Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing or approved by SO Rep)
All sanitary stacks shall be fully housed within masonry ducts (stack ducts).
Leakage tests to all sanitary stacks, discharge pipes and fittings shall be completed before they are fully
concealed in the stack ducts and ceiling ducts.
All sanitary pipes and fittings at the ceiling shall be fully concealed by ceiling duct of 9mm thick calcium
silicate boards, fixed on 30mm x 30mm x 1mm thick galvanised steel angle frames. All screws used shall
be galvanised. Board joints shall be taped with paper tape and gypsum compound used to fill screw holes
and board joints on the calcium silicate, and this shall be sanded smooth and not visible after painting.
The completed boards shall be finished with base coating and 2 layers of emulsion paint. Lighting
diffusers shall be 15mm x 15mm x 10mm thick egg crate chromed plastic type in powder coated
aluminium frames. Detailed workshop drawings showing the type of boards and fixing methods, including
access panels and lighting diffusers, shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to their
installations.
Lup Spec
TS 37-5/22
37.11 CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONT'D)

(Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing or approved by SO Rep)
The calcium silicate boards shall comply with the following physical properties:
Physical Properties Requirements

Dry density 910 kg per m3, ±10%
Weight 9.5 kg per m2 , ±15%
Flexural strength across grain 10 MN per m2
Flexural strength along grain 6 MN per m2
Moisture movement from normal to saturated 0.15%
Nominal moisture content-in situ 3 to 5%
Thermal conductivity 0.161 W/mk
Alkalinity 7 to 10 pH value
The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical
properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation.
37.12 UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND)
37.12.1 Material
37.12.1.1 General
All the unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent and application above
ground shall be all approved by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB and to the requirements
of SS 213 and its latest amendments. But the UPVC soil and waste stack in the void deck/play area shall
be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and its latest amendments as shown in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably free
from grooving and other Defects that would impair their performance in service.
Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be supplied with ends with +2
degree of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp edges
removed.
37.12.1.2 Dimensions of Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes to SS 213
Outside Diameter
Wall Thickness
Nominal Size Mean Diameter De Incl Ovality D
Min Max Min Max Min Max
32 36.2 36.5 36.1 36.2 2.1 2.4

40 42.8 43.1 42.7 43.2 2.3 2.6
50 55.7 56.0 55.5 56.2 2.4 2.7
65 68.7 69.1 68.5 69.3 2.7 3.1
80 82.3 82.7 82.1 83.0 3.0 3.5
100 110.0 110.0 109.6 110.8 3.2 3.6
125 140.0 140.0 139.5 140.4 3.7 4.2
150 160.0 160.5 159.5 161.1 4.0 4.5
Note : (i) De = mean outside diameter

(ii) D = any measured diameter
Lup Spec
TS 37-6/22

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND) (CONT'D)
37.12.1.3 Minimum Socket Dimension to SS 213
The minimum socket dimension for 3m length UPVC pipes shall be as follows :
Nominal Pipe Size in mm Minimum Socket Dimension in mm
32 19
40 21
50 23
65 25
80 29
100 34
125 42
150 45
37.12.1.4 Dimension and Colour of the Waste and Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D
Wall Thickness
Average Outside
Nominal Diameter Average Value Individual Value
Size
min max max min max
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
80 88.7 89.1 5.3 4.6 5.3

100 114.1 114.5 6.8 6.0 6.9
155 168.0 168.5 9.9 8.8 10.2
All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The
markings shall show the following :
(a) Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.

(b) the nominal size.
(c) SS 141 Class `D'
The marking of pipe shall be in accordance with SS 141.
37.12.1.5 Adaptor to Couple the Fitting (to SS 213)

and UPVC Pipes (to SS 141)
An adaptor shall be used to couple the fitting to SS 213 and its latest amendment (Single junction/single
junction with inspection eye) and UPVC pipe to SS 141 to be installed at the void deck. The shape of
the adaptor shall comply with the design as shown in the Drawings. The strength, dimensional
tolerance and thickness of the adaptor shall comply with the standard and specifications laid down in SS
213 (except that the dimensional tolerance for the socket of the adaptor shall comply with SS 174).
Obtain prior approval from the SO Rep before use. Random samples may be chosen for testing at SAC
accredited laboratory.
37.12.1.6 Swept Junction Fitting
Use only swept junction fittings (single or double cross junction) with 50mm minimum root radius in all
sanitary installation unless otherwise stated.
37.12.1.7 UPVC Pipe Skirting
Provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirting with square base, at the base of each discharge stack as
shown in the Drawings. UPVC pipe skirting shall comply with SS 213. Installation of the UPVC pipe
skirting shall be in accordance with Clause 37.12.2 "INSTALLATION".
Lup Spec
TS 37-7/22
37.12.2.1 General
All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213 or SS 141
and all tests as required by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. All jointing and fixing
requirements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm diameter
as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45o bends to SS 272 at the base of the discharge stacks in
accordance with the Drawings.
Install cross ventilating pipes to required size between the main the secondary discharge stack at
specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings or required
by PUB, anti-syphonage pipe connecting the appliances to the discharge stack shall not be necessary.
37.12.2.2 Inspection Openings, Connectors and Fittings
All inspection openings shall be of the screw and washer type with proper adaptors where necessary.
New UPVC spigot adaptors and connectors shall be used to replace the existing cast iron pipes
embedded between the floor slab.
37.12.2.3 Floor Traps
Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC gratings
with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the floor traps. The
gratings shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by
Environmental Health Department, NEA.
The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in the
Drawings.
37.12.2.4 Method of Fixing
The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows :
(a) All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15o. All cutting of pipes shall be carried
out using approved pipe cutting tools before installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be capable
of producing the square cut and 15o chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tool
shall be portable and capable of cutting pipes of all sizes.
(b) Clean the pipe ends and sockets or fittings with an approved cleaning fluid or methylated spirit
and allow them to dry.
(c) Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the depth of
the socket formed in pipes.
(d) Coat the pipe ends, up to the marking, and the internal surface of the socket fully with solvent
cement and insert the pipe into the socket immediately. The edge of the socket must be in line
with the marking on the pipe. Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth.
(e) After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and ensure that it is not disturbed for
at least another 5 minutes.
(f) All joints shall be assembled using sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In
situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or adaptor shall be used.
(g) No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.
(h) The type of solvent shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
For jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent shall be subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
Lup Spec
TS 37-8/22

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS (ABOVE GROUND) (CONT'D)
37.12.2.5 Solvent Cement For Joining UPVC Pipes And Fittings
Solvent cement used to connect UPVC pipes and fittings shall be approved by the SO Rep and comply
with BS4346:Part 3. The solvent cement shall be in an approved light colour to enable visual
inspection. The Contractor shall submit the test report of the solvent cement to be used to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the commencement of the sanitary works and water installation works.
Tests shall be carried out by an SAC accredited testing laboratories and shall include :
(a) Shear strength

(b) Film properties
(c) Long-term hydrostatic pressure
37.12.2.6 W.C. Joint
Place rubber seal over the spigot of the w.c. outlet with the open end facing towards the pan.
Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector socket.
Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket.
Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove and
recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.
37.12.2.7 Fixing of Bosses
Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of waste pipe
from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the appropriate sized hole in
the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised drill which is attached to a circular
hole-saw by a mandrill.
Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe.
Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply and tighten
the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes.
When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92° degree marks on both parts are upper-most.
Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that the boss is
assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.
37.12.2.8 Access Doors
Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes with
template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw.
Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access door shall
be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.
37.12.2.9 Weathering
Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved weathering
material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.
37.12.2.10 UPVC Vent Cowl
Clean the mating surfaces of the pipe fitting before assembling the unit in accordance with normal
solvent weld cement procedure.
Lup Spec
TS 37-9/22
37.12.2.11 Provision for Thermal Movement
In cases where the piping is likely to be subjected to any large variations in temperature and to prevent
slightest movement, use a seal/sleeve ring joint between fixed joints.
37.12.2.12 Support Distances of UPVC Pipe Lines
Horizontal pipes which exceed 1400mm in length shall be supported with PVC coated mild steel
hangers. Vertical pipes passing from floor to floor shall be supported with PP collars attached to the
pipes as shown in the Drawings. The spacing of the hangers and collars shall not exceed 1400mm for
horizontal pipes and 1800mm for vertical pipes.
37.12.2.13 Bonding Keys to Concrete Slab
Provide bonding keys to concrete floor slab where UPVC pipes go through. Roughen the whole surface
of the UPVC pipe which is in contact with the floor slab to form keys. Apply thin coat of solvent cement
and sprinkle fine sand to the whole area of the roughened surface before the solvent cement sets.
Use solvent welded cement method for all jointing assemblies. Carry out all fixing work in strict
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
Use UPVC pipes to SS 213 where the stacks continue above roof level. Use UPVC pipes to SS 141
where the stacks continue below the ceiling of the open 1st storey.
37.13 UPVC DOUBLE 45° BEND
Where applicable, provide and fix 150mm diameter UPVC double 45º bend or 90º large radius bend
(minimum 200mm to centre line of pipe) to SS 272 encased in 150mm thick of grade 30 concrete and
reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved at the base of each discharge stack below ground
level.
If the discharge stack is in 100mm diameter, a 150mm x 100mm UPVC taper piece to SS 213 shall be
used at above the ground level to connect the 100mm diameter stack to the 150mm single junction fitting
with inspection eye to SS 213.
Provide single junction fitting with inspection eye to the discharge stack at 150mm above the finished
ground floor level.
Secure screw down cap of the inspection eye of the single junction fitting must be secured with 2 nos. of
brass screws.
37.14 UPVC GULLIES AND UPVC FLOOR TRAPS

WITH UPVC GRATING AT GROUND FLOOR
Where ground floor wastes shall discharge into the floor trap or apron gully or direct sullage water drain
line at the ground floor as shown in the Drawings, the gullies shall be 100mm diameter UPVC fitting with
150mm square UPVC grating and set on and encased in concrete minimum 150mm thick and connected
to drains discharging into inspection chambers. The gratings for floor wastes/traps and gully traps shall be
of approved UPVC 150mm square top body with screw-in round grating cover and to the requirements
and approval of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, HDB and complying with SS 213.
The grating over floor trap and gully trap shall be complete with Anti-Mosquito Device approved by the
Environmental Health Department, NEA.
37.15 GULLY AND DEEP SEAL TRAP
All floor traps to upper floors shall be deep seal traps minimum 100mm diameter with 75mm deep seal all
to SS 213 and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
No gully of floor traps shall be deeper than 600mm from the top of grating.
Lup Spec
TS 37-10/22
37.16 LOW CAPACITY SQUATTING WC PANS
Squatting w.c. pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 379 the "Singapore Standard For WC
Pans For Use With Low Capacity Flushing Cisterns" and with `P' or `S' traps with cleaning eye. The
cleaning eye at ground floor shall be UPVC screw cap to SS 213.
Each pan shall be complete with approved high level plastic flushing cistern to SS 378 "Singapore
Standard on Low Capacity WC Flushing Cisterns up to 4.5 litres (max)" and UPVC flush pipe of minimum
32mm diameter.
Flush pipes shall be held at mid height by holderbat securely fixed to wall.
Overflow from cisterns shall be drained within building.
Carry out concrete infill and floor finishes around pans. Provide foot treads where there is no floor tile
finish.
Where the existing squat pan protrudes below the reinforced concrete floor, the Contractor shall hack the
pan and floor to remove the pan and seal up the opening with high strength grout. Bonding agent shall be
applied to the concrete interface between the old and new concrete. Provide new low capacity squating
WC pans complete with cistern, discharge pipes, UPVC pipe, fitting or low capacity WC suite.
37.17 LOW CAPACITY WC FLUSHING CISTERNS
All flushing cistern must comply with the SS 378 "Singapore Standard on Low Capacity WC Flushing
Cisterns up to 4.5 litres (max)".
Flushing cisterns shall be approved high level flushing cistern or other approved in which metal pull chain
will release not more than 4.5 litres of water.
37.18 FIXING LOW AND HIGH LEVEL CISTERNS TO WALL
New support brackets and spacer shall be provided for back fixing of the cistern as shown in the
Drawings. All stainless steel support brackets used for installing cisterns (high or low level type) shall be
of suitable design and comply with SS 378. The stainless steel shall be of grade 304. The spacer shall be
of non-corrosive material and shall firmly adhere to the back of the cistern shell and the wall. The support
brackets shall be installed at the based of the cistern.
Fix flush pipe support bracket to the wall for every 600mm run of pipe. When installed, the cistern shall be
free from any movement while the operating lever arm is pulled down for flushing operation.
37.19 WATER SUPPLY PIPE AND WASTE OUTLETS FOR SINK
Where applicable, the Contractor shall fix and terminate the water supply pipe to sink and provide the
waste outlets for sink at positions and to details all as shown in the Drawings.
Lup Spec
TS 37-11/22
37.20 LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN
37.20.1 Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install the following :
Blue and/or Pink and/or Blue and/or Pink and/orBeige

Accommodation Location Beige and/or Grey# Low and/or Grey # Vitreous China
Capacity WC Suite Wash Basin
Common
1 Rm, 2 Rm, * *
Bathroom/WC
3 Rm, 4 Rm,
5 Rm Attached
* *
Bathroom/WC
*Denotes the specified type
#The colour shall be decided by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide the colour
range specified for selection and approval by the SO Rep.
The WC suite and wash basin shall be of the same brand and approved as a set by the HDB.
37.20.2 Vitreous China Wash Basin
Provide and install wash basin as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite
And Wash Basin". The wash basin shall be approved 500mm x 400mm vitreous china (with non-corrosive
wall bracket fixings), complying with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated brass pillar tap and
handle conforming to BS 5412, waste plug, brackets, chain and 32mm approved UPVC bottle trap with all
necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin and pedestal (if applicable) shall be
decided by the SO Rep as specified in the foregoing subclause.
The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the
pillar tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter
UPVC pipe. For the case where 2 to 5 no. of basins are connected in series, the waste pipes shall be
50mm diameter UPVC pipes.
*37.20.3 Integral Cultured Marble Basin And Top

(*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing)
(A) Scope Of Work
Where specified, provide and install integral cultured marble basin with monolithic top to bathrooms
as specified in sub-clause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and in
accordance with the dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
Lup Spec
TS 37-12/22

(*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing)
(B) Material And Product
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be of solid, non-porous, homogeneous polymeric
material, either of polyester or acrylic base. It shall be of 12.5mm thick, complete with 100mm
backsplash, 200mm front apron, and with 3 galvanised steel supporting brackets as shown.
Bonding material and sanitary sealants of approved matching colour shall be provided in
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall be obtained from manufacturers approved by the
SO Rep.
(C) Physical Properties
The integral cultured marble basin and top shall comply with the following requirements :
International Association of Plumbing and

Characteristics
Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements
1. Workmanship and Finish Shall be free from cracks, crazing, pinholes, porosity,
blisters, chipped areas or moulding Defects.
2. Impact Resistance Shall not show cracks in the gel coat.
3. Barcol Hardness 40 unit
4. Oven Test for Cracking After oven test at 74°C ±2°C for 10 days, shall not show
and Crazing evidence of cracking or crazing.
5. Water Absorption Shall not absorb water in excess of 0.58% in 24 hrs.
6. Gel Coat (if applicable) Shall not be less than 0.37mm or more than 0.87mm in
thickness.
International Association of Plumbing and

Characteristics
Mechanical Officials (IAPMO PS 18-66) Requirements
7A. Stain Resistance to : Shall be such that it will withstand all reagents.
a. Coffee
b. Tea
c. Detergent
d. Acetone
e. Olive oil
f. Lipstick
g. Fly spray
h. Ink, washable
i. Urea (6%)
j. Alcohol
k. Iodine (1%)
l. Shoe polish
m. Vinegar
7B. Cigarette test All stain shall be removed without sanding through the
gel coat. If sanding is required, not more than 0.37mm
of the gel coat shall be removed.
8. Washability Shall withstand 40,000 cycles in the scrub test (only
slight brush marks are allowable).
9. Drain fitting connections Shall withstand the test with no visible damage.
Lup Spec
TS 37-13/22

(*Clause applicable if specified in the Drawing) (Cont'd)
(D) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirements
The Contractor shall submit test certificates by SAC accredited laboratories in relation to the
physical properties of the integral cultured marble basin and top. The tests shall be in accordance
with the relevant IAPMO PS 18-66 test methods conducted by SAC accredited laboratories.
(E) Basin Accessories
The basin shall be complete with 15mm chrome plated ceramic disc cartridge operated single lever
mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals
and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin.
The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the
inlet shall be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to
the basin top shall be 25mm minimum.
Mixer tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the PUB and the SO Rep. It shall be
complete with all necessary seals and nuts. Fix and secure the mixer tap firmly on the basin. Bottle
trap shall be approved by the SO Rep and connecting to a 32mm diameter UPVC waste pipe
discharging into floor trap as shown.
37.20.4 Coloured Or White Low Capacity Wc Suite
(A) Scope of Work
Where installation of pedestal pan (including new and/or replacement of existing pedestal pan) is
required under the Contract, provide and install close-coupled low capacity WC suite to all the
common and attached bathrooms of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of
Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin" and other locations as shown.
The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern,
internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the
necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the
approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances",
Singapore Standards SS 378 - specification for vitreous china WC pans for use with low capacity
WC flushing cisterns up to 4.5 L max., and SS 379 - specification for low capacity flushing cistern
up to 4.5 L max,
Close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume of 3.5 litres to
4.0 litres per single action flush with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the Drawings. The rigid
plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16 "WC seats (Plastic)",
or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat and cover shall match the profile of the WC
bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and
fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be
assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site.
The coloured WC Suite shall be approved by HDB.
The WC Suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
Lup Spec
TS 37-14/22
37.20.4 Coloured Or White Low Capacity Wc Suite (Cont'd)
(B) Installation
Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers,
hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using 4 no. of the original screws provided together with the WC and seal
the gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not
be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using method not in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
(C) Floor Openings
The Contractor is to patch up the existing openings and to create new openings as shown in the
Drawings to suit the water saving pedestal suite for "S-trap".
If the sanitary stack is near the new pedestal suite, "P-trap" water saving pedestal suite shall be
used, subject to SO Rep's approval (Contractor need not create another opening through the
existing slab to suit the pedestal).
(D) Colour or White Sanitary Wares
Where coloured low capacity w.c. suite and/or coloured wash basin are to be supplied and
installed, the contractor shall provide the following colour range of the aforesaid sanitary wares for
the selection and approval by the SO Rep : Blue and/or Pink and/or Beige and/or Grey and/or
White. 3 colours and/or white shall be decided by the SO Rep.
(E) Sealant
Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up the gap between sanitary wares and tiled surface. The
approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class 25 in accordance with ASTM
C920-01, able to be applied without a primer and meet the following performance requirements:
S/N Characteristics/Properties Test Method Requirements
1 Fungal Resistance Test ISO 846:1997 (Method B) No growth
2 Chemical Resistance Test

a) Concentrated sodium
a) Household bleach hypochlorite solution - Surface shall be unaffected
ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot after 16 hours of spot covered
b) Urea covered) test
b) Urea, 6.0% (Urine) - ANSI

Z124.3 : 1986 (spot
covered) :
3 Tack Free Time (hrs) ASTM C679-87 (1997) ≤ 4hrs
The contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the commencement of the work. The contractor shall also submit samples of the sealant to the SO
rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary works.
Lup Spec
TS 37-15/22
37.20.5 Basin For 1-Room Flat
Provide and install smaller wash bin as decided by the SO Rep.
37.20.6 Double Bowl Single Drainage Board Stainless Steel Sinks
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, the double bowl single drainage board stainless steel sink shall
be of HDB's currently approved type made of stainless steel complete with fittings and accessories,
complying with SS 40 and approved by relevant authorities. Each sink shall be supported on 3 nos.
stainless steel cantilever channels and stainless steel brackets all as shown in the Drawings and provided
with 40mm approved UPVC bottle trap approved by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB
complete with all necessary washers, seals and nuts, vulcanite plug and chrome brass chain or other
approved. Sink waste shall discharge into floor waste or trap as shown with proper branch connection. A
complete sample shall be installed for the approval of the SO Rep before fixing the rest. The sink waste
shall be 50mm UPVC pipe. Tap for the sink shall be installed in position so that water shall discharge into
the bowl and not onto the edges of the bowl.
Provide and install to each flat a double bowl single drainage board stainless steel sink as follows :
Flat Type Type of Sink Overall Size
2-Room ) )
3-Room ) Double bowl single drainage )
4-Room ) board (left or right) stainless ) 1500 x 500mm
5-Room ) steel sink )
Exec Apartment/Maisonettes ) )
The two (2) ends of the back upturn of the stainless steel sink shall be splayed at 10 degree (10°) and the
corners rounded off. The upturn is to be bent slightly outwards. The stainless steel channels and
brackets shall be provided together with the sink from the same supplier.
The fixing of sinks by stainless steel channels and brackets shall be to the sizes and shapes as shown in
the detailed Drawings.
Sound deadening pad shall be fixed to the reversed side of the sink as shown in the Drawings.
37.20.7 *Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories

(*Clause applicable if specified in the Contract)
All basins shall be complete with 15mm chrome plated ceramic disc cartridge operated by a single lever
mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and
nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin.
The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall
be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall
be 25mm minimum.
The Hot/Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with
character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass.
The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap
or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury.
The mixer tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the PUB and the SO Rep. Bottle trap shall be
approved by the SO Rep and connected to a 32mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into a floor
trap as shown.
Lup Spec
TS 37-16/22
37.21 COLOURED UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/

WASTE OUTLET FOR BATH/WC,KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD
All UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC, Kitchen and
Service Yard with floor tiles shall be coloured gratings. The colour shall be one of the four basic colours,
ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito device
need not be in colour.
37.22 BIB TAP AND DRAINAGE OUTLET FOR WASHING MACHINE
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose
union bib tap with cross-head handle at the kitchen. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved
by the SO Rep.
50mm diameter outlet for washing machine shall be finished with UPVC adaptor and screw-down cap as
37.23 LAY SEWER TO CONNECT TO MINOR SEWER AND

SEWER CONNECTION
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, lay the last length of main drain-line to join the inspection
chamber to the minor manhole connection pipe provided by the Employer's civil engineering contractor or
Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. Allow for the connection to
be carried out at a later stage. The connection shall be done under the supervision of the SO Rep or
Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Where in the case of the pipe joints not being provided,
the Contractor shall provide the necessary connections by other methods approved by the Water
Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB pipe all as shown in the Drawings and to the approval of Water
Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Backfill with quarry dust and finished as shown.
Apply to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for the connection and bear all costs and
expenses including the necessary fees.
37.24 RAINWATER DOWNPIPE (RWDP) SYSTEM
The rainwater downpipe system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings, all as shown in the Drawings and
approved by the SO Rep. Unless specified otherwise, all rainwater downpipes above ground slab level
shall be 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipes. The rainwater downpipe system shall be complete
with downpipes, branch pipes, roof and balcony outlets with gratings, couplings, pipe brackets, swept tee
junctions, access pipes, adaptors, rectangular section bends, underground pipes and Y-branch fittings.
The 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipe shall comply with the requirements of SS 272:83 as
shown below :
Measurements/Tests SS 272:83 Requirements
a) Dimensions. Outside Diameter :

Mean- minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6;
Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3;
Wall Thickness :
minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0.
b) Opacity. Not exceeding 0.2 per cent of visible light.
c) Hydrostatic Pressure. No sign of leakage or any Defect at 70 kPa.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
Lup Spec
TS 37-17/22
37.25 WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE FROM BALCONIES,

SERVICE YARDS, LANDINGS, LIFT LOBBIES AND MSCP DECKS
As shown in the Drawings, waste and rainwater discharge from the access balconies, private balconies,
sercive yards, landings, lift lobbies at the second storey and above, and all multi-storey carpark/garage
decks shall be connected to the rainwater downpipe system or to waste downpipes discharging into
surface drains. All branch pipes and fittings used in the connections shall be of UPVC and comply with
SS 213. The discharge outlets shall be square base, screw-in domical grating type as shown in the
Drawings. All 80mm, 100mm and 150mm nominal diameter outlets for the private balconies/service yards
shall have an adjustable square base of minimum 40mm adjustment. All 50mm nominal diameter outlets
for private balconies shall have flat screw-in gratings.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.2.4 "Method of Fixing".
37.26 WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE AT GROUND FLOOR
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all ground floor surfaces of void decks, play areas, multi-storey
carparks/garages, link buildings, linkways, etc, shall be graded to drain waste water and rainwater into
surface drains.
37.27 PAINTING
Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by the
Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and 2 coats
of gloss enamel paint. All paints used shall be of those quality approved by the Board.
Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.
37.28 MODULAR BRICKS
Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks.
The common and facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.
37.29 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE RAIL (FOR HANDICAP)
Where indicated, provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets as shown in the
Drawings.
The stainless steel shall be of Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the Drawings.
End of pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with stainless steel capping of
the same grade all details as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be rigid and secure
tightly into the walls.
37.30 CONNECTING TUBE TO PILLAR TAPS AND CISTERNS
The connecting tube shall be flexible stainless steel tube 15mm diameter and complete with UPVC
adaptor coupling where necessary.
37.31 50MM DIAMETER WASTE OUTLET AT ATTACHED BATHROOM
Waste discharge outlet for 50mm diameter pipe at attached bathroom shall be UPVC screw-in flat grating
with square base as shown in the Drawings.
Lup Spec
TS 37-18/22
37.32 PILLAR TAPS TO WASH BASINS IN BATHROOM/WC AND KITCHEN
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix to all wash basins 15mm diameter chrome
plated brass pillar taps, complying with BS 5412 and approved by Water Department, PUB and the SO
Rep. The tap bodies including operating handle shall be brass and chrome plated. The dimension of
spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet shall be minimum 83mm and
measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin top shall be minimum 20mm.
37.33 BRASS SINK PILLAR TAP WITH SWIVEL SWAN NECK
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, supply and fix 15mm (nominal size) sink pillar tap with swivel
swan neck to all the stainless steel sinks. It shall be of brass and chrome plated. The brass tap and the
swivel swan neck (spout) shall be of brass tube chrome plated to BS 5412, BS 1400:DCB3 and DD18.
The whole fitting shall be of the type approved by Water Department, PUB and shall also to SO Rep
approval. the operating handle shall be brass and chrome plated.
37.34 REPLACEMENT OF SOIL AND WASTE STACKS
For the purpose of this clause, sanitary discharge stacks shall include soil stacks, waste stacks, soil and
waste stacks all branch pipes, vent pipes and other discharge stacks which serve the purpose of carrying
soil and/or waste.
37.34.1 Sanitary Discharge Stacks in Toilets, Bathrooms, Void Decks, etc
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated, replace all the sanitary discharge stacks (Including all the
branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps, gratings and connection to basins and w.c. pan) in the toilets,
bathrooms, bath/w.c. and void decks with new UPVC pipes to comply with all current Bye-laws,
Regulations & Requirements of the relevant Authorities.
Unless otherwise stated, cast iron discharge stacks shall be replaced with new UPVC pipes as shown in
the Drawings. The Contractor shall construct and connect the new pipes to discharge into the nearest
inspection chambers.
All exposed internal and external surfaces of all existing cast iron stack pipe portions embedded in the
floor slab shall be cleaned to remove all existing paint, dust, dirt, grease and foreign particles from the
surfaces. The cleaned surfaces shall be coated with a layer of approved epoxy coating. This approved
epoxy coating shall cure within 5 minutes.
The Contractor shall supply and install UPVC connectors complete with 2 rubber rings. One rubber ring
shall tightly-fit the cast iron pipe protruding the ceiling. The other rubber ring shall tightly-fit the UPVC
spigot adaptor. The joints must be water tight. The rubber ring shall comply with SS290. The Contractor
shall submit detailed drawings and samples of the UPVC connector complete with 2 rubber rings for the
SO Rep's approval prior to the commencement of replacement works.
The Contractor shall apply sufficient Epo Putty or other approved materials between the UPVC rubber ring
connectors and existing cast iron pipe protruding below the ceiling. The UPVC connector shall butt the
ceiling. The Contractor shall apply sufficient thickness of Epo Putty or other approved materials of 10mm
width to the top most portion around the existing cast iron pipe protruding below the ceiling 5 mins before
the installation of the UPVC connector. The Epo Putty or other approved materials shall fully fill the gap in
the UPVC connector, above the top rubber ring and below the ceiling. The excess Epo Putty or other
approved materials shall be finished off to produce a smooth joint between the ceiling and the UPVC
connector. The Contractor shall ensure that the joints between UPVC rubber ring connectors and existing
cast iron pipes are watertight.
The Epo Putty or other approved materials shall be able to apply in wet conditions. They should have a
tool time of at least 5 minutes at 27ºC and tack free of not more than 90 minutes. They should be natural
cure and free from toxic smell. The Contractor shall produce a test report of the Epo Putty or other
approved material prior to use. This test report shall include proof hydrostatic test, burst test and
endurance hydrostatic test.
Provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirting with square base at the base of each discharge stack and
vent pipe in the bath and w.c. shown in the drawings.
Lup Spec
TS 37-19/22
37.34.1 Sanitary Discharge Stacks in Toilets, Bathrooms, Void Decks, etc (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall also remove and/ or clear all debris, grease, etc. from underground sections of the
existing soil and stack pipes to ensure a smooth flow of soil and waste into the inspection chambers.
All existing squat pans and water cisterns shall be removed and replaced with new pedestal pans
complete with water cisterns, as shown in the drawings. Any existing opening left in the floor shall be
reinstated in accordance with the drawings.
All existing pedestal pans and water cisterns shall be removed and replaced with new pedestal pan with
the same colour complete with water cisterns. All damaged bath/ w.c. or toilet wall tiles shall be reinstate
with tiles of matching size, colour and texture.
The Contractor shall reinstate all existing fixtures and fittings in the toilets, bathrooms, and bath/ w.c.
which are affected by the replacement of the sanitary discharge stacks and its related branch pipes, vent
pipes, etc.
37.35 SANITARY DISCHARGE STACKS IN KITCHENS (PROVISIONAL SUM ITEMS)
Allow a Provisional Sum Item as shown in the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender for the
replacement of all waste stacks and/or sanitary pipes (including all branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps,
gratings and connections to basins/sinks) in the Kitchen, the removal of affected fittings and fixtures and
the reinstatement of all damaged floor and wall finishes (including re-tiling of the whole dapoh slab, where
necessary) in the kitchen.
Where specified or instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall replace all waste stacks and/or sanitary
pipes (including all branch pipes, vent pipes, floor traps, gratings and connections to basins/sinks) in the
Kitchen. Where applicable, existing floor finishes around the floor trap grating in the kitchen shall be
hacked to facilitate the removal of the existing floor trap grating and to allow the new UPVC spigot grating
adaptor to sit on the portion of the existing cast iron pipe embedded in the floor slab. The area of existing
floor finishes to be hacked shall be about 100mm around the existing floor trap gratings and shall be
square or rectangular in shape. The hacked area shall be filled with approved non-shrinkage grout and
made good with matching colour floor tiles. The Contractor need not reinstate the existing kitchen's
fixtures and fittings which are affected by the aforesaid replacement of waste stacks and/or sanitary pipes
in the kitchen but shall reinstate all damaged floor and wall finishes (including re-tiling the whole dapoh
slab, where necessary) to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The contractor shall use baseless pipe skirting for the replacement of cast iron stack pipe in the
kitchen to minimize hacking of existing floor adjacent to the existing stack pipe. The baseless pipe
skirting shall be bonded onto the existing floor tiles in the kitchen by using Epo-putty or other
equivalent water proofing bonding agent. The contractor shall ensure the water tightness of the joint
between the baseless pipe skirting and the existing floor tiles."
37.36 TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS
Where specified, new taps located at the staircase landings, access balconies, wash areas and for civil
defence purposes at the 1st Storey shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with
removable handle, as shown in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water
Supply (Network) Department, PUB. The handles shall be handed over to the Employer or the relevant
Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over of the blocks.
37.37 COLOURED OR WHITE UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/WASTE

OUTLET FOR BATH/WC AND KITCHEN
All new UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC and
Kitchen with floor tiles shall be coloured or white gratings. The colour or white shall be one of the four
basic colours, ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey or white and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the
anti-mosquito device need not be in colour.
Lup Spec
TS 37-20/22
37.38 METHOD OF REPLACEMENT OF SOIL AND WASTE STACKS
(i) The Contractor shall carry out a thorough survey of all the existing cast iron soil and waste stacks
and pipings. The survey should cover the size, shape and configuration of the existing cast iron
soil and waste stacks and pipings in every flat. The Contractor shall ensure that the diameter,
dimension and the shape of the new UPVC fittings are tailor-made to suit the existing individual soil
and waste stacks, fittings and site condition. The Contractor shall submit the full set of samples of
the proposed new UPVC fittings, together with Drawings showing the connection details and the
sequence of works for the approval of SO's Rep at least one month prior to commencement of
replacement works. All new UPVC fittings shall be approved by PUB before being delivered to the
site.
The Contractor shall ensure that the replacement of the existing soil stack to the new UPVC fitting
for each flat is completed within one working day (ie. from 9.00 am to 5.00 pm) and the sanitary
system in each flat is functionable at the end of the working day.
(ii) The method of fixing new UPVC pipes to existing cast iron pipes shall be as follows :
(a) hack off the cement mortar and cut-off the upper and lower exposed portion of the existing
cast iron fitting. All exposed internal and external surfaces of all existing cast iron stack pipe
portions embedded in the floor slab shall be cleaned to remove all existing paint, dust, dirt,
grease and foreign particles from the surfaces. The cleaned surfaces shall be coated with a
layer of approved epoxy coating.
(b) slot a piece of 2 rubber ring connector through the lower UPVC pipe and apply solvent
cement on UPVC pipe. To the external cast iron pipe surface, apply Epoxy Putty or other
approved materials.
(c) push the connector and the lower UPVC pipe to the cast iron pipe and ensure that they are
properly sticking. Finish off the excess Epo Putty or other approved materials to produce a
smooth joint between the ceiling and the rubber ring connector.
(d) insert pipe skirting with square base into the base of each stack and vent pipe and the
upper pipe into the UPVC fitting.
(e) for soil and waste stacks inside bathroom, toilet or bath/wc, paint entire ceiling to match
existing.
(iii) The Contractor shall cut and remove the existing cast iron soil pipes and branch pipes and replace
with new UPVC pipes and fittings as shown in the Drawing. The proposed method of cutting the
existing cast iron pipes are to be submitted to SO 's Rep for approval at least one month prior to
the commencement of soil stack replacement work.
The method of cutting and removing of the existing cast-iron soil stacks and branch pipes and the
equipment to be used shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) The cutting tool/equipment shall be capable of cutting the cast iron pipes with minimal
distortion to the cut areas and capable of producing cut surfaces with a straight finish.
(b) The tool/equipment shall be portable and does not obstruct the residents' movements within
the flat.
(c) The tool/equipment shall be equipped with adequate safety features and shall not pose any
danger or safety hazard to the residents staying inside the flat.
(d) The method/equipment used shall not generate excessive smoke or smell that may dirty the
surroundings and inconvenient the residents.
The Contractor shall exercise care and provide adequate protection/cover to avoid damage to any
of the residents' properties such as wall tiles, cabinets, electrical appliances, etc.
Lup Spec
TS 37-21/22
37.39 FLOOR WASTES/FLOOR TRAP
(i) Floor waste shall be UPVC pipes with UPVC hinged grating as in Clause 37.14 "UPVC Gullies and
UPVC Floor Traps with UPVC Grating At Ground Floor" set in concrete floor and connected to
UPVC waste pipes leading into gully traps or floor trap.
(ii) Existing cast iron floor trap shall be replaced with new UPVC trap together with the branch UPVC
pipe and connector.
(iii) Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix approved UPVC pipe skirtings with
square base, at the base of each discharge stack in the bath/wc. UPVC pipe skirtings shall comply
with SS 213. Installation of the UPVC pipe skirtings shall be in accordance with Clause 37.12.2
"Installation".
37.40 INSPECTION OF OVERLAPPING BETWEEN UPVC PIPES AND

FITTINGS FOR UPVC SANITARY SYSTEM
The Contractor shall include the easy check double locking system (patent application No. 9905211-0) to
the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped to minimize
leakage at the joint. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of all the joints between UPVC pipes and
fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove that all the joints between UPVC pipes and
fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system shall include :
(a) The pipes and fittings shall be connected in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly
from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main line.
The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, stagnation of fluid at the joint due to
insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings.
(b) The overlapped portion at the joint between UPVC pipes and fittings shall be exposed and can be
inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure full overlap
between UPVC pipes and fittings. In the event that the UPVC pipes and fittings are not overlapped
sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion of the system and re-install to the
(c) Big access opening shall be provided (at least 75mm diameter) to the fittings (including tee, cross
tee and elbow) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening shall be capped
with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water and air tightness at all
times.
The Contractor shall submit the full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up including sectional
view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the
UPVC sanitary system on site.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented
design. Copy of the licensing agreement between the UPVC fitting manufacturer and the vendor shall be
submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings and the samples. The Contractor is deemed to
include the cost of the above requirements and the royalty to be paid under the licensing agreement in the
Contract Sum.
37.41 DUAL-FLUSH LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE
(A) Technical Requirements
Unless as specified or as shown otherwise, all WC suite shall be dual flush low capacity type. The
complete system of the close-coupled dual-flush low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl,
cistern, internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all
the necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to
the approval of the SO Rep and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary
Appliances", Singapore Standards SS 378 - Specification for Vitreous China WC cisterns, and SS
379 - Specification for Low Capacity Flushing Pans for use with low capacity WC flushing pans up to
4.5 L max. It shall be certified to be rated in the PUB’s “Water Efficiency Labeling Scheme”(WELS).
The dual-flush low capacity WC shall enable a full flushing actuation and a reduced flushing
actuation.
Lup Spec
TS 37-22/22
37.41 (A) Technical Requirements (Cont’d)
The full flush of the dual-flush low capacity WC suite shall be operated with a low flushing volume
of not exceeding 4.5 litres per single action flush. The full flushing performance shall comply fully
with the SS 378 and SS 379. The flushing fitting within the cistern shall be set to 4.2 litres. The
endurance test for the WC shall be of 100,000 flushing cycles.
The reduced flushing actuation shall comply with the following performance requirements:
Performance Test Criteria
Volume of water
The cistern shall discharge a volume
Discharged per SS 378 Appendix I
of water not more than 3 litres.
reduced flush
The cistern shall not leak or show

Endurance of
SS 378 Appendix J signs of defect, damage after
flushing fitting
100,000 flushing cycles.
Discharge of Dilution test with aniline blue No visible traces of colored water
colored water solution remaining in water seal
Loading on
Shall not distort, and parts shall not
operating SS 378 Appendix G
become detached or inoperative.
mechanism
4 no of twin-ply toilet papers of The toilet papers shall be fully

Paper discharge
15,000mm² and of 40 g/m² discharged in at least 2 out of 3 tests.
The buttons for the actuation of the full and reduced flushing shall be clearly marked to be easily
distinguishable by users.
The rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to SS 16:1985 "WC
Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The colored plastic seat and cover shall match the profile
of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal
parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall
be assembled in the factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site.
The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
(B) Installation
Fix the close coupled WC suite including rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers, hinging devices
and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the gap
between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not be
fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not in
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
SECTION 38/…
Lup Spec
TS 38-1/18
SECTION 38
38.0 WATER INSTALLATION
38.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Potable water service installation shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and
SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services. All pipes and pipe fittings shall comply with the standards
and requirements stipulated by PUB. The SO Rep reserves the right to carry out test on material at the
Site as and when required. The test shall be conducted at a Singapore Accreditation Council (SAC)
accredited testing laboratory and all costs of testing shall be borne by contractor.
38.2 WATER SUPPLY PIPES
38.2.1 Ductile Iron Pipes And Fittings
Where specified, all new ductile iron pipes and fittings for water installation shall comply with BS EN 545
and ductile iron flanges type PN16 shall also comply with BS EN 545.
These pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in
BS EN 545.
38.2.2 STAINLESS STEEL WATER PIPES
Where necessary, the Contractor shall arrange with Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB when work
commences, to carry out random test on pipes and the test results shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Provide and fix stainless steel water supply pipes to areas as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel
water pipes, fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and to the
requirements of BS 4127:Part 2.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect.
Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel
pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supporting clips or as shown in the Drawings.
Use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply unless otherwise specified.
The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy or stainless steel
pressfitting joints. Compression fittings of copper alloy shall conform with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998.
Stainless steel pressfitting joints shall conform with Japanese Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116
"Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings For Water Works". All fittings shall conform with all PUB latest requirements.
Fittings of 15mm size and longer shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark.
Support pipes with supporting stainless steel clips and hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal and
vertical support shall be as follows :
Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical

Nominal Size
Support Spacing Support Spacing
(mm)
(mm) (mm)
15 1000 1200
20 to 28 1000 1200
35 to 42 1200 1800
54 and above 1200 1800
Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly.
LUP09/S38.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 38-2/18
38.2.3 UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings

within the Dwelling Units)
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, all the new service/distributing pipes and fittings within the
dwelling units shall be unplasticized PVC corrosion resistant pipes complying with SS 141 Class E and
fitting complying with SS 174 and its latest amendments and all tests as required by Water Supply
(Network), Department, PUB.
Provide and fix all the UPVC pipes to the sizes and locations where shown in the Drawings. The diameter
shown shall be of nominal size. The mean tolerances on outside diameter shall conform to SS 141.
The pipe walls shall be homogeneous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be clean,
smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, wrinkles, dents and heat marks. The ends shall be
cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.
The method of fixing UPVC pipes to UPVC pipes shall be as follows :
(a) All pipes must be sawn square.
(b) Remove all swarf, burr and sharp edges after cutting.
(c) Clean pipe end and the socket in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated spirit and
allowed to dry. No sand paper is allowed for cleaning the pipes and fittings.
(d) Mark the spigot with a pencil line at a distance to the depth of the socket in fittings or to the depth
of sockets formed in pipe.
(e) Coat all pipe ends and internal face of socket thoroughly with solvent and allowed to dry. The pipe
shall be inserted into the socket immediately after applying the second coat of solvent. Remove
solvent from the top of socket using a dry cloth.
(f) After jointing the joint shall be held firmly for a period of 30 seconds and not disturbed for at least 5
minutes.
(g) All joints must be jointed with suitable sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In
situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling shall be used.
(h) No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.
Use UPVC adaptors for the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials and in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendation or as follows :
(a) Use an approved epoxy compound. Glue a caulking ring or bush to the end of the UPVC pipes.
(b) Use solvent weld cement method for all jointing assemblies.
Carrying out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
Solvent cement used for jointing UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with SS 4346:Part 3. The
Contractor shall submit test report of the solvent cement to be used on the Site for approval by the SO
Rep before the commencement of the sanitary and water installation Works.
The tests shall be carried out by SAC accredited testing laboratory and shall include :
(a) Shear Strength
(b) Film Properties
(c) Long-term Hydrostatic Pressure
LUP09/S38.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 38-3/18
38.2.3 UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings

within the Dwelling Units) (Cont'd)
Support pipes with UPVC shackle clips. The supports shall allow sufficient free movement of the pipe
during temperature changes. The maximum spacing for horizontal and vertical support shall be as follows
:
Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical

Nominal Size
Support Spacing Support Spacing
(mm) (mm) (mm)
10 400 800
15 400 1000
20 500 1200
25 600 1400
32 700 1600
40 800 1800
50 900 1800
65 and above 1000 1800
38.3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK COMMENCES FROM PUB MAIN
Public Utilities Board will provide and lay water main up to bulk meter for direct and indirect supply or
individual meter points for direct supply as shown in the Drawings. The contractor's work shall commence
from these points.
38.4 BULK METER POSITIONS
Exact position of bulk meter, where not fixed by existing mains must be approved by the SO Rep and
Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB before fixing. Otherwise the contractor shall make good at his
own expense to proper position determined by SO Rep and to bear all cost incurred for such alteration.
38.5 WATER METER POSITIONS
Meter for supplying off SPSL mains to flats and meters for supply from tanks to upper floor flats shall be
placed along access balconies/corridors on each floor as shown on Drawings.
38.6 BRASS STOPCOCKS, STOP VALVES, GATE VALVES

AND COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY GATE VALVE
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix to every branch service pipe or main supply
pipe, one stop valve to SS 75:Pt 2 or gate valve to BS 5163. Provide valve with a detachable crutch head.
Where ball stop valves and stopcocks are along public corridors or public access balconies, the upper end
of projecting shank of valves shall be tilted to an angle of 15 degrees towards the wall where such pipes
are tee off from direct up-riser pipes or indirect down supply pipes. The installation shall comply with PUB
regulations. Install copper and copper alloy gate valve to BS 5154 at the down supply pipe on the roof top.
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the
Branch Office or Town Council.
LUP09/S38.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 38-4/18
38.7 DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS
Where indicated, run 100mm diameter underground ductile iron distribution main and 80mm ductile iron
sub-main complying with BS EN 545 as shown in the Drawings. From this main, run direct riser of size
shown in the following schedule, each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown.
(Where applicable, for all Executive Maisonettes, the tee-off shall be 28mm diameter stainless steel pipes,
the internal service UPVC pipes shall be 25mm diameter. Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks
before individual sub-meters.)
Schedule Of Common Direct Riser And Tee Off Pipes

For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats And Executive Apartments (Where Applicable)
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2)
(a) Block without void deck
Storey No.
Served by 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Common Riser
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
nd
No. of Storey 1st 1st 1st to 2 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 2nd 3rd 4th 4th 4th 4th 4th

*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 5th 5th 5th to 6th 5th to 7th

*Tee off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 6th 7th 8th

*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm
(b) Block with void deck
Storey No.
Served by 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Common Riser
Size of Riser 54 mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 2nd 2nd 2nd to 3rd 2nd to 4th 2nd to 3rd 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th
rd
No. of Storey 3 4th 5th 5th 5th 5th 5th
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 6th 6th 6th to 7th 6th to 8th

*Tee off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 7th 8th 9th

*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm
*The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to junction of last fitting within the flat
unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mmdiameter at fitting all
as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S38.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 38-5/18
38.8 PIPES INSIDE FLAT UNIT
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, the diameter of pipes inside flat units shall follow the diameter
of tee off pipe throughout up to junction of last fitting within the flat unit. The pipe shall be reduced to
15mm diameter at fittings.
Fix all water pipes clear of finished wall surface with supporting shackle clips at centres similar to Clause
38.2.3 "UPVC (Service/Distributing Pipes and Fittings within the Dwelling Units)" all to the satisfaction of
SO Rep.
38.8.1 *HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS.

(*Clause Applicable If Specified In The Contract.)
Hot and cold water supply pipes and fittings shall be provided within the residential units.
All water pipes within the residential units shall be copper pipes to BS EN 1057, approved by the SO Rep.
All pipes shall be chased (embedded) in walls, columns and beams. No pipe shall be exposed within the
residential units.
The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal wall
thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm
shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm nominal outside
diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for forming all notches, chases, and recesses in walls, columns and
beams.
All fittings required for joints, bends, etc on the pipes shall be of capillary fittings complying with
BS 864:Part 2 and approved by PUB and the SO Rep.
All pipeworks installed shall be hydrostatically tested at 7 bars or one and a half times the maximum
working pressure, whichever is greater, for 24 hours. All joints shall be left exposed for inspection during
testing.
A cold water pipe shall be tee-off from the distribution pipe to the designated heater position. Hot water
pipes shall be provided from the heater position to all basin and bath mixers. A pressure relief drain-off
pipe shall also be provided for discharging to the floor trap.
The cold water inlet, hot water outlet and the drain-off pipe shall all be terminated with compression fitting
cappings, at 30mm from the wall. All 3 termination points shall be fixed with 30mm x 20mm aluminium
tags, with engraved markings of "cold water inlet", "hot water outlet" and "drain-off", respectively.
All water pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, bends, etc.) are to be tested for leakages before
concealment of the pipes and fittings can be carried out.
Light duty coloured masking tapes of 10mm width, shall be fixed on the wall surfaces of the pipe routing
lines concealed behind walls, columns, and beams in the kitchen. No wall finish shall be damaged by the
removal of the tapes.
For each basin, a 15 mm diameter isolating ball stopvalve shall be fixed below the tap mixer, connecting
to the cold water inlet.
A bath/shower mixer complete with diverter adjustable jet shower head, sliding bar, 1.5m flexible hose (all
in chrome finish), and a basin mixer, approved by the SO Rep, shall be provided within each Bath/WC.
LUP09/S38.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 38-6/18
38.9 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
38.9.1 Flushing Pipes From Ground Level
Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its
own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless
steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside
at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN
12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of
"DZR" or "CR".
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four
sides of chute and perforated with 5mm + 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the
water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe
shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.9.2 *Flushing Pipe to Refuse Chute From Distribution Mains at Roof

(* Clause applicable if specified in the Contract)
Where shown in the Drawings, tee off from distribution mains as in Clause 38.10 at roof 35mm diameter
stainless steel supply pipe to top of refuse chutes as shown in Drawing for flushing chutes. One such pipe
shall supply not more than 2 chutes. Teeing off to chutes shall be at mid point between chutes.
Distributing pipe shall be provided with 40m brass stop valve with loose crutch head for control fixed at
1.8m height at top most storey access balcony or landing. The flushing pipe shall be in 25mm diameter
UPVC pipe to SS 141 Class E ringing round four sides of chute and perforated with 5mm ±1mm diameter
holes at maximum 50mm centres. The flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers
to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.10 INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS
For new installation, where supply is from roof storage tanks, run 100mm diameter ductile iron distribution
mains complying with BS EN 545 with cement lining internally on roof to beyond the last down supply
pipes as shown in the Drawings.
From these mains, run down supply pipes of sizes shown in the following schedule, each serving only 2
units one each floor unless otherwise stated in the Drawing.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tee for ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall
be of flanged type. The use of special tee is subject to approval by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S38.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-7/18
SCHEDULE OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES AND TEE OFF PIPES FOR 3, 4, 5-ROOM FLATS AND EXECUTIVE APARTMENTS
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
Where Tank Supply

No. of Storey 1-Storey 2-Storey 3-Storey 4-Storey 5-Storey 6-Storey 7-Storey 8-Storey 9-Storey
Below Roof
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 1st Storey 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 3rd Storey
*Tee Off Size 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 4th 3rd to 5th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 7th 3rd to 8th 3rd to 5th
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm

Nos. of Storey Below Roof 8th to 9th
*Tee Off Size 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe

Nos. of Storey Below Roof
*Tee Off Size

*Tee Off Size
'
*The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule.
The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawing.
*Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcock before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storeys dwelling units. Where directed by the SO Rep,
the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and deliver them to the Branch Office or Town Councils.
LUP09/S38.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-8/18
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
Where Tank Supply

No. of Storey 10-Storey 11-Storey 12-Storey 13-Storey 14-Storey 15-Storey 16-Storey 17-Storey
Below Roof
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 1st Storey 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 7th to 10th 7th to 11th 7th to 12th 7th to 13th 7th to 10th 7th to 10th 7th to 10th 7th to 11th
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm

Nos. of Storey Below Roof 11th to 14th 11th to 15th 11th to 16th 12th to 17th
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm

*Tee Off Size
'
LUP09/S38.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-9/18
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
To be of stainless steel complying with BS 4127:Part 2
Where Tank Supply

No. of Storey 18-Storey 19-Storey 20-Storey 21-Storey 22-Storey 23-Storey 24-Storey 25-Storey
Below Roof
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 1st Storey 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
Nos. of Storey Below Roof 16th to 20th 16th to 21st 17th to 22nd 17th to 23rd 19th to 24th 19th to 25th
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
'
LUP09/S38.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-10/18
38.11 RESERVED
38.12 SILT TRAP AT FOOT OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES
For new installation, every down supply pipe shall extend at least 250mm below the last tee-off to form a
silt trap fitted with plug to facilitate cleaning. A gate valve with detachable crutch head shall be provided
just before the silt trap.
38.13 PIPEWORKS TO THE STAINLESS STEEL FLANGES AT THE CONCRETE WATER TANKS
Where connecting pipes to the concrete water tanks are to be provided for distribution mains, rising main
inlets, overflow pipes, washout pipes and other as shown in the Drawings, they shall be cast-in-situ in the
water tank floor or wall by the contractor.
The fixing of pipes, valves and fittings, including bolts, nuts and gaskets, to the stainless steel flanges of
the connecting pipes shall be fixed by the contractor, all as shown in the Drawings. Use only stainless
steel bolts and nuts. All stainless steel material shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in
accordance with BS 4504.
Allow for all pipeworks cost and water for sanitary and water installation leakage test.
The cleaning and commissioning of the water tanks, together with the use of chemical for sterilization of
the water tank shall be carried out by the contractor. The costs of water, materials and etc. for the
commissioning of water tanks shall be borne by the contractor.
38.14 PIPING TO HIGH LEVEL TANKS
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install piping to high level water tanks as follows :
38.14.1 Rising Mains
Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level
suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be
connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and
approved type.
38.14.2 Distribution Outlet Mains
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally as shown in the
Drawings. Support the pipes on precast concrete block 450mm high and 150mm thick of 1:3:6 mix
concrete, embedded onto 150mm high concrete base by mortar at intervals of not exceeding 2700mm all
as shown in the Drawings. Provide supports at every fitting or bend. Mains shall extend past the last
branching-off of down supply pipe and shall be encased by reinforced concrete end-thrust supports as
shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix ductile iron short pipe 450mm in length with 180mm diameter
ductile iron collar 20mm thick, welded at middle section of the short pipe. Provide approved flange
adaptors along the distribution pipe before each thrust support.
All ductile iron pipe joints, flange adaptor, fittings and special tees shall be of flanged type in compliance
with BS EN 545 type PN 16.
38.14.3 Interconnecting Pipe
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as
shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm
above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings and
special tees shall be of flanged type ductile iron. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
LUP09/S38.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-11/18
38.14.4 Overflow Pipes
100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than the
diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be
connected to washout pipe.
Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank and
discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project 300mm
from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings.
Cover open end of pipes with brass gauze mosquito screen.
38.14.5 Tank Washout Pipes
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining before the gate valve
from tanks to roof level as shown in the Drawings. The pipe shall discharge direct into roof rain water
gutter and properly drained off through rain water downpipes, surface drains at ground level via 150mm
ductile iron pipes and with 100mm x 150mm reducer embedded into concrete apron. The end of the
discharge pipe shall be minimum 150mm above the invert of the surface drain/sump.
38.14.6 Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves,

Copper and Copper Alloy Gate Valves
Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper
Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and regulations
of the Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have been
specifically mentioned or not.
The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface of
valve body with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high tensile
bronze or other approved type.
38.14.7 Raise Pipes
Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in Clause
38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast secondary roofing
slabs.
38.15 BIB TAP AND STOPCOCK/STOPVALVE
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter brass bib taps conforming with BS 5412
and BS 3457; and 15mm and 25mm diameter stopcocks/stopvalves conforming with SS 75:Part 2 and
BS 3457. Such bib taps, stopcocks and stopvalves shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply
(Network), Dept, PUB. Bib taps shall be chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating
handles. UPVC tee and cap for fixing bib tap as shown in the Drawings shall conform with SS 174. Fix
the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved.
38.16 TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS
Taps located at staircase landings, access balconies, wash areas shall be of 15mm diameter chrome
plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown in the Drawings. The tap shall be approved by
the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network), Dept, PUB. The handles shall be handed over to the Employer
or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon handing over of the building blocks.
LUP09/S38.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-12/18
38.17 WATER SERVICES TO UTILITIES CENTRE
For new installation, run 25mm diameter UPVC pipe from water meter point to the utilities centre. Water
pipes inside the buildings shall be 20mm diameter up to bib taps.
Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action bib tap over lavatory basin
and 15mm isolating ball stop valve to W.C. cisterns. Bib tap and ball stop valve shall be of brass high
pressure screw down type. Provide similar 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle for the utilities
centre.
38.18 WATER SERVICES TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER
38.19 FIXING FITTINGS BEFORE HANDING OVER
When required, provide and fix new taps, stop valves and other removable fittings immediately before all
the buildings blocks are handed over to the Employer or Town Council.
38.20 BRASS WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix PUB approved bronze or brass water pressure
reducing valves (NF E29-170) to down feed pipes where the pressures are more than 35 m hydrostatic
head, all to be in accordance with the requirements of Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. The
Contractor shall remove the pressure gauge of the pressure reducing valve and install a plug after testing.
38.21 SILICON THIMBLE FOR BASIN TAPS
Where instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall supply and install silicon thimbles to kitchen sink
and/ or wash hand basin taps. Silicon thimbles are not required for those in units at the top-most 4
storeys and those units with direct water supply. The silicon thimbles shall be of natural colour food-grade
type and shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
Silicon thimbles for the pillar taps shall be of 18.5mm diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of 2.5mm
diameter each. These silicon thimbles are to be installed between the tap inlets and the stainless steel
flexible tubes.
Silicon thimbles for the tap mixers shall be of 21mm outside diameter, 2.5mm thick with 4 holes of 2.5mm
diameter each. These silicon thimbles are to be installed inside the tap outlet aerators.
38.22 CONSTANT FLOW REGULATOR
Constant flow regulators of 8 litres per minute type shall be provided for all bib taps in the common areas
(such as wash areas, staircases, etc), and all bib taps in the Pump Rooms, Centralised Refuse Chambers
and Bulky Refuse Rooms of residential building blocks; except for those at the topmost four storeys. The
constant flow regulators shall be fixed between the tap inlets and the tees or elbow pipe fittings.
The constant flow regulators shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep and comply with the standards
and regulations stipulated by PUB.
38.23 TAPS FOR STAIRS ACCESS BALCONIES
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, tee off from distribution mains above roof or from SPSL mains,
whichever is applicable, a 35mm stainless steel distributing pipe to supply crutch head brass hose taps at
staircase in positions shown and at 1500mm high. Provide a locking device box and approved padlock to
each such tap as shown in Drawings. Install stopcock to the 35mm diameter distributing pipe at the top
most storey. The height shall be 1.8 m from the finished floor level. The approved padlock shall be
"Union" No. 3104, "Yale" No. 110.30, "Abloy" 225, "ALA" No. 103-30, "Abus" No. 65-30, "Rocket" Size 30
or other approved padlock.
LUP09/S38.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-13/18
38.24 TWO-WAY BIB TAP (FOR BATHROOM)
Where specified, provide and fix two-way bib taps to bathrooms as shown in the Drawings. Two-way bib
taps shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass operating handle and
approved by the SO Rep and the Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. UPVC elbow with bracket
for fixing two-way bib taps as shown in the Drawings shall conform to SS 174. The bracket shall be fixed
to the wall by stainless steel screws and PVC plugs.
38.25 UPVC TRUNKING FOR GAS AND WATER PIPES
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and install white UPVC trunking to house water and
gas pipes complete with bends and fixing holders. The position and profile of UPVC trunking shall be as
shown in the Drawings. Fixing holders shall be at approximately 600mm apart. Provide 5mm diameter
ventilating hole at 2000mm centre to centre.
38.26 BIP TAP IN SERVICE BALCONY
Where specified or shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose
union bib tap with knob handle to service balcony. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved
by Water Supply (Network), Department, PUB. All UPVC tee cap for fixing bib tap shall conform to SS
174 all as shown. Fix the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved.
38.27 FIXING OF TAPS, STOPVALVES ETC. DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Alternatively the Contractor is required to retain taps, stopvalves, sink chains, plugs, etc. and fix these
items as and when required by the Estates and Lands Division during the Defects Liability Period.
38.28 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM (INDIVIDUAL REFUSE CHUTES)
Where applicable, Refuse Chute Flushing System shall comply with the following requirements :
38.28.1 Flushing Pipes from Ground Level
Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have its
own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter stainless
steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head located outside
at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant complying to BS EN
12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of
"DZR" or "CR".
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round four
sides of chute and perforated with 5mm + 1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such that the
water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The flushing pipe
shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.28.2 Flushing Pipes to Refuse Chutes from Distribution Mains

at Roof-Top where specified in the Contract
(For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes)
(a) Pipe & Fittings
The 42mm diameter stainless steel supply pipes shall be teed off from the boostered distribution
main at the roof top as in Clause 38.10 "Indirect Supply from Roof Tanks". Provide the supply
pipes with 40mm ball valve, 40mm solenoid valve and 32 mm stopcocks or globe valves. There
shall be one stopcock or globe valve for each refuse chute. The layout and arrangement shall be
as shown in the Drawings to tops of refuse chutes or as shown in Drawing for flushing chutes.
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing
round four sides of chute and perforated with 5 mm +1 mm diameter holes at maximum 50 mm
centres such that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse
chute wall. Support the flushing pipe with non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse
chute wall.
LUP09/S38.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-14/18

(For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes) (Cont’d)
(b) Solenoid Valve
The 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, closed and capable of operating
at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 + 10% at 50 Hz. The coil shall be
epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100% continuous duty.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable for conduit
connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy
maintenance. The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0
to 4 bars. The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with
water shall be of stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components
shall be dezincification-resistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS
EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR"
The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse
chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve, as listed in APPENDIX
S(38)-1, to the SO Rep for approval.
Whenever the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some
staggered blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
(c) Control Board
The dimensions, layout and circuit diagram of the control board shall be in accordance with the
Drawings. The number of relays to control the solenoid valves for refuse chute flushing shall
depend on the number of solenoid valves to be used.
The control board cabinet shall be securely wall mounted in the roof storage tank room next to the
booster pump control panel; or at the nearest available wall space sufficient to mount the cabinet.
The chosen location shall subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide and install rain shelter
wherever it is necessary.
The cabinet shall be manufactured from a minimum 2 mm gauge steel sheet using folded section
or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. The cabinet shall provide IP 33 protection while
allowing for sufficient ventilation. The design and construction shall give easy access to all parts of
the control board so as to minimize any hindrance to the maintenance work. Provide and install a
lock to the cabinet. Provide rubber bushes at knockout holes of the cabinet for the entry of all
incoming and outgoing cables. Mount one power-on indicator light directly on the front panel with
locknuts to hold it firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control board shall contain the following :

(a) 1 No. Transformer
(b) 1 - 5 Nos. Relays to control the solenoid valves for refuse chute flushing
(c) 2 Nos. Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
(d) 3 Nos. MCB units for control circuit and solenoid valves
(e) 1 No. Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel
The control board shall be the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse chute flushing system.
Submit technical information of the control board, as listed in APPENDIX S(38)-1, to the SO Rep
for approval. All electrical work done shall comply with EMA Wiring Regulations and shall subject
to the approval of PUB and the SO Rep. All electrical work done shall comply with SSCP 5 and
shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S38.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-15/18

(For Block With Individual Refuse Chutes) (Cont’d)
(d) Control Switch
The control switch shall be of push-button type with one red indicator light. The red light shall be
connected to the 0 - 20 hrs timer so as to indicate that the system has been activated once on that
day and cannot be used until the following day. The control switch and the indicator light shall be
wall mounted in the void deck close to the entrance of the pump room if possible, otherwise they
shall be mounted to the wall of the nearby staircase. The chosen location shall subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The control switch and the indicator light shall be housed in a metal box,
wall mounted separately and secured with a lock, to be approved by the SO Rep.
(e) Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the red phase of the booster pump system after the
isolator. For blocks where there are no booster pump systems, the power supply to the system
shall be from the isolator inside the water tank room.
All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduit. Cables carrying a voltage of
230V shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and of 1.5mm2 nominal cross-sectional area.
There shall be six cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the
control panel to the control switch. They shall be of colour yellow, blue, brown, white, green and
grey. The grey coloured cable shall be reserved as a spare.
The metal conduits shall be of heavy gauge, galvanised steel conduit (Class 4), complying with BS
4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. The conduits shall run inside the building and along
the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flats surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars
saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide
concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level.
The conduit work to the solenoid valves shall run along the piping and be properly supported. All
electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth
the conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed
before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed
those set out in the Code of Practice for Electrical Installations :CP 5. Earth all non-current
carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-
sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
The power supply to the system shall be from the red phase of the booster pump system after the
(f) Labelling of Refuse Chute Doors
Label all refuse chute doors at the ground level with two alpha-numeric characters at the top right
hand corner. Each character shall be about 60 mm x 40 mm. The paint used shall be waterproof
and black in colour. The numbering scheme and the sample shall be approved by the SO Rep.
(g) Approval of Details of Flushing System
The Contractor shall complete Appendix S(38)-1 and submit the technical details of the flushing
system to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the Employer's letter of
acceptance of the Contractor's Tender.
38.28.3 Inspection During Progress of Work
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the refuse chute flushing
system for inspection by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S38.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-16/18
38.28.4 Testing of Installation
One month before the completion of the new installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the
performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defects notified during inspection
shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the refuse bins during any testing
which involves the flushing of refuse chutes.
38.28.5 Testing for Leakages
Carry out leakage test to the following items :
(a) joints between floor slab;

(b) joints between branch off pipes; and
(c) all the water pipes installed.
Complete the tests, including making good of all Defects within 14 days from the date work is certified
complete in each apartment block.
38.28.6 Efficient Call Back Service
During the period from the commencement till expiry of the contract, the Contractor shall be required to
provide at no extra cost to the Employer an efficient 24 hours (whole day) call-back service and carry out
necessary repairs, whether major or minor, including adjustments of all equipment installed under this
contract, at any time immediately after notification by the SO Rep. Such repairs and adjustment shall be
completed within the same day or such further extended time as given by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide a telephone pager for his maintenance supervisor and the pager number
shall be given to the SO Rep. Should the Contractor fail to respond within 30 minutes after being paged
the Employer reserves the right to appoint other party, or parties to execute such works, all costs and
expenses incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor by the Employer or may be deducted by the
Employer from monies due to the Contractor.
38.28.7 Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall during the Defects Liability Period maintain the works installed in this Contract in
such manner that upon the expiration of the Defects Liability Period the works shall be in as good order
and condition (fair wear and tear excepted) as they were at the commencement of the Defects Liability
Period.
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the
HDB's Branch Office and SO Rep to have a final joint inspection. All Defects listed after this joint
inspection must be rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the contract.
The Contractor shall rectify the outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging
for inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of
rectification of Defects.
After the final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding Defects will
be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects on the list within fourteen (14) days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection the SO Rep
shall exercise its right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage his own workmen or
other contractor to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed
shall be recovered from the Contractor.
LUP09/S38.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-17/18
APPENDIX S(38)-1
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON
REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
SO Rep :
Block No. :
Location :
SOLENOID VALVES
Brand :
Type :
Model :
Country of Origin :
Voltage : Volts Hz
Coil Insulation : Class
Enclosure Protection :
Flow Rating : l/s when the pressure difference

across the valve is 1 bar.
Holding Power :
Operating Temperature : Ambient temp degree celcius

: Fluid temp degree celcius
Operating Pressure Range : 0 to bars
LUP09/S38.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 38-18/18
APPENDIX S(38)-1
(CONT'D)
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON
REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
Material - Valve Body :
Plunger :
Diaphragm :
Others (please specify) :
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL MANUFACTURER :
MCB - Make :
- Type :
- Rating :
ELCB - Make :
- Type :
- Tripping Current : _
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MANUFACTURER :
Name of Contractor :
Address :
Name & Position :
Tel No. :
Date :
SECTION 39/...
LUP09/S38.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-1/15
SECTION 39
39.0 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
39.0.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The gas pipe installation shall refer to the gas pipes after the City Gas Ltd Service Valve (SV) and which
includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes.
The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51
Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Licensed Gas
Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as "LGSW" for the purpose of this Section including all clauses
and sub-clauses) and shall comply with the City Gas Ltd Requirements.
39.1 CODE OF PRACTICE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall ensure that the work is carried out in accordance with the following requirements :
(i) Public Utilities Act (Chapter 261),
(ii) Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations,
(iii) Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, ie. CP51 including
any amendments,
(iv) City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and
(v) Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority from time to time.
39.2 NOTIFICATION FOR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
Before commencement of work, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Gas Ltd project coordinator
and SO Rep for a site meeting. After the site meeting, the Contractor shall notify City Gas Ltd before work
can be carried out.
39.3 SAMPLE UNITS
The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both the
City Gas Ltd Engineer and the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of drawings of the
sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection.
The Contractor shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit has been inspected
and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.
39.4 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall ensure that the gas pipe installation complies with the approved plan before
submitting an application for final pressure test.
The Contractor shall carry out preliminary testing of the completed installation and rectify all Defects
before arranging with the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator for the final pressure test. All preparation for
the final pressure test shall be made by the Contractor. The final pressure test shall be conducted by the
City Gas Ltd Engineer or his authorised representative.
LUP09/S39.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-2/15
39.4 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

(CONT'D)
The application for final pressure test (City Gas Ltd Form PH-G2) must be accompanied by the following:
(i) Four (4) sets of as-built drawings duly endorsed.
(ii) City Gas Ltd Form PH-G1B if necessary.
The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for endorsement.
Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of the
application for the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2.
A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A) shall be prepared by the Contractor and endorsed by
City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed.
A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor.
In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor must resubmit a fresh
application for final pressure test.
After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Contractor’s LGSW shall affix all plugs,
caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read `Gas Pipe Tested. Do Not Tamper'.
39.5 UNAUTHORISED WORK ON GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
After the gas pipe installation has passed its final pressure test, the Contractor shall ensure that no person
is allowed to carry out any further work without prior written approval from the City Gas Ltd approving
authority. Any further work on the installation, shall render the final pressure test null and void. If any
further work has to be carried out, a new application for the work shall be made together with the plans.
No person other than an authorised City Gas Ltd employee or authorised City Gas Ltd contractor is
permitted to connect any gas pipe installation onto City Gas Ltd gas main.
39.6 APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY
After the gas pipe installation has passed the final pressure test and approved by City Gas Ltd Engineer,
the Contractor shall apply for charge-in/turn-on of gas supply by submitting City Gas Ltd Form PH-G3.
The Contractor shall attach a copy of the line drawing of the gas pipe installation indicating the location of
the service valves, valves, risers, meters and all installation pipes downstream of the meter. The line
drawing shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
The line drawing(s) of the gas pipe installation shall be displayed inside the 1st storey gas riser service
duct(s). The line drawing(s) shall be placed and sealed inside an A4 size clear perspex cover and
securely mounted with four stainless steel screws onto the inside of the door(s) of the riser service duct(s).
Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd on the approval and charge-in/turn-on of gas
supply through Form PH-GR3 & PH-GR4 respectively.
LUP09/S39.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-3/15
39.7 CHARGE-IN OF GAS
The Contractor must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor shall arrange for a proof test
and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points for purging and ensure that all necessary
safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been confirmed to be sound with the proof test, the
installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured gas.
After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Contractor’s LGSW must affix the labels `Live Gas. Do Not
Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation.
39.8 USE OF GAS DETECTOR
The Contractor shall use a gas detector which measures the volume of gas in air, when necessary. The
LGSW is responsible for the accuracy and the use of this instrument in all the work that is carried out by
him.
39.9 PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES
All pipes, fittings and valves used in the gas pipe installation shall comply with CP51 and City Gas Ltd
requirements.
The diameter of all pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their nominal diameter.
The diameter of all Polyethylene pipes as specified in the specifications and drawings shall be their outer
diameter (OD) and based on a Standard Diameter Ratio (SDR) of 11.
Unless otherwise specified, copper pipes to BS EN 1057: "Copper and copper alloys - seamless, round
copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and heating applications" shall be used within the unit for
overhead internal gas supply pipe from meter to kitchen of individual unit. Fittings shall be of compression
fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 "Capillary and Compression Tube
Fittings for Copper Tubes".
The contractor shall provide label/tag of unit numbers where one service duct serves more than two
dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature with dwelling unit number clearly
indicated and firmly attached to the piping.
Galvanised steel pipes (heavy) complying with SS17 "Steel Tubes suitable for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe
Threads" or BS 1387 "Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plain End Steel Tubes
Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" shall be used outside the unit for incoming
gas supply pipe, gas riser and horizontal supply pipe.
The galvanised malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall comply with BS143 and BS1256 "Specification For
Malleable Cast Iron & Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings".
Ductile iron pipes shall be of the flexible bolted gland joint type complying with BS EN 545 - Class K9. The
gland ring shall be lead tipped nitrile rubber or epichlorhydrin.
All galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer . All the exposed galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall
be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint of colour to match the
background as instructed by the SO Rep. All the galvanised steel and copper pipes including the fittings
inside the service ducts, inside the false ceiling and other enclosure shall be painted with one undercoat
and one finishing coat in canary yellow to BS 381C colour no. 309.
For buried Service Pipe at the building footway or apron, Polythene pipe sleeve in Unplasticised Polyvinyl
Chloride (UPVC) pipe shall be used. The UPVC pipe shall conform to JIS 6741 : Class AW or SS 141
Class E.
All Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of PE 80 Polymer and must be manufactured in accordance
with (International Standard Organisation) ISO 4437. The Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of City
Gas approved types.
LUP09/S39.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-4/15
39.10 CATEGORIES OF PIPE
The pipe to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below :
(a) Buried Service Pipe - Pipe connecting to the vertical service pipe and is laid in concrete
channels. The pipe shall extend 300mm beyond apron drain to
receive City Gas Ltd connection.
The pipe shall be Polyethylene pipe complying to the standards as

specified and shall be sized to OD 63mm. The Polyethylene pipes
shall be sleeved in Diameter 80mm UPVC pipes, and both ends of the
sleeve shall be stopped with rubber wall grommet.
The pipe-end to receive City Gas Ltd Connection shall be fitted with a
temporary 50mm SS141 Class E UPVC end cap with the Internal
Diameter pre-enlarged (Hot Water treatment) to 63.5 mm for close-fit
to the Outer Diameter of the Polyethylene Pipe.
The pipe-end to join to the riser shall be fitted with a 50mm GI BSP
Adaptor X PE 63 mm Electrofusion Transition Elbow complying to Gas
Business Engineering specifications GBE/PL3 or equivalent.
Alternatively, the above-mentioned Service Pipe configuration can be

installed by a factory-fitted Above Ground Entry Elbow. It shall be
provided with an assembled 4 m Polyethylene tail and a 3.6 m UPVC
sleeve; the elbow is zinc plated and a grey fusion bonded epoxy
coated; and the steel nipple is protected by a Polyethylene sleeve and
terminates in a male thread.
All buried/concealed pipes shall be left exposed for City Gas Ltd
inspection, testing and approval before concealment.
(b) Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and
connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel
pipe to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(c) Riser - Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top floor with a branch for a
meter connection shall be provided at each floor (a riser supplies gas
to either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The
pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(d) Internal Pipe - Pipe installed after the City Gas Ltd meter. The pipes shall be copper
pipes which complies to BS EN 1057. Brass compression fittings for
copper pipes must comply to BS 864: Part 2.
39.11 PIPE CHANNEL
Where service pipes have to cross the floor footway or aprons before entering the building, such pipes
shall be accommodated in channels in the footway or apron. The channel shall be cleared of all debris
and shall be dry before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be
filled with cement mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground
beam.
39.12 PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS
The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor
areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be
installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided
at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes.
Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of supporting
the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor, the floor shall
be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least 50mm above the
floor level.
LUP09/S39.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-5/15
39.13 PIPE SLEEVE ON FLOOR
Where the gas riser pipe are not enclosed in service ducts, a PVC sleeve with a minimum of 300mm
protruding above the floor level shall be provided to accommodate the gas pipe run through the floor slab.
The section of the gas pipe within the sleeve shall be wrapped with petrolatum tape and the gap between
the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed with water-proofed sealant.
39.14 PIPE JOINTING MATERIALS
All jointing compounds, jointing pastes, thread sealants and other jointing materials shall be of the
approved type complying with BS 5292.
All Polyethylene pipes shall be joined only for City Gas Ltd approved types of electrofusion fittings. The
approved types of Electrofusion Control Units shall operate an output voltage of 39.5 volts. All
electrofusion joints shall be carried out by trained workers, certified by the City Gas Ltd Approved
Vendors or the Singapore Power Training Institute.
39.15 THREADED JOINTS
Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except for
connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS 4375
shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease and
particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.
39.16 IDENTIFICATION OF GAS PIPES FOR

COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
All gas pipes shall be painted canary yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. In addition, a line diagram shall
be provided at a suitable location indicating the position of metres, pipework and isolation valves.
39.17 ENTRY OF GAS PIPE BELOW GROUND LEVEL
Direct underground pipe entry into basement shall not be allowed. Gas service pipe shall come up above
ground before entering into the building.
If entry of underground gas pipes through retaining walls below ground level is necessary, a steel sleeve
shall be cast in situ into the retaining wall. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed at both
ends with cement mortar or any other suitable sealing material. The gas pipe shall also be of heavy
gauge galvanised iron to BS 1387 or SS17-Class C wrapped up with petrolatum tape with a 50% overlap
for buried service pipes 80mm and below. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying
with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints.
39.18 SOLID SHAFT FOR METER INSTALLATION
A solid metal shaft shall be installed at each tee-off of the riser where the gas meter is to be installed as
specified in CP51.
39.19 INSTALLATION OF SOLID SPOOL
A solid spool shall be installed at the vertical service pipe from the ground in the building during installation
stage. The solid spool of 150mm in length shall be installed 600mm above the ground level. The spool(s)
shall be replaced with standard double flanged distant piece(s)/short pipe(s) with Johnson Coupling
Connectors according to CP 51 after the gas pipe installation have passed the pressure test and the
installation is ready for charge-in.
LUP09/S39.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-6/15
39.20 BRASS BALL AND PLUG VALVES FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
Brass ball stop valves shall be provided to every riser pipe just before the first "Tee-off" pipe and at the
riser tee-off point to every dwelling unit. The ball stop valves shall be suitable for use on City Gas Ltd
town gas. The ball stop valves shall have the following :
(a) Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21 "Specification
For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made on the Threads
(Metric Dimensions)".
(b) Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.
39.21 GAS PIPE WITHIN THE FALSE CEILING SPACE,

BASEMENT AND CONCEALED AREAS
Where gas pipe is installed within the false ceiling space, basement and concealed areas (these cases to
be specially approved by the City Gas Ltd ), only steel pipe of heavy gauge complying with BS 3601 or
complying with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 5L Grade B shall be used and shall
comply with the requirements of CP 51.
The pipe shall be welded and full circumferential radiography test shall be carried out on all the welds by
an accredited laboratory engaged by the Contractor to verify that all these welded joints are sound. The
result of radiography tests shall be endorsed and certified by the Contractor's Registered Professional
Engineer and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Stainless steel pipe sleeve, one size larger than that of the gas pipe, shall be provided and exposed by
50mm on both ends of the false ceiling.
All threaded joints, gas valves, fittings and controls shall be installed outside the false ceiling space of the
building.
Where gas pipes pass through air-conditioned areas, it shall be adequately lagged with insulating material
to prevent excessive condensation.
39.22 MECHANICALLY VENTILATED KITCHEN
In a mechanically ventilated kitchen where City Gas Ltd gas is to be used, a solenoid valve shall be
installed before the gas meter. This solenoid valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever
the ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate.
In the event that the mechanically ventilated kitchen in air-conditioned or linked to an air-conditioned
space, adjoining the kitchen, a gas detection system, electrically interlock to the solenoid valve and the
mechanically ventilated system, shall be installed. This is to ensure that if there is a gas leak, the gas
supply would be shut off automatically.
39.23 AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS WHERE GAS APPLIANCES ARE INSTALLED
In air-conditioned areas where gas appliances are installed, a leak detection system shall be installed to
monitor the presence of gas. Leak detector used shall comply with BS EN 50054 and BS EN 50057 or
equivalent.
The leak detection system shall be connected to a solenoid valve controlling gas supply to the area. The
leak detection system may be linked to a monitored alarm system if necessary. All detectors and solenoid
valves shall also be explosion proof and shall be certified for use in a hazardous area zone 2 environment
as described under SS 254:Part1 or any equivalent standard having a similar classification. The setting
for the system to cut-out shall not be more than 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit of manufactured gas
(hydrogen).
LUP09/S39.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-7/15
39.24 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
Gas pipes shall be tested in accordance with the following procedures as specified in CP 51:
(a) Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a T-
piece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the
other;
(b) Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is
registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock.
(c) If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound;
(d) For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure
is 70 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes;
(e) If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing;
(f) If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with a soap solution,
rectified and re-tested.
For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the riser
and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions from
inside the riser.
After the gas pipe installation has been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be
allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd . The Contractor shall arrange with City Gas
Ltd for charging in of gas before the blocks are handed over to the Employer.
39.25 PURGING OF PIPES
(a) Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the
presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Co-ordinator.
(b) A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceding to charging-in of all pipes.
(c) Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the
vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs.
(d) Vent points consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall
be erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via rubber
hoses or other suitable hoses.
(e) Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to be
located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings.
(f) A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe.
(g) During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened.
(h) Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved.
(i) On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the
pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve corners replaced.
(j) The disturbed joints shall be tested for leakage.
LUP09/S39.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-8/15
FORM PH-G1B
Our Ref :
Date :
TEL (DID) :
FAX :
General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn : ___________________________________
(Name of City Gas’ Project Coordinator)
Dear Sir
APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION

AT
(Name of Project with Block No.)
I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative
(DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am still
fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.
Name of DR (LGSW) :
Licence No. :
Address :
Tel No. :
Fax No. :
Yours faithfully
NAME & SIGNATURE OF QUALIFIED PERSON
PE NO. :
CONTRACT NO. :
cc
PMgr, Surbana (Attn: ______________)
Mech Engr, Surbana (Attn: ______________)
Note : This Form is to be used by the Qualified Person if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility to the
DR(LGSW).
LUP09/S39.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-9/15
FORM PH-G2
City Gas Ref No:
To : General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS INSTALLATION AT
(Address of Premises/Development)
PART I
I, hereby, submit my application for testing of the following gas installation work :
(Please tick the appropriate boxes)
ο External and internal gas service pipe ο Internal gas pipe
The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW. The as-built drawing (inclusive of line
diagram) is attached.
I confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed),
Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation,
Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and
rules.
I will notify all parties of the date for final pressure test.
Name of Designated Representative :
Signature : Date:
I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed and is in accordance with the
Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for
Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply
and all relevant acts, regulations and rules, and is ready for the final pressure test.
Name of Qualified Person:
Signature : Date:
____________________________________________________________________________
PART II (This section is applicable only for minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installation)
I also request that gas be turn-on to the installation upon successful completion of the final pressure test.
After turn-on of the gas supply, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation.
Signature of Designated Representative Date

____________________________________________________________________________
cc (1) Developer/Owner
(2) Professional Engineer
(3) Architect (Please see overleaf on Notes)
(4) Main Contractor
LUP09/S39.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-10/15
NOTES:
a) The applicant shall be the Designated Representative.
b) The Designated Representative must attend the final inspection and final pressure test.
c) Final pressure test and turn-on of gas supply will be carried out in one operation for
the following minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installations:
1 Turn-on of single/multi stall after charge-up to food court/eating house/canteen.
2 Replacement/addition/relocation of appliances, inclusive of minor pipe

extensions.
3 Renewal of corroded gas pipes.
4 Installation of valves.
5 Termination/cap-off of gas pipes.
6 Diversion/alteration/addition of existing service pipes in void deck or ground

floor of residential premises.
LUP09/S39.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-11/15
FORM PH-G2A
City Gas Ref No:
To: General Manager

City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(Name of City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator)
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PRESSURE TEST
LOCATION:
ADDRESS:
AS-BUILT PLAN NOS:
_____
(1) This is to certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test on
_______________. No person shall be allowed to carry out any further work on the
installation without prior written approval from City Gas.
Certified by: ______________________________________

(Designated Representative)
PE No./LGSW No: ______________________
Date: __________________
_ _____
Approved by: ________________________________________

(City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator)
Date: __________________
cc 1) Architect
2) Owner/Developer
3) Professional Engineer
4) Main Contractor
LUP09/S39.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-12/15
FORM PH-G3
City Gas Ref No :
To : General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd.
Attn :
(City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)
REQUEST FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS TO
(Address of premises/development)
As-Built Plan Nos :
1. I certify that the site is ready to receive gas. I further certify that the gas installation has passed the final
pressure test , no further work has been carried out on the gas installation after the final pressure test and is safe
for CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON.
2. After charge-in/turn-on of the gas supply to the above project, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly
not to tamper with the gas installation. I also undertake to affix warning labels at all end-points of the gas pipe
installation.
3. I attach a copy of the line drawing of the installation covered under this application. A copy of the line
diagram has been given to the owner for display.
4. The number of end-points in the gas pipe installation is .
Signature of Designated Representative Date
PE No/LGSW No :
Name
Address :
Tel No :
Note : 1) In the case of a designated representative who has been nominated by the Qualified Person, he
should only be allowed to submit this application with the consent of the main contractor and the
Qualified Person.
CONSENT BY QUALIFIED PERSON AND MAIN CONTRACTOR/OWNER

(where applicable)
We consent to the above application.
Name of Qualified Person/Owner : Signature :
PE No : Date :
Name of authorised person on behalf of Main Contractor :

(with company stamp)
Signature : Date :
LUP09/S39.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-13/15
FORM PH-GR2
Our Ref :
Your Ref :
Date :
TEL No. :
FAX No. :
To : (QP / DR)
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST AT
(Name of Project & Block No.)
We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated ________ for gas supply has
been approved.
2 The test will be carried out on _____________ at _____________.
3 As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all
parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.
4 For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _________________________________ at

Tel : ______________.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc
DBQ, HDB (Attn : ________________)
LUP09/S39.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-14/15
FORM PH-GR3
Our Ref :
Date :
TEL No. :
FAX :
To : (QP / DR)
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR CHANGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY AT
(Name of Project & Block No.)
We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated ____________ for gas supply to the above project
/ block.
2 We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out on
___________ at ___________.
3 You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc
DBQ, HDB (Attn : )
LUP09/S39.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 39-15/15
FORM PH-GR4
Our Ref :
Date :
TEL No. :
FAX :
To : (QP / DR)
Dear Sir
STATEMENT OF TURN-ON OR CHARGE-IN OF GAS SUPPLY TO

________________________________________________________________
(Name of Project & block no)
This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above
premises, we have on _________(date) at ________(time) introduced gas into the above gas pipe installation. Kindly
notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises.
2 You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken without
our written approval.
Yours faithfully
Name & Signature of authorised officer

City Gas Pte Ltd
I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.
Signature & Company Stamp of

Applicant / Designated Representative
___________________________
Name & NRIC / Passport No.
Witnessed by Consultant’s C/W (applicable to gas mains only)
________________________________
Name & Signature of HDB's C/W
cc
DBQ, HDB (Attn : ____________________) / MPC(CAD)
SECTION 40/.....
LUP09/S39.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-1/16
SECTION 40
40.0 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Where applicable, Transfer Pumping System Installation shall comply with the following requirements :
Details of the proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work
shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water
Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory
requirements.
40.1 Scope of Work
The work shall include the provision, installation and testing of transfer pumping system based on the data
given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, switch gears, electrical wiring, switch board and
connections and all necessary accessories.
Details of proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work shall
comply with the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant
Authorities and Standards.
40.2 Pumproom - General
(a) Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown.
(b) A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through equilibrium ball
float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each pump-set. The pumps shall
deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high level) tank at the roof of the
building.
(c) The pipework shall incorporate appropriate valves and fittings as specified.
(d) Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be
arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified.
(e) Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and started
by suitable starters in the control switch board.
(f) The whole assembly within the pump room shall be laid out to permit ready access to all
components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, switch board, floatless level control
electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The switch board and pump sets
shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.
40.3 Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System
Submit one (1) set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the
Employer's letter of acceptance of the Contractor's Tender :
(a) Detailed proposal complete with Appendix S(40)-1 duly filled and signed by the Contractor.
(b) Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the points of performance.
(c) Three (3) sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :
(i) Piping and pumpset layout in pump room

(ii) Position of control panel and floatless level control electrodes
(iii) PUB's water incoming pipe
(iv) Rising main
(v) Sizes of all fittings
(vi) Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings
(vii) Mounting of pumpsets
Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above before the installation is
commissioned by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S40.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-2/16
40.4 Deviations from Approved Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System
Work shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. Seek fresh approval for any
deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by the
Employer. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
or obligations should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to strength, performance
or efficiency.
40.5 Building-In
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found
subsequently.
40.6 Pumps
All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-stage
centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%, driven by
electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted on a
common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double lock
nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel bolts
and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset.
The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved
metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be stainless steel, bronze or other
approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact with water shall
be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with SS 375:2001. The
impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel and able to transmit the
required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably
protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the
rotating parts.
Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated.
The pump shall be of approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on data
given in Appendix S(40)-1. Type and make of pump shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
40.7 Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Special Castings
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB.
All pipes, fittings and special castings in the pump room and to the roof tanks shall be ductile iron
complying with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in BS
EN 545. The mixture shall be tested according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545.
Pipe joints and fittings along any section shall be of flanged type, the thickness and drilling of which shall
comply with BS EN 545 type PN 16. Thickness of sealing compound between the flanged ends shall be
at least 2mm. Galvanised steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used for the installation.
Ductile iron pipes, socket and spigot type complying with BS EN 545 is permissible only for vertical riser
except that the joint immediately above roof shall be of flanged joint. All vertical rising mains shall run
inside the buildings along the staircase landing/access corridor.
All pipes which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by cork and sealed on the outer 12mm with
approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall
be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Delivery Piping Size of Suction Piping

100mm 80mm
LUP09/S40.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-3/16
40.8 Valves
An approved 100mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted directly to the
incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply
pipe of not less than 700 KN/m2 and shall be tested and approved by Water Department, PUB. The
fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve shall be of bronze with
leather trim and the packing plate of gun metal with winged guide and links. The body shall be of copper
alloy with bronze liner and gun metal seal ring and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504
or BS 10 with approved rating.
Gate valves and check valves shall be of type used in the high quality water works practice and shall
comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively. The valves shall be tested and approved by Water
Department, PUB and the SO Rep.
The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body
shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high
tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved.
Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be installed
near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank.
The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with a 80mm gate valve followed by a 80mm rubber
expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with a 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring
loaded check valve and a 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a
short pipe of 200mm in length. A 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe
and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising
main in the pumproom followed by 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from the
gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length.
All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with stainless
steel spring).
40.9 High Pressure and Expansion Connection
80mm rubber expansion joint of approved type shall be used to connect the outlet of the pump and the
delivery pipe and shall be flanged at both ends and be able to sustain a working pressure of not less than
1400 KN/m2. The rubber expansion joint shall be limited from expanding excessively in axial direction.
The delivery pipe shall be supported by at least 2 nos. of 50mm galvanised mild steel pipe and be properly
secured to the floor or wall for this purpose.
80mm rubber expansion joint shall be used to connect the suction pipe and the discharge pipe of each
pump.
40.10 Bends
All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be cement
mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.
40.11 Metal Soil Tray
Provide and install metal soil tray under sanitary pipe in the pump room.
40.12 Ball Float Valve
Position 100mm ball float valve as indicated in the Drawings to allow full flow of water from PUB main.
LUP09/S40.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-4/16
40.13 Power Supply
Power supply available for electric motors shall be 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.
40.14 Motors
High efficiency electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum
Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating.
The motors shall be the approved type and model.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
40.15 Motor Starters
The starter shall be submitted for approval before installation. the starter shall provide means of starting or
stopping the motors by push-button or be automatically activated by the control electrodes in the suction
(low level) and storage (high level) tanks.
The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level floatless
control relay unit and standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level floatless control
relay unit. Selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual selector switch.
Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty pumpsets
automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of the pumpset
during night time.
(a) Star-Delta Starter (For blocks below 25-storey)
The starters for motors shall be star-delta starters, capable of limiting current to 2 1/2 times the full
load current at (a) standstill (starting up the Plant) and at (b) changeover (when the starter
automatically changes the connections from Star to Delta winding).
Each starter shall have time relay, overload release, no volt release pilot lamp. The operating
voltage of the control coil shall be 230 V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above
conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. It shall be
so designed such that under 16 operation hours per day the Mechanical and Electrical Endurance
is not less than 50,000 operations. A manufacturer's certificate to this effect shall be produced
when required.
(b) Soft Starter (For blocks with 25-storey & above)
The soft starters shall be designed to operate at 3-phase 400V 50Hz shall be suitable for
starting/stopping 3-phase induction motor used for water pumping system. The soft starter shall
provide soft acceleration during starting of motor and soft deceleration during stopping of motor. It
shall be able to reset by itself automatically when power supply resumed from the power failure.
Built-in fault indication lights shall also be incorporated in the soft starter to indicate the fault
conditions.
The approved soft starter shall consist of three pairs of thyristors with full wave control and shall be
designed for continuous operation above 40 degree C. The soft starter shall also be sized
according to the full load current of the motor and shall comply with IEC 947-4-2 or the equivalent.
40.16 Time Switch
Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping hours
within the preset time. Time switch shall be able to operate on 24 hours basis with minimum 150 hours
reserve to cater for temporary power failure.
LUP09/S40.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-5/16
40.17 Floatless Level Control Relay Units
Floatless level control electrodes mounted on the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks in each
building shall be connected directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tanks. These
floatless level control electrodes shall be positioned near to the manhole of the tank and be easily
accessible for maintenance.
The floatless level control electrodes shall be installed on the storage tanks operating at Normal Demand
Settings. The floatless level control electrodes shall be arranged to start and stop the pumpset at
predetermined high and low levels. A floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the
suction tank shall be used to provide over-riding control of the storage tank floatless level control relay
units such that at a preset low water level in the suction tank, the storage tank floatless level control relay
units will not start the pump.
The floatless level control relay units shall be interconnected to the motor starters through the pumps'
automatic change over relay. Separate floatless level control relay unit shall be installed for the alarm
system and shall be set to activate the alarm device and standby pumpset when the water falls below a
predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall also activate the alarm device and
deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall
have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the
electrodes.
Electrodes shall be stainless steel and be provided with adequate electrode separators. The ceilings
roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked `NL' and ÈA' respectively.
Electrodes holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removed for maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep them as
short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power
supply wiring.
Provide wirings and conduits from the switchboard inside the pump-room to each of these floatless control
relay units.
The type and make of this floatless control relay unit shall be approved by the SO Rep.
40.18 Number of Floatless Level Control Relay Units
Provide a total of three numbers of floatless level control relay units. Where storage tanks are divided into
two or more separate tanks, at least two separate tanks shall be installed with floatless level control
electrodes.
40.18.1 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room)
Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters
independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a
predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes shall
be of the same setting.
40.18.2 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room)
Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in case
the water level falls below a predetermined level.
40.18.3 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 3 (At Pumproom)
Provide one set of electrodes for the suction tank to actuate a warning indicating light and override the
operation of pumpsets when the water level in the suction tank (low level tank) falls below a predetermined
level. Provide one set of electrodes to activate a warning indicating light and alarm when the level in the
suction tank rises to a predetermined overflow level.
LUP09/S40.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-6/16
40.19 Control Panel
Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown on the Drawings.
Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it shall
be near to the entrance of the pumproom.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of front connected type and manufactured from electro-
galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and
maintenance purposes.
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold
such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a) 1 No. ON/OFF control switch.
(b) 1 No. Automatic/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described in
Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters".
(c) 2 Nos. Starters as described in Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters".
(d) 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter.
(e) 2 Sets Manual `START'/`STOP' button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating `run' and
`trip' as described in Clause 40.15 "Motor Starters".
(f) 1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 40.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units".
(g) 1 No. Digital Time switch as described in Clause 40.16 "Time Switch".
(h) 1 No. Relay for reset of àlarm bell' and `light'.
(i) 1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time.
(j) 2 Nos. Relays to activate overflow warning device.
(k) 2 Nos. Relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.
(l) 3 Nos. Relay to control the pumpsets.
(m) 3 Nos. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
(n) 1 No. Automatic change over relay.
(o) 1 No. Suction tank low level warning indicating panel light.
(p) 3 Nos. Alarm indicating panel light.
(q) 6 Nos. MCB (4A) units for control circuits.
(r) 3 Nos. Phase indicating panel light with MCB (2A) unit.
(s) 1 No. MCB (4A) unit for alarm circuit.
(t) 2 Nos. Hour-run counters for pumpsets.
LUP09/S40.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-7/16
40.19 Control Panel (Cont'd)
(u) 1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required.
(v) 1 No. Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter.
(w) 1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
The whole of the electrical work shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
40.20 Electrical Wiring
Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom.
Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3
Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568, free from
internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars
saddles at maximum 1 m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5 m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an
efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All
conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently
earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in 150mm x
75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83 m
or 2.44 m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4 mm x 20
mm copper earth tap shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in the Code of
Practice for Electrical Installations CP 5.
Run conduits for the floatless level control relay units wiring inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the
inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and
100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation
testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the
conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity
conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5 .
LUP09/S40.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-8/16
40.21 Alarm and Emergency Device
Alarm device shall be turned on by the alarm and emergency level control relay units at the storage (high
level) tank and the level control relay unit at the suction (low level) tank. This alarm device shall be in the
form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the
pumproom and near the entrance. The bell shall be weather-proof and of heavy duty type. The make and
model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The alarm bell shall be cut off during night time by the time switch so that only the emergency start
warning light on the switchboard panel shall function at night when the water level falls below the
èmergency level'. Provide a re-set button for the alarm and the warning device.
The location of the warning device shall be approved by SO Rep. If a shield is required, the design shall
be approved by the SO Rep.
40.22 Installation of Pump Sets
The water pumpsets shall be properly installed onto the concrete foundation. The 16mm high tensile steel
foundation bolts shall be cast into the concrete to a minimum depth of :
100mm for motor up to 7.5 KW

150mm for motor above 7.5 KW
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by the
SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked permanent lettering and
numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate and
the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if vibration is still
substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as specified
in Clause 40.9 "High Pressure and Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe shall be set in
line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of the pump. The
delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports.
The sizes and types of fittings in front of the pumps shall be approved by the SO Rep before installation.
Check the location for the switch board. Should this location be not at optimum position, inform the SO
Rep immediately.
All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.
40.23 Vibration and Noise
The vibration and noise generated by pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers in the adjacent
flats.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce vibration
and sound.
40.24 Inspection During Progress of Work
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by
the SO Rep during progress of work.
LUP09/S40.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-9/16
40.25 Sterilisation of Pipes, Fittings and Pumps Before Operation
Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of
50 parts of chlorine to one million part of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation of
the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
40.26 Testing of Transfer Pumping System Installation
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance
and installation of the transfer pumping system.
Furnish the data on transfer pumping system in Appendix S(40)-2 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one
week before the testing of the transfer pumping system.
All Defects notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to
the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
40.27 Servicing and Maintenance During Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period
Allow for making good of all Defects and leakages, carry out routine servicing and maintenance of the
transfer pumping system and provide an efficient call-back service during the Time for Completion/Defects
Liability Period.
40.27.1 Making Good Defects and Leakages
During the Maintenance Period, make good all Defects and leakages found in the system and installation,
replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or repair has been
necessitated by the reasons of Defects in the equipment, or as a result of wear and tear. All costs
involved shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under this Specifications. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the
service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system and the workmen shall also be skilled in the
service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system.
40.27.2 Fortnightly and Monthly Inspection
All parts and equipment comprising the complete transfer pumping system shall be maintained and
inspected strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix S(40)-3.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the fortnightly and monthly
inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a
Representative from HDB's Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB's Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for fortnightly and monthly inspections upon
certified completion of the Contract.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the
pump room after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for fortnightly inspection shall include :
(a) General condition of pumproom

(b) Correct setting of time switch
(c) Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
(d) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(e) Control panel indicating lights
(f) Alarm bell and bulb
(g) Suction tank electrode and control module
(h) Motor running current
LUP09/S40.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-10/16
40.27 Servicing and Maintenance During Time for Completion/Defects Liability Period
(Cont'd)
40.27.2 Fortnightly and Monthly Inspection (Cont'd)
(i) 80mm check valve

(j) 80mm gate valve
(k) Alignment of couplings
(l) 100mm check valve
(m) 100mm gate valve
(n) Ball float valve
In addition to items under fortnightly inspection, items required to be inspected monthly shall also include:
(a) Motor insulation

(b) Pump mechanical seal
(c) Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
(d) Contactors and relays
(e) Storage tank electrode and control module
40.27.3 Efficient Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hours (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints such as no
water supply or triggering of the alarm bell of the Transfer Pumping System shall be attended to
immediately upon notification to the Contractor by the Representative from Essential Maintenance Service
Unit or Branch Office.
Provide mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the
respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-back service can be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the transfer pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps
are taken back to the workshop for repairs.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or

(b) attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
(c) carry out the fortnightly and monthly inspection of the transfer pumping system;
the SO Rep may engage another Contractor to carry out the work and all cost incurred shall be
recoverable from him by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or become due to
the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under the Clause 1.10
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
The Contractor's obligations under the Contract shall not be invalidated in the event that other Contractors
are instructed to rectify Defects in the transfer pumping system or to carry out the routine servicing and
maintenance of the transfer pumping system arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed
by the SO Rep.
40.28 Rectification of Defects Prior to Issuance

of Final Completion Certificate
One month before the expiry date of the Final Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall arrange with
HDB's Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defects listed after this joint
inspection shall be rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the contract.
Rectify the outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by
the Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of
Defects.
LUP09/S40.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-11/16
40.28 Rectification of Defects Prior to Issuance

of Final Completion Certificate (Cont'd)
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defects shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects on the list within
fourteen (14) days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection, the SO Rep
other contractor to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed
LUP09/S40.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-12/16
APPENDIX S(40)-1
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
SO Rep :
Building Block No. :
No. of Storeys :
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Water Supply
PUB direct water supply to _____________________ storey

No. of flats units to be supplied from roof tanks F = ___________________
Vertical Head from ground floor to inlet of roof tank H = ___________________ metres
Roof Tanks
(a) Total effective capacity of roof tanks required C1 = 700F = ______________ litres ____________ cu m
(b) No. of separate Tank groups (to be interlinked) = _______________________
(c) Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height)
Tank 1 = _________________ x __________________ x __________________ = ____________ cu m
Tank 2 = _________________ x __________________ x __________________ = ____________ cu m
or
(d) Precast Tanks = _____________________ Nos. x 11.83 cu m = ____________________ cu m
Suction Tanks
(a) Capacity of suction tank = ____________________ cu m

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) = ____________ x _____________ x ____________
or
(b) Precast Tank = Nos. x 3.731 cu m = cu m
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Pump Room
Location : _______________________________
Platform Level : _______________________________ m
Floor space available : Length x Width _______________________________ sq m
Height _______________________________ m
LUP09/S40.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-13/16
APPENDIX S(40)-1
(CONT'D)
Pump
Discharge capacity required : Q1 = 0.05F = ______________________ l/sec
Vertical Head : H1 = ______________________ m water
Proposed Pumps : Make ______________________
Type ______________________
Model ______________________
Flow : Q2 ______________________ l/sec
Total Head : H2 ______________________ m water
Speed : ______________________ rpm
Impeller Diameter : ______________________ mm
Power required : ______________________ KW
Pump efficiency : ______________________ %
(Please attach characteristics curve for pumps)

The Contractor must propose the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall
preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Motor
Make : ______________________
Type : ______________________
Model : ______________________
Rated Output : ______________________ KW
Voltage/Phase Frequency : ______________________
No Load Speed : ______________________ RPM
Insulation Class : _____________________
Line Current at Full Load : ______________________ amp
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Coupling
Make and Type : _____________________
Main Dimension : _____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LUP09/S40.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-14/16
APPENDIX S(40)-1
(CONT'D)
Control Panel
MCB for main incoming supply : Make ______________________________________________________
Type ______________________________________________________
Rating ______________________________________________________
Starter : MAKE, TYPE AND MODEL _______________________________________
Capacity _____________________________________________________
Overload release ratings ________________________________________
Approximate Kw ratings ____________ Kw at ___________ v ________ ph
Floatless Level Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ________________________________________
Time Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ________________________________________
Reserve for _____________________________________ hrs
Selector Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ________________________________________
Automatic Change Over Relay : _____________________________________________________________
PIPELINES
Diameter of Suction Pipe :
Total Length of Suction Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line :
Diameter of Discharge Pipe :
Diameter of Rising Main :
Total Length of Discharging Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :
Remarks :
Contractor's Name : _________________________________________________________________________
Address : ________________________________________________________________________
Signature : ________________________________ Name : ____________________________
Telephone No. : _________________________________ Date : _____________________________
LUP09/S40.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-15/16
APPENDIX S(40)-2
TESTING DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer
pumping system.
Contract Title : Contract No. :

Block No. : Ref No. :
Location : Contractor :
Building Data
No. of Storey : Dwelling units per storey :
Direct Supply : (storey) Total dwelling units from tanks (F)
Total head : (m) Required pumping capacity (0.05xF) : (l/s)
Suction tank : m x m x m (Internal Dimension)
Motor Data Motor 1 Motor 2
Brand
Type TEFC TEFC
Model
Serial No.
Rated Output (Kw)
Volt/Phase/Frequency / 3 / 50 / 3 / 50
Insulation Class/Speed (rpm) / rpm / rpm
Related Current (A)
Pump Data Pump 1 Pump 2 Fitting Data

Brand Coupling (brand)/size
Model Rubber expansion joint (Brand)
Type 80 dia. suction gate valve (Brand)
Serial No. 80 dia. delivery gate valve (Brand)
Impeller Diameter (mm) 80 dia. check valve (Brand)
100 dia. gate valve (Brand)
Specified capacity (l/s) 100 dia. check valve (Brand)
Control Panel Data No. 1 No. 2
Starter - Brand
- Model
- Type
Starter Changeover Relay - Brand
Starter MCB - Brand
Overload Protector - Brand
- Model
- Setting Range
Time Switch - Brand Suction Tank Module
- Model Storage Tank Module - Normal
- Serial No. Storage Tank Module - Emergency
Latching Relay - Brand Suction Electrode Holder
8-Pin Relay - Brand Normal Level Electrode Holder
11-Pin Relay - Brand Emergency Level Electrode Holder
Recorded & Submitted by :

______________________________ _________________________
(Contractor's Name) Company Stamp (Signature) Date
____________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Motor Motor 1 Motor 2
Tested by : _____________________
Starting/Changeover Current (A) 1) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date
Running Current (A) R/Y/B 2) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date
Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Checked &
Time for 250mm of water (sec) Verified by : _____________________
Approximate Capacity (l/s) STO/HTO ( ) Date
LUP09/S40.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 40-16/16
APPENDIX S(40)-3
To : SO ( )
#FORTNIGHTLY/MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM

DURING TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Date of Inspection : _________________________ Contract Title : ___________________
Block No. : _____________________ Pump Room : 1/2# Location : _________________
Item Checked Remedial Action/Date

(A) Fortnightly
1. General Condition of Pumproom
2. Correct Setting of Time Switch
3. Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
4. Power supply selector switch in "On" position
5. Control panel indicating lights
6. Alarm bell and bulb
7. Suction Tank electrode and control module
8. Motor Running Current
R Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
Rated current : _________ A
Y * A * A
Motor output : _________ KW
B * A * A
* A * A
9. 80mm Check Valve
10. 80mm Gate Valve
11. Alignment of Couplings
12. 100mm Check Valve
13. 100mm Gate Valve
14. Ball Float Valve
(B) Monthly (in addition to items in fortnightly

inspection)
1. Motor insulation (megaohms) * *
2. Pump mechanical seal
3. Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
4. Contractors and Relays
5. Storage tank electrode and control module
Signature : _____________________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : _________________________________/___________
Name of Contractor : _____________________________________________
Acknowledged By : _____________________________________________
Resident Technical Officer ( ) Date
# : Delete as necessary
9 : Checked and found in order
x : To rectify immediately
* : Readings by measuring instrument
SECTION 41/...
LUP09/S40.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 41-1/1
SECTION 41
41.0 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)
41.1 WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS
41.1.1 Water Saving Taps For Public Wash Hand Basins
Where applicable, taps to all wash hand basins in staff and public toilets, in swimming complex, sports
complex, indoor stadium, training stadium, training hall, bus interchange etc shall be 15mm diameter
chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action taps comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations
and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water
Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements The flow rate and the timing shall not be
more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.
41.1.2 Water Saving Tap For Public Showers
Where applicable, taps to all the public showers and showers in swimming complex, sports complex,
indoor stadium, training hall etc shall be of self-closing delayed action shower taps complying with the
standards stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minutes
and 15 seconds respectively.
41.2 FLUSH VALVES
Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public
toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines on
Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on Sanitary,
Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit application and
obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.
41.3 SOAP TRAYS
Where specified, soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or
other approved type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by
SO Rep.
SECTION 42/...
LUP09/S41.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 42-1/1
SECTION 42
(RESERVED)
SECTION 43/...
LUP09/S42.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-1/11
SECTION 43
43.0 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Where applicable, Booster Pumping System Installation shall comply with the following requirements :
43.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system based on the data
given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panel
and all necessary accessories.
Details of proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All work
shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water
Services , the requirements and regulations of the Water Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory
requirements
43.2 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
Submit one (1) set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two (2) months from the date of the
Employer's letter of acceptance of the Contractor's Tender :
(a) Detailed proposal complete with Appendix S(43)-1 duly filled and signed by the Contractor.
(b) Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the point(s) of performance.
Work shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek
fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not
be accepted by the Employer. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility or obligations should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to
strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.
43.3 BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the pumping
system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel member
supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages found
subsequently.
43.4 BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS
All booster pumps of approved type shall be of vertical in-line centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals
and high performance efficiency, driven by TEFC electric motors except otherwise specified in this
Specifications. Casing of pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other approved metal. The
impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel type and able to transmit
the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of the shaft shall be
suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in robust housing well clear
of the rotating parts. The shaft seal shall be of mechanical seal type. Bearings shall be protected against
corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. Make of the pumps shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep.
The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type and with at least Class B
insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous maximum rating. Type and
model shall subject to approval of the SO Rep before installation.
The power supply for the electric motors shall be 415 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current. 230
volts single phase motor shall be used as and when directed and approved by the SO Rep. The power of
the motor shall not be more than 1 kw.
LUP09/S43.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-2/11
43.4 BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS (CONT'D)
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the booster pumps shall be as follows :
No. of Dwelling
Unit Served by Specified Flow Rate Pressure Head Shut-off Head
Booster Pump (l/s) (m) (m)
20 or below 3 9 Not less than 12

Above 20 5 9 Not less than 12
The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.
43.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Department, PUB. All stainless steel pipes, fittings
and accessories shall conform to BS 4127 : Part 2. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall comply with BS
EN 545. Ductile iron flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be internally cement lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in
BS EN 545. Test the mixture according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Apply two coats of PUB
approved epoxy to the portion where cement lining is not possible.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tees, for all ductile iron distribution mains and draw-out pipes at roof level
shall be ductile iron flanged type. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
The internal and external surfaces of the stainless steel pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free
from Defects. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Pipes
shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of pipes. Any
unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Unless otherwise specified, use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply. The stainless steel pipe
fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS 864 : Part 2
and all PUB latest requirements.
All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. Support the pipes with stainless steel supports and clips or
concrete supports. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated and sealed with approved
compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be
supported with built in stainless steel supports and clips spaced at 1m centres.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Suction Piping - 42mm

Size of Discharge Piping - 42mm
Size of By-Pass Piping - 15mm
Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and
connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the top-most 2
storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and interconnecting
pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main.
Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the
Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised
steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.
43.6 VALVES
Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each
pump with a 40mm spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the by-pass
pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.
LUP09/S43.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-3/11
43.7 LABELLING STICKERS
Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto
the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving
the top-most 2 storeys.
The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The
dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit
a sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.
43.8 POWER SUPPLY
Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall be
connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.
43.9 MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS
Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide
means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-starter
shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds.
Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day.
The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated
by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be
determined by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and duty
booster pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the
booster pumps according to actual water demand.
43.10 FLOW SENSORS
The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the
central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67.
The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds
(adjustable range : 10mm per seconds to 2m per seconds).
43.11 FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT
Connect floatless level switch control electrodes mounted on each storage (high level) tank directly to the
floatless level switch mounted inside the switch board panel. Position the floatless level switch control
electrodes near to the manhole of the tank for easy maintenance.
Arrange the floatless level switch control electrodes to start and stop the pumpset at pre-determined
levels. Interconnect the floatless level switch to the motor soft-starters through the pumps' automatic
change over relay.
The floatless level switch shall be of plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The unit shall have
built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge from the electrodes.
Provide stainless steel electrodes with adequate electrodes separators. The ceiling roses and flexible
cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "BP".
Electrodes holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removed for maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the switch board panel and keep them as short as
possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power supply wiring.
The type and make of the floatless level switch shall be approved by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S43.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-4/11
43.12 CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall space
shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall be near to
the booster pumpsets subject to approval of the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of front connected type and manufactured from electro-
galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm thickness using folded section or angle form bracing for
rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and
maintenance purposes.
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such
items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a) 1 No. Rotary selector switch for Auto selection

(b) 1 No. Rotary key selector switch with 3 points selection
(c) 2 Nos Soft-Starters as described in Clause 43.9 "Motor Soft-Starters"
(d) 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phases MCB unit for starters
(e) 1 No. Delay Timer with 0-6 seconds setting
(f) 1 No. Timer with 0 - 30 minutes setting
(g) 6 Nos. Relays to control the pumpsets
(h) 1 No. Automatic change over relay
(i) 5 Nos. MCB unit for control circuits
(j) 3 Nos. Phase indicating panel light
(k) 2 Nos. Pump "run" indicating panel light
(l) 2 Nos. Pump "trip" indicating panel light
(m) 1 No. Low level warning indicating panel light
The whole of the electrical work shall comply with SS CP 5 and be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
43.13 ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations.
Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4 wire
system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, GI conduit (Class B), complying with BS 4568:1970, free from
internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars
saddles at maximum 1 m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5 m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural
steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the
steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall
be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in
150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or
2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness of
45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x
20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted
down.
LUP09/S43.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-5/11
43.13 ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONT'D)
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The number
of cables to be drawn shall comply to SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing
equipment of the 'Megger' type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors are
connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables between
the motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
43.14 INSTALLATION OF BOOSTER PUMPS
Install booster pumpsets on the floor/wall and support and secure them with stainless steel or concrete
supports along the pipes close to suction and discharge side of the booster pumpsets.
Install pressure gauge of appropriate scales at the discharge pipe of each booster pump. The pressure
gauge shall comply with BS1780 for measuring gauge pressure. The pressure gauge shall be marked
with the manufacturer's trademark or brand name.
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the booster pumps are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
Check the location for the control panel. Inform the SO Rep immediately should this location be not at
optimum position.
43.15 VIBRATION AND NOISE
Vibration and noise generated by the pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers immediately
below.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce the
vibration and sound.
43.16 STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION
Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose of
50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the operation
of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
43.17 INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections by
the SO Rep during of progress of work.
LUP09/S43.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-6/11
43.18 TESTING OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance
and installation of the booster pumping system.
Furnish data on booster pumping system in Appendix S(43)-2 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep one
week before the testing of the booster pumping system.
All Defects notified during the inspection shall be rectified by Contractor at his own cost and expense
before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which action shall be taken against the
Contractor by the SO Rep.
43.19 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING

TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Allow for making good of all Defects and leakages, routine servicing and maintenance of the booster
pumping system and provision of an efficient call-back service during the Time for Completion/Defects
Liability Period.
43.19.1 Making Good Defects and Leakages
During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defects and leakages found in the system and
installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or
repair has been necessitated by reasons of Defects in the equipment, or as a result of wear and tear. All
costs involved shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
The Contractor shall have a Supervisor-in-Charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under the Specifications. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the
service, maintenance and repair of the booster pumping system and the workmen shall also be skillful in
the service, maintenance and repair of booster pumping system.
43.19.2 Monthly Inspection
Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly in
accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix S(43)-3.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange for
a Representative from HDB's Branch Office to be present during these visits.
The Contractor shall furnish to HDB's Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon
certified completion of the Contract.
Items in the Check-list shall include :
(a) Flow sensors

(b) Soft-starters, relays and control module
(c) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(d) Control panel indicating lights
(e) Electrodes in storage tanks
(f) Motor running current
(g) Motor insulation
(h) Pump mechanical seal
(i) Pressure gauges
(j) 40mm check valve and ball stop valves
(k) Thrust supports at distribution main
LUP09/S43.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-7/11
43.19.3 Efficient Call-Back Service
Provide 24 hours (whole day) call-back service. Attend to all complaints immediately upon notification to
the Contractor by the Representative from Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
Provide mobile phone for his Maintenance Supervisor and the mobile phone number shall be given to the
respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any call-back service can be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the booster pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps are
taken back to the workshop for repairs.

(b) attend to complaint immediately upon notification; or
(c) carry out the monthly inspection of the booster pumping system;
the SO Rep may engage another Contractor to carry out the work and all cost charges shall be
recoverable from him by the Employer or from monies due or become due to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and
The Contractor's obligations under the Contract shall not be invalidated in the event that other Contractors
are instructed to rectify Defects in the booster pumping system or carry out the routine servicing and
maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the Contractor's failure to do so when directed
by the SO Rep.
43.20 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE

OF FINAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB's
Branch Office and SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All defects listed after the joint inspection shall be
rectified by the 13th month after the certified completion of the Contract.
Rectify all outstanding Defects and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by
Representative from HDB's Branch Office for the purpose of certifying complete rectification of Defects.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB's Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defects shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defects in the list within
fourteen (14) days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defects on the second final inspection, the SO Rep
other contractors to rectify and make good all Defects and the cost of rectification and charges imposed
LUP09/S43.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-8/11
APPENDIX S(43)-1
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the SO
Rep.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
SO Rep :
Building Block No. :
No. of Storeys :
No. of Dwelling Units Per Storey :
No. of Storeys served by Booster Pump :
No. of Dwelling Units served by Booster Pumps :
No. of Water Tanks on the Roof Top :
BOOSTER PUMPS
Discharge capacity required : Q l/sec
Pressure Head : H m water
Shut-off Pressure Head Ns m water
Proposed Booster Pumps : Make
Type
Model
Speed : rpm
Impeller Diameter : mm
Power required : kw
(Please attach characteristics curve for booster pumps)
LUP09/S43.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-9/11
APPENDIX S(43)-1
(CONT'D)
MOTOR
Make :
Type :
Model :
Rated Output : KW
Voltage/Phase/Frequency :
No-Load Speed : RPM
Insulation Class :
Line Current at Full Load : amp
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for main incoming supply : Make
Type
Rating
Soft-Starters : BRAND & MODEL
CAPACITY
Overload Release Ratings :
KW ratings : kw at v ph
Floatless Level Switch : BRAND & MODEL
Flow Sensor : BRAND & MODEL
Selector Switch : BRAND & MODEL
Automatic Change over relay :
Address :
Signature : Name :
Tel No. : Date :
LUP09/S43.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-10/11
APPENDIX S(43)-2
TESTING DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system.

A. PUMPS No. 1 No. 2 Brand Model

1. Brand D. PRESSURE GAUGE Range
2. Model E. CONTROL PANEL Key No.
B. MOTORS No. 1 No. 2 1. Timer
1. Serial 2. Delay Timer
2. Brand 3. Control Module
3. Rated Output kw kw 4. Auto Changeover Relay
4. Rated Current A A 5. Control MCB
6. Starter MCB
C. VALVES BRAND
7. Key Switch Key No.
1. 40 mm Ball Stop Valve 8. Control Relay
2. 40 mm Check Valve 9. Overload Relay
3. 15 mm Gate/Ball Stop Valve 10. Soft-Starter
4. 15 mm Stop Cock
5. 40 mm Solenoid Valve
6. 40 mm Stop Cock F. FLOW SENSOR
7. 32 mm Check Valve

(Contractor's Name) Company Stamp
FOR OFFICIAL USE

Shut Off Pressure (bar) Mode 1 Pass/Fail
Running Pressure (bar) Mode 2 Pass/Fail
PUMP NO. 1
Running Current (A) Mode 3 Pass/Fail
-
Shut Off Pressure (bar) Mode 1 Pass/Fail
Running Pressure (bar) Mode 2 Pass/Fail
PUMP NO. 2
Running Current (A) Mode 3 Pass/Fail
-
Tested by Checked & Verified by

1) TO/HTN/TN ( ) Date STO/HTO ( ) Date
2) TO/HTN/TN ( )
LUP09/S43.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 43-11/11
APPENDIX S(43)-3
To : SO ( )
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM

DURING TIME FOR COMPLETION/DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Date of Inspection : Contract Title :
Block No. : Pump Room : 1/2# Location :
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
1. Flow Sensor
2. Soft-starter, relay and control module
3. Power, supply selector switch in "On" position
5. Electrodes in storage tanks
6. Motor Running Current Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
R * A * A
Rated current : A
Y * A * A
Motor Output : KW
B * A * A
7. Motor insulation (megaohms) * *
8. Pump mechanical seal
9. Pressure gauges
10. 40mm check valves and bell stop valves
11. Thrust supports at distribution main
Signature :
9 : Checked & found in order Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /
X : To rectify immediately Name of Contractor :
* : Readings by measuring instrument Acknowledge By :

Resident Technical Officer ( ) Date
SECTION 44/.....
LUP09/S43.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-1/30
SECTION 44
44.0 DRY/WET RISING MAIN AND DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) INSTALLATION
44.1 GENERAL
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements of
the FSSD. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD
and/or BCA to carry out inspection and also to witness the testing during the Time for Completion and any
time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06
(Fire Prevention and Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
necessary submission, supervision, completion, testing and commissioning of the installations under the
Contract as required by FSSD and/or BCA. The Contractor shall submit all requisite certificates including
testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep according to the requirements of FSSD and/or BCA.
44.2.1 Scope of Work
(a) Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not
exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve at
every storey, breeching inlet and breaching inlet cabinet (where applicable).
The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be :
(i) 100mm galvanised steel Class `C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height.
The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet.
(ii) 150mm galvanised steel Class `C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising
main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.
(b) For building with height above 60m and the building is not more than 25 storey, both dry rising
main and down-comer (fire fighting) shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
The dry rising main shall be provided as per sub-clause 44.2.1 "Scope of Work" in (a)(ii) above.
The down-comer (fire fighting) shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel class `C' pipe. The
down-comer (fire fighting) shall be connected to domestic water tank and installed with check
valves, gate valves and drain cocks at roof top. It shall be complete with landing valves from the
topmost storey to the storey at 60m level. The exact location of the 60m level shall be confirmed
with the SO Rep.
In the case for existing building, the Contractor shall alter the existing pipe-works according to
details as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S44.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-2/30
44.2.1 Scope of Work (Cont'd)
(c) For building which is more than 25 storey, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29
and the requirements as shown in the Drawings.
Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of transfer pumps and the fire
pumps.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as in Appendix A30.
(d) For buildings with existing down-comer or dry/wet rising main systems the Contractor shall carry
out the complete test stipulated herein and rectify all defects before the application of TOP or CSC
to BCA.
44.2.2 Rules And Regulations
Ensure that the installation of dry/wet rising main system is in accordance with the latest requirements of
the following :
(a) Building Control Act and the Regulations made thereunder;

(b) Public Utilities Act, and the Regulations made thereunder;
(c) Professional Engineers Act;
(d) Fire Safety Act;
(e) SS CP 29;
(f) Any other relevant rules, regulations and by-laws.
In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail.
44.2.3 Material
Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore
Standards, British Standards or their equivalent.
Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent :
(a) Ball Valves BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3

(b) Boxes for landing valves BS 5041 : Part 4, 5
(c) Breeching inlets BS 5041 : Part 3
(d) Landing valves BS 5041 : Part 1, 2
(e) Pipes BS 1387, ASTM A120
(f) Pipe fittings BS 1740
(g) Pipe and valve flanges BS 10 or BS 4504
(h) Pressure gauges BS 1780
(i) Gate valves BS 5163
(j) Starting switches (automatic) BS 587
(k) Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols BS 5499 : Part 1
LUP09/S44.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-3/30
44.2.4 Quality Of Goods And Materials
The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the
relevant Authorities. No Works shall commence until samples of the materials have been approved by the
SO Rep. However, if the installed materials are subsequently found to be of inferior quality to that of the
samples submitted, or if the materials proved to be unsuitable for use, or if the materials failed to perform
to the requirement specified in the Specifications, the approval of the samples shall be withdrawn with
immediate effect. In this respect, the Contractor shall allow for up to 2 tests for each type of fittings to be
carried out by SAC accredited laboratory as and when requested by the SO Rep. The sample shall be
selected at random at the discretion of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good all Defects and
replace all inferior or defective materials at his own cost and expense. The SO Rep shall exercise its right
under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges for irregularities committed if the
materials supplied are inferior or different from the samples approved.
Where products are manufactured under PSB's Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be
necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
44.2.5 Approval/Submission of Drawings and Details
Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two sets of the following documents :
(a) Detailed installation proposal complete with necessary drawings.
(b) Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all equipment employed in the installation.
(c) Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation.
(d) Technical specifications and characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of performance.
(e) Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :

(i) Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation.
(ii) Position of switchboard.
(iii) Piping/Water tank layout.
(iv) Sizes of all pipes and fittings.
(v) Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.
The Works shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but additional
approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing
which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal shall in no
way relieve the contractor of his responsibility should the installation or any of its parts proved inadequate
in any aspect.
On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit to the SO Rep three sets of as-
built prints. Each of the prints shall be stamped “As-Built”:
Incorporate the following information where applicable :
(a) Position of pump rooms.
(b) Routes of all rising mains and pipes.
(c) Piping and equipment arranged inside the pump room.
(d) Schematic diagram of the rising main hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each pump, valve,
pressure switch, flow switch and etc.
LUP09/S44.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-4/30
44.2.5 Approval/Submission of Drawings and Details (Cont'd)
(e) Locations of every landing valve and breeching inlet.
(f) Schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring.
(g) Control circuit diagram of wet riser pump.
(h) Circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units.
44.2.6 Installation
(a) Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done.
(b) For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb
around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe.
Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single
operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight.
(c) The work shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The
Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the original
slab.
44.2.7 Damage To Existing Roof Structures And Roofing System
For work to existing building blocks, the Contractor shall liaise with the relevant Branch Office or Town
Council for a joint inspection together with the SO Rep to determine the existing roof condition before the
commencement of the Works. All Defects noted shall be recorded in writing and verified by the parties
concerned before the commencement of the Works.
Upon the completion of the Works, the Contractor shall engage the same roofing specialist contractor,
who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to replace any broken or cracked
secondary roof slab and carry out all the repairs and reinstatement works to the damaged waterproofing
membrane and roof structure.
During the progress of the Contract, the Contractor shall upon verbal or written notification by the SO Rep,
engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the roofing system, to
repair immediately any leakage in the roof caused by the Contractor.
44.3.1 Pipeworks & Fittings
(a) General
Pipework for dry/wet rising mains and down-comers (fire fighting) shall be galvanised steel
conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM A120 and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be
suitable for pressures up to 21 bars. Mill certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck
with the heat numbers of tubes/pipes at the Site.
All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be
used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted.
Valves used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All fittings/
valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall be kept
securely strapped with padlock.
All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material.
LUP09/S44.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-5/30
44.3.1 Pipeworks & Fittings (Cont'd)
(a) General (Cont'd)
Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining. The
clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the construction
detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting).
Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in
the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided. Sleeves
shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall be plugged
with an approved sealant.
All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The sealant
shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building through a
large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built into the walls
of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded to the plate and
the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.
For wet rising main landing valves, a permanent notice shall be provided in 25mm(minimum) block
letters of RED colour on a WHITE background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve
reading ‘DANGER! HIGH PRESSURE LANDING VALVE’.
(b) Pipe Joints
All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other
approved means.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring
gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles.
Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or
shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps
shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket so
designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The coupling
assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts and nuts.
Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest specifications.
The entire coupling installation shall be from the same manufacturer and in accordance with the
latest manufacturer's recommendations.
Couplings and fittings used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP
29.
(c) Pipe Supports
Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall be
as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the structure.
The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject to the
Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with
hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m.
(d) Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of Section 23.
All pipework shall be stencilled with white directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size.
Provide a sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange to the SO Rep for approval.
LUP09/S44.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-6/30
44.3.2 Breeching Inlet
Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's
63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm or four-
way breaching inlet for 150mm diameter rising main about 760mm above ground level.
Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3.
Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box (either galvanized, zinc sprayed or metal coated) with glass
front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. Position
of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and
using a letter height of at least 50mm. Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet
rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock and painted red at the edge with 25mm thick
lines. Where more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be
subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve at
the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible tubing
(fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a suitable
drain.
Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of a
suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading `DRY
RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or `WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another permanent
notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5, reading `LOW
LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve shall be kept securely
strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
44.3.3 Landing Valve
Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil
Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such as
handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The
Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for such
work shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the Contract
Sum. The SO Rep decision on items considered vulnerable to be stolen shall be final binding and
conclusive on the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed
except when in use.
(a) Location
Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor
level.
(b) Recesses And Enclosures For Landing Valves
Enclose landing valves for rising mains within a duct as shown in the Drawings.
Where a landing valve is in an open recess, duct or alcove, and where a landing valve of a rising
main is enclosed in a box, the opening giving access to the landing valve shall not be lesser than
150mm clearance on both sides and not lesser than 230mm below the centre line of the outlet of
the landing valve and not lesser than 250mm clearance above the handwheel. Depth of the
opening shall not be greater than is necessary, and the front edge of the female coupling of the
landing valve shall not be more than 75mm behind the face of the door. Allow adequate space
around the valve to permit easy maintenance and testing.
Signplate in block letters of height not less than 50mm with the words `DRY RISING MAIN
OUTLET', `WET RISING MAIN OUTLET' or `DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) OUTLET' for the
respective rising mains shall be displayed on the door.
Landing valves shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains and down-
comers (fire fighting).
LUP09/S44.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-7/30
44.3.4 Automatic Air Release Valve for Rising Mains
A suitable automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each rising main to permit
air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere when water is pumped in at ground level.
The automatic air release valve shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats
and guides, and non-corrodible valves and seats.
44.3.5 Electrical Earthing of Rising Mains
Rising mains shall be electrically earthed as shown in the Drawings. Joints which do not provide electrical
continuity shall be bonded.
Where the rising main is situated in the vicinity of any lightning conductor, it shall also be bonded to the
lightning conductor in accordance with the requirements of the code on lightning protection.
44.3.6 Drain Valves
Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the
requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16.
For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same
direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching.
The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21,
and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.
44.3.7 Blank Caps
Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap to
the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.
44.3.8 Signboard
The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET' RISING MAIN'.
Where the inlets are not readily visible from outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place
directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Dry rising mains shall be labelled according to the requirements of FSSD.
44.4 WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM
44.4.1 Wet Rising Main Water Supply
Generally, a water supply capable of providing a minimum of 27 litres second for a residential building or
38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building at all times shall be required.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum common water
supply shall be as stated below :
(a) For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(b) For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.
LUP09/S44.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-8/30
44.4.1 Wet Rising Main Water Supply (Cont'd)
The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than
150mm above the maximum water level in the tank.
To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so that
when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing valve
does not exceed 8 bar.
To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (i.e. when only one jet is in use)
a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then permanently
connected into the relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the length of the wet
rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain. The relief pipe
shall be 100 mm galvanised steel.
All pump control panels shall be of IP 54 enclosures.
44.4.2 Wet Rising Main Water Tank
Unless agreeable by FSSD, tanks supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction or
storage tanks for wet rising mains.
The tank shall be compartmented into two separate water-tight sections connected by a valve, normally
kept open, to permit tank maintenance without interruption to the water supply. Nevertheless, when more
than one water tank is provided in parallel to store the required amount of water, tank compartmentation is
not necessary provided the tanks are interconnected with isolating valves which are secured open. Water
level indicator mounted on Aluminium plate shall be provided as shown in the drawing.
Each tank or tank compartment shall be provided with ductile iron cement lined overflow pipe of at least
100mm in diameter, adequately supported, and extended to discharge into a suitable drain.
Ductile iron cement lined drain pipe of at least 100mm size and controlled by a gate valve shall be
provided for each tank or compartment.
Voltex inhalators shall be installed where applicable to maintain the required water tank storage capacity
according to SS CP 29.
An approved visual level indicator shall be fitted to show the depth of water in each tank or compartment.
A permanent aluminium gooseneck ladder with safety guard extending a sufficient distance above the top
of the tank shall be provided for each tank. UPVC ladder shall also be provided inside each tank.
Reinforced concrete tank shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 9 "Reinforced Concrete
Water Tank". However, notwithstanding the requirements specified therein, sterilisation of water is not
required.
44.4.3 Wet Rising Main Pumps
The horizontal split case fire pumps for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps shall be listed by PSB
and UL, FM, LPC or other institutions recognised by FSSD. Pumps/motors shall be selected to meet
design as well as maximum flow requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at
least 150 mm height plinths. Spring type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure
minimal vibration transmission to the building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump
discharge shall be the spring mounted type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected
from water leakage/splash.
The pumps shall have an independent source of power supply and each shall be capable of providing
independently the necessary flow and pressure requirements.
The duty pump (or standby pump, in the event of failure of the duty pump) shall start automatically when
there is a flow of water or when a fall in pressure occurs in the rising main exceeding 5% of the fire pump
churning pressure. The pump shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means shall be
provide for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction. Once started, the pump shall run
continuously until stopped manually. Means shall be provided for the `lagging' pump to operate should the
`leading' pump fail to function upon closing of the starting circuit.
LUP09/S44.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-9/30
44.4.3 Wet Rising Main Pumps (Cont'd)
(a) Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate automatic
starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with provisions for
independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting of any pump
shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any.
(b) Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and
storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set low
water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main pumps.
In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water level.
The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level reaches
a pre-determined high or low limit.
(c) The associated jockey pump shall be controlled by pressure-sensor switches so as to maintain a
static pressure in the wet rising main 0.7 bar (23 feet) to 0.2 bar (6 feet) higher than the pressure
when the wet rising main pump is churning. The jockey pump shall be automatically de-energised
when any of the wet rising main pump operates.
All pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped manually.
All pumps shall be primed automatically at all times. This will be effected if the pumps are sited so that at
least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump
suction. Where this is not possible, separate priming tanks maintained automatically and foot valves shall
be provided for each pump.
Pumps which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a reliable float-operated air release or
equivalent valve not less than 12mm in size, to automatically release air from the pump.
Means must be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through each pump at a sufficient rate to
prevent overheating of the pump when churning.
A test valve and direct reading flow meter shall be provided on a pipe connection coupled to the pump
delivery branch downstream of the check valve to test the pump. The test piping shall be sized not less
than the meter size appropriate to the pump rated capacity. The test piping shall discharge to a suitable
drain.
A discharge pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge of each pump. The gauge shall have a
valve with arrangement for draining. Its indication dial shall have a range of at least twice the rated
working pressure of the pump.
All electrical wring, including that for the control and monitoring circuits shall be in accordance with PUB's
requirements and shall be:
(a) of the fire-resistive type complying with SS 299 or
(b) enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.
A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring does
not affect the fire-integrity of the duct.
The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is
acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every
emergency service.
Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING
MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE".
Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the ENV
guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual
commencement of the pump room pipe work installation.
LUP09/S44.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-10/30
44.4.4 Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels
The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to
manufacture of control panels.
Provision at the Wet rising main pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following :
(a) For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is
available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet rising
main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel.
(b) Manual/OFF/AUTO rotary selector switches shall be provided for each pump.
(c) "Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump.
(d) Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps.
(e) "Running" and "stop" indicting lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall be
provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show the
"Stop" status.
(f) Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor
mechanically independent of any control circuit.
(g) Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored
by the flow switch at each pump discharge.
(h) Indicating lamps giving indication of `Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation
pressure switches mounted above the alarm valves. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the
indication.
(i) Remote visible and audible indication besides the main control panel, if any for the following
conditions :
(i) Pump on demand
(ii) Operation of each wet rising main pump
(iii) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump
(iv) Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge
(v) Manual and auto mode selection.
(j) Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main
storage tanks.
(k) Indicator lamp and buzzer/bell test push button.
(l) Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following conditions:
(i) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each pump
(ii) Pump fail to start
(iii) Faults in the battery and charger system
(iv) High and low level at suction and storage tanks
(v) Other faults not mentioned above
The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a buzzer
muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified. The
occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to resume
the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a fault exists
shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof red light bulb
with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to indicate the above
fault conditions.
(m) Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided Volt-Free contacts and wiring to relay signals
to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.
LUP09/S44.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-11/30
44.4.5 Jockey Pump Control Panel
The jockey pump controllers shall be used for pressure maintenance in the installation to prevent
unnecessary cycling of the wet rising main pumps.
The jockey pump controller shall either be housed in a separate compartment within the wet rising main
pump controller or in a totally separate sheet steel cubicle.
The jockey pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload
relay, contactors, control relays and the following facilities :
(a) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
(b) Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
(c) `Run' and `stop' indicator lamps
(d) `Start' and `stop' pushbutton
(e) Pump Òverload' indicator lamp
(f) Connections to pressure switch
(g) Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer shall
be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure switch.
(h) Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.
44.4.6 Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control
The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior to
the manufacture of control panels.
The transfer pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload
relay, contactors and control relays. Provision of transfer pump Control Panel shall include but not limited
to the following :
(a) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
(b) Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
(c) `Run' and `stop' indicator lamps
(d) `Start' and `stop' pushbutton
(e) Pump Òverload' indicator lamp
(f) Connections to pressure switch
(g) Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.
LUP09/S44.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-12/30
44.5.1 Tests On Rising Main System & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting)
The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date
and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2
months before the completion of the building work.
For wet rising main system, the Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix
A31 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
44.5.2 Static Pressure Test
The Contractor shall ensure that the system is in order so that water is allowed to flow through it
discharging via the topmost and/or lowest outlet to flush out any debris that may be present.
The system shall then be completely charged with water to a hydrostatic pressure according to SS CP
29 for 2 hours. During this period, an inspection of the system shall be made to check that no leakage of
water is taking place at any of the joints or landing valves.
The system shall also be charged to the working pressure and at selected landing valve to be tested for
operational requirements with matching water hose. Landing valves shall be tested randomly on the
proper engagement with matching water hose and hose coupling.
Provide diesel driven pump for the tests. Alternatively, electric driven pump shall be used but the
Contractor shall arrange for its own power supply.
The Contractor shall arrange for all the necessary parties such as the FSSD to witness the test as and
when required.
Provide water and all the necessary instruments such as water hose, hose coupling, pressure gauges for
the testing.
Water from the domestic water tank shall not be used. The Contractor shall find other means of providing
the water subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Instrument for the testing shall be properly calibrated by SAC accredited laboratory.
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes are securely anchored before carrying out any pressure test.
44.5.3 Flow test (Wet Rising Mains only)
The following minimum water supply flow-rate shall be maintained in the wet rising system when 3 landing
valves within the system are in the fully-open position :
(i) 27 litres per second for a residential building.
(ii) 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building.
A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing
valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened.
When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that
hose line shall not exceed 8 bar.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply flow
rate shall be as stated below.
(i) For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second for
each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(ii) For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main and
19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 190
litres per second.
LUP09/S44.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-13/30
44.5.4 Performance Test
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing
Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum seven days notice to the
SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation fulfils the
function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned as necessary
until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be
endorsed by the Qualified Person.
44.5.5 Remedial Action and Re-testing
Remedy all Defects within such time as instructed by the SO Rep and arrange for a re-test of the system.
44.6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR

DRY RISING MAIN & DOWN -COMER (FIRE FIGHTING)
service and call-back service to the dry rising main and down-comer (fire-fighting) system as specified
hereafter for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or
phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the
"Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Whenever, the rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system or any portion thereof is out of service
for any reason, notice shall be given immediately to the Singapore Civil Defence Force and a suitable sign
shall be displayed at a prominent position. When the installation is reinstated, the Singapore Civil Defence
Force shall again be informed.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A32.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
For Inspection at every 6 months, rectify any Defect found after the following inspections :
(i) Check and verify operation of breeching inlets.

(ii) Check that breeching inlets and landing valves are not obstructed.
(iii) Check and verify that landing valves are fully closed and the handwheel are strapped locked.
(iv) Check that valve caps are secured in position.
(v) Check rubber washers of the outlets and replace them if missing.
(vi) Check handwheel to ensure that they are not jammed, missing or broken.
(vii) Inspect the earthing connection and tighten it if necessary.
(viii) Check for damaged and any leakage of pipes, landing valves
(ix) Check the valve cabinets for damage.
(x) Any other inspection as instructed by the SO Rep.
In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.
LUP09/S44.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-14/30

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM
service and call-back service to the wet rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works
as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A33.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections, Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
Maintenance of wet rising mains shall include the requirements as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And
Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting)" including any subclauses
under it.
In addition, the following checks are also required :
(a) Monthly Tests
Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and Ancillary
Equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where
otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the
minimum items of work detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed by
the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on equipment not covered by the following
list but recommended by the manufacturers shall be included.
(i) Inspect all water pumps, and
(1) Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary.
(2) Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary.
(3) Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and drive
motors, and rectify as necessary.
(4) Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary.
(5) Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and test
valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device and
simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump
running for a period of at least five (5) minutes and verify the operation of the relief
valve.
(6) Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm.
(7) Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters.
(8) Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening the
test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water tanks.
Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.
LUP09/S44.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-15/30

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT'D)
(a) Monthly Tests (Cont'd)
(i) (Cont'd)
(9) Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby
changeover mechanism.
(10) Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst
the unit is running.
(ii) Inspect and lubricate with grease as necessary all electric motors.
(iii) Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus.
(iv) Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays.
(v) Inspect all water suction and storage tank and rains, clean and flush out the tank as
necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction
pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism.
Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of floatless
level control units.
(vi) Check and inspect breeching inlets.
(vii) Check and verify operation of water level indicators.
(viii) At the monthly inspection of control valves, gauge showing water pressure in the system
shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges
with an inspection gauge once a year.
(b) Quarterly Test
For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and maintenance
requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising
Main & Down-Comer (Fire Fighting)" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a)
"Monthly Tests" above.
In addition, provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below:
(i) Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation.
(ii) Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc.
(iii) Replace any broken or faulty equipment as may be required.
(iv) Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the log
book.
(v) Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other
maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats,
bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined for
rust, corrosion, crack, etc.
(vi) The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with
fresh water again.
(vii) Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance between
phase to phase and phase to earth.
LUP09/S44.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-16/30
44.8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
For routine tests and inspection during the Defects Liability Period, all parts, Plant and equipment
comprising the complete rising main system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with
the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A32 and A33.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspection. Any
defects detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the routine inspection upon Substantial
44.9 CALL-BACK SERVICE
During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent
calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from Essential
Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-
back service can be met.
(c) carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system.
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out
the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
44.10 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS AND LEAKAGES
During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defects and Leakages found in the system and
installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A30. Whenever
required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of defect of the system and
equipment.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and
repair of rising main systems and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair
of rising main systems.
LUP09/S44.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-17/30
44.11 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO

ISSUANCE OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall be
rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects Liability
Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection
by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification of
Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep
shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
44.12 LOG BOOK
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record
format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.13 CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Defects Liability Period :
(a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(b) All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.
(c) All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(d) All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.
(e) All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
LUP09/S44.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-18/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 1
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in the
Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any
materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall
prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
WET RISING MAIN
1. WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS

(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and
all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor).
Transfer Pump Transfer Pump

Particulars Electrical Diesel Driven
Electrical Diesel Driven
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Fig. No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal
Characteristics (A)
Flow rate (l/min.)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency (%)
Characteristics (B)
Flow rate (l/min.)
KW
Efficiency (%)
Characteristic (C)
Flow rate (l/min.)
KW
Efficiency (%)
LUP09/S44.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-19/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 2
1. WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (CONT'D)
Transfer Pump Transfer Pump

Particulars Electrical Diesel Driven
Electrical Diesel Driven
Pump R.P.M.
Churning Pressure (bar)
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/O/Hz)
Full load current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Insulation Class
Enclosure Protection Class
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Static Deflection (mm)
Type of Model No.
Motor Starters
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Fig. No.
Protecting Devices
Total Operating Wt of
Pumpsets (kg)
LUP09/S44.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-20/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 3
2. JOCKEY PUMSETS
(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed
and all equipment, etc offered by the Contractor)
Equipment No.
Jockey Pump
Particulars
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Fig. No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Flow rate (l/min.)
KW
Efficiency
Pump R.P.M.
Type of shaft seal
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/O/Hz)
Full Load Current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Make/Type/Model
Static Deflection (mm)
Total Operating Wt. of Pumpsets (kg)
LUP09/S44.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-21/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 4
3. PIPEWORK (N.B. ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE INDICATED)
Black Galvanized Stainless Ductile Steel Pipes

Steel Steel Steel Iron to
Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe BS 3601
Manufacturer
Local Supplier
Country of Origin
Grade (Thickness)
BS Specification
Manufacturer of Pipe Fittings
4. VALVES, GAUGES & PIPE FITTINGS
Material
Material
of Other
Make Type Model of
Valve Information
Valve
Body
Water Level Gauges NA NA
Water Motor Alarms c/w alarm

NA NA
gongs and water turbines
Fire Brigade Breeching Inlet NA NA
Isolating Gate Valves
Alarm Valves
Non-return Valves
Strainers
Drain Cocks
Gauge Cocks
Combined Drain & Test Valves
Automatic Air Vents
Anti-Vibration Couplings NA NA
Ball Float Valves
Pressure Gauges NA NA
Globe Valve
Pressure Relief Valve
Vortex Inhibitor
LUP09/S44.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-22/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 5
5. CONTROL PANELS
Country of Local
Item Manufacturer
Origin Supplier
Wet Rising Main Pump Control Panel
Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control Panel
Jockey Pump Control Panel
6. D.C. POWER SUPPLY UNITS
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No./Model
Output Voltage Per Cell Volt
No. of Cell
Operating Voltage Volt
Ampere Hour for 10-hour Rating AH
Dimension mm
Battery Chargers
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No.
Output Voltage Range Volt
Charging Rate - Normal Amp

- Maximum Amp
LUP09/S44.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-23/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 6
7. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN CONTROL PANELS
Rated Other
Make Type Model
Voltage Information
Contactors
Ammeters
Voltmeters
Push Buttons
Key Switches
Selector Switches
MCB
Timers
Relays
Indicating Lamps
(transformer operated)
Terminal Boards
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Current Transformers
HRC Fuses
Isolating Switches
MCCB
Earth Leakage Relay
8. ELECTRICAL WIRING & ACCESSORIES
Country of
Manufacturer Local Agent
Origin
PVC Cable & Jointing Accessories
Conduit & Accessories
Cable Trunking & Accessories
Cable Tray & Accessories
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit
LUP09/S44.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-24/30
APPENDIX A30
Page 7
9. PIPE SPRING HANGER
Make, Type & Model
Size (mm)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Static Deflection (mm)
Material of Spring
Spring Constant (kg/m)
10. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR
Make, Type & Model
Material
Maximum Working Pressure/Temperature
Maximum Vacuum (mm Hg)
Minimum burst pressure (Kpa)
Allowable elongation/compression/transverse movement (mm)
Allowable Angular Movement
11. DIRECT READING WATER FLOW METER
Make/Type/Model
Operation water flow range (1/min)
Accuracy (%)
LUP09/S44.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-25/30
APPENDIX A31
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM

Clause 44.5.1 "Testing on Rising Main System "
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet riser
system.
Building Data
Suction Tank size : X X M Transfer Tank size : X X M
Total Head : (m) Total Head : (m)
Required pumping capacity (l/s) Required pumping capacity (l/s)
Jockey Fire Fire Transfer Transfer

Motor Data
Pump 1 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand
Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC or
other acceptable by FSSD)
Model
Serial No.
Rated Output (KW)
Volt/Phase/Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (RPM)
Rated Current (A)

Pump Data
Pump 1 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand
Model

Serial No.
Impeller Diameter (mm)
Specified capacity (l/s)
LUP09/S44.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-26/30
APPENDIX A31
Page 2

system.
Control Panel Data

Starter Brand 11-Pin Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Starter Change over Brand 8-Pin Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Starter MCB Brand Latching Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Overload Protector Brand Time Switch Brand
Model Model
Setting Type
Fitting Size Brand Type
Coupling
Rubber expansion joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Motorize valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
LUP09/S44.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-27/30
APPENDIX A31
Page 3

system.
Limit switch
Landing valve
Breeching Inlet

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Starting/Changeover Current (A)
Running Current (A) R

Pump Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by :
1) HTO / TO ( ) Date
2) HTO / TO ( )
Checked & Verified by :

D Eng ( ) Date
LUP09/S44.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-28/30
APPENDIX A32
BI-YEARLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

DOWN-COMER / DRYRISER SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Clause 44.6 "Servicing and Maintenance During Defects Liability Period"
To : Head ( Branch Office )
Block No. : Location :
Items Checked Remedial Action /Date
1. Pressure test for 2 hours *
2. 100mm Gate Valve (for down-comer)
3. 100mm Check Valve (for down-comer)

4. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe
(for down-comer)
5. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition (open and shut position)
6. Check landing valve handle secure
with strapper and cap in position
7. Check earthing terminal connection
8. Check Breeching inlets condition
9. Additional requirements from FSSD
Other Comments
# : Delete as necessary Signature :

a : Check and found in order
X : To rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /
* : Reading by measuring instrument
+ : Test to be done Yearly Name of Contractor :
Acknowledge By :
HTO/TO/HTN/TN(H&M) ( ) Date
LUP09/S44.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-29/30
APPENDIX A33
Page 1
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Block No. : Pump Room Location (s) :
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Monthly/Quarterly
1. General Condition of Pumproom
2. Correct Setting of Time Switch

3. Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto"
position
4. Power supply selector switch in "On"
position
6. Alarm bell and bulb
7. Contractors and Relays
8. Check and tighten control panel wiring +
9. Suction Tank electrode and control module

Transfer Transfer
10(i). Transfer Pump
Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
Rated current : A R A A
Motor Output : KW Y A A
B A A
10(ii). Fire Pump Fire Pumpset 1 Fire Pumpset 2
Rated current : A R A A
Motor Output : KW Y A A
B A A
10(iii). Jockey Pump Jockey Pumpset 1
Rated current : A R A
Motor Output : KW Y A
B A
11. Pump Running Pressure Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
Transfer Pump (bar) (bar)
Fire pump (bar) (bar)
Jockey Pump (bar)
LUP09/S44.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 44-30/30
APPENDIX A33
Page 2
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Fire Fire Transfer Transfer
Jockey
12. Pump / Motor Condition Pumpset Pumpset Pumpset Pumpset
Pump
1 2 1 2
Motor insulation test +
Motor Running condition
Pump mechanical seal
Pump Lubrication Oil Level
(if applicable)
13. Alignment of Couplings
14. Ball Float Valve condition Tank 1 Tank 2
Transfer tank
Fire tank
19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe+
20. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition +
21. Check Breeching inlets condition
22. Update Log Book
23. Additional requirements from FSSD
Other Comments

a: Check and found in order
X: To rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /
+ Test to be done quarterly Name of Contractor :
Acknowledge By :
SECTION 45/...
LUP09/S44.DOC(30)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-1/29
SECTION 45
45.0 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
45.1 DEFINITIONS
"Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the Electricity
Act (Cap 89A).
45.2 SCOPE OF WORK
45.2.1 General
The fire protection installation work under this Contract shall include the provision, installation, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation.
Unless otherwise specified, work shall include :
(a) Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset)
(b) Portable fire extinguishers, where applicable.
(c) Fire hydrants.
Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with direct
water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions specified
in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water supply from
PUB mains, pumpset and its associated work including suction tanks and pressure tanks shall not be
included in the scope of work for the purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under
it.
The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall be
intended to convey the scope of the work, indicate the general arrangement of plant, piping, and the like,
and show approximate sizes of plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as
practicable in laying out work and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure the best possible
installation in the available space.
Where work is specified but the exact location of plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the
approval of the SO Rep prior to installation.
It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless specified
otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation,
materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the
Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data, rates and prices as produced in Appendix A34.
45.2.2 Regulations and Codes of Practice
Provide and install the fire hose reel system in accordance with BS 5306 : Part 1, EN671.1, SS CP
29 and the requirements of local governing authorities such as Building Control Authority (BCA), FSSD
and PUB.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered with the BCA under the registration head
of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) and shall be responsible for all applications to and
arrangements with the local authorities such as PUB and FSSD representatives for the necessary
completion, testing and commissioning of the installation for each building under the Works and all costs
in connection therewith shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards, of
the relevant authorities, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
LUP09/S45.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-2/29
45.2.3 Weatherproof and Flameproof Designs
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is sited in an area where flammable vapour of
explosive gas is liable to occur, such apparatus shall be of flameproof construction.
45.2.4 Provision of Openings for Electrical Wirings
Provide structural openings through walls, floor and roof for the installation of pipework and electrical
wiring. Make good such openings with non-combustible and waterproof material to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep. All costs connected with the hacking and making good of structural openings shall be deemed to
have been included in the Contract Sum.
45.2.5 Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel
paint.
45.2.6 Approval of Drawings and Details of Pumping Plant
Where applicable, submit to the SO Rep for approval two (2) sets of the following document :
(a) Detailed proposal complete with necessary drawings.
(b) Technical specifications and samples (if appropriate) of all equipment employed in the installation.
(c) Electrical wiring diagram of the whole installation.
(d) Technical Specifications and Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate point/s of
performance.
(e) Fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :
(i) Proposed water levels in the suction tank of which the pump shall start and stop operation.
(ii) Position of switchboard.
(iii) Piping / Water tank layout.
(iv) Sizes of all pipes & fittings.
(v) Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings.
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep but additional
approval shall be sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing
which the whole installation may not be accepted by the SO Rep. The approval of the proposal shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility should the plant or any of its parts proved inadequate in
any aspect.
LUP09/S45.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-3/29
45.2.7 Quality of Goods and Materials
The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and the
relevant Authorities. No works shall commence until samples of the materials have been approved by the
SO Rep. However, if the installed materials are subsequently found to be of inferior quality to that of the
samples submitted, or if the materials proved to be unsuitable for use, or if the materials failed to perform
to the requirement specified in the Specifications, the approval of the samples shall be withdrawn with
immediate effect. In this respect, the Contractor shall allow for up to 2 tests for each type of fittings to be
carried out by a laboratory accredited by Singapore Accreditation Council (SAC) as and when requested
by the SO Rep. The sample shall be selected at random at the discretion of the SO Rep. The Contractor
shall make good all Defects and replace all inferior or defective materials. The SO Rep shall exercise his
right to impose charges for irregularities committed if the materials supplied are inferior or different from
the samples approved.
Where products are manufactured under PSB's Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not be
necessary unless otherwise specified Prior to the installation of hose reels at the site, where corrosion
test is not conducted under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, the Contractor shall arrange to submit a
sample under the same batch to PSB for the test. The test report shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
45.3 FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM
45.3.1 General
(a) Installation
Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level.
Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose
reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm
high. Hose reel cabinet and recesses shall be painted red.
Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open approximately
180 degree and they shall not obstruct the running out of hose in either direction. The door shall
have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The Contractor shall provide five
sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within a service duct, a signplate with
words `FIRE HOSE REEL' in block letters of at least 50mm height shall be displayed on the door.
(b) Rubber Hose
The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure of
7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type.
The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with
textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a single
rayon braid or double braid of cotton.
The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length of
hose.
Sample and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose is manufactured according to the
requirements of BS 3169/EN 694.
(c) Stop-valve
Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An indication
of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of the valve, and
the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a directional arrow
indicating the direction of flow through the valve.
LUP09/S45.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-4/29
45.3.1 General (Cont'd)
(d) Shut-Off Nozzle
Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements :
(i) The assembly shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant metallic material or other
materials approved under EN 671-1.
(ii) In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the attachment of the
assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until the
enclosure has been opened.
(iii) The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the
valve.
(iv) The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface.
(v) The internal diameter of the nozzle shall be 6.35mm.
45.3.2 Hose Reel
(a) General
The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an
overall diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous
outer rim and shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red.
The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When
the full length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of
the side plates of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the
coiled hose of any point.
The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner
that the hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers.
The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without
external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the
water supply to the hose including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of non-
ferrous material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service
ducts, they shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position
shall be approved by the SO Rep. The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum
shall be galvanised ear clips.
(b) Markings
Mark every hose reel with the following information :
(i) The manufacturer's name, trade name or mark.
(ii) Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following :
(1) Turn on stop valve
(2) Run out hose
(3) Turn on water at nozzle
(4) The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel
(5) The year of manufacture
(6) The test pressure in Bar
All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters
easily readable. In addition, the operating instructions “For Emergency Only: Break glass to open
the door from inside” and “TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE
HOSE” shall be of 12mm height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no
cabinet, the same notice shall be provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall
adjacent to the reel.
LUP09/S45.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-5/29
45.3.2 Hose Reel (Cont'd)
(c) Tests
The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of
13.8 bars (200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the
SO Rep before delivery of hose reels to the Site on request by SO Rep.
45.3.3 Pumpset
(a) Hose reel Pumpset
The hose reel pumpset shall consist of two (2) sets of fire pumpsets, one duty and one standby to
the approval of the SO Rep. Pumpsets shall be of centrifugal multistage vertical pumps.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, single stage centrifugal end suction pumps shall be used
where applicable. The pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and mechanical seals and shall be
driven through flexible couplings by electric motors with speed of not more than 3000 rpm. Each
pump shall be capable of providing a flow of water of at least 0.8 litres per second in the rising
main.
Multistage vertical pumps shall have stainless steel outer sleeve and the suction/discharge casing
shall be of cast iron. The pump impeller shall be of either stainless steel or bronze.
Each pump shall also be capable of being started or stopped manually. The standby pump shall
be so arranged that it will operate automatically on failure of the duty pump. The pumpsets shall be
able to withstand 20 times start/stop per hour.
Provide each pump with a ball valve and flexible connection at both the suction and discharge
ends, a spring loaded check valve at the discharge end and a strainer at the suction end. The
suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Screwed suction and discharge connections
shall have flange adaptors.
Provide pressure gauges at the main discharge pipe. The gauge shall have a range of at least
twice the rated working pressure of the pump.
All pumps shall be automatically primed at all times. This shall be activated if the pumps are sited
so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the
centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, provide separate priming tanks with foot valves
for each pump.
Submit to the SO Rep for approval the characteristic performance curves of the pumps offered.
The efficiency of the pumpset shall not be less than 50% at the operating conditions.
Mark each pump conspicuously and permanently with letter "P1" or "P2" to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
Provide and install all the pipework and accessories connecting the pumpsets to the suction tank
and hose reel riser.
Provide spring type vibration isolation mounting for each pump to ensure minimal vibration
transmission to the building structure.
(b) Hose Reel Pumps Controls
Provide, install, connect and test all necessary starting and control equipment.
Enclose all such equipment in a front connected wall mounted and manufactured from electro-
galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness IP 54 cubicle with full locking hinged door.
The cubicle shall be painted in accordance with sub-clause 45.3.6(h)(iv) "Painting".
LUP09/S45.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-6/29
45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd)
(b) Hose reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd)
The sequence of operation of the hose reel pumps shall be as follows :
(i) The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located in
the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static pressure in
the pipe below a predetermined value.
(ii) If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the
duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in pressure
shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure switch,
which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby pump
shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve of the
pump.
(iii) As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there
is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this
preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby pump
shall be switched off respectively.
After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by the use of
an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long period. Provide a
manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump.
Provide a 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial time switch to start the pumps running for a pre-set duration of
time weekly. At a pre-set time of each week, the time switch shall energise the coil of a solenoid
valve for a pre-set period of time. The solenoid valve shall be located in a by-pass pipe connecting
the main discharge line with both the suction tanks. As the solenoid valve is opened, water shall
be forced to flow back to the water tanks by the system pressure which will then reduce
progressively. This drop in system pressure shall be sensed by the pressure switch which shall
then start the duty pump and the standby pump.
Each pump shall be activated after the other when the solenoid valve is opened at two different
pre-set times on the time switch. Provide a globe valve to throttle excessive pressure upstream of
the solenoid valve.
Install a ball stop valve to enable manual test run of the pumpsets and a pressure relief valve to
avoid excessive build-up of system pressure in parallel with the solenoid valve.
Use the third pressure switch installed next to the above two pressure switches to initiate an
audible and visual alarm in the event that the normal pressure in the pipe falls to 1 bar.
The controller shall be fully wired and mounted within the cubicle requiring only incoming supply,
necessary control and alarm connections. The following starting and control equipment shall be
incorporated in the cubicle :
(i) 1 no. ON/OFF isolating switch for incoming.

(ii) 1 no. MCB unit for incoming.
(iii) 2 sets ON/OFF isolators, each completed with MCB unit for starters.
(iv) 2 nos. direct on line starters.
(v) 2 nos. thermal overload relays with ambient temperature compensation.
(vi) 1 no. rotary selector switch for AUTO/MANUAL selection.
(vii) 1 no. pump selector switch.
(viii) 2 sets START/STOP button switch for the starters.
(ix) 8 nos. MCB units for control circuits.
(x) 1 no. automatic change over relay (100% continuous rating).
(xi) 2 nos. relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.
(xii) 1 set of cancel alarm pushbutton and cancel alarm relay.
(xiii) Relays to control the pumpsets.
(xiv) 1 no. water tank low level warning light.
(xv) 1 no. power supply on light.
(xvi) 2 nos. pump "RUN" indicating lights.
(xvii) 2 nos. pump "TRIP" indicating lights.
(xviii) 1 no. low pressure warning light.
LUP09/S45.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-7/29
45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd)
(b) Hose reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd)
(xix) 1 no. 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch to control the weekly running of the pumpsets.
(xx) Voltage-free contacts to relay signal to remote fire indicator board and initiate a fire alarm
when flow switch is actuated.
(xxi) 2 nos. relay for lamp and bell test.
(xxii) 1 no. pushbutton for lamp and bell test.
(xxiii) 1 no. 230V/24V AC transformer.
(xxiv) Terminal block for connection to remote equipment.
Submit the control circuit diagram for approval before installation. Provide the pressure switch
settings on a 240 by 150mm perspex sheet mounted by self-adhesive tape. The details and
locations shall be approved by the SO Rep.
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings
(a) Scope
This section sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general for the
piping system for the hose reel system.
(b) General
Before delivery to Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust. Reject
old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On Site, all pipes shall be again checked and
thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to installation.
Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the pipe
and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings shall
not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.
(c) Materials
Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from
Defects that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict
Pipes shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of
pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the pipe
to the finished surfaced of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm.
Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of
capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm and
longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water pipes,
fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards and requirements stipulated by PUB.
Ductile iron cement lined pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes
shall comply with SS17.
Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall be
made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means of
flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all
supports and flanged connections.
Flanges shall be raise face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned, and
shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing
compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as those within
concrete slabs or below ground.
LUP09/S45.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-8/29
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings
(d) Valves
All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the relevant
British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered.
Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be
operated by chain mechanism.
Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of flanged type. All valves shall be located
in accessible positions.
Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room shall
be of ball stop valves complying with the standards and requirements stipulated by PUB.
Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of brass/bronze
with female screwed connections.
Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron or
ductile iron type.
Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these
valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate silently
on reversal of water flow.
Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall
be brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing valve body
from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any dirt and debris.
The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz.
(e) Strainers
Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so
that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system
cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer.
(f) Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches And Flow Switches
Pressure gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for
pipe mounting and be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of the
needles. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780 Part 2.
Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and be calibrated in m-bar. Select suitable
gauges for mid-range indications at normal working pressure and the maximum measurable
pressure shall be twice the maximum working pressure.
Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar for a maximum scale value
of 10 bars, not exceeding 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of 16 bars, and not exceeding 1.0 bar
for a maximum scale values in excess of 16 bars.
Pressure switches shall comply with BS 6134 and shall be of automatic reset type. Install pressure
gauge and pressure switches near to the pressure tanks. The enclosures of the pressure switches
shall be of water tight IP 65 construction.
Pressure switches shall be suitable for conduit construction and with terminal block for wire
connection. Power supply for the pressure switches shall be 24V AC 50 Hz.
Failure of pressurized components of the pressure switches shall not result in a build up of
pressure within the enclosure.
The parts in contact with water for the pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be brass,
stainless steel or other approved corrosion resistant materials.
The pressure switch shall have adjustable and independent high and low pressure settings.
LUP09/S45.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-9/29
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)
(g) Pressure Tanks
Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to
operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser
pressurized at any time.
The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or Standard
of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor shall furnish
the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design and construction
of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
The pressure tanks shall be of vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy duty
vinyl or butyl material.
The system shall consist of two numbers of interconnected pressure tanks. The capacity of each
tank shall not be less than 50 litres.
The pump shall be started automatically by a pressure switch to recharge the pressure tanks in
response to a drop of storage pressure below a pre-set value according to operating conditions.
The pump shall be stopped automatically when the required storage pressure has been reached in
the pressure tanks.
Provide each pressure tank with safety relief valve.
Technical details including the manufacturer , specification and pressure setting shall be labelled
on metal or plastic plate attached to each of the tank.
(h) Vibration Isolation Connectors
All pipe connections to pumpsets and any equipment subjected to vibration shall be carried out by
means of flexible neoprene connectors.
Unless specifically permitted by the SO Rep, rigid connections between pipelines and equipment
shall be rejected.
Use neoprene or spring hangers of approved manufacturer for supporting pump delivery and return
mains.
(i) Pipe Supports And Fittings
Support all pipework by pipe hangers and supports. Unless otherwise stated, all pipe hangers and
supports shall be of mild steel adjustable for height.
Vertical pipe risers penetrating through floor slab shall be supported to each floor by clamp or
collars. All vertical pipe risers shall have foot elbows or concrete block supports at their lowest
point.
The spacing of fixings of pipe supports shall not exceed the following :
Maximum Spacing
Material of Pipe Diameter of Pipe (mm) Horizontal Vertical
(m) (m)
Galvanized Steel Pipe 10 - 15 1.75 2.5
20 - 25 2.5 3.0
32 2.75 3.0
40 - 50 3.0 3.5
65 - 80 3.5 4.5
Ductile Iron Pipe 75 - 100 2.75 2.75
Stainless Steel Pipe 10 - 15 1.75 2.5
20 - 25 2.5 3.0
32 2.75 3.0
40 - 50 3.0 3.5
65 - 80 3.5 4.5
Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be
secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.
LUP09/S45.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-10/29
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)
(j) Pipework, Testing And Cleaning
All pipework shall be flushed with clean water before final topping up and putting into service.
All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bars or two times the working pressure whichever
is the greater before lagging or putting into service. The test pressure shall be maintained for a
minimum duration of 24 hours.
45.3.5 Suction Tanks
(a) General
Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel installation.
Lay a separate line from the PUB’s bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the
fire hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUB’s water pressure is not required. The line shall
serve the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check
valves assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings.
The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than 1100
litres. The effective water capacity shall be labelled as instructed by the SO Rep.
The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel (AISI Grade 316)
pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be correspondingly aligned.
Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule
20S.
Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows :
(i) 1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB's bulk meter;
(ii) 1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump;
(iii) 1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe;
(iv) 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe;
(v) 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected
to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above.
(vi) 1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at
2nd storey and above; and
(vii) 1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow end
and covered by mosquito netting.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes.
(b) Level Control
(i) Ball Float Valve
Approved 50mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted
directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in
the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN per m2 and shall be approved by the
PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal valve
shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate shall be of gun metal with winged
guide and links. The body shall be of cast iron with bronze lines and gun metal seal ring
and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with approved rating.
LUP09/S45.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-11/29
45.3.5 Suction Tanks (Cont'd)
(b) Level Control (Cont'd)
(ii) Floatless Level Control Relay Units
Connect floatless level control electrodes mounted on each suction tank directly to the relay
units mounted on the wall beside the tank.
Arrange floatless level control electrodes to stop the pumpset at pre-determined low level.
Use a floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank to
provide over-riding control of pressure switches such that at a pre-set low water level in the
suction tank, the pressure switches shall not start the pump. At that low water level, even a
pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit.
The floatless level control electrodes shall also actuate a warning indicating light and an
alarm bell when the water level in the suction tank falls to a predetermined level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type.
Electrodes shall be stainless steel and provided with electrode separators.
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable to facilitate
maintenance and shall be installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Run the wiring in conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and
keep it as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same
conduit as the power supply wiring.
(c) Alarm And Emergency Device
Install alarm device to be turned-on by the floatless lever control relay unit which shall be activated
when low water level in the suction tanks and/or low pressure relay and/or thermal overload relays
for the pump motors are encountered. This alarm device shall be in the form of an alarm bell
placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the pumproom and
near the entrance or other location as directed by the SO Rep. The bell shall be weatherproof and
of heavy duty type.
The alarm bell shall give a distinctive sound different from that of any fire alarm sounder and the
audible fault alarm at the fire indicator board. Provide a pushbutton to cancel the alarm bell.
The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
45.3.6 Power Supply
(a) General
The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating
current.
(b) Motors
The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F
insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating. Motor
type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before installation.
The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85 respectively
at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.
LUP09/S45.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-12/29
45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd)
(c) Motor Starters
The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type.
The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be
automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe.
Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient
compensated (-5°C to 50°C) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The
starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. The operating voltage of
the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the above
conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The
mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations.
Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters
shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override other
pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions.
(d) 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch
Use an approved type of time switch. Connect the time switch to control the coil of the solenoid
valve. Time switch shall be able to operate on 7-days basis with a minimum 24 hours reserve to
cater for temporary power failure. The time switch shall be capable of providing at least two on-off
operations per week.
Time switches shall incorporate a 7-day dial and a 2-hour dial with a shortest switch period of not
more than 3 minutes for the 2-hour dial. Provide ON/OF lever transfer switch for each time switch
to facilitate manual ON/OFF to override control without disturbing the preset schedule. The power
supply for the timer shall be 230V AC 50 Hz.
Provide time switch with a clear plastic front cover.
(e) Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent
self cleaning action.
Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65%
nominal volts.
Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common
panel as referred to previously shall be plug-in type.
Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be plug-in type where possible. Fixed relays are
acceptable if they are a design feature of the units.
Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive load.
Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and operating
currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall be easily
alterable.
(f) Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled
to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application. Pushbutton
bezels shall be black.
LUP09/S45.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-13/29
(f) Pushbuttons (Cont'd)
Employ the following colour codes :
Green - "START" or "ON"

Red - "STOP" or "OFF"
Black - Reset
(g) Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation
of service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication
shall be clearly visible from the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to
ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals;
soldered terminations shall be rejected.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green - "ON" status

Amber - "OFF" status
Red - "FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel
(i) Construction
Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The wall
mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near to the
entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured
from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid
construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof.
The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access to
that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent
cubicle.
Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all
incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be
permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door.
Instruments indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating
switches, etc shall be mounted directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such items firmly
in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the transformer
type.
Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be
opened with the handle in the ÒN' position.
Carry out the whole of the electrical work in compliance with SS CP 5 and subject to the
LUP09/S45.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-14/29
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)
(ii) Internal Wiring
The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units
and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance.
Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers on
the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure
door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated,
colour coded and numbered for identification.
Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables.
The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black
lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. The numbering shall
be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type
terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, connect only one wire
to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an
approved marking and numbering system.
Run all control circuit wirings separately from power circuit wiring and protect them by using
MCB units or fuses.
(iii) Labelling
Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed
steel screws or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte.
The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Submit
schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function.
Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number and
function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on
common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating.
(iv) Painting
After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats
of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red.
Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that
manufactured originally.
LUP09/S45.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-15/29
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)
(v) Wiring
The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5.
Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps : "Fire
hose reel pump supply - Do not switch off in case of fire".
Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and
control switchboard.
Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable
for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable
trunking.
The metal conduit shall be of heavy gauge, G.I. conduit (Class B), complying with BS
4568, free from internal roughness and burrs. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall
be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m
centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore butt
to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a
flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with
any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit and
steel work.
All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and
shall be earthed with matching standing copper link.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel
sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on
one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a
minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round headed
bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The copper shall be
tinned where it is bolted down.
Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with
insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain an
infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to the
machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the cables between
motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductor
shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP 5.
45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Provide and install portable fire extinguishers in locations as shown in the Drawings. Extinguishers for use
in all Pump Rooms, Ejector Pump rooms, Generator Rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with class B
and C fires for eg. CO2 Fire Extinguishers. Those for use in Utilities Centre, Centralised Refuse
Chambers, Consumer Switch Rooms, Lift Machine Rooms and similar nature services rooms shall be
appropriate for dealing with class A, B & C fires for eg. Type ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers in
accordance to CP 55. Provide and install each fire extinguisher complete with horn, wall bracket and
visual indicator (indicating whether the extinguisher has been used). Extinguishers equipped with non-
metallic horns, such as plastic or PVC horns, shall be used in location with energised electrical equipment
such as switch rooms. Metal horns shall not be used in location with energised electrical equipment. All
fire extinguishers’ location, quantity, rating, type and weight shall comply with SS 232, CP 55 and other
current codes and regulations and shall be approved for use by all relevant local authorities.
LUP09/S45.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-16/29
45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (CONT'D)
Good practice as recommended in BS 5306:Pt 3 and SS CP 55 shall be observed and implemented

where applicable.
Install fire extinguisher at a height of 1m above the floor level on the hangers/brackets supplied together
with the fire extinguisher. They shall be placed in a manner such that their operating instructions face
outward. The operating instructions shall be simple and shown clearly in pictorial form. Fire extinguisher
shall be embossed with 2 number of HDB logo not smaller than 30mm x 30mm on the external face of
every extinguisher. The logo shall be red and white. No stick-on logo shall be acceptable as a substitute.
House each fire extinguisher in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel case complete with front hinged door, 3mm
thick glass panel and handle master lock. The case shall be coated with 2 coats of red paint. Lettering
such as "FIRE" or "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" shall be eminently and permanently marked on the case and
shall be of approved sizes and colour. Provide each case with a master key placed inside a recess
covered by a front break glass and the recess shall be mounted on the front hinged door.
45.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
45.5.1 General
The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment date
and statement of completion of the whole works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be at least 2
months before the completion of the building work.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A35 and submit two copies to
the SO Rep one week before the testing of the System.
Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out below:
(a) Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds.
(b) Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate.
(c) All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.
The whole of the instruments, equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and
demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.
45.5.2 Test Records
The records shall include :
(a) date and time for inspection or test

(b) person carrying out the test
(c) test results noted
(d) any external factors significantly affecting the results
(e) follow-up actions required
(f) work carried out as a result of (e) above with date and result of re-test
45.5.3 Pipework
All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working
pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours. Allowable
pressure drop during 24 hours testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall not exceed 3%
of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.
LUP09/S45.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-17/29
45.5.4 Control Equipment
Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that
operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.
45.5.5 Pumps
Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the
required flow and head.
45.5.6 Performance Test
On Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two (2) copies of the
test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven (7) days notice to the SO
Rep to verify the test results on Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted and
regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the
work concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated to him on Site, the test shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the
Contractor's own cost and expense.
45.5.7 Electrical Commissioning Tests
Test the complete installation, both before and after the connection, to the requirements of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests at the Site in the presence of the SO Rep during
the whole of the period required for the tests.
All materials and equipment provided or installed which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once
by the Contractor without additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated at the
Contractor's own cost and expense.
Conduct all tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Provide all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the
tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Make accurate records of all tests and furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an
approved form. Two copies of such schedules and of each test certificate shall be required.
Make good any circuit or section of the installation failing to comply with the required standard for
acceptance at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
The site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the electrical installation where applicable,
shall be as follows :
(a) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires
(b) Continuity tests
(c) Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc
(d) Test operation of alarm devices
(e) Rotational tests on all motors
(f) Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before
and after connecting such apparatus to the supply
LUP09/S45.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-18/29
45.5.8 Hose Reel Tests
(a) Flushing Out
Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that
no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the
water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational.
(b) Procedure For Direct SPSL Mains Supplies
The most hydraulically remote reel shall provide a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at
least 0.4 litres per second.
(c) Procedure For Boosted Supplies
The most hydraulically remote reel shall provide a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of at
least 0.4 litres per second. Check and verify pump running alarm.
Repeat the test with simulated mechanical or electrical failure of the duty pump. Check and test
the ability of the standby pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required
outputs. Check and verify pump failure warning indicated on local control panel and remote fire
indicator board.
Test the various control features of the hose reel booster pump to verify that they function correctly.
(d) Putting Into Operational Readiness
When the tests have been satisfactorily completed, restore the system to its normal operating
state. Reels shall never be left under pressure and, where practicable, drain the hose prior to
returning it to the drum.
Restore the hose on the drum, pay particular attention to automatic hose reels to ensure that the
automatic valve is fully closed when the hose has been restored. Where an isolation valve has
been incorporated, close the isolation valve on completion of storage, and complete the nozzle
interlock, where fitted.
45.5.9 Final Drawings And Operating Manuals
On completion of the installation, provide three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit to the SO Rep three sets of as-
built prints Each of the prints shall be stamped “As-Built”.
Incorporate the following information where applicable :
(a) position of pump rooms

(b) routes of all hose reel risers and pipes
(c) piping and equipment arrangement inside the pump room
(d) schematic diagram of the hose reel booster pump hydraulic circuit showing the positions of each
valve, pressure switch, flow switch and hose reels. A copy of the schematic diagram in laminated
A2 size shall be hard mounted in the hose reels pump room
(e) locations of every hose reel and portable fire extinguisher
(f) schematic circuit diagram and single line diagram of the overall system wiring
(g) control circuit diagram of hose reel booster pump
(h) circuit diagram of the floatless level control relay units
LUP09/S45.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-19/29
45.6 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
service and call-back service to the Fire Protection System as specified hereunder, for a period of one
year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works as certified by the Superintending Office (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for
the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
45.6.1 General
During the Defects Liability Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all defects and
leakages found in the system/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in
Appendix A34 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by reasons of
defects in the system/equipment.
45.6.2 Workmanship and Materials
The service and maintenance work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the service, maintenance
and repair of pumping plants and fire protection systems of all types.
All materials to be provided in connection with such service and maintenance work shall be new and
unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.
45.6.3 Supervision
Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair work. This foreman shall be
thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping plants and fire
protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of pumping plants and fire protection system.
45.6.4 Servicing and Maintenance Schedule
For monthly tests and inspection, all parts, plant and equipment comprising the complete hose reel
pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the specifications and
check-list as set out in Appendix A36.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defects detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from the HDB's Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB's Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
The Contractor's foreman shall also sign on the log book provided by the Contractor in the pump room
after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for the monthly inspection shall include :
(i) General condition of pumproom

(ii) Correct setting of the time switch
(iii) Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
(iv) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(v) Control panel indicating lights
(vi) Alarm bell and bulb
(vii) Suction tank electrode and control module
(viii) Motor running current
(ix) Check valves
LUP09/S45.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-20/29
45.6.4 Servicing and Maintenance Schedule (Cont'd)
(x) Gate valves

(xi) Alignment couplings
(xii) Ball float valves
(xiii) Motor insulation
(xiv) Pump mechanical seal
(xv) Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
(xvi) Contactors and relays
(xvii) Hose reel
(xviii) Pressure and flow switches
45.6.5 Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24-hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be attended
to immediately upon notification by the Representative from HDB Essential Maintenance Service Centre
or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-
back service can be met.

(c) carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry out
the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the Contractor's
failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the
Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
45.6.6 Rectification of Defects prior to Issuance of Maintenance Certificate
One month before the expiry date of the Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for inspection
by the Representative from the HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of rectification
of Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and charges
imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
45.6.7 Log Book
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the record format
shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S45.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-21/29
45.6.8 Consumable Materials
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Defects Liability Period :
(a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(b) All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.
(c) All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(d) All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.
(e) All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
45.7 Fire Hydrants
Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of the
building lot. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and submission of plans to the Relevant
Authorities for approval. Where any part of the base design contravene with the code requirements, the
onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the design prior to submission to Relevant Authorities.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such
amendments. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall be responsible for the supervision of the
installation until the Certificate of Statutory Completion is obtained.
The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than 50 m
apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be measured up
to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply fully with the
requirements stated in SS CP 29: Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels.
Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts
shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete
plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each
hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground.
Fire hydrant mains shall be of heavy duty ductile iron with cement lining type conforming to BS 4772. The
hydrant mains routes and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and intended to indicate the
general runs and locations only. The exact routes and locations of the mains shall be determined at the
Site all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. Any mains that are routed in basement of building shall be in
protective enclosure. The protective enclosure to the mains shall have the same fire resistance as the
elements of structure of the building where the mains are located. The protective enclosure to the hydrant
mains shall be labelled with the word " HYDRANT MAIN " of minimum 50 mm height at suitable intervals.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for such
protective enclosures.
The fire hydrants shall be painted on the stem with a 100 mm yellow band, the lower edge of which is 300
mm from the ground.
The outlets shall be provided with protective standard caps of cast iron or other suitable material and
attached to the standpipe by stainless steel chains. The topmost part of the valve shall not exceed a depth
of 1000 mm from the ground level.
The water supply for the fire hydrant shall comply with the requirements stated in latest Code of Practice
for Fire Precautions in Buildings.
Valve pits shall be of adequate size, and readily accessible for inspection, operation, testing and
maintenance and removal of equipment contained therein. They shall be so constructed and arranged as
to properly protect the installed equipment from ground movement and accumulation of water as specified
in SS CP 29. For fire hydrants sited in roadways, care shall be taken that the pits and covers are capable
of bearing the heaviest vehicle that may use the road.
LUP09/S45.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-22/29
APPENDIX A34
LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for
information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the Specifications
shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the
minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more
comprehensive information wherever possible.
1. HOSE REEL BOOSTER PUMP
Make _____________________________________________
Country of origin _____________________________________________
Type _____________________________________________
Model _____________________________________________
No. of units _____________________________________________
Casing material _____________________________________________
Impeller material _____________________________________________
Shaft material _____________________________________________
Flow rate _____________________________________________
Head _____________________________________________
Speed (r.p.m.) _____________________________________________
Impeller diameter _____________________________________________
Motor rated output _____________________________________________
Motor make, type and model _____________________________________________
Voltage/Phase/Frequency _____________________________________________
Motor insulation class _____________________________________________
Line current at full load _____________________________________________
2. MOTOR STATER
Make, type and model _____________________________________________
Rating _____________________________________________
Overload release rating _____________________________________________
Approx. KW rating ___________ KW at ____________ V __________ Ph
Voltage/Phase ______________________________________________
LUP09/S45.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-23/29
APPENDIX A34
Page 2

(CONT'D)
3. FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT
Make ____________________________________________
Type ____________________________________________
Model ____________________________________________
4. PRESSURE TANK
Country of origin _____________________________________________
Make _____________________________________________
Type _____________________________________________
Model _____________________________________________
Capacity _____________________________________________
Operating pressure _____________________________________________
Maximum working pressure _____________________________________________
Casing material _____________________________________________
Diaphragm material _____________________________________________
Internal coating material _____________________________________________
5. RUBBER HOSE
Make _____________________________________________
Type _____________________________________________
Material _____________________________________________
Diameter (internal) _____________________________________________
Length _____________________________________________
Working pressure _____________________________________________
6. PRESSURE GAUGE
Make, Type & Model _____________________________________________
Range (Bar) _____________________________________________
Material in contact with water _____________________________________________
Enclosure Protection _____________________________________________
LUP09/S45.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-24/29
APPENDIX A34
Page 3

(CONT'D)
7. PRESSURE SWITCH
Make, Type & Model _____________________________________________
Range (Bar) _____________________________________________
Maximum working pressure (Bar) _____________________________________________
Upper limit (Bar) _____________________________________________
Material in contact with water _____________________________________________
Enclosure Protection _____________________________________________
Voltage/Frequency ______________________________________________
8. FLOW SWITCH
Make, type, model ____________________________________________
Rang (L/s) ____________________________________________
Maximum working pressure (bar) ____________________________________________
Material in contact with water ____________________________________________
Enclosure protection ____________________________________________
Voltage/frequency ____________________________________________
9. SOLENOID VALVE
Make, Type & Model _____________________________________________
Body material _____________________________________________
Valve seat material _____________________________________________
Stem material _____________________________________________
Maximum working pressure _____________________________________________
Test pressure (Bar) _____________________________________________
Uv value (MH/Bar) _____________________________________________
LUP09/S45.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-25/29
APPENDIX A34
Page 4

(CONT'D)
10. MISCELLANEOUS
MAKE TYPE MODEL
a. Gate valve _______________ _______________ _______________
b. Check valve _______________ _______________ _______________
c. Strainer _______________ _______________ _______________
d. Floatless level control

relay unit _______________ _______________ _______________
e. Globe valve _______________ _______________ _______________
f. Selector switch _______________ _______________ _______________
g. Automatic changeover
relay _______________ _______________ _______________
h. Time switch _______________ _______________ _______________
i. Automatic air vent _______________ _______________ _______________
j. Ball float valve _______________ _______________ _______________
k. Shut-off nozzle _______________ _______________ _______________
l. Flexible coupling _______________ _______________ _______________
m. Pipe spring hanger _______________ _______________ _______________
n. Ball stop valve _______________ _______________ _______________
o. Alarm bell _______________ _______________ _______________
p. Auxiliary relay _______________ _______________ _______________
q. Pressure relief valve _______________ _______________ _______________
r. Indicator lamp _______________ _______________ _______________
s. Pipe _______________ _______________ _______________
___________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s
Date : ____________
LUP09/S45.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-26/29
APPENDIX A35
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM

Clause 45.5.1 "Testing of Hose Reel System Installation"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose reel
system.
Building Data
Suction Tank size : M
Suction Tank size : M
Total Head : (m)
Required pumping capacity (l/s)
Hose reel Hose reel Hose reel Hose reel

Motor Data Pump Data
Motor 1 Motor 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand Brand
Type (PSB and FM,UL,LPC
or other acceptable by
FSSD)
Model Model
Serial No. Serial No.
Rated Output (KW) Impeller Diameter (mm)
Volt/Phase/Frequency Specified capacity (l/s)
Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)
Rated Current (A)
Control Panel Data

Starter Brand 11-Pin Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Floatless level control Brand 8-Pin Relay Brand

Relay
Model Model
Type Type
Starter MCB Brand Latching Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Overload Protector Brand Time Switch Brand
Model Model
Setting Type
LUP09/S45.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-27/29
APPENDIX A35
Page 2

system.
Coupling
Rubber expansion joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Solenoid valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
Limit switch
PressureTank 1
Pressure Tank 2
Rubber Hose reel
LUP09/S45.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-28/29
APPENDIX A35
Page 3

system.

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Motor Hose reel Hose reel

Pump1 Pump1
Starting/Changeover Current (A)
Running Current (A) R
Pump Hose reel Hose reel

Pump1 Pump1
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by :
1) HTO / TO ( ) Date
2) HTO / TO ( )
Checked & Verified by :

DEng ( ) Date
LUP09/S45.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 45-29/29
APPENDIX A36
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT
ON HOSE REEL PUMPING SYSTEM DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Clause 45.6.4 "Servicing and Maintenance Schedule"

Block No. : Pump Room Location :
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Monthly
1 General Condition of Pumproom
2 Correct Setting of Time Switch
3 Auto/Manual Selector Switch in "Auto" Position
4 Power Supply Selector Switch in "on" Position
5 Control Panel indicating Lights
6 Alarm Bell and Bulb
7 Suction Tank Electrode and Control Module
8 Motor Running Current Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
Rated Current : A R * A * A
Motor Output : KW Y * A * A
B * A * A
9 Check Valves
10 Gate Valves
11 Ball Float Valves
12 Motor Insulation (Megaohms) * *
13 Pump Mechanical Seal
14 Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
15 Contactors and Relays
16 Hose Reel
17 Pressure and Flow Switches
18 Update Log Book

/ : Check and found in order
X : to rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC :
Acknowledge By :
SECTION 46/...
LUP09/S45.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-1/7
SECTION 46
46.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

AND EXISTING ELECTRICAL/TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS
AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
46.1 CHECKING OF EXISTING DEFECTS
Before commencing work at common area, the contractor shall carry out an inspection of the existing
electrical installation within the premises which could be affected by the works. Any Defect in the existing
electrical installations or electrical accessories which are outside the scope of the electrical works shall be
recorded by the contractor, and duly witnessed by the Superintending Officer's Representative and the
respective Town Council. The contractor shall take careful note that any faults or damages not proven to
be existing will be deemed to have arisen out of his works and are to be rectified within the scope of the
contract.
46.2 PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL HAZARD
The Contractor shall ensure that thorough measures are taken to prevent electrical hazards to the
Occupants of the building.
Adequate measures must be taken to prevent any exposed `live' parts, loosely mounted electrical points
and broken electrical fittings or accessories from endangering the occupants and the public during the
course of his works.
Wherever possible, all the temporary sitework supply cables shall be run in the buildings' service ducts.
Cables, other than those supplying power to portable equipment, shall be securely fixed so as not to
cause hazards to persons in the work area. All cables are to be installed without obstruction to the use of
passageways, walkways, stairs and the like.
The contractor shall ensure that the existing electrical installations at any parts of the apartment block
affected by his work, are safe for use. Otherwise, proper barriers and signs shall be put up to warn the
occupants against touching or using them. The above measures are applicable both during and after
working hours.
46.3 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY FOR SITEWORK
The Contractor shall arrange to obtain electricity supply directly from SPSL for his construction/installation
work. As far as possible, the use of generators for site works shall be avoided. The contractor is strictly
not allowed to tap electrical supply from any of the apartment's metered supply or from any of the
building's metered supply during the course of work.
46.4 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TO THE DWELLING UNITS,

RENTAL PREMISES AND EXISTING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
46.4.1 Interruption of Supply
The Contractor shall ensure that the electricity supply to the dwelling units, rental premises, existing
installations such as lifts, water supply system and CATV equipment is maintained and not interrupted,
due to Contractor's work throughout the course of the Contract. Where interruption of electricity supply is
unavoidable, the Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the SO Rep and arrange to give sufficient
notice to the residents and occupants. In the event of non-compliance, the Employer shall exercise its
LUP09/S46.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-2/7
46.4.2 Shutdown of Electricity Supply
The Contractor shall obtain approval from the SO Rep and arrange to notify all Occupants of any
shutdown of electricity supply at least 7 days in advance. A schedule of the times for transferring over the
supply, showing the units affected and the time of disruption of the supply, shall be provided to the SO
Rep prior to carrying out the Works. In the event of non-compliance, the Employer shall exercise its rights
under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor. All fees
related to shutdown shall be included in the Contract.
46.5 EMPLOYMENT OF LICENSED ELECTRICAL WORKER
The Contractor shall station at Site during the progress of the Works an Licensed Electrical Worker who
shall be responsible for supervising the Works and shall be empowered to receive and act upon the
instructions given by the SO Rep. Any such instructions given to the Licensed Electrical Worker shall be
deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall also engage the service of a Licensed Electrical Worker of the appropriate grade
throughout the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of the proposed
commencement date for the building works prior to the actual commencement.
The Licensed Electrical Worker should be able to handle all aspects of electrical fault without the
assistance of the Employer's electrical engineer.
The duties of the Licensed Electrical Worker during normal working hours as well as during Public
Holidays/Sundays/after normal working hours, shall include but not be limited to the following :
(a) Attending to scheduled shutdown/re-energization of electrical installation in this Contract as

required; and
(b) Attending to interruptions of the electricity supply.
The Licensed Electrical Worker, together with the Contractor, shall inform the SO Rep on the works
required to be carried out to restore the electricity supply and the time required for the repairs to be
completed.
46.6 EXISTING ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION/

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
46.6.1 Protection of Existing Installations
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the existing electrical and lightning
protection system installations and ensure that they are safe and in operation until the new installations
are completed, commissioned and put into operation. Where the existing installations are already
damaged and not in good working order prior to the commencement of Works, the Contractor shall inform
the SO Rep and arrange for an inspection to have the nature of the damage or working conditions
recorded.
(a) Lighting
The Contractor shall ensure that the lighting to the common areas is maintained throughout the
course of the Works. Where the existing fittings are affected by the building works and the new
ones not yet installed and commissioned, temporary fittings, properly wired and secured, shall be
provided.
(b) Lightning Protection System
This Clause shall be read in conjunction with Section 49 "Lightning Protection" of the Standard
Specifications for Upgrading Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system of the building is in the form of a
closed loop and is electrically continuous down to the earthing system during the course of the
Works. Where the existing air termination network or the down conductors are in the way of the
building works and are required to be removed, temporary conductors shall be installed to maintain
the closed network and the connections to the earthing system.
LUP09/S46.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-3/7
46.6.1 Protection of Existing Installations (Cont'd)
(c) Temporary Earthing System
This Clause shall be read in conjunction with Clause 47.7 "Earthing System" and Section 49
"Lightning Protection" of the Standard Specifications for Upgrading Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that the earthing systems for the existing Main Switchboard and the
Lightning Protection System are intact and of the correct values at all times until they are replaced.
Where the existing earthing systems are affected by the Works, temporary earthing systems of the
appropriate earth values shall be provided.
The earthing systems shall not, at any times, be allowed to be disconnected from the electrical or
lightning protection system installations.
46.6.2 Replacement, Reinstatement and Removal of Existing Installations
(a) Replacement of Existing Mains/Sub-Mains Cables
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep and seek his approval prior to disrupting the supply during
the course of the replacement of the mains and sub-mains cables. The Contractor shall only
disconnect the existing cables after the new cables have been installed and energised. A schedule
of the times for transferring over of the supply from the existing to the new mains/submains,
showing the units affected and time of disruption of the supply, shall be provided to the SO Rep
prior to carrying out of the Works.
The transfer of the power supply shall be completed before 6 pm or any earlier times as directed by
the SO Rep.
(b) Reinstatement of Existing Installations
The Contractor shall at his own cost reinstate/reconnect any existing installations/fittings which are
to be retained, to the new main switchboard/ mains/sub-mains/final circuits to the requirements of
the SO’s Rep.
(c) Removal of Existing Electrical Installation
The Contractor shall at his own cost remove from site all existing Main Switchboards, meter
boards, wirings, lighting fittings, power points, switches, trunkings, lightning air termination network,
down conductors and all other accessories taken down. All electrical equipment removed shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall not be re-used.
46.7 RESERVED
46.8 REDERVED
46.9 METAL TRUNKING INSTALLATION IN SERVICE DUCTS
Further to Clause 47.4.1.2 "Metal Trunking - Installation", where the trunking is installed in riser ducts
made of lightweight panels, it shall be suitably supported on brackets at regular intervals not exceeding
1.5m apart. The bracket on which the trunking is to be mounted, and the mounting method, shall be such
as to be able to support the total weight of the trunking and all the cables/accessories installed.
LUP09/S46.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-4/7
46.10 WIRING/TRUNKING ROUTES
Further to Clause 47.4.1.2 "Metal Trunking - Installation", the Contractor shall make use of the existing
beam openings already available at Site when running the wirings and trunkings. Where the existing
openings are inadequate for the number of cables to be installed, or are not available along the proposed
cable/trunking routes, the trunking shall be installed wrapped round the beams. Factory manufactured
bends and accessories shall be used for wrapping around the beams, and they shall be designed to allow
for cable installation complying with the bending radii of cables as required under the Code of Practice CP
5.
No opening shall be hacked or drilled through beams/column without the prior approval of the SO Rep.
46.11 WORKS ON LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
For any works on the lightning protection system, they shall comply with the requirements of Section 49.
46.12 WORK IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
46.12.1 General
When Works are to be carried out in an existing substation, the Contractor shall take note that the
equipment in the switchroom and transformer room is `live' and serves the power requirements of the
neighbouring blocks. He shall take all precautions and exercise extreme care when working inside the
substation to prevent power disruptions arising from damage to the equipment and fatal injury to his
workers. All requirements imposed by Grid shall be strictly adhered to. The Contractor shall refer to
Appendix S(46)-1 for Grid's requirements on safety and precautionary measures.
46.12.2 Taking Over of Substation
The Contractor shall liaise with Grid and the SO Rep on the taking over of the substation for the addition
and alteration work and shall comply with the procedures and requirements set by Grid for working in an
existing `live' substation.
The Contractor shall arrange for the substation to be series-locked on taking over and shall be fully
responsible for the existing equipment within the substation thereafter and until the substation is handed
back. He shall undertake to control the movement of workers in the substation and prevent unauthorised
persons from entering. The substation shall be locked at all times whenever there is no work carried out
and during tea-break and after work has ceased for the day. It shall not be left open when unattended.
46.12.3 Provision of Deed of Indemnity
When required, the Contractor shall provide a Deed of Indemnity prior to the commencement of work in
the substation. The Deed of Indemnity shall be in accordance with the enclosed format in Appendix
S(46)-2 or the latest requirements of Grid.
46.12.4 Protection of Existing Equipment
The Contractor shall provide hoardings around the existing equipment to protect against mechanical
damage during the course of the Addition and Alteration works. The hoardings shall be constructed in
accordance with Grid's requirements.
46.13 MAKING GOOD
On Substantial Completion of the Works, all affected parts of the building, including internal flat units shall
be made good, patched up and painted or otherwise finished by the Contractor to match the existing
original adjacent works, at the Contractor's expenses all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S46.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-5/7
APPENDIX S(46)-1
APPENDIX TO CLAUSE 46.12

WORKS IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
Safety and Precaution Measures to be taken for Works perform within Substation Compounds :
(1) Contract workers should be reminded that all cables, wires, electrical device, equipment, apparatus and
installation are "LIVE" in the substation.
(2) No contract workers shall touch, remove or meddle with the parts and switches of the transformers,
switchboards, apparatus or any electrical equipment. Should physical contact is unavoidable, approval must
be obtained from the officer-in-charge.
(3) The Contractor is to ensure that the substation's main gate is locked at all times when performing work in the
substation. This is to prevent trespassers or unauthorised persons from entering the substation. The
Contractor should also check and ensure that the main gate is properly locked before leaving the substation.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure that all debris, rubbish and unwanted materials are disposed-off upon completion
of work.
(5) No materials, tools, plants, debris, etc are allowed to be placed near or lean against cables, wires, electrical
device, apparatus and installation.
(6) The Contractor is to put-up appropriate safeguards and protection, if necessary, to prevent damages to the
cables, wires, electrical device, equipment, apparatus and installation in the course of performing work.
(7) All contract workers must wear safety gears to prevent injuries.
(8) The Contractor should appoint a competent supervisor on site to ensure that the works are carried out safely
and within the designated work areas and compliance with the statutory requirements.
(9) The working hours allowable in the substation is 8.00 am to 5.00 pm.
LUP09/S46.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-6/7
APPENDIX S(46)-2
APPENDIX TO CLAUSE 46.12

WORKS IN EXISTING SUBSTATION
DEED OF INDEMNITY
THIS DEED OF INDEMNITY is made the day of 1992 between

, a Company incorporated in
Singapore and having its registered office at
, Singapore (hereinafter call "the Company") of the one part and the Power Grid
Ltd, a body corporate incorporated in the Republic of Singapore under an by virtue of the Public Utilities Act (Cap 211
1970 ed) and having its principal office at PUB Building, 111 Somerset Road, Singapore 238164 (hereinafter called
"Grid") of the other part.
WHEREAS :
(1) Grid is the owner of electrical installation in the 22 KV and 6.6 KV substation at
, Singapore (hereinafter called "the Substation").
(2) The Company has requested Grid to allow the Company, its agents or servants to enter the
Substation to carry out substation building modification work.
(3) The Company will undertake to indemnify Grid against all or any claims in any manner whatsoever
arising out of the entry.
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH that the Company covenants with Grid that :
(a) the Company will at all times hereinafter indemnify Grid in respect of any claims arising out of the
entry to the Substation by the Company, its agents or servants and against all liabilities for personal
injury (whether fatal or otherwise), loss, action, suits, proceedings, demands, costs and expenses
whatsoever which Grid may be required to pay to any third party in respect thereof.
(b) the Company undertakes to indemnify Grid for any damage howsoever caused to Grid's equipment
arising out of the said entry.
(c) the Company undertakes to indemnify Grid, its employees and agents from and against all liabilities
for personal injury (whether fatal or otherwise) arising out of the said entry by the Company, its
agents and servants.
LUP09/S46.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 46-7/7
APPENDIX S(46)-2
Page 2
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Company has hereunto set its hand and seal the day and year first above written.
THE COMMON SEAL of )

)
)
)
)
was hereunto affixed in the )
presence of : )
) DIRECTOR
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) DIRECTOR
)
SECTION 47/...
LUP09/S46.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-1/42
SECTION 47
47.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
47.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
47.1.1 Regulations
The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works, telephone
cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works. The electrical installation works shall
comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of the EMA, Government Authority, Statutory
Authorities, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the
complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the
following:
(a) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP.89A) including
any subsequent and amendments of the Regulations;
(b) Singapore Standards CP 5;
(c) Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid.
(d) All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice.
47.1.2 Interpretation Of Drawings
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system. The
omission from the Drawings or Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials or
specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor’s own cost and expense.
The Drawings and Specifications indicate the minimum requirements of the Employer only. Should the
requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules or
Regulations, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
Before Tender submission and prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall study the
Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be carried out as specified.
Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method of installation or site
adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with Statutory rules and
Regulations, he shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations within two weeks from the
commencement date of the Time for Completion and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before
proceeding with the modifications. The Contractor shall be deemed to include all costs and expenses for
complying with the requirements specified herein in the Contract Sum
47.1.3 Ambient Conditions
All equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other equipment or materials provided
under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore. The local climate is
tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8°C. The normal maximum shade temperature is 31°C and
the minimum shade temperature is 23.9°C.
The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.
47.1.4 Items Of Any One Classification
Any items, fittings or accessories which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the product of one
manufacturer and shall be used only for the service recommended by the manufacturer.
47.1.5 Incoming Service Cables
The incoming service cables will be provided by PowerGrid up to and terminated at the incoming service
panel provided by the Contractor.
For service entries where there are no switch rooms, the Contractor shall provide weatherproof enclosures
to house the incoming service terminations. The enclosures shall have hinged doors and facilities for
locking. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide concrete pedestal bases to the requirements of
SPSL/PowerGrid for mounting the weatherproof enclosures. The Contractor shall provide jumper or
consumer terminal service (CTS) cables connecting the Employer's installation to the weatherproof
enclosure.
LUP09/S47.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-2/42
47.1.5 Incoming Service Cables (Cont'd)
For service entries terminated directly at the main switch board inside a switch room, the Contractor shall
provide suitable cable end boxes for the termination.
47.1.6 Fixing Screws
All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer
control units etc shall be in brass.
47.1.7 Switch Rooms
Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting point
controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten
luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack( 2 hours), a glass framed Single Line
Diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible), first
aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber mat complying with SS 298 shall be provided. The rubber mat shall
be placed all around the floor standing switch board and indoor service electrical distribution box if any.
All switches, socket-outlets and consumer control units shall be metal clad.
All final circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall run in metal
conduit.
Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The
circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties.
All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic
fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of
cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum.
47.1.8 Power Supply Points Outside Switch Rooms And At Staircase Landings
A 15 Amp metal-clad switch socket-outlet housed in a metal enclosure shall be installed outside each
switchroom and at staircase landings or as indicated in the Drawings.
These power supply points shall be connected to a separate way of the consumer control unit in the
switchroom. The wiring to the power supply point shall run in metal conduit or PVC trunking.
The metal enclosure shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of 1.2mm thickness. It shall be
treated with a coat of finishing paint giving an overall paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. A
sample of the metal enclosure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation.
47.1.9 Testing Of Installation
47.1.9.1 General
The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on site after completion :
(a) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables

(b) Earthing System
(c) Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring
(d) Lightning Protection System
All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances, phasing
and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore Standard CP 5 or other
relevant Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no Standard/Code/Regulation is
applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the SO Rep.
For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows :
(a) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables shall be more than 10 Megaohms
(b) New underground cables shall be more than 5 Megaohms
(c) Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring shall be more than 1 Megaohms
LUP09/S47.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-3/42
The Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is complete and complies with the
requirements of the Specifications, EMA and SPSL. Test report shall be submitted to the consultant for
verification. Consultant or Employer reserve the right to conduct any audit testing if required.
lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any equipment, work or installation shall not relieve the
Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete equipment, and complete work and installation in
accordance with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections, skilled
and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests and any
audit testings. If site electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the Contractor
shall provide a portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be involved in the tests
shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor.
47.1.9.2 Application For HDB Testing
HDB reserve the right to conduct audit testings if necessary on main switchboards, risers, distribution
boards and telephone system etc including the earthing system. The Contractor shall test the installation
works and submit all the test reports to SO Rep/or Consultant for verification/endorsement before
submission to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB for audit testings. If any of the test reports and
relevant documents are not submitted to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB reserve the right not to
take over the block upon completion until the outstanding test reports and documents are submitted to
HDB and HDB is satisfied with the testings. The onus will be on the Contractor to submit all test reports
and relevant documents to Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB at least 14 days prior to any
scheduled handing over date of the block.
47.1.9.3 Re-Testing And Charges
Any omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements detected during the testing shall be
rectified by the Contractor within three (3) working days and verified by the Consultant. For re-testing of
residential unit, the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing with Technical Management (M&E) Unit, HDB
within three (3) working days. HDB reserves the right to impose administrative charges and demerit points
on the Contractor for failure to rectify any testing defects/faults or irregularities within the given time.
47.1.9.4 Application For SPSL Testing
For tests required to be conducted by the LEW or approved testers and witnessed by SPSL, the
Contractor shall engage such authorised licenced electrical worker of the appropriate grade to conduct the
tests in the latter case. The endorsed test reports shall be submitted to the SO Rep and SPSL in
conjunction with the application for turn-on of electricity supply. All costs relating to the above shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
LUP09/S47.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-4/42
47.1.10 Contractor's Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW)
The Contractor shall engage a LEW of the appropriate grade to assume the responsibility of the licensing
LEW and arrange to take over the existing electrical installation licencing of all switchrooms (including all
external Powergrid intake points) under the LUP Contract from the Town Council’s LEW. Prior to taking
over of the switchrooms and licensing, the Contractor and his appointed LEW shall arrange for joint
inspections of the switchrooms and distribution mains for all the residential blocks under the LUP with the
Town Council and the LEW. The Contractor shall record the following:
(i) All existing electrical works carried out by the Town Council and not under HDB LUP scope of work.
(ii) The existing conditions of all switchrooms and distribution mains inclusive of all defects.
The above records must be duly witnessed and signed by Town Council and the LEW.
Upon completion of the LUP work, the Contractor and his LEW shall carry out the following:
(i) Handover the same to Town Council and their LEW based on the agreed records.
(ii) Make good or rectify any defects outside the agreed records.
After the taking over, the Contractor’s LEW shall attend to any request for shutdown and turn-on to
facilitate work inside the switchrooms. The Contractor shall seek Employer’s approval for connection of
new electrical load to the existing main switchboards. The cost incurred by the contractor in carrying out
the above is deem to be included in the contract sum.
The Contractor's LEW shall conduct the electrical testing of the main/sub switchboards, risers,
distribution boards, unit's wiring and final subcircuit, etc including the earthling system and protective
Plant and equipment setting/operation. The Contractor shall submit the complete set of test reports for
the electrical installation in each block to the SO Rep at least one week before the handing over
inspection for the block. The test reports shall indicate the test results for every circuit installed and
shall be endorsed by his LEW. After the Works have been successfully tested, the Contractor's LEW
shall endorse relevant parts of the certificate of compliance and other forms and submit to SPSL. The
LEW shall also arrange for the installation of meters.
The Contractor and his LEW shall be responsible for the electrical installation until the handing over of
the Works to the Employer or Town Council. The LEW can transfer the electrical installation licence
back to Town Council after handover.
All costs and expenses incurred by the Contractor and his LEW for submissions to SPSL, endorsement,
shutdown and turn-on and EMA Licencing for the electrical installations including the Licence Fees shall be
47.1.11 Wiring/Trunking Routes And Position Of

Electrical Equipment/Accessories And Fittings
The wiring/trunking routes indicated in the Drawings and the positions of electrical equipment/accessories
and fittings indicated in the Drawings are meant to serve as a guide only.
The actual routes or positions shall be determined on site subject to the approval of the SO Rep. There
shall be no variations or adjustments to the contract sum arising from the selection of a more suitable
route or position which might differ from those indicated in the drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed
to have allowed for all costs and expenses for complying with these provisions specified herein.
47.1.12 Segregation Of Metered Supply Cables
Metered supply cables after the kWH meters shall be installed in their own separate trunkings/conduits or
if installed in a common trunking with other unmetered supply cables, then they shall be installed in the
manner hereinafter specified: The metered supply cables shall be grouped and secured together by
plastic fixing ties. These shall be tagged and identified as metered supply cables within each removable
sections of the trunkings.
LUP09/S47.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-5/42
47.1.13 Wiring For Lighting Points
For lighting points in lift machine room, switchrooms etc except for public lighting in blocks of flats, all
wiring shall be carried out on the "looped-in" principle with connections made at polarised plug and socket
connectors installed in metal circular through boxes. The circular through boxes, complete with removable
plate covers, shall be located immediately adjacent to the light fittings and a short length of metal conduit
connecting the through boxes to the light fittings shall be provided.
47.1.14 As-built Drawings
During the progress of work, the Contractor shall record and update all wiring routes, circuiting, circuitry,
electrical points, legends, lightning protection system based on actual site installations on the Drawings.
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall produce and submit three sets of as-built prints
stamped “As-Built” and endorsed by the LEW to the SO Rep.
The Contractor's LEW shall duly certify and endorse and all amendments highlighted in the 3 sets of
prints. The above shall be submitted to the SO Rep not later than one month after the certified completion
of the respective blocks and respective phases of the Works. The quality of the as-built prints shall be the
same or better than those supplied by the SO Rep and will be rejected if found to be of poor quality. The
Contractor’s LEW shall also update the Single Line Drawing in the Consumer Switchroom upon
completion of the electrical work.
47.1.15 Type Test
Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable:
• PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners;
• Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
• Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA (Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners
accreditation;
• Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme.
47.2 SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS
47.2.1 Switchboards
47.2.1.1 General
The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 60439..
The requirement of switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs
relating to testing, testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and
commissioning of the switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated site positions shall be
47.2.1.2 Drawings
Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted to
the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly the
following (where applicable) :
(i) Equipment
(ii) Current ratings including short circuit capacities
(iii) Colour of indicating lamps
(iv) Position of switches
(v) Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings
(vi) All equipment to be shown in the open or de-energised position
(vii) All secondary or primary plugged contacts
(viii) Wire ferrule numbers
(ix) Size, type and colour of wire
LUP09/S47.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-6/42
47.2.1.2 Drawings (Cont’d)
(x) Current transformer terminal markings and outputs

(xi) Ammeter and voltmeter scaling
(xii) Relay settings
(xiii) The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers,
opening doors and withdrawing compartments.
(xiv) Position of all equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting
(xv) Identification of all equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing function and coding
The quantities, sizes and ratings of equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be as indicated
in the Drawings.
47.2.1.3 Construction
The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free
standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate
easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested Assembly (TTA) or Partially Type
Tested Assembly (PTTA) in accordance with the type tests listed in IEC 60439. The main incoming unit,
functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered busbar sections shall be
separately housed in their own cubicles.
Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be 2.0m.
Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access.
The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum thickness
of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness
of 1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified otherwise in the
single-line-diagrams. The switchboards shall be constructed with degree of protection IP 4X.
Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover shall
have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be
constructed of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm.
The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement
including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable boxes
and gland plates.
The inside and outside surfaces of all the external panels of the switchboard shall be treated with a
coat of finishing paint giving a total paint thickness of not less than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall
be oven baked and dried.
47.2.1.4 Busbars
Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous
rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly.
The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of switchgear shall be
manufactured from copper complying with IEC 60439-2.
All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat
shrinking sleeves.
Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure, without
damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating conditions and
forces created by prospective fault currents.
Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any wiring
or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars.
LUP09/S47.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-7/42
47.2.1.4 Busbars (Cont’d)
Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by
bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold
letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through
removing this sheet secured by round head screws.
In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent
material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent
sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate with the following properties :
(a) greater than 86% light transmittance

(b) special treatment for high abrasive resistance
(c) high self ignition temperature.
The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable
PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.
47.2.1.5 Circuits And Connections
All connections between busbars and the switchgears shall be copper busbars or PVC insulated copper
cables of minimum cross-sectional area of not less than the rating of outgoing cables connected to the
switchgear. All cable connections shall be terminated with proper cable lugs and shrouded with heat
shrunk PVC sleeves of the appropriate phase identifying colour.
Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in plastic purpose
made small wiring trunking or trough.
Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of switchgear.
A HRC fuse shall be fixed within the respective compartment to protect the control circuit. Where control
circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the fuse shall also be used to isolate the terminals of these
contacts.
Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are derived from other sources,
isolating facilities shall be provided to render the auxiliary switches safe.
This isolation shall be in the form of auxiliary switches mounted on the respective compartment isolating
device or a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment.
All small wiring shall be of multi-stranded copper not less than 1.5mm2 (7/0.50mm) with PVC insulation.
All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the
schematic wiring diagram.
All fuses shall be of the HRC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers.
Small wiring associated with external control circuits shall be connected to terminal strips which shall be
conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of incoming multi-core cables.
Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall
be connected to any outgoing.
Each terminal block for external wiring shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity.
All wiring diagrams shall show the terminal blocks in terminal sequence.
47.2.1.6 Earth Bar
A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum cross-
sectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard and
shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard.
All circuit protective conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable
lugs at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to the
earth bar by an adequately-sized protective conductor.
The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm2 copper earth cable to the main earth bar in
the switch room.
LUP09/S47.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-8/42
47.2.1.7 Metering, Instruments And Accessories
Facilities shall be provided on switchboards for the PowerGrid to carry out their metering. The cubicle for
housing the PowerGrid’s meters, fuses, cut-outs and neutral link shall comply with PowerGrid's
requirements. Where required, the Contractor shall collect and install the meters for PowerGrid.
Where indicated, voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided. Indicating instruments shall comply with
IEC 60051, accuracy class 1.5. Instruments shall be of the moving iron type, with external zero
adjustment. They shall be flush-mounted, housed in a pressed steel or plastic case with shield plate.
Instrument terminals shall be shrouded.
Voltmeters shall be incorporated with selector switches for phase to phase and phase to neutral indication.
LUP09/S47.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-9/42
47.2.1.7 Metering, Instruments And Accessories (Cont'd)
Ammeters shall be current transformer operated type and shall be incorporated with selector switches for
indication of all phase currents. Switches shall be of the rotary wafer type.
Where maximum demand ammeters are specified, they shall be of the bimetallic type with thermal delay
to suppress the short-term current and indicate the average effective value. The response time of the
maximum demand ammeter shall be 8 minutes. The maximum pointer shifted by the bimetallic
mechanism shall be reset manually by means of an external knob. Maximum demand ammeter shall be
provided for each phase.
Phase indicator lamps shall be of the light emitting diodes (LED) types, operating on direct 230 volts or on
step-down voltage provided by step-down transformer.
47.2.1.8 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of accuracy for
their function and shall comply with IEC 60044. Measuring current transformers shall have accuracy of
Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10.
Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections
starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch,
they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for
indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.
47.2.1.9 Digital Protection Relay
The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following:
Parameters Relevant Standard Requirements

Operating IEC 60068 -10°C to +55°C
temperature
Humidity IEC 60068 56 days at 40°C and 95% RH
Vibration IEC 60255 class I
Shock and Bump IEC 60255 class I
Seismic IEC 60255 class I
Insulation IEC 60255 2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth
2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits
1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts
Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255 class III,
5kV 1.2/50μs between all terminals and earth
without damage or flashover.
High frequency IEC 60255 2.5kV common mode
Disturbance <3% deviation
1.0kV series mode <3% deviation
Electrostatic IEC 60255 8kV direct without mal-operation or damage
Discharge
Radio Frequency IEC 60255 20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation
Disturbance
Fast Transient IEC 60255 class IV ,4kV 5/50ns <3% deviation
Enclosure Protection SS IEC 529 IP52 minimum
EMC Compliance EN50081-1,2
EN50082-1,2
89/336/EEC
Dielectric withstand IEC60255 2KV common mode
1KV differential mode
Impulse voltage IEC60255 5KV common mode
1KV differential mode
All protective relays shall be mounted in dust-proof cases, which shall be earthed. The relay front shall be
protected by a transparent cover and shall be designed for flush mounting at the door of the low voltage
compartment of switchgear panel. In the event of a failure, the faulty module can be replaced without the
need of soldering.
LUP09/S47.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-10/42
47.2.1.9 Digital Protection Relay (Cont'd)
The relays shall have an integrated keypad with LCD or LED display. The LCD display shall be
backlighted during reading of relay parameter. There must be at least one LED with one indicating trip
(red). Resetting of LEDs’ indications shall be possible with front cover closed. When the relay front cover
is closed, only the reading of relay settings is possible. Changing of relay settings shall require the
removal of relay’s front cover.
The LCD or LED display shall give a clear message of the fault type by indicating the affected phase and
the type of operation such as instantaneous, DTL earth fault or IDMTL overcurrrent. Fault code is not
preferred and where this is inevitable, a non-fading, waterproof self-adhesive label is to be provided next
to the relay. The relay shall be able to store the last fault record.
The digital protection relays shall display load current and maximum demand current in primary values.
Panel meter shall be used to display primary current. The relay shall be suitable for operation in a 50 Hz
system.
The relay shall have at least two contacts for direct tripping of the circuit breakers. Relay contacts shall
make firmly without bounce. The relay parameter and setting relay parameter shall be intact in the event
of power failure.
All relays shall be suitably marked, visible from the front of the relay without removing the cover with the
following information:
a) Function of relay (e.g. IDMTL overcurrent /DTL earth fault relay)

b) Maximum demand current
c) Rated frequency
All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections.
The Contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay , provide electromechanical protection relays
complying with the undermentioned requirements:
Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay
Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag
indicator that can be reset by hand
The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 amps. Adjustment of
operating time lag shall be provided by a solid state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.
The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated.
The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker.
Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag (DTL)
relay as indicated in the Drawings.
IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance
with IEC 60255-6. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into accuracy class 1 as given in IEC
60255-6. The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected
against dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50oC without
deterioration of its performance characteristics.
DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of 0
second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting accuracy
for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button, rest button
and indicating lamp.
47.2.1.10 Identification Of Equipment And Circuits
Each item of switchgear, including each switch forming part of a switchboard or panel shall be clearly
labelled externally, to identify its relation to Drawings details.
Labels shall be of "Formica" engraving laminate or similar material having black characters on white
background, with 5mm minimum height characters. They shall be secured to the front of the panel by
instrument headed screws or adhesive or epoxy glue.
All circuits shall be phase identified at their terminations by means of colour coded heat shrunk sleeves.
LUP09/S47.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-11/42
47.2.1.11 Tests
(i) Type Tests
(a) Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements laid
down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following :
1) Verification of temperature rise unit

2) Verification of dielectric properties
3) Verification of short circuit strength
4) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit
5) Verification of clearances and creepage distances
6) Verification of mechanical operation
7) Verification of degree of protections.
(b) The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a member
of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a complete type
test report which shall include amongst other information, on arrangement and details of
switchboard construction, calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise
measurements.
(ii) Factory and Delivery Tests
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators and MCCBs closed and power fuses
fitted, the switchboard panels shall be subjected to a pressure test of 2.5kV for one minute, across
the following points :
(1) Phase to phase

(2) Phase to neutral
(3) Phase to earth
(4) Neutral to earth
The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by SO Rep. A test
certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests.
The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by
the SO Rep.
Approval of tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not relieve the contractor of
their obligations to supply the complete equipment assembly in accordance with the other
requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
47.2.2 Indoor Service Electrical Distribution Box
47.2.2.1 General
Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall supply and incorporate an indoor service electrical
distribution box (overground pillar type box) with each main switchboard.
The indoor service electrical distribution panel shall be totally segregated and compartmentalised from
other panels of the main switchboard. It shall be located next to the main switchboard or in a room
adjacent to the switchroom. Electrical connections shall be made by the Contractor between the
distribution panel to the incoming circuit breaker.
47.2.2.2 Type and Design
The distribution panel shall be the indoor type comprising :
(a) Housing or enclosure
(b) Phase and neutral busbars and earth bar
(c) Three (3) numbers of strip fuse-way distribution units with link units
(d) Phase barriers and insulated covers for contacts
(e) Six (6) numbers of solid links of 630 Amp rated normal current and three (3) numbers of
HRC fuse links
LUP09/S47.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-12/42
47.2.2.2 Type and Design (Cont'd)
(f) Accessories
The rated insulation level of the distribution panel shall comprise of the highest rated voltage of 600V and
the one minute power frequency withstand voltage of 2.5 kV.
The rated normal currents of the busbars shall be 630 Amp.
The overground distribution panels shall be protected by fuses located at transformer sources. The
maximum fuse rating shall be 630 Amp and the cut-off current shall be of the order of 55kA peak based on
a 60kA (rms) prospective fault current. All components shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit
current of this rating without damage.
47.2.2.3 Housing
The housing shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised steel sheet frames of minimum thickness of
2.0mm.
The panel shall consist of :
(a) A shell
(b) A root or frame support for the shell
(c) A pocket
Ventilation of the distribution panel shall be ensured by suitable screened apertures at the side panels.
The door shall be provided with a push-button panel lock with flush handle which can be opened only with
approved master key. The door shall be made detachable from the panel.
The distribution panel shall be of compact design and shall have the dimensions not less than 750mm W x
350mm D x 1420mm H.
47.2.2.4 Busbars
Busbars shall be of tinned hard-drawn high conductivity copper complying with IEC 60439-2. Busbars
shall be securely mounted at the rear of the panel behind the strip fuse-way distribution units and also
mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators, strong enough to endure without damage, forces
set up by any thermal expansion within the busbars under normal operating conditions and force created
by prospective fault current.
The cross-sectional area of each phase or neutral busbar shall be at least 45 x 10 mm2 and its minimum
length shall be 500 mm.
The busbars shall be of sufficient length so as to allow for the installation of an additional strip fuse-way
distribution unit, where required. Spare holes complete with M12 nuts and bolts shall be provided and
shall be positioned such that the required clearances and creepage distances can be achieved with the
installation of an additional strip fuse-way distribution unit. The bolts shall be permanently secured onto
the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts.
Phase busbars shall be colour marked in sequence from top to bottom, red, yellow, blue and the neutral
busbar mounted at the bottom shall be coloured black. The colouring of the busbars shall not be
continuous and shall be such that it cannot be mistaken for an insulating covering.
For the neutral busbar, four holes complete with M12 bolts and nuts shall be drilled. The bolts shall be
permanently secured onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts.
For busbars and busbar connections in air, the clearances and creepage distances shall be not less than
25mm between live conductors and not less than 20mm between live conductors to earth. Where these
clearances cannot be obtained, or where special risks exist, adequate non-inflammable solid insulation
shall be provided.
47.2.2.5 Strip Fuse-Way Distribution Units
The strip fuse-way distribution unit shall comply with the requirements of DlN 43623. It shall be
independently supported at the rear by cross metal supports.
It shall be of the Form B type with downward connections at the bottom of the strip fuse-way. lt shall be of
the vertically arranged triple-pole construction.
LUP09/S47.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-13/42
47.2.2.5 Strip Fuse-Way Distribution Units (Con'td)
The link unit of each pole shall be of the DlN type fusing with spring silver-plated copper contacts suitable
for DlN size 2 fuse links.
The triple-pole fuse base shall be manufactured from proven durable insulating material having adequate
mechanical strength and resistance to heat.
The distribution unit shall have cable terminals for direct cable connection at the bottom of each unit. The
cable terminals shall be drilled complete with M12 bolts and nuts. The bolts shall be permanently secured
onto the busbar such that they will not fall off during removal of the nuts.
For each strip fuse-way distribution unit, six (6) numbers of DlN size 2 knife type solid links (tinned plated)
and three (3) numbers of DlN size 2, HRC fuse links shall be provided.
The solid links and fuse links shall comply with the requirements of VDE 0660 Pt 4 and DIN 43620. The
dimensions of the solid links shall be not less than 150mm L x 32mm W x 6mm thick. The rated breaking
capacity of the HRC fuses shall be at least 80 kA at 500V rms. The HRC fuses shall be of class
(time/current range) GT (slow) and of maximum power dissipation of 28 watts.
Insulated dividing barriers shall be provided between phase contact assemblies in each distribution unit.
These shall be securely fixed to the distribution unit.
Plastic covers shall be provided to prevent accidental touching of the live contacts of the link units. These
shall be of a type which can be pushed onto the contacts easily and snaps into position automatically.
A circuit label of insulating material shall be mounted on the barrier between the red and yellow phases of
each distribution unit. This label shall be securely held without the use of screws and it shall be possible
to slot into position and remove the label from the front of the barrier.
The distribution units shall be secured onto the busbars and metal supports by bolts and nuts. The bolts
shall be permanently secured onto the busbars and metal supports such that they will not fall off during
removal of the units.
47.2.2.6 Cable Clamps
Three solid metallic cable clamps shall be provided in each distribution panel adequate to support the
cable in normal service. The centre line of the cable clamps shall not be less than 450 mm below the
fixing centre of the cable lug on the neutral busbar.
47.2.2.7 Earth Bar
A tinned copper earth bar shall be provided to facilitate earthing of the steel wire armour of the cable. The
minimum cross-sectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 31.5mm x 6.3mm and its minimum length
shall be 500mm. The earth bar shall be rigidly bolted onto the top of the metal cable clamp. There shall
be electrical continuity between the earth bar, the metal cable clamp and the housing of the distribution
panel. On the earth bar, five holes equally spaced shall be drilled to accommodate M10 bolts.
Two lengths of 70 mm2 cross-sectional area flexible tinned copper braid shall be provided for each
distribution panel. The length of each braid shall be 400 mm. One end of the braid shall be crimped with
a 70 mm2 tinned copper lug. The stud hole of the lug shall be suitable for M10 stud size.
47.2.3 Tap-Off Boxes
47.2.3.1 General
The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to details given in the Drawings and shall comply with
the following clauses.
47.2.3.2 Design And Dimension
The overall dimensions and essential details of the tap-off boxes shall be according to the Drawings. The
tap-off boxes shall comply with IEC 439-1.
The internal layout may be re-arranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box.
Tap-off boxes shall have hinged access doors facilities for locking with master key system. Four master
keys shall be handed over to the relevant Area/Branch Office by the Contractor on Substantial Completion
of the Contract.
LUP09/S47.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-14/42
47.2.3.2 Design And Dimension (Cont'd)
All line-branch connectors shall be adequately sized for the cables used. It shall allow the main and
branch cables to be separately secured to the connecting block with the main cable continuous and uncut.
47.2.3.3 Metal Box
The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body of
the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical equipment shall be of 1.5mm
thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than 45 microns and shall
be oven baked and dried.
The metal box shall comply with the latest edition of SS 5.
47.2.3.4 Phase Marking
All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of
installation.
47.2.3.5 Type Testing
All tap-off boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories before they
can be delivered for installation. A sample of the tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval.
47.2.4 Distribution Boards
Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number of
ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings.
Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall have
insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected
to them.
Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall also
be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference.
The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of
switchboards.
Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439.
47.2.5 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)
All MCCB shall comply with IEC 947-2. Triple pole MCCB shall be rated at 400V ac and double pole
MCCB shall be rated at 230V ac. The rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) shall be at least
50% of the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) for all MCCB.
The fault level of the incoming switchgear at the main switchboard taking supply directly from PowerGrid
shall be assumed to be 36 kA at rated voltage of 400V. All MCCB within the main switchboard shall be
rated to comply with the calculations based on the above starting fault level.
The main incoming MCCB shall be fitted with a round type external handle. The handle shall incorporate
provisions for locking the handle in either the "OFF" or "ON" position and for interlocking with the hinged
door of the compartment. There shall be a marking plate to indicate the "ON", "OFF", "RESET" and
"TRIP" modes. It shall be possible to adjust the instantaneous tripping of the main incoming MCCB from 2
to 8 times of its rated current. It shall also be incorporated with shunt trip facility where external earth fault
protection is required.
Each triple pole MCCB shall be provided with a neutral link housed in the same compartment. The neutral
link shall be constructed of tinned copper bar of suitable cross-section to match the circuit conductors with
a bridged piece to facilitate disconnection without removal of the connection cables during testing.
Connection of cables to the neutral link shall be by cable lugs, bolts and nuts.
All MCCB shall be mounted and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
LUP09/S47.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-15/42
47.2.6 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle-type tripping switch, and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 898.
The MCBs shall be of type B or C and rated for phase voltage of 240V, 50 Hz operation and shall have an
interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA (M6) unless stated otherwise.
47.2.7 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCBs)
The RCCB shall be of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a tripping time not
exceeding 0.1 second.
The RCCB shall be rated for operation at 400/230 V, 50 Hz and shall have a tripping current of 30 mA,
unless otherwise indicated.
All RCCB shall comply with the requirements of SS 97.
All RCCB shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
RCCBs installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by
SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test
Mark.
47.2.8 Switch Fuses, Isolators And Isolating Switches
Switch fuses, isolators and isolating switches shall be of the quick-made and break type, suitable for the
rating of the equipment served.
Switch fuses shall comply with 1EC 947-3 and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, bolted type, Class Q1,
certified for 415V and category of Duty AC23.
Isolators and isolating switches shall comply with IEC 947-3. For isolating switches, solid copper links
shall be fitted in place of fuses.
47.2.9 Contactors
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with 220
- 250V a.c. coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category
shall be AC-3.
47.2.10 Block Connectors
All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained
within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits.
The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the
conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All
exposed parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed.
Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact
pressure but without causing damage to the conductors.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened at
each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.
LUP09/S47.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-16/42
47.3 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES
47.3.1 General
All cables, except for fire rated cables shall have the PSB Test mark or other approved equivalent. Fire
rated cables shall be listed under PSB PLS Class 1. The cable conductors shall be annealed copper.
Identification trade marks, voltage rating and cross-sectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or
printed on the surface of the sheathing of the cable. Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label
attached giving the following information :
(a) Name and type of cable

(b) Cross-sectional area and number of core
(c) Length
(d) Manufacturer’s name, mark or other trademark
(e) Rated operating voltage
All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturer’s seals, labels
or other proof of origin intact.
All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications.
47.3.2 PVC-Insulated Cables
All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the
Drawings :
(a) Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest
amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts.
(b) Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the
latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
(c) Underground cable shall be PVC/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with BS 6346. The
cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
47.3.3 Fire Rated Cables
All fire rated cables use in fire safety measures to maintain integrity of main supplies shall comply with SS
299 be approved by FSSD.
Signal cables shall be rated at least 300/500 Volts. The rating of other cables used in 230 Volts and 400
Volts systems can be 450/750 Volts or 600/1000 Volts. They shall be single or multicore cables as shown
in the Drawings, each comprising stranded circular annealed copper conductors and a fire resisting
barrier. Cable sizes of 1.5 mm2 to 4 mm2 can be single insulated and cable sizes of 6 mm2 and above
shall have both insulation and sheath. The thickness of the insulation and sheath shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s technical specification where the relevant BS or IEC standards are not applicable.
Further, the construction of the cables shall be in accordance with its relevant SS, BS or IEC standards
and a type test report shall be submitted.
Fire rated cables shall be listed under PSB PLS Class 1..
47.3.4 Cable Installation
47.3.4.1 General
All cables shall be installed generally along the routes and in the manner indicated on the Drawings and in
accordance with the notes and instructions thereon.
Notwithstanding the above requirement, all cable routes shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work
commences.
All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints unless the length required is in excess of the
length obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer. In such a case, the position of each and
every joint shall be approved by the SO Rep. No other joints, whether straight through or tee, will be
permitted.
LUP09/S47.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-17/42
All cables shall be run neatly and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building.
Where a cable has to change direction, whether in a horizontal or a vertical plane, the radius of the bend
in the cable shall not be less than the minimum laid down in CP 5 or the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with
the installation of cables, together with all of the work involved, shall be provided by the Contractor
whether or not it is or they are specifically mentioned in the Specifications.
47.3.4.2 Mains Cables Installation
Mains cables shall be encased in metal trunking supported on walls, ceilings or structural steelwork. The
cables shall be clipped together in sets with nylon cable ties, PVC covered metallic cable ties. However,
only PVC covered metallic cable ties shall be used to secure fire-resistant cables. No overlapping of set
of cables will be permitted. Cables shall be fixed to the perforated steel bridges provided at the base of
the trunking.
Before placing an order for the trunking, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his
proposals relating to the arrangement of the cables in the trunking and the sizes of the trunkings. The SO
Rep shall have the right to reject any such proposals if, in his opinion, the metal trunking is of inadequate
size to facilitate ease of installation of cables in the trunking.
All mains cables shall be run continuously without any joints or breaks. Branching of horizontal
sub-mains or load cables shall be made by the removal of the PVC insulation and sheath of the main
cables to facilitate connection at line-taps in tap-off units.
47.3.4.3 Sub-mains Cables Installation
Horizontal sub-mains cables shall be encased and secured in PVC cable trunking fixed on the surfaces of
ceilings, walls and structures. The cables shall be retained in the trunking by means of PVC clips or
retainers.
Cables shall be installed on the "loop in" basis and joints between terminal points shall not be permitted.
The "loop in" terminal points shall be connector blocks incorporated in the electrical service boxes outside
the flat units.
47.3.4.4 Small Wiring
Unless otherwise indicated, all small wiring for final sub-circuits shall be enclosed in PVC cable trunking or
conduit fixed on the surfaces of ceilings, walls and structures. For trunking, the wiring shall be retained in
the trunking by means of PVC clips or retainers unless specified otherwise.
Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop in" principle with joints made at the terminal points. No joints
between terminal points shall be permitted.
Wherever the wiring pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, they shall be threaded through a
high impact PVC sleeve.
47.3.5 Installation Of Underground Cables
47.3.5.1 General
Underground cables shall be laid direct in the ground or drawn into pipe ducts as indicated on the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall excavate trenches for the laying of cables and/or the installation of cable ducts, and
subsequently backfilling them.
He shall also dispose of surplus debris arising from the excavations and reinstate the ground surfaces to
match adjacent surface finishes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity of
existing buried services, and shall bear the cost and expense of any damages incurred.
LUP09/S47.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-18/42
47.3.5 Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont’d)
47.3.5.1 General (Cont’d)
All cables buried direct in the ground shall be laid at a depth such that the vertical distance from the top of
the cable to the ground surface is not less than 750mm.
Before cable laying commences, all cable trenches shall be drained, the bed graded and tamped, and all
loose stones and similar debris removed.
After laying, the cable shall be covered with earth which is free from debris to provide a 50mm cover after
tamping. All cables shall be further protected by a continuous layer of PVC cover plates.
47.3.5.2 PVC Cover Plates
The cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0m and 2.0m. Each cover plate shall be nominal
150mm in width and nominal 2.0mm in thickness.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistant hard PVC. The colour of the plate shall
preferably be yellow and shall remain permanent and non-fading. Each cable cover plate shall be linked
to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest revision
of the following standards or their equivalent.
Description Standard
(a) Impact Test Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
(b) Tensile Strength Clause 7.4 of E6530
(c) Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D1525
(d) Accelerated Ageing ASTM D3045
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties :
(a) Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3
cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not
penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer
tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens.
Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements the
whole test is to be considered failed.
(b) The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall withstand
a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.
(c) The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72ºC (Rate A
at 50ºC ±5ºC per hour).
(d) The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70ºC for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also be
tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall be
less than 25% of the original value.
The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB in accordance with the above requirements. All cables
shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services are laid
parallel with or transversely to the cable trench.
Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless this
would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0 m. In such cases the cables shall be run
according to the directions of the SO Rep.
Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings, they
shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are not
provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. All UPVC pipes shall be Class
"B" type in accordance to SS 141.
The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall
be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S47.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-19/42
47.3.5 Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont'd)
47.3.5.2 PVC Cover Plates (Cont'd)
The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The
glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size.
At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of properly
designed clamps and a copper conductor of appropriate size.
For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and
water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any work.
47.3.5.3 Cable Glands
All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of suitable
size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 50262.
All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags.
The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper
conductor of appropriate size.
47.3.5.4 Underground Cable Joints for Armoured PVC Insulated Cables
Underground cable joints shall only be permitted where the length of cable required is in excess of the
length of cable obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer, or, in special circumstances where
approved in writing by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of any proposed underground cable joints and the position of all
joints shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences.
The underground cable joint shall be made with a resin type joint kit complete with thermoplastic mould
and accessories and the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, full details of the joint kit
which he proposes to supply, together with a full jointing specification.
All jointing work, once commenced, shall be completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without
interruption. No jointing work, shall commence without the prior approval and visual observation of the SO
Rep.
All joints shall be made exactly in accordance with the cable joint kit manufacturer's instructions, using
only the materials approved in the manufacturer's specifications and kit.
To ensure continuity and full conductivity of the steel wire armour, a copper lead of minimum cross-
sectional area as the cable conductors shall be used in conjunction with the armour bond kit available
from the cable joint manufacturer.
47.4 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS
47.4.1 Metal Trunking
47.4.1.1 Metal Trunking - General
All metal trunking and associated fittings shall comply with SS 249.
They shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at
intervals not exceeding 1m by means of brass or steel screws which are protected against corrosion by a
finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating. Electro-brass plated screws shall not be used.
Trunkings encased by cement when passing through floor slabs shall be of separate sections such that
the exposed lids not encased shall be removable.
Perforated steel bridges shall be spot welded at the base of the trunking for the fixing of cables. Two rows
of perforations of different sizes shall be provided. The bridges shall be spaced at intervals of 400mm and
at not more than 200mm from ends.
All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and
treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
LUP09/S47.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-20/42
47.4.1 Metal Trunking (Cont'd)
47.4.1.1 Metal Trunking - General (Cont'd)
The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of trunking and fittings shall not be less than those
of the following table :
Nominal Thickness of Sheet Steel

Nominal Width of Trunking
(mm) Thickness of Body Thickness of Cover
(mm) (mm)
50mm and below 1.0 1.0

75mm to 100mm 1.2 1.2
125mm to 175mm 1.4 1.2
Above 175mm 1.6 1.4
The standard depth of the trunking used shall be 50mm and the standard length shall not be less than 2m.
At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of metal trunking installed from the consumer switch room to
all the rising mains shall be at least 100mm by 50mm throughout. The size of the metal trunkings for the
lift risers and flat risers, shall be at least 100 mm by 50 mm throughout from the ground floor level to the
roof level.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-sectional
areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in
which they are installed shall also not exceed 35%.
Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the base
of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and shall be
arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking.
All metal trunking and associated fittings shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.
47.4.1.2 Metal Trunking - Installation
Metal trunking shall be run vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
Manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used for bends, angles, offsets, cross-overs and other non-
standard runs. The practice of cutting and bending trunking to form flanges and attachments shall not be
permitted.
Where the use of manufactures' standard fittings would result in gaps/holes between the trunking and the
building ( beams, walls, columns, etc), the Contractor shall install customised factory-made fittings that
completely fill up the gaps/holes. To achieve this, part of the trunking may be
customised/enlarged/extended to fill up the gaps/holes. Provide chamfer at the appropriate bends inside
the trunking to prevent the cables from being bent beyond the permitted bending radii.
Trunking shall be properly aligned and securely fixed by gun tool method or rawl plug fitted at regular
intervals not exceeding 600mm and at not more than 300mm from ends.
Where the trunking is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure, it shall be supported by mild steel
angle or channel iron brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The brackets shall be finished to
the same standard as the trunking. Each individual piece of trunking on straight runs shall be
independently supported.
Where bends, angles or offsets occur, additional fixings shall be supplied at a distance of not exceeding
150mm on either side of the accessory.
Any bonding links and their fastening supplied to satisfy electrical continuity conditions shall not cause any
electrolytic corrosion.
Trunking connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be so designed that
the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
LUP09/S47.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-21/42
47.4.1.2 Metal Trunking – Installation (Cont'd)
Where the trunking passes through a floor slab or beam, the portion of the trunking which is to be
embedded in the floor or beam opening shall have a permanently fixed lid to form a steel sleeve at least
250mm long. Floor skirting (with similar grade of concrete or screed as for the floor slab) with approved
water proofing admixture added shall be provided at the location where the trunking penetrates through
the floor slab to prevent ingress of water into the trunking.
Where the trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking joint shall be made. The connector at this point
shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10mm in both the horizontal and vertical
planes.
Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and
rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred, it shall be removed and the area
treated with a rust proofing agent. After this, it shall be treated by the application of a zinc epoxy and
followed by a coat of colour matching paint.
Holes cut in the trunking for the passage of PVC covered cables shall be treated as above and provided
with grommets, or alternatively bushed or lined to prevent damage to the PVC covering.
47.4.1.3 INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM
The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when it
is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR).
The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor. It shall then run on the
underside/soffit of the LMR’s floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking.
Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location.
Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the
LMR’s floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain. Provide
a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water from
seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit the site
conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather.
The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it.
Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.
47.4.2 Cable Tray
47.4.2.1 Cable Tray - General
Cable trays and accessories shall be perforated and manufactured from hot rolled mild steel conforming to
BS 1449:Part 1 or JIS G3131 SOHC with hot dip galvanised finish to BS 729.
Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet conforming to JIS G3313 SECC and coated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment.
The thickness of sheet steel used in the fabrication of cable tray and accessories shall not be less than
those of the following table :
Nominal Width of Tray Nominal Thickness Sheet Steel

(mm) (mm)
100 1.0
150 1.0
210 1.2
300 1.6
360 1.6
450 1.6
600 2.0
The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m.
LUP09/S47.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-22/42
47.4.2.2 Cable Tray - Installation
All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections
shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer.
Where site conditions necessitate site fabrication, the SO Rep's specific approval of the proposals shall be
given before fabrication commences and the standards of fabrications and finish shall not be less than
that of manufacturers' standard items.
Sections of cable tray and accessories shall be jointed using mushroom-head roofing bolts, nuts and
washers. The joint screws, nuts and washers shall all be galvanised or sherardized steel. Brass shall not
be used.
The cable tray shall be of adequate size to meet the installation requirements. Cables shall be installed
on trays in a single layer leaving 25% of the tray width spare for future use. The Contractor shall submit to
the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables on the tray and the width of the
trays.
Cable trays shall preferably be installed such that they offer direct support to cables.
Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm and 150mm from all
bends, tees, intersections and risers. They shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar or angle iron or
channel iron, and treated with an anti-rust undercoat and zinc chromate finishing coat to give a paint
thickness of not less than 45 microns.
Where horizontal runs of cable tray cross building or structure expansion joints, then the tray shall be cut
between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint. The tray sections shall then be jointed
with bolts, nuts and washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of ±10mm
from the initial fastening position.
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges
shall be removed prior to the installation of tray sections or accessories. The cut or damaged metal shall
be made good by the Contractor by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust proofing agent and then
applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the surface.
Cables shall be secured to the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties or saddles at intervals of 400mm
and at not more than 200mm from ends.
Cable tray and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its length.
Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and secured with a minimum of two
screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing system.
47.4.3 PVC Trunking
47.4.3.1 General
All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and
performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on
cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more.
All PVC trunking shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories and shall have
PSB Test Mark Or Approved Equivalent.
47.4.3.2 Single Compartment Trunking
The nominal external dimensions of the PVC trunking shall be 40mm, 32mm and 25mm width and the
height shall be in accordance with SS 275. The downdrop for the domestic socket outlets and lighting
switches shall be of 32mm by 16mm size except where multi-compartment trunking is used. The ceiling
tees to lighting points shall be of 25mm by 12.5mm size.
47.4.3.3 80 x 32 mm Two-Compartment Trunking
The overall dimensions and essential detailing of the trunking shall be according to the Drawings. The
trunking shall have two compartments, one for electrical power cables and the other for telephone or
CATV/SCV cables. The space between the cover and the two compartments is reserved for crossing of
these services within the trunking. This space should be used for the crossing of these cables only if
allowed under CP5 and IDA COPIF
LUP09/S47.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-23/42
47.4.3.4 60 x 20 mm Two-Compartment Trunking
This trunking shall have two compartments, 40mm wide and 20mm wide. The larger compartment is for
electrical power cables while the smaller is for telephone or CATV/SCV cables.
47.4.4 PVC Trunking - Installation
47.4.4.1 General
The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
For the multi-compartment trunkings, the electrical contractor shall liaise closely with the Singapore
Telecom and other parties involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is
installed after all the wiring works by all other parties are installed. The Contractor shall not in any
circumstances be absolved from the responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged or
defective.
The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation of
the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be
provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing
through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance and
replacement or addition of cables.
47.4.4.2 Single Compartment Trunking - Installation
The PVC trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular intervals not
exceeding 400mm and at not more than 100mm from ends. The fixings shall be staggered across the
width of the trunking base.
Cables shall be secured with purpose-made PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm
from ends except for the two trunking sizes of 32mm by 16mm and 25mm by 12.5mm which do not
require PVC clips.
47.4.4.3 80 x 32 mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation
The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, staggered across the two
compartments at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 100mm from ends.
The electrical compartment shall be separately enclosed with PVC cover while the other compartment
shall be provided with PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from ends.
The trunking shall be provided from the electrical tap-off unit, telephone and CATV distribution boxes to all
dwelling units at each floor as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall liaise with the Telecoms and
CATV contractors to determine the exact locations of their distribution boxes. In addition, the Contractor
shall install a short length of trunking above the electrical meter board or outside the units to house the
telephone rosette and CATV connectors where applicable.
47.4.4.4 60 x 20 mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation
The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, at regular spacing of 200mm and at
not more than 50mm from ends.
Cables shall be secured with PVC clips at intervals of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from ends.
47.4.5 Metal Conduit
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with BS 4568 : Part 1 and shall
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with BS 731 including all its latest amendments.
All conduit fittings shall comply with BS 4568: Part 2 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of
the item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and
having Class 4 protection against corrosion.
LUP09/S47.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-24/42
47.4.5 Metal Conduit (Cont'd)
Metal boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy protection
both inside and outside.
All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defects on delivery and protected from mechanical
damage and weather when stored on the Site.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with minimum thickness of 0.8mm.
Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall
not be used.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such that the
conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 angle bends shall be installed in any
run of conduit without a conduit box.
All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type and batch test. They shall bear the PSB Test Mark or
other approved equivalent
47.4.6 Rigid PVC Conduit
All rigid PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements – Rigid
conduit systems. All conduit shall be of the high impact heavy mechanical strength type. Unless otherwise
specified, all conduit shall be coloured white.
All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements – Rigid
conduit systems and indelibly marked with the name of the manufacturer or trademark of the item.
Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same manufacturer.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
All conduit joints shall be made using standard couplers and PVC solvent supplied by the manufacturer of
the conduit and to the method laid down by the manufacturer. All such joints shall be watertight. The same
conditions apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into
solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and
sharp edges shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from
all faces of conduit and accessories prior to the jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts
and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for or when the PVC conduit is to be
connected to metal Plant and equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries
are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used.
Expansion couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. Within such couplers, a
space of not less than 10mm shall be allowed between the ends of the conduit. The solvent adhesive
used in such joints shall allow for movement caused by expansion without affecting the watertightness of
the joint. A similar system shall be employed when conduits cross building expansion joints in any
situation and the couplers shall span the joints.
All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25mm and below may be set cold
but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The
radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked
flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending purposes and the manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed.
Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be taken
into accessories without sets or bends.
LUP09/S47.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-25/42
47.4.7 Installation Of Conduit
47.4.7.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating his work with other trades and for working to any
conduit layout in the Drawings that may be issued. Where such Drawings are not issued, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit drawings showing all conduit routes to the SO Rep for approval prior to erection.
The maximum number of cables drawn into any one conduit shall not exceed those allowed by reference
to the relevant regulations and tables in the current CP 5. The size of the conduits shall be decided on
this basis unless otherwise stated.
The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and swabbed through to
remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn in.
All sub-circuit cables drawn into one conduit shall be connected to the same phase. In the case of three
phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be contained in the same conduit.
Conduits shall be supported at intervals not greater than 600mm for vertical run exposed to touch and not
greater than 1m for others. Where conduit connects to surface-mounted equipment or accessories, it
shall be additionally supported within 150mm of either side of the item.
Where bends and sets occur, the conduit shall be fixed at a distance of 150mm, either side of such
diversion.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Where the conduit has to be bent it shall be bent without altering its section, using an approved bending
machine. No more than 2 numbers of 90º angle bends shall be installed in any run of conduit without a
conduit box.
Where conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch fuse units, consumer control units, switch
boxes, etc they shall be secured to the apparatus by means of flanged couplings.
Where conduits cross the expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement
between the sections. A suitable arrangement is to use a flexible conduit and adaptors in these positions.
The adaptors shall be earth bonded by a PVC insulated copper conductor of not less than 2.5mm2.
Final connections from the conduit installation to all motors, other apparatus subject to vibration and as
specified elsewhere, shall be made using watertight, PVC sheathed, rustproof flexible conduit.
47.4.7.2 Surface-mounted
Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles.
Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit.
Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes
such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables.
Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections, it
shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal
coating.
Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed as to obviate damage to cables.
47.4.7.3 Concealed
For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall under no circumstances
be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed direct to the structure
by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S47.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-26/42
47.4.7 Installation Of Conduit (Cont'd)
47.4.7.3 Concealed (Cont’d)
Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be offered
to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two days notice
that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection.
Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc the
Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is being
carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits.
Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs at
site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work.
Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged
effectively against the ingress of water and dirt.
Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster shall
have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior approval
of the SO Rep. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an electrical installation at a depth of less
than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with clause 52.4 shall be used.
Where metal conduit is buried in the ground, it shall have two coats of bituminous paint applied over its
complete length and to a distance of 200mm beyond the point where it emerges from the ground.
All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and tees
shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be used
but only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable; these
shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without
undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances.
Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of the
ceilings.
All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with
brass or stainless steel roundhead screws.
Where any surface mounting control gear or other equipment is to be installed in conjunction with
concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The back of
the equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the equipment mounted so as to conceal the
adaptable box.
47.5 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES
47.5.1 Switches
Switches shall be of 6-Ampere rating designed specifically for use on a.c. inductive circuits and complying
with SS 227.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated and
of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other, multi-
gang switches on a single cover plate shall be used.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the
Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
Switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by
SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories Test
Mark.
47.5.2 Switched Socket-Outlets
Each power point shall be a switched socket-outlet of similar construction by the same manufacturer and
product range to match the switches.
LUP09/S47.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-27/42
47.5.2 Switched Socket-Outlets (Cont’d)
The switched socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet. The 13 amp
and 15 amp switched socket-outlet shall comply with the requirements of SS 145 and SS 472 respectively.
In addition to SS 145, 13 amp switched socket-outlets shall pass the positive break test according to
Clauses 13.11.2, 13.11.3 and 13.11.4 of BS 1363-2 or approved equivalent.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switched socket outlet shall be decorative model and
the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket-outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the
Safety Mark.
Switched socket outlets installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories Test Mark.
47.5.3 Reservedt
47.5.4 Reserved
47.5.5 Moulded Box
Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and
other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60670 and the dimensions as specified in BS
4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90 deg. C.
Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662..
The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket
outlets and other accessories.
47.5.6 Batten Lampholders
Batten lampholders can be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals and
a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 Amperes and shall have a temperature rating of at least T1
complying with SS 125. They can also be Edison screw lampholders complying with SS 471.
47.5.7 Consumer Control Unit
Where Consumer Control Units are included in the Works, the enclosure shall be surface-mounted and
complete with back plate, mounting rail, multi-terminal earth bar, busbar, busbar insulating shield, neutral
terminal block, circuit identification label, miniature circuit breakers and earth leakage circuit breaker.
The consumer control unit shall comply with BS EN60439-3.
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, a main switch shall be provided and placed before RCCB in the
consumer unit.
The main switch shall be a double-pole M6 Type B miniature circuit breaker with contact position indicator
to indicate the positions of the moving contacts.
The main switch shall have in the opening position a minimum isolating distance of 3mm between the
contacts.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle type tripping switch, and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60898. The MCB shall be rated for 230V, 50 Hz operation.
They shall possess a Type B tripping characteristic and shall have an interrupting capacity of at least 6 KA
(M6).
LUP09/S47.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-28/42
47.5.7 Consumer Control Unit (Cont’d)
The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a
tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second.
All RCCB shall comply with SS 97.
All RCCB shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark
In addition, there must be a space provision ( 2 spare slots) in the main consumer control unit of the
dwelling unit for the installation of surge arrestor.
Consumer control units installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories Test Mark.
47.5.8 Polarised Plug & Socket Connector
Only one cable shall be terminated at each screw terminal of the polarized plug & socket connector.
Where looping is done at the socket, each pole of the socket shall have two screw terminals so that only
one cable is terminated at each screw terminal.
The polarised plug & socket connector shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC 60998-1 and IEC
60998-2-1.
47.5.9 Approval of Items
Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be
of the same manufacturer and product range.
Consumer control units shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent.
Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plug, socket connectors,
batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests.
47.6 LUMINAIRES
47.6.1 General
The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be
provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by the
supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.
47.6.2 Installation
All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows :
(a) Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two
lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud
shall penetrate into the surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings may be
installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting
manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer
(b) For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating
boxes.
(c) Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be used
to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are
installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at a
depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.
The above represents the minimum requirements and Contractor shall take further precautions if the
fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure that
all fittings are securely mounted.
LUP09/S47.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-29/42
47.6.2 Installation (Cont'd)
All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3 core cable of 1.5 sq mm
shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This connecting cable shall be
suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the light fitting.
The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed.
47.6.3 Lighting Luminaires
All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and
diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires
shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher.
All indoor fluorescent luminaires shall be complete with high frequency electronic ballast and comply with
SS 263 Part 3: Particular requirements for general purpose luminaires.
Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with
its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
All ballasts shall pass type tests. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with Spring
Singapore and bear the Safety Mark and PSB Test Mark or other approved equivalent
47.6.4.1 T5 Fluorescent Lamps
(a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps –
Performance specifications.
(b) The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G5 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i) Trademark or mark of origin;
(ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
(iii) Colour Definition; and
(iv) Colour Rendering Index.
(c) he operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a mortality rate
of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours.
(d) The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) (Index)
14 Approx. 550 16 1200 ( @ 25 °C ) 80 or better
28 Approx. 1150 16 2600 ( @ 25 °C ) 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f) The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g) The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h) The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
LUP09/S47.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-30/42
47.6.4.2 T8 Fluorescent Lamps
(a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081:Double-capped fluorescent lamps –
Performance specifications.
(b) The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(ii) Nominal Wattage;
(c) The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate
of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.
(d) The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :

Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering
(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) Index
18 Approx. 600 26 1300 or better 80 or better
36 1200 26 3200 or better 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f) The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g) The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be either T130 or T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h) The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
47.6.5 Compact Fluorescent Lamps
(a) All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 901 : Single-capped fluorescent lamps –
Performance Specifications.
(b) The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base
complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :

(ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
(c) The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a
mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.
(d) The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Wattage/Type Overall Length Base Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (Lumen) Index
9W PL-S 167 G23 600 80 or better
11W PL-S 237 G23 900 80 or better
13W PL-C 140 G24d-1 900 80 or better
18W PL-C 154 G24d-2 1200 80 or better
26W PL-C 173 G24d-3 1800 80 or better
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000
burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.
LUP09/S47.DOC(30)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-31/42
47.6.5 Compact Fluorescent Lamps (Cont’d)
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000 K unless
indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
47.6.6 Starters For Fluorescent Lamps
All starters shall be of the glow-switch type and shall comply with the safety and performance
requirements of IEC 155. The starters shall be suitable for use with fluorescent lamp of wattage from 4 to
65W at 220-240V.
The starter shall have the following distinctly and durably marked on the canister :
(i) Trademark or mark of origin; and

(ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage.
47.6.7 Electronic Ballast For Fluorescent Lamps
47.6.7.1 Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp
1 The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard
commercially available T5 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the
limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
2 The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
3 The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. ± 6%
4 The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to limit
harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60khz and
an output lamp stabilization section.
5 The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements :
a) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002
b) Performance requirement : IEC 60929, EN 60929.
c) Harmonics requirement : IEC 61000-3-2
d) Radio freq. interference : CISPRI 15, EN 55015
6 All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.
7 The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore
and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product quality
assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories
8 The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast within 5
seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are not
acceptable.
9 Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It
shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
10 Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light output
shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
11 Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be substantially
better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
12 Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95.
13 Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above.
LUP09/S47.DOC(31)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-32/42
47.6.7.1 Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp (Cont’d)
14 The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line voltage
transient protection.
15 The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during
short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
16 The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
17 The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of
70°C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
18 The ballast must comply to CELMA’s Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.
19 The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: -
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballast Loss Total Circuit Power

(wattage) (max) (max)
A single electronic ballast with 1 3.5 W 14 + 3.5 = 17.5 W
number of 14 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2 7W 2x14 + 7 = 35 W
numbers of 14 W lamps
A single electronic ballast with 1 6W 28 + 6= 34W
number of 28 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2 12 W 2x28 + 12 = 68 W
47.6.7.2 Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp
1 The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate standard
commercially available T8 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the
limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
2 The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
3 The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c. ± 6%
4 The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter to limit
harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60khz and
an output lamp stabilization section.
5 The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements :
a) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3:2000, SS 490 Part 2:3:2002

b) Performance requirement : IEC 60929, EN 60929.
c) Harmonics requirement : IEC 61000-3-2
d) Radio freq. interference : CISPRI 15, EN 55015
5 All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.
7 The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING Singapore
and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar product quality
assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
8 The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast within 5
seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions are not
acceptable.
LUP09/S47.DOC(32)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-33/42
47.6.7.2 Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp (Cont’d)
9 Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation. It
shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
10 Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light output
shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
11 Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 10%. Control gear must comply with and be substantially
better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
12 Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95
13 Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above.
14 The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3:2000 and IEC 60929 for line voltage
transient protection.
15 The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps during
short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
16 The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
17 The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc) of
70°C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
18 The ballast must comply to CELMA’s Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency Index.
19 The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: -
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballast Loss Total Circuit Power

(wattage) (max) (max)
A single electronic ballast with 1 3W 16 + 3 = 19 W
number of 18 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2 6W 2x16 + 6 = 38 W
A single electronic ballast with 1 4W 32 + 4 = 36W
number of 36 W lamp
A single electronic ballast with 2 8W 2x32 + 8 = 72W
47.6.8 Emergency Evacuation Lighting
47.6.8.1 General
All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with
SS CP 19 and approved by FSSD. All luminares for exit lighting and signs shall be approved by the FSSD
under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies
with the requirements of SS CP19 and the Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building. On
completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit certifications to FSSD or SO Rep, where required, in
accordance with FSSD requirements.
47.6.8.2 Exit Sign And Exit Lighting
All exit lighting and exit signs shall be of white LED type unless shown otherwise in the Drawings,
complete with 2 hour nickel cadmium batteries, IP 30 or other approved and shall comply with the
requirements of SS CP 19. All luminaires for the exit lighting and exit sign shall be approved by the FSSD
under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the
continuous rated period of 2 hours
LUP09/S47.DOC(33)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-34/42
47.6.8.3 Emergency Lighting And Conversion Kit
All emergency lighting including lighting conversion kits shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 19.
They shall be approved by the FSSD under the PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1. The duration of
the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours.
Emergency lighting conversion kits shall be provided for some of the lighting luminaires as shown in the
Drawings. The luminaire shall be pre-wired in such a manner that, under healthy supply condition, the
luminaire shall operate normally, but under supply interruption, the fluorescent/PL or PLC tubes are
connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit. Wiring of the conversion kit shall be arranged so as
to allow easy removal of the kit, where required, without affecting the normal operation of the luminaire.
Terminal blocks shall be provided for this purpose.
The emergency lighting conversion kit shall incorporate a charging and changeover device and shall be
powered by sealed nickel cadmium batteries. The charging device shall be designed to charge the
batteries and keep it in a charged state from a 230 volts 50 Hz supply. The conversion kit shall be located
away from the ballasts.
A separate unswitched “live” wire which shall be of the same phase as the normal supply, shall be run to
provide the line condition monitoring. Such separate unswitched “live” wire shall be clearly marked as
“live” and “unswitched” and with a “danger” sign. It shall be terminated at the terminal block before the
connection to the conversion kit.
47.6.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL)
General
The AOL system shall comply with the requirement of "Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles" specified in
the standard of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and its amendments, and the regulations
issued by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore (CAAS) and Ministry Of Defence.
The works shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the AOL system as shown in
the Drawings. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations
or standards, the more stringent of the requirements shall govern the works.
Where any apparatus/equipment forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp
condition, such apparatus/equipment shall be of weatherproof design.
AOL System
The AOL system consists of a main AOL, a standby AOL, control circuit panel and remote monitoring
panel. The AOL system shall be either of the following 2 types:
(a) low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type operate
on a DC power supply.
(b) medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC
power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power
supply.
The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained in
an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.
LUP09/S47.DOC(34)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-35/42
47.6.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D)
Control Circuit Panel
The control circuit panel shall be located at roof level. It shall be weatherproof type and mounted on a wall
sheltered from the rain where possible.
The control circuit panel shall have the following functions:
(a) Time Of Operation
The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive
Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event
the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell.
(b) Change Over Relay
When the AOL system is switched on the main AOL shall be triggered. In the event the main AOL
is faulty the change over relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL.
(c) Daily Test Relay
After the event the main AOL is switched off, the daily test relay mechanism shall automatically
switched on the standby AOL for a few seconds to test the functionality of the standby AOL.
(d) Fault Relay
The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote
monitoring panel in the event the following occurs:
(i) main AOL faulty

(ii) standby AOL faulty
(iii) AC/DC rectifier/charger faulty
The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to reset
the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced.
(e) Mains Power Failure
In the event there is a mains power failure the following shall occur:
(i) for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main AOL.
(ii) for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC supply
and operate the standby LED AOL.
The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power
supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6 hours.
Remote Monitoring Panel
The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall
contain the following:
(i) 1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL);
(ii) 3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence;
(iii) 1 set of contacts for remote warning lamp.
LUP09/S47.DOC(35)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-36/42
47.6.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D)
Indicating Lamp
Indicating lamp installed on the panels shall be of light emitting diode (LED) type.
Remote Warning Lamp & Warning Notice
An amber warning lamp to indicate occurrence of fault shall be extended from the remote monitoring panel
to outside of the switchroom. The warning lamp shall be mounted on a wall near the ceiling and clearly
visible from the void deck. A warning notice shall be mounted directly under the warning lamp.
Labels
All panels, push buttons and lamp indicators shall be labelled clearly with an identification tag made of
durable material.
47.6.10 Existing Aviation Obstruction Light
Where the as-built building height after a topographical survey does not exceed the height limit imposed
by CAAS & DSTA, the SO Rep shall arrange with the Contractor to remove, relocate or shut down the
AOL system. The prerogative to remove, relocate or shut down the AOL system shall rest on the SO Rep.
He shall inform CAAS, DSTA and HDB of his decision.
If relocation of the AOL system is required, the Contractor is to ensure that the AOL system including the
circuit control panel, all accessories and wirings are in good condition before commencing the works. He
shall take note that any faults or damages to the existing AOL caused by him during relocation works are
to be rectified within the scope of the contract.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for
complying with the requirements of this clause.
47.6.11 CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMPS
(a) All ceramic metal halide lamps shall comply with the safety requirement defined in IEC 62035.
(b) The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:
(ii) Nominal Lamp Wattage;
(c) The ceramic metal halide lamps shall be clear and UV-reduced. The burning position for these
lamps shall be universal.
(d) For luminaries without diffuser, the ceramic metal halide lamps shall have maximum protection
against shattering due to an integrated protective glass tube.
(e) The average lamp life of the ceramic metal halide lamps shall be of 12,000 hours at a mortality rate
of 50% or better.
(f) The ballast for 35W and 70W ceramic metal halide lamps shall be low loss type with a maximum 9
watts and 14 Watts loss at rated voltage and wattage respectively.
(g) The lamp voltages shall be 90V for both the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamps respectively.
(h) The maximum and minimum ignition voltage shall be 5kVs and 3.6kVs respectively.
(i) The lamp current for the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamp shall be 0.5A & 0.98A
respectively.
LUP09/S47.DOC(36)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-37/42
47.6.11 CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMPS (CONT’D)
(j) The ceramic metal halide lamp shall have the following characteristics:-
Lamp Wattage Output Colour Rendering Index
(W) (Lumen)
35 3000 or better 80 or better
70 5800 or better 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after
2000 burning hours shall not fall below 20% of the value indicated above.
(k) The correlated colour temperature of the ceramic metal halide lamp shall be between 3000°K and
4500°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
(l) The maximum permissible base edge temperature is 190°C.
(m) The permitted mains voltage deviation should be +/- 3%.
(n) The ceramic metal halide shall be operated with control gear with thermal protection.
(o) The right igniter for the particular lamp type must be used to ensure reliable and safe ignition.
47.7 EARTHING SYSTEM
47.7.1 Main Earth Bar
The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the switch room a tinned copper earth bar of cross-
sectional dimensions 31.5mm by 6.3mm mounted on porcelain insulators. The main earth bar shall be at
least 240mm long with six holes complete with M6 bolts and nuts. Alternatively, the main earth bar can be
an extension of the earth bar of the switchboard such that it is exposed and located on the external of the
switchboard.
From the main earth bar, two lengths of 25mm by 3mm copper tape shall be run to two separate earth
electrodes outside the switchrooms. The earth electrodes shall be interconnected by copper tape to form
a loop. A PVC insulated 70mm2 green earth cable shall connect the main earth bar to the earth bar within
the main switchboard.
47.7.2 Circuit Protective Conductor
A circuit protective conductor shall be provided for each electrical circuit. It shall be installed along the
route of its respective circuit conductors. Joints in circuit protective conductors, other than at terminal
points shall not be permitted.
The cross-sectional area of all circuit protective conductors, bonding and earthing conductors shall comply
with the requirements of the CP5.
All circuit protective shall be copper. Conductors of cross-sectional area up to 6 mm2 shall be insulated to
450/750V with green or green/yellow PVC. Conductors greater than 6 mm2 in cross-section may be bare,
stranded and tinned.
LUP09/S47.DOC(37)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-38/42
47.7.2 Circuit Protective Conductor (Cont'd)
Connections between earth bars, equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be made with
the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut.
The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the circuit protective conductor of the final
circuit. Where this circuit takes the form of a ring, then the circuit protective conductor shall also be run in
the form of a ring.
An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective conductor.
47.7.3 Bonding
All exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation shall be effectively bonded to the circuit
protective conductors. Similarly, other exposed conductive parts which under fault conditions, could
become live or constitutes an alternative earth fault return path shall be bonded to the circuit protective
conductors.
For direct water supply system to the block, all metallic water service pipes entering the building shall be
bonded to the main earth bar.
For indirect water supply system, all downfeed water pipes at the topmost floor and one intermediate floor
shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the tap-off unit.
The bonding of water service pipe for individual dwelling units and premises shall comply with Clause
47.9.2 “Bonding” of the Specifications.
All bonding connections to water pipes shall be made with purpose made clamps complying with SS 322.
47.7.4 Earth Electrode
The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for earthing system of each supply incomer.
Each earth electrode shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel rods
suitably coupled to form a continuous 3.6m length.
Earth electrodes shall be driven into the ground using a suitable hammer. The two electrodes shall be
connected to the main earth bar and interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop.
Copper tape shall be connected to the electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322.
Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried
length.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this
value, the Contractor shall drive in, at his own costs and expenses, extra electrodes complete with
interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing
resistance.
47.7.5 Earth Rods
Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm. The
copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than 0.25mm
at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended for
permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be visible
with a 4 x magnifying aid.
The rod shall pass a type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories in accordance with the
requirements of the American UL 467 Standard.
All earth rods shall be listed under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 2 or approved equivalent.
47.7.6 Coupling
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them
from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between sections.
LUP09/S47.DOC(38)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-39/42
47.7.7 Earth Electrode Inspection Pits
The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a purpose made hot dipped galvanised lid inspection
pit to facilitate inspection. The dimensions of the cover shall be 250mm by 250mm. It shall have a 8mm
diameter opening for lifting up. The pit shall withstand a force of 50 kN and the permanent deflection shall
not be more than 0.5 mm.
For each inspection pit, an identification tag made of durable plastic or metal shall be fixed onto the top
inside. The tag shall provide information of the block number, street name, types of earthing (whether
main electrical earthing or lightning earthing and etc), value of earth, number of earthing points (e.g. 1 of
4) and the date of testing. All wordings shall by engraved and shall be durable.
Where pits are located on the building apron, it shall be sunk flushed with the finish level. Further, all its
positions are to be chosen such that they are aligned and co-ordinated with other services' inspection pits,
apron line, apron joints, apron drains, building lines or any other immediate features. Earth electrode
inspection pits shall not be located within footpaths, linkways, shelters and pavilions.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the galvanised pit assembly to SO Rep for approval before
commencing installation.
The pit shall be installed such that the bottom is not concreted so that any accumulated water can seep
through. After installation and testing, all inspection pits shall be filled up with sand or other approved
aggregates to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The earth inspection pit shall be listed under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 2 or approved
equivalent.
47.8 PUBLIC LIGHTING
47.8.1 General
This section covers the installation of public lighting for the corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas
and other public areas in blocks of flats. Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in
PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.
47.8.2 Wiring
All wiring shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed public areas except that it shall be enclosed in
PVC conduit when passing vertically through floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square
knock-out box or purpose made transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC
trunking interface. For the lighting point behind false ceiling, the polarised plug and socket connector shall
be installed in a mounting box and the 3 core termination cable from the connector to the light fitting shall
be installed in flexible PVC conduits, properly secured to the mounting box and light fitting at its respective
ends.
All wiring shall be 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
The conductor shall be plain annealed copper, preferably stranded.
All wiring shall be carried out on the `loop-in' principle with terminal points at the socket end of the plug
and socket connectors. The connectors shall be polarised and rated at 10 Amp. The flexible cables from
the luminaires shall be terminated at the plug end.
For 3-pin polarised plug and socket connectors, the middle pin shall be the earth pin. The polarised
connectors shall be of such construction that the earth connection is first to make and last to break. All
plug and socket connectors shall be tested to comply with the relevant clauses of BS 5733. The
connectors shall be small enough to fit into the PVC trunking which is installed adjacent to the luminaires.
LUP09/S47.DOC(39)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-40/42
47.8.3 Public Lighting Control
All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time switch
shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line and have
minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of 5A at 240V
AC with independent common. The time switch’s central processing unit shall be provided with built-in real-
time clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 6 minutes maximum
per year.
The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours for
prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system setting
data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically cut-off
through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be included to
prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings.
The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer
and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the
RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (Windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and
drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be
provided.
The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its LCD
and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port.
The time switch shall operate correctly at temperatures up to 70oC and suitable for use in tropical climate.
A by-pass switch shall be incorporated in the public lighting installation for flexibility of control.
47.8.4 Luminaires
Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
47.9 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING AND BONDING
47.9.1 Final Sub-circuit Wiring
All final sub-circuit wiring shall be PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
The conductors shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded.
The insulation of the conductors shall be colour identified throughout in accordance with the CP5 and the
requirements of SPSL.
Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with terminating points at consumer control units,
socket outlets, switches, batten lampholders or ceiling roses. No joints between the terminal points shall
be permitted.
All wiring shall be run in surface-mounted PVC trunking. The trunking shall run along walls at a height just
below the ceiling with branch-offs on the ceilings to lighting points and down the surface of walls to
switches and socket outlets. For any wiring stopping short of the end wall, the SO Rep's instructions shall
be sought on whether to terminate the PVC trunking or to extend the trunking to the end wall.
47.9.2 Bonding
The metallic water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be bonded to the earth terminal at the
meter box. The bonding connection to the water service pipe and gas pipe shall be made as near as
practicable to the point of entry of the service. and, where possible, keeping a minimum distance of
150mm away from any pipe joints to prevent the pipes from being deformed and thus giving rise to gas or
water leakage at the joints. All bonding connections shall be made with purpose made clamps complying
with SS 322.
All bonding conductors shall be of cross-sectional area not less than the appropriate size given in CP5,
subject to a minimum size of 2.5mm2. The associated circuit conductor shall be the largest conductor
connected into the input side of the consumer control unit.
LUP09/S47.DOC(40)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-41/42
47.10 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO PLANT ROOMS
47.10.1 General
The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, lift motor rooms, etc. The Contractor shall liaise
with the appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to determine the desired positions of
the isolator and consumer control unit in the plant rooms.
47.10.2 Mains Cables
The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or conduit from the switch room to the plant room in
47.10.3 Electrical Equipment
The mains cables for the electrical equipment shall be terminated in metal-clad isolators.
47.10.4 Lighting And Small Power
The mains cables for lighting and small power shall for multi-storey carparks/garages and plant rooms
shall be terminated in a metal-clad consumer unit or distribution board.
The wiring for lighting and small power in the plant rooms shall be installed in metal trunking/metal
conduits and multi-storey/basement carparks/garages shall be installed in PVC conduits. All switches and
switch socket-outlets shall be of metal-clad type for plant rooms. Lighting points shall be carried out on the
“loop-in” principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in accordance to CP 5.
47.11 TELEPHONE CABLING
47.11.1 Scope Of Work
The telephone cabling works shall be undertaken by a licensed telecommunication wiring contractor. The
Works shall comply with IDA Code of Practice and meet the requirements of PTLs/TSLs and in
The telephone cabling Works under the contract shall include the telephone cabling from the PTLs/TSLs
DP to the Lift Machine Room or TMS closet and testing and commissioning of the telephone cabling
works.
47.11.2 General
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools and materials required for the telephone cabling
works. All materials for the telephone cabling works shall be as approved by IDA. It shall match the
electrical wiring accessories and of the same construction.
47.11.3 Installation of Telephone Point in Lift Motor Room/TMS Closet
Telephone points shall be provided in the lift motor rooms/TMS closets as shown in the Drawings. For
each telephone point, the Contractor shall install two numbers of 6-wire cables from the nearest
PTLs/TSLs DP to the telephone socket. The telephone point shall be located next to the lift isolator. At the
DP, the free ends of both cables shall be installed directly into the metal trunking of the PTLs/TSLs neatly,
with sufficient lengths for termination at the furthest DP.
The telephone point for the lift motor room/TMs closet shall be identified with sleeves marked as "lift motor
room/TMS". This telephone point shall be installed from the service duct of the DP to the lift motor room
and to any other telephone extension points in other lift motor rooms where shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S47.DOC(41)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 47-42/42
47.11.4 Fixing of Telephone Socket
The telephone socket shall be installed inside the unit at a position as indicated in the Drawings.
47.11.5 Fixing of 20mmx9mm Telecom Casing
Where surface trunking is required to be installed, the 20mm x 9mm PVC casing shall be extended
independently from the 60mm x 20mm multi-compartment trunking to the telephone socket. A minimum of
7 nails shall be used to fix a standard length of 2 m casing.
47.11.6 Testing and Completion
Upon completion of the telephone cabling Works, the Contractor shall submit an endorsed testing report
by their licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to the SO Rep; and inform the SO Rep and
PTLs/TSLs for a joint site inspection. The PTLs/TSLs may conduct an acceptance test on the cabling to
check for insulation, continuity and correct termination during the inspection. The Contractor shall rectify
all defects reported during the inspection within one week.
SECTION 48/...
LUP09/S47.DOC(42)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-1/8
SECTION 48
48.0 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING
48.1 SCOPE
This Section covers the installation, diversion and removal of outdoor amenities lighting.
48.2 STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN
48.2.1 General
The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Unless approved, indicated or otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of straight planted type.
The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only. The
Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column is
structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as well as
the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or modifications to
the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the necessary modifications or
improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the costs for the improvements and
modifications in the Contract Sum.
The circular column and bracket arms shall be manufactured from steel tubes in accordance with
BS 5649. The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness
of the material shall be +10 percent of the thickness.
The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The
tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defects.
The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by any
other acceptable processes.
The length of joints on the swaged circular columns shall comply with the following dimensions :
Outside Diameter of In mm
Smaller Tube 60 75 90 100 115 130 170 195 & Over
Length of Joint 180 200 230 260 300 360 410 460
The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees.
The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door
openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0 percent.
The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre line
of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in the
ground to the specified depth.
The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length.
A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the
column as shown.
A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for mounting of control gear
and cut-out as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S48.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-2/8
48.2.1 General (Cont'd)
A corrosion resistant electrical earthing terminal in the form of a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and
20mm long shall be provided inside the column in a position as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably
sized washers and two nuts shall be provided.
Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking into
the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting depths and
buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS 5649
unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the slot
being about 500mm below the intended ground level.
Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS 5649
and approved by the SO Rep.
48.2.2 Columns With Bracket Arms
The completed column shall include the bracket arm connected to the column. The bracket arm (single or
double) shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing on to the column.
The tolerance on the total length of the columns with bracket arms and planted Sections shall be
±1 percent.
The single or double bracket arms shall be formed from one continuous steel tube section or two separate
steel tube sections, which will permit electrical wiring to reach the lanterns mounted at the end of the
bracket arms.
The bracket projection (horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing
through the centre of the cross-section of the column) shall be 2m and the tolerance on bracket projection
shall be ±2 percent (without spigot).
The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip onto the top of the lighting column and shall be fixed by
means of bolts to prevent rotational movement. The top end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot of
outside diameter of dimension to suit the specified lantern.
The fixing angle of the lantern fixing axis, from the horizontal shall be within ±2 degree of the angle
specified. The lantern fixing angle shall be 5 or 15 degrees as indicated in the Drawings.
48.2.3 Post Top Columns
For post top columns, the tolerance on the total length of the columns with planted sections shall be the
greater value of ±0.5 percent or ±50mm.
The top end of the column shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter to suit the specified lantern or
mounting bracket for the lantern.
48.3 TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS
The Contractor shall be required to supply tapered octagonal hot-dip galvanised lighting column as shown.
The mounting height and all other requirements shall be similar to those earlier prescribed.
In addition, each column section shall be machine-formed and longitudinally welded by continuous
automatic gas shielded electric arc process.
LUP09/S48.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-3/8
48.3 TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS (CONT'D)
The bracket arm shall be octagonal in shape and finish with round pipe at the smaller end. The bottom
end of the curved arm shall slip into the top section of the main column. The smaller end of the curved
arm shall finish with a spigot for the safe mounting of the required lantern.
The Contractor shall submit the column and arm design including the design calculations (if necessary),
test reports, certificates and furnish a test certificate from the manufacturer to show all base metal, zinc
coating weight or other test conform to the Specification requirements. Columns which fail to comply with
the Specifications shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
48.4 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS
48.4.1 Hot Dip Galvanizing
All steel columns and brackets shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanizing internally and
externally in accordance with BS 729. Unless otherwise indicated, all welding work for columns and
brackets shall be done before galvanising.
The treatments prior to galvanizing shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, then rising and fluxing.
The minimum average zinc coating weight shall be 450 gm/m2 and minimum thickness of zinc coating
shall be 65 microns. The coating shall be adherent, smooth, continuous and free from flux stains.
All bolts shall be galvanized after screwcutting.
The Contractor shall furnish a test certificate from the galvanizer, ensuring that all base metal, zinc coating
weight or other tests conform to the specification requirements of BS 729. If the lighting column is not in
conformity with the specified requirements, the columns will be rejected and be replaced by the Contractor
at his own cost and expense.
Where the length of the column exceeds 10m and the length of the galvanizing bath, the column shall be
galvanized in two sections. The joining of the two sections by welding after galvanizing will only be
permitted with the approval of the SO Rep.
The welded metal and adjacent damaged areas of the zinc coating shall be applied with zinc rich paints
conforming to BS 4652. The surface shall be prepared by removing any welding slag with a chipping
hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The paint is applied by brush in two coats to give a total paint
film thickness of about 100 microns.
Any damage to the coating of the galvanised columns and brackets during transportation and erection
shall be made good by applying two coats of zinc rich paint at the cost and expense of the contractor.
48.4.2 Bitumen Coating
One coat of bitumen paint shall be applied externally to the planted section on top of the galvanised
coating/epoxy powder coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the buried
ground section and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not exceeding
4m heights where aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the ground can be
reduced to about 100mm.
The contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the planted sections
corresponding to the lighting column's heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contaminations before application of bitumen coatings.
The bitumen painting shall comply with BS3416:1975 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried
before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the
coating shall be the rate of approximately 6 squares metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of the
bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns.
The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as to
prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and storage.
the plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.
LUP09/S48.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-4/8
48.4.3 GROUTING OF LIGHTING COLUMN
Before grouting, three numbers of 30mm diameter pliable PVC conduits shall be inserted into the lighting
column (as shown in Drawings). Cables shall be pulled in only after 9not before) grouting and casting of
the concrete footing.
The PVC sleeve shall be extended out from the slot hole (as shown in Drawings) by at least 300mm to
ensure that the sleeves’ openings are not covered by cement grout and concrete footing. If, due to the
layout or other constraints/considerations, the PVC sleeves need to be trimmed to flush with the top of the
grout, the Contractor shall carry out such works at no additional costs and without delay to the schedule.
The Contractor shall ensure that three (3) numbers of T10 reinforcement bars are inserted in the lighting
column. Each T10 bar shall be inserted till it reaches the base plate of the lighting column and the top of
the bar shall stop 25mm short of the top of the grout so as to provide sufficient cover for the bar (as shown
in the Drawings).
The columns shall be grouted to the specified depth as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall use pre-packed non-shrink grout and pump through the door opening of the column
until it reaches 100mm below the bottom of the access door (as shown in Drawings).
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when grouting is carried out.
The Contactor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables can be pulled in and out of the columns at
any time and can be connected back to the distribution board after the grouting and casting are
completed.
Alternatively, the Contractor can grout the lighting column together with PVC sleeve and T10 bars off-site,
before it is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect galvanized
coating of lighting column during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer.
48.4.4 Glass Fibre/Reinforced Polyester Lighting Column
Glass fibre/reinforced polyester column shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5469 and shall
include the following features :
(i) High mechanical strength and high impact strength.
(ii) Corrosion resistance, impervious to ground decay and insect attack etc.
(iii) Uniformity in colour
(iv) Maintenance free
The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details of
assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The expected
life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars.
The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the
Specification.
48.5 POSITION OF LIGHTING COLUMNS
Before erection, the Contractor shall peg up the positions of lighting columns as indicated in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall then confirm with the SO Rep the positions of the lighting columns are well clear from
the way of tree, pavements, walkways, roads, etc, failing which any necessary repositioning of the
columns shall be carried out at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
LUP09/S48.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-5/8
48.6 ERECTION
The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth and grouted as shown in the Drawings.
Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of road crossing, cable entries to switch rooms
including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by Contractor.
Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling,
concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the
transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on the
external surface of the column.
For erection of column or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the Contractor
shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and other
concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost of reinstatement of these surfaces in his Contract
Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement should be carried out in neat, rectangular panels to minimise the
mismatch of surface texture.
existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof.
The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from the
direction of traffic.
48.7 BONDING OF METALLIC LIGHTING COLUMNS
All metallic lighting columns planted inside the concrete surfaces of the playground , fitness corner and
hardcourt shall be electrically bonded to the weldmesh or BRC.
Where indicated in the drawing, the lighting columns shall be linked together and earthed for lightning
protection. The overall earth resistance value shall not exceed 10 ohms.
48.8 POWDER COATING AND PAINTING
Before the galvanized lighting columns are delivered to site, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO Rep
regarding the colour of the columns, if not already specified.
All columns of 6m and below shall be powder coated. Polyester Powder Coating suitable for outdoor
application, with resistance to atmospheric aging and ultra-violet light, shall be used. The thickness of the
polyester powder coating shall be between 50 to 80 microns. The work shall be done off-site in a factory
with the appropriate facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the finished
paint work during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. No painting shall
be allowed on site, with the exception of painting of the identification number.
For columns of length above 6m, where painting is required for aesthetic reasons, only lead and chromate
free primer conforming to SS 494: 2001 and poly uretane paint shall be used.
48.8 POWDER COATING AND PAINTING (Cont’d)
Before painting, the surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from grease and oil. Non-oily soils
and dirt shall be removed by brushing or scrubbing followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. Grease
and oil shall be removed by swabbing generously with a suitable hydrocarbon solvent such as white spirit
or mineral turpentine, using several clear swabs on each area.
The Contractor shall then apply one coat of lead and chromate free primer and two coats of poly uretane
paint to the galvanised steel surfaces.
The Contractor shall ensure that the correct types of finishing or paint work are provided and the
preparation of galvanised steel surfaces for painting is properly carried out, failing which the columns shall
be rejected and the Contractor shall bear all the cost in making good the defects.
Identification number shall be painted on all lighting columns.
LUP09/S48.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-6/8
48.9 WIRING AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
All lighting columns shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories :
(a) a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth
conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to 25 mm2
and a 5 Amp `HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings.
(b) internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green) earth
connecting the cut-out to the luminaires.
(c) brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and
earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.
48.10 CONCRETE FOOTING
Concrete footing shall follow dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass
concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6.
The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply in
every respect with SS 26.
Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and other
impurities. It shall comply with SS 31.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other impurities
and comply with SS 31. It shall not exceed 40mm in size.
The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6.
Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time shall
not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall conform
to SS 119 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.
48.11 REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS
Removal of lighting columns shall include excavation, uprooting the columns, baseplates and concrete
footings, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surfaces, and the transportation and disposal of surplus earth
and columns from the Site.
Electricity supplies shall be cut-off and the cables made dead, isolated or abandoned before work
commences.
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers, flashing lights, guards
etc and other measures as may be necessary in the removal work, for the safety and convenience of the
public and others.
existing buried services, and all cost and expense arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
LUP09/S48.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-7/8
48.11 REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS (CONT'D)
The columns shall be lifted and removed using suitable mechanical handling plant or cranes.
After the columns have been removed, the holes in the ground shall be filled in with suitable earth and
compacted with mechanical rammers and the ground surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing
adjacent surface finishes.
48.12 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Lighting distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, and of adequate size to house the number of
HRC fuses, miniature circuit breakers, contactors, time switch, isolator, by-pass switch, and associated
equipment, as indicated in the Drawings.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for 240 V, 50 HZ operation and shall have an interrupting
capacity of at least 6 kA (M6).
The distribution board shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.6mm. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint and oven dried to finish with a paint thickness of
not less than 45 microns.
The distribution board shall have a hinged front access door with suitable dustproof seals and facilities for
locking. Insulated protective shields shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live parts when
the door is in the open position.
Neutral and earth busbars and connecting blocks shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth
conductor.
A removable copper plate of thickness not less than 1.6mm shall be provided at the base of the
distribution board. Suitable sized holes shall be punched for the termination of armoured PVC insulated
cables, where necessary.
The Contractor shall submit layout drawings in three elevations, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the fabrication of the lighting distribution boards.
The distribution board shall have an approved circuit diagram fixed on the inside of the door. Formica
engraving laminated labels shall also be supplied and screwed to the front of the distribution board to
provide board references.
For outdoor lighting distribution control board, the board shall be weatherproof and mounted on concrete
pedestal. Suitable cable box terminations shall be arranged to receive the incoming underground cables.
A separate earth system shall be provided for each outdoor distribution control board. Identification
number shall be printed on the outdoor distribution board.
The Contractor shall carry out all wiring and connections between the lighting distribution board and the
main switch board. All wiring shall be protected throughout their lengths by a continuous enclosure of
metal conduit or metal trunking except where the cables are installed within the enclosure of electrical
equipment.
48.13 TURFING
The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing
when directed by the SO Rep.
All topsoil shall be of approved quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, subsoil or other extraneous
matter, be friable and porous in texture and shall be obtained from approved sources.
LUP09/S48.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 48-8/8
48.13 TURFING (CONT'D)
Sludge shall be dry, solid and well-treated type from approved sources. The use of sludge for turfing and
other work shall comply with all requirements of the NEA on the prevention of smell and flies problems :
(a) Sludge delivered to sites shall be used for turfing as soon as possible. Sludge shall not be stored
at site.
(b) When necessary sludge heaped on site shall be evenly covered with a layer of topsoil or tarpaulin
sheets firmly pegged to the ground.
(c) After planting of turf, no additional spreading of sludge or soil on the turfed area shall be allowed.
The soil mixture shall be three (3) parts of topsoil with one (1) part of sludge.
The minimum thickness of soil mixture (topsoil mixed with sludge) shall be 150mm (including 25mm of
original soil attached to turf) at time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over
the prepared surface, followed by the planting of the fresh turf.
The Contractor shall provide turfing materials of size 0.1m2 (square in shape) with about 25mm of original
soil adhering to the roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases of vigorous growth. Types of turf
may be any one of the following species :
(a) Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus)
(b) Serangoon Grass (Digitania Didactyla)
(c) Manila Grass (Zoysia Japania)
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on
steep slopes shall be properly rolled over with garden roller or other approved means so that the turfing
shall achieve a uniform and even surface on completion.
All new turfing shall be maintained for six (6) months from the date the work is certified by the SO Rep as
completed by watering and weeding and mowing whenever required. Contractor shall replace dying, old
or missing turfs from original source during the Defects Liability Period.
48.14 MAKING GOOD
The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint, at his own cost and expense, any damaged part of
the building and any openings or recess in the building walls and other parts of structures affected by the
Works to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
SECTION 49/...
LUP09/S48.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 49-1/3
SECTION 49
49.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
49.1 GENERAL
The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of the SS CP 33 and its amendments,
this specification and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA).
The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS CP 33
1996 and its amendments and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA).
49.2 CONDUCTORS
The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of cross-
sectional area 25mm x 3mm.
Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at intervals
recommended by SS CP33 . The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface by a
single set screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The thickness
of the base strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively.
Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated
or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable.
49.3 AIR TERMINALS
Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved by
the SO Rep.
Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in length.
The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point. The
distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod.
Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous connection
to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped construction. Points
shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing bolts and screws for the
air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel.
49.4 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK
Conductors shall be located along ridges, around the perimeter, behind or on top of parapets and across
large open areas of the roof, as indicated in the Drawings. They shall be run parallel to the building lines
in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest including those on projections above the roof, and
form a closed network. For tile roofing, aluminium tape shall be secured by purpose made fasteners and
not cement mortar. For metal roofing, aluminium tapes shall be secured by purpose-made fasteners and
care must be taken not to puncture the metal roofing sheets.
49.5 JOINTS
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of the
SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound.
Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing with a
purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively, joints
shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or other
approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made square
tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved.
Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484
(commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).
LUP09/S49.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 49-2/3
49.6 BONDING
The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the lightning protection
network. The metal work includes lamp poles, railings, metal roofing, gutters, flashings, etc. Bonding leads
shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the lightning protection conductors. Where dissimilar metals
are in contact, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding shall be
effected by means of purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable. In places
accessible to the public (e.g MSCP roofdeck), the bonding conductors shall be embedded or concealed to
prevent it from being removed. The bonding conductors shall be ram-set for cases or situation where
embedding or concealing of the bonding conductors is not possible.
For external facade which are metal clad, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning
protection system.
49.7 DOWN CONDUCTORS
Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated in
the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most
direct path possible between the air termination and the earth termination.
Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional
dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall be
embedded within a chase subject to approval of the SO Rep. Where it is not possible for the copper tape
to be embedded/concealed, the Contractor is required to seek the concurrence of SO Rep for alternative
method of installation of the copper tape. In particular, all conductors below ground shall be copper tape.
A bi-metallic aluminium/copper connector which is friction welded and designed for connecting the two
dissimilar metals shall be provided for the connection of the aluminium down conductor to the copper
earthing lead. The bi-metallic connector which also serves as a test link shall be located at a height of
2.5m above ground. Where recommended by the manufacturer, a non-water soluble, non-petroleum
based polymer grease or inhibiting compound shall be used with the connector clamp to seal the electrical
connections from the ingress of moisture and air.
49.8 EARTH ELECTRODE
Each down conductor shall be separately connected to an earth electrode by an earth clamp complying
with SS322. Each electrode shall consist of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, mild steel rods suitably
coupled by a threaded bronze connector to form a continuous 3.6m length.
All earth rods and earth electrode pit shall comply with the relevant parts of Clause 47.7 "Earthing
System".
Each electrode shall be driven into the ground by a suitable mechanical hammer as close as practicable to
the bottom of the down conductor. During the driving process, the contractor shall fit an appropriate
driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no damage to the top of the electrode.
49.9 COUPLING
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely
enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion. Couplings
shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode manufacturer or
otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
49.10 RESISTANCE TO EARTH
The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services in
or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms.
In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a
resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms.
LUP09/S49.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 49-3/3
49.10 RESISTANCE TO EARTH (CONT'D)
If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth
requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth
electrodes per down conductor, at contractor's expense, to reduce the value of earth resistance. The
additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with 25mm x 3mm copper strip
buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the necessary earthing clamp and earth
inspection pit.
Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor need to be installed then, where applicable,
they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a line parallel to
the base of the structure.
49.11 COPPER CONDUCTOR
The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be
copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as
indicated in the Drawings. All material used including joints and fastener shall be copper based and
complying with SS CP 33.
49.12 LIGHTNING PROTECTION TO METALLIC ROOFING SYSTEM,

WALL CLADDING AND METALLIC MOTIFS/RAILING
For metallic roofing system or roof structure or wall cladding or metallic motifs or railing at the roof or
envelope of the building, the whole metallic body and any individually isolated metallic parts shall be
bonded to the main lightning protection system to comply with or otherwise satisfy the lightning protection
requirements specified in Singapore Standard CP33.
The design (where applicable), manufacture and installation of these metallic bodies or parts shall be
carried out judiciously such as to ensure the electrical continuity of the whole metallic roofing system or
structure or wall cladding or motifs by proper connections/joints and maintain its warranty. An adequate
number of accessible bonding points shall be provided and connected to the main lightning protection
system.
Upon Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep detailed drawings showing the
metallic roofing or structure or wall cladding or motif and the bonding to the main lightning protection
system.
49.13 APPROVAL OF ITEMS
Earth rod clamp, pipe bonding clamp and earth rod coupling shall be approved under PLS Class 2 or other
approved equivalent.
The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses
specified in Section 47.7 “Earthing System”.
SECTION 50/...
LUP09/S49.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 50-1/3
SECTION 50
50.0 MATV INSTALLATIONS
50.1 GENERAL
The MATV installation shall comply with with the requirements of the Code of Practice for Info-
Communications Facilities in Building (COPIF) issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of
Singapore (IDA), with all statutory rules and regulations of the Media Development Authority (MDA),
Government Authorities and Statutory Authorities, current at the date of submission of the Tender.
The Contractor shall divert, relocate, reposition, reinstate, re-calibrate, re-test, re-commission and make
good all parts of the MATV system at locations directly affected by the Works or indirectly due to the
effects (eg., poor reception) of Works under the Contract (eg., addition/relocation of lift shafts, addition of
pitched roof) or latest statutory requirements. All Works shall be executed to the complete satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
Minor design modification may be acceptable if it is justified and approved by the SO Rep. All the
reinstatement works shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
50.2 MATV SYSTEM AT ROOF TOP
The Contractor shall make readjustment, reposition the existing MATV antenna, amplifier, surge diverter
box and other part of the installation, which is on, in, obstructed by or near the affected area such as
roofing work, extension of lift motor room, relocation of consumer switch room, erection of new roof
structures, and etc. The as-built overall height of the existing antenna system shall not exceed the
maximum allowable building height limit. If it is required to lower the overall height of the existing antenna
system the TV reception signals shall not be affected. If the reception signal is affected by the lowering of
the antenna, the existing antenna shall be relocated to a lower ground on the roof or to be wall mounted.
For any relocation/reposition of the antenna, antenna mast/bracket shall not be mounted at the edge of
the building. The antenna, antenna mast/bracket shall be mounted at least 3 metres from the edge of the
building unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for
all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause. The
contractor shall provide underground or surface linking between blocks all at his own costs, if the re-
location of the antennae cannot achieve a satisfactory TV reception.
50.2.1 Reposition/Reinstatement and Alteration of Antennas/Equipment/Accessories
Before the roofing work commence, the Contractor shall reposition the existing antennas/antenna masts &
brackets to a suitable location which will not obstruct the Work. However, if the new location does not
provide satisfactory TV reception, TV signals shall be tapped from the neighbouring block by temporary
overhang cables and the SO Rep’s approval must first be sought. Subsequently the Contractor shall follow
up and submit proposal to lay permanent MATV underground or surface linking cables to the neighbouring
block for SO Rep’s approval before commencing the installation work. The contractor is also required to
obtain written permission from the relevant authorities (e.g.; respective Town Council, etc) before the
commencement of work. The Contractor shall remove the temporary overhang cable once the installation
of the linking cables are completed. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and
expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
When the existing antenna is required to be relocated to a new mounting, the contractor shall arrange for
PE (C&S) to check and endorse the mounting integrity of the antenna system. The contractor shall search
for a suitable location, which could provide satisfactory TV reception. The as-built overall height of the
antenna system shall not exceed the maximum allowable building height limit. If necessary, the
Contractor is to provide a new set of antenna system or to run linking cable from a nearby block.
Provision of opening and the mounting of the antennae system shall be provided by the contractor at their
own cost. The Contractor shall submit the PE’s (C&S) endorsement on the mounting integrity of the
antenna system and the as-built overall height of the antenna system to the SO Rep for verification and
record. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum
for complying with the requirements of this clause.
Where the surge diverter box (If any) and amplifier box are mounted/relocated across the opening of the
wall of the water tank room, an additional piece of aluminium sheet shall be mounted behind the amplifier
and surge diverter box so as to protect the boxes from rain water. The aluminium sheet shall be painted
with approved matt black paint or colour that matches the surrounding walls.
LUP09/S50.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 50-2/3
50.2.1 Reposition/Reinstatement and Alteration of Antennas/Equipment/Accessories (Cont'd)
All amplifier and surge diverter boxes that are relocated/mounted outdoors shall be constructed with
proper shelter (of approved designed). The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and
expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
Where the guy wires are removed, they shall not be hung on the TV antenna. An alternative support for
the antenna masts shall be provided. The Contractor may secure the masts with steel wires and fasten
them to the barricade posts. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses
in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
The repositioning and/or alteration of the MATV equipment/antennas etc shall be carried out within the
same day and that the MATV system shall resume functioning by 5:30 p.m. on the same day. The
Contractor shall provide the power points for the temporary installation of all MATV equipment. The
Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep to check the TV reception for acceptance after reposition and/or
alteration of antennae/masts. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses
in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
The Contractor shall provide all accessories and materials (including amplifier box, booster amplifiers, 7-
way mixers with adjustable attenuators, tees, splitters, etc) that are required for the temporary as well as
the permanent reinstatement of the existing MATV system. If the Works cause the existing amplifiers
cannot be reinstated at its original location, thus causing a drop in signal strength to some of the trunk
lines, the Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipment and accessories including the power points
at their own cost.
The contractor shall seek the permission of the appropriate Branch Office at least 5 days in advance for
any works that affected the reception signal of the MATV system.
50.2.2 Notification to the Residents
The Contractor shall liaise with the site office and Branch Office concerned and send letters to all
residents of the blocks affected by the repositioning of antennae/masts. The letter shall be in 4 languages
informing them on the period date/time when the TV reception will be disrupted.
50.2.3 MATV Conduits and Accessories
Prior to removal of the existing roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep if the
rooftop MATV conduits and accessories are required to be raised, replaced or diverted.
During the process of removing the roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall ensure that the
existing MATV conduit pipes are firmly supported.
Upon removal of the roof tiles or secondary roof, the Contractor shall raise the conduits and/or
repair/replace the corroded or broken conduits, accessories and any other items found below the
secondary roof before waterproofing work commences. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed
for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the requirements of this clause.
If the Contractor fails to abide by the above, he shall carry out all rectification works to the MATV conduits
and accessories and roof waterproofing system all at his own costs should there be consequent
complaints of water leakage arising due to broken or corroded MATV conduit pipe and accessories not
repaired/replaced before the weatherproofing.
As far as possible, ramps or other means shall be provided to prevent the MATV conduit pipes from being
accidentally damaged by the upgrading works. All the damaged conduits, splitter/tee boxes, cables and
accessories shall be replaced by materials listed in the HDB Materials List. The conduits, splitter and tee
boxes shall be painted with one coat of approved primer and one coat of approved aluminium paint after
the installation is completed.
PVC or metal supports for the MATV conduit pipes shall not be removed or bent during the execution of
the Works.
The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for repair and reinstatement work and shall indemnify the
Employer against all liabilities in the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep for inspection upon Substantial Completion of Works.
LUP09/S50.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 50-3/3
50.2.4 AC Power Supply
During the entire period of the work, the Contractor shall check daily and ensure that the power supply to
the amplifier box is not switch off before they leave the site.
A separate main switch (MCCB) shall be provided for the power supply to the temporary MATV
equipment. The main switch shall be clearly labelled in both English and Chinese Languages with the
following: “DO NOT SWITCH OFF, 24 HOURS SUPPLY REQUIRED FOR CATV EQUIPMENT”.
For the permanent relocation and/or reinstatement of equipment, the Contractor shall provide one number
of non-RCD protected power points with a lockable metal enclosure and install it beside the MATV
amplifier box. Approved plastic warning labels with “Non-RCD protected power supply” shall be provided
on the metal enclosures and amplifier box(es). The actual position of power points shall be determined on
site and approved by the SO Rep.
50.2.5 Reserved
50.2.6 MATV Underground Cables
The Contractor shall make provisions and allow in the Contract Sum for the temporary and permanent
diversion of all existing MATV underground cables to new locations that may be affected by the precinct
works.
Temporary overhang cables are allowed for the tapping of TV signal between blocks where the existing
underground cables are affected by the precinct works. The Contractor shall submit proposal for the
permanent MATV underground cable or surface linking installation to the SO Rep for approval. The
Contractor is also required to obtain written permission from the relevant authorities (e.g.; respective Town
Council, etc) before the commencement of work.
50.2.7 Installation Of TV Point(s) For Additional Unit(s)
The Contractor shall engage SCV to provide the TV point(s) for the additional unit(s), as a result from the
conversion of void deck space to residential unit(s), RC Centre or shop(s). If SCV signal is not available at
the block during the contract period, TV point(s) shall be tapped from the MATV system.
50.2.7.1 Cables, Accessories & Devices
The specifications of all Cables, Accessories & Devices shall comply with the requirements stipulated
in the COPIF.
Coaxial Cable For Service Drops/ The Subscriber's Outlet (Isolator/Box)
(i) All coaxial cable for service drops and TV/FM isolator shall pass Type and Batch Tests. Type test
reports issued by the following third party certified laboratories are acceptable:
• PSB and their Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) partners;
• Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;
• Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS-MRA(Mutual Recognition Agreement) partners accredition;
• Laboratories participating in IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme.
All coaxial cable for service drops and TV/FM isolator shall bear the PSB Test Mark or other
approved equivalent
(ii) The TV/FM front plate of the isolators shall be made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material
approved by the SO Rep and match the colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the
same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate, urea or other approval material shall be UV stabilised and
shall not discolour within the Defects Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight.
(iii) Separate ports shall be provided for TV and FM receptions. The spacing between the ports shall
preferably be 25.4mm. The two ports are preferably to be horizontally positioned.
50.2.9 Testing and Inspection
The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep/Consultant and the respective Branch Office for testing
after the reinstatement work is completed. The repositioning and reinstatement work shall be considered
as completed if the TV reception and workmanship are both satisfactory as determined by the SO Rep/
Consultant and the respective Branch Office.
SECTION 51/...
UPG05/S50.DOC(3)
lkk(181204)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-1/13
SECTION 51
51.0 SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING
51.1 SURVEY OF WORKS
51.1.1 Setting Out of Entire Works
The Contractor shall engage a Registered Surveyor at his own cost and expense to set out the entire
Works. Relevant bench marks, traverses and co-ordinates will be provided by the Superintending
Officer's Representative to facilitate setting out. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the
accuracy of such setting out.
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Superintending Officer's Representative
three(3) weeks upon completion of the above survey :
(i) Setting out computation plan of layout of blocks, MSCP, ESS, linkbuilding and all other new
structures. All computation involved in the layout including co-ordinates are to be submitted.
(ii) All setting out drawings showing the azimuth adopted, setting out ties to all new structures, piling
block dimensions, sewer manhole position and service road alignment.
51.1.2 Reserved
51.2 DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL
The Contractor shall comply with the following site control requirements by the Drainage Department,
Public Utilities Board.
(a) Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage
Department for approval before commencement of the Works;
(b) Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary perimeter drains, close turfing on
both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices, turfing, wash-bays incorporating proper
discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the site to enter the drains;
LUP09/S51.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-2/13
51.2 DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL (CONT'D)
(c) Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and desilting all
affected drains until completion of the Works;
(d) Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland
flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains;
(e) Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the site can be effectively drained away
without causing flooding within the site or in areas outside the site;
(f) Ensuring that discharge consequent to de-watering from basement or trench excavation is
channelled into silt trapping devices before reaching existing drains;
(g) Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work
areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed into
the drains.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at its own cost and expense, any
additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control standards
as required by the Drainage Department, Public Utilities Board on surface water drainage.
51.3 EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES
The Contractor shall not allow and be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into drains and
canals. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements strictly :
(a) Treatment Of Silt-Laden Water
Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. The silt-
laden water shall be channelled to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of
silt before discharging into drains or canals.
(b) Provision Of Silt Traps And Perimeter Cut-Off Drains
(i) Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that earth,
silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be
duly designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer. These facilities shall be
constructed before the commencement of the Works.
(ii) Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at
least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from
the Site.
(c) Protection Of Exposed Earth Surfaces
Provide and carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at site. All exposed earth
surfaces not affected by construction activities shall be planted with turfing on an immediate basis.
Where necessary to prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall also carry out progressive turfing on
site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces
which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, such surfaces shall be protected
from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods to be
approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.
LUP09/S51.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-3/13
51.3 EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES (CONT'D)
(d) Excavated Material
(i) All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately.
The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site.
(ii) Earth materials stockpiled on site for construction work shall be within properly contained
areas and covered to prevent the earth from washing into drains or canals. The locations for
stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the
approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not washed into drains or
canals.
(iii) The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of construction
keeps pace with the rate of excavation.
(e) Treatment Of Mud Slurry
Check and ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet
grouting, etc, are not discharged into drains or canals.
51.4 SURFACE EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other obstructions
encountered on Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO Rep.
Any top soil which covers the site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the
use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall
salvage whatever existing top soil there is on Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the
Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.
51.5 SITE LEVEL FORMATION
The proposed levels of the building or other structures platforms and open areas in the Works are
indicated in the Drawings and these platform levels shall be prepared by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall allow in the Contract Sum for earth cutting or earth filling to make up to the stated proposed levels.
51.6 EXCAVATION GENERALLY
Visit and examine the Site carefully and ascertain the nature thereof and the kind of materials to be
excavated, and make provision in the Contract Sum to cover for the types of materials to be excavated.
Prior to commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out pre-construction survey of the
neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA. The Contractor shall set out the lines
and structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken
and submitted to the SO Rep for record.
For excavation, the Contractor shall comply fully with the relevant provisions of the Telecommunications
Act 2000, the Public Utilities Act, the Factories Act 1998 and the Factories Building Operations and Works
of Engineering Construction Regulations 2005 or any amendment or re-enactment thereof. The
Contractor shall not be allowed to make any extra claim for work or cost and expenses incurred in
complying with the requirements of this subclause.
Excavation shall be carried out neatly in accordance with the Drawings in whatsoever material may be
found, including hard rock or other hard material which requires breaking up by pneumatic drills and the
excavated materials shall be used as filling if required. Any surplus excavated materials may be spread or
dumped within the Site of the Works if required by the SO Rep. Alternatively, dispose off any surplus
material and if so required, provide lorries for transport and make all necessary arrangements for use of
an approved dumping ground and bear all costs and expenses in connection with the use thereof. Do not
deposit excavated materials on private land unless written permission of both the owner and occupier of
the land are submitted to the SO Rep.
LUP09/S51.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-4/13
51.6 EXCAVATION GENERALLY (CONT'D)
Unless decided by the SO Rep, surplus excavated materials shall not become the property of the
Contractor and it shall not be construed that he has the right of ownership of them.
Carry out excavations by any suitable methods but subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
The excavated materials may temporarily during the course of the Works be tipped on either side of the
excavations only where sufficient space is available without causing obstructions and shall not be tipped
nearer to the excavation than a distance equal to the depth of the excavation where the soil condition is
poor.
The SO Rep may prescribe and limit the lengths and/or widths and/or depths of excavation to be
proceeded with at one time.
Excavation shall not be carried down in the first instance to a depth nearer than 150mm to formation level.
The bottoming-up to formation shall be done by hand immediately in advance of placing hardcore,
concrete or pipe laying unless directed otherwise by the SO Rep. Also take such steps as are necessary,
in the opinion of the SO Rep, to prevent damage to the formation owing to exposure to the atmosphere
and the trampling of the formation by workmen. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep the formation is
softened or spoilt, the soft or spoilt areas shall be excavated and filled with Grade 15 concrete.
Cut pipe trenches to a sufficient width to receive and allow the pipes to be easily and properly jointed, but
subject to the foregoing requirements, keep to the minimum practicable width. The trench width may also
be reduced at or about the pipe soffit level in order to reduce the formation width.
Do not construct Permanent Works in any excavation until the excavation has been approved.
Form the entire excavation and leave complete and as accurate to the widths, levels, contours and slopes
as possible or as otherwise directed.
51.7 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
Remove any rock or boulders met with in excavation to the required depths by wedging, blasting or other
means as directed.
When blasting is required, obtain prior permission in writing from the SO Rep. Comply with the Local
Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the relevant Authorities with regard to blasting
operations.
The Contractor shall be required to submit the blasting proposal to the SO Rep for approval. The following
information shall be required on all the blasting Works :
(a) blasting method, method statement and special techniques;
(b) vibration control and measurement;
(c) average depth, diameter and spacing of the boreholes;
(d) drilling and blasting programme;
(e) safety control measures; and
(f) over excavation and remedial measures.
Over excavation by blasting method shall not exceed 1.0 metre unless otherwise specified or directed by
SO Rep. The Contractor shall make good all the over excavation to the required formation level and
shape as directed by SO Rep. The cost and expense of such Works shall be borne by the Contractor.
LUP09/S51.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-5/13
51.7 EXCAVATION IN ROCK (CONT'D)
The SO Rep must be fully informed as to the steps and precautionary measures taken to safeguard the
surrounding properties. Be liable for any accident, damage or injury to any person, property or thing,
resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting operations and in the presence of the
SO Rep, conduct a survey of all structures within 120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any
other structures which the SO Rep considers may be affected, in order to determine the existing or pre-
blast condition of these structures. Prior to commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by
photographs where necessary, listing any existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO
Rep.
When blasting operation are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the
appropriate signs erected.
51.8 ERRORS IN EXCAVATION
Excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed. Any excavation done to a greater
depth than is necessary for execution of the Works shall be filled with concrete of such proportions or with
such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed. The cost and expense of such
Works shall be borne by the Contractor.
51.9 EXCAVATION FOR PILE CAPS
The Contractor shall excavate for pile caps and complete excavation expeditiously after the piling
contractor has cut off excess length of piles.
The Contractor shall take care and precaution to avoid damaging or displacing the piles and the
Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any damage or displacement to piles in the excavation pits.
Any water accumulating in excavated pits shall be pumped dry to facilitate construction of pile caps.
51.10 TEMPORARY COVERS
Prior to excavation for footing foundations, temporary covers may be erected over the area to be
excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. When such temporary covers are
instructed to be erected by the SO Rep, they will be paid for as a variation.
51.11 KEEPING EXCAVATIONS DRY
The whole of the excavations shall be kept free from water arising from rain, drains, floods or other causes
by pumping, bailing, drainage or other means. Should any water get into the excavations, the Contractor
shall remove such water, excavate the affected wet soil and fill up the excess excavation with Grade 15
concrete, all at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
51.12 BACKFILLING
The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the
required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and
consolidate.
51.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
The Contractor shall allow for spreading and levelling on site or transporting off the site all surplus
excavated material which remains after completion of backfilling and compaction of excavations, including
the surplus excavated material left by the services departments of the relevant local authorities.
LUP09/S51.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-6/13
51.14 PLANKING AND STRUTTING
The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor adopts to
uphold the sides of excavations to prevent damage to adjoining properties, earth movement and injury to
workmen. The Contractor shall be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and shall
provide all planking and strutting to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such planking and strutting shall be
designed and supervised by the Contractor's PE.
51.15 PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF

BUILDINGS AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES
The Contractor and his Pest Control Operator (hereinafter referred to as the “Specialist”), executing the
Works as required in this Clause including sub-clause have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials
used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter
referred to as the “Performance Requirement”). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as
specified in this Clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet the Performance
Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the
Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect
the Contractor’s and his Specialist’s duties and obligations arising under the Contract.
51.15.2 Scope Of Work
Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites for stand-alone
electrical substations and stand-alone dustbin compounds. Unless otherwise specified, the areas to be
chemically treated shall include:
(a) The entire ground floor slab area or part thereof, as directed by the SO Rep, prior to the laying of
any concrete floor slab.
(b) The areas surrounding all sides of column stumps.
(c) All round the building perimeter or part thereof, as directed by the SO Rep, prior to concreting any
apron area where applicable. The width of the treatment shall follow the perimeter defined by the
apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 metre in width.
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the National Environment Agency (NEA)
pertaining to such soil treatment work and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work. The
Contractor shall also comply with the requirements specified in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS),
product labels and instructional materials supplied by the chemical and equipment manufacturers or their
licensed representatives.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work
processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of
such Works.
51.15.3 Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application
All chemicals to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil shall be those approved by the National
Environment Agency (NEA). The Contractor may propose either one of the following chemicals listed in
the table below:
Chemical Application Rate For Works Which Are

An aqueous emulsified concentrate having an active
ingredient (A.l) concentration of not less than 3 g of
Fipronil
Fipronil per m2 (i.e. 125 ml of Agenda 25 EC or
equivalent per m2 ) Within or outside water
An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active catchment areas
ingredient (A.I) concentration of not less than 2.5 g
Imidacloprid
of Imidaclopid per m2 (i.e. 12.5 ml of Premise 200SC
or equivalent per m2)
No other application rate shall be permitted.
LUP09/S51.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-7/13
51.15.3 Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application (Cont'd)
The chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated. The dilution rate of these chemicals
must be in accordance with the labelled rates as stipulated on the labels and/or in accordance with the
chemical manufacturers (or their representatives) published recommendations and within National
Environment Agency (NEA) guidelines. No other dilution rates will be permitted.
At the start of each treatment, the Contractor shall proposed to the SO Rep the size and the location to
be treated. The Contractor will conduct all the calculations required to ensure accurate application and
dilution rates for the termiticide and submit to the SO Rep prior to its application on the Site. The SO
Rep shall be informed for all dilution and mixing procedure by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall mix/dilute the exact amount to be used on the Site. No premixing will be permitted.
No mixing offsite prior to its use on the Site will be allowed. All chemicals mixed on the Site MUST be
completely used on the Site. No chemical mixed for use on the Site will be permitted to be removed or
disposed off without the approval of the SO Rep.
The total volume of flow of diluted chemical termiticide used will be measured/ metered using a Flow
Meter. Other methods for measuring the flow of chemicals will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall submit the Specialist report to the SO Rep on the Application rate and Dilution rate
of the chemicals at the end of each site treatment and/or as directed by the SO Rep.
The Report shall contain the following information:
Date of Application DD/MM/YYYY

Amount of Area Treated XX.XX m2
Amount of Concentrate Termiticide used XX.XX Litres
Amount of Diluted Chemical used XX.XX Litres
Amount of Diluted Chemical unused after the treatment XX.XX Litres
This report must be verified and signed by the SO Rep at the end of each treatment.
51.15.4 Chemical Preparation
Preparation of the chemicals shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Material Safety Data
Sheets and the Product Labels. All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required for the
chemical preparation and the PPE required for the site will be used at all times.
Contractors should also ensure that the instructions on handling of the chemicals for the following
procedures are in accordance with the published safely information. A declaration document on these
safety procedures on handling of chemicals shall also be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the commencement of such Works:
o Washing of Hands
o Washing of equipment used
o Calibration of equipment used on site
o Pre-Application Checklist
o Mixing procedure
o Dilution procedure
o Amount of diluents used
o Type of diluents used
o All PPE required for the works to be carried out.
No work shall comence without these procedures and safety documentations submitted to the SO Rep.
51.15.5 Time of Application
Treatment shall be carried out immediately before the lean concreting of the floor slabs and apron areas.
Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated, eg. during or immediately after rainfall.
LUP09/S51.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-8/13
51.15.5 Time of Application (Cont'd)
Verify the ground water table before soil treatmentis conducted. For this purpose, the Contractor shall at
his own cost and expense, excavate trial holes of more than 0.5m deep measured from the level of the
soil to be treated. The Contractor shall submit a report on the ground water table to the SO Rep prior to
commencing the soil treatment. As required by National Environment Agency (NEA), soil treatment shall
not be carried out if the ground water table is 0.5m or less below the level of the soil to be treated, and in
such event the Employer is entitled to recover from the Contractor the value of work so omitted by way
of a variation order. The variation order shall be priced based on the applicable or analogous or pro-
rated rates in the Rates times the untreated area measured flat on plan.
Notwithstanding such cost recovery, the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for
the provision of warranty for the work and the cost recovery shall not absolve the Contractor from his
responsibilities to rectify future occurrence of Defect in respect of the work under the warranty. The
restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with National Environment Agency (NEA)'s
requirements shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities under the warranty.
Provided always that in the event chemical pre-treatment of the soil for the protection of buildings
against subterranean termites is omitted altogether from the Scope of Work for a building block either on
account of National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements or by reason of an Authorisation Order,
then the provision of a warranty for the chemical pre-treatment of the soil for that building block shall be
deemed to be waived by the Employer.
51.15.6 Application Procedure
Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black
polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet.
When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black
polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene
sheet, especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all
rain water runs into the surrounding temporary drains.
51.15.7 Application Equipment
All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition. A list of all
equipment to be used on the Site shall be provided to the SO Rep. Also all these equipment must be
accompanied with last service date records prior to their use on the Site.
51.15.8 Provision Of Temporary Drainage
Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the whole area to be treated with an
outlet connected to a sump.
51.15.9 Quality Control Sampling
To verify the concentration of the chemical used, one (1) sample of the chemical shall be taken randomly
on each day of application as directed by the SO Rep and stored in a one (1) litre container, properly
marked with the date and location of the sample taken. The samples taken shall be kept under lock and
at a cool and dry location in the SO Rep room, for a period of not more than seven (7) calender days.
The keys shall be kept by the SO Rep. For every 3 samples taken on a per building block basis, the SO
Rep shall randomly select one of the samples for concentration test at an accredited/approved
laboratory.
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense containers of one litre capacity for the
collection of the samples. The sample container must be able to protect its contents against Ultra Violet
Light
51.15.10 Administrative Charge For Failure Of Test On Chemical

Concentration/Excessively High In Chemical Concentration
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 “Nuisance and Irregularities” to impose charges
against the Contractor for each sample that fails to attain the required exact concentration as specified in
the foregoing requirement in the subclause “Chemical To Be Used And Rate Of Application”. In addition
to the charges, the Contractor shall re-treat the part of the work represented by the failed sample.
LUP09/S51.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-9/13
51.15.10 Administrative Charge For Failure Of Test On Chemical

Concentration/Excessively High In Chemical Concentration (Cont'd)
If each and every sample concentration equal or exceeds 25g /l or 2.9% w/w for Fipronil or 18.3% w/w
for Imidacloprid, the SO Rep shall also impose charges against the Contractor under Clause 1.6
“Nuisance and Irregularities”. Due care shall be exercised by the Contractor when mixing and preparing
the chemical on site. For any areas that were deemed to have failed the minimum concentration,
immediate re-treatment by the Contractor is required at no additional cost to the Employer. However, if
the slab were already placed and the Chemical Concentration were found to be below an acceptable
level, Slab-Injections of the previously used chemicals shall be introduced to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep at no additional cost to the Employer.
51.15.11 Approved Pest Control Operators
Only Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the work head for Pest Control shall be
engaged to execute the pre-treatment of soil. The Pest Control Operator shall hold a valid clearance
letter for the chemical to be used from the Pollution Control Department, NEA. In this respect, the
Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator, proof of BCA registration, clearance
letter for the chemical to be used from NEA and the type and details of chemicals to be used (including
the rate of application) to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the treatment.
In addition, the Contractor shall also ensure that the Pest Control Operator produce a letter of support
from the supplier confirming the availability of the chemical to be used for the Works.
The SO Rep reserves the right to disapprove the use of the type of chemical and/or the Pest Control
Operator so selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim and there shall
be no adjustment to the Contract Sum nor extension of Time for Completion arising from or out of such
decision by the SO Rep.
51.15.12 Warranty
Clause 59.2 "Provision of Warranty" and the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix
A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer
or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to such
Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty in accordance
with the specimen of Deed of Warranty as produced in Appendix A1(TC) and Clause 59.2 "Provision of
Warrnty" to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted immediately upon
request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the SO Rep considers
the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In the event the
Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time
specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the
Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per
Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission
by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty
51.15.13 Re-treatment During Warranty Period
If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated buildings within the warranty period, the
Contractor shall provide Powder or Dust Treatment to exterminate the infestation at his own costs and
expenses.
Should the Powder or Dust Treatment fail to exterminate the infestation, the Contractor shall re-treat the
soil using the Post-Construction Soil Treatment method at his own costs and expenses. Drilled holes
shall be patched and walls and/or floors refinished.
In addition, in the event of additions or extensions to the buildings during the warranty period, the Pest
Control Operator and the Contractor shall be informed and shall also execute soil treatment to extend
the chemical barrier to cover such additions or extensions. The costs of such extensions of soil
treatment shall, however, be borne by the Employer.
LUP09/S51.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-10/13
51.15.14 Safety Precaution
Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes.
Personnel engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt
and long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves as specified in the
foregoing requirements.
Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent
accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials.
The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the National
Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds.
Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been
treated with poisonous chemicals.
Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the National Environment Agency
(NEA)'s dumping grounds.
51.16 FINISHED PLATFORMS, SLOPES AND EMBANKMENTS
Platform levels shall be the level at the top of surface drains around the building. The Contractor shall
finish the open spaces between buildings with a fall of not less than 1 in 80 towards surface drains.
The Contractor shall cut, trim and adjust all slopes and banks to give gradual and regular slopes with no
abrupt change of direction, or as directed by the SO Rep.
51.17 SERVICES ROUTES
The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and
Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform
level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Contract.
Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction
shall be carried out within seven days.
51.18 ELECTRICAL CABLE PIPES AND TRENCH
Where applicable, the Contractor shall excavate and lay 4 nos. of 150mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth
of 750mm from the trench in the electrical switch room to the position as shown in the Drawings. The
pipes shall be laid on 100mm thick mass concrete bed of 600mm width. One end of the pipe shall project
600mm beyond the surface drain or as shown and the other end shall be flushed with the trench. The
trench shall be covered with removable RC slabs of 300mm width, capable of supporting a minimum load
of 100 kg. Sand shall be provided to fill the trench after installation of the cables into the trench.
Where applicable, excavate and lay 2 nos. of 100mm diameter UPVC pipe and 1 no. of 50mm diameter
UPVC pipe at a depth of 300mm from the floor of the HDB switchroom to the positions as shown in the
Drawings.
Pipes used shall be free from leakage, distortion and cracks. Gaps between pipes and trench wall shall
be patched up with cement mortar and made watertight. A length of drawn wire strong enough to pull in
the cable, shall be provided in each pipe. The drawn wire shall project 600mm at both ends of pipe.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C (wall thickness 6.6mm) type, complying with the requirements
of SS 141:1976.
51.19 TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS
Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide and lay where shown 1OOmm diameter underground
UPVC pipes to serve as ducts for telephone cables. Ducts shall turn with gradual bend and continue to
extend 600mm beyond aprons, drains and paths outside the building. Provide threading wires for
electrical cable ducts. The number of pipes required are as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S51.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-11/13
51.20 DRAIN CASCADES
The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or
banks.
Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight
and parallel to slope of ground.
51.21 LEVELS, POSITIONS, LINES, ETC.
In arriving at the Contract Sum of the Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have used as a basis
the levels, if any, which are shown on the various cross-sections and longitudinal sections of the Drawings
relative to the existing ground levels in determining his quantities of excavation or filling for the completed
work.
The precise positions, lines, depths and directions of the work, if shown, are indicated within all practicable
limit.
Should the Contractor not agree with any level of existing land or other property as given on the Drawings,
he shall submit his objection in writing within 2 weeks from the date of the Employer's Letter of
Acceptance of the Contractor's Tender, otherwise the Drawings shall be taken as correct for purposes of
setting out and determination of variations (if any).
Note that all existing ground levels are given as spot levels or contours on plan and that straight lines on
the sections represent the average ground levels. Any small differences of levels therefore shall not be
regarded as sufficient reason for the Contractor to disagree with the information as shown on the
Drawings.
51.22 CLEARANCE OF SITE, TURF AND TOPSOIL
Clear the Site at such time and to the extent required by the SO Rep and take down hedges, trees, hack
up belukar, roots and any other obstruction from Site. All such waste materials removed shall be disposed
off as directed. Should the quantity of work involved appear greater than that shown on the Drawings the
Contractor shall make due allowance in the Contract Sum to cover such work and no adjustment to the
Contract Sum shall be made.
When digging and cutting of turfed ground are carried out, the turf and topsoil shall first be removed and
stored for re-use as directed. Turf and topsoil shall not be taken away from Site without prior permission
of the SO Rep and they shall remain the property of the Employer.
51.23 DEMOLITION AND MAKING GOOD
The Contractor shall take care when demolishing or cutting away existing work such that no adjacent work
is unnecessarily damaged in any way. Make good any work so damaged.
Old materials may not be re-used in the new work, except where so specified or as directed by the SO
Rep.
Exposed raw faces of existing concrete or brickwork which will not have new work built on them shall be
made good with cement, rendering or new brickwork and finished to a neat, straight, vertical or plane
surface in harmony with the adjoining surfaces.
LUP09/S51.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-12/13
51.24 BREAKING UP OF EXISTING WORK
If it is found necessary to break up existing pavement, road or footpath, etc for constructional purposes as
required in the Contract, such intention of doing so shall be conveyed to the SO Rep prior to
commencement of work. If construction work is to be carried out on public roads, first obtain permission
from LTA. In the event that normal flow of traffic is interrupted due to contract work in progress, minimise
the inconvenience caused to the public by constantly cleaning the roadway such that a steady flow of
traffic is maintained. Temporary traffic directional signboards shall be installed at strategic points if
required.
All existing work broken up by the Contractor shall be made good by him at his own cost and to the
The reinstatement shall comply with all the requirements of the Road Management Branch, LTA. Works
which does not conform to the standard and requirements of the SO Rep or LTA shall be immediately
removed and replaced or extended.
On completion of the reinstatement, maintain all the road surfaces etc., affected during the Time for
Completion and Defects Liability Period. All faults, settlements etc., developed within this period shall be
made good immediately upon receipt of an instruction from the SO Rep.
Be liable for all claims for injury or damage arising from any Defect in the reinstated road surface during
the Time for Completion and Defects Liability Period.
Adhere strictly to the requirement set out in LTA's specification on Reinstatement of Trenches and the
HDB Standard Conditions governing Trench Opening within HDB Estates when carrying out the work
required in this Clause.
51.25 EXCAVATION OF SERVICE TRENCHES AND STORAGE OF CABLE DUCTS
Excavate trenches for the laying of services within the contract area. Such excavations and provision of
cable ducts crossing the road shall be paid for according to the Standard Schedule of Rates if they are not
indicated in the Drawings.
If cable ducts are to be provided by the Service Department concerned, provide storage space on the Site
and shall be responsible for their loss or damage.
51.26 REINSTATEMENT OF SERVICE TRENCHES
All service trenches for the laying of cables, pipes, etc within the Contract boundary shall be reinstated
immediately after the services have been laid and completed by the Services Authorities.
All backfilling materials for cross or longitudinal trench within completed or partly completed road
carriageway or carpark shall be of approved materials conforming to the following characteristics :
(a) The percentage passing 75 µm B.S. sieve shall be not more than 35%;
(b) The fraction passing through 75 µm sieve shall have liquid limit not exceeding 35 and plasticity
index not exceeding 12;
(c) Dry density shall not be less than 1760 kg/cum.
Dry excavated soil may be used for backfilling only in open field outside road carriageway and carparks.
Backfilled materials shall be mechanically compacted in layers of 200mm and conform with the following
requirements :
(a) Within 500mm of formation level - 95% of max dry density using Test No. 13 BS 1377:1975;
(b) More than 500mm below formation level - 85% of max dry density using Test No. 12
BS 1377:1975;
LUP09/S51.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 51-13/13
51.26 REINSTATEMENT OF SERVICE TRENCHES (CONT'D)
Damages, directly or indirectly caused by the trench to carriageway, kerb, footpath, drain, sidetable, etc
regardless of its existing condition shall be reinstated to conform to the current standard and practice of
HDB.
Edges of all reinstated road pavement shall be cut straight with a power-saw. The saw-cut shall be of a
minimum depth of 75mm and edge of cut shall be at least 150mm from the edge of the trench depending
on the extent of damages to the road surface.
Unless otherwise stated, the reinstated road pavements shall consist of the following :
(a) 150mm asphalt premix.
(b) 350mm compacted crusher run road base binded with granite fines.
(c) The layer below the road base to the bottom of trench shall be made up of compacted
granite fines.
The level of reinstated road shall be allowed a tolerance of + 5mm from the existing road surface level
when measured with a 3m straight edge.
Reinstatement of footpath shall cover the full width of the footpath.
For turfed area, the reinstatement shall conform to the relevant clauses on turfing in this Specifications.
The Contractor shall be paid for work done under this Clause according to the Standard Schedule of
Rates.
All backfilling materials not conforming to or not compacted according to this Specifications shall be
removed and replaced with approved materials and recompacted to the stipulated standard at the
Contractor's own expenses.
SECTION 52/...
LUP09/S51.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-1/65
SECTION 52
52.0 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION IN GENERAL

FOR EXCAVATION AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
52.1 LOCAL MATERIALS
So far as is practicable or unless otherwise stated, materials and articles shall be of local manufacture.
They shall be obtained from suppliers who shall be approved by the SO Rep.
52.2 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND PROVISION OF STANDARD
All materials used in the construction of roads, drains, sewers, manholes etc shall be obtained from
approved manufacturers. Materials and articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards
(SS) published by PSB where these exist, otherwise British Standards (BS) or other specified Standards
shall apply. Where the Standard given in this document has been amended or superseded, the current
standard shall apply. Where British Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore
Standards (SS) where exist shall prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of
Practice (CP) shall be referred to during the construction where these exist, otherwise British Codes of
Practice or other codes shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
Where two or more alternative materials manufactured locally are proposed, the SO Rep may at his sole
discretion give preference to the use of a material that is approved under ISO 9000 or any of the quality
certification schemes of the PSB, such as PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme)
Certification Scheme.
For the purpose of this Clause, obtain all precast concrete products such as kerbs, aeration slabs, drain
units etc from ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme
Suppliers.
52.3 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH RESPECTIVE STANDARDS
If required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate certificate of
compliance with the Standard for which those materials or articles are specified to comply with.
52.4 TESTING OF MATERIALS
The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out tests on materials to be used in the Works.
Bear the cost of making any test unless otherwise specified.
The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested at a SAC
accredited laboratory and the results of such testing shall be accepted as final. If a sample does not
conform to the required Standard, the whole consignment shall be rejected and shall be removed from
Site at the Contractor's own expense and charges to be decided by the SO Rep shall be imposed. If for
good reasons the consignment cannot be rejected eg. material already installed, then the cost difference
between the inferior/undersized/non-complied materials and/or omitted labour costs based on latest
Schedule of Rates shall be recouped plus the imposition of charges under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to be decided by the SO Rep.
Also bear the cost of the final testing to be carried out by LTA, the Employer or any authority responsible
for the final taking over of the completed works such as premix, precast concrete kerbs, dividers, etc.
LUP09/S52.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-2/65
52.5 RATE OF EXCAVATION AND CONSTRUCTION
Arrange the work so that the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation. However, the
distance over which excavation may advance ahead of the concreting and drain construction will be
specified from time to time by the SO Rep.
52.6 SAFEGUARDING PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO SITE
Where work is undertaken near or adjacent to buildings and properties and in the opinion of the SO Rep,
the stability of such buildings and properties is liable to be affected as a result of the work, arrange to
have such buildings and properties inspected and record any cracks or any other defects which may be
affected by the work. Every precaution shall be taken to safeguard such building or property and it shall
be to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep. When directed, excavate in such lengths of excavation as
will permit the least amount to be opened at one time in order to minimize the danger of such open
excavation affecting the stability of buildings or their supports.
Be responsible for damage to public, private or other buildings and properties adjacent to the Site of the
works which is caused as a direct or indirect result of the Contractor's work. Should the Contractor fail to
take the necessary precautions, the SO Rep may, after giving the Contractor twenty-four (24) hours notice
in writing, carry out such work as may be necessary using labour, material, Construction Equipment,
implements and transport from other sources. The cost of such work will be charged to the Contractor.
52.7 DEALING WITH WATER
Be responsible and pay for the cost for the maintenance of temporary diversion or damming of any
existing drains, wherever necessary. Prior approval from the Drainage Department, PUB, shall be
obtained before Works commences. Any drains or water-courses so diverted shall be re-constructed in
their original positions on completion of the Works.
Remove all water which may arise or be brought into the trenches or excavations and keep the level of
such sub-soil or accumulated water below the bottom of any permanent work by the use of pumps or
suitable well-point apparatus. After raising the water referred to, at once convey it away in such a manner
as not to cause any damage, nuisance or injury. All sumps or wells which may be required for the
purpose of keeping the work dry shall be sunk clear of any permanent work and shall be refilled after
completion of the permanent works. Conduct the pumping operations so as to avoid undermining any
part of the work.
52.8 APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION
Report to the SO Rep when the excavations are ready to receive hardcore or lean concrete sub-base and
await the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Any hardcore or lean concrete sub-base or other work
put in before the excavation has been inspected and approved shall, if so directed, be removed and new
work substituted in accordance with the Specifications.
52.9 PREVENTION OF FLOATATION
The structures may not be heavy enough to resist the possible uplift due to water pressure until the
structure, soil cover and backfilling have been completed. Make adequate arrangement to keep the
excavation dry until the structures and filling are complete or adopt other approved means of ensuring the
stability of the temporary or permanent works. Submit proposed method to the SO Rep for approval
before Works commences and provide for adequate standby Construction Equipment and attendance
throughout 24 hours each day.
For pipelines laid in wet, waterlogged ground subject to flooding, take all necessary precautions to prevent
floating or movement of pipelines whether laying, laid or under test.
LUP09/S52.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-3/65
52.10 REFILLING
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the absolute necessity to compact the refilling by adequate
consolidation and ramming. Pay particular attention to filling and ramming around and above pipes in
trench to thoroughly compact the filling around structures and to the complete filling of the voids created
by the withdrawal of timbering.
When a trench is excavated under or near any existing work liable to be affected by subsidence of the
material in the trench, or where any permanent work will later be constructed under, across, along, or over
the line of the trench, fill the trench with Grade 15 concrete, or take such other means to prevent damage
by subsidence as the SO Rep may direct, whether such work is shown on the Drawings or not. Any extra
work so necessitated shall be paid for according to the Schedule of Rates, unless, in the opinion of the
SO Rep, it is necessitated by the Contractor's negligence, bad workmanship, faulty materials or lack of
reasonable foresight.
Maintain all refilled surfaces and be responsible for claims arising from accidents due to subsidence or
inadequate maintenance.
(a) Refilling for Portion of Trenches within

the Service Roads and Carpark/Sewer Works
All concrete shall be thoroughly set before refilling is commenced. In refilling the excavation, only
selected granular material free from large stone or lumps (eg. unwashed sand or granite fines)
shall be used in the initial refilling and carefully placed on top/next to the Permanent Works and
well packed and well rammed in a layer of 300mm as directed. Fill the remainder of the excavation
with unwashed sand or granite fines, in layers of not more than 600mm deep or such depth as
directed, each layer shall be thoroughly rammed before the next layer is placed. In all cases
efficient mechanical rammers shall be employed in refilling. Refilling shall include the filling in of all
voids caused by the withdrawal of timbering. During the removal of timbering from the trench
withdraw the runners only to the level of the backfilling as it proceeds regularly and in layers. As
timbers are lifted without exposing the face of the trench, immediately ram the filling hard into the
space left by the timber.
For sewer works, fill the trenches to a depth of 600mm over the pipes before the pipes are emptied
of water after testing, so that any damage that may be caused by ramming can be detected.
(b) Refilling for Roadbase
Keep separate those excavated materials which are suitable for subsequent backfilling. Carefully
repack selected excavated materials in place after refilling to form a compact neat surface.
52.11 IMPORTED FILLING MATERIAL
Where filling is required and suitable material from the excavations on Site is not available, imported filling
shall be used. This imported filling which must be to the approval of the SO Rep shall be good lateritic
gravel or hogging, broken stone, hardcore, quarry waste or other approved material.
Inform the SO Rep the source of supply of the imported filling materials.
52.12 WORKING SHAFT FOR HEADING
Obtain access to tunnel or heading work from the working shafts proposed on ends of the open
excavation in trench. The Contractor may be permitted to open additional working shafts within the length
of tunnel to facilitate the Works but such working shafts shall be formed and refilled at the Contractor's
expense.
Provide adequate timber and protect the ends of the open trench used as tunnel or heading access. All
such additional work shall be allowed for in his lump sum for excavating the tunnel.
LUP09/S52.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-4/65
52.13 TUNNEL EXCAVATION
Engage a registered Professional Engineer to submit all proposals for excavating, timbering and
constructing sewers and pipelines in tunnel and obtain the approval of the SO Rep before any work may
commences.
Be responsible for the safety of the timbering. Submit for approval, the design, calculation and full details
of the supports and timbering to be used.
The excavation for the tunnel shall be of sufficient size for proper execution of the construction work and
all timbering shall be driven and fixed in close contact with the ground to be supported. No payment for
overbreak or additional excavation shall be made and all such excavation shall be packed with concrete
at the Contractor's own expense.
Unless otherwise approved, the tunnels shall be close timbered and the timber shall be left in place on
completion of the Works at the expense of the Contractor. During excavation, securely fixed running
boards shall be provided to the floor of the tunnel and on completion or excavation, such running boards
shall be removed, the formation cleaned and dried out and a concrete sealing coat provided. The tunnel
shall be driven complete between access points before permanent work may commence and the work
shall at all times be carried out as quickly as possible so that the excavation shall remain open for the
shortest possible time.
The working face of the tunnel excavation shall be supported as necessary and shall be boxed up at the
end of each shift when continuous working is not in progress or whenever required by the SO Rep.
When work is in progress, proper access ladders shall be fixed and maintained at the tunnel access
points and the tunnel lighted by electricity at not more than 110 volts. Lamps shall be provided at not
more than 9 metres intervals and no flame or other naked light shall be used. Proper and adequate
ventilation fans and ducts shall be provided, maintained and operated at all times.
Pipes laid in heading shall be carefully bedded on Grade 25 concrete adjusted to line and level and
jointed, inspected, tested and approved. After approval, the whole of the tunnel section shall be carefully
and solidly packed with Grade 25 concrete all at the Contractor's own expense.
52.14 DEWATERING OF EXCAVATION
Where dewatering is approved, provide, operate and maintain a system satisfactory to the SO Rep of
temporary drains intercepting ditches, cut off drains, sub-drains, sumps, pumps, well-points, dewatering
equipment and all other things necessary for keeping the sub-soil or accumulated water out of the
excavation or at a level below the bottom of any permanent works for such a period as the SO Rep may
direct.
Where ground water irrespective of the sources, is encountered or anticipated provide sufficient pumps to
handle the ingress of water and provide and maintain in working order standby pumping units. Also
arrange for night and day manning and operation of the pumps wherever necessary to ensure that at all
times and weathers the work may proceed.
After raising the water herein referred to, at once convey it away in such a manner as not to cause any
nuisance or injury. No new or existing pipe may be used for the purpose of carrying water away from the
excavations without permission in writing from the SO Rep. Make good any damage whatsoever resulting
from such use of new or existing pipes or culverts. When sand, silt or mud particles are suspended and
maintained in the pumped water, tanks to settle the solids shall be provided to remove the solids before
discharge of the water.
Site temporary works for the control of water clear of the permanent works, except where temporary sub-
drains under the permanent works are approved.
Should the SO Rep give permission for temporary sub-drains under the permanent works, the pipes shall
be laid with a 75mm surround of 19mm single size aggregate and the top surface of the surround shall be
covered with tarred felt cloth or other approved material.
LUP09/S52.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-5/65
52.14 DEWATERING OF EXCAVATION (CONT'D)
Unless otherwise directed all temporary drains and sub-drains shall be finally sealed with concrete at
intervals to the SO Rep satisfaction and all temporary ditches, sumps, wells etc, shall be filled and
reinstated.
Include in his excavation rates for the cost of complying with this clause, irrespective of the methods
adopted.
52.15 SUPPORT FOR EXISTING WORK
When any excavation is carried out near, or under any existing work including buildings, services, mains,
cables, and surfaces such as roads, etc., liable to be affected by subsidence, take necessary measures to
prevent damage by subsidence, whether such existing work is shown on the Drawings or not. If it
becomes essential, in the opinion of the SO Rep to permanently divert any sewer, drain, pipe, cable or
other service, or to reconstruct any existing building in an alternative position, the diversion or
reconstruction shall be paid for by the Employer.
52.16 HARDCORE
Hardcore shall be composed of approved broken stone, brick, cement, concrete or other similar approved
material, free from excessive dust, foreign matter and other impurities. It shall not contain pieces
exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge. Oversized hardcore shall not be considered for use unless
it can be broken down to allowable range effectively.
52.17 TIMBER
All timber delivered to Site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content not exceeding 20%, straight,
sound, square cut, free from injuries, waney, edges, decay, shakes, large and dead knots, insect attack
and other serious Defects, and of the appropriate grade according to the Malayan Grading Rules for Sawn
Hardwood Timber (current edition) as below :
(a) All scantlings up to 400 sq. cm. in cross-section shall comply with the requirements of grade
"Merchantable".
(b) All large structural timber above 400 sq. cm. in cross-section shall comply with the requirements of
grade `Baulks & Large Squares'.
(c) All timber for joinery and dressing used in natural state shall comply with the requirements of grade
`Standard and Better'.
(d) All timber for joinery and dressing which is to be painted shall comply with the requirements of
grade `Merchantable'.
Any portion of the timber works showing signs of warps, shakes or other Defects within the Defects
Liability Period shall be replaced with new works together with all other works which may be affected
thereby, all at the Contractor's expense.
Submit sample pieces of the timber proposed to be used in the works to the SO Rep for approval.
Remove from the Site immediately any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not
approve.
The recommendations of the Singapore CP 1 and CP 7 for use of timber shall be referred to except where
they conflict with this Specifications. Where plywood is used, it shall comply with SS 1 and SS 72.
LUP09/S52.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-6/65
52.18 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
All timber for structural works shall be Balau, Chengal or Kapur. All timber joinery works shall be Kapur.
All carpentry works shall be sawn except where specified as wrot. All exposed surfaces of joinery works
shall be wrot by planing and sand-papering to an approved finish. Wrot timber shall be worked to the
correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber indicated in Drawings are nominal and a
maximum allowance of 2.5mm shall be permitted for each wrot face.
Upon delivery all timber shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all faces
and minimum of warping.
Take measurements for joinery works on Site and verify it with the dimensions shown in the Drawings.
When discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken on Site,
obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the Works.
Joints shall be formed in a proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all
exposed surfaces of joinery work. Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture,
the glue shall be waterproofed. All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before
fixing.
Coat the backs of all carpentry and joinery works in contact with masonry work with one coat of
"Solignum" or "Presotim" or other approved preservative. Allow the preservative to be thoroughly dried
before fixing of the Works. Treat all sawcuts similarly.
All structural members, assemblies or framework shall be capable of sustaining with due stability and
stiffness the whole dead and imposed loads without exceeding the Limits of Stresses stated in CP 1 and
CP 7. The timber shall be seasoned as far as practicable to a moisture content appropriate for its
particular use as spelled out in CP 1 and CP 7.
Treat all timber exposed to damp conditions or in contact with ground with "Solignum" or "Creosote" or
other approved wood preservative applied with brush in two coats, or be treated with approved
pressurised process.
52.19 PLYWOOD
Plywood shall be of the grades specified in SS 1 which in the opinion of the SO Rep appropriate to the
work and shall be as follows :
Grade I For use in the natural state. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle holes,
splits, glue, stains or other Defects.
Grade II For use where subsequent painting or similar treatment is required. The veneer on the face
side may have a few sound knots, occasional minor discolouration or stains and small inlay
repairs.
Grade III For use where the plywood is not normally visible. The veneer on the face may have other
Defects than those specified above provided that its serviceability is not affected.
Adhesives for plywood are to be one of the following types :
Type 1 Phenol Formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as weather and boil proof in BS 1203
(WBP).
Type 2 Urea formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as moisture and weather resistant (WR).
Unless otherwise specified, plywood for internal use shall be Grade II with Type 2 adhesive and plywood
for external use shall be Grade II with Type 1 adhesive.
Adequately protect all plywood used in permanent structure under damp or wet service conditions against
decay and insect attack by treatment conforming to SS 72.
Include in the Contract Sum cost of carrying out tests on plywood samples to determine the moisture
content and bonding according to SS 1 at the discretion of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S52.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-7/65
52.20 TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION
The term "timbering" shall cover all necessary methods of support including the use of timber, concrete,
steel sheet piling, steel sheeting or such materials as may be approved. If timber is used, it shall be of
species of Keruing or Kempas.
Supply and fix strong and sufficient timbering to support the sides and/or bottom of the excavation to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep and maintain the same until the constructional work is sufficiently advanced, in
the opinion of the SO Rep to permit the timbering to be withdrawn, which shall be conducted only under
the personal supervision of a competent person employed by the Contractor.
Carry out such timbering and shoring with due consideration to full flow or flooding conditions all to the
Submit to the SO Rep drawings and calculations showing details of the proposed timbering for approval.
Where excavation exceeds a depth of 4m, engage a registered Professional Engineer to submit the
design and supervise the erection of the timbering. No excavation work may start until the timbering
details are approved. Where excavations for culvert, drains, sewers and manhole are required, submit
the full details of the proposed timbering methods within one month from the date of the Employer's Letter
of Acceptance of the Contractor's Tender. Failure to submit and obtain approval of details expeditiously
may result in delays and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time on this ground.
Notwithstanding the approval given, the SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to improve,
alter, revise, strengthen the timbering from time to time.
Be responsible for any injury to the Work and any consequential damages caused arising out of the
remedy of the timbering and any advice, permission or approval given by the SO Rep related to the
relieve of timbering shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility here defined.
The SO Rep shall have the right to order excavation and construction work to be carried out in such
lengths and in such sections of the Works, as will, in his opinion, minimise the danger of such open
excavation affecting the stability of any nearby structures or ground, and the Contractor shall have no
claim for extra payment on this account. Shoring timbers shall be removed as the work proceeds only if
their removal does not endanger existing adjacent structure. Where the SO Rep deem it dangerous to
remove the shoring timbers, such timbers shall not be removed.
52.21 TIMBERING LEFT-IN
The Contractor shall be paid for all timbering left in the excavation on the instruction of the SO Rep
provided the timber is required to give permanent support to trench sides, services or buildings. No
payment shall be made where timber has to be left in, on the instruction of the SO Rep to counter any
Defect or negligence in the Contractor's execution of the Works. Only the actual quantity of timber left in
shall be paid for. Payment shall not be made for labour in cutting nor for timber in ends thus cut off, nor
for the disposal of additional surplus excavated materials due to the leaving in of timber.
52.22 STEEL TRENCH SHEETING
Where the subsoil conditions are expected to be of a soft and unstable character in trench excavation, the
normal methods of timbering will probably prove inadequate to avoid subsidence of the adjoining road
surfaces and other services. The Contractor shall be responsible for all such damages as specified
elsewhere.
In such circumstances use Steel Trench Sheeting or Sheet Steel Piling adequately supported by timber
struts, walings, etc. Supply, pitch, drive and subsequently remove trench sheeting or piling in accordance
with other items of the Specifications and the terms Timber or Timbering shall also apply to Steel Trench
Sheeting.
LUP09/S52.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-8/65
52.23 STEEL SHEET PILING
The Contractor may use steel sheet piling during the construction of the Works subject to the approval of
the SO Rep and shall bear all and every expense in connection therewith, including waste and burning off
piles if necessary.
Steel sheet piles shall conform to the provisions of BS 4360 and shall be driven where required and
approved or directed.
Engage a registered Professional Engineer to design the layout of the piling and the overall dimensions of
the excavation to suit the sheets and corners available and to give sufficient working space for the proper
construction of the Works. For purposes of this Contract, it shall be clearly and definitely understood that
the terms `timber' or `timbering' as used in any portion of the Specifications or Drawings shall be held to
include `Steel Sheet Piling'.
52.24 LIABILITY OF TIMBERING
Approval by the SO Rep of the timbering shall not absolve the Contractor from his responsibility and he
shall be responsible for making good any damage caused as a result of the timbering failing to give proper
support to the sides of the excavation.
Carry out the timbering to the sides of excavation for structures in such a way that there is no obstruction
caused to the fixing of formwork for the walls. Remove the supporting struts and walings in stages to suit
progress of concreting.
If the SO Rep is not satisfied that the standard of timbering is equal to that shown on the approved
drawings or that the sides of the excavations have not been secured in a manner to render such
excavations safe for working, he may, one hour after notifying the Contractor or his representative in
writing, employ other persons to alter the timbering and the cost of such workmen and materials employed
shall be paid for by the Contractor.
52.25 WITHDRAWAL OF TIMBERING
Withdraw runners and sheets and steel sheet piles in lifts as backfilling and compaction is taking place.
Any damage caused by subsidence of the excavation resulting from the careless withdrawal of support
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
52.26 TIMBER PILING
(a) Scope of Piling Work and Valuation
The value of Works completed at any stage shall be the product of the net penetration of driven
piles and the rate per metre run, as described in the Standard Schedule of Rates. Unless
described otherwise, such rate shall include preliminaries, all labour, materials, Construction
Equipment and its mobilisation, supply and driving of piles, excavation for piling and cutting, piles
cutting, wastage and everything necessary for the execution and completion of piling work.
The difference between the value of piling works completed and that as specified in the Contract
as computed in the manner described in the foregoing shall be adjusted as a variation to the
Contract.
(b) Construction Equipment & Experience for Driving Piles
At the time of Tender submit a schedule, full details of the equipment and plants to be committed
on Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling work shall also
be submitted.
LUP09/S52.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-9/65
52.26 TIMBER PILING (CONT'D)
(c) Warranty
Be responsible for the proper execution of the piling work according to the Specifications and the
pile layout drawings. Make good any damage or Defect to the super-structure resulting from
defective execution of Work at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The
warranty period shall be one year after the completion of the superstructure.
(d) Timber Piles
Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB Materials List and of approved brands/trademarks.
Timber piles shall be 100mm x 100mm, 125mm x 125mm, 150mm x 150mm or 175mm x 175mm
square sawn timber foundation piles with an allowance tolerance of + 5mm, produced from the
species Kempas or Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N/mm2 in direct compressive
stress and with an ultimate resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal working load.
The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and
toe by more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length.
Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product
Listing Scheme) Certification Scheme Sippliers.
Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an
SAC accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency :
(i) for every contract supply, a minimum of two tests;
(ii) For supply up to 3,000 metre run, the first test will be carried out from any batch of piles,
subsequent test will be made at each interval of 3,000 metre run, the number of test will
depend on the quantity of supply but subject to a minimum of two tests for each contract as
stated in (i) above.
All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure
of not less than 12.5 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and
with a net dry salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All
methods of chemical treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072.
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose
charges against the Contractor for each test that fails to comply with the above requirement.
In the event that any test by SAC accredited laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of
piles from which the random sampling is obtained completely from the Site. Should the Contractor
negligently or wilfully transport the same batch that had failed previously to the Site again, this act
shall be deemed to be an infringement and Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply.
(e) Steel Box Joint
Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and
coat with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use.
(f) Hammer and Set for Pile Driving
Use free drop hammer to drive the timber pile. The hammer weight for driving 175mm x 175mm
pile shall be 1.5 tonnes, and for driving 150mm x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm
pile shall be 1 tonne.
The hammer shall drop a minimum of 1300mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for
175mm x 175mm pile shall be not more than 15mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for
150mm x 150mm, 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be not more than 20mm.
LUP09/S52.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-10/65
(g) Driving of Piles
Drive Piles accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as
indicated in the Drawings.
Guide piles at the top and bottom during driving and suitably constrain them to maintain their
correct position by means of guides. No piles which has been deflected from its course, or has
been wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the drawings by
more than 25mm. Bear all additional costs of the amendment in pilecaps, ground beams, etc as
designated by the SO Rep as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the
permissible tolerance. Alternatively, the SO Rep may require extra piles to be driven at the
Contractor's own expense.
During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the
pile. A 25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to
separate the helmet from the head of the pile.
Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the
pile hammer and spiked to the section of both piles.
(h) Piling Record
Drive piles only in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetrations and sets of every pile shall be
subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the
SO Rep on Site and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following
items :
(i) Set
(ii) Temporary compression
(iii) Penetration from ground level
(iv) Length of pile and size of section
(v) Ground level
(vi) Cut-off level to the top of pile
(vii) No. of joints used
(viii) Time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The
above record shall show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the whole
process of driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced it shall continue until the final
penetration or set is reached.
(i) Penetration of Piles
The penetration of driven piles is the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level
of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the SO Rep and the
Contractor. Mark the timber piles with red paint at every 300mm to enable easy determination of
pile penetration.
(j) Damaged or Rejected Piles
All piles which are broomed, split or damaged during handling or transportation shall be rejected.
All piles damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb resulting in
no set after driving for considerable length, where it should set based on soil data and site
condition, shall also be rejected.
LUP09/S52.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-11/65
(k) Compensating Piles
Replace all piles driven into ground and rejected with compensating pile or piles. The position and
number of compensating pile/s as decided by the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of
the pile group is not altered. The Employer shall only pay the cost for the original number of pile/s
in the pile group as shown in the Drawings.
(l) Removal of obstructions of Piling
In the course of piling, only the removal of natural obstruction 2.5m below the ground surface shall
be paid for by the Employer as an extra item based on the Contract Schedule of Rates and only if
the SO Rep is satisfied that the Contractor has made every effort to proceed with piling by avoiding
the obstruction. Any excavation for obstruction not exceeding 2.5m, including restoring of ground
surrounding the piles, and any other works necessary to complete the operation to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep shall deemed to be included in the Contract.
(m) Cutting off of Piles
Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout drawings or otherwise
directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately.
In cutting of piles, ensure that a surveyor is maintained at the Site for such work.
Not to reuse any pile which has been cut off as wastage unless the waste pile length exceeds
2.5m and the cut-off head has been treated.
52.27 PAINTING
(a) Material
All paints, primers and other materials shall comply with SS5, SS6, SS7, SS34, SS37, SS38,
SS150, SS206 and SS345 or other relevant specifications of PSB. Where such paints, primers
and other materials are locally manufactured they shall be used in preference to products
manufactured by foreign country or countries.
(i) Enamel Gloss Paint
Paint for timber and metal work shall have a synthetic enamel gloss finish with an alkyd-
resin base.
Where an undercoat is specified, obtain the paint from the same manufacturer whose gloss
paint is approved for the particular work. A different brand shall not be used unless the SO
Rep has given his consent.
If more than one under-coat is specified, the undercoats shall be of different colour from
each other to enable the number of coats applied to be checked. Before the following coat
is applied, allow each coat at least 24 hours to dry. Carry out painting with proper paint
brushes. Any other method of painting shall not be allowed unless approved by the SO
Rep.
(ii) Primers
Primer for aluminium, zinc or galvanised iron shall be an approved Etching Primer with a
Polyvinyl resin base and then cover with another coat of approved red lead primer with a
pure linseed oil base. Thoroughly mix etching primer with the Activator before use in the
ratio of 3 parts Base to 1 part Activator. Being a dual pack material, the mixture shall have
a pot life of 12 hours.
LUP09/S52.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-12/65
52.27 PAINTING (CONT'D)
(a) Material (Cont'd)
(ii) Primers (Cont'd)
Carry out the painting of etching primer coat under shed or in the factory.
The dried etching primer coat shall not come in contact with water and apply a coat of Red
lead primer over it within two days of applying the etching primer.
(iii) Emulsion Paint
All emulsion paints shall be of an approved brand with an acrylic base. Apply with a proper
paint brush and not a locally made colour wash brush. If more than one coat is specified
the previous coat shall be properly dried before the following coat is applied.
(iv) Carriageway Marking Paints
All paints used for carriageway marking shall be quick-drying, chlorinated rubber based and
shall comply in all respects with the requirements specified in the Singapore Standard
221:1979 (UDC 667.633:625.746) for Road Marking painting. The Contractor may be
required to submit to the SO Rep for his approval two cans each of five litres of the white
and yellow colour paint he proposes to use. If during the term of this Contract the
Contractor of his own accord decides to change the manufacturer of the above approved
paint(s), he is required to submit samples of the new paint as directed hereto before. The
paints so submitted shall be sent to PSB for testing for compliance with this Specification
and of the corresponding statement of characteristics so submitted.
The SO Rep may direct the Contractor to change the supplier or manufacturer of the paints
used in this Contract if he is satisfied that the paints used in this Contract do not comply
with this Specification and of the corresponding Statement of Characteristics. Comply
further with the instructions of the SO Rep all at his own expense.
The SO Rep may require samples of reasonable quantity of any paint used in the works for
testing by PSB. The Contractor shall be advised of the results of testing by PSB through
the SO Rep. Bear the costs of all testing. If the paint tested fails to meet the approved
requirements on the corresponding Statement of Characteristics, then all works represented
by the paint sample or the entire road or roads painted on the same day where such paint
was taken for testing shall be rejected and no payment shall be made for such paintings.
Deliver all paints for carriageway marking to the Site ready for use. When the container for
the paint is opened, the paint shall show no signs of livering or instability and be free from
skin, dry sediment, and caking and shall mix readily with a paddle to a smooth
homogeneous state.
The paint shall meet the quantitative requirements specified in the following table :
Requirement
Characteristic
Minimum Maximum
Pigment content, percentage by weight of paint 40 60
Non volatile matter, percentage by weight of paint 60 -
Viscosity, kerbs unit 70 80
Specific Gravity 1.22 -
Fineness of grind, microns - 50
"No pick up" drying time, mins - 15
Opacity (contrast ratio), percent
White 70 -
Yellow 60 -
Red 50 -
LUP09/S52.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-13/65
(a) Material (Cont'd)
(iv) Carriageway Marking Paints (Cont'd)
Tests conducted by PSB
The properties and characteristics for all road line paints used in this Contract shall if
required, be tested in accordance with the methods of testing specified in and requirements
inferred from the respective standard adopted by PSB.
Method of Test
Item Test
(Refer to SS 5)
1 Non volatile matter Part 6

2 Colour Part 10
3 Flexibility and Adhesion (Bend Test) Part 12
4 Scratch resistance Part 13
5 Condition in container Part 16
6 Skimming properties Part 17
7 Specific gravity Part 19
8 Dilution stability Part 20
9 Brushing properties Part 21
10 Spraying properties Part 22
11 Viscosity (Stormer viscosimeter) Part 23A
12 Fineness of grind Part 24
13 Pigment content Part 26
14 Opacity (contrast ratio) Part 29
15 "No pick-up" drying time Part 39
16 Resistance to bleeding Part 40
17 Abrasion resistance Part 41
(b) Certificate
Submit a certified `STATEMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS' on the prescribed Form A provided.

This statement shall be completed by the paint manufacturer whose paint the Contractor proposes
to use in the Works. This statement shall be used to make periodic assessment of the Contractor's
paints as sampled from time to time and is for the strict confidential use of the SO Rep and the
information in the Statement would not be revealed but shall serve and assist in identifying and
testing the paint samples taken during the execution of the Works.
LUP09/S52.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-14/65
FORM "A"
STATEMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS
FOR CARRIAGEWAY MARKING PAINTS
To : The SO Rep in -charge CONFIDENTIAL
Dear Sir
The following are the characteristics of the designated sample of carriageway marking paint submitted by:
M/s to M/s
(Paint Manufacturer) (Name of Contractor)
of to be used under this contract.

(Address)
1. Manufacturer's Code No. :
2. Colour : White/Yellow
3. Type : Chlorinated Rubber Based or (specify)
4. Weight per litre kg per litre for both colours
5. Drying time : (a) No pick up minutes for both colours

(b) Hard dry minutes for both colours
6. Viscosity (as ready for spraying application) kerbs for both colours
7. Percentage of pigment in paint for both colours
8. Pigment volume concentration for both colours
9. Percentage of vehicle in paint for both colours
10. Percentage of non-volatile in vehicle
11. State chemical nature of non-volatile vehicle :
12. Recommended rate of application of paint on a road line
100mm wide linear kilometers per litre of paint
LUP09/S52.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-15/65
FORM "A"
White Paint Yellow Paint
13. (a) Nature of pigment
(b) Weight of above pigment per litre of finished paint
(c) Recommended solvent for
(i) Thinning : % of
(ii) Cleaning
I, ,
(Name of Officer) (Designation in Company)
of
(Manufacturing Firm)
certify the above to be true. This statement of paint characteristics is submitted for
(Name of Contractor)
________________________ _______________________ _________________________

(Seal of Company) (Signature) (Date)
LUP09/S52.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-16/65
(c) Equipment
Mechanisation in all aspects of painting of road line and carriageway markings is compulsory
under this Contract. It shall be a prerequisite for the Contractor to own and make available the
following equipment for use under the Contract :
(i) Carriageway Marking Machines
The apparatus shall be self propelled and constructed so as to apply or spray paint under
pressure in continuous uniformity to dimensions of the markings. It shall be equipped with
the devices for agitation of the paint while in operation. All parts of the apparatus which
come into contact with the paint shall be so constructed as to be easily cleaned and
maintained.
The apparatus shall be capable of adjustment to provide a uniform spray wet film thickness
of between 200 to 500 microns and in this respect shall be automatically self drive and be
capable of travel at uniform speed. It shall be mobile and manoeuvrable to the extent that
straight lines can be followed and regular curves can be prescribed in a true arc. The
apparatus shall have the capacity of selection of either automatic or manual skip marking
operations preferably to four preset programmes. The apparatus shall also be capable of
marking line widths varying from 100mm to 600mm with extended facilities of applying paint
to symbolic signs and messages using templates.
The marking apparatus shall also be equipped with devices capable of applying glass
beads ballotini in such a manner that the ballotini are dispersed almost instantly upon the
freshly painted surface at a rate of 0.72 kg per litre of paint or at the recommended rate of
the paint manufacturer. The ballotini depositor shall be synchronised with the cut off of the
paint application control. The ballotini shall be applied with sufficient velocity to ensure
retention in the surface of the paint.
(ii) Roadline Erasing Machine
The apparatus shall be mechanically propelled and be able to erase road lines uniformly in
the cold state.
(iii) Flow Cups and Wet Films Gauges
All painting machines shall be provided with approved flow cups (ISO flow cups or
equivalent) for measuring the consistency of viscosity of the paint used and wet film gauges
(Ericksen type 333 or equivalent) with a measuring range of 0 to 600 microns having an
accuracy of 25 microns for the determination of the wet film thickness of paint laid. Also
supply six aluminium plates 200mm x 200mm of 15 gauge for the purpose of the testing of
the thickness of the road line paint.
(d) Mode of Operation
All road line paintings and carriageway markings which include pedestrian crossing, box junctions,
continuous broken lines, numerals, bus zones, arrows, letterings, etc shall be fully mechanised and
drawn or spray painted by road line painting machine. On no account shall paint be applied by
brushes to road lines and markings and in the event that such lines and markings are drawn no
payment shall be considered and made to the Contractor.
Painting of other traffic appurtenances and road related facilities may unless otherwise directed by
the SO Rep be carried out by brushes. Under the circumstances workmanship shall be of the
highest standard and care shall be exercised to produce a smooth and uniform coat of paint.
LUP09/S52.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-17/65
(e) Weather Conditions
(i) No painting shall be done on surfaces which are wet or damp from rain, dew or any other
causes until they have been properly dried.
(ii) Prepare all surfaces before the application of paints. Preparation shall have the following
meaning for the surfaces indicated :
Preparation
(1) On new concrete or plastered surfaces to receive cement paint or emulsion paint.
Prepare by washing down with soap (if necessary) to remove dirt, grease and other
adhering materials. Rinse off with clean water and allow to dry thoroughly.
(2) On existing painted plastered or concrete surfaces to receive cement paint or

emulsion paint.
Prepare by removing all nails etc., scraping thoroughly and brushing briskly with a
stiff brush to remove efflourescent and flaking materials. Where necessary wash
down with soap to remove dirt, grease and rinse off with clean water and allow to dry
thoroughly. Make good areas of defective plaster or concrete and fill up cracks and
holes with approved filler.
(3) New metal surfaces to receive paint.
Prepare by scraping and removing all rust, mill scales by sand paper and rub down
with emery cloth.
(4) Existing painted metal surface to receive primer coat and paint.
Prepare by burning down all existing paint, thoroughly wash off the surface with soap
and rinse with clean water. Allow it to dry thoroughly and rub down with emery cloth.
(5) Existing painted surface to receive paint only.
Prepare by rubbing down with sand paper to remove the flaky old paints, and rinse
surface thoroughly with water and allow to dry thoroughly.
(6) Painting of road line and carriageway markings.
Prepare by sweeping off all dust, grit and foreign matter on the road surface with stiff
brushes. Mark out to the required dimensions and alignment for directional arrows,
box junctions, bus zones continuous or broken lines, lettering, etc. before the
application of the paint.
(f) Wet Film Thickness
Supply all paints for carriageway marking ready mixed by the manufacturer and no thinning with
any materials to the already mixed paints shall be permitted.
Apply all paints for carriageway marking by apparatus approved by the SO Rep to a wet film
thickness of 375 microns (plus or minus 50 microns).
The SO Rep may request the Contractor to mark measurements with respect to the thickness of
wet paint film by measuring with the appropriate gauge. For this purpose, supply at least six
pieces of clean aluminium gauge No. 15 plates each of size 200mm by 200mm. The marking
apparatus with set settings shall run over one plate and the wet film thickness measured
expeditiously.
LUP09/S52.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-18/65
(g) Colour Scheme
The colour schemes for any work and the various coats to be applied shall be determined by the
SO Rep.
(h) Adulteration
(i) Under no circumstances shall any oil or spirit be added to paint. All oil or spirit found in the
possession of any painter or the presence on Site of any tins, drums, kegs or other
containers marked with the name of a brand or material or manufacturer different from
those which the SO Rep has selected to be used as a receptacle for brushes, as paint
kettles, etc. shall be taken as evidence of adulteration.
(ii) At any one time during the actual painting the SO Rep shall have the right to take samples
of paint, or scrap or chip off actual painted work for the purpose of laboratory testing. The
testing of such samples shall be borne by the Employer. Paint which is found to be
adulterated, or different from the original sample as tested, shall be dealt with under the
provisions of Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities". Erase off and clean all the rejected
paint work applied up to that time and to repaint same, at his own expenses.
(iii) Before any paint is applied the prepared surfaces shall be inspected and approved by the
SO Rep.
(iv) After a coat has been applied the succeeding coat shall not be applied until the work has
similarly been inspected and approved and not before 24 hours have lapsed after the first
application.
(i) Durability of Paintwork
The visibility of roadlines and carriageway markings shall not be decreased by more than 50% at
any time after the initial panting or repainting.
Provide everything necessary to maintain all paintworks during the Defects Liability Period at his
own expense.
For roadlines and carriageway markings, repaint the entire work when the paintworks failed to
meet the above requirement and at the end of the Defects Liability Period. In this respect, the
decision of the SO Rep on the 50% visibility requirement shall be final.
For other painted items of structures, provide everything necessary and repaint every and all such
items with 1 coat of approved paints at the end of the Defects Liability Period. Satisfactorily attend
to all Defects such as rust, chipped or dented surfaces, etc. prior to repainting. In this respect,
arrange a joint site meeting with the SO Rep before any remedial work is carried out, and comply
with all requirements as directed.
52.28 REFLECTORISED THERMOPLASTIC ROAD MARKING
(a) General
Where reflectorised thermoplastic road marking is indicated on the Drawings or where directed by
the SO Rep, the road shall be prepared and the prime coat and reflectorised thermoplastic road
marking supplied and applied in the manner as specified.
On receipt of instructions from the SO Rep, proceed promptly with such work on receipt of such
instructions. Carry out the Works continuously and complete within such time as specified allowing
only for unavoidable lost time because of any inclement weather during the course of the Works.
LUP09/S52.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-19/65

(CONT'D)
(b) Material Specifications
(i) Thermoplastic Material
The thermoplastic material to be used under this Specifications shall comply with the British
Standard BS 3262:1982 - "Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials". The
material shall be able to resist damage caused by the spillage of petroleum on the road.
The material shall be tough, durable, elastic and of heavy duty, formulated to adhere
excellently on pavements of all descriptions and to provide superior resistance to abrasion.
The material shall be able to withstand the ravages of traffic impacts, staling and flaking.
The thermoplastic material shall be so manufactured to be applied by extrusion onto the

pavement in molten form with glass beads mixed in and also dropped into the material
immediately after it is applied. Reflectorization with solid glass beads of a suitable grading
shall be used to improve the visibility of road markings at night. The proportion and grading
of glass beads shall be in accordance with paragraph (b)(vi) of this Clause and shall be
correctly sprayed to achieve the specified retroreflection throughout its lifetime.
(ii) Aggregate
The aggregate shall consist of light coloured silica and, calcite, quartz and calcined flint.
(iii) Pigment
White material shall be titanium dioxide complying with the requirements of type A
(anatese) or type R (rutile) of BS 1851.
Yellow material shall consist of sufficient yellow pigment of lead chromate of sufficient heat
stability when heated to temperature of 200 centigrade to substitute part or all of the
titanium dioxide.
(iv) Extender
Extender shall be in whiting (calcium carbonate prepared from natural chalk) complying with
BS 1795.
(v) Binder
Binder shall consist of synthetic hydrocarbon resin plasticized with mineral oil.
(vi) Solid Glass Beads
The reflectorization shall be done by solid glass bead, of which the following classes are
appropriate for use :
Class Application
A Incorporation in thermoplastic road marking compounds
B Surface applied for thermoplastic road marking compounds and

pavement marking paints
The solid glass bead shall be made from soda glass and not less than 70% by mass shall
be of transparent glass, reasonably spherical and free from flaws.
LUP09/S52.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-20/65

(CONT'D)
(b) Material Specifications (Cont'd)
(vi) Solid Glass Beads (Cont'd)
Class A glass beads shall conform to the following requirements of BS 6088 with respect to
particle size distribution, roundness and Defects :
Minimum % spherical Maximum % of

beads by mass tested defective beads as
%
Sieve in accordance with tested in accordance
Retained
Appendix C of with Appendix D
BS 3262 of BS 3262
1.18 mm 0 to 3 )
1.18 mm 0 to 3 ) 70
30
850 µm 0 to 10 )
425 µm 90 to 100 )
Class B glass beads shall conform to the following requirements of BS 6088 with respect to
particle size distributions, roundness and Defects :
Minimum % spherical Maximum % of

beads by mass tested defective beads as
%
Sieve in accordance with tested in accordance
Retained
Appendix C of with Appendix D of
BS 3262 BS 3262
(µm)
850 0 to 5 )
600 5 to 20 )
300 30 to 75 ) 80 20
180 10 to 30 )
Below 180 0 to 315 )
The solid glass beads may be applied by either gravity feed or air assisted feed and may
have a moisture proof coating or a flotation coating.
The solid glass bead used shall be of the chemical composition given in the tables below:
Chemical Composition Requirement
Silicon dioxide Si02 not less than 70%
Calcium oxide Ca0 )

Magnesium oxide Mg0 ) together not less than 8%
Sodium oxide Na20 )
Potassium oxide K2 0 )
Aluminium oxide Al203 ) together not more than 18%
Ferric oxide Fe203 )
LUP09/S52.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-21/65

(CONT'D)
(b) Material Specifications (Cont'd)
(vi) Solid Glass Beads (Cont'd)
The proportions of the constituents of the mixed materials shall comply with the following
requirements :
Percentage by Mass of total mixture

Item Constituents
Minimum Maximum
1 Binder (resin and oil) 18 22
2 Solid glass beads 20+ -
3 Aggregate, pigment extender,
78 82
and solid glass beads*
* where specified
+ 20% shall be maintained even in the case of material to which solid glass
beads are to be applied by pressure application.
The grading or the combined aggregates, pigment, extender and solid glass beads as found
on analysis shall comply with the following requirements :
Sieve Size Percentage by mass passing

2.80mm 100
600 microns 75 - 95
(c) Equipments Specification
Mechanisation in all aspects of painting of road line and carriageway markings is compulsory
under this Contract. It shall be a pre-requisite for the Contractor to own and make available the
following equipments for use under the Contract :
(i) Carriageway Marking Machines
The equipment shall be self propelled and constructed so as to apply thermoplastic

roadmarking using screed method, or where the roadmarking thickness required are of
1.5mm only, spray thermoplastic can be applied.
It shall be equipped with devices to provide uniform heating, continuous mixing and
agitation of the material with ballotini beads while in operation.
The equipment shall be capable of adjustment to ensure continuous uniformity in the

dimensions of the stripe. It shall be mobile and manoeuvrable to the extent that straight
lines can be prescribed in a true arc. It shall provide a means of clearly cutting off square
stripe ends upon the installed line. The finished lines shall have well-defined edges and
free of wariness.
Provide a special melting kettle for heating, melting and mixing of the thermoplastic
material. The kettle shall be equipped with a correct thermometer so as to provide positive
temperature control and prevent overheating of the thermoplastic material. Heated thermal
oil jacket may be utilised to keep the thermoplastic material at constant temperature. When
the spray method is employed, the traverse speed of the equipment shall be between five
(5) to seven (7) kph. In this case, a self contained preheater unit shall be provided. The
heating shall be by oil jacket and thermostatically controlled. A transport trailer unit towable
easily by a land rover or equivalent vehicle shall be provided for the transportation of the
spray machine from site to site. The trailer shall be twin-ram and of tiltable deck raised and
lowered by a screw lever device without any wheel housing to interfere with a machine
having side mounted equipment.
LUP09/S52.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-22/65

(CONT'D)
(c) Equipments Specification (Cont'd)
(i) Carriageway Marking Machines (Cont'd)
The equipment shall also be equipped with devices capable of applying solid glass beads
ballotini in such a manner that the ballotini are dispersed upon the freshly painted surface.
The ballotini depositor shall be synchronised with the cut off of the paint application control.
The ballotini shall be applied at a sufficient rate to ensure retention in the surface of the
paint. For the case of a glass bead spray gun, the rate of glass bead dispersion shall be up
to 7 kg/min.
All parts of the equipment which come into contact with the paint shall be so constructed as
to be easily cleaned and maintained. Ensure that the equipment is properly cleaned or
maintained at all times.
(ii) Roadline Erasing Machine
The apparatus shall be mechanically propelled and be able to erase road lines uniformly in
the cold state.
(iii) Retroreflectometer for Measuring

Retroreflectives of Roadmarking
It is essential that the Contractor provides at least two (2) units of retroreflectometer for use
in this Contract. The instrument shall be robust, simple and quick to operate, weighing not
more than 10kg and portable (preferably having dimensions not more than 500 x 210 x
210mm) and be operated by one-operator. It shall be easily connected to a 24 Volt car-
battery or a suitable generator for power supply and shall have digital readout in mcd/lx.m2.
The measuring area of the instrument shall be of a maximum width of 100mm for each
reading taken.
The measuring geometry shall be as follows :
Entrance Angle : 86.5%

Observer Angle : -85%
The lamp used shall be a single 12 volt 100W halogen/quartz Iodide lamp which shall be
easily replaceable without tools. The instrument shall be internally zeroed and calibrated;
ie. it shall have a built in zero and reference standard and when in normal use shall be
capable of setting to zero and calibrating to 600 (six hundred) mcd/lx.m2.
(iv) Deep Frame Micrometer for measuring thickness of Roadmarking
It is essential that the Contractor provide two (2) units of approved deep frame micrometer
with an anvil area of at least 10mm2 and an accuracy of 0.01mm for use in this Contract.
(d) Method Specifications for Application of Thermoplastic Roadmarking
(i) Preparation of Site
An approved adhesive primer coat at the rate of 220 gm per sq metre shall be provided on
old polished surfaces of bituminous pavements, existing road markings and on concrete
before the markings are applied to ensure optimum adhesion. The thermoplastic material
shall not be laid over loose detritus, mud or extraneous matter or over old flaking markings
of roadline paint or thermoplastic material.
The road surface shall be clean and absolutely dry before markings are placed over. The
surface shall be swept by a handsweeper, and any damp spot or grease stain shall be
burned off with a gas burner.
In events whereby existing road lines and markings are out of alignment with the new
thermoplastic lines and markings, erase off such existing road lines and markings using
Roadline Erasing Machine.
LUP09/S52.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-23/65

(CONT'D)
(d) Method Specifications for Application of Thermoplastic Roadmarking (Cont'd)
(ii) To avoid discoloration and embrittlement of the material due to heating at a temperature in
excess of that laid by the manufacturer, the thermoplastic material shall be heated in
sufficient quantities in a heater fitted with a mechanical stirrer. Once molten, the material
shall be laid on expeditiously. It shall not remain in a molten state for more than 6 hours for
hydrocarbon resins and shall not at any time heated above the manufacturer's declared
safe heating temperature.
(iii) Laying of Thermoplastic Materials
The application of the material to the road shall be by machines using the screed and/or
spray method. Equip his machine with various sizes of shoes or to employ a range of
machines that would enable him to mark the required lines in one pass. The materials shall
be laid within the temperature range specified by the manufacturer and not exceeding 180º
centigrade. The thermoplastic markings shall be uniform in texture and thickness and free
from blisters, bubbles and streaks. The finished lines shall be sharp and free of ragged
edges.
Proper templates shall be used for marking of arrows and letterings.
The thermoplastic material shall be applied at the specified thickness excluding surface
applied solid glass beads or otherwise specified.
Be responsible for road surface preparation to ensure satisfactory adhesion of the

thermoplastic material.
The road surface shall be free from moisture and loose particles. The application of the
material shall take place when the road temperature is lower than 40º centigrade and the
relative humidity of the air not greater than 85%.
(iv) Reflectorization by Surface Application
The material shall have minimum 20% (by weight) of ballotini beads incorporated in the
thermoplastic as specified in Paragraph (b) (vii) of this clause. To achieve immediate
reflection, a further quantity of glass beads shall be sprayed onto the hot material at the
time of application. The beads shall be applied by pneumatically "fired" drop-on or by
gravity at the rate of approximately 300 ±50 gm/m2, immediately after the thermoplastic
material has been deposited on the road but before it has hardened.
The retroreflectorization of the thermoplastic roadmarking shall be measured in the field by

the retroreflectometer as in paragraph (c) (iii) of this Clause.
Measurements shall be done at suitable time when traffic density is lowest with proper
signing as specified in Clause 1.9.1 "Site Safety Measures".
(v) Thickness
The material shall be laid to the specified thickness of 1.5mm/3.0mm. When the film
thickness is specified as 1.5mm/3.0mm, the minimum thickness of thermoplastic lines, as
viewed from a lateral cross section, shall be not less than 1.5mm/3.0mm at the edge and
centre. These measurement shall be taken as an average through any one metre section
of the line.
The minimum thickness specified are exclusive of surface applied solid glass beads. The
method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with Appendix B of BS
3262:1981.
LUP09/S52.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-24/65

(CONT'D)
(e) Performance Specification and Related Test Methods
All material properties and their related test methods shall as far as possible conform to
BS 3262:1981 unless otherwise stated or approved by the SO Rep.
Generally the material shall be easy to apply, has high brightness, very short overdriving time and
very low dirt attack. In order for the material to be considered it should have the following
properties :
(i) Colour Luminance
When tested in accordance with BS 3262:1981 Appendix D, the luminance factor of white
shall not be less than 70 (as delivered) while that for yellow shall not be less than 80
(as delivered).
(ii) Density
The density of the thermoplastic material shall not be less than 1.65 kg/1.
(iii) Softening Point
When tested by the Ring and Ball method in connection with Appendix C of BS 4692, the
softening point shall be greater than 80º centigrade.
(iv) Heat Stability
When tested in accordance with Appendix E of BS 3262:1981, the decrease in luminance

factor of the white and yellow material as measured in accordance with Appendix D shall
not be more than 5.
(v) Flow Resistance
A cone made and tested in accordance with Appendix F BS 3262:1981 shall not slump by
more than 25%.
(vi) Resistance to calcium chloride
The material when immersed in a strong solution of calcium chloride for a period of 4 weeks
will remain completely unaffected.
(vii) Viscosity
The material shall possess the following characteristics - solid at 20º centigrade, thick fluid
at 170º centigrade.
(viii) Abrasive Resistance
The material shall possess excellent wear-resistance properties. The wear resistance shall
be measured on a Taber Abraser Type 503 standard abrasion tester using H-22 calibrade
wheels in accordance with Appendix K of BS 3262:1981. The loss in weight of the test
panel after 200 revolutions shall not exceed 0.5gm.
(ix) Skid Resistance
When tested in accordance with Appendix G, BS3262:1981 skid resistance of the newly
placed road marking or any roadmarking that is still within the one-year Defects Liability
Period shall not be less than 45.
LUP09/S52.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-25/65

(CONT'D)
(e) Performance Specification and Related Test Methods (Cont'd)
(x) Degree of Erosion
When the material applied in accordance with the Specifications, is tested in accordance
with Appendix M of BS 3262:1981, the total wear index for the test area on each stripe shall
not exceed 30 at each of the regular inspection intervals.
(xi) Reflectivity
Measure the reflectivity by the retroreflectometer as specified in paragraphs (c)(iii) and

(d)(iv) of this Clause immediately after the thermoplastic roadmarking has hardened.
Four measurements are to be taken at representative locations.
The average of the ten readings in any one measurement shall achieve :
(a) For white roadmarking : retroreflection reading not less than

300 mcd/1x.m2
(b) For yellow roadmarking and : retroreflection reading not less than
2
other colours 200 mcd/1x.m
(xii) Thickness of material laid
Measure the thickness of the thermoplastic laid by a deep frame micrometer.
Carry out measurements immediately after the thermoplastic roadmarking has hardened.
10 measurements are to be taken at representative locations. For each measurement at a

selected location, 3 samples' mean of 4 readings are taken by the deep frame micrometer
to make up one measurement. The 3 samples are to be taken from positions at least 3
metres apart. The average of the 3 samples' mean forming one measurement shall not be
less than the thickness specified in paragraph (d)(v) and as shown in the Drawings.
(xiii) Penalty for non-compliance of thickness and reflectivity
If the thickness or reflectivity is found to be below the values specified grind away the
surface of the portions represented by the sample readings and then apply thermoplastic
material and glass beads to bring the thickness to 1.5/3mm and the reflectivity to at least
the minimum required values. All the foregoing shall be at the Contractor's own cost as
penalty for non-compliance of the specification.
(f) Shape and Spacing of Roadmarking
For new road surfaces, ensure that the surface be sufficiently clean and dry before the application
of the thermoplastic material. The Contractor shall be responsible for erasing the old road-
markings and the resetting of the whole intersection and marking of the lines to the required widths
and dimensions as shown in the Drawings or as directed where existing markings have faded or
have run out of alignment.
All markings shall be laid in accordance with the Drawings.
(g) Guarantee of Material Quality
Guarantee the thermoplastic road marking material furnished and installed under this
Specifications against failure due to poor adhesion resulting from defective materials or method of
application for a period of twelve (12) months in conjunction with the Defects Liability Period.
LUP09/S52.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-26/65

(CONT'D)
(h) Test Samples and Testing for Content of Material
Present the proposed grading of the glass beads, and aggregates; and samples of the following
materials intended for use under the Specifications to an approved Highway Authority Material and
Research Laboratory for test. The Authority testing the material may be the same country where
the product is manufactured. Details of testing requirements and the test methods shall conform to
BS 3262:1981 Appendices A to M or of a method and standard acceptable to the SO Rep.
Submit latest test reports of the samples to the SO Rep for consideration.
If materials presented under this Clause are accepted, they shall be the standard by which
materials actually applied under the Contract shall be compared.
(i) Samples to be supplied at the start of Time for Completion
Supply 2 (nos.) of white roadmarking and 2 Nos. of yellow roadmarking properly laid on 30mm x
150mm aluminium sheets before the start of the Time for Completion.
The thermoplastic roadmarking materials shall be of 3mm thickness.
The tone of colour agreed upon by the SO Rep for the samples shall be used as the standard tone
for all the Works embraced in this Contract.
The SO Rep reserves the right to request for another supply of these same number of samples if
he feels that the tone of colour has inevitably changed.
(j) Information of product to be supplied by manufacturer
Obtain from the manufacturer the following information of the thermoplastic material he proposed
to use :
(i) Maximum safe heating temperature of the material.

(ii) Temperature range of application for screed laying.
(iii) Flash point of the material.
(iv) Composition of the mixture.
The foregoing information shall be provided to the SO Rep one week before the start of the laying
operation.
(k) Protection of New Road Marking
Make arrangements for the protection of new marking until such time as the material has "set-up"
sufficiently to resist being damaged by traffic. Replace at his own cost all materials laid and
subsequently rendered unfit by the action of traffic or other road users.
52.29 WATER FOR THE WORKS
Obtain all water to be used for making mortar or concrete or for other purposes from the PUB mains.
Make provisions for such storage tanks, temporary connections, etc as may be required and for moving
such tanks to keep them sufficiently adjacent to the part or parts of the works in progress. Arrange for the
supply of water to the Works and for paying all charges.
LUP09/S52.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-27/65
52.30 CEMENT
All cement used in the Works shall be of approved local manufacture except otherwise permitted by the
SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS 26 and BS 12. With each delivery the
Contractor may be required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the
manufacturer's test certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to
determine the strength of cement.
52.31 AGGREGATES
(a) The materials used as aggregates shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable and free from
clay lumps and organic and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply
with SS 31, SS 73, SS 74, BS 812, BS 882, 1201 and tested in accordance with the requirements
of SS 73 and BS 812.
(b) Grading of Fine Aggregates
The grading of the aggregate, when based on sieve analysis as described in SS 31, SS 73, SS 74,
BS 812, 882 and 1201 shall be within the limits of one of the grading zones given in Table 52.2,
except that a total tolerance of up to five percent may be applied to the percentage given in
bracket.
For crushed stones, the permissible limit is increased to 20 per cent. The fine aggregates shall be
described as fine aggregates of the grading zone into which it falls, eg. SS 31, Grading Zone One.
(c) Grading of Coarse Aggregates
The grading of coarse aggregate, carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in SS 31,
SS 73, BS 882, 1201 and BS 812 shall be within the following limits of Table 52.1 :
TABLES 52.1 - COARSE AGGREGATES
Percentage by weight passing BS Sieves

Nominal size of graded aggregate
Nominal size of single-sized aggregates
BS410
Test Sieve 1½ in ¾ in to ½ in to
to 3/16 in 3/16 in 3/16 in 2½ in 1½ in ¾ in ½ in 3/8 in
(38mm (19mm (13mm (64 mm) (38 mm) (19 mm) (13 mm) (10 mm)
to 5mm) to 5mm) to 5mm)
in mm
3 76.20 100 - - 100 - - - -
2½ 63.50 - - - 85 - 100 100 - - -
1½ 38.10 95 - 100 100 - 0 - 30 85 - 100 100 - -
¾ 19.00 30 - 70 95 - 100 100 0-5 0 - 20 85 - 100 100 -
½ 12.70 - - 90 - 100 - - - 85 - 100 100
3/8 9.52 10 - 35 25 - 55 40 - 85 - 0-5 0 - 20 0 - 45 85 - 100
3/16 4.76 0-5 0 - 10 0 - 10 - - 0-5 0 - 10 0 - 20
No. mm
7 2.36 - - - - - - - 0-5
LUP09/S52.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-28/65
52.31 AGGREGATES (CONT'D)
(c) Grading of Coarse Aggregates (Cont'd)
TABLES 52.2 - FINE AGGREGATES
Percentage by weight passing BS Sieves

BS 410
Test Sieve Grading Grading Grading Grading
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
in mm
3/8 9.52 100 100 100 100
3/16 4.76 90 - 100 90 - 100 90 - 100 (95) - 100
No. mm
7 2.36 60 - (95) (75) - 100 (85) - 100 (95) - 100
14 1.18 30 - (70) (55) - 90 (75) - 100 (90) - 100
Microns
25 600 15 - 34 35 - 59 60 - 79 80 - 100
52 300 5 - (20) (8) - (30) (12) - (40) (15) - 50
100 150 0 - (10) 0 - (10) 0 - (10) 0 - 15
Store the fines and coarse aggregates separately and in such a manner that segregation of the
various size particles shall not occur, form the stockpiles on a platform of weak concrete, timber or
similar approved hard standing and keep aggregates clean and free from foreign substances.
52.32 SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES
Methods of sampling and testing of aggregates shall comply with SS 73 and BS 812. If required submit
samples of the aggregates to the SO Rep at least two weeks before the Contractor begins to deliver
materials at the Site of the works. Materials shall not be delivered until samples have been approved.
Samples of fine aggregates, each of about 0.015 cu m shall be submitted in air tight containers and
samples of coarse aggregate each of about 0.030 cu m shall be submitted in suitable containers. Label
all samples plainly with descriptions of the material and source of supply. Furnish additional samples as
directed.
Test sieves shall comply with SS 74 and BS 410.
52.33 CEMENT MORTAR
Cement mortar for general purposes shall consist of one volume of Portland Cement to three volumes of
fine aggregates unless otherwise specified or as directed by SO Rep. Testing of cement mortar shall
comply with BS 4551.
Thoroughly mix the materials in a dry state either by hand on a close jointed wooden platform or in a
mechanical mixer of an approved type and sufficient water shall then be added and the whole mixed to a
mortar of even and proper consistency. The proper consistency is that when moisture is excluded under
a slight pressure, the mortar binds together into a solid lump. Use mortar immediately after it has been
prepared and on no account shall it be used after it has commenced to set.
LUP09/S52.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-29/65
52.34 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise stated, concrete mix refers to "designed mix". In designed mixes, the strength shall be
the main criterion specified, with compliance to minimum and maximum cement content, and maximum
water/cement ratio. The workability of the mix shall be such that the measured slump shall not deviate
from the agreed value by more than ±25mm or one third of the value, whichever is greater, or Clause 16.6
of BS 5328. Mix design shall be based on a target mean strength not less than the specified
characteristic strength plus 7N per mm2. The Contractor shall design the mix and shall be responsible to
ensure that the mix supplied will give the required properties including strength. Unless otherwise
specified for protection against aggressive soil conditions, designed concrete mixes shall comply with the
specifications in the Table below :
Specifications For Designed Concrete Mix
Grade 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15
Minimum crushing
strength N per mm2 37 34 30 27 24 20 17 14 9
at 7 days
Characteristic
strength N per mm2 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15
at 28 days
Minimum cement
content in kg per m3
475 425 375 350 350 325 300 270 205
of fully compacted
concrete
Maximum cement
content in kg per m3
550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550
of fully compacted
concrete
Maximum
0.4 0.45 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.7
water/cement ratio
Design of mix shall ensure no segregation, no excessive bleeding and ability to achieve specified surface
finish. Segregation and bleeding shall be determined by visual inspection.
"Nominal mix" may be used in place of "designed mix" provided :

•
the works are of minor nature or involving a small quantity of concrete.
•
the approval of the SO Rep is given.
•
the strength of the concrete is still the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor may adopt the prescribed nominal mix and preparation of ingredients as shown in the
table below :
Nominal Mix For Use In Minor Works Or

Involving Small Quantity Of Concrete
Nominal Weight Volume of Volume of Coarse

Class of Minimum Crushing
Volumetric of Fine Aggregates
Concrete Strength
Proportions Cement Aggregates (19mm to 5mm)
kg m3 m3 N per mm2
(a) (b) (c) 7 Days 28 Days
Grade 30 1:1:2 50 0.035 0.07 20 30

Grade 25 1:1.5:3 50 0.050 0.100 17 25
Grade 20 1:2:4 50 0.070 0.140 14 20
Grade 15 1:3:6 50 0.105 0.210 9 15
'
LUP09/S52.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-30/65
52.34 CONCRETE (CONT'D)
Basing on :
(a) Cement of bulk density 1450 kg per m3.

(b) Semi-dry sand (30% voids) of bulk density 1600 kg per m3.
3
(c) Coarse aggregate (45% voids) of bulk density 1400 kg per m .
The whole of the concrete shall be dense, compact and thoroughly homogeneous. It shall be placed in
foundations, walls, floors, slabs, moulds or shuttering after mixing as soon as practicable and no concrete
shall be placed without being thoroughly tamped and compacted. Complete all tamping well before the
initial setting of the cement commences.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter and improve the concrete mix
from time to time during the progress of the Works.
Keep the fine and coarse aggregates separately until actually mixed in the hopper of the concrete mixer,
which shall be of the batch or other approved type. Mix each batch for a sufficient period to produce a
mixture of even and proper consistency.
Immediately after mixing, convey the concrete to the place of final deposit as rapidly as possible by
methods which will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of any of the ingredients. In all cases
place the concrete and compact within 20 minutes of the addition of water to the mix. Any concrete left
unplaced after this time or showing any indication of drying out or taking its initial set shall be immediately
rejected and removed from the Works.
Transport the concrete in clean metal buckets, barrows, dumpers or trucks and obtain the written approval
of the SO Rep before any method involving the use of concrete pumps, placers, pipelines, chutes or
spouts may be used.
For transporting concrete by means of chutes, segregation should be minimized by providing a downpipe
at the end of the chute. Chutes shall be of metal or metal-lined, preferably round-bottomed, and large
enough to guard against overflow. Slopes shall not be flatter than 1 to 3 or steeper than 1 to 2 for
ordinary mixes. The SO Rep may allow the use of steeper slopes for stiff mixes.
Hand mixing shall be allowed only for small quantities of concrete and subject to the mixing being
satisfactorily performed and approved by the SO Rep and to the addition of 10% extra cement.
Adjust the proportions of water and aggregates according to the moisture content of the aggregate.
Add only sufficient water to the cement and aggregates during mixing to produce a concrete having
sufficient workability to enable it to be well consolidated, to be worked into the corners of the shuttering
and around the reinforcement and to have the specified strength. When a suitable amount of water has
been determined, maintain the resulting consistency throughout the Works and conduct tests from time to
time to ensure consistency. The method of determining the consistency of concrete shall either be by
slump test or by the compactor tests as defined in SS 78 and BS 1881. Supply all labour and materials
necessary to carry out the tests as directed. All concrete which has too high a water content shall be
rejected straightaway.
No concrete shall be re-mixed after it has once become partially set or hardened but shall be rejected and
removed from the Works.
52.35 DEPOSITING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE
Do not tip the concrete from a height of more than 2m but lowered in chutes or skips. It shall be placed in
regular courses, in layers of not more than 250mm thick, punned down, beaten and neatly levelled to a
smooth surface. It shall not be covered up until passed. When the Works is interrupted, the surface of
the unfinished concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, watered, coated with cement grout and covered with
a layer of cement mortar, at least 10mm thick, immediately before further concrete is added and whenever
practicable, wooden battens shall be inserted in the unfinished concrete and withdrawn to form a
continuous key for further concrete, both in horizontal and vertical joints.
LUP09/S52.DOC(30)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-31/65
52.35 DEPOSITING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE (CONT'D)
At all junctions between new and existing concrete work, clean, roughen, coat and spread with at least
10mm thick of cement mortar the surface of the existing concrete; immediately before the new concrete is
deposited. No concrete shall be placed unless the SO Rep has inspected the receiving surfaces and is
satisfied with the conditions for concreting.
Concrete shall be normally compacted by means of approved immersion vibrators of minimum 5000
cycles per minute or otherwise well rammed between and around the steel reinforcement by hand
rammers to ensure compactness and to avoid air-holes, or voids and to produce smooth surfaces, free
from honey combs. Remove any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete by
approved means and place no further concrete thereon until such water be removed. Take great care to
prevent the displacement, bending or deformation of the steel before, during or after concreting. Insert all
reinforcement members in position before concreting has been started and they shall be temporarily held,
fixed, tied or wired securely in position.
52.36 PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE
Allow no load of any kind, however light, on concrete which has not properly matured. Do not allow
walking on or laying of planks on concrete until it has been properly matured and ready to carry load.
Allow a period of 24 hours between the laying of the concrete foundation and the laying of pipes or
kerbstones before backfilling.
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The
exposed surfaces of concrete, other than concrete foundation and haunching for kerbstones and pipes,
shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the SO Rep. The curing compound
shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturers' instruction. If the
curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the application is completed, the
Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing compound again.
The curing compound shall not be used in concrete containing Portland Blast Furnace Cement or
Sulphate - Resisting Cement. In such instance, other appropriate curing method shall be adopted.
52.37 CONCRETING AGAINST SURFACE OF EXCAVATION
Place concrete only against surfaces of excavation when the receiving surfaces are clean, firm and free
from any accumulation of water. Should the receiving surfaces deteriorate as a result of the Contractor's
delay in placing concrete, the Contractor shall, as directed, cut the loose material and top-up with
compacted firm material or lean concrete at his own cost.
Unless otherwise specified, concrete sealing to foundations shall be 75mm Grade 15 concrete.
Wherever in the opinion of the SO Rep that ground conditions permit, the timbering shall be removed
before concreting and the concrete placed in the walls for the full width from the shuttering to the face of
the excavation in one operation. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the desirability of keeping the
working space or overbreak to a minimum in all cases.
Where concreting in one width is called for by the SO Rep payment for any extra concrete involved will be
made for under the Standard Schedule of Rates, the appropriate item for rough shuttering will be omitted.
52.38 CONCRETING THROUGH WATER
Concreting shall not be deposited under water without the prior consent of the SO Rep. Submit his
proposed method in detail of placing concrete through water for the approval of the SO Rep. Design a
concrete mix for this purpose with a high workability of approximately 150mm slump and an increased
cement content of 25%.
Bear the extra cost involved in placing concrete under water and that of the designated concrete mix
unless otherwise specified.
LUP09/S52.DOC(31)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-32/65
52.39 FINISH OF CONCRETE
Upon removal of the shuttering and with approval of the SO Rep make good honeycombed surfaces
immediately by a method approved by the SO Rep and superficial water and air holes shall be filled in.
Unless instructed to the contrary, rub down the face of exposed concrete placed against shuttering with a
carborundum stone immediately upon removal of the shuttering to remove fins or other irregularities. Float
the face of concrete for which shuttering is not provided (other than slabs) to give a finish equal to that of
the rubbed down face where shuttering is provided. No cement wash, mortar or paint may be applied to
any concrete surface without the permission of the SO Rep. Generally concrete finishes as struck from
the shuttering are required.
Lay all floors, slabs and inverts to the required depths, thickness, inclinations and curvatures shown on
the detail Drawings. The falls shall be even so that no pockets occur and the concrete well rammed,
consolidated and formed to a true and even slope by means of wooden screeds and straight edges, and
immediately thereafter be floated over with a wooden float, any hollows or rough places unavoidably left
after screeding being filled up with fine concrete. Subsequently and just before setting, finish off the
concrete to a smooth and even surface with metal floats, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
Do not lay concrete floors and inverts in two courses, except where specified or by special permission of
the SO Rep in writing. Where screeds are required or approved, key and roughen the structural concrete
to ensure proper bond.
First class plane surfaces free from ripples, hollows, air holes or exposed aggregate is required.
52.40 CONCRETE ADDITIVE
Suitable additives may be used in concrete only with the approval of the SO Rep. Apply the concrete
additives as approved in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendation and instructions.
Verify the suitability of concrete additives by trial mixes and laboratory tests at the Contractor's own cost
should the SO Rep deems it necessary.
52.41 PREMIX AND READY-MIX CONCRETE
If the Contractor wishes to use ready-mix concrete, obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter
alia, require to be satisfied that the proposed supplier will adhere to the requirement specified to this
Specifications and that the quality and control of the mix are satisfactory and comply with SS 289 and
BS 5328. The SO Rep shall have access during all working hours of the ready-mix plant. The ready-mix
concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete.
The concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete and the Contractor
shall arrange and pay for the making of all the requisite tests.
Transport premix concrete only in continuous mixing lorries of an approved design and type. Transport the
concrete dry and the water only added to the mix only after arrival at the Site and immediately before
placing.
Transport ready-mixed concrete only in continuous mixing lorries complying with the manufacturer's
operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. No
additional water shall be added to the ready-mixed concrete.
52.42 TESTING OF CONCRETE CUBES
The methods of sampling and testing concrete shall comply with SS 78, BS 1881 and BS 5328. Provide a
minimum of 4 numbers of standard metal moulds. No concreting work shall be allowed to commence
unless the required number of moulds is present at the Site. No extension of the Time for Completion
shall be allowed for stoppage of work due to the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement.
On each concreting day, for every 20 cubic metres or part thereof of each grade of concrete, at least one
test shall be taken. At least 4 cubes shall be cast for each test. Two cubes shall be tested at 7 days and
the remaining two cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance of specified concrete strength. Testing
for Grade 15 concrete is not required unless directed by SO Rep.
LUP09/S52.DOC(32)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-33/65
52.42 TESTING OF CONCRETE CUBES (CONT'D)
Compliance of the specified concrete strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at an age of 7
days and 28 days respectively. Two test cubes shall be made for each test at the age required. The cube
strength shall be calculated from the maximum load sustained by the cube at failure. The appropriate
strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if :
(i) the average of the two cubes is not less than the specified minimum crushing strength; and
(ii) the difference of the two cube strength is less than 15% of the average crushing strength.
The test cubes shall be cured in accordance with SS78, BS 1881 and BS 5328. Concrete shall be placed
in standard steel mould in layers approximately 50mm deep and each layer compacted by using a steel
bar 300mm long weighing 1.8 kg and having a ramming face of 25mm square. The number of strokes per
layer shall not be less than 35 for 100 mm cubes or as per SS requirement. The cubes shall be tested at
the HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre or other approved accredited testing laboratory with equivalent
or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring system with analysis capabilities.
The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval.
All contract information and test results shall be uploaded to EPTC e-cube website.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate size to store all the test cubes for the
specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a relative humidity
of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in custody by a person designated
by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB Prefabrication Technology Centre shall be collected
by the SO Rep from the designated site at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform Contractor of the
designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the
day of collection. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to hand over the cubes to the
HDB’s appointed contractor for the collection of cubes.
.
.
similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency identification
(RFID) reader able to read the RFID tags on concrete cubes from a minimum distance of at least 40
mm. The Contractor shall include the appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and tag
IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of cube data and tag IDs shall be done within the same
casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while the cube is
still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The
Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or loss of
RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's purchase
price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or becoming due
to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the Contractor to the
Employer.
52.43 FAILURE OF TEST ON CONCRETE TEST CUBES
For each batch of concrete, make two test cubes for each test at 7 days and 28 days respectively. The
crushing strength to be achieved is specified in Clause 52.34 "Concrete". Notwithstanding that the test on
the 7 days cubes pass the strength as indicated in Clause 52.34 "Concrete" the test on the 28 days cubes
shall still be required to be carried out.
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges
against the Contractor for each test that fails to attain the required crushing strength at 28 days. The SO
Rep may also direct that the part of works represented by the cubes that has failed be taken down or cut
and replaced to comply with the Specifications or that additional measures shall be provided to make the
Works secure all at the Contractor's expense.
52.44 CONCRETE WALLS
Concrete walls generally shall be constructed in alternate bays not exceeding 7m in length. The height of
any lift of concrete shall not exceed 2.5m unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Walls shall be truly
vertical and all surfaces which are exposed to view or to liquids finished to a smooth surface.
LUP09/S52.DOC(33)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-34/65
52.45 SHUTTERING
All shuttering or formwork shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 23 and shall be, in every respect,
rigidly constructed of approved material and shall be true to the shape and dimensions as shown in the
Drawings. Timber used for formwork shall be medium hardwood, machined dressed to a uniform
thickness. The timber shall be well seasoned, free from loose knots and, unless otherwise approved,
wrought on all faces. Where plywood is to be used, it shall be Phenolic film faced plywood complying with
SS1 and cut to size from sheets at least 12mm thick.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate formwork system that produce concrete surfaces with good off-
form finish requiring no plastering or skimming. However, if the off-form finish is unsatisfactory, the SO
Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out plastering and skimming work to achieve the
required finish as specified. The form face in contract with concrete shall be free from dirt, adhering grout,
projecting nails, splits and other defects.
Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish. Such oil
shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become flaky or be
removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of concrete shall not be
used. The same approved type of form oil shall be used for all work. The application of the form oil shall
be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall be no accumulation of the oil on the
formwork.
Close all joints tightly and prevent all leakage of liquid cement from the concrete.
All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before any concreting operation is
commenced but this shall in no way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities
under the contract.
52.46 STRIKING OF SHUTTERING
Striking or removing shuttering shall not begin until the concrete is matured to sufficient strength to carry
its own weight plus any constructional or designed loads likely to come upon it, and this work shall be
conducted only under the personal supervision of a competent foreman. After striking of formwork, any
honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising from improper work procedures
shall be immediately made good, as, directed by the SO Rep. Any remedial measures carried out without
the knowledge and approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution. All holes formed
by tie bolts shall be filled with cement mortar.
The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in
accordance with the following :
Minimum
Type of Formwork Period Before Remarks
Striking
All vertical or side formwork 12 hours The period shall commence from
the time of last pour of concrete.
Soffit formwork to slabs and beams 3 days
Props to slabs and beams 14 days After striking of formwork, props

shall be immediately put up to
Props to cantilever slabs and cantilever beams 21days support the structure.
LUP09/S52.DOC(34)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-35/65
52.47 RE-CONSTRUCTION OF FAULTY WORK
Remove and reconstruct any structural member of work which gives evidence before or after removal of
the shuttering that the concrete was of faulty quality at the time of deposition or was not properly
deposited and rammed in the shuttering or gives evidence that any member of the reinforcement was
omitted, incorrectly placed, or displaced by any agency or cause or which gives evidence of any Defect,
fault or injury from any cause whatsoever which might prejudicially alter the strength and durability of the
construction.
All steel reinforcement shall be pre-cut and pre-bent before delivery to Site. No cutting and bending of
steel reinforcement is allowed to be done on Site.
Obtain steel reinforcement from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be approved in writing
by the SO Rep and comply with SS 2, SS 18, SS 32, BS 4449, BS 4461, BS 4482 and BS 4483 wherever
applicable.
All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It shall not be coated with any grease, oil,
paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement.
52.49 TESTING OF STEEL
Whenever required by the SO Rep, arrange for the manufacturer to supply direct to the SO Rep a test
certificate stating the process of manufacture and the results of each of the mechanical tests applicable to
the description of the material purchased, the chemical analysis and all as specified in the relevant
Standards. Alternatively, the SO Rep may require that the steel elements be tested according to BS
4360. If the representative samples fail to achieve the minimum value specified, the batch represented
shall be rejected and the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities"
to impose charges against the Contractor for each such failure.
52.50 BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT BARS
The number, size, form and position of each steel bar, tie, link, stirrup or other member of the
reinforcement shall be in exact accordance with the approved drawings. Nothing shall be allowed to
interfere with the disposition of any member of the reinforcement and special precaution shall be taken
that it is not only correctly placed but made to keep its correct place during the placing and setting of the
concrete.
The ties of links connecting longitudinal bars in columns shall be taut so that the main bars shall be
properly braced in all directions.
Bend reinforcement bars by machine or other approved means producing a gradual and even motion.
Bend bars cold unless the SO Rep shall approve bars of over 25mm in size being bent hot. Bars bent hot
shall not be heated beyond cherry-red colour and after bending allowed to cool slowly without quenching.
Bars depending on cold-working for their strength shall always be bent cold.
Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent, this shall only be done with the SO Rep approval
and each bar shall be inspected for sign of fracture.
Bends shall comply with the dimensions given in the bending schedule. Dimensions of bent bars and
internal dimensions of binders and the like shall not exceed the dimensions given on the bar schedule or
elsewhere, and shall not be more than half per cent shorter than the specified dimensions.
The internal radii of bends shall not be less than twice the size of the bar unless described to the contrary.
The internal radii of the bends at corners or binders or the like shall be half the size of the bar embraced
by the binder. For the purpose of this requirement the size of a bar shall mean the diameter of plain round
bar or wire, or twice the diameter of one of the composing bars of a twin twisted bar, or one-and-a-half
times the nominal dimensions of the side of a twisted square bar.
LUP09/S52.DOC(35)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-36/65
52.50 BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING REINFORCEMENT BARS (CONT’D)
Where steel fabric is required as reinforcement carefully and accurately bend to the required shape when
cold, either with a bending machine or edge block. Do all bending before the fabric is laid in position and
no heating or welding shall be allowed. Carefully straighten steel fabric if they come in rolls.
No piece of steel, wood or any foreign material whatsoever shall be employed on the bottom board, or
against the side board of the shuttering to keep the reinforcement bars in position.
The length of lap joints shall be not less than forty times the diameter of the steel member unless
otherwise permitted by the SO Rep. Hooks shall have a diameter of curvature of at least four times the
diameter of the member and shall be bent to a semi-circular form with a straight and measuring in length
at least four times the diameter of the member. Wherever shown on the Drawings all free ends of bars
shall be hooked as above and all joints in the length of bars shall be lapped and laps shall be at points of
minimum stress.
Maintain the vertical distances required between successive layers of bars in beams of similar members
by the provision of mild steel spacer bars inserted at such intervals that the main bars do not perceptibly
sag between adjacent spacer bars.
Immediately before concreting, examine the reinforcement for accuracy of placing and cleanliness and
corrected if necessary.
No concreting shall commence until the SO Rep has inspected the reinforcement in position and until his
approval has been obtained.
Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already concreted shall not be bent out of its
correct position for any reason unless approved and shall be protected from deformation or other
damage.
Provide and maintain the cover of concrete to the reinforcement as described in the Drawings and within a
tolerance of 3mm by means of distance pieces of plastic spacers or cement mortar.
52.51 FIXING FABRIC REINFORCEMENT
Securely and accurately tie fabric reinforcement which shall comply with SS 32 and fix in position in
accordance with the general requirements for fixing bar requirement.
All fabric shall be "lapped" and the minimum lap allowed in the case of rectangular mesh fabric shall be:
450mm overlap of the longitudinal wires,

75mm overlap of the transverse wires.
With square mesh fabric the minimum lap allowed shall be :
300mm overlap of the longitudinal wires,

300mm overlap of the transverse wires.
In all types of fabric the lap provided shall be sufficient to develop the full strength of the material.
Allow for all cutting to waste.
52.52 CONSTRUCTION JOINT
Construction joints shall be of an approved shape and shall be vertical or horizontal, as required and
except that in an inclined member, the joint shall be at right angle to the axis of the member. Provide in
the positions shown on the Drawings or as directed. Key by the use of battens placed in the concrete and
subsequently remove.
Before placing new concrete against concrete that has already set, clean and roughen the face of old
concrete and remove loose aggregate therefrom. Immediately before placing the new concrete, wet the
face thoroughly and apply a coating of neat cement grout thereto. Ram the new concrete well against the
prepared face before the grout sets.
LUP09/S52.DOC(36)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-37/65
52.53 BRICKS
Bricks shall be at the best of their respective kinds, sound, hard, squarely made, well burnt throughout,
regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shells or
other Defects.
They shall be of the standard size and conform to SS 103 and BS 3921. They shall not be removed away
from the Site without written permission by the SO Rep.
The crushing strength of bricks shall not be less than 27.5 KN/m2.
52.54 BRICKWORK GENERALLY
Lay each brick after being immersed in water as far as practicable or wetted in full and close joints of
cement mortar in its bed, ends and sides in one operation, each course being subsequently flushed and
finished solid without damage to the external faces of the work.
In no case shall a brick be laid dry or with insufficiently filled joints and afterwards flushed in. At least
every fourth course shall be laid fair and smooth to line and joints shall not exceed 6mm in thickness and
shall be neatly finished on the face with flat or flushing joints.
Transport bricks carefully in carts or lorries and stack and remove all broken bricks from the Site without
delay. Press every brick firmly into position, the surplus mortar being lightly struck off flush with the trowel
or pointed.
Wet the top of any work left unfinished immediately before re-starting. Keep all faces of brickwork clean.
Fill bed and vertical joints of brickwork solid with mortar and no vertical joint allowed to be flushed up from
the top, but each joint filled up as the bricks are laid. All Works found not complying strictly with this
requirement shall be taken down and rebuilt.
Maintain vertical joints in alternate courses in vertical lines. No work shall be carried up to a height
greater than 1m above the level of adjacent work.
The style of brickwork in vertical walls shall be English Bond unless otherwise specified. The height of
four courses of bricks laid in mortar shall not exceed by more than 25mm the height of the same brick laid
dry.
Where the work is curved on plan, crop the bricks when necessary to ensure that they break joint
correctly.
52.55 CONCRETE PIPES
Concrete pipes, bends and channels for sewers, manholes and culverts shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer and shall be made from Portland Cement and the pipes shall preferably be spun
reinforced concrete pipes. If permitted by the SO Rep, pipe may have collar joints when socketted pipes
are unobtainable. Socketted pipes shall have the sockets cast with the barrel of the pipe.
The sewer pipes shall comply with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department,
PUB, and also comply with SS 183 wherever applicable.
Unless otherwise permitted, use only concrete pipes and fittings with spigot and socket rubber ring joints
or similar approved for sewers. They shall be of the required class and be tested and certified satisfactory
by SAC or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
Unless otherwise specified, such as limestone aggregate or using PVC lining, all concrete pipes shall be
thickwall reinforced concrete pipe using Ordinary Portland Cement all in accordance with the Standard
Specifications and tests of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the requirement that the Clauses laid down in the current Standard
Specifications for Sewerage Works published by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB,
shall be complied with.
LUP09/S52.DOC(37)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-38/65
52.56 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES OF DIAMETER

300MM TO 825MM FOR SEWERAGE WORK
All sewers using reinforced concrete pipes and are of nominal internal diameter between 300mm and
825mm shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) thickwall reinforced concrete pipe using Ordinary Portland Cement and with an extra internal wall
thickness of 38mm over the normal cover to reinforcement, as provided for in the approved
standard of manufacture.
(b) the extra wall thickness of 38mm shall be added monolithically to the internal surface of the pipe
barrel.
and the specifications of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
52.57 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES
52.57.1 Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints
(a) Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall comply with either European Standard EN 295: 1991,
Australian Standard AS 1741: 1991 or other Equivalent Standard.
(b) All pipes shall be sampled and tested to the requirements of the relevant Standards. PSB Test
Report or PSB Certificate of conformity for vitrified clay pipes certified under the PSB Product
Listing Scheme (PLS) is acceptable as proof of compliance with the required standards. Type-
tested pipes by other local/overseas test laboratories accredited with PSB are also acceptable.
(c) All pipes and its joints must be watertight. Rubber sealing ring and other jointing materials used in
the joint assemblies shall comply with the requirements as specified in the relevant Standards.
(d) The chemical resistance, hydraulic roughness, abrasion resistance and shear resistance of all
pipes and fittings shall be tested and comply with the requirements as specified in the relevant
Standards.
(e) Dimension Requirements
Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum bore as follows :
Nominal
200 225 250 300 400 500 600 700 800
Size (mm)
Minimum
195 219 244 293 390 487 585 682 780
Bore (mm)*
*Note: Other nominal sizes greater than nominal size 200mm may be manufactured to comply
with this standard, providing that the minimum permissible bore is not more than 2.5%
less than the nominal size, rounded to the nearest mm.
(f) Marking Requirements
(i) All pipes manufactured and supplied shall have the following marks indented on the exterior
of the barrel :
• The manufacturer's name

• Date of manufacture
• Nominal bore size of pipe
• Standard Reference
• Crushing Strength in kN/m
(ii) All pipes and fittings shall be from only one (1) manufacturer. The Contractor shall forward
the manufacturer's signed certificate stating that the pipes and fittings comply with the
relevant standard and the results of all tests to the SO.
LUP09/S52.DOC(38)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-39/65
52.57.2 Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints for Trenchless Construction
The following sets out the requirements for flexibly jointed vitrified clay pipes for construction by trenchless
installation technique including pipe jacking.
(a) Strength Requirements
(i) Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum crushing strength as follows :
Nominal
200 225 250 300 400 500 600 700 800
Size (mm)
Strength
48 54 60 72 80 80 96 112 128
(kN/m)
(ii) The manufacturer shall declare the design jacking load.
(iii) All pipes or pipe sections shall be sampled after any grinding or cutting of ends and tested
to the requirements of the relevant Standards.
'
(iv) When tested in accordance with EN 293-3:1991, the deviation from squareness measured
at the pipe ends should be not greater than 1mm.
(b) Jointing Sleeves
The joints of the vitrified clay pipes shall be of the double spigot type that are suitable for direct
jacking or microtunnelling. The jointing sleeves shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel.
(c) Rubber Rings
The rubber sealing rings and other jointing materials used in the joint assemblies shall comply with
the requirements as specified in the relevant Standards.
(d) Buffer Rings
The buffer ring shall be made of standard flooring grade chipboard sheets.
52.57.3 Vitrified Clay Pipes and Joints in Open-Cut Method of Construction
The following sets out the requirements for flexibly jointed vitrified clay pipes for installation by open-cut
method of construction.
(a) Strength Requirements
(i) Vitrified clay pipes shall have minimum crushing strength as follows :
Nominal
200 225 250 300 400 500 600 700 800
Size (mm)
Strength
32 36 40 48 64 80 80 84 96
(kN/m)
(ii) All pipes or pipe sections shall be sampled after any grinding or cutting of ends and tested
to the requirements of the relevant Standards.
(iii) Pipes shall meet the tolerance for squareness at ends of pipes as specified in EN 295-1.
This is fixed at 6mm for pipes up to and including nominal diameter 300mm and then at 2%
of nominal diameter for larger sizes.
LUP09/S52.DOC(39)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-40/65
52.57.4 Flexible Joint to Vitrified Clay Pipe
(a) Flexible joints to stoneware pipes shall be of the rubber ring or polyester type of a design and form
(b) The joints shall be of a type to remain completely watertight while accommodating a deflection of
5E in any direction.
(c) Where polyester joints or polyester/rubber ring joints are supplied the formed polyester must be
securely bonded to the stoneware and pipes having damaged or loose polyester rings or socket
packings shall be rejected.
52.58 PITCH-FIBRE PIPE
Pitch-Fibre pipes shall be of an approved type and manufacture conforming in all respects with BS 2760.
The joints shall be of a design to permit flexibility and movement without leakage.
52.59 CAST IRON PIPE
(a) Unless otherwise specified cast-iron pipes and specials and cast (spun) iron pipes shall comply
with BS 4622 and shall be Class "B". Flanged pipe fittings and flanges shall also comply with BS
4622 Class "B". The expression "cast-iron" also embraces spun iron where applicable.
(b) Joints to cast iron pipes unless otherwise indicated shall be "screwed gland", "bolted gland" or a
proprietary rubber ring joint "Tyton" or similar.
52.60 STEEL PILES
52.60.1 Sizes and Lengths of Steel Pipe
(a) The diameters described are the finished internal diameter of the linings, and the steel pipes,
joints, flexible joints, etc, shall all be made to such dimensions as to suit the required finished
internal diameter. A tolerance of plus or minus 3 mm will be allowed in the finished lining
thickness. The tolerance for the finished internal diameter shall not exceed plus or minus 1% of
the nominal diameter of the pipe.
(b) The pipe lengths stated are effective lengths when laid and the Contractor shall allow in his prices
for the additional length of pipe required to form the joints.
52.60.2 Thickness of Steel
(a) The thickness of steel plate to be used in manufacturing the pipes is stated in the drawings.
(b) In the even of the plate thickness stated not being available, the Contractor shall allow in his prices
for supplying the nearest available thicker plate section.
52.60.3 Steel for Pipe and Special
The steel for the pipes and specials shall be manufactured by the open-hearth or electric process, acid or
basic and shall conform to and be tested in accordance with BS 534.
LUP09/S52.DOC(40)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-41/65
52.60.4 Testing of Steel Pipes
(a) All pipes and specials shall be hydraulically tested after manufacture (i.e. without the lining or
coating) as described in BS 534 in the presence of the SO Rep to a test pressure of 200 metres
load of water.
(b) Where specials and fittings are of a shape or size on which it is not practicable to apply the
hydraulic test the SO Rep may give approval to an alternative method of test such as the paraffin
test.
(c) The Contractor shall bear the cost and expense for all the tests specified.
52.60.5 Lining of Steel Pipes
(a) All the pipes and specials shall after the removal from the inner surfaces of all rust, loose seals, oil,
grease or other foreign matter and thorough cleansing, be lined with concrete or other materials as
specified and shall be in accordance with the current BS 534. It shall be terminated as near to the
ends of the pipes and specials as will allow for effective jointing without damage to the lining.
(b) Great care must be taken to avoid overstressing the lining at any stage of manufacture, handling or
during delivery and storage and linings showing hollow, drumming sections or with cracks, other
than surface cracks which can be shown not to penetrate more than 6mm below the surface will
not be accepted. All pipes above 900mm diameter shall be clearly marked "Top" and "Bottom" as
soon as the pipe is lined.
52.60.6 External Coating of Steel Pipes
The external coating shall be ad described hereunder :
(i) All pipes and specials shall be cleaned over the whole of their external surface by sand or grit
blasting, acid pickling or mechanical wire brushing in order to remove all millscales, rust, paint,
grease and loose dirt.
(ii) Within two hours of cleaning, the dry clean surface shall receive one cold application of approved
bitumen primer by brush or spray application over the whole external surface.
(iii) When the primer is dry and within 5 days of its application, the pipes shall be coated to within
75mm of each and with a continuous coating of not less than 2.4mm thickness of hot applied coal-
tar enamel by pouring onto the primed pipes as they are mechanically rotated. The temperature of
the enamel as it flows onto the pipes shall be between 225EC and 250EC but the temperature of
the enamel in the melter is not to exceed 260EC. Any melt which has been overheated shall be
immediately removed from the rolling rig and discarded.
(iv) Simultaneously with the pouring of the hot enamel 150mm wide coal-tar saturated felt reinforced
with glass fibres at 6mm spacing outer wrap shall be spirally wrapped with 6-12mm overlap on to
the exterior of the exterior of the hot coating, on the rotating pipes, so as to firmly adhere to it.
(v) The primer and enamel shall meet American Water Works Association Specification C:203:1962
which is for plasticised coal-tar base materials.
52.60.7 Joints to Steel Pipes
(a) Expansion and welded joints are to be made in accordance with drawings although changes may
be proposed by the Contractor and such changes must be approved in writing by the SO Rep
before manufacture commences.
(b) The flexible joints are to be of an approved form similar to Viking Johnson Couplings. Details of
the type of joints is subject to SO Rep's approval.
LUP09/S52.DOC(41)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-42/65
52.60.8 Protection during Transit and Storage of Steel Pipe
(a) The coated pipes shall be lime washed and provided with sufficient protection such as straw roping
to prevent any damage during transit or storage. The ends of all pipes and specials shall be
covered with caps or discs of an approved pattern to prevent damage to the pipe ends, joints and
lining.
(b) The unprotected surfaces of all pipes and specials after lining (eg. pipe ends, joints, etc.) shall be
protected from corrosion during storage by the application of Shell "Ensis" or other approved
temporary coating.
52.61 GASKETS FOR FLANGED PIPE
(a) Gaskets for flanged pipes shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494 and BS 3063.
(b) They shall be "full face" Class "D" 3mm thick.
52.62 BOLT, NUT AND WASHER FOR FLANGED PIPE JOINT
(a) Bolts, nuts and washers for flanged pipe joints shall be in accordance with BS 4190 and BS 4320.
(b) Where flange bolts are to be installed and buried under ground the bolts, nuts and washers shall
be non-ferrous or metal coated to prevent any corrosion.
52.63 UPVC PIPES
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings shall be of an approved type and manufacture
complying with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. They shall
conform to SS 272, BS 4660, BS 5481 and the relevant Australian Standards where applicable.
52.64 ORDER OF SEWER PIPES, FITTINGS AND MANHOLE PARTS
For the construction of sewers, place order for the supply of all the required pipes and manhole parts
within 7 days from the Date of the Letter of Acceptance and shall notify the SO Rep of this in writing. The
order shall stipulate the specified times of delivery to the Site after all the necessary tests required by SAC
or Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
If no such order is made, the SO Rep may place on behalf of the Contractor the necessary order to a
supplier decided and approved by the SO Rep. Bear all costs involved in such an order and these shall be
paid to the supplier by deducting from the Contract Progress Payment.
52.65 PIPE LAYING
Carefully brush all pipes inside and visually test for soundness before being laid. Lay the pipes to true
inverts, straight lines and falls, each pipe being separately bonded between sight rails and bearing evenly
upon the solid ground or concrete for its full length.
Where pipes are to be laid in rock cutting, take the excavation down to 100mm below bed level and take
great care to ensure that there are no projecting pieces of rock on which the pipe will ride. Make up the
bed to its true line and level by refilling with either 100mm of consolidated, selected material from the
excavation, well rammed and watered if necessary or with 100mm of compacted sand or with 100mm of
Grade 15 concrete as directed.
LUP09/S52.DOC(42)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-43/65
52.65 PIPE LAYING (CONT'D)
Where pipes are to be supported on a bed of concrete or surrounded with concrete, provide rectangular
blocks composed of concrete made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use and approved
hardwood folding wedges. Provide two blocks for each pipe set and bond into the correct level on the
formation bottom and lay the pipe on them properly centred and socketted. Two hardwood folding
wedges of a width equal to the width of the concrete block shall then be inserted between the body of the
pipe and the block and shall be driven together until the pipe is brought to the exact level required. Blocks
and wedges shall then be left undisturbed while the pipes are being jointed and the concrete surround is
being placed in position.
Ensure that all blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the pipes
and make good any settlement.
52.66 JOINTING CAST IRON PIPE
In general for all types of joint, thoroughly clean the pipe joint and jointing ring or material of dirt and
grease before any jointing commences. The pipes shall be properly supported, bedded and lined up
before the joint is set up and made.
Make bolted gland, screwed gland and similar types of flexible patent joint in accordance with the
manufacture's instructions. Clean the joint rings, lubricate with the manufacturer recommended material
and accurately position it. Firmly push or jack home the joint and where screwed or bolted glands are
involved steadily and evenly tighten the glands all round.
No lead caulked joints shall be permitted.
Carefully clean the flanged joints, centre and line up with only 3mm allowed for the gasket between the
faces of the flange. The flanged gasket shall be carefully positioned and held by the flanged bolts.
52.67 JOINTING STEEL PIPE
(a) Welded pipe joints shall be made by means of the metal are welding process in compliance with
the general requirements for this process laid down in BS 1856.
(b) The jointing of pipes and specials shall be done with the pipes and specials laid in their final
positions. Their positions shall be so adjusted in preparation for welding that the clearance
between pipe barrel and jointing sleeve does not exceed 3mm.
(c) If tack welds are used they shall be limited in number and positioned evenly throughout the
circumference of the joint. The length of each tack weld shall not be less than 40mm.
(d) The section size of the tack welds shall be similar to that of the root run to be deposited in the joint.
The extremities of tack welds shall be chipped or ground to facilities the proper fusion with
subsequent disposition if they are to be incorporated in the initial root run. A whipping technique
shall be employed at end of the run on each tack weld and all other electrode changes to prevent
and craters.
(e) The main welds shall be fillet welds and the leg of each weld shall not be less than the thickness
of the steel plate being welded.
(f) Steel pipes above 825mm diameter shall be welded both internally and externally.
(g) Welding shall not be performed where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the weld would be subject to
excessive cooling rates and welded joints shall not be disturbed until thoroughly cooled.
(h) Welds shall be free from undercut, porosity, cracking, zones of incomplete fusion, inadequate root
penetration, or any other defect listed in BS 499, Section 6 and Appendix. Porosity, slag inclusion
of any other foreign body shall not exceed 1.6mm in any dimension nor shall there be more than
six such inclusions of this maximum size per square inch of weld metal, nor shall the combined
areas or any numbers of defects exceed 0.02mm2 of weld metal.
LUP09/S52.DOC(43)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-44/65
52.67 JOINTING STEEL PIPE (CONT'D)
(i) Cut lengths shall be jointed by the use of welded butt straps or flexible joints. Wherever necessary
the external and internal lining shall be made good as specified after completion and acceptance of
the joint. When butt straps are used they shall be welded both internally and externally.
(j) Short tubes may be provided on the side of the pipes to form an access for welding leads during
pipelaying. These access tubes shall be sealed off by welding sockets into the tubes.
52.68 JOINTING CONCRETE PIPES
Push well home each concrete pipe with the rubber ring accurately positioned on the spigot into the
socket of the previously laid pipe by means of uniformly applied pressure with the aid of a jack or similar
appliance. Use roll on rubber rings and they shall be lubricated before making the joint using soft soap,
water or other approved lubricant supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's instruction shall be
deemed to form part of this Specifications.
Lay the PVC lines concrete pipes and join as specified above except that all necessary precautions shall
be taken to protect and safeguard the PVC lining from any damage during pipe laying. After the pipes
have been laid, jointed and approved by the SO Rep, "Thermo Weld" the cover flaps of the PVC lining
across the pipe joints, according to manufacturer's instruction and this shall be carried out in conjunction
with the pipe laying progress.
Where the lined pipes enter the manholes and other structures, seal the PVC lining by the welding of
approved preformed cover fillets or angles forming returns to the arrises built into the in-situ concrete
work.
The manufacturer's instructions for jointing and thermo-welding the joints shall be deemed to form part of
this Specifications. The manufacturer shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, the methods for field
testing the PVC lining and thermo-welded joints for flaws, burnt surfaces, pin holes etc. Employ approved
methods for the complete testing of the lining, jointing and welding throughout the line.
52.69 FRACTURE OF PIPES
In the event of pipes being fractured after being, to all appearances, properly laid, whether due to
imperfect beds having been formed or the material for refilling having been improperly selected or to any
other cause, the Contractor shall be responsible and shall be called upon to replace such defective pipes
at his own cost, if such defect appears before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
Immediately remove and replace any pipe or length of pipes found to be defective and remake all leaking
joints.
52.70 PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN CHANNELS, KERBS, DIVIDERS, ETC
Precast concrete drain channels, kerbs, road channels (gutters) and dividers shall be constructed in
accordance with the Drawings and shall comply with the requirements as regards to strength of concrete,
water absorption, rate of wear, finish and size, where applicable with BS 7263 and/or SS 214. Obtain
precast concrete units from ISO 9000 or Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme Suppliers only. Lay
precast concrete drain channels, kerbs, road channels (gutters) and dividers, true to line and level in
0.5% of the total number of precast units to be used for the Works subject to a minimum of three numbers
of precast units shall be selected at random by the SO Rep for water absorption tests by a competent
Authority whilst work is in progress. The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance
and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for every test that exceeds the average
absorption rate as stated below. For each water absorption test, three test pieces shall be used for
determining the average increase in weight by water absorption.
LUP09/S52.DOC(44)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-45/65
52.70 PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN CHANNELS, KERBS, DIVIDERS, ETC

(CONT'D)
When tested for water absorption, the average increase in weight by absorption of water in the first 30
minutes shall not exceed 3% of the dry weight of the three test pieces for all precast concrete channels,
kerbs, etc.
These tests shall be in addition to those to be carried out by either LTA or the SO Rep prior to taking over
of the completed works before the expiry of Defects Liability Period. Comply with the final decision made
by LTA or the SO Rep in respect of any test carried out by them.
52.71 PRECAST CONCRETE SLABS
Precast concrete slabs for footpaths, etc shall comply with requirements of BS 7263, whenever
applicable. Submit the details of the supply of this item to the SO Rep for approval.
52.72 TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS
All traffic signs, cones, barriers and lamps shall comply with the requirements of LTA, subject to the
(a) Traffic Sign
All warning, regulatory and information signs shall be made of aluminium sheeting. The sheeting
shall be 2.03 mm thick of SWG No. 14 and the materials for the sheeting shall comply with the
relevant specification of BS 873 and BS 1470.
The reflective sheeting adhered to the aluminium plate shall be diamond grade. It shall consist of
spherial lens elements embedded in transparent plastic having a smooth, flat outer surface. The
material of the reflective sheeting shall comply with the relevant specification and be tested
according to ATM D4956. The thickness of the reflective sheeting inclusive of adhesive shall be
in the range of 5.5 mils to 6.5 mils.
All warning, regulatory and information signs shall be supported/fixed on to galvanised square
hollow section, tripod stand or plate support as shown in the Drawings.
All mild steel pipe frames shall consist of 25 mm internal diameter medium grade mild steel pipe
vertically and horizontally.
LUP09/S52.DOC(45)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-46/65
52.72 TRAFFIC SIGNS, CONES, BARRIERS AND LAMPS (Cont’d)
(a) Traffic Sign (Cont’d)
All tripod stands shall consist of 19 mm internal diameter medium grade galvanised iron pipes all
round.
The information plate supports shall consist of 50 mm internal diameter medium grade
galvanised iron pipes all round.
The weight of the warning and regulatory signs together with the support shall not be less than 15
kg.
(b) Cones
The traffic cones shall conform to all the relevant clauses and parts of the latest BS 873.
All cones shall be conical in shape and hollow. The opening at the top shall be manufactured to
accommodate the blinker’s adaptor. The sleeve of the cone shall be made of replaceable retro
reflective sheet of BS 873 : Part 6 Class/material or better with the HDB logo printed on three
sides or two sides if space does not allow.
The cones shall be made of medium density polyethylene with additional stabiliser or pigmented
poly-vinyl chloride. Each cone shall have a minimum weight of 4.40 kg and the minimum
thickness shall be 3 mm. The cones shall be sufficiently stable that they remain upright and not
creep or topple under normal traffic condition. Ballast shall not be used. The cones shall not
overturn when it is tilted up to an angle of 49 degrees away from its vertical axis.
The cones shall also have excellent impact performance and shall be sufficiently flexible for the
cone to recover its shape after distoration at normal temperature or after being knocked over by
any vehicle. The cones shall be stackable.
(c) Barriers
(i) Plastic Barriers
The plastic barrier board shall be rectangular in shape. The board shall be stiffened by
fixing flat metal bars to the top and bottom edges of the board. The barrier shall be
moulded with flexible toggle fixing to fit the barrier stands.
The board shall be made of high density polyethylene. The minimum wall thickness of the
board shall be 3.5 mm and the minimum weight per metre run of the board shall be 1.8 kg
per metre run.
The stand shall not overturn when it is tilted up to an angle of 46 degrees from its vertical
axis. The stand shall have drainage holes at its base to prevent water collecting there.
Provision shall be made to accommodate the toggles of barrier and blinker. There shall be
a locking device to prevent the easy removal of the barrier board from the stand.
The materials for the stand shall be medium density polyethylene with additional stabiliser.
The minimum wall thickness of the stand shall be 3mm and the minimum weight of the
stand shall be 18.8 kg. The materials for the stand shall have a minimum tensile strength of
15 N per m2.
LUP09/S52.DOC(46)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-47/65
(c) Barriers (Cont’d)
(ii) Barrier Fencing
Barrier fencing is a continuous plastic mesh which may serve as an alternative for close
barricading. The plastic mesh shall only be used by fixing securely to stable supports and
the gaps between these support should be not more than 6.0 m. Barrier fencing is used to
exclude pedestrians from a worksite and for the containment of workers. If it is erected
parallel and adjacent to traffic, a separate delineation with a line of traffic cone shall be
provided between the plastic mesh and the traffic. The colour of the mesh shall be high
visibility orange or red. The material shall be re-usable, high durability, non-fading and UV
resistance plastic.
(iii) Longitudinal Safety Barrier
The type of barriers may be required for the protection of traffic, the works as well as the
workers in long term stationery works. They may also be used to separate opposing traffic.
Suitable treatment of the ends of such barriers shall be taken to minimise risks associated
with end-on collisions.
The longitudinal safety barriers are a continuous close barricading formed by

interconnection of individual portable units that are made of concrete, steel or polyethylene
reinforced with steel. The performance of the safety barrier system shall be fully tested to
meet the recommended structural adequacy, occupant risk and vehicle trajectory criteria set
forth in the National Cooperative Highway Research Programme (NCHRP) Report 350 for
Test Level 2. Test reports shall be provided by the manufacturer for verification by SO Rep.
Only safety barrier system satisfying the required performance criteria shall be used for the
protection purpose.
(d) Lamps
(i) Flashing Lamps
All low and high intensity flashing lamps shall comply with BS 3143:1985 and the Australian
Standard AS 1165-1982 on traffic hazard warning lamps.
The flashing lamp shall have a luminous intensity integrated over flash duration of not less
than 2 cd.sec (minimum photometric performance) for low intensity type and not less than
50 cd.sec for higher intensity type as in AS 1165 (cd stands for candela).
The rate of flashing shall not be less than 60 pulsations per minute.
The requirements of the light output of flashing lamps shall apply within an elliptical cone
bounded by :
(a) Directions 5 degrees above and below an axis normal to the surface of the geometric
centre of the light emitting face in the vertical plane containing the axis.
(b) Directions 7.5 degrees on either side of the axis normal to the surface of the
geometric centre of the light emitting face in the horizontal plane containing the axis.
LUP09/S52.DOC(47)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-48/65
(d) Lamps (Cont’d)
The flashing lamp shall be provided with photoelectric control so that the flashing lamps
shall operate when the horizontal illuminance is less than 100 lux and shall cut off when the
horizontal illuminance is exceeding 1800 lux.
The flashing lamp shall be resistant to corrosion or be suitably treated to prevent corrosion
and shall be weatherproofed.
The flashing lamp shall be provided for swivelling the lens 360 degrees and shall be
designed so that the rotation will not damage any wiring or components.
The flashing lamp shall be designed so as to facilitate easy replacement of the batteries
and lamp.
The flashing lamp shall be clearly and indelibly marked as tested to BS or AS Standards.
The battery shall be designed to operate the lamp for at least 200 hours and of which the
output during this period shall not drop below 50% of its initial lamp output.
The flashing lamp shall also pass the impact test as detailed in BS 3143 Appendix A.
Also submit test reports by independent testing authority on the flashing tested to BS 3143
or AS 1165 and the Specifications, as and when required.
Use low intensity flashing lamps for all barricading and cone tapering area.
In residential areas use low intensity flashing lamps at warning signs and regulatory signs
instead of high intensity flashing lamps. They may be switched on to static mode if the
flashing light is posing a problem to residents.
Use high intensity flashing lamps for all warning signs and first regulatory signs only. They
shall be used along all other roads but not for private residential minor roads.
Ensure that :
(a) the flashing lamps are mounted between 1.0m and 1.2m above the road surface.
(b) the flashing lamps of directional type are aimed at centre of on-coming traffic at about
100 to 200m away.
(c) The orientation of the lamp are checked to ensure correct aiming and alignment is
maintained.
Check all flashing lamps daily to ensure that they are functioning properly. Replace any
blown lamps or weak batteries and also ensure that the flashing lamps are cleaned daily
and after rain so that dust and dirt do not accumulate on the surface of the lens.
LUP09/S52.DOC(48)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-49/65
(d) Lamps (Cont’d)
(ii) Rotating Lamps
All portable amber rotating lamps shall comply to BS 3143:Part 4 and the Australian
Standard AS 1165 on traffic hazards warning lamps.
The rate of flashing shall be between 120 and 150 flashes per minute. The power
requirement for the rotating lamp shall be of 12V and have a minimum wattage of 50 watts.
The bulb shall be of halogen type. The material for the lens shall be of polycarbonate
material.
Use portable amber rotating lamps for all cases in lane diversion, road diversion, bends,
crests and all other roads except for private residential minor roads. Unless otherwise
indicated, they shall generally be placed at the first warning sign and the last regulatory
sign. The rotating lamp shall be operational at all times (24 hours). To replace with static
mode high intensity warning lamps if the rotating mode is posing a problem to residents.
For longer duration work, the AC current type of portable amber rotating lamps may be
used. However, the lamps shall meet all the requirements of the DC current type. On the
safety aspect, the requirement of PowerGrid shall be met and approval from PowerGrid
shall be obtained before they are allowed to be used on the Site.
52.73 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS
All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dip galvanising process in accordance with SS 117
or BS 729 Part 1. Batches of galvanised gratings delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by a
certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm at which they are galvanised. The word `gratings' used
in this Clause shall also be deemed to include the frames and their miscellaneous components. Submit
the details of the galvanising to the SO Rep for approval.
All gratings shall be thoroughly removed of all welding slags prior to galvanising. Galvanised gratings
found having welding slags remaining on them shall be rejected and all such items shall be immediately
removed from the Site.
The galvanised gratings shall be tested for their zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a
SAC accredited laboratory using magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices.
2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three numbers of gratings
shall be selected for testing.
The mass of zinc coating tested shall be carried out at regular points of not less than 32 no. total on the
surface of all the steel angles and flats of the grating.
LUP09/S52.DOC(49)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-50/65
52.73 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS (CONT'D)
The results of the tests at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the average zinc
coating weight of the grating.
The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass :
Average Coating Minimum Permissible

Thickness of Steel Mass g per m2 Value g per m2
5mm thick and over 610 580

Under 5mm, but not less than 2mm 410 390
Under 2mm 350 330
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows :
(a) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose
charges against the Contractor for any grating the zinc coating mass of which is less than the
average coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value.
(b) The batch of galvanised gratings having any one of the representative samples failing to achieve
the minimum permissible value shall be rejected and the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under
Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for each such
failure. Batches of rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and may be accepted if tests
show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
52.74 GEOTEXTILE
(a) General
Where indicated in the Drawings or as directed, the type of geotextile specified shall be laid strictly
in the manner required and also in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Generally woven or non-woven type geotextile may be used for road construction and other civil
engineering construction. Use non-woven type geotextile for sub-soil drainage unless otherwise
specified. The geotextile shall be composed of one or a combination of the following polymers.
(i) polypropylene
(ii) polyethylene
(iii) polyamide
Other polymers may be used subject to the approval by the SO Rep.
(b) Protection
The geotextile shall be properly sealed when delivered to Site. Ensure that it is well protected
against direct sunlight and contamination by chemical solutions while in storage. Only minimum
exposure to weathering in the course of laying is permitted. Geotextile with stain markings shall be
rejected.
(c) Testings
Random samples of the geotextile shall be selected for testing for its mechanical and hydraulic
properties to be carried out by a SAC accredited laboratory when required. The batch of geotextile
fabric from which failed samples are taken shall be rejected and taken out of Site immediately. In
addition to the rejection, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and
LUP09/S52.DOC(50)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-51/65
52.74 GEOTEXTILE (CONT'D)
(d) Method of Testings
Geotextiles shall be tested for its properties in accordance with ASTM unless otherwise specified.
The following tests shall be carried out when required by the SO Rep :
(i) Load vs strain characteristic Curve (ASTM D1682)

(ii) Grab Tensile Test (ASTM D1682)
(iii) Trapezoidal Tear Test (ASTM D2263-68)
(iv) Mullen Burst Test (ASTM D751-73)
(v) Water Permeability Test
(vi) Pore-Size Distribution Curve
52.75 MANHOLE COVER AND FRAME
The manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron machined type and of approved size, weight and
pattern. The heavy duty type shall be used in roadways and paved areas.
Manhole covers and frames shall comply with SS 30 and BS 497 and be of the standard type and size
specified by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB and Drainage Department of PUB and
Road Management Branch of LTA and shall be in accordance with the Drawings. The cover and frame
shall be cast from a mixture of cast iron scrap and a suitable grade of pig iron. The mixture of the
resultant metal shall be such as to provide a strong grey structure free from chill. The cover and frame
shall be free from air, sand holes and cold shuts. They shall be neatly dressed and carefully fettled. All
casting shall be free from voids, whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusion or other causes.
Supply manhole covers and frames coated with a black bituminous composition. They shall be well fitting,
flush at the top and shall not rock.
Where required, the cover and frame shall be tested in accordance with SS 30.
52.76 STEP-IRONS
Step-irons shall be of malleable cast iron and complying with BS 1247 and shall be used only under the
direction of the SO Rep.
52.77 HAND-RAILING
All mild steel pipes used for handrailing shall be bare steel light tubes of 40mm nominal bore conforming
to BS 1387 and SS 17:1970. All mild steel tubes and flats shall conform to BS 15 or SS 104.
Provide on Site a building or shed which shall be dry and close to entry of water. The floors and walls
shall be dry and the building or shed shall be well lit and ventilated.
Before painting, bring the handrailing into the building or shed and cleaned with a wire brush to remove all
rust and mill scale. Paint the handrailing with one coat of approved priming paint or as specified. Allow
the paint to dry completely before it is removed from the shed or building for erection.
After erection, paint the handrailing with one undercoat of approved oil base paint and one finishing coat
of approved oil base paint or as specified.
Provide all the necessary items to carry out painting of one additional finishing coat of approved oil base
paint before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Attend to all Defects such as rust, chipped or
dented surfaces prior to the repainting.
52.78 SAFETY CHAINS
Safety chains shall be made of aluminium alloy HE 30 FT.
LUP09/S52.DOC(51)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-52/65
52.79 LADDERS
Ladders shall be made of aluminium alloy HE 30 FT and of approved design complying with BS 1474 and
BS 2037 unless otherwise specified. The ladder rungs shall be at 300mm centres and stringers
380/450mm apart. Strong support stays shall be provided on both sides of the ladder at not more than
2.5m centres.
52.80 BAKAU PILES
Bakau piles shall be of an approved species, good, sound, straight with fresh uninjured bark and of
reasonably uniform size throughout. They shall be supplied in minimum 4.0m length, measured after the
heads have been squared and the undersized ends cut off. They shall not be less than 80mm in diameter
at the larger end and not less than 55mm in diameter at the smaller end, including the thickness of bark.
Such measurements shall not be done over knobs and protuberances. The permissible deviation of the
axis of the pile from the straight joining the centres of the two ends shall not be more than 25mm. All
bakau piles shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep before being used. Bakau piles that have
been rejected shall be removed from the Site immediately.
When the piles need to be joined, such joints shall be made of mild steel collars of 300mm long. The steel
collar joint shall be divided into 2 equal sections, each with different diameters. The internal diameter of
the mild steel collar for the top 150 mm section shall be 70mm and for the lower 150 mm section shall be
90 mm, with a diaphragm plate welded at the connection. The minimum thickness of the mild steel collar
and the diaphragm shall be 1.8mm with joints fully welded and coated with tar or bituminous paint
approved by the SO Rep. Prior to the commencement of the bakau piling work, the Contractor shall
submit to the SO Rep a design sketch duly endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer to show
the full details of the mild steel collar joint including the type and size of the welding. A sample of the
collar joint made to the Professional Engineer's design shall also be submitted for the approval of the SO
Rep before it is used on the Site for the bakau piling work. Bakau piles shall be joined with such mild
steel collar firmly wedged with the axis of the top pile properly aligned to coincide with the driven pile.
Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the bakau piles driven to the numbers and
lengths according to the Specifications and Drawings. The Contract Sum shall be adjusted for the net
quantities actually provided in the Works.
52.81 BAKAU PILING
Where indicated on the Drawings, bakau piles as specified and of approved lengths shall be driven plumb
and in approved positions to the full length of the piles or to refusal or otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
Piling shall be carried out by experienced operators and shall be in accordance with the SO Rep
instructions. The piles shall be driven with a piling frame with a drop hammer of approved weight of not
less than 200 kg to a final set of 200mm for the last 10 blows from a drop of 1.0m to 1.5m height.
Wherever required by the SO Rep, drive piles at required set with number of blows and the weight of
hammer determined and the bearing capacity of the piles assessed.
The SO Rep may call for test piles to be driven in different sections of the excavations to determine the
stability of the ground below the formation level and hence the approved requirements of piles. Extract
and replace or else duplicate all incorrectly or badly driven piles and piles damaged during driving.
On completion of bakau piling saw off all pile heads to the required level and trim the excavation around
the pile heads.
Under certain circumstances, the Contractor may be required to carry out simple load tests to determine
the bearing capacity of the driven pile, as directed all at the Contractor's own cost.
52.82 TURFING
Provide a layer of minimum 125mm thickness of approved soil mixture evenly spread over the Site or as
directed by the SO Rep, followed by the planting of fresh turves. Sludge can be omitted for heavily built
up and pedestrianised across areas such as neighbourhood and town centres and eating houses and
compound fertilizers substituted.
The type of grass used for turfing shall be of approved species. All turves supplied by the Contractor shall
be of healthy and vigorous stock of approved type and quality. The turfing shall be cut square and
approximately 0.2m x 0.2m (0.04 sq m) in area, and the sod, a minimum 25mm thickness. All turves
supplied shall be free from weeds especially Mimosa Pudica.
LUP09/S52.DOC(52)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-53/65
52.82 TURFING (CONT'D)
Submit for approval a sample of the grass whenever an area is to be turfed. Plant the approved turf
promptly on arrival to avoid desiccation.
Lay turves abutting unless otherwise directed, with a tolerance of 10mm +5mm between adjoining turves.
Roll each sod with a suitable garden roller. On slopes steeper than 1 in 2, peg down each sod properly.
The turfing shall on completion present a uniform appearance.
Establish the turves in 3 months from the date of planting by means of :
(a) Watering at regular intervals

(b) Weeding regularly
(c) Replacing badly growing or unsatisfactory turves immediately
(d) Applying fertilizer and cutting the grass once every two weeks.
Thereafter, apply compound fertilizer once every 3 months. The compound fertilizer shall be of approved
type and the application rate shall be 10 g to 15 g per m2.
All earth slopes when specified to be closed turfed shall be carried out as soon as possible in order to
ensure rapid growth of protective grass. Provide and fix the turves promptly after laying the top soil in
order to prevent erosion thereof due to wet weather or other causes. Make good any loss of unprotected
or inadequately protected top soil.
52.83 MAINTENANCE OF TURVES
services as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works, for a period of one year commencing from the Date
of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the
Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period" for the purposes of this
clause).
Throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under
the Contract and during the Defects Liability Period, maintain the turves by cutting and removing dead
turves and weeds once every two weeks and replacing with new stock.
Before commencing necessary grass cutting, manually remove all weeds and undesirable vegetation
growing in the turfed areas. Close cut grass as short as possible following the general contours of the
ground. The stock or blade of the grass after each cutting shall not stand higher than 20mm above the
ground level. Approved mechanical cutters of various capacities to suit site conditions shall be utilised to
cut the grass. Remove all cut grass from the Site.
Cut back the edges of all sidetables and other turfed areas adjoining roadways, footpaths, kerbs, dividers
and concrete paved areas to proper straight lines or curves as the case may be, and trim thereafter to
produce a neat and tidy appearance. Carry out this work immediately after the grass in the area has been
cut or manually weed out and clear. Cut and manually weed out and clear grass growing in the joints of
footpaths, scupper drains, etc.
If the Contractor fails to maintain the turves, the Employer shall have the right to engage his own workmen
or other contractors to carry out such work and the cost incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor.
In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to
impose charges against the Contractor.
52.84 SAFETY MEASURES FOR GRASS-CUTTING MACHINES
(a) Take every safety precaution to eliminate danger to his workmen, the general public and the
property of others.
(b) Install all grass-cutting machines used with suitable protective guards of steel or other approved
materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects from causing damage. Under no
circumstances shall the protective guards be removed from machines in operation.
(c) The Contractor shall not use open blade rotary machine. Hand held rotary gross cutters shall be of
the nylon cord type.
LUP09/S52.DOC(53)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-54/65
52.84 SAFETY MEASURES FOR GRASS-CUTTING MACHINES (CONT'D)
(d) The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these safety
requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall instruct the
grass-cutter to stop work.
(e) Keep the public away from the grass-cutter and erect a signboard on Site with the wordings
"DANGER", KEEP OFF, Grass Cutting Works In Progress".
52.85 TREE PLANTING WITHIN ROAD SIDETABLES
Tree planting reserve shall consist of a 1000mm deep trough of loamy soil throughout. Loamy soil shall be
considered to be within the following range of composition of Sand, Silt and Clay.
Sand : 30 - 60%
Silt : 10 - 70%
Clay : 0 - 30%
Testing of the soil composition at the rate of 1 test for every 200m of sidetable subject to a minimum of 2
tests are to be carried out at an approved laboratory.
Where the existing soil does not conform to the above requirement replace the existing soil with loamy
soil. Samples of the replaced soil may be required by the SO Rep for testing at an approved laboratory.
Provide all the necessary, Construction Equipment, tool, instruments and materials for carrying out the
tests including the provision of all necessary transportation of test materials, samples, etc.
Instant Trees shall be planted according to the details specified in the Drawings. The instant trees must
have a minimum of 2.0m clear and upright straight trunk of 0.3m girth (measured at 0.5m height from the
collar of the trunk) with at least three (3) branches of minimum 0.08m girth each and 1.0m in length each
(lowest branching at above 2.0m) with rootball dimension 750mm diameter x 600mm deep minimum and
to be of good, healthy stock, undamaged and subject to SO Rep’s approval before planting.
Tree collar protectors are to be provided for all proposed trees. A protector is made of a PVC tube of
length 200mm, diameter 75mm and thickness 2mm with a silt cut along the full length of the tube.
The cost of the whole transplanting operation including the purchase of trees shall be included in the
Contact Sum.
52.86 PLANTING OF INSTANT TREES
(a) Transplanting of Existing Trees (Instant Trees)
Purchase Instant Trees from the HDB's Nursery, unless otherwise directed. Arrange to transplant
such trees from any of the HDB's Nurseries to the proposed work. The cost of the whole
transplanting operation including the purchase of the trees shall be included in the Contract Sum.
(b) Transplanting Requirements and Procedures
Transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follows :
(i) Branch Pruning
Prune branches or pollard the tree as directed and paint all cuts with fungicidal sealant.
(ii) Rootballs
All trees to be transplanted shall have an earth rootball of a minimum diameter or a size to
be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a trench about 0.5m deep
around the tree at appropriate distance. Cut all protruding roots and paint with a fungicidal
sealant.
Transplant excavated trees within the same working day unless otherwise directed.
LUP09/S52.DOC(54)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-55/65
52.86 PLANTING OF INSTANT TREES (CONT'D)
(b) Transplanting Requirements and Procedures (Cont'd)
(iii) Tree Pits
To avoid delay, make ready the new pit for the tree transplant before the tree is brought to
the planting site. Pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the rootball to
allow for incorporation of topsoil surrounding the roots. The minimum tree pit dimension
shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m. All planting holes for instant trees shall be backfilled with
good quality approved soil mixture to a level 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level
at time of filling. Tripod shall be provided to keep it firmly in place, if required.
(iv) Tree Guards
Provide tree guards to Instant trees planted as specified.
(v) Lifting and Transporting
Lift the tree by motor crane or other lifting machineries of appropriate capacity. Take every
precaution including wrapping rootball securely by moistened canvas and angle bar frame
or other approved materials to prevent damage to the rootball during the loading and
transporting of the tree to the worksite.
(vi) Before unloading tree into position, measure the depth and diameter of the rootball and
adjustment made to the pit. Set and orientate the tree in the hole, adjust the depth and
plant with minimum delay. Firmly consolidate the backfilling to eliminate air pockets under
and around the roots.
(c) Fertilising of Instant Trees
Apply fertilizer NPK Mg (12:12:7:2) at a rate of 0.5 kg per 25mm girth into holes 300mm deep and
500mm apart along the dripline. Carry out the first fertilising at the end of 6 months after planting.
Thereafter, carry out fertilising twice in the next 6 months.
(d) Maintenance of Instant Trees
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing
maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the instant tree Works, for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability
Period" for the purposes of this subclause).
Maintain planted Instant trees by carrying out the following works :
Operation Frequency
Watering (i) Daily watering for the 1st month.
(ii) Thereafter, water on alternate days for the 2nd month.
(iii) Thereafter, water once a week for the 3rd month.
(iv) Thereafter, water when necessary or as directed until the end
of Defects Liability Period.
In addition, make good all damaged tree guards during the Defects Liability Period.
LUP09/S52.DOC(55)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-56/65
52.87 LANDSCAPING OF PEDESTRIAN OVERHEAD BRIDGE
Plants for the pedestrian overhead bridge shall be of selected/approved stocks and shall be obtained from
the Contractor's own source, transported to Site and planted according to the Drawings or as directed.
Comply with the current requirements of planting of shrubs/palms/creepers etc as laid down by the
NParks. The standards of the planting and maintenance of the plants may be obtained from the NParks.
Ensure that the plants are established and grown to reasonable size at the end of the Defects Liability
Period before handing over to NParks for their maintenance. The planting scheme shall strictly comply
with their requirements.
The planting and maintenance of the shrubs/palms/creepers shall conform to the following requirements :
(a) Soil Mixture for Planting
Excavate holes for planting as indicated in the planting scheme plan or as directed. Backfill all
planting holes beneath the staircases/ramps, around bridge columns and the entire planting trough
along the prestressed concrete beams with 3:1 top soil, dried sludge mix. For planting holes, carry
out the backfilling to levels not exceeding 250mm higher than the adjacent ground level at time of
filling.
(b) Planting of Shrubs/Palms/Creepers
Handle the plants in such a manner that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken. This
shall be firmly held by plastic or other wrapping. Remove all plastic and other imperishable
wrappings before planting. Plant with ground level at the same level as the soil mark on the stem.
Water all plants thoroughly immediately after planting.
(c) Watering
Use 10 litres of water per m2 for watering the plants. Additional watering may be required as and
when directed. Carry out watering by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying
head/gun to wet the soil thoroughly.
(d) Soil-Loosening
Spike the weeding area to a depth of 100mm using a garden fork.
(e) Weeding
Weed the landscaped area using hand towel or weeding hoe.
(f) Fertilising
(i) Palms
Broadcast fertiliser NPK Mg (15:15:6:4) at a rate of 375 gm per palm within the weeding
circle 120mm away from stem.
(ii) Landscaped Area
Broadcast Fertiliser NPK Mg (12:12:17:2) at 50 gm per m2 as directed.
(iii) Climber/Creeper
Spray approved foliar fertiliser as directed.
(g) Pest Control
Spray approved pesticides immediately after the infestation is spotted until the infestation is
controlled.
LUP09/S52.DOC(56)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-57/65
52.87 LANDSCAPING OF PEDESTRIAN OVERHEAD BRIDGE (CONT'D)
(h) Maintenance
Maintain planted shrubs/palms/creepers for a period of 1 year by carrying out the following work°:
Operation Frequency
Watering (1) Daily watering for the 1st month.
(2) Thereafter, water on alternate days for the 2nd month
(3) Thereafter, water once a week for the 3rd month
(4) Thereafter, water only as directed until the end of the Defects Liability
Period
Soil
Monthly till the end of the Defects Liability Period
Loosening
Weeding Monthly till the end of the Defects Liability Period
52.88 SOIL MIXTURE (TOPSOIL AND SLUDGE)
Soil mixture shall consists of 3 parts of top soil to one part of sludge for non-water catchment areas.
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, subsoil or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture.
Sludge shall only be used in non water catchment areas. Sludge shall be dry, solid and well treated type
from approved sources. The use of sludge for turfing and other work shall comply with the Water
Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB's instructions and recommendations on the prevention of smell
and flies problems :
(a) Immediately use sludge delivered to Site meant for the turfing works.
(b) Evenly cover sludge stockpiled on the Site with a layer of lime and cover over
with a layer of topsoil.
(c) After planting of turf no additional spreading of sludge or soil on the turfed area shall be allowed.
For water catchment areas, soil conditioner shall be used instead of sludge. Soil conditioner shall be
peat, cocopeat, organic compost; or other approved fibrous organic matters suitable for mixing with soil to
make a friable growing medium for planting.
The soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of sludge for non water catchment areas or 3
3
parts of topsoil with 1 part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m of compound fertilizer NPKMg (15:15:6:4) for
water catchment areas. Provide and spread the required amount of top soil for such turfing and tree
planting works.
52.89 PLANT SOIL
In the event that the Contractor is unable to obtain the necessary top soil of the quality acceptable to the
SO Rep from any source, subject to the approval of the SO Rep, plant soil may be provided as a
substitute for top soil. Provide, mix and use the plant soil for the Works.
Manufacture the plant soil by mixing 4 parts of sub-soil, 2 parts of unwashed sand and 1 part of treated
sludge for non water catchment areas to achieve a thorough and homogenous mix relatively free of lumpy
material. In water catchment areas, the one part of sludge shall be substituted by one part of soil
conditioner and 1 kg per m3 of compound fertilizer NPK Mg (15:15:6:4). The mixing may be carried out by
spreading the various components on the ground in layers and ploughing and mixing them using
appropriate machinery or by using a mixer or by any other process. The resulting plant soil shall be
relatively free of lumpy material and shall have the following range of composition by weight :
Sand 40% to 70%

Clay 10% to 25%
Organic Matter 2% to 5%
LUP09/S52.DOC(57)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-58/65
52.89 PLANT SOIL (CONT'D)
(a) Sub-Soil
The clay content of the sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil layer shall not
be greater than 45%. Only approved sub-soil shall be utilised for the production of the plant soil.
(b) Unwashed Sand
Provide the unwashed sand required for the manufacture of plant soil. The unwashed sand to be
used shall be free of any debris, stones or other foreign material. The unwashed sand delivered to
Site shall be rejected if it fails to meet this requirement and shall be immediately removed from the
Site. Neatly store all acceptable unwashed sand on Site prior to their use.
(c) Treated Sludge
Provide the treated sludge required for the manufacture of plant-soil. Collect the treated sludge as
and when required from any of the following treatment works as directed.
The treatment works are :
(i) Bedok Wastewater Treatment Plant

(ii) Serangoon Sludge Treatment Works
(iii) Ulu Pandan Sewage Treatment Works
(iv) Kranji Sewage Treatment Works
(v) Seletar Sewage Treatment Works
Collect, transport and proper storage the treated sludge properly. Bear all costs incurred in this
respect, including any charge levied by PUB for the collection of the treated sludge.
Neatly store the treated sludge within a demarcated area on Site prior to their use. Treated sludge
shall only be used in non water catchment areas. In water catchment areas, use approved soil
conditioner and compound fertilizer in its place.
Before proceeding with the manufacture of plant soil the Contractor shall first carry out a trial mix using
the approved sub-soil, unwashed sand and sludge. Three samples of the trial mix shall be analysed for
its physical composition to ascertain if the composition of the final mix falls within the range of composition
specified above. Mixes that do not conform to the Specifications shall have their mix proportion modified
to achieve an acceptable composition.
52.90 PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS
(a) General
Where indicated in the Drawings or as directed, precast R.C. aeration slabs shall be manufactured
and laid in the manner as specified. Submit details of the R.C. aeration slabs to the SO Rep for
approval.
75mm thick aeration slabs shall be used in the carparks while 100mm thick aeration slabs shall be
used in the lorry parks. The details of the slabs shall comply strictly with that shown in the
Drawings.
For purpose of identification, there shall be different types of slab arrangement used for the car
and lorry parks. Locations of a particular type of slab arrangement to be adopted in each car or
lorry park shall be as shown in the Drawings. The number of slabs per lot for each type of
arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings.
LUP09/S52.DOC(58)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-59/65
52.90 PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS (CONT'D)
(b) Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme
Obtain the precast R.C. aeration slabs only from suppliers licensed under ISO 9000 or SAC's
Good Manufacturing Practice Scheme.
(c) Laying of Aeration Slabs
Roll the crusher run base to a level to allow the granite fines layer to be laid. The finished surface
level of the slabs after laying shall follow the gradient of the surface of the adjacent premix and the
straight edges of the slabs when formed shall be true to line and level.
Inspect each slab for stability after laying. If rocking takes place, remove from position and regrade
the granite fines to achieve the desired result.
(d) Turfing between Aeration Slabs
Fill the gaps between the slabs with approved good quality top soil to a level 10mm below the top
surface of the aeration slabs.
Tear or Cut the turves to a size slightly wider than the gaps and close plant into position followed
by light tamping with a piece of timber. Do not use excessive pressure produced by heavy objects.
Watering of the turf just planted shall immediately be followed up. Mix top soil with sludge to a
proportion of 3:1.
(e) Watering of Turves
Water the turves and trees at least twice daily once they are planted in position or otherwise
directed. This process shall continue for a period of not less than one month or until such length of
time when the plants have taken roots and show signs of growth.
Convey water through a hose connected to a tapped supply or where this is not available in the
vicinity, from water tanks of sufficient capacity and direct towards the gaps and voids where turves
are planted or at the pits where the trees are planted, at a distance not more than 150mm away to
avoid splashing.
(f) Water Absorption Tests
Select random samples of the precast RC aeration slabs for water absorption tests to be carried
out by PSB accredited laboratory. The maximum average rates of water absorption (%) calculated
on the dry weight of three test pieces per sample shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes.
0.5% of the total number of slabs from the stockpile subject to a minimum of three numbers of slab
shall be taken for water absorption test. Break the selected slabs to be tested into three test
pieces each before transporting them to the laboratory.
(g) Failure of Water Absorption Tests
charges against the Contractor for every sample of aeration slab whose average water absorption
exceeds 3% at 30 minutes.
(h) Transverse Strength Tests
Samples of RC aeration slabs at a rate of up to three pieces per every 1,000 pieces shall be
selected for transverse strength test performed in the manner as described in BS 7263 and in SAC
accredited laboratory. For purpose of this test, the supporting rollers shall be spaced at 500mm
apart for the 75mm slabs and 635mm apart for the 100mm slabs and the slabs when subjected to
a centrally placed vertical load shall not fail at a value of 40 KN and 48 KN for the 75mm and
100mm thick aeration slabs respectively.
LUP09/S52.DOC(59)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-60/65
52.90 PRECAST R.C. AERATION SLABS (CONT'D)
(h) Transverse Strength Tests (Cont'd)
charges against the Contractor for each sample that fails to comply with the above test
requirement. Each batch of slabs represented by the three sample whose combined average
results fail to attain 40 KN or 48 KN for the 75mm and 100mm thick aeration slabs respectively
shall be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep after he has considered the degree of
failure and other related circumstances.
(i) Maintenance
maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the Precast RC Aeration Slabs and turfing
Works, for a period one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works
or phase or sub-phase of the Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred
to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this Clause).
Keep a schedule of completion date of work done in each and every car and lorry park and return
to the Site so as to carry out the necessary maintenance work of regular trimming, deweeding,
tending and watering the turves and plant at least once a month throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and
the Maintenance Period.
Maintain all the aeration slabs in proper conditions once they have been laid. Keep a schedule of
completion dates and return to the Site at least once a month throughout the Time for Completion
and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and the
Maintenance Period to inspect and ensure that the slabs are stable and do not rock under the
loads of vehicles. Replace any slab found cracked or chipped to an extent which is unsatisfactory.
52.91 PRECAST BG SLABS
(a) General
Manufacture precast B.G. slabs as indicated in the Drawing or where directed by the SO Rep and
in accordance to the requirement of BS 7263 or SS 214 whenever applicable. Random samples of
3 for every order of 1000 are to be taken for carrying out Water Absorption Test and Transverse
Strength Test as specified in BS 7263 or SS 214 at a SAC accredited laboratory subject to a
minimum of 3 numbers.
The maximum average rate of water absorption (%) calculated on the dry weight of three test
pieces per sample shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes. For the Transverse strength test, the
supporting rollers shall be spaced at 450mm apart and the slabs when subjected to a centrally
placed vertical load shall not fail at a value of 19 KN.
charges against the contractor for each sample that fails to comply with the above test
requirement.
Bear the cost of carrying out the test and that of transporting the samples to the designated
laboratory.
(b) Laying of B.G. Slabs
Inspect each B.G. slabs for stability after laying. If rocking takes place, remove it from position and
regrade and compact the base to achieve the desired result.
LUP09/S52.DOC(60)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-61/65
52.91 PRECAST BG SLABS (CONT'D)
(c) Turfing between B.G. Slabs
Fill the gaps between the slabs with approved good quality top soil to a level 10mm below the top
surface of the B.G. slabs cut or tear turves to a size slightly wider than the gaps and close planted
into position followed by light tamping with a piece of timber. Excessive pressure produced by
heavy objects shall not be allowed. Follow up immediately with watering of the turf just planted.
(d) Watering of Turves
Water the turves at least twice daily once they are planted in position or otherwise directed.
Continue watering for a period of not less than one month or until such length of time when the
plants have taken roots and shown sign of growth.
Convey water through a hose connected to a tapped supply or where this is not available in the
vicinity, from water tanks of sufficient capacity and direct towards the gaps and voids where turves
are planted, at a distance not more than 150mm away to avoid splashing.
(e) Maintenance
maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the Precast B.G. Slabs and turfing works, for a
period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or
sub-phase of the Works, as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the
“Maintenance Period” for the purposes of this subclause).
Keep a schedule of completion date of work done and return to the Site so as to carry out the
necessary maintenance work of regular trimming, deweeding, tending and watering the turves and
plant at least once a month throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract and the Maintenance Period.
Maintain all B.G. slabs in proper condition once they have been laid. Ensure that the slabs are
stable and do not rock throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Cotnract and Maintenance Period. Replace any slab found
cracked or chipped to an extent which is unsatisfactory.
52.92 TESTING OF PREMIX
The quality and standard of premix for the road and carparks shall be in accordance with the Clauses and
Subclauses on premix bituminous surfacing. Should the bitumen content of the premix or the grading of
aggregate fall outside the specified limits, the premix shall be rejected. In these circumstances, the
Contractor shall be required to accept the corrective measures including compensation by additional layer
of premix or the payment of fines as maintenance fees as directed by the SO Rep or LTA who shall be the
final authority for the road.
52.93 TAKING OVER BY LTA AND THE EMPLOYER
All materials used for the roads and carparks such as concrete kerbs, channels, concrete pipes, etc are to
conform to the standard requirements of LTA and the SO Rep in strength, hydraulic, bearing, grading,
absorption tests, for taking over purposes.
52.94 LTA'S OR THE SO REP'S REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor's particular attention is drawn to all tests required by LTA or the SO Rep for premix and
such concrete precast units as roadside kerbs, dividers, road base and sub-base etc. Bear the costs of
such tests. Samples shall be extracted from the Works actually incorporated for analysis to ensure
compliance with this Specifications. Provide the necessary labour in extracting the samples as requested
by the SO Rep, and patch up all cavities caused by the removal of these samples.
The number of test samples shall conform to LTA (Road Management) requirements on the relevant SS
or BS.
LUP09/S52.DOC(61)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-62/65
52.94 LTA'S OR THE SO REP'S REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D)
For service roads and carparks to be taken over by the HDB, the number of samples for final testing shall
comply with the following :
Rate of Sampling Minimum Number
Kerbs 1 sample for every 120 m length Two
Premix 1 sample for every 550 m2 of carpark Two
1 sample for every 450 m2 of service Two

road/driveway
Precast Footpath Slabs 1 sample for every 350 m2 Two
Where any of the tests carried out by LTA or the SO Rep fails to pass the requirements, the decision
taken by them shall be final irrespective of whether the same samples had been passed by other
Authorities or not. The Contractor shall either :
(a) replace the sections of the rejected works as indicated by LTA or the SO Rep with the approved
ones, or
(b) pay to LTA or the Employer the sum of money determined by the LTA or SO Rep according to the
degree of failure.
The SO Rep shall determine whether item (a) or (b) of the above is to be adopted and reserves the right
to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming due to the Contractor.
52.95 LTA'S ROAD TESTING REQUIREMENT
(1) The Contractor shall engage the services of SAC/SINGLAS laboratories for plant, material, labour
and transport needed for cutting of samples and to carry out testing of the cut samples and shall
be responsible for the supervision of the cutting of samples and reinstatement after extraction.
(2) Prior to road testing, the Contractor shall submit the following to the SO Rep for his approval and
subsequent submission to LTA:
(a) A copy of coloured site plan showing the road/roads to be tested and the location where
samples would be extracted.
(i) For premix, cut sample to be obtained from pavement at every 50m on each
carriageway.
(ii) For rigid pavement (concrete), cut sample to be obtained at every 50m3 of concrete on
each carriageway.
(iii) For precast kerbs, 3 test kerbs shall be taken at random for every 2000 units or less.
A minimum of 3 samples is required on each type of pavement and kerb of the road Works.
The test results endorsed by a PE are to be submitted to the SO Rep.
(b) Name of the SAC/SINGLAS laboratory
(c) Name of Supplier of premix
LUP09/S52.DOC(62)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-63/65
52.95 LTA'S ROAD TESTING REQUIREMENT (Cont’d)
(d) Date of premix and concrete laid on site
(e) Type of premix and concrete mix laid on site
(f) Thickness of premix and concrete laid on site
(g) Date and Time of sample cutting.
(3) The following Tests are to be carried out:
3.1 Water absorption test for precast kerb
- To conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in Section 9.18.8
of LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification.
3.2 Compressive strength test for concrete (core strength)
- the compressive strength of a core shall be prepared and tested in accordance with BS
1881.
- to conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in Table 9.5 of
Section 9.9.7 of the LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification.
3.3 Aggregate gradations and bitumen contents of Wearing Course and Asphaltic Base Course
- to conform to the requirements and criteria for acceptance specified in the following
Sections of LTA Materials & Workmanship Specification :
- Graded Granite Aggregates - Section 13.3.2.3(f), (g) & (h)
- Aggregate Grading Requirement - Section 13.3.3.2 Table 13.17
- Requirement for Bitumen - Section 13.3.3.2 Table 13.17
(4) The following are to be submitted together with the test results:
4.1 A record of the thickness of wearing course, base course and sub-base measured at the
locations where the samples are extracted.
4.2 Photographs showing the samples at each location during extraction.
4.3 Photographs showing the road after reinstatement.
4.4 Test results be endorsed by the SAC/SINGLAS Laboratory supervisor and a PE.
4.5 For road test for Asphaltic Concrete Mixes, the accredited laboratory certified by the PSB
has to compute the Deduction Factor (a factor used to determine whether the asphaltic
concrete used falls within the acceptable limit) and reflect it in the individual sample test
result and provide a summary of computation of laboratory test results for all the samples.
(5) The LTA's road testing requirement is applicable for roads designed to LTA standard under
Section 18 of the Streets Work Act and in addition to other testing requirements specified in the
Specifications.
52.96 SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT
(a) General
Expansion joints shall be of an approved shape and be provided in the positions as shown in the
Drawings or as directed.
Suitable joint filler material is placed between the pavement slabs to allow the slabs to expand and
contract.
Joint shall be sealed using appropriate joint sealant.
LUP09/S52.DOC(63)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-64/65
52.96 SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT (Cont’d)
(b) Joint Sealant
(i) Type of Sealant
The type of sealant used shall be cold applied, fuel resistant. Cold applied sealant
capable of accommodating high movement.
(ii) Requirements
The sealant shall comply with the British standard BS 5212 : 1990 – "Cold applied joint
sealant systems for concrete pavements" – Type F.
(ii) Requirements (Cont'd)
Cold applied, high duty pavement sealant shall possess the following properties :
Form : Two part compound

Base compound - viscous liquid
Curing agent - liquid
Colour : Black
Movement accommodation
Factor (BS 6093) : Butt joints 25%
Physical or Chemical change : Chemical cure
Setting time : After 16 to 24 hours, sealant will be tacked free and
accepted traffic. Full cure and maximum hardness are
attained in approximately 3 to 4 days at 25 C.
Application temperature : To avoid unacceptably prolonged cure times, do not apply

to temperatures below 5ºC.
Hardness shore ‘A’ at 25ºC : 12 to 17
Chemical resistance to : Dilute acids - resistant
Occasional spillage : Mild alkalis - resistant
Petrol - resistant
Aviation fuels - resistant
Diesel fuels - resistant
Synthetic oils - resistant
Mineral oils - resistant
Hydraulic fluids - resistant
Kerosene - resistant
Solids content : 100%
Density : 1.36 kg/litre
Flash point : Over 65ºC
Flammability : Burns but does not readily support combustion
(c) Method for application of sealant
(i) Joint Preparation
Joint sealing slots shall be accurately formed and shall be dry, clean and sound. All grease,
water and dust shall be removed from the joint before applying the primer (if requires).
Ensure that any expansion joint filler is tightly packed in the joint and at the required depth
to provide the seal dimensions specified.
LUP09/S52.DOC(64)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 52-65/65
52.96 SEALANT USED FOR EXPANSION JOINT IN RIGID PAVEMENT (Cont’d)
(c) Method for application of sealant (Cont’d)
(ii) Priming
Primers shall be applied only to sealant contact surfaces which must be clean, dry, sound
and free of contaminants.
Prime joint sealing slot surface with appropriate prime for the type of sealant approved by
the SO Rep. Allow primer to air dry prior to applying sealant. Drying time also depends on
the type of primer used and ambient temperature.
The surface shall be touch dry. The approved sealant shall be applied within the time
period after priming before the primer film has completely reacted. Primed surfaces not
sealed with sealant within the required time period shall be re-primed before applying
sealant.
(iii) Application of sealant
Dried primer is free of any residue and prepared joints are free of any foreign matters or
contaminations. Apply sealant into the sealing slot so that the finished level of the seal is
recessed below the trafficked surface as specified.
(d) Information of product to be supplied by manufacturer
Obtain from the manufacturer the following information of the sealant/primer proposed for use for
the works :
Maximum safe heating temperature of the material.

Temperature range of application.
Flash point of sealant and primer.
Composition of the mixture.
Type of primer required.
Application instructions.
Health and Safety Data Sheets on sealant and primer for additional information concerning usage,
handling precautions, first aid procedures, warranty including shelf life.
The foregoing information shall be provided to the SO Rep one week before the start of the sealant
application.
SECTION 53/...
LUP09/S52.DOC(65)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-1/30
SECTION 53
53.0 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR ROADS AND DRAINS
53.1 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
Commence construction of the road work with the excavation for and construction of stormwater drains
commencing at their outfalls. Excavation for and construction of roads shall not commence until the
construction of stormwater drains is sufficiently advanced in the opinion of the SO Rep to permit free
drainage of the road formation.
53.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT, PUB
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the following general requirements of Drainage Department, PUB
the failure to comply with these requirements may render him liable to prosecution under the Water
Pollution Control and Drainage Act :
(a) The execution of any work shall not change, disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow
or the existing system of drains unless an alternative approved drainage system has been
provided and permission for use has been given by the Drainage Department, PUB.
(b) Close turf all earth slopes adjacent to any drain.
(c) Obstruction of any kind shall not be placed, laid or erected within drainage reserves and drains
both of which shall remain accessible at all times.
(d) No temporary structures such as cofferdams, crossings, stagings, etc shall be constructed in or
over an existing drain without the prior approval of the Drainage Department, PUB.
(e) Remove any temporary structures if approved within the drainage reserve immediately on
completion of the construction work.
(f) Bunds of stockpiled earth from trench work shall not be longer than 10m long and gaps of at least
1 m wide shall be provided between the bunds to allow the free flow of surface runoff.
(g) Material from any stockpile shall not be allowed to fall or be washed into drain. Adequate
preventive measures, including the provision of proper and stable barricades or screens where
necessary, shall be provided.
(h) Scupper inlets shall not be blocked by excavated or stockpiled material.
(i) Drains shall not be covered without the approval of the Drainage Department, PUB.
(j) Report any damage to existing drains arising out of any work immediately to the Drainage
Department, PUB. Any obstruction to flow arising from the damage shall be immediately and
completely cleared, and repair & reconstruct the damaged drain to the requirement of the Drainage
Department, PUB.
(k) Reclamation work, earthwork, roadwork, development work or any other construction work shall
not be carried out unless a system of temporary lined perimeter cut-off drains and silt traps or other
approved alternative measures are provided to prevent overflowing of surface runoff and silt from
the worksite to the drains and adjacent premises.
(l) Desilt and maintain regularly all temporary lined perimeter cut-off drains and silt traps to ensure
that the discharge from the silt trap is free of silt.
LUP09/S53.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-2/30
53.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT, PUB
Ensure and take all necessary precautions and actions for preventing silt from being washed into drains
and canals and comply with the following requirements strictly :
(a) Treatment of Silt-laden water
Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. Channel
the silt-laden water to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for removal of silt before
discharging into drains or canals.
(b) Provision of silt traps and perimeter cut-off drains
(i) Provide silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities to ensure that earth, silt, mud,
etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities shall be duly
designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer. Construct these facilities before the
commencement of Works.
(ii) Desilt silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities and maintain at least once a
week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt from the
worksites.
(c) Protection of exposed earth surfaces
Carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at Site. Plant all exposed earth surfaces not
affected by construction activities with turfing on an immediate basis. Where necessary to
effectively prevent soil erosion, carry out progressive turfing on Site. In cases where turfing is not
practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth surfaces which are left bare and undisturbed
for more than one month, protect such surfaces from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based
emulsion or other effective methods to be approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval
of the SO Rep, ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.
(d) Excavated Material
(i) Cart away all surplus excavated materials to own disposal ground immediately. The surplus
excavated material shall not be stockpiled on Site.
(ii) Earth materials stockpiled on Site for construction work shall be within properly contained
areas and covered to prevent the earth from washing into drains or canals. The locations for
stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the
approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not washed into drains or
canals.
(iii) Only carry out trench excavation work as the rate of construction keeps pace with the rate
of excavation.
(e) Treatment of Mud Slurry
Ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet grouting, etc. is
not discharged into drains or canals.
53.4 EXCAVATION
Carry out the excavation in accordance with Clauses in the Specifications.
LUP09/S53.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-3/30
53.5 PIPE CONDUIT DRAINS
Excavation of trenches shall be to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and beds as
specified. The trench bottom shall be of sufficient width to allow adequate working space but beyond
these requirements, the width shall be kept to a minimum.
Maintain the setting out of a sufficient length of pipe lines in advance of pipe laying and carry out such
exploration excavation as may be necessary.
For lengths of pipelines, which are curved in plan, the curve shall be obtained by deflecting the pipes at
each joint. Set the inverts of the drains by wooden pegs with the help of boning rod or other means at
regular intervals of not more than 5 metres. Thoroughly compact the bedding for the pipes and lay the
pipes evenly on the barrel at the required level. There shall be no hollows, voids or foreign material under
the pipe. Take particular care to ensure that proper bedding is obtained at either side of the pipe joints.
When concrete beds foundation is specified it shall consists of concrete or reinforced concrete as shown
in details on the Drawings.
In all cases, well ram or vibrate and work the concrete under and around the pipes. No concrete shall be
placed around the pipes until the pipe joints have been inspected and approved.
At approximately every four pipes or 6 metre whichever is the lesser interval form a joint in the concrete
bed or surround by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibreboard, timber or other
approved material. The shuttering material shall be left in to form a permanent joint. Where the concrete
bed is required to be reinforced all reinforcement shall stop on either side of the joint.
At every point of loading, or unloading, handle pipes or castings by approved lifting tackle. Not allowed to
unload by roll down planks or any other form of inclined ramp unless the consent of the SO Rep to the
method proposed has been obtained. Carefully stacked pipes on Site with timber packings under and
between the pipes. Where pipes are stacked, the height shall never exceed 2m.
All pipes shall be carefully brushed out inside and shall be tested for soundness before being laid. Lay the
pipes separately to true inverts, straight lines and falls, each pipe being separately boned between sight
rails and bearing evenly upon the solid ground or concrete for its full length.
Where pipes are laid without a concrete bed, cut holes in the bottom of the trench of such size and depth
so as to allow the joints to be properly made and the barrel of the pipe to bear evenly on the solid ground
of its full length.
Where pipes are to be laid on rock formation, take the excavation down to 100mm below bed level and
take great care to ensure that there are no projecting pieces of rock on which the pipe will ride. Make up
the bed to its true line and level and refill with either 100mm of consolidated, selected material from the
excavations, well rammed, and watered if necessary or with 100mm of grade 15 concrete as directed by
the SO Rep.
Ensure that all blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of the pipes.
Push home each well positioned concrete pipe with rebated joint into the previously laid pipe by means of
uniformly applied pressure. Then carry out jointing by filling the opening at the joint with cement mortar
and finish off flush.
Gauge mortar for jointing pipes and precast concrete units in the proportions of one part of cement to
three parts of sand.
Mix cement mortar in small quantities sufficiently only for 30 minutes work and do not remix or work up
again after setting or hardening; any mortar that has become set or hard shall be rejected and removed
from the Works.
In the event of pipes being fractured after being to all appearances properly laid whether due to imperfect
beds having been formed or the material for refilling having been improperly selected or to any other
cause, the Contractor in every instance, shall be held responsible and shall be called upon to replace
such defective pipes at his own cost, if such Defect appears before the expiry of the Defects Liability
Period.
LUP09/S53.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-4/30
53.6 CULVERTS
Construct pipe culverts of precast reinforced concrete pipes as specified herein all in accordance with the
Drawings.
Lay and joint pipes as described in Clauses 52.65 to 52.68 of this Specifications.
Where box culverts are to be cast-in-situ reinforced concrete, Construct them in accordance with Clause
52.34 "Concrete" and to the approval of the SO Rep.
53.7 BACKFILLING FOR CULVERTS
When backfilling the excavation after the pipe-laying and concreting has been approved, carefully place
and well pack selected material free from large stones next to the work to avoid injury to it. Fill in the
remainder of the excavation with the best and most suitable portions of the excavated material, in layers
of not more than 600mm deep; each layer shall be thoroughly rammed and watered to achieve adequate
compaction and consolidation. If directed by the SO Rep, use imported filling for backfilling.
Note carefully that proper backfilling of trenches shall be required and measures shall be taken as may be
necessary to enforce compliance with this Clause.
Maintain all backfilled surfaces including existing roads until they are completely reinstated. Bear liability
for claims arising from accidents due to subsidence or inadequate maintenance.
53.8 FILL ADJACENT TO BRIDGE ABUTMENTS, CULVERTS AND RETAINING WALLS
Before backfilling, place a filter drain against weepholes in all structures. The filter drain shall consist of
clean, hard and durable broken stones or hardcore. The large stones shall be placed adjacent to the
weepholes and the smaller particles behind and above the larger particles.
Extend the length of the filter drain horizontally throughout the whole width of the structures or as shown
in the Drawings. Unless otherwise stated, it shall have a width of 300mm and shall vertically cover the
weephole by at least 300mm.
Place special filling material adjacent to all structures in accordance with Table 53.1. Other approved
materials may be used as backfill outside the limits as specified in the same Table.
Table 53.1
Special Fill Adjacent to Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls
Structure Minimum Width of Special Fill
Bridge abutment & wingwalls 2.0 m
Culverts windwalls H/3
Retaining walls H/3
Barrels of box culverts H/3
Barrels of pipe culverts H
(H-height of structure)
Place backfill in horizontal layers of thickness appropriate to the compacting plant used. Compact backfill
with care to the required density but avoid excessive compaction.
For framed structures, bringing fill at both ends of the structure up simultaneously and equally, with the
difference in levels of fills at both ends limited to 600mm.
No fill shall be placed against concrete structures within 21 days after placing concrete unless the
Contractor has provided at his own expense sufficient supports to the walls to the approval of the SO Rep.
The supply, filling and compaction of the special filling material shall form part of the Contract and the
Contractor shall allow for such works in the Contract Sum.
LUP09/S53.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-5/30
53.9 COFFERDAMS
Any proposal for cofferdams shall not be implemented without the prior written approval of the SO Rep.
The proposal shall include the method of construction, materials used, width, height, length and location
of the cofferdams.
53.10 PREPARATION OF ROAD FORMATION
Where the bearing capacity of the soil is determined by the SO Rep or his representative as adequate and
where the road is in cut, carry out excavations to the required levels as required by the thickness of
construction and the levels of the finished road. Excavate the formation to the required level of the
camber or cross-fall shown for the finished road and trim to an even surface. Thoroughly roll the formation
with 10 tonne rollers or similar equipment until thoroughly compacted.
Where the road is on previously filled ground or where excavation has to be carried deeper than normal
formation level on account of weakness in the subsoil as may be shown on the Drawings or determined
by the SO Rep during the progress of the work, bring up the formation to the correct level with filling as
specified in Clause 55.5 "Filling Generally".
Properly compact such filling up to formation level by rolling successively with compaction equipments as
detailed in Clause 55.9 "Compaction" and bring to proper shape and camber as is the case of the
formation where the road is in cut.
Trim off all high spots and reconsolidate the section. Should any depressions appear in the formation
during compaction, fill in, level and compact with material as specified, before crusher run laying is
commenced.
The SO Rep may require fill materials to be tested by a SAC accredited laboratory in accordance with BS
1377 to determine its maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for compaction. One test will
be conducted to determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for each class of
material to be compacted.
Maintain the moisture content of the in-situ material during compaction as close to the optimum moisture
content as possible. If necessary, this shall be adjusted by wetting or drying on Site to enable the
required in-situ field densities of the fill material to be obtained consistently.
Following the compaction process, carry out in-situ field density tests in accordance with BS 1377:1975
Test No. 15(A) (Sand Replacement Method) or Test No. 15(F) (Water Displacement Method). The in-situ
field density may also be determined using nuclear density meters. At least one in-situ field test shall be
made for every 300m2 of surface area of each compacted layer.
Obtain the following in-situ field densities of compacted materials given as percentage of the maximum
dry density derived from BS 1377 Test No. 13 (4.5kg rammer) :
(a) Within 500mm of formation level (sub-grade or foundation)

- 95% of maximum dry density
(b) From 500mm below formation level

- 90% of maximum dry density
The Contractor may choose to establish by site trials the relationship among the in-situ material for
compaction, compaction plant used, thickness for each layer, and compacting effort in terms of number of
passes. If so established and agreed by the SO Rep the Contractor shall allow the same compaction
arrangement for each and every subsequent layers in compaction. However, the SO Rep may at any
time carry out in-situ field density tests to determine whether the degree of compaction is satisfactory.
The agreed compaction arrangement as mentioned above shall be adjusted when the compaction is
found inadequate.
LUP09/S53.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-6/30
53.11 SUB-GRADE OF CARRIAGEWAY
(a) Sub-grade Formation
In addition to Clause 53.10 "Preparation of Road Formation", trim the finished level of sub-grade
along the road centre-line and finish to the lines, grades and cross-sections as shown on the
Drawings.
On straight lengths of roads, trim the sub-grade to a cross-fall as shown in the Drawing on each
side of the road's centre-line. Where the alignment is curved the cross-fall of the sub-grade shall
be the same as that of the pavement on both super-elevations and transitions.
Trim the sub-grade so that the level does not vary more than 25mm above or 50mm below the
levels shown on the Drawings.
(b) Sub-grade Material
Fill material for the last 500mm of the sub-grade shall be the best selected material which shall
have a soaked CBR (California Bearing Ratio) value of not less than the value shown on the
Drawings or the Supplementary Specifications or given by the SO Rep in writing.
In cut or natural ground where the soaked CBR value of the last 500mm of sub-grade material is
less than the required minimum value and if directed in writing, remove 500mm of this material and
replace it with an approved selected fill material which conforms to the minimum value required at
the expense of the Contractor.
Compact the last 500mm of the sub-grade material in layers not exceeding 150mm to the required
density given below.
(c) Compaction of Sub-grade
Carry out compaction of the sub-grade by mechanical means using the approved type of
compaction equipment such as smooth-wheel roller, tamping roller, pneumatic typed roller and
vibrating smooth drum roller, to the required density as specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction". For
undisturbed natural ground, compaction shall be the required dry density for a depth of not less
than 200mm.
Compact the last 500mm layer of sub-grade material below the level of the granite base course to
a density as shown in the Drawings or to the Specifications.
The location of the samples and the field measurement of the dry density of the compacted
material shall be carried out in-situ with a standard instrument approved by the SO Rep.
At the time of compaction of each layer, adjust the moisture content of the material by spraying
water uniformly or allowing the material to dry out sufficiently to obtain the required compaction.
No base course material shall be laid on the carriageway until the sub-grade has been approved
by the SO Rep. Remove any material laid on the sub-grade before the sub-grade has been
approved by the SO Rep from Site, if directed by the SO Rep, at the Contractor's own expense.
The location where test is required shall be determined and approved by the SO Rep. The
laboratory test shall be carried out at the HDB laboratory or PSB's accredited laboratories.
During construction, the SO Rep may take samples from the compacted sub-grade for CBR tests,
the location of which shall be determined by the SO Rep depending on the uniformity of the soil
type encountered and all the costs incurred shall be at the Contractor's own expense. The number
of samples to be taken shall be at a rate of one sample for every 50m of carriageway subject to a
minimum of 3 samples. However, if the soaked CBR values fail to achieve the standard required,
further tests will be carried out and paid for by the Contractor.
LUP09/S53.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-7/30
53.11 SUB-GRADE OF CARRIAGEWAY (CONT'D)
(d) Improved Sub-grade Course of Carriageway
No sub-grade material or granite base material shall be laid on the carriageway until the sub-grade
has been approved by the SO Rep for the laying of the improved sub-grade or base course
materials.
Unless otherwise stated, the thickness of the base and sub-base course shown on the Drawings
shall be the compacted thickness.
53.12 CONCRETE HAUNCHED UPVC SCUPPER DRAINS
Concrete haunch 250mm diameter upvc pipe to SS272 (with no joint) and lay within the side-tables to the
details shown on the Drawings.
Provide drop inlets to the details shown in the Drawings and the connection to the scupper pipes/drains
neatly joint in cement mortar.
53.13 ROADSIDE KERBS, CHANNELS, ETC
All precast concrete roadside kerbs channels (gutters), dividers and drain channels shall comply with
BS 7263 and/or SS 214:1979. Set the kerbs, dividers etc in cement mortar on a bed of concrete and
haunched with concrete all as shown on the Drawings. Great care shall be taken to ensure the trueness
of the line and level of the kerbs. Trim, cut or cast end units squarely to suit required dimensions.
The composite and other drain channels shall conform entirely to the shape and dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
All joints between kerb units shall be of a uniform thickness and pointed in 1:3 cement-sand mortar.
Cast the kerbs to the necessary radii to suit sharp curves on plan and the required proportion shall have
shaped insets to suit the entrances to scupper drains.
53.14 CRUSHER RUN BASE COURSE
Crusher run material shall consist of hard, clean, durable, and angular aggregate with a nominal size of
100mm and maximum size of not more than 125mm.
If the required compacted depth of the base course exceeds 150mm, construct the base in two or more
layers of approximately equal thickness compacted and blinded as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
The maximum compacted thickness of any layer shall not exceed 150mm irrespective of the type of
compacting equipment employed.
Mechanically spread the crushed granite or by any other means approved by the SO Rep to a uniform
thickness.
Roll each layer of the crushed granite base course with a smooth steel wheeled roller of at least 10 tonnes
until a uniform surface is attained. Spread 20mm granite aggregate and brush into the surface voids and
rolling shall continue until a smooth and uniform surface is attained and there is no movement in the
crushed granite layers. Begin rolling at the sides and progress gradually towards the centre parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the road, with a uniform over-lap of each succeeding trip of the roller. Make good
irregularities of the compacted crusher run layer before the next course is laid.
Blind the surface of each layer with granite dust or an approved blinding material. Brush these blinding
materials into the interstices of the granite base course and water with a watering cart. Roll and water the
whole surface sweep and roll repeatedly until all the interstices in the granite base course have been filled
and the granite base course forms a dense and compact layer.
On completion the surface of the base course shall present a smooth and compact appearance, true to
levels and camber or cross-fall and shall be sufficiently water-bound to withstand traffic.
LUP09/S53.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-8/30
53.15 PLANT MIXED CRUSHED GRANITE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
All crushed granite base course shall consist of graded crushed, clean and hard angular aggregate of
maximum size 38mm. The grading of the materials is as shown in Table 53.2 below :
Table 53.2
Grading Requirements for Plant Mixed Crushed Granite Base Course
BS Sieve Size % Passing (by weight)
50 mm
100
38.0 mm
95 - 100
19.0 mm
60 - 80
9.5 mm
40 - 60
4.8 mm
25 - 45
2.4 mm
15 - 35
425 µm
6 - 18
75 µm
0 - 10
Mix the aggregates at a mixing plant by continuous mixing using a pug-mill mixer, or batch type mixing
using a revolving blade, rotary pan, or rotary tilting drum mixer. The plant shall be in sound mechanical
condition and shall consistently produce a uniform mixture or aggregates and water at optimum moisture
content or at a moisture content as directed by the SO Rep.
To achieve the desired grading, the use of any sand, granite dust or approved filler such as laterite, the
quality of such materials and the amount to be added into the mixing plant shall be subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
Water used for mixing shall be clean and substantially free from detrimental impurities such as oil, salts,
acids, alkali and vegetable substance.
The method of loading and unloading of material shall be such that segregation shall be minimised.
Remove from site material which does not comply with the Specifications.
During delivery, cover the material with canvas, or other approved material to prevent loss of moisture
during transport. Vehicles used for delivery of material to the hoppers of spreading machines shall have
bodies or discharge equipment which shall enable the load to be discharged direct into hopper without
spillage and in such a way that segregation shall be minimised.
The Contractor is required to furnish information on the following :
(a) Date and time of loading

(b) The name of the supplier
(c) The registered number of the vehicle
(d) The nature and source of the material
The record book shall be kept by the SO Rep on Site.
Spreading of the pavement material shall not commence without the prior consent of the SO Rep
Complete spreading within 3 hours of the time of loading the delivery vehicle.
Spread the whole of the mixture by an approved self propelled mechanical spreader with an automatic
tamping device. Each layer shall be spread in an uniform layer not exceeding 200mm consolidated thick.
After the final rolling which shall be carried out with a self propelled steel-wheeled roller of at least 12
tonnes in weight, the whole surface shall then be allowed to "cure" by opening the carriageway to traffic
for a period of at least two (2) weeks or longer if required by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S53.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-9/30
53.15 PLANT MIXED CRUSHED GRANITE AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

(CONT'D)
When used in a pavement which is not to carry a bituminous surfacing, that portion of the material which
will pass a 425 µm sieve shall have the following properties :
Liquid Limit - not more than 25%

Plasticity Index - not more than 6%
Linear Shrinkage - not more than 3%
The sand equivalent of the material passing the 4.8mm sieve shall not be less than 30.
When used in a pavement which is to carry a bituminous surfacing, the portion of the material which will
pass a 425 µm sieve shall have the following properties :
Liquid Limit - not more than 35%

Plasticity Index - between 4 and 9%
Linear Shrinkage - between 2 and 4%
53.16 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING
(a) General
Where indicated in the Drawings or where directed, lay the road with hot Asphalt Premix Surfacing
to a consolidated thickness of either 25mm, 50mm or thicker as shown on the Drawings and as
detailed below.
Works under this Contract shall include the following :
(i) Sweeping and brushing surface prior to applying tack coats or asphalt surfacing.
(ii) Supply and application of suitable tack coats wherever required.
(iii) Supply and unloading of hot mix asphalt paving mixes as directed.
(iv) Supply, lay by mechanical spreader/finisher, and rolling and finishing of hot mix
asphalt paving mixes.
On receipt of instructions from the SO Rep, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with such work
within 48 hours. Carry out the work continuously and complete within such time as is specified by
the SO Rep, having due regard to the output capacity of the Contractor's mixing plant and allowing
for unavoidable lost time because of any inclement weather during the course of such work.
(b) Materials
All bitumen supplied shall comply with SS 84 and SS 85 and shall be approved type asphaltic
bitumen of either 60/70 penetration and/or 80/100 penetration, as directed by the SO Rep
(measured at 25ºC in both cases). All bitumen shall be straight-run bitumen prepared only by the
refining of asphaltic-base petroleum and such refining shall not involve the "cracking process". No
mineral matter other than that naturally contained in such bitumen shall be present. The bitumen
shall be of uniform quality, free from water and shall not foam when heated to 175ºC. Submit,
when required by the SO Rep the country of origin of all bitumen supplied, and the price paid for
such bitumen, prior to its use in the Works.
Test for the properties of bitumen shall be carried out whenever required in accordance with the
methods set out in SS 86.
Mineral Filler shall consist of crushed rock fines, Portland Cement to SS 26 and/or granite fines of
appropriate grading. At least 85% of cement filler shall pass BS Sieve No. 200 and filler shall be
thoroughly dry and shall be free from organic matter and clay particles.
LUP09/S53.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-10/30
53.16 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING (CONT'D)
(b) Materials (Cont'd)
Fine Aggregate shall consist of approved clean well-graded granite fines produced in a secondary
crushing plant, or approved clean natural sand properly washed free from all impurities. Fine
aggregate shall be taken as materials mainly passing a BS Sieve 4.76mm and retained on
BS Sieve No. 200.
Coarse Aggregate shall consist of clean, well-graded, angular, crushed granite of approved quality
free from dust, dirt, and/or deleterious materials, and free from excess of flat, elongated or
weathered pieces. Coarse aggregate shall be taken as material mainly retained on BS Sieve
4.76mm.
(c) Rollers
Rolling equipment shall, consist of steel wheel and pneumatic type rollers.
Steel Wheel Rollers shall be of the following types unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep :
(i) three-wheel rollers of 10 to 12 tonnes in weight.

(ii) two-axle tandem rollers of 8 to 12 tonnes in weight.
These rollers shall, under working conditions, develop a compression in the rear-wheels of 44N per
mm to 59N per mm of roll width. Rollers shall be in good working condition and be free from
backlash, faulty steering mechanism, or worn parts. Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable
scrappers to keep the rollers clean and with efficient means of keeping the wheels wet to prevent
mixes from sticking to the rolls. Rollers shall also be free of flat areas, openings or projections
which will mar the surface of the pavement.
Pneumatic Tyre Rollers shall be self-propelled or towed type, single or double-axle, having an
effective rolling width of not less than 1.2 metres. The rollers shall be equipped with smooth-
thread pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter. The wheels of the roller shall be so spaced
that two passes of a single-axle roller or one pass of a two-axle roller shall accomplish one
complete coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine. There shall be a minimum of 7mm
over-lap of the tracking wheels of a double axle roller. The wheels shall not wobble. The roller
shall be uniform for all wheels. Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be constructed with ample ballast
space to provide an operating weight per tyre of between 54 to 76 N per mm of tyre track width.
The total operating weight of the roller may be varied by the SO Rep. The towing vehicle for
towed-typed rollers shall be equipped with smooth-thread pneumatic tyres.
(d) Preparation of Area to be Paved
The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, having a dry and properly prepared surface
prior to the start of paving operations. It shall be brushed until the stone aggregate surfaces are
exposed and the whole area shall be swept free of all excess granite dust or blinding material and
other loose chippings or foreign material.
Patch or correct all depressions and other irregularities to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Apply a tack coat complying with SS 85 on the prepared crushed stone base before the Hot
Asphalt premix surfacing is laid. The rate of application of the tack coat shall be 0.55 litre per m2.
Paint the surface of kerbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all structures in actual
contact with the asphalt mixes with a thin uniform coating of approved bituminous emulsion
complying with SS 85 to provide a closed bonded watertight joint.
LUP09/S53.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-11/30
(e) Tack Coat
Supply and lay a suitable tack coat of cationic emulsion of 40% bitumen content as directed, to any
surface, prior to the spreading of the asphalt thereon, and after such surface has been thoroughly
cleaned and dried.
Apply the bitumen emulsion by means of an approved type of mechanical sprayer only, and at the
specified rate of application uniformly. Remove any excess or unevenly distributed bitumen from
the road surface.
The bitumen emulsion shall be allowed a period of 10 minutes "to break" before laying premix over
it.
(f) Asphalt Mixing & Delivery
Furnish the SO Rep in advance with full details of all asphalt mixing plant to be used, including
average output capacity, type, age, maintenance facilities and all other relevant particulars
whenever required by the SO Rep. The mixing plant to be used shall have an output capacity of
not less than 50 tonnes per hour.
The appropriate mix required for each work shall be in accordance with the Table of Mix as
specified in subclause 53.16(n) "Table of Mixes" of the Specifications. Wherever considered
advisable, the SO Rep may vary the specified proportions of coarse and fine aggregate within a
range of ±10% and the Contractor shall NOT be entitled to any extra payment nor suffer any
reduction in payment on this account.
The SO Rep may vary the percentage of filler to be used, within a range of 2% and the Contractor
shall NOT be entitled to any extra or reduced payment on this account.
The SO Rep may likewise vary the percentage of bitumen to be used, whereupon the price paid for
the work shall be adjusted by him in accordance with the change in bitumen content ordered,
based only on the nett purchase price paid by the Contractor for the bitumen being used. If this
price is greater than the ruling nett purchase price of bitumen at the time of variation, then the latter
price shall be adopted for the purpose of calculating the value of any such variation.
Thoroughly dry all aggregate of the requisite sizes and grading and feed at a temperature of 149°C
to 190ºC into a mechanical mixer of approved type. Install an accurate registering pyrometer at a
suitable point at the discharge end of the drier with a registering device so located as to indicate
clearly the temperature of the coarse and fine aggregate when discharged.
Heat the bitumen in an approved type boiler, to a temperature of 136ºC to 163ºC, and thereafter
add, together with the required proportion of filler, to the coarse and fine aggregate, and all
ingredients thoroughly and effectively mixed together until complete coating of all aggregate and
filler with the bitumen has been achieved. The SO Rep shall have access at all times to the
asphalt mixing plant and shall at liberty take such samples of materials as considered necessary
from time to time to verify the proper operation thereof.
It is particularly important to avoid excessive heating of the bitumen binder as this will lead to
hardening of the binder and result in a shortening of the useful life of the pavement. In all cases
keep temperatures as low as is consistent with proper mixing and laying.
Discharge the asphalt, after proper mixing, from the mixer direct into a tipping truck, for
transportation to the work Site. The temperatures of the mix on arrival at the work Site shall not be
less than 121ºC. Cover asphalt in transit when required, with suitable canvas cover to minimise
heat loss. When required, provide an adequate number of accurate thermometers for checking the
temperature.
Vehicles used for transporting the asphalt shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of all foreign materials
immediately prior to loading with asphalt. The use of dirty or otherwise unsatisfactory vehicles
shall render the load(s) of asphalt liable to rejection.
LUP09/S53.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-12/30
(g) Spreading and Finishing
Furnish the SO Rep in advance with full details of the mechanical spreader/finisher to be used
whenever required by the SO Rep. The mechanical self-propelled spreader/finisher shall be
capable of laying an asphalt carpet of not less than three metre width, unless otherwise permitted,
and of being operated at varying rates of travel consistent with the rate of delivery and the type of
asphalt mixture to be laid.
On arrival at the Site, tip the asphalt mix into the hopper of the mechanical self-propelled
spreader/finisher and thereupon spread, level, tamp and finish to correct profile, camber or cross-
fall, without causing segregation, dragging, burning or other surface defects or irregularities.
Follow the SO Rep instructions on the rate of travel of such machine at all times.
Operate the spreader at a uniform rate of travel and feed the mixer to the spreader at such a rate
as to permit continuous laying, in so far as the supply and site conditions allow.
The spreader/finisher shall not operate on any type of side forms, but shall employ mechanical
devices to adjust the grade and confine the edges of the asphalt to true lines. Immediately after
laying, and before rolling, check the surface with a straight edge of not less than 3.0 m and a spirit
level (both to be supplied by Contractor when required) to determine the proper crossfall or camber
required. Correct all irregularities and Defect in alignment, grade, texture, etc in an approved
manner.
The surface, after final rolling, when tested with a straight edge 3.0 m long placed parallel to the
centre line of the carriageway shall show no depression greater than 9mm. Carry out preliminary
rolling with steel wheel rollers of the type approved by the SO Rep as soon as the asphalt mix has
cooled sufficiently to support such roller without lateral flow of the mix. Carry out finishing rolling
with an 8 to 12 tonnes tandem roller or other suitable type of roller acceptable to the SO Rep, as
soon as practicable after the preliminary rolling, and proceed until no further compaction of the
asphalt can be obtained. All rolling shall proceed at a sufficiently slow speed so as to avoid
pushing or shoving of the asphalt carpet. The rollers shall not remain stationary on the warm
asphalt carpet for any appreciable length of time. Do not use oil on the wheels of any roller to
prevent adhesion of asphalt. Protect sections of newly compacted asphalt carpet from traffic for at
least six hours, or until properly hardened by cooling. The requirements of the SO Rep in this
matter shall be final.
Clean all manholes, kerbs, channels and other projections against which the asphalt mix is to be
laid, and apply a thin coating of bitumen emulsion applied prior to the laying of the asphalt.
Carefully tamp the mixture around and against all projections by means of mechanical tampers
and the finished surface left flush, or, if required, up to a maximum of 3mm above such projection.
Where existing manholes are lower than the new premixed surface, provide wooden frames to
demarcate its position during the process of the laying and premix, so that the manhole can be
raised subsequently by the respective service departments.
(h) Laying Hot Asphalt Premix
Lay all asphalt premix against a timber batten laid and pegged into the stone base along the
longitudinal joint if it is not laid against a kerb, gutter or against a paving. The battens shall be of a
thickness not less than the specified compacted thickness of the asphalt paving. Immediately cut
back all joints both longitudinal and transverse squarely prior to laying of further asphalt in contact
with such joints.
(i) Compaction of Asphalt Premix
General
At least two rollers shall be required at all times and as many additional rollers as necessary to
provide specified pavement density. When plant production exceeds 75 tonnes per hour, at least
one additional roller shall be required for each additional 50 tonnes or fraction thereof.
During rolling, keep the roller wheels moist with only sufficient water to avoid picking up the
material.
LUP09/S53.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-13/30
(i) Compaction of Asphalt Premix (Cont'd)
General (Cont'd)
After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, start rolling longitudinally at the sides
and gradually progress towards the centre of the pavement, except on super-elevated curves,
begin rolling on the low side and progress to the high side. There shall be over-lapping on
successive trips by at least one-half the width on tandem rollers and uniformly lapping each
preceding track or covering the entire surface with the rear wheels where three-wheel rollers are
used.
The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed (not exceeding five kilometres per hour) with
the drive roller wheel nearest the paver. The line of rolling shall not be suddenly changed or the
direction or rolling suddenly reversed, thereby displacing the mix. If rolling causes displacement of
the materials, the affected areas shall be loosened at once and restored to the original grade of the
loose material before being re-rolled. Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be allowed to stand on
the finished surface until it has thoroughly cooled.
Rolling of the mix shall consist of six separate operations in the following order :
(i) transverse joints;

(ii) longitudinal joints;
(iii) edges;
(iv) initial or breakdown rolling;
(v) second rolling;
(vi) finish rolling
The edges shall not be exposed for more than fifteen minutes without being rolled. Particular
attention shall be given to the construction of transverse and longitudinal joints in both base and
wearing courses.
Transverse Joints
Carefully construct transverse Joints in both base and wearing course and thoroughly compact to
provide a smooth riding surface over these joints in the pavement. If the joint is formed with a
bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight line and vertical face, the joint face need not be
trimmed before fresh material is placed against it to complete the joint. If a bulkhead is not used to
form the joint and the roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material, locate the line of
joint at the back of the rounded edge a sufficient distance to provide a true surface and cross-
section. Paint the joint with a thin coat of asphalt before fresh material is placed against it. To
obtain thorough compaction tightly crowd the joint against its vertical face. Continue rolling until a
thoroughly compacted neat joint is obtained.
Longitudinal Joints
Roll longitudinal joints directly behind the paving operation. The first lane placed shall be true to
line and grade and have a vertical face.
Tightly crowd the material being placed in the abutting lane against the vertical face of the
previously placed lane. Position the machine such that in spreading, the material overlaps the
edge of the lane previously placed by 25mm to 50mm and is sufficiently high to allow for
compaction. Before rolling, carefully move the material over-lapping the joint by brooming onto the
surface of the unrolled lane. When rolling is accomplished with a three-wheel roller, shift over into
the previously placed lane so that no more than 150mm of the rear roller wheel rides on the edge
of the fine material left by brooming. Continue rolling until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is
obtained. If only tandem rollers are used they shall be similarly operated to complete the joint.
When the abutting lane is not placed on the same day or the joint is distorted during the day's work
by traffic or by other means, carefully trim the edge of the lane to line and paint with a tack coat of
bitumen before the abutting lane is placed.
LUP09/S53.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-14/30
(j) Density, Thickness and Surface Requirements
The completed pavement shall have a density equal to or greater than 95% of a laboratory
specimen made in the proportions of the approved job-mix formula and the Marshall test when
required.
Carefully control both density and thickness during construction and ensure they comply with the
approved plans, Drawings and the Specifications.
The checking of compacted thickness shall be carried out by the SO Rep by cutting test holes after
he is fully satisfied that the asphalt layer has been fully compacted. As a guide each test hole shall
be cut at 60 metres interval along each carriageway. Each test hole shall be 150mm diameter and
the average thickness of four readings shall be taken as the depth of the asphalt at the test hole.
Provide all the necessary labour and Construction Equipment for carrying out both density and
thickness tests including the reinstatement of the test holes.
Carry out tests for the densities of the asphalt base course and wearing course if required, using
an Automatic Asphalt Density Recorder or any other method which the SO Rep may approve. The
decision on whether or not the asphalt laid has been compacted to the required density shall be
made by the SO Rep based on the above tests and his decision shall be final. If the tests carried
out by the SO Rep show that the asphalt surface has not been compacted to the required density
the Contractor shall immediately continue to roll the asphalt layer until the SO Rep is satisfied that
the required density has been obtained.
In addition to the use of a straight edge to check the asphalt surface finish if required, use a
`Rolling Straight edge' to check the surface irregularity.
The decision of the SO Rep on whether or not the asphalt surface has been finished to the
regularity required shall be final. Take immediate steps to rectify Defect as directed by the SO
Rep.
(k) Sampling & Testing
Samples of asphalt premix shall be taken as, when and where considered necessary, by the SO
Rep and testing shall, as far as practicable, be in accordance with SS 86 and BS 598.
2
The number of samples required to be tested shall be one sample for every 550m of
2
carpark/450m of roadway subject to a minimum of two samples.
Extract all test samples of 150mm diameter by coring method. The sampling and testing
processes shall be conducted by an accredited laboratory approved by SAC.
Where test results are unsatisfactory, the SO Rep may condemn all the asphalt represented by
such unsatisfactory sample(s).
The Contractor or the Contractor's Representative may be present during the carrying out of any
tests, provided he has given one day's clear notice, on each occasion, of such intention.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the immediate reinstatement of all cored holes on the road
surface where samples have been extracted for testing purposes. Clean the cored holes and dry
before backfilling with hot asphalt premix which shall be kept at the required temperature. Properly
compact all reinstated cored holes in layers to achieve perfect match between the old and new
surfaces.
LUP09/S53.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 53-15/30
(l) Extraction Test
(i) Grading Analysis
All aggregates shall be well graded to conform to the proportions specified in the various
sieves and the grading curve of the mix shall fall within the approved design envelope
bounded curves demarcating the maximum and minimum limits.
Any grading falling outside these limits shall be considered as having failed the test and the
premix so represented by the sample shall be rejected. The Contractor shall be required to
accept the corrective measures including the payment of fees or charges as required by the
SO Rep or LTA.
(ii) Bitumen Content
The percentage (%) of soluble bitumen in the mix of any sample shall not be less than the
minimum percentage specified. Where any of the test samples fail to comply with the
requirement as specified, all the asphalt surfacing represented by such unsatisfactory
samples shall be rejected, and the Contractor shall be charged according to the
Maintenance Fees imposed by the SO Rep or LTA.
Where the bitumen content of any sample exceeds the maximum percentage specified, the
entire premix represented by the samples tests shall be rejected and similar Maintenance
Fees as specified shall also be imposed.
The average percentage of soluble bitumen of all the samples tested shall also be not less
than the average percentage specified. Similar Maintenance Fees as specified shall be
imposed for failure to comply.
(m) Marshall Test
Result of all Marshall tests of the premix samples if required, shall comply strictly with the under-
mentioned critical limits :
(i) Marshall stability (KN) - not less than 7.1 KN

(ii) Flow value - not more than 4.05mm
(iii) Voids in mix (%) : 3 to 5
(iv) Percentage of aggregate voids filled with bitumen binder - 75 to 82
As a guide, for the purpose of carrying out Marshall Tests, a set of minimum number of three
samples shall be taken for each 150 linear metre of each carriageway or part thereof of premix
laid. The samples shall be taken from positions as directed. Samples for Marshall Tests if
required, shall be taken in conjunction with Grading Analysis and Bitumen Test or taken separately
as directed.
(n) Table of Mixes
Mix the premix bitumen in the proportions as shown on the attached Table of Mixes.
(o) Reinstatement of Test Holes
Immediately reinstate all holes on the road surface where samples have been extracted for testing
purposes.
LUP09/S53.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-16/30
TABLE OF MIXES
Mix Classification W1 & W2 W3 & W4 W5 & W6 B1 & B2
25mm - 40mm Wearing 50mm Wearing Course Base or Binder Course

Type of Mix 20mm Wearing Course
Course (Type "C") (Type "A") (Type "B")
Thickness of course (vary) 15mm to 20mm 25mm to 45mm 45mm to 64mm 50mm to 100mm
Max size of stone aggregate used 10mm 20mm 25mm 38mm
Sieve size Total Percentage Passing Including Filler
Passing 50 mm - - - -
38 mm - - - 100
25 mm - - 100 95 to 100
19 mm - 100 95 to 100 84 to 92
13 mm - 95 to 100 76 to 90 65 to 82
9.5 mm 100 - - -
6.4 mm 90 to 100 70 to 83 54 to 70 48 to 62
3.2 mm 65 to 82 50 to 65 39 to 55 35 to 50
1.2 mm (BS 14) 39 to 55 29 to 44 27 to 41 22 to 35
0.3 mm (BS 52) 22 to 32 15 to 24 15 to 22 12 to 19
0.075 mm (BS 200) 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8
Mix Min Max Mix Min Max Mix Min Max Mix Min Max
% Soluble Bitumen (by weight of total mix)
60/70 penetration ) W1 5.5 6.5 W3 5.5 6.5 W5 5.5 6.5 B1 4.5 6.0
80/100 penetration ) W1 5.5 6.5 W4 5.5 6.5 W6 5.5 6.5 B2 4.5 6.0
Overall requirements :
% graded coarse aggregates retained on 3.2mm
BS Sieve (by wt of total aggregate & filler) 31 42 52 57
% graded fine aggregates passing 3.2mm BS

Sieve but retained on 0.075 (BS 200) Sieve 63 52 43 39
(by wt of total aggregate & filler)
% mineral filler passing BS 200 Sieve

6 6 5 4
(by wt of total aggregate & filler)
% Soluble Bitumen by weight of total mix 6 6 6 5
LUP09/S53.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-17/30
TABLE OF MIXES
Mix Classification AI-IIIb AI-IVa AI-IVb AI-IVc AI-IId AI-IIe AI-IIId AI-IIIe AI-A AI-B
Wearing Wearing Wearing Wearing Base Base Base Base Skip Skip
Type of Mix
Course Course Course Course Course Course Course Course Gradation Gradation
25mm 20mm 25mm 45mm 45mm 50mm 45mm 50mm 25mm 50mm
Thickness of
to to to to to to to to to to
Course (vary)
45mm 45mm 45mm 64mm 64mm 100mm 75m 100mm 45mm 100mm
Max size of stone

20mm 13mm 20mm 25mm 25mm 38mm 25mm 38mm 20mm 38mm
aggregate used
Sieve Size Passing Total Percentage passing including filler

- -
50 mm - - - - - - - - - 100
38 mm - - - - - 100 - 100 - 95 to 100
25 mm - - - 100 100 70 to 100 100 75 to 100 100 -
19 mm 100 - 100 83 to 100 70 to 100 50 to 80 75 to 100 60 to 85 95 to 100 60 to 80
13 mm 75 to 100 100 80 to 100 - - - 61 to 82 50 to 71 - -
9.5 mm 60 to 85 80 to 100 70 to 90 62 to 78 35 to 60 25 to 50 53 to 68 40 to 60 50 to 70 30 to 50
4.75 mm 35 to 55 55 to 75 50 to 70 50 to 65 15 to 35 10 to 30 32 to 48 30 to 47 30 to 50 20 to 40
2.36 mm 20 to 35 35 to 50 35 to 50 35 to 50 5 to 20 5 to 20 20 to 35 20 to 35 - -
600 µm 10 to 22 18 to 29 18 to 29 19 to 30 - - 5 to 20 5 to 20 5 to 25 5 to 25
300 µm 6 to 16 13 to 23 13 to 23 13 to 23 - - 3 to 12 3 to 12 - -
150 µm 4 to 12 8 to 16 8 to 16 7 to 15 - - 2 to 8 2 to 8 2 to 10 1 to 10
75 µm 2 to 8 4 to 10 4 to 10 0 to 8 0 to 4 0 to 4 0 to 4 0 to 4
% Soluble Bitumen Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
(60/70 Penetration Grade)*
(% by weight of total mix) 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 3.5 5.0 3.5 5.0 3.5 5.0 3.5 5.0 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5
*When required 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen shall be used instead of 60/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen at the Contractor's
own cost and expense. No Claims for extra payment shall be allowed for using 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen.
LUP09/S53.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-18/30
TABLE OF MIXES
Road Mixes
Mix Classification WSS W1 W3 B1 W5 W3B W5B
Type of Mix Wearing Course Binder Course Wearing Course
Thickness of Course 50 - 75 mm 15 - 25 mm 30 - 50 mm 50 - 100 mm 45 - 65 mm 45 - 65 mm 50 - 80 mm
Max. Size of Stone 19 mm 10 mm 19 mm 35 mm 25 mm 19 mm 25 mm
(BS) Passing 50 mm - - - - - - -
37.5 mm - - - 100 - - -
25 mm - - - 95 - 100 100 - 100
19 mm 100 - 100 84 - 92 95 - 100 100 89 - 97
13.2 mm 80 - 90 - 90 - 100 65 - 82 76 - 90 85 - 95 73 - 83
9.5 mm 63 - 77 100 - - - - -
6.3 mm - 90 - 100 70 - 83 48 - 62 54 - 70 58 - 68 50 - 60
3.35 mm - 65 - 82 50 - 65 35 - 50 39 - 55 40 - 50 40 - 50
2.36 mm 46 - 56 - - - - - -
1.18 mm - 39 - 55 29 - 44 27 - 41 27 - 41 21 - 31 25 - 35
600 µm 16 - 26 - - - - - -
300 µm - 22 - 32 15 - 24 15 - 22 15 - 22 11 - 17 13 - 16
212 µm 8 - 18 - - - - - -
75 µm 6.5 - 10.5 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 4-8 4-8
% Soluble Bitumen (60/70 Pen Grade)

5 ±0.5 6 ±0.5 6 ±0.5 5 ±0.5 5.5 ±0.5 5 ±0.5 4.8 ±0.5
(% by Wt of Total Mix)
Void in Mix 3.0 - 5.0 4.5 - 6.5
* When required 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen shall be used instead of 60/70 Penetration Grade Bitumen at the Contractor's
own cost and expense. No Claims for extra payment shall be allowed for using 80/100 Penetration Grade Bitumen.
LUP09/S53.DOC(18)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-19/30
53.17 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS
(a) General
The concrete blocks shall comply with the requirements of BS 6717:Part 1, unless otherwise
specified.
The interlocking concrete paving blocks shall be precast, vibrocompacted blocks. The maximum
dimensional deviations from the standard work sizes for the paving blocks, measured in
accordance with BS 6717 : Part I or SS 76M, shall be as follows :
Length ±2mm
Width ±2mm
Thickness ±3mm
Any pigment used shall comply with BS 1014.
(b) Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength

2
A total of 16 concrete blocks shall be tested for each 550 m of interlocking concrete pavement.
The average compressive strength of the paving blocks, tested in accordance with BS 6717 or SS
76M, shall not be less than 49N per mm2, and the crushing strength of any individual block shall be
2
not less than 40N per mm .
(c) Failure of Test on Compressive Strength
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance & Irregularities" to impose
charges against the Contractor for :
(i) each batch of 16 concrete blocks for which the average compressive strength is less than
49N/mm2; and
(ii) each individual block of which the compressive strength is less than 40N/mm2.
In addition, the consignment represented by the test sample shall be accepted only at the sole
discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered the degree of failure and other related
circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from site immediately.
(d) Sampling and Checking of Surface Layer Thickness

In Composite Concrete Paving Blocks
Coloured concrete paving blocks formed by the addition of pigments may be either homogeneous
or non-homogeneous in colour. Non-homogeneous coloured concrete paving blocks are
considered as composite concrete paving blocks. In composite concrete paving blocks, the
coloured surface layer shall be formed as an integral part of the block and shall not be less than
5mm thick.
A total of 5 composite concrete blocks shall be checked for surface layer thickness compliance for
each 550 m2 of interlocking composite concrete pavement. The checking shall be carried out at a
SAC's accredited laboratory.
Each concrete block to be checked shall be cut neatly at the mid-span of the length of the
composite concrete block, cutting of the blocks shall only be carried out at the accredited
laboratory. The average surface layer thickness of each composite block shall be derived from the
measured thickness at the left edge, middle and right edge of the surface layer thickness on the
cross-sectional face of the cut-off block. The thickness shall be measured by a caliper. The
measured thickness shall be to the nearest 0.1mm accuracy.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cut samples are collected back from the accredited laboratory
and returned to HDB for verification. These cut samples shall be kept at the site office and only
disposed off at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S53.DOC(19)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-20/30
53.17 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS (CONT'D)
(e) Failure to Comply with the Minimum Surface Layer Thickness

Requirement in Composite Concrete Paving Blocks
The SO Rep shall exercise his right under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance and Irregularities" of the
Standard Specifications to impose charges against the Contractor for each composite concrete
block for which the average surface layer thickness is less than 5mm.
In addition, the consignment represented by the samples checked for surface layer thickness
compliances shall be accepted only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep, after he has considered
the degree of failure and other related circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep
shall be removed from site immediately.
(f) Marking
Before laying, divide the paving blocks into consignments designated for each area of not more
2
than 550 m . A sample of 16 blocks shall be taken from each such assignment. In the case of
composite concrete paving blocks, an additional 5 blocks shall be taken from each such
assignment. Clearly mark the sample at the time of sampling in such a way that the consignments
represented by the sample are clearly defined.
(g) Inspection
Before commencing the placing of the sand bedding course and the laying of units, the sub-base
shall be inspected and approved by the SO Rep.
(h) Edge Restraints
Provide adequate edge restraint along the perimeter of all paving in the form of integral kerb and
gutter, concrete kerb or edge strip or established structure. The face of the edge restraint, where it
abuts paving units, shall be vertical down to the sub-base.
(i) Bedding Sand
(i) Material
Bedding sand shall be a well-graded sand passing a 4.75mm sieve and suited to concrete
manufacture. The grading limits are :
A.S. Sieve % Passing
9.52mm 100
4.75mm 95 to 100
2.36mm 80 to 100
1.18mm 50 to 85
600µm 25 to 60
300µm 10 to 30
150µm 5 to 15
75µm 0 to 10
The bedding sand shall be free of deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to
cause efflorescence or lead to reduced skid resistance.
(ii) Moisture Content
The sand shall be of uniform moisture content when spread and shall be protected against
rain when stockpiled on Site prior to spreading.
LUP09/S53.DOC(20)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-21/30
(i) Bedding Sand (Cont'd)
(iii) Spreading Bedding Sand
Spread the sand bedding loose and in a uniform layer. Determine the precise depth in the
field prior to spreading.
Screed the sand bedding in a loose condition to the nominated design profile and levels
plus the necessary surcharge to achieved a uniformly thick layer, following compaction to
the thickness specified in the Drawings.
(iv) Screeding of Bedding Sand
Carefully maintain the spread sand in a loose condition and protect against precompaction
both prior to and following screeding. Loosen any precompacted sand or screeded sand
left overnight before further paving units are placed. Lightly screed sand in a loose
condition to the predetermined depth only, slightly ahead of the laying of the paving units.
Under no circumstances shall the sand be screeded in advance of the laying face to an
extent to which paving will not be completed on that day.
Protect screeded sand against accidental precompaction including compaction by rain or

dew. Remove any screeded sand which is precompacted prior to laying of units and bring
back to profile in loose condition.
(j) Laying of Paving Units
(i) General
Place paving units on the uncompacted screeded sand bedding to the nominated laying
pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. Place paving
units to achieve a positive gap of 3mm +1mm between units. Under no circumstances shall
units be allowed to touch nor should the gap between units exceed 5 mm. Correctly place
all joints to suit the laying pattern and bond.
The first row shall abut an edge restraint with a gap of 2 to 4 mm and shall be laid at a
suitable angle to the edge restraint to achieve the required visual orientation of paving units
in the completed pavement.
In each row all full units shall be laid first. Cut closure units and fit subsequently. Such
closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit. Units may be cut using a
mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster, or by power sawing.
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond
hammer the paving units into position. Where adjustment of position is necessary take care
to avoid premature compaction of the sand bedding.
Any foot or barrow traffic shall use boards overlaying paving to prevent disturbance of units
prior to mechanical compaction. No other construction traffic shall be allowed on the
pavement at this stage of construction.
(ii) Compaction
After laying the paving units they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand
bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two and preferably three
passes of a suitable plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low-amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator

having a plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of 12 paving units.
LUP09/S53.DOC(21)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-22/30
(j) Laying of Paving Units (Cont'd)
(ii) Compaction (Cont'd)
Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to the
acceptance of any traffic.
Compaction shall not be attempted, however, within one metre of the laying face.
Compaction shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. Joints
shall then be filled and compacted as hereinafter described.
All work to within one metre of the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the completion
of each day's laying.
(iii) Damaged Units
Immediately remove and replace any units which are structurally damaged during
compaction.
(iv) Filling Joints
As soon as practical after compaction, and in any case prior to the termination of work on
that day and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, spread sand for joint-filling over
the pavement. The joint-filling sand shall conform to the following grading limits :
A.S. Sieve % Passing

2.36 mm 100
1.18 mm 90 to 100
600 µm 60 to 90
300 µm 30 to 60
150 µm 15 to 30
75 µm 10 to 20
and shall be as dry as possible prior to spreading and brooming into the joints. At least one
pass of the vibrating-plate compactor is necessary to achieve compaction of the jointing-
filling sand. After the first pass joints shall be checked for adequacy of filling and any
shortfall shall be made good prior to a further pass of the compactor.
(v) Pavement Preloading
Where directed by the SO Rep the pavement shall receive not less than 5 and up to 10
passes of a pneumatic-tyred roller having a gross weight not less than 10 tonnes.
(vi) Excess Sand
Excess surface sand shall be removed by brooming prior to handing over the pavement.
(vii) Tolerance to Design Profile
All surfaces and pavement structures shall be true to line and levels, grades, thicknesses
and cross sections shown on the Drawings. Finish all pavements to lines and levels to
ensure positive drainage at all drainage outlets and channels.
LUP09/S53.DOC(22)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-23/30
53.18 CLAY PAVERS (TYPE PB) FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
(a) General
The clay pavers (Type PB) shall comply with requirements of BS 6677 Part 1, unless otherwise
specified.
The maximum and minimum value for the overall measurement of 24 clay pavers (for commonly
available work sizes) shall be as follows :
Work Size
Maximum Minimum
(in mm)
Length 215 5216 5104
210 5095 4985
200 4852 4748
Width 105 2555 2485
102.5 2494 2426
100 2433 2367
Thickness 65 1594 1526
50 1226 1174
Other work sizes may be used if permitted by the SO Rep.
(b) Sampling And Testing For Transverse Breaking Load
A total of 10 clay pavers shall be tested for each 200 m2 of clay pavers used for flexible pavement.
The mean transverse breaking load of 10 clay pavers shall be not less than 7 kN and the
transverse breaking load of each clay paver shall be not less than 4 kN.
(c) Failure Of Test On Transverse Breaking Load
charges against the Contractor for :
(i) Each batch of 10 clay pavers for which the mean transverse breaking load is
less than 7 kN, or
(ii) each individual paver of which the transverse breaking load is less than 4 kN.
In addition, the consignment represented by the test sample may be accepted only at the sole
circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the Site
immediately.
(d) Sampling, Testing And Failure Criteria For Wet Skid Resistance
A total of 5 clay pavers shall be tested for each 200m2 of clay pavers used for flexible pavement.
The Mean Wet Skid Resistance of the 5 clay pavers shall not be less than 60. The SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor for each batch of 5 clay pavers whose mean wet skid resistance fails to attain the
above criteria.
In addition, the consignment represented by the samples may be accepted only at the sole
circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the Site
immediately.
(e) Marking
Before laying, divide the pavers into consignment designated for each area of not more than 200
m2 for Transverse Breaking Load Test and Wet Skid Resistance Test. A sample of 15 pavers shall
be taken from each such consignment. Clearly mark the sample at the time of sampling in such a
way that the consignments represented by the sample are clearly defined.
LUP09/S53.DOC(23)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-24/30
53.18 CLAY PAVERS (TYPE PB) FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT (CONT'D)
(f) Laying of Interlocking Clay Paving Blocks
The method for the laying of clay pavers shall comply with the requirements as specified in
subclause 53.17(g) to subclause 53.17(j) inclusive for interlocking concrete paving blocks.
(g) Colours and laying patterns
The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings to the SO Rep showing the range of colours and
laying patterns of the clay pavers for selection and approval. The SO Rep reserves the right to
change the colours and laying patterns and his decision shall be final.
53.19 CONCRETE FOOTPATH
The paving slabs shall be properly bedded on a layer 25mm thick of unwashed sand and 100mm thick
hardcore well compacted and special care shall be taken to ensure that the earth formation of the footpath
is fully compacted and free from any vegetable matter or roots before footpath construction is
commenced.
Footpaths shall be laid true to the lines and levels of the roadside kerbs or divider and shall be given a
slight fall as shown on the Drawings transversely towards the carriageway.
For cast-in-situ concrete footpath panels of approximately 3m length shall be cast. The surface of each
panel shall be floated smooth with a wooden float or similar appliance. Provide Construction/Contraction
joints at the intervals between panels.
53.20 BUS BAYS AND SHELTERS
Construct all bus bays shown on the Drawings to proper lines and levels, in reinforced concrete. Complete
construction of bus bays before the carriageway base course metalling is commenced and protect the
edges of the concrete slabs during carriageway construction. Make good any damage to such concrete to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Roll the bed for the bus bay with a 10 tonne roller to the satisfaction of the SO Rep before receiving
crushed granite 100mm thick and blinded.
Install all bus shelters adjacent to the bus bays as shown on the Drawings.
53.21 TRAFFIC AND ROAD DIRECTIONAL SIGNS
The design, fabrication and installation of traffic signs and road directional signs shall comply with the
following general requirements and the LTA's general guidelines laid down in the SIGNS MANUAL -
INFORMATION SIGNS, prepared by the Transportation Branch, Road Division, LTA, and/or revised
LTA's guidelines on materials, support, letter types, colour codes, sign legibility, dimension etc. as and
when applicable.
Fabricate the signs with aluminium sheeting of thickness No. 14 SWG. The reflective sheeting shall be
high intensity grade consisting of optical lens elements adhered to a synthetic resin encapsulated by a
flexible transparent plastic that has a smooth, flat outer surface and an adhesive backing of pressure
sensitive or heat sensitive type to LTA standard for Road Directional Signs; and engineering grade
consisting of optical lens elements enclosed within a transparent resin that has a smooth, flat outer
surface to LTA standard for Street Name Plate, Traffic Information Warning and Regulatory signs. The
reflective sheeting shall be durable and remain sharp during its expected service life of not less than five
years under local weather conditions. Submit a test report on the reflective sheeting from an SAC
accredited laboratory and/or from the manufacturer and/or any other independent laboratory approved by
the SO Rep together with the Tender and/or as and when required by the SO Rep. The test shall
conform with ASTM D4956-90 for engineering and high density grade and the report shall carry technical
information on the reflectivity factors' durability of reflective surface and adhesive, corrosion and abrasion
resistance, colour tests etc. and any other technical information outlined in the LTA general guidelines
and/or required by the SO Rep. The high intensity and engineering grade reflective sheeting shall be
guaranteed by the supplier and/or the Contractor against any Defect such as discolouring, peeling,
cracking, shrinking or any other apparent or latent Defect for a period of seven years for high intensity
grade and three years for engineering grade commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion.
LUP09/S53.DOC(24)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-25/30
53.21 TRAFFIC AND ROAD DIRECTIONAL SIGNS (CONT'D)
Generally, joints shall not be permitted for aluminium sheeting and reflective sheeting. Where the size of
the sign requires joints, they shall be positioned horizontally at the dividing line between the legends or as
directed by the SO Rep. Joints of reflective sheeting shall coincide with those of aluminium sheeting and
joints shall be riveted.
Use only round block script letters and numerals in all the traffic and road directional signs. The letter size
and word spacing shall conform to the LTA's standard and/or Specifications stipulated in drawings and/or
specified by the SO Rep.
Support the signs either by 75 diameter GI pipe or 100mm x 100mm x 5mm SHS supports and embedded
in Grade 25 concrete foundations, all in accordance with the LTA's standard and/or Specifications
stipulated in the Drawings and/or specified by the SO Rep. Give the supports one coat of red lead primer
undercoat and two finishing coats of enamel paint.
53.22 VEHICULAR IMPACT GUARDRAILS
Erect the guardrail to the alignment specified in the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Connect the
adjacent rails by lap joints and the erection of the guardrail shall proceed in the direction of traffic flow to
avoid vehicles striking rail ends.
The nominal thickness of base metal for guardrails shall be 3.0mm formed into corrugated cross-section
of width 300mm minimum and trough depth 75mm conforming to the requirement of AASHTO:M180-74.
When simply supported over a span of 3.54 metres with its traffic face uppermost, the mid-point deflection
of the rail shall not exceed 75mm under a concentrated load of 1000 kg at mid-span.
The mechanical properties of the base metals for the rails shall conform to the following :
2
Minimum yield point - 345N/mm
2
Minimum tensile strength - 483N/mm
Elongation - 50mm, maximum 12%
All fabricated rails shall be hot-dip galvanised at shop in accordance with BS 729 and shaped in the
workshop in standard length and assemble on Site by galvanised oval shoulder button headed bolts and
nuts of 16mm nominal diameter.
All guardrail posts and spacers, unless otherwise specified shall be Mild Steel Channels or Steel Hollow
Sections.
53.23 ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS
(i) Materials and Workmanship
All materials used in the manufacture of the signboards shall be new and of the required quality,
correct dimensions, sizes and gauges as approved by the SO Rep and free from any defect or
damage on completion of the fabrication, assembly and delivery of the signboards. If any of the
materials used is found to be defective or below the acceptable standard, the SO Rep may instruct
the Contractor to cease all work and replace those materials with the proper and suitable materials
in accordance with the specifications or conform to British Standards or equivalent PSB Standards.
The Contractor shall submit details of components used for the proper fabrication and fixing of the
various components and parts of the signboards to SO Rep for his approval before the Work is
carried out.
LUP09/S53.DOC(25)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-26/30
53.23 ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS (CONT'D)
(ii) Electrical Installation
The Contractor shall employ a licensed electrical worker of appropriate grade to carry out the
Works. The licensed electrical worker shall mean a qualified competent person to perform
electrical works under the Electrical Workers and Contractors Licensing Act 1974.
The electrical installation shall comply with all regulations issued by the PowerGrid. All parts of the
installation shall where applicable, be to the complete satisfaction of the SO Rep, PowerGrid, all
Government Authorities and Fire Officers and shall be in strict accordance with all bye-laws, rules
and regulations of such authorities.
(iii) Bolts and Nuts
All galvanised bolts and nuts for fixing signboards shall be provided with galvanised washers.
(iv) Painting to Metal Surfaces
Apply one coat approved lead and chromate free primer to surfaces of mild steel angles, hollow
sections, brackets, welding nuts and bolts, etc. All primed metal surfaces shall be finished with two
coats of approved paint.
(v) Fluorescent Luminaires
The signboard luminaires shall be fluorescent luminaires with :
(a) 1200mm - 36W tubes and 600mm - 18W tubes
All luminaires shall be pre-wired and completed with tubes, power factor corrected
electronic ballasts and lampholders.
The Contractor shall provide and wire the luminaires to a termination block within the
signage box for termination purpose.
Where applicable, the fluorescent luminaires shall comply with the following standards.
(1) IEC 81 : 1984 Tubular fluorescent lamp for general lighting service
(2) IEC 400 : 1991 Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starterholders
(3) IEC 928 : 1995 Auxiliaries for lamps - A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for
tubular fluorescent lamps. General and safety requirements
(4) IEC 929 : 1994 A.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
Performance requirements.
(b) Ballasts supplied shall be suitable for local use and separate ballasts shall be provided for
each lamp. The ballasts shall have a protection feature to cut off the supply if it sense a
faulty fluorescent tube and restart automatically when the faulty tube is replaced.
(c) Fluorescent tubes installed shall be `Philips' (Daylight), or other equivalent type approved
by the SO Rep, of 26mm nominal diameter type with lamp wattage of 36W and 18W.
All tubes shall have to pass batch tests conducted by SAC.
LUP09/S53.DOC(26)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-27/30
53.23 ILLUMINATED SIGNBOARDS (CONT'D)
(vi) Wiring and Electrical Accessories
The wirings from the termination block in the illuminated signboards shall be 2 x 1.5mm2 PVC/PVC
2
completed with 2.5mm PVC earth run in 20mm diameter Class 4 G.I. conduits including
accessories and terminated at the weather proof termination box. The termination box shall be of
steel construction not less than 2mm thickness and protected against corrosion by hop dip
galvanising internally and externally.
The termination box shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories :
(a) a 25mm Amp 440V cut-off with provision of looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and
earth conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of
2
up to 25mm and a 5 Amp HRC fuse as shown in the Drawings.
(b) internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 2.5mm2 PVC
(green) earth connecting the cut-off to the luminaires.
(c) brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass
locknuts, earth tags, earthing tap and shroud.
(vii) Bonding
All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively bonded to the circuit protective conductor.
(viii) Electrical Testing & Completion Certificate
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor's licensed electrical workers of technician grade
shall test the installation to ensure that it complies with the PowerGrid requirement and CP5 1988.
The Contractor shall furnish all data in the completion certificate and attach the single-line diagram
to the SO Rep.
LUP09/S53.DOC(27)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-28/30
ELECTRICAL TESTING & COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
To : The Superintending Officer's Representative

Housing & Development Board
Illuminated Signboards For
in the Name of :
I , a licensed electrical worker and authorised small installation tester hereby

certify that the abovementioned has been inspected and tested by me in accordance with the Singapore Standard
CP5 1988 : Code of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings, and that to the best of my knowledge and
belief the abovementioned complies with the Singapore Standard CP5 1988 and other relevant Regulations. The
aforesaid has been tested on .
Description Brand/Model/Supplier Quantity
Lamp (18W)
Lamp (36W)
Ballasts
Polarity Check Satisfactory : Yes/No

Approved Method of Installation : Yes/No
All Lamp Circuit Functional : Yes/No
______________________________ _________________________
Signature of Electrical Worker Date
Name of PowerGrid
Electrical Worker : ___________________________ License No. : ____________________________
Rubber Stamp
of Licensed PowerGrid
Electrical Contractor : ___________________________ License No. : 3/_________________________
LUP09/S53.DOC(28)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-29/30
53.24 WORKS ON ROADS
(a) Works On Roads With Speed Limit Below 70 Km Per Hour
For any Works on roads with speed limit below 70 kph, the Contractor shall provide adequate
signboards, blinker lights, cones, etc, in accordance with LTA Code of Practice For Temporary
Traffic Control. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and allowed for all costs and
expenses for the temporary precautions and measures in the Contract Sum.
(b) Works On Roads With Speed Limit 70 Km Per Hour And Above
For any Works on roads with speed limit 70 kph and above, the Contractor shall provide
adequate signboards, blinker lights, cones, etc, in accordance with LTA Code of Practice For
Temporary Traffic Control. The Contractor shall note that he is required to provide a collision
attenuator or truck mounted attenuator (TMA) attached/fitted/mounted onto an appropriate
shadow vehicle with the necessary equipment for traffic control and road safety in accordance
with LTA Code of Practice For Temporary Traffic Control. The TMA provided shall comply with
LTA specification and requirements. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and
allowed for all costs and expenses for the temporary precautions and measures in the Contract
Sum.
(c) For road openings on public streets, the Contractor shall comply with LTA Code of Practice For
Road - Opening Works. The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered and allowed for all
costs and expenses for the temporary precautions, reinstatement works and measures in the
Contract Sum.
53.25 PRECAST CONCRETE PERFORATED INTERLOCKING PAVING SLABS
Where precast concrete perforated interlocking paving slabs are included in the Works, the Contractor
shall comply with the requirements for sand bedding preparation and laying as specified in clause
53.17 'Interlocking Concrete Paving Blocks" including all subclauses under it. The colour of the
interlocking paving slabs shall be decided by the SO Rep. For sampling and testing of the interlocking
paving slabs, the Contractor shall comply with the following:
(a) Sampling and Testing
(i) Transverse Strength Test
The transverse strength for each paving slab shall not be less than 19kN. Samples of
paving slabs at a rate of 3 paving slabs for every 1,000 paving slabs delivered to the Site,
shall be selected for transverse strength test to be performed in the manner as described in
BS 7263 and in an SAC accredited laboratory. If the overall quantity of paving slabs in the
Works is less than 1,000 pieces, a minimum of 3 numbers of paving slabs shall be chosen
for the transverse strength test.
(ii) Water Absorption Test
The maximum average rate of water absorption test (%) calculated on the dry weight of 3
test pieces per paving slab shall not exceed 3% at 30 minutes. 5 numbers of paving slabs
for every 1,000 paving slabs delivered to the Site, shall be selected for water absorption test
to be performed in the manner as described in BS 7263 and in a SAC accredited laboratory.
If the overall quantity of paving slabs in the Works is less than 1,000 pieces, a minimum of 5
numbers of paving slabs shall be chosen for the water absorption test.
(i) Surface Layer Thickness in Composite Paving Slabs
Coloured concrete paving slabs formed by the addition of pigments may either be
homogenous or non-homogenous. Non-homogenous coloured paving slabs are considered
as composite paving slabs. The coloured surface layer of each composite paving slab shall
be formed as an integral part of the paving slab and shall not be less than 12mm thick.
For every 550m2 of interlocking composite paving slabs laid on the Site, 5 numbers of
paving slabs shall be checked for surface layer thickness. If the overall quantity of paving
2
slabs in the Works is less than 550 m , a minimum of 5 numbers of paving slabs shall be
chosen for checking on surface layer thickness. The checking shall be conducted in a SAC
accredited laboratory.
LUP09/S53.DOC(29)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Ugdg Spec
TS 53-30/30
53.25 PRECAST CONCRETE PERFORATED INTERLOCKING PAVING SLABS (Cont’d)
(b) Sampling and Testing (Cont’d)
Each paving slab shall be cut neatly at mid-span of its length. Cutting the paving slab shall only
be carried out in the accredited laboratory. The average surface layer thickness of each
composite paving slab shall be derived from the measured thickness at the left, middle and right
edges of the surface layer thickness on the cross-sectional face of the cut-off paving slab. The
thickness shall be measured to the nearest 0.1mm accuracy.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cut samples are collected back from the SAC accredited
laboratory and returned to HDB for verification. These cut samples shall be kept at the site office
and disposed off only at the sole discretion of the SO Rep.
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.10 ‘Nuisance and Irregularities’ of Standard
Specifications to impose charges against the Contractor for each sample that fails to comply with
the above test requirements.
Each consignment of slabs represented by the sample testing may be accepted only at the sole
discretion of the SO Rep after he has considered the degree of failure and other related
circumstances. Any consignment rejected by the SO Rep shall be removed from the site
immediately.
SECTION 54/...
LUP09/S53.DOC(30)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-1/9
SECTION 54
54.0 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR SEWERS
54.1 ADDITIONAL WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT,

PUB'S REQUIREMENTS FOR SEWERS AND MANHOLES
Use approved flexible joints thickwall concrete pipes and vitrified clay pipes with flexible joints in
accordance with the current Standard Specification and tests of the Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB.
Comply with the clauses laid down in the current "Standard Specification for Sewerage Works" published
by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. The Standard Specification may be obtained from the
Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
54.2 EXCAVATION AND REFILLING
Carry out the excavation in accordance these Specifications.
Carefully excavate and install timbering in accordance with the Drawings in such a manner that the toes of
the runners are always at least 150mm below the bottom of the excavation.
Where necessary in order to keep the road open to vehicular and foot traffic, cart away excavated material
from the trench as may be necessary so to keep the road open.
Should any of the sewer trenches be excavated to a greater depth than is necessary for the proper
execution of the Works, fill in the same at his own expense with Grade 15 concrete or other approved hard
material.
54.3 TIMBERING OF EXCAVATION
Brace all excavation adequately and securely with suitable timber using the methods indicated on the
Drawings where necessary or otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval given, the SO Rep shall, where necessary, instruct the Contractor to
improve, alter or strengthen the timbering from time to time. Is responsible for any injury to the work and
any consequential damages caused and any permission given by the SO Rep shall not relieve the
Contractor from this responsibility.
In the particular case of timber to be left in trenches the class of timbering shall be approved by the SO
Rep and this timber shall be cut off only after backfilling is completed, as indicated on the Drawings.
Take every precaution against slips and falls or other disturbances to both the temporary and permanent
work in the excavations. If however any slips, falls etc should occur, at once make good the same
including all surface restoration all at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. If any slip or fall
disturbs or weakens any foundation or support of the works or to existing structures mains etc or cause a
space to be left outside the new work itself or causes excessive surface cracks to appear in the ground
surrounding the excavation, execute such additional works or take such additional precautions as the
SO Rep may require in consequence thereof and fill up the space so caused with concrete if necessary,
as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost. Fully responsible for the reinstatement or
repair cost to the disturbances or damages caused.
LUP09/S54.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-2/9
54.4 PILING OF FOUNDATIONS
Where bakau piles are indicated on Drawings, they shall be of approved lengths and driven straight and in
approved positions and to the full length of the piles or to the required set as determined by the SO Rep
and any pile not correctly driven shall be duplicated. Where other types of piles are indicated on the
Drawings, they shall be installed in the approved manner.
Where horizontal bakau rollers are specified they shall be laid horizontally in the bottom of the excavations
to correct gradients in approved positions.
54.5 SEWER FOUNDATION
Lay pipes and concrete in every instance on an even and solid foundation. The pipes shall be laid evenly
on the barrel at the required level. Allow no hollows, voids or foreign material under the pipe. Complete
the bedding to the correct profile as shown in the Drawings.
Provide all sections of the sewer with either hard filling, concrete base with/without piling as specified.
However, should the SO Rep decide to change the type of foundation after the close of the Tender, such
change shall constitute a variation to the contract and shall be valued in accordance with the contract
provisions.
54.6 SEALING COAT
Where indicated on Drawings and immediately after a sufficient length of trench has been bakau piled
and/or passed by the SO Rep, lay a seal coat of Grade 15 concrete, 75mm thick across the complete
width of the trench, including filling with concrete the temporary drainage channel. Finish the seal coat
neatly such that the bakau pile heads, if any, are left projecting 25mm.
54.7 CONCRETE BED FOUNDATION
The concrete bed formation for the sewer pipes shall consist of a concrete foundation using Grade 30
concrete as shown on the Drawings according to the different Type Sections.
54.8 GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE
Granolithic concrete shall consist of one part of Portland Cement, two parts of fine aggregate and three
parts of 10mm granite chippings free from dust. In all other respects it shall comply with the remainder of
the Specifications for concrete.
54.9 PIPE LAYING
Lay pipes for sewers true to line and grade as shown on Drawings and all in accordance with Clause
52.65 "Pipe Laying".
54.10 CLEARING PIPELINES OF OBSTRUCTION
After testing the pipelines as specified and at a time to be directed by the SO Rep, inspect the interior of
the pipelines to ascertain that the pipes are entirely clear of obstruction and that the invert is smooth.
The outside diameter of the ends of the plug shall not be smaller by 25mm less than the diameter of the
pipe through which it is to be passed and its length shall not be less than its diameter.
The SO Rep shall not apply this test until he is satisfied that the lengths concerned are complete and
ready for operation.
LUP09/S54.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-3/9
54.10 CLEARING PIPELINES OF OBSTRUCTION (CONT'D)
Remove any obstruction in the pipelines and make good any unevenness of the invert.
If, as a result of the removal of any obstruction, the SO Rep considers that any damage may have been
caused to the pipelines, he shall be entitled to order the length to be re-tested at the expense of the
Contractor. Should such re-test prove unsatisfactory, amend the work and carry out such further tests as
required at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
54.11 TESTING GRAVITY SEWERS
(i) General
(a) All gravity sewers of 600 mm or less in diameter shall be tested by filling with water to an
internal pressure of 1.5 metre head of water above the invert of the pipe at the highest end
of the pipeline.
(b) Testing shall be carried out for the whole length of the pipeline between manholes and
before the pipeline is concreted and covered. The Contractor shall bear the cost and
expense for the testing of gravity sewers to comply with the requirements of ENV.
(ii) Testing Procedure
(a) Ensure that the following equipment is available:-
(i) A plug of appropriate size to be fitted at the downstream end of the pipeline.
(ii) A measuring cylinder to measure the actual loss of water.
(iii) A 90 degree elbow bend and vertical pipe of equal diameter to be fitted at the highest
end of the pipeline. For minor sewers, the elbow bend and the vertical pipe shall be of
the same diameter of the sewer. For main sewers, the minimum diameter of the elbow
bend and vertical pipe shall be 225mm although the same diameter as that of the
pipeline is always preferable.
(b) Ensure that the pipeline is properly anchored.
(c) Fit the plug at the downstream end of the pipeline and the elbow bend with the vertical pipe
at the highest end of the pipeline.
(d) Fill the pipeline with water through the vertical pipe up to its brim making sure that there are
no pocket of trapped air.
(e) Ensure that the pipeline is completely filled with water by allowing the water to drain away at
the downstream end and topping up with water again to the brim of the vertical pipe.
LUP09/S54.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-4/9
54.11 TESTING GRAVITY SEWERS (Cont’d)
(ii) Testing Procedure (Cont’d)
(f) Allow the pipeline to stand for a minimum of 2 hours for absorption and topping up as
necessary before carrying out the water test.
(g) Test the pipeline at the required head of 1.5 metres head of water. Top up the vertical pipe
using the measuring cylinder at intervals of 5 minutes and noting the quantity of water
needed to maintain the test head over a period of 30 min.
(h) On completion of the test, remove the plug at the end of the pipeline and observe the water
level at the vertical pipe to ensure that the level drops freely and the water in the pipeline
drains away.
(iii) Acceptance Criteria
(a) The pipeline shall not be accepted until they have withstood the required pressure head of
1.5 metres head of water for 30 minutes without loss of water in excess of 1.5 litres for
100m length of pipe for each 300mm in diameter.
(b) Formula to calculate permissible loss of water for 30 minutes is as follows:
Permissible Loss (ml) =

Diameter of Pipe (mm) X Effective Length 0f Pipeline (m) X 1500ml
300 (mm) 100 (m)
Gravity sewer of 600 mm and above in diameter need not be hydraulically tested. They shall
be inspected by Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) inspection or for man-entry sewers,
manual inspection shall be carried out. The Contractor shall make appropriate arrangement
to install the CCTV and keep proper record of the sewer inspection. The Contractor shall
bear the cost and expense for the CCTV and man-entry inspection in accordance with the
requirements of ENV.
Do not cover the pipes until they have been inspected and passed.
54.12 BUILT-IN PIPES
At all points where pipes are built into concrete walls or floors, take great care that the joint is watertight. If
found to be otherwise, cut away and replace the concrete to make a watertight joint to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
54.13 JUNCTIONS AND CONNECTIONS
The junctions where provided shall be securely stoppered, such temporary stopper being secured with
cement mortar.
54.14 CONCRETE AROUND PIPES
After each length of pipes has been tested and passed, bed haunch and surround the pipes with Grade 30
concrete as shown in Drawings.
At approximately every four pipes or 6m whichever is the lesser interval, form a joint in concrete bed or
surround by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibre board, timber or other
approved material. Leave the shuttering material in to form a permanent joint. Where the concrete bed is
required to be reinforced, stop all reinforcement on either side of the joint.
The whole of the concrete shall be thoroughly set before any work of refilling is commenced.
LUP09/S54.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-5/9
54.15 TUMBLING BAYS AND BACKDROPS
Where required, construct tumbling bays and backdrops in accordance with the details of the approved
drawings.
Use special spigot and socket junctions in the junction between the two lines of pipes. For backdrops and
tumbling bays above 300mm diameter the junction shall be cast iron to approved dimensions and shape.
Lay the tumbling bays or backdrop pipes on a concrete foundation and completely encase in 150mm
Grade 30 concrete surround as shown on Drawings.
Where indicated on Drawings, build tumbling bay pipes in the walls of the manhole by cutting a neat hole
sufficient for building in the pipes and finish flush with the inside of the manhole and neatly splay on the
outside to form a watertight joint.
54.16 BRICK MANHOLES
Where detailed, build brick manholes in positions shown and in accordance with details on Drawings.
Construct the brickwall in accordance with Clauses 52.53 "Bricks" and 52.54 "Brickwork Generally".
Set the reinforced concrete slabs covering the chambers of the manhole and joint in cement mortar as
specified to form watertight joints.
Form channels and benching to the concrete floors of the manholes as detailed in Grade 30 concrete as
specified and render in cement mortar 20mm thick.
Build ends of pipes into the walls of the manholes and finish off in cement mortar. Set manhole covers
and frames in cement mortar and covers left flush with the road surface or the finished ground level.
Flush point internal and external joints of brick manholes in 1:3 cement mortar and finish off to a smooth
surface.
54.17 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
Where indicated, build precast reinforced concrete ring manholes shall be built in the positions shown on
Drawings. Submit details of the supply of this item to the SO Rep for approval.
Set the rings forming the chambers of the manholes on a reinforced concrete foundation comprising a
base of Grade 30 concrete and a built-up section, sufficient to completely build in the ends of the pipes.
Construct the base, benching and pointing of all precast and in-situ concrete manholes in Ordinary
Portland Cement, unless otherwise directed. Form the benching at the soffit level of the out-going sewer
pipe rising by 75mm to the manhole walls. Form curves and junction benchings to a radius in the centre
line of the channel not less than one and a half times the diameter of this pipe.
Set the reinforced concrete slabs covering the chambers and the shafts of the manholes in 1:3 cement
mortar to form watertight joints.
Form channels and benching to the concrete floors of concrete manholes in Ordinary Portland Cement
concrete.
Set manhole covers and frames as specified in Clause 52.75 "Manhole Cover and Frame" in cement
mortar and surrounded with Grade 30 concrete and covers left flush with the road surface or the finished
ground level.
54.18 CLEANING OF SEWERS
Thoroughly clean all sewers to the requirements of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB before
final inspection prior to acceptance.
Throughout the whole duration of the Contract, when required by the SO Rep, provide without charge one
number aluminium ladder, two numbers powerful lamp of at least six cells, two pairs of keys for lifting
manhole covers and one number spirit level, two numbers mirrors all to the approval of the SO Rep.
LUP09/S54.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-6/9
54.19 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL OF SEWERS BY WATER

RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB
Before their acceptance, thoroughly clean the sewers and made ready for inspections by the SO Rep and
by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB's representative. No sewer or part of a sewer may
be put into use until a final inspection has been carried out and the sewers and manholes found to be
satisfactory. Provide and install all the necessary plugs to the manholes before the sewers are put into
use and shall be responsible for their removal when the lines are to be in use all to the requirements and
satisfaction of the SO Rep and Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. The Works shall only be
certified satisfactory when both the SO Rep and the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB have
approved all the sewers and manholes.
54.20 CONNECTION OF HOUSE DRAIN TO SEWER MANHOLE
No final connections may be made from the house drain/s to a sewer manhole until the sewer has been
passed as satisfactory, after a final inspection has been carried out.
54.21 CONNECTION OF SEWERS TO EXISTING MANHOLE
All sewer connection to existing manholes shall be included in the Contract, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
54.22 PIPE JACKING
(a) General
(i) Where specified in the Drawings, sections of the sewer shall be laid by pipe jacking.
(ii) Submit details of plant and equipment, materials and the method of construction to perform
and complete the work for approval by the SO Rep before commencing these operations.
Approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for the
efficacy, reliability, soundness of the method employed in completing the work in a
satisfactory manner.
(iii) The general soil profile along the route of the sewer shall be given in the borelogs, for the
Contractor's information only. The Employer accepts no responsibility for the accuracy,
reliability or completeness of this information. Satisfy himself as to the soil conditions along
the pipe jacking route and if he judges it to be necessary, carry out additional soil
investigations at his own cost.
(iv) In general, the soil shall usually be of an unstable nature and the ground water table shall
usually be high. Maintain stable soil conditions at the jacking face to prevent loss of ground
above the jacking operation and movement of the surrounding earth. The methods of
maintaining face stability and preventing ground movement and subsidence shall be by
means of compressed air or other plenum methods where fluid slurry or earth pressure is
applied-to the tunnel face. Alternatively, stabilise unstable ground ahead of the jacking face
by the injection of suitable chemicals. Methods which require dewatering of the ground and
methods which may lead to significant ground loss shall not be accepted. Submit soil
stabilization method to the SO Rep for approval.
(v) Monitor movement or settlement of structures, utilities and pavement during the jacking
operation and report to the SO Rep. If movement or settlement occurs which, in the opinion
of the SO Rep may cause damage, take immediate action to prevent further movement,
settlement or damage. Repair any damage and restore structures or pavements to the
(vi) Inspect the location and familiarise himself with the conditions under which the work shall be
performed and with all necessary details as to the orderly execution of the work. The
omission of any details shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the
satisfactory installation of the work in its entirety. No monetary or other claims made by the
Contractor on the grounds of want of knowledge shall be entertained by the Employer.
LUP09/S54.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-7/9
54.22 PIPE JACKING (CONT'D)
(b) Materials
(i) The pipes for jacking operation shall be precast reinforced concrete pipes. The pipes shall
be manufactured by a centrifugal or other equivalent process to be approved by the SO
Rep. Design, manufacture and factory testing of the pipes and specials shall be to SS 183
or BS 5911 or AS 1342 or other acceptable standard.
(ii) All pipes shall be manufactured with two sets of grout holes. Each set shall consist of three
grout holes spaced at 120 ºC on centres circumferentially located at the quarter points from
either end of the pipe.
(iii) The precast reinforced concrete pipes shall be sufficiently reinforced with steel to withstand
all stresses induced by handling, jacking, earth and water pressures and all working loads at
the depths at which they are to be used without cracking, spalling or distortion. The pipes
shall be of at least strength Class `H'. A load factor of not larger than 1.5 shall be used in
the calculations to determine the strength of the pipes required. The strength of the pipes
shall be tested by the three edge bearing test. When subjected to the design load in such a
test, the maximum crack width developed on the pipe shall not exceed 0.25mm. Bear the
cost of all such tests.
(iv) Submit full details of his proposals for the pipes, giving detailed drawings showing sizes,
reinforcement and type of joints, calculations, together with the name of the proposed
manufacturer, the place of manufacture, and the manufacturing processes to the SO Rep
for approval. All workmanship and materials used in the manufacture shall be subject to the
approval of the SO Rep who shall from time to time be permitted to inspect materials at
source and the manufacturing processes in the factory.
(v) The pipes shall be sufficiently matured before they are used in the construction of the
Works. Handle the pipes with extreme care to prevent the edges of the pipes from chipping.
Repaired pipes shall not be allowed for use in the Contract. The SO Rep may reject any
pipes he considers not suitable for the Works and these rejected pipes shall be removed
from Site immediately. After factory testing and before despatch, every pipe and special
shall be marked in accordance with the Standard used. In addition, each pipe shall be
marked with a number corresponding with the order of manufacture. Test certificates from
the manufacturers or other relevant authority shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
(vi) Where steel shield is utilized during the jacking operation, bolt this steel shield to or by other
approved means jointed to the first piece of pipe which is being jacked.
(vii) Use a jacking ring. The jacking ring may be either of steel or concrete construction and
shall be used at all times when pipe is being jacked. This jacking ring shall allow the jacking
pressure to be distributed evenly around the wall of the pipe.
(viii) Use a jacking frame during all operations. The jacking frame shall be designed to distribute
the stresses from the jacks evenly to the jacking ring.
(c) Jacking Operations
(i) Is fully responsible for the materials, equipment and facilities required in conjunction with
jacking the reinforced concrete pipe.
(ii) Before starting work, submit to the SO Rep for approval, a detailed schedule of the entire
jacking operation. Approval of such schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to provide a fully satisfactory installation. Include with his submission
evidence that he has successfully completed a jacking installation using procedures similar
to those proposed.
(iii) Where the Contractor proposes to use compressed air, his proposal shall comply with the
requirements of the Specifications for "Working in Compressed Air" and "Work in
Compressed Air".
(iv) Where chemical stabilization of soil is used, pressure inject a chemical grout into the soil
over and ahead of the pipe jacking to stabilise the soil. The chemical grout used shall have
a demonstrated history of success for stabilizing soils similar to that through which the pipe
is to be jacked.
LUP09/S54.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-8/9
(c) Jacking Operations (Cont'd)
(v) Where a mechanical shield is used, provide proof that the particular model of shield has
been used successfully in soils similar to that on Site. The crew for the operation of the
shield shall be specialists, with experience in the use of that particular type of machine.
(vi) After the jacking operation has begun, work continuously (24 hours per day) until the
complete length of jacked pipe is installed.
(vii) Jack the pipes into place true to line and level. The maximum tolerance allowable in the
displacement of the centreline of the laid pipe from the design centreline is 50mm in the
horizontal plane and 25mm in the vertical plane but there shall be no backfall at any point.
Any pipe which is not laid in its correct position shall be removed and relaid or adjusted to
obtain its correct position.
(viii) There shall be provision to prevent the relative movement between pipes at the joints by the
use of steel gaiters or other approved methods during jacking operation. Provide a packing
piece of compressible material at each joint and shall be securely held before the pipes are
lowered into the thrust pit. Submit details of proposals to the SO Rep for approval.
(ix) Furnish and install and remove to the extent required, thrust blocks or whatever provisions
that may be required for backing up the jacks employed in driving the pipe forward. Equip
the jacking pit with steel rails or beams embedded in concrete. Use these rails or beams for
placement and alignment of each pipe during the jacking operation.
(x) Is responsible for the design and construction of the jacking and receiving pits, thrusting
wall, installation of jacking equipment, sheeting, bracing, etc, and for the efficient execution
of the jacking operation. Submit full details of his proposals, including plant, shield machine,
equipment, operating procedures, jacking pit and intermediate jacking stations etc, to the
SO Rep and shall be fully satisfactory to him before construction. However, review of the
plans shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to provide a safe and
satisfactory jacking pit.
(xi) Monitor closely the progress of the jacking operation. Daily site records of thrusting
pressures and the line and level measurements shall be properly maintained and shall be
made available to the SO Rep at all times.
(xii) Ensure that the completed tunnels are watertight. If leakage occurs before completion or
during the Defects Liability Period, carry out any remedial work that may be necessary to
make the Works watertight all at his own expense.
(d) Cement Grouting
(i) Prevent the occurrence of voids outside the pipe and if they occur he shall fill them with
cement grout.
(ii) Immediately following the jacking operation pressure grout the jacked section to fill all voids
existing outside of the pipe. Grouting shall be from the interior of the pipe through grouting
holes as specified.
(iii) Provide systems of standard pipe, fittings, hose, and special grouting outlets embedded in
the pipe walls. Ensure that all parts of the system are maintained free from dirt. Carefully
force grout composed of cement, sand and other approved compound and water under
pressure into the grouting connections at the invert and proceed until grout begins to flow
from upper connections. Make connections to these holes and the operation continue to
completion.
(iv) Apparatus for mixing and placing grout shall be of a type approved by the SO Rep and shall
be capable of mixing effectively and stirring the grout and then forcing it into the grout
connections in a continuous uninterrupted flow.
LUP09/S54.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 54-9/9
(d) Cement Grouting (Cont'd)
(v) After grouting is completed, maintain pressure by means of stop cocks, or other suitable
devices until the grout has set sufficiently. After the grout is set, completely fill grout holes
with dense concrete and finish neatly without evidence of voids or projections.
(vi) For pipes with PVC or HDPE linings, carry out grouting and ensure that the pipeline is
watertight before proceeding with the jointing of the linings of the pipes and the patching of
the lining over the filled grout holes
SECTION 55/...
LUP09/S54.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-1/6
SECTION 55
55.0 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTHWORKS
55.1 DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF EARTHWORKS MATERIALS
The following definitions of earthworks materials shall apply to this Specifications :
(a) `Top soil' shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
(b) Àpproved material' shall comprise those that are acceptable in accordance with the Contract for
use in the Works and those which are capable of being compacted in the manner specified in
Clause 55.9 "Compaction" to form a stable fill.
(c) Ùnsuitable material' shall mean those other than the approved material and shall include :
(i) material from swamps;

(ii) peat, logs, stumps and perishable material;
(iii) material susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
(iv) soil of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 35;
(v) material having an in-situ moisture content greater than the maximum permitted for such
materials in the contract, unless otherwise permitted by the SO Rep.
(d) `Rock' shall mean hard material whose geological nature is to be regarded as such and individual
boulders exceeding 0.20 cu m in size or other masses of hard material which necessitate the use
of blasting or approved pneumatic tools for their removal.
(e) "Special filling material" shall mean "approved material" but shall all pass a 75µm BS sieve. The
fraction passing a 75µm BS sieve shall have the following characteristics :
(i) Liquid limit not exceeding 35.

(ii) Plasticity index not exceeding 12.
(iii) Coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 10.
(iv) The percentage passing 75µm BS sieve shall be less than 20% by weight.
(f) `Cohesive soil' shall include clays with up to 20% of gravel and having a moisture content not less
than the value of the plastic limit minus 4.
(g) `Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils' shall include clays containing more than 20% of
gravel and/or having a moisture content less than the value of plastic limit minus 4, well-graded
sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient exceeding 10.
(h) Ùniformly-graded material' shall include sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or
less, and all silts. Any soil containing 80% or more of material in the particle size range 60 µm - 2
µm shall be regarded as silt for this purpose.
55.2 EARTHWORKS GENERALLY
Carry out all earthworks in such a manner as to prevent erosion or slips, limit working faces to safe slopes
and height, and ensure that all surfaces have at all times sufficient gradients to enable them to shed water
without causing erosion.
At the end of each day, all surfaces shall be left with no area that can retain water. If necessary, provide
and maintain temporary and approved surface or subsurface drainage system to ensure minimum delay in
work progress due to wet weather. Alternatively, adequate means, such as covering all surfaces with
polythene paper, shall be provided and maintained.
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and shall divert and reinstate permanent
drainage system. Submit the proposed alignments and levels of temporary access roads to the SO Rep
for approval prior to their construction. Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over full length.
LUP09/S55.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-2/6
55.3 CUTTINGS INCLUDING SLOPES
Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, neatly round the top edges of cuttings to the
dimensions shown on the Drawing or as directed by the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, slopes to cuttings shall conform with the following :
Table 55.1 Allowable slopes in cutting

Slope
Material
(Horizontal Distance to Vertical Rise)
Two to one to 2:1
Sand
Five to one 5:1
Loose gravel or clay Two to one 2:1
Loam, shale or similar soft rock One to one 1:1
Rock with clay seams Three quarter to one ¾:1
Jointed Laminated or soft rock One half to one ½:1
Massive rock One quarter to one ¼:1
Where the location of unsuitable soil is shown on the Drawings or specified to be removed, no payment
shall be claimed against such removal by the Contractor. Where the SO Rep re-determines the slopes,
the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim whatsoever except where increased or decreased
quantities of excavation become necessary because of re-determined excavation slopes, the difference
between such measurements and the measurements herein given shall be dealt with as a variation to the
Contract.
In all cuttings, whether in earth or rock, undulations in the general plane of the slope shall not be
permitted.
The SO Rep may direct that any overhanging, loose or unstable material, whether outside or behind the
specified slope, be removed. Additional cost so involved shall be paid as a variation to the Contract.
Arrange the excavation such that the working areas are adequately drained throughout the period of
construction.
55.4 FOUNDATION FOR FILLS
Embankment construction shall include the preparation and compaction to the degree as specified under
Clause 55.9 "Compaction" of the areas upon which embankments are to be placed, the placing and
compacting of approved material within areas from which unsuitable material has been removed as
specified hereunder, and the placing and compacting of embankment material in holes, pits, and other
depressions within the foundation area.
Unless otherwise specified, clear the natural ground over which filling is to be placed of all loose boulders,
grass, topsoil, bushes, trees, roots and other vegetation. If the SO Rep considers that any underlying
material is unstable or unsuitable, he may direct it to be removed and replaced with approved material, the
cost of which shall be valued in accordance with the contract provisions and be borne by the Employer.
Remove any overhanging rock ledges or caves within the foundation area before the placing of fill
commences.
Where ground water or extensive seepage are encountered in the foundation area, and no special
drainage arrangements are shown on Drawings, the SO Rep may direct that suitable pipe drains be
installed in the fill area, or that deep open drains be excavated clear of the fill. All these drainage works
shall form part of the Contract and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra claim.
The construction of any section of a fill shall not be commenced until the foundation for that section has
been approved by the SO Rep.
LUP09/S55.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-3/6
55.5 FILLING GENERALLY
Carry out filling in layers compatible with the compaction plants used. End tipping of fill shall be allowed
provided the end tipped material is compacted to the requirements as specified in Clause 55.9
"Compaction".
When the state of the weather is such that, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it would adversely affect the
placing of specially compacted fill, all such work shall be stopped.
Remove and replace all filling material, whether placed and/or compacted or awaiting placing and/or
compaction which, in the opinion of the SO Rep does not comply with the Specifications or has been
damaged by weather or in any other way.
55.6 HILLSIDE FILLS
Where an embankment is to be constructed on a hillside, or where the natural surface falls away at the toe
of the fill at a slope steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal, cut a horizontal bench to support
the toe. The minimum width of the bench shall be equal to one third of the vertical height of the fill
(measured from the toe) provided that the width shall not be more than 3.70m nor less than 600mm.
Material excavated in benching may be used in fills, if it has satisfied the requirement of approved material
under Clause 55.1 "Definition And Classification of Earthworks Materials".
Where embankments are to be constructed on hillsides or on the slopes of existing embankments, or

where embankments are to be constructed in part-widths, cut the existing slope, if it exceeds one (1)
vertical to four (4) horizontal, in the form of horizontal terrace over the full area to be covered by new fill.
As each layer of new embankment is constructed, step the existing slope in successive terraces, each at
least 600mm in width, progressively cut the terraces as the embankment is placed. Recompact materials
thus excavated as part of the new embankment material. No payment shall be made for material removed
in the construction of benches and terraces, which shall be regarded as part of the earthworks.
If, in preparing hillsides, the Contractor removes material outside the limits specified in this Clause in order
to facilitate his operations, no payment shall be made for the removal of this extra material, and he shall
be required to make good at his own expense any scars created by him.
55.7 PLACING FILLS IN EMBANKMENTS
Construct embankments in even horizontal layers over the full width, laid in thickness appropriate to the
compaction plant used and compacted to satisfy the requirement specified in Clause 55.9 "Compaction".
At all times maintain the embankments with a sufficient camber and a surface sufficiently even to enable
surface water to drain readily from them.
If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot be compacted in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall at his own expense either :
(a) make good by removing the material off the embankment either to tip or elsewhere until it is in a
suitable physical condition for re-use, and replacing it with suitable materials; or
(b) make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve its stability; or
(c) cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such that it can be compacted as
described in the Contract.
Rock material shall be broken down to dimensions not exceeding the compacted thickness of the layer in
which it is placed. Rock material shall be well distributed in layers extending the full width of the fill, and
sufficient fine material shall be placed around the larger material as it is deposited to fill the voids and
produce a dense compact fill. Where insufficient fine material is present to fill the voids, additional fine
material shall be obtained from other sources at the Contractor's own expense.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, the top edges of embankments shall be neatly rounded
to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. Such work shall be deemed to
have been included in the Contractor's rate for earthworks.
LUP09/S55.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-4/6
55.8 FILL SLOPES
The slope faces of embankments or other fill areas shall be formed by overfilling, cutting back and
trimming neatly to the desired profile. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, the slopes shall
conform to the following :
Table 55.2 Allowable slopes in cutting

Slope
Material
(Horizontal Distance to Vertical Rise)
Between two to one 2:1
Sand loam, soft clay and loose sand
and five to one 5:1
Ordinary earth Two to one 2:1
Rock One and one quarter to one 1¼ : 1
Rock filling - hand pitched One to one 1:1
Where the SO Rep re-determines a slope, the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim whatsoever except
where increased or decreased quantities of excavation or borrow become necessary because of re-
determined fill slopes. The difference between such measurements and measurements herein given shall
be dealt with as a variation of the Contract.
When completed, the average planes of the slopes of embankments shall conform to those determined by
the SO Rep or as specified in the Drawings.
55.9 COMPACTION
All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition. The thickness of each
layer shall be compatible with the compaction plant used and shall be agreed by the SO Rep.
Table 55.3 may be used as a guide for the Contractor in establishing compaction arrangement. However
site trials shall be carried out to ensure that the density requirement is achieved.
The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for all costs incurred in executing compaction by whichever
method he has adopted and any subsequent alteration as directed.
The various types of compaction plants, and their compacting capabilities, are shown in Table 55.3.
The definitions and requirements associated with the Table are given below :
(a) "Number of passes" shall mean the number of times that each point on the surface of the layer
being compacted has been traversed by the compaction plant (or struck in the case of power
rammers or dropping weight compactors). The effective width of a pneumatic-tyred roller, for this
purpose, is the sum of the widths of the individual wheeltracks together with the sum of the spacing
between the wheeltracks provided that each spacing does not exceed 225mm. When the spacing
exceeds 225mm the effective width shall be taken as the sum of the width of the individual
wheeltracks only.
(b) The force per 100mm width shall mean the total weight on the roll divided by the total roll width.
Where a smooth-wheeled roller has more than one axle the machine shall be assessed on the
basis of the axle giving the highest value of force per 100mm width.
(c) Wheel load shall mean the total weight of the roller divided by number of wheels.
LUP09/S55.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-5/6
55.9 COMPACTION (CONT'D)
(d) Vibratory rollers shall mean self propelled or towed rollers having means of applying mechanical
vibration to one or more rolls.
(i) The requirements for vibratory rollers shall be based on the use of the lowest gear on a self
propelled machine and a towing speed of 1800-2400 m/hour for a towed machine. If higher
gears or speeds are used an increased number of passes shall be provided in proportion to
the increase in speed of travel.
(ii) Vibratory rollers operating without their vibration mechanism in use shall be classified as
smooth-wheeled rollers.
(iii) Vibratory rollers shall only be operated with their vibration mechanism operating at the
frequency of vibration recommended by the manufacturers. All such rollers shall be
equipped with a device automatically indicating the frequency at which the mechanism is
operating.
(e) Vibrating-plate compactors or machines having a base-plate to which is attached a source of

vibration consisting of one or two eccentrically-weighted shafts.
(i) The static pressure under the plate of a vibrating-plate compactor shall be calculated by
dividing the total weight of the machine in working order by the area in contact with
compacted material.
(ii) Vibrating-plate compactors shall be operated at the frequency of vibration recommended by

the manufacturer.
They shall normally be operated at travelling speeds of less than 900m/hour but, if higher
speeds are necessary, the number of passes shall be increased in proportion to the
increase in speed of travel.
(f) Vibro-tampers shall mean machines in which an engine-driven reciprocating mechanism acts on a
Spring system, through which osciliations are set up in a base-plate.
(g) Power rammers shall mean machines which are actuated by explosions in an internal combustion
cylinder, each explosion being controlled manually by the operator.
The depth of compacted layer shall mean the height by which an embankment is raised by each
successive compacted layer.
Where combinations of different types of categories of plant are used, the compaction requirements shall
be as follows :
(a) the depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least depth of layer; and
(b) the number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the greatest number of passes.
However, where the Contractor uses a lighter type of plant to provide some preliminary compaction only to
assist the use of heavier plant, this shall be disregarded in assessing the above requirements.
LUP09/S55.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 55-6/6
Table 55.3 Compaction Requirements
Well-graded granular Uniformly-graded

Cohesive Soil
and dry cohesive soils materials
Type of Max. depth Max. depth Max. depth

compaction Category Min. no. Min. no. Min. no.
of of of
plant of of of
compacted compacted compacted
passes passes passes
layer layer layer
(mm) (mm) (mm)

Force per
Smooth- 100mm width
wheeled 2.1 - 2.6 kN 125 8 125 10 125 10*
roller 2.61 - 5.2 kN 125 6 125 8 125 8*
More than 5.2 kN 150 4 150 8 Unsuitable
Force per
100mm width
Grid-roller 2.6 - 5.2 kN 150 10 Unsuitable 150 10
5.3 - 7.8 kN 150 8 125 12 Unsuitable
More than 7.8 kN 150 4 150 12 Unsuitable
Wheel Load
1 - 1.5 tonnes 125 6 Unsuitable 150 10*
1.5 - 2 tonnes 150 5 Unsuitable Unsuitable
Pneumatic 2 - 2.5 tonnes 175 4 125 12 Unsuitable
tyred roller 2.5 - 4 tonnes 225 4 125 10 Unsuitable
4 - 6 tonnes 300 4 125 10 Unsuitable
More than 12 tonnes 450 4 175 6 Unsuitable
Force per
100mm width
0.25 - 0.45 kN Unsuitable 75 16 150 16
0.46 - 0.70 kN Unsuitable 75 12 150 12
Vibratory 0.71 - 1.25 kN 100 12 125 12 150 6
roller 1.26 - 1.75 kN 125 8 150 8 200 10*
1.76 - 2.3 kN 150 4 150 4 225 12*
2.31 - 2.8 kN 175 4 175 4 250 10*
2.81 - 3.5 kN 200 4 200 4 275 8*
3.51 - 4.2 kN 225 4 225 4 300 8*
4.21 - 4.9 kN 250 4 250 4 300 8*
Static pressure
under base plate
Vibratory 8.6 - 10.3 kN/m2 Unsuitable Unsuitable 75 6

plate 10.3 - 12.1 kN/m2 Unsuitable 75 10 100 6
compactor 12.1 - 13.8 kN/m2 Unsuitable 75 6 150 6
13.8 - 17.2 kN/m2 100 6 125 6 150 4
17.2 - 20.7 kN/m2 150 6 150 5 200 4
More than 20.7 kN/m2 200 6 200 5 250 4
Mass Kilogramme
Vibro- 50 - 65 100 3 100 3 150 3
tamper 65 - 75 125 3 125 3 200 3
More than 75 200 3 150 3 225 3
Mass Kilogramme
Power
rammer 100 150 4 150 6 Unsuitable
More than 500 275 8 275 12 Unsuitable
For items marked with * the rollers shall be towed by track laying tractors.
Self propelled rollers are unsuitable.
SECTION 56/...
LUP09/S55.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
Lup Spec
TS 56-1
SECTION 56
APPENDICES
TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR UPGRADING WORKS
LUP09/S56.DOC(1)
lkk(181208)
DPD
LISTS OF APPENDICES
Appendix
A1 and/or Deed Of Warranty For (Works/Materials To Be Warranted) [Sample]

A1(TC)
A2 Letter of Undertaking From Original Roofing Contractor
A3 Performance Compliance Certificate
A4 Undertaking For Non-Disclosure
LUP09/S56.DOC(2)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1
SPECIMEN
SAMPLE
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR

(Works / Materials to be warranted)*
To: Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
CONTRACT NO.:
WHEREAS:-
1) _____________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Contractor)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract")
(2) _____________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Specialist)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") in the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of (Works / Materials to be
warranted)* (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the
request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause (Clause No.)* of (Standard / Supplementary Specification)# of the Contract the
Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows:-
1. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of (Period of Warranty)* years
(hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall (Eventualities)*.
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
* Details to be referred from Clause (Clause No.) 'Provision of Warranty' of the Supplementary Specifications.
# Delete where not applicable.
LUP09/S56.DOC(3)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1
SPECIMEN
Page 2
2. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the works;
(c) their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d) the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3. It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall
meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed
and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the
Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed
and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and
the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer against them in
respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4. Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within the
Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove
and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration
specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor’s or
Specialist’s breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal, rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall fail to comply
within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage or defects as are
referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the
Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that
such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover damages against the Contractor
and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5. In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer’s notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work
which the Employer’s Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person nominated
by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third party, and the
valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the
methods mentioned below in descending order of priority:
(a) by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or
(b) if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of the
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits
LUP09/S56.DOC(4)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1
SPECIMEN
Page 3
6. The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
7. It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable by the
Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out
of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty.
The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's
Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9. This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Employer.
10. All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall
be determined by the Employer’s Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, by a
person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this Clause
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may
arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this
Warranty.
11. This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12. This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two documents
the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
LUP09/S56.DOC(5)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1
SPECIMEN
Page 4
13. The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14. The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third parties
without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set out hands and seals the ______________ day of
____________ 20 _________.
LUP09/S56.DOC(6)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1(TC)
SPECIMEN (TC)
SAMPLE
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR

(Works / Materials to be warranted)*
To:
CONTRACT NO.:
WHEREAS:-
1) _____________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Contractor)
____________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract")
(2) _____________________________________________________________________________________
(Name and Address of Specialist)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") in the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of (Works / Materials to be
warranted)* (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the
request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause (Clause No.)* of (Standard / Supplementary Specification)# of the Contract the
Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the __________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the “Council”) this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows:-
1. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of (Period of Warranty)* years
(hereinafter called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall (Eventualities)*.
* Details to be referred from Clause (Clause No.) 'Provision of Warranty' of the Supplementary Specifications.
# Delete where not applicable
LUP09/S56.DOC(7)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1(TC)
SPECIMEN (TC)
Page 2
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
2. The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that:
(a) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the
Works;
(b) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the works;
(c) their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d) the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3. It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used shall
meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when completed
and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor and the
Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as completed
and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the Contractor and
the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council against them in
respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4. Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within the
Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to remove
and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period or duration
specified by the Council’s notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor’s or
Specialist’s breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal, rectification and/or making good
work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall fail to comply
within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are
referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the
Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS that
such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Council’s right to recover damages against the Contractor
and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5. In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and the
Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage or
defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council’s notice in writing, then upon
completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the work which
the Council’s Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may determine as
occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such work or such part of
the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending
order of priority:
(a) by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or
(b) if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of the
necessary materials or goods, labour Construction Equipment and equipment (other than ordinary
plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and supervision,
overheads and profits
LUP09/S56.DOC(8)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1(TC)
SPECIMEN (TC)
Page 3
6. The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
7. It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against all
loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury to
person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for the
execution of such works.
8. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by the
Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising out of
rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this Warranty. The
Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Workmen's Compensation
Policy for the execution of such works.
9. This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the rectification
work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under clauses 4 and 5
above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the consent of the
Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works, provided that in the latter
event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist that is occasioned by the
negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above and paid by the Council.
10. All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation) shall
be determined by the Council’s Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in writing by
him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive
against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise
determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
11. This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
LUP09/S56.DOC(9)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A1(TC)
SPECIMEN (TC)
Page 4
12. This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two documents
the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13. The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities arising
hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set out hands and seals the ______________ day of
____________ 20 _________ .
LUP09/S56.DOC(10)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A2
LETTER OF UNDERTAKING FROM

ORIGINAL ROOFING CONTRACTOR
To : 1) Housing & Development Board

2) Town Council
Contract No.
With reference to the Roofing Works required under the above-captioned Contract, we hereby confirm the following :
(a) we are engaged by of

(Name of Main Contractor)
(Address of Main Contractor)

as Specialist Sub-Contractor to carry out new and/or repair/refurbishment works to the existing roofing
system in Blocks of
(Relevant Block Numbers)
the above-captioned Contract; and
(b) the original roofing warranties given by us for the existing roofing system on the abovementioned Blocks
remain and continue to be valid.
(Signature)
Full Name of Signatory :
Designation :
Name and Address of

Original Roofing Contractor :
Date :
cc
LUP09/S56.DOC(11)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A3
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
Contract No. _______________________________
Location of Playground: ______________________
Playground Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 457: 2007 Playground Equipment For Public Use

SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety Inspector have

inspected, and hereby certify that the children playground equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring are in
accordance with SS457: 2007 and SS459: 2001 respectively.
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
LUP09/S56.DOC(12)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A4-1
UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE

SINGAPORE
In consideration of your agreeing at our request, to disclose or make available to us such

information and documentation (“Information”) as may be applicable to the Contract for
______________________________ dated _______________ entered into between yourselves and
us (“Contract”), we _____________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
(name of company)
of ________________________________________________________________________
(address)
hereby agree and undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such Information shall be treated by us
as official and classified at all times and further agree and undertake as follows :
1 We will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any third party (within or
outside Singapore). In the event of obtaining your prior written approval, we will divulge the
Information only after such third party signs an Undertaking with you in the form set out in the
Schedule or in such other manner as you may require. We shall use our best endeavours to prevent
the unauthorised publication or disclosure of the Information.
2 We will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the
Contract (“Personnel”) and who have prior to such disclosure entered into an Undertaking with you in
the form set out in the Schedule or in such other manner as you may require.
3. We will ensure that the Personnel are aware of and will comply with the confidentiality and non-
disclosure obligations contained herein and we will fully indemnify you and keep you fully indemnified
at all times against any losses, costs, expenses or damages that you may sustain or incur as a result
of any breach of confidence by us and/or any of the Personnel.
4 We shall immediately notify you in writing if and when we become aware that a disclosure of the
Information may be required by law.
LUP09/S56.DOC(13)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A4-2
5 We will not use the Information for any purpose other than for effectively carrying out our
6 We shall take all precautions to prevent the loss of or unauthorised access, use, modification or
misuse of the Information by any third party (within or outside Singapore). We shall comply with any
security procedures as may be specified by you and shall not deviate from or make any change in the
security procedures without your prior written consent.
7 We shall immediately notify you in writing if we become aware of any breach of the requirements
of this Undertaking by us, any of our Personnel or any other person.
8 We shall cooperate and comply with any request, direction or guideline that you may from time to
time issue in relation to the protection and management of the Information.
9 We will return to you all Information (whether in the form of documents or otherwise) given to us
by you and any copies thereof or otherwise dispose of the same in such manner as may be directed by
you.
10 The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding the expiry or
termination of the Contract. We understand that we may be prosecuted under the Official Secrets Act
(Cap 213) and/or the Statutory Bodies and Government Companies (Protection of Secrecy) Act (Cap 319)
for any breach of this Undertaking.
Dated __________ 200_ .
SIGNED for and on behalf of
___________________________________________
(name of company)
Signature : ____________________________
Name : ____________________________
Designation: ____________________________
LUP09/S56.DOC(14)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A4-3
THE SCHEDULE
UNDERTAKING FOR NON-DISCLOSURE

SINGAPORE
In consideration of your agreeing at my request, to disclose or make available to me

whether directly or through ______________________________________________ (“Contractor”)
(name of company)
such information and documentation, as may be applicable to the Contract for
_______________________________dated ____________ (“Contract”) expressed to be entered
between you and the Contractor, I _______________________________________ of
(name)
________________________________________________________
(address)
hereby agree and undertake that, save as hereinafter provided, such documents and all the
information that I may acquire (“Information”) at any time during my period of service with the
Contractor shall be treated by me as official and classified at all times and further agree and undertake
as follows :
1 I will not without your prior written consent disclose the Information to any third party (within or
outside Singapore). In the event of obtaining your prior written approval, I will divulge the Information
only after such third party signs an Undertaking with you in the form set out in the Schedule or in such
other manner as you may require. I shall use my best endeavours to prevent the unauthorised
publication or disclosure of the Information.
2 I will divulge the Information only to those personnel who are directly connected with the Contract
(“Personnel”) and who have prior to such disclosure entered into a similar Undertaking with you.
3 I will ensure that the Personnel to whom I divulge any such Information are fully aware that the
Information is confidential to you.
4 I will indemnify you and keep you fully indemnified at all times against any losses, costs,
expenses or damages that you may sustain or incur as a result of any breach of confidence by me
whether during the period of my service with the Contractor or at any time thereafter.
LUP09/S56.DOC(15)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A4-4
5 I shall immediately notify you in writing if and when I become aware that a disclosure of the
Information may be required by law.
6 I will not use the Information for any purpose other than for the purpose of effectively carrying out
the duties assigned to me by you or the Contractor in relation to the Contract.
7 I shall take all precaution to prevent the loss of or unauthorised access, use, modification or
misuse of the Information by any third party (within or outside Singapore). I shall comply with any
security procedures as may be specified by you and shall not deviate from or make any change in the
security procedures without your prior written consent.
8 I shall immediately notify you in writing if I become aware of any breach of the requirements of
this Undertaking either by me or any Personnel.
9 I shall cooperate and comply with any request, direction or guideline that you may from time to
time make in relation to the management of the Information.
10 I shall return all the Information (whether in the form of documents or otherwise) given to me by
you or by the Contractor relating to the Contract and any copies thereof or otherwise dispose of the
same in such manner as may be directed by you.
11 The foregoing obligations shall continue in full force and effect notwithstanding the completion,
expiry or termination of my period of service with the Contractor.
12 I understand that I may be prosecuted under the Official Secrets Act (Cap 213) and/or the Statutory
Bodies and Government Companies (Protection of Secrecy) Act (Cap. 319) for any breach of this
Undertaking.
Dated _________ 200_.
Signature : ____________________________
Name : ____________________________
Designation : ____________________________
LUP09/S56.DOC(16)
lkk(181208)
DPD
APPENDIX A5
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
Contract No. _______________________________
Location of outdoor fitness station: ______________________
Outdoor Fitness Station Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 534: 2007 Outdoor Fitness Equipment For Public Use

SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Fitness Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety

Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the outdoor fitness equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber
Flooring are in accordance with SS534: 2007 and SS459: 2001 respectively.
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
END/...
LUP09/S56.DOC(17)
lkk(181208)
DPD

Lup STD Spec 2009

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lup STD Spec 2009

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

LIFT UPGRADING WORKS

SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS GS 1

SECTION 2 PILING TS 2-1

SECTION 3 RESERVED TS 3-1

SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE TS 4-1

SECTION 5 RESERVED TS 5-1

SECTION 6 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION TS 6-1

SECTION 7 RESERVED TS 7-1

SECTION 8 FIBRE REINFORCED POLYMER (FRP) SYSTEM TS 8-1

SECTION 9 RESERVED TS 9-1

SECTION 10 RESERVED TS 10-1

SECTION 11 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE TS 11-1

SECTION 12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK TS 12-1

SECTION 13 ROOFING TS 13-1

SECTION 14 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF TS 14-1

SECTION 15 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY TS 15-1

SECTION 16 IRONMONGERY TS 16-1

SECTION 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK TS 17-1

SECTION 18 METALWORK TS 18-1

SECTION 19 FLOOR FINISHES TS 19-1

SECTION 20 WALL FINISHES TS 20-1

SECTION 21 RESERVED TS 21-1

SECTION 22 RESERVED TS 22-1

SECTION 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING TS 23-1

SECTION 24 RESERVED TS 24-1

SECTION 25 CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT TS 25-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

SECTION 26 TREE & SHRUB PLANTING AND TURFING TS 26-1

SECTION 27 RESERVED TS 27-1

SECTION 28 RESERVED TS 28-1

SECTION 29 RESERVED TS 29-1

SECTION 30 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING) TS 30-1

SECTION 31 LIFT INSTALLATION/REFURBISHMENT TS 31-1

SECTION 32 GENERAL REPAIR TO BUILDING WORKS TS 32-1

SECTION 33 REMEDIAL WORK TO RAINWATER SEEPAGE THROUGH THE TS 33-1

SECTION 34 RECTIFICATION OF ALIGNMENT OF BUILDING ELEMENTS AND TS 34-1

SECTION 35 SITE LANDSCAPING WORKS TS 35-1

SECTION 36 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER AND TS 36-1

SECTION 37 SANITARY INSTALLATION TS 37-1

SECTION 38 WATER INSTALLATION TS 38-1

SECTION 39 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION TS 39-1

SECTION 40 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION TS 40-1

SECTION 41 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION) TS 41-1

SECTION 42 RESERVED TS 42-1

SECTION 43 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION TS 43-1/11

SECTION 45 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION TS 45-1

SECTION 46 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND TS 46-1

SECTION 47 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS TS 47-1

SECTION 48 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING TS 48-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)

SECTION 49 LIGHTNING PROTECTION TS 49-1

SECTION 50 MATV INSTALLATIONS TS 50-1

SECTION 51 SETTING OUT, EXCAVATION AND DRAINLAYING TS 51-1

SECTION 52 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION IN TS 52-1

SECTION 53 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR ROADS AND DRAINS TS 53-1

SECTION 54 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR SEWERS TS 54-1

SECTION 55 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTHWORKS TS 55-1

SECTION 56 APPENDICES TS 56-1

1.3 Site Management

1.4 Services, Utilities & Temporary Facilities